Professional Documents
Culture Documents
NSCP 2010 PDF
NSCP 2010 PDF
NSCP C101·10
nNATIONA
j TRUCTURAL
CODE OF THE
PHILIPPINES
I VOLUME I
I, BUILDINGS, TOWERS AND
! OTHER VERTICAL STRUCTURES
I
SIXTH EDITION
I
NATIONAL
S~rRUCTURAL
CODE OF THE
PHILIPPINES
2010
i
! VOLUME I
II BUILDINGS, TOWERS AND
OTHER VERTICAL STRUCTURES
t
SIXTH EDITION
I
I
Copyright @ 20 I0, The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
All rights reserved. Thi s publicat ion or any part thereof must no! be reproduced in any fom1 wilhoullhe written pcmlission
of Ihe Associat ion Slructu ral Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP).
PUBLISHER
The Association of Structural Engineers of the Phili ppines, Inc . (ASEP) is a professiona l Association found ed in August
1961 to represent the structural engineering communi ty nationwide. This document is published in keeping wilh the
association's objectives;
Maintenance of high ethi cal and profess ional standards in the practice of structuraJ engineering;
Advancement of structural engineering knowledge;
Promot ion of good public and private clientele relationship; and
Fellowship among structural engineers, and professional relations wit h other allied technical and scienlific
organi zat ions.
National Structural Code of the Philipp ines 6" Edit ion Votume 1
FOREWORD
For the protection of public life and propeny, the design of structures and the preparation of
structural plans for their construction have to be controlled and regulated. For almos t four decades now,
this control has been exercised in this countly by the National Structural Code of the Philippines with the
initial publication by the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP) of the National
Structural Code for Buildings. The c urrent publication of the 6'" Edition of NSCP CIOI - 10 for buildings,
towers and other vertical structures is the affinnation of the mandate of the ASEP to continuously update
the National Structural Code of the Philippines with the latest technological developments. While
attaining a legal status in its use as a referral code of the National Building Code, NSCP CIOI-1O is a
publication of high technical value in matters of structural concerns.
The NSCP CIOI-IO is not only complete ly new in its technical substance but also in its format. It
has been a product of a sustained effon of ASEP spanning nine years and the fruition of this endeavor has
finally come to reality during my incumbency. It is therefore with a deep feeling of gratitude and pride
that I commend the members of the ASEP Board, the Codes and Standards Committee and the Publicity
and Publications Committee for their accomplishments.
May 2010.
AD~S'F.ASEP
Presiderll
Association of Structural Engineers of the
Philippines. 2009-2010
ASEP recognizes the need for an up-to-date structural code addressing the design and instalbtion of building
stmclUral systems through requirements emphasizing performance. The new National Stl1Jctural Code of the
Philippines (NSCP) is designed 10 meet these needs through various model codes/regulations, generally from the
United S((I(CS, to safeguard the public health and safety nationwide.
This updated StI1lc(ural Code establishes minimum requirements for building structural systems using prescriptive
and pcrforrnance-bascd provisiolls. It is founded 011 broad-based principles [hat make possible the usc of new
materials (ind new building designs. Also, this code rencets the latest seismic design practice ror ea rthq uake rcsis!allt
structures.
In ilS drive 10 upgrade and updale Ihe NSCP, Ihe ASEP Codes and Siandards Commillee inilially wanled 10 adopi
the larest editions of American code counterparts. However, for cases where available local data is limited to
suppon the upgrade, then some provisions and procedures of the NSCP 5 th edition were retained.
This NSCP 6th edi tion is based on the follow ing international codes and references:
a. Uniform Building Code UBC·1997 (adopled for Earlhquake Loads)
c. American Institute for Steel Construction AISC·05 with Supplementary Seismic Provisions
School buildings of more than one storey, hospitals and designated evacuation ce nters are
added under the essential facilities category.
a.2 Section 104 - Design Requirements
Deflection of any structural member under the serviceabili ty requ iremen t is deleted. For
concrete and Sir:l,'.1 materials see Chapter 4 and 5 respecti vely; new requiremenls are
added 10 the design review section.
a.3 Section 105 - Post ing and InslrUme nlati on
The load factor val ues on wind 100lds (Ire adjll~ted together with the inclusion of rOlin
loads.
b.2 Section 205 - Live Loads
Additional loads arc in corporated in the table for minimulll uniform and concentrated
loads.
b.3 Sec ti on 207 - Wind Load s
Wind load provisio ns, which were previously based on ASCE7-9S, are updated by lhe
introduct ion of the 'Wind Directionality Facto r, KJ , based on ASCE7-0S. The ANSI
ErAITIA-222·G is also referenced for wind loads on antennas.
Equations [or the gust effect facLOrs for both rigid and flexible structures are introduced.
These include the gust effect factor for antennas, tran smission and latticed towers,
poles/posts, masts and transmission Jines based on ASCE Manual of Practice NO.74
(Guide lines for Electrical Transmission Line Stru ctural Loading).
New rormu las are also introd uced for the natural freq uency and damping rat io.
h.4 Sec ti on 208 - Earthquake Loads
Basi ca lly. Lhere are no major changes on the earthquake provisions due 10 the 110n-
availabiJi'lY of Phivolcs-issued spectral acceleration maps for all areas in the Philippines.
However, ASCE/SEI7-05 is recognized as an alternativ e procedure in the determination
of the earthquake loads.
b.S Section 210 and Section 2i 1- Environmemal Loads
c.1 Provisions ptrtaining to the conduct and interpretation of found<Hion invcstigmions for
cases invol ving liquefillblc, expa nsive or questionable soils are adopted ;
c.2 The secti on on root ings is amended to in corporate provisions for differcntial selli c meni ,
design loads and vibratory loads;
c.3 The section on pile foundations is amendcd to incorporate new provisions on splicing of
concrete piles; and
d. Chapte r 4: Structural Concretc. The revi sions made in th is upda ted code arc as follows:
d.3 Section 404 - Durability Requirement: Exposure categories and classes, requirements or
concrete by exposure class are adopted to replace the many tables of durability
requirements in Section 404, making it easief to clearly specify the intended application;
<1.4 Section 405 - Concrete Quality, Mixing, and Placing: The use of three JOO 111m x 200
111m cylinders is adopted as equivalent to the use of two 150 I11Ill x 300 mm cylinders for
determining concrete cornpressive strength. Due to concern that material properties may
change with time, a 12-month limit is set on historical data used (0 qualify mixture
proportions and flexural test performance criteria arc added to qualify the use of steel
fiber - reinforced concrete as a replacement for minimum shear reinforcement;
d.5 Section 407 - Details of Reinforcement: To avoid the misconception that there is no
minus tolerance on cover values given in the code, "minimum cover" is replaced with
"specified cover" throughout Section 407; Class B lap splices are now required for
structural integrity reinforcement; continuous top and bottom structural integrity
reinforcement are required to pass through the column core; and requirements for
transverse reinforcement confining structural integrity reinforcement in perimeter beams
are clarified;
d.6 Section 408 - Analysis and Design - General Considerations: Provisions are modified \0
allow redistribution of positive moments; and a simple modeling procedure for
evaluation of lateral displacements is added;
d.7 Section 409 ~ Strength and Serviceability Requirements: Strength reduction factors for
compression-controlled sections (other structural members) is reduced from 0.70 to 0.65,
and shear and torsion for shear walls and frames in Seismic Zone 4 is reduced from 0.85
to 0.75, bearing on concrete (except for post-tensioning anchorage zones) is reduced
from 0.70 to 0.65. Strength reduction factors for strut-and-tie models, Ilexural sections in
prctensioncd members, afC also added;
d.8 Section 4JO - Flexure and Axial Loads: The section on slenderness effects is reorganized
to recognize computer analysis techniques as the primary method of evaluating second-
order effects;
d.9 Section 411 - Shear and Torsion: Code requirements are added to permit the lise of
headed stud assemblies as shear reinforcement for slabs and footings. The nominal shear
strength is permitted to be larger for headed stud assemblies than for other forms of slab
and footing shear reinforcement; more stringent limits arc placed on the depths of
beams that are exempted from the requiremellt for minimulll shear reinforcement; a new
limit 011 the depth of ho!low core units for which minimum shear reinforcement could be
waived is established; steel fiber-reinforced concrete· is added as an alternative to
minimulll shear reinforcement; and the upper limit on shear friction strength is
significantly increased for monolithically placed concrete and COllcrete placed against
intentionally roughened concrete;
th
Nation8i Structural Code of the Philippines G Edition Volume 1
cl.lO Section 412 - Development and Splices of Reinforcement: Provisions are added for the
development length of headed deformed bars; splice length when splicing bars with
different sizes is addressed; and a coating factor of 1.0 for galvanized reinforcement is
added;
d.II Section 4 J 3 - Two-Way Slab Systems: Dimension limits are added for the use of shear
caps; and alternative corner reinforcement arrangement is added for two-way slabs
supPol1ed [).Y edge beams or walls;
d.12 Section 414 ..- Walls: Design provisions for slender wall panels are modified to be more
consistent with the methods used in design practice;
d.13 Section 418 - Prestressed Concrete: The allowable concrete compression stress
immediately after prestress transfer is increased; and requirements for structural integrity
steel in two-way unbonded post-tensioned slab systems are modified;
d.14 Section 4.20 - Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures: Load factors for determining
the required test load are modified to reflect typical modern load combinations;
d.IS Section 421 - Earthquake-Resistant Structures: This section prescnts thc requiremcnts for
Seismic Resistant Design from ASCEISEI 7-05, but instead of using the Scismic Design
Categories of ASCEfSEI 7-05, the equivalent Seismic Zones as per UBC 1997 are
specified. Also, new design requirements are added for slIch seismic zones; ncw
detailing option is added for diagonally reinforced coupling beams; design yield strength
for confincment reinforcement is raised to 690 MPa to help reduce congestion; and
boundary clement confinement requirements is relaxed;
d.16 Section 423 - Anchoring to Concrete: Use of reinforcement In the vicinity of anchors and
ductility requirements for anchors in seismic zones are clarified.
d.17 Section 425 - Altcrnative Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Flexural
and Compression Mcmbcrs: Revisions in Appendix B of ACI 3J8-08M is adopted;
d.18 Section 426 - Alternative Load and Strength Reduction Factors: Revisions in Appendix
C of ACI 318-08M is adopted, and
d.19 Section 427 - Strut-and-tie Modcls: Appendix A of ACI 3 I 8-08M is adopted in ils
entirety.
e. Chapter 5: Structural Steel. The revisions made in this updated code arc as follows:
c. J Adopted is an integrated treatment of the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) and the Load
and Rcsistance Factor Design (L,RFD) such that the earlier Specification that treated only
the ASD method is retained;
c.2 In lieu of the previolls mcthod of analysis, a new method (Direct Analysis Method) is
adoptcd; and
eJ The cold formed steel design for building systems and structural members are included.
Thc chapler on slcel design from NSCP 200 I which covered Allowable Working Stress Design (ASD) is
fully updated to address usage, advances in the statc of knowledge, and changes in design practice.
f. Chapter 6: Wood
1"1 The provisions in this chapter arc refined to iocorporate local practices and corrections in
[he previous vcrsion of lhe code (NSCP 2(01). Referrals arc made to the NSCP 2010
f.2 Tables from the previous version of NSCP 2001 includiog the Table containing specie
design information are amended to incorporate the latest updated information/ list of
wood species as provided by the Forest Products Research and Development Institute
(FPRDI);
1'.3 A provision that limit the use of wood shear walls and diaphragms is added; and
fA A section for Machine Graded Lumber (MGL) is included.
g. Chapter 7: Masonry
g.1 The provisions in this chapter are refined to include local practices and corrections from
the previous versioo of the code (NSCP 2001); referrals are made to the NSCP 2010 Vol.
III on Housing for relevant provisions concerning single-family dwellings / low-cost
housing;
This publication of the 6th Edition is a collective effort of the ASEP Board of Directors from 2007 to 2010, from
ASEP's past presideots Christopher P. T. Tamayo (2007-2008) and Wilfreda S. Lopez (2008-2009) and the ASEP
Codes and Standards Committee whose cooperation made this publication.
In addition, the ASEP Codes and Standards Committee is indebted to Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (Phivolcs) and to DiL Renato V. Solidum, Ph. D. for his unselfish contribution especially on Chapters I
and 2 of this codc.
Likewise, our thanks to all ASEP mcmbers and other users of the NSCP who have suggested improvements,
identified errors and recommended items for inclusion and omissions. Their suggestions have been carefully
considered.
ASr.~P also acknowledges the contribution of the industry partners, companies and individuals, who continue to
suppon ASEP's numerous undertakings.
3. Disclaimer
The reader is cautioned that professional judgment must be exercised when data or recommendations afe applied.
The information presented has been prepared in accordance with recognized engineering principles anel is for
genera! information only. This information should not be used or relied upon for any specific application without
competent profcssioll,li examination and verification of its accuracy, suitability and applicability by a registered
engineer. Anyone .making usc of this information assumes all liabilities arising from sllch usc.
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
ADAM C ABINALES, m:"';:~ '·.ASf.I' WILFREDO S. LOPEZ, MCM . .. .AS.:I'
AS£!' Presidenl, 2009-20/0 ASEt' Presidl!llf, 2008-2009
ANTHONY VLADIMIJ{ C. PIMENTEL, "",,"' CHRISTOPHER 1'. T. TAMA YO, ,.• "."
ASEP lIice-Presidenl, 2009-2010 (/Ild ASr:;P Pr('sit/{!III, 2007·2008
M(I"ogill[: Director, Cod(!.\" (111(/ Standard.l· Commillcc
Acll';.\'(!r
1h
National Structural Code of th e PhilipPines 6 Edition Volum e 1
ASSOCIA TION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE
PHILIPPINES
COMMITTEE ON CODES AND STANDARDS (2007-2010)
' 1 wish to convey my deepest appreciation and Ihanks for Ihe invaluable service rendered by the
various volunteer chairpersons and members of Ihe commiltees in making Ihis major NSCP 2010 6'"
Edilion a reality.
The time, money and personal sacrifices rendered by the various Commillee Chairpersons are
sincerely and deeply appreciated. Withou t these unselfish contributi ons, this monumental task would not
have been at all possible.
My sincerest thanks are also offered to our sponsors and benefaclors who have responded 10 our
call by supporting the NSCP Ihrough their advertise ments which are very valuable in reducing the cost of
prinling 10 make the NSCP more afford able and mOre widespread in di stribution .
As we launch the NSCP 20 10 6'" Edition, we stay committed towards disseminating the
important fealures and new revisions to the Code by conducting regional and city seminars as a service to
Ihe civil engineering profession and also to help Ihe slructural engineering profession keep abreasl with
the state of praclice and state of Ihe art in slrucluml engineering.
As we have gone to this initial launch, we encourage the end-users 10 give us their inva luable
comments towards making the NSCP a living code and more receptive 10 Ihe needs of Filipino engineers.
Special thanks also go to the ASEP Presidenl and Ihe Board of Directors and the ASEP
Secretariat for the valuable support and assistance given in the preparation o f the revised NSCP 2010 6'h
Edilion.
OFFICERS:
DIRECTORS:
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS:
111
National Structural Code of the Pt1i1ippines 6 Edition Vall!me 1
ASSOCIATION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE
PHILIPPINES
OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS (2008-2009)
OFFICERS:
DIRECTORS:
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS:
O!FFICERS:
DIRECTORS:
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS:
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
Department of Public Works and Highways
Chapter 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SIXTH EDITION
Table of Contents
lh
National Stru ctural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
1·2 CHAPTER 1 - General Requiremenls
109.4 Hazards. . 19
109.5 Grading Permit Requi rements ........... ........ .. .... ............................................................................ ............. ...... ............. 19
109.6 Grading I nspection ................................................................................... ................. ... .............. .......... .. .... ............. . . 20
109.7 Complelion of Work ...... ........ ........................................................................................................................ .... ........ 2 1
101.3 Scope
T he provisions of this code shall appl y (() the
construc tion, <l ll crati on. movi ng~ demoli tion. repa ir,
main tenance and use of bui ldi ngs. towers and other
vertical structures within this jurisdiction.
J 04.2. 1 Gene r a l
Stru ctural systems and me mbe rs thereof shall bc designed
to have adequ a tc stiffness to limit deflect ions, lateral
dri ft s, vibrati on, or any other deformations (bm adversely
affect the inte nded usc and performa nce of' buildin gs
lowers and ot her vert ical struct ures . The design shall a lso
cons ider durahil ity, resistance to exposure to weather or
aggressive env ironment . crac k contro l, and other
cond i tions Ih<.11 affect the int ended usc and perform ance of
buildings, towers il nd other vertical struct ures.
104.3 Analysis
Any sys tem or me thod of construction to be used ..shall be
based o n a rational analysis in accordance with well
established principles o f mechanics that take into account
equilibrium, general stability, geometric comp<Hib il ilY alld
both short-tenn and long-term matcria l properties.
Me mbe rs that te nd to accumul ate resi dua! deformati ons
under repeated se rvice loads shall have includetl in their
ana lys is the added ecce ntri ci ties expecte d lO occu r du ring
their service lire.. Such analysis shall result in a system
Ih.1t prov ides it co mple le load path capable of Iran sferrin g
;111 loads and forces from their point of origin to the load-
resisti ng clements. The an alysis sh all incl ude., bLlI not be
l imi te d to, the provis io ns of Sections 104 .:'1. 1 through
104.3.3.
tll
Natlollfll Str uc tural Code of U'le Plli1ipplnes 6 Edition Volume 1
1·8 CHAPTEIi 1 -- General Requirements
105.2.1 General
Unless waived by the building official, every building in
Seismic Zone 4 over 50 m in height shall be provided
with not less than three approved recording
accelcrographs. The acceJerographs shall be
interconnected for common start and common timing.
105.2.2 Location
The instruments shall be located in the basement,
midpOliion, and near the top of the building. Each
instrument shall be located so that access is maintained at
all times and is unobstructed by room contents. A sign
stating "MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS
INSTRUMENT' shall be posted in a conspicuous
location.
105.2.3 Maintenance
Maintenance and service of the instruments shall be
provided by the owner of the building, subject to thc
monitoring of the building official. Data produced by the
instrumcnts shaH be made availablc to the building
official or the Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (Phi voles) on request.
Copies of tlcsign c'1Jculations, repon s. plans. 3. Design strengths of underlying sailor f"ck. :lC soil
specifications and inspection program for all or rock profile. when ava ilable, shall be !TOV' d.
conSllllctions sh;'11i bear the signtllurc and seal of the
engi neer-of-record. 4. Live loads ,lHd other loads lIsed in des il~ll aJ : l:"'!J" ly
indicated in the Ooor plans,
106.2 Specifications 5. Seismic design basis induding the tow! b;·, ',,: shear
The specifications shall contain infonnatiol1 cavcling the coeffi cicnt ; a description of the laterH! ~ ;Id -r i:·! :ng
material and constructi on requirements. The material s and sys tem ; and the fundamenta l natur<:;i " '1<" .; .• he
cons truction requirements shall confonn to the design in each direction under considc!... ,.. 11
specifications referred to in Chapters 3 to 7 of thi s code.
6. Provisions for dimensio nal changes ,,('<;;' 11; f !'rom
creep, shrinkage. hea ve and tem perature.
106.3 Design Drawings
7. Camber of t!usses, beams and girders , ,1' "gll" : .
106.3.1 General 8. Explanation or definition of ;--;Yl !m -
The design drawings shall be drawn to scale on durable abbreviations lIscd in the drawings.
paper or cloth lIsing permanent ink and shall be of
su ffi cient clarity 10 ind icate the location, n<uurc and exte nt 9. Engineer's professional license mn ,ll.;, ·
of the work proposed. TIle drawings shall show a expi ration date of the cu rrell! Profession:d Rc' -I'
co mpl ete design with sizes, secti ons, rel at ive locatio ns Co mmission reg istration,
and connecti on detaits of the various members. Floor
levels, column cenlers and offsets shall be dimens ioned. 106.3.2.2 Stru ctural Concrete
Where avai lable and feasible, nfchive copie.~ shall be I. Specified compressive st rength if'c) o [ ! W
maintained in durable mediu lll such as compact disc (CD) statcd ages or stages of construction 'n;- ' . H;
and digilal versalile disc (DV D). part of st ructure is designed, The 28 ,; -,
strength (J'..) shall be the basi s of desir" ,': 1 SC/" . (
106.3.2 Required Ini~r;~~tio n .
2. Anchorage embedme nt lengt hs or CI ' . l r pC' I
The design drawings s hall cont ain, but shall nOl be limited
steel reinforcement and locati on and L.·nglh
to the general information listcd in SCClion 106.3.2_1 and
splices_
material specific infonnatiol) lis ted in Sections 106.3.2.2
and 1063.2.3. as applicab le. 1. Type and location of welded splices i!n'!
cOllncctions of reinforce ment.
4. Magnitude and location of prcstrcs!-ol iig .(s
includi ng prestressed cable layout.
5. Minimum concre te compressive st reng: > if'.- )
of posHension ing,
6. Strcssing seque nce for post -tensioned I(!: ,' . . ii .' ,
7. Dctails lind location of all cOFll racli { , ,.:
joints specifi rc! for plain concrete in ::;(:;. <
8. Statemcnt if conc rcte slab is designi.·d , .: .n.
diapllragm. <IS specified in Sccrioll ·;2 1.9
421.9.4.
~-------
.J
_ __h _ _ __ • _ _ _ _ • _ _ • _ _ _• _ __ _ __
, ........ ~ .."
lh
NC1tlonnl Stru ctuwl Code of the Philippines G Edition Volume 1
1· 10 CHAP TE Ii 1 -GeneralliequiremenlS
Exception:
The building official may waive the requirement for the
employment of a structural inspector if the construction is
of a minor nature.
107.2 Definitions
The follo'wing tenns are defined for use in this section:
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
1·12 CHAPTER 1 -General Requiremenls
or waive the responsibilily for the structural inspections I. 'Concrete jor,foundations of resillelllial !JUi/dings
required by Section 107. I or other sections of this code. accommodating 10 or ~fewer persons, or - b!li1d~ngs
fal1i~i l""'er Category V of Table 10}·1, provided
107.3 Structural Inspector the buitding officwl finds tllat a ' structural IIaZ{lrd
does not exist.
107.3.1 Qualifications
2. For foundation concrete, otlier than cast-ill-place
The sU'uctural inspector shall be a registered civil drilled piles or caissons. where the structural desigll
engineer who shall demonstrate competence for is based on alit, 1Iot greater tha1l 17 MPa.
inspection of the particular type of construction or
operation requiring structural inspection. 3. Non-structural slabs on grade, lnclllding prestressed
slabs on grade when effective prestress in concrete is
107.3.2 Duties and Responsibilities less rhan 10 MPa.
The structural inspector shall observe the work assigned 4. Site work concrele fully supported on earth and
for conformance (0 the approved design drawings and concrete where no special hazard exists.
specifications. Any discrepancy observed shall be brought
to the immediate attention of the constructor for 107.5.2 Bolts Installed in Concrete
correction, then, if uncorrected, to the owner andlor to the Prior (0 and during the placement of concrete around bolts
building official. when stress increases permitted by Section 423 are
utilized.
The structural inspector shall verify th at the as·built
drawings (see Section 106.5) pertaining to the work
assigned reflect (he condition as constructed, 107.5.3 Special Moment-Resisting Co ncrete Frame
For special moment-resisting concrete frame design
The structural inspector shall also submit a final report seismic load in structures withill Seismic Zone 4, the.
duly signed and sealed stating whether the work requiring slructurru inspector shall provide reports to the engineer-
stru ctu ral inspection was, to the best of the inspector's of-record and shall provide continuous inspection of th e.
knowledge, in confonllance to the approved plans and placement of the reinforcement and concrete.
specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions
of thi s code. 107.5.4 Reinforcing Steel and Prestressing Steel
Tendons
107.4 Inspection Program
107.5.4.1 During a ll stresSing and gro uting of tendons
The structuraJ inspector shall prepare an appropriate
in prestressed concrete.
testi ng and inspection program that shall be submitted to
the building official. He shall designate lhe ponions of
107.5.4.2 During )llacing of I'einfol'ci ng steel and
the work that req uires structural inspections.
prestressing tendons for all concrete required to have
structural inspection by Section 107.5.1.
When structural observation is required by Section 107 .9.
the inspection program shan describe the stages of Exception:
construction at which structural observatio n is to occur,
The st11lctural inspector need not be presel!! continuously
during placing of reillforcing steel and prestressing
The inspection program shan include samples of
tendons, provided the structural inspector has inspecfed
inspection reports and provide time limits for submi ssio n
for confonnance to the approved plalls prior to flu:
of reports.
closing offonns or the delivery of concrete 10 the jobsit l'.
107.5 Types of Work for Inspection
Except as provided in Section !o7.1. the types of work
listed below shall be inspected by a structural inspeclor.
107.5.1 COllcrcte
During the laking of test specimens and placing of
concrete. See Section 107.5.12 for shoterete.
£:.ccepliol.'s: · .. '.
107.5.5 Structural Welding of bolts to determine that all layers of connected materials
,
have been drawn together and that the selected procedure
107.5.5.1 General is properly used to tighten all bolts.
During the we lding of any member or connecti on th at is
designed to resist loads an<\forces required by this code. 107.5.7 Structural Masonry
b) Floor and roof deck welding. 107.5.7.2 For fully grouted open-end hollow-unit
c) Welded studs when used for structural masonry during preparation and taking of any
diaphragm or composite systems. required prisms or test specimens, at the start of
laying units, after the placement of reinforcing steel,
d) Welded sheet steel for cold-fanned steel grout space prior to each grouting operation, and
framing members such as studs alld joists. during all grouting operations.
e) Welding of stairs and railing systems. Exceplion:
107.5.5.2 Special Moment-Resisting Steel Frames S,ructural inspection as required ill Sec/iolls 107.5.7. J
and 107.5.7.2 need not be provided when design stresses
During the non ~destru clive testing (NDT) of welds
have been adjusted as specified in Chapter 7 to permit
specified in Section 107 .8 of this code, the use of certi fied
noncontinUous inspection.
welders shall be required for welding structural sleel
connections for this type of frame. Crirical joint
107.5.8 Reinforced GYPsulIl Concrete
connections shall be subjected to non-destructive testing
usi ng certified NDT technicians. When cast-in-place Class B gypsu m concrete is being
mixed and placed.
107.5.5.3 Welding of Reinforcing Steel
J07.5.9Insulating Concrete Fill
During the non -destruct ive testing of welds.
During the application of insulaling concrete fill when
107.5.6 High-Strength Bolts used as part of a structural system.
The inspection of hi gh-strength A325 and A490 bolts Exception:
shall be in accordance with approved internationally
]fIe slmctural inspections may be limited. to an illitja~
recognized stanqards and the requirements of this section.
inspection to check the deck sUrface and placement of
While the work is in progress, the stnJclUral inspector
reinforcing Sleet. 11le slructural inspector shall monitor
shall determine that the requiremenls for bolts. nuts,
rhe preparation of compression test specimens during this
washers and paint: bo iled parts; and in:,t allali on and
initial inspection.
lightening in such standards arc mel. Suc h inspections
may be perfonncd on a periodic basis as defined in
Section 107.2.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
1· 14 CHAPTER 1 - General Requirements
107.5.10 Spray· Applied Fire-Resisti ve M a terials 2. Verification of the fab ri cator's qUal it/ ~ontrol
Du ring the application of spray-applied fire-resistive capabi lities, plant and person nel as outl illed !Jl the
materials .. fab rication procedura l manual ~ lla ll b ~ ; ~)' an
approved inspection or quali ty control dgcllt.y .
107.5. 11 Piling, Drilled Piers and Caissons 3. Peri odic plant inspections shall be conducled by an
During driving and load testing of piles and construction approved inspection or quality con trol agency [0
of cast-in·place dri lled piles or caissons. See Sections monitor the effectiveness of the quality co ntrol
107.5. 1 and 107.5.4 for concrete and rei nforcing steel program.
inspection.
107.7 Prefabrica ted Cons tructi on
107.5.12 Shotcrete
During the (aJdng of lest specimens and placing of all 107.7.1 General
sholcrelc.
107.7.1.1 Purpose
Exception:
The purpose of this section is to regulate materials and
Shotcrete work f ully supponed all earth, millor repairs establish meth ods of safe construction where any
and when, in the opinion of the building official, 110 struc ture or portion the reof is wholl y or panial ly
special hazard exists. prefabricated.
done on the premises of a fab ricator approved by the durabili ty and weather resis tance.
structural engineer to perform such work without
structural inspection. The approved fabrica tor shall 107.7.4 Connec ti ons
submit a certi (icate of compliance Lhat the work was Every device used to connect prefabricated as!\(,-II'b! i('~~
performed in accordance with the approved plans and sllall be designed as required by this code and : j , _; : j>c
specifications to the building official and to lhe engineer capable of developing the strength of the largest ,;" ;l1ber
or architect of record. The approved fabricator's connected, except in the case of members fenning part of
qualifications shal! be contingent on compliance with the a sll1.lcwral frame designed as specified in ampler 2.
following : Connections shall be capable of withstanding uplifl forces
as specified in Chapter 2.
I. The fabricator has developed and submiltcd (l
detai led fabrication procedur:ll manual rcnect ing key
q uality cont rol procedures Iha t wi ll provi de a basis 107.7.5 Pipes a nd Co nduits
fo r inspect io n con tro l of work mansh ip and the In structural design. due allowance shall be mack fo r any
rabricator plan t. mate rial to be re moved or d isplaced for tile inxla lia lion of
pi pes, co nduits or ot her equipment.
prefabricariol1 If the approved agency cerlz(ies to the 107.8.2.2 Partial penetration groove welds when used in
consfruction andfumishes evidence (~f compliance. column splices shall be tested either by ultrasonic testing
or radiography when rcquired by the plans and
107.8 Non·Destructive Testing specifications. For partial penetration groove welds when
used in column splices, with an effective throat less than
107.8.1 General 20 mm thick, nondestl1lctive testing is not required; for
this welding, continuous structural inspection is required.
In Seismic Zone 4, welded, fully-restrained connections
between the primary members of special moment-
resisting frames shall be tested by nondestructive methods 107.8.2.3 Base metal thicker than 40 mm, when subjected
perfonned by certified NDT technicians for compliance to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shalt be
with approved standards and job specifications. This ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind
testing shat! be a pan of the structural inspection such welds after joint completion.
requirements of Section 107.5. A program for this testing
shall be established by the person responsible for Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected
stI1lctural design and as shown 011 plans and on the basis of the defect rating jn accordance with the
specifications. (larger reflector) criteria of approved national standards.
1h
National Structural Code of the Pllilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
1-16 CHAPTER 1 _.. General Requirements
107.9.1 General
Stmctural observation shall be provided in Seismic Zone
4 when one of the foll owing conditions exists: 10S.1 General
Buildings in existence at the time of the adoption of this
I. The struct ure is defi ned in Table 103- 1 as Occupancy co~e Illay have their existing usc or occupancy continued ,
Category I. II or Ill; if such use or occupancy was legal at the time of the
2. The structure is in Seis mic Zone 4, No as sel forth in adoption of this code, provide(1 such cOlllin ued use is not
Table 208A is greater th an 1.0, and a lateral design is dangerous to life.
required for the entire structure;
Any change in the use or occupancy of any ex isting
3. When so designated by the stru ctural engineer. Of building or structure shall comply with lpC provisions of
4. When such observation is specifically required by the Seclions 108.4 of this code.
bu ilding official.
IOS.2 Maintenance
I
I 107.9.2 Structural Observer AI! buildings and structures, both existing and new, and
hazardous based on structural safety, than before such A change in use or occupancy of any building shall be
additions or alterations arc undertaken, unless adequate allo wed only when the change in use or occupancy will
retrofitting or remediation is introduced. not cause any structural elemen t of the existing building
to resist loads, determined on Ihe basis on this code and
Exceptions:
on the proposed use or occupancy. in excess of their
Alterations to exl'sting structural elements or additions of capacity. Alterations to Ihe ex isting bui lding shall be
flew structllral elements, wh!'ch are initiated for the pemliued to satisfy this requirement.
plllpose oj increasing the strength or stiffness oj (he
lateral-jorce-resisting system of an existing struc/~lre. No change in the character of occupancy of a building
Ileed not be designed for. forces confonning to these shaJl be made without a new cenificate of occ upancy
regulations provided that an engineering analysis is regardless of whether any alterations to the building arc
submitted 10 show that:
1. The capacity of existing structural elements required
to resist/orces is not reduced;
2. The lateral force co required errstmg structural
elements is not increased beyond their design
strength;.
3. New slnlclural elements are detailed and connected
to Ihe existing structural elements as required by
these regulations; and
4. New or relocated nOfl~strnctural elements are
detailed alld connected to existing or fl ew structural
elements as required by these regulations.
108.3.3 Non-structural
Non-s truclural alterations or repairs to an existing
bui lding or struclure are rennitted 10 be made of Ihe sam e
materi als of whi ch the building or structure is constructed,
provided that they do not adversely affect any structural
member or lhe fire~resistance rating of any part of the
bu ilding or structure.
th
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
1·18 CHAPTER 1 '" General Requirements
BEDROCK is in· placc solid or altered rock . K E Y is a designed compacted fi ll placed in a tre nc h
excav ated in earth malerial beneat h the toe of a slope.
BENCH is a rel atively level step ex cavated into earth
mat eri al on whic h fill is to be pl aced . PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION is the inspection
required by thifi code to be performed by th e civ il
nORRO\V is earth m3lerial acquired from an off·site engineer o r geotechnical e ngi neer. S uc h inspecti ons
loca tion fo r use in grading on a site. incl ude tha I perfomled by persons supervised by such
engi neers or geologists a nd shall be suffic ient to fonn a n
CIVIL ENGINEERING is the applicat ion of the opinio n relating to the conduct of the work.
kn owl edge of the fo rces of nature, principl es o f
mec hanic s a nd the properties of mate ri als to the SITE is any lot or parce l of land or cont iguous
evaluat ion, design an d constllJc ti o n of civi l works. com binmioll the reof. unde r the same owncrs hi p. where
grading is performed or permitted.
COMPA C TION is the dcnsir<cation of a fill If)'
mechanical or chemical mea ns. SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of
whic h is ex prcssed as a rat io o f vel1ica l distance to
EARTH MATERIAL is a ny roc k, natural soi l o r r< 1I or horizo ntal di stance.
an y combin ati o n thereof.
SOIL is naturall y occu rring supe rficia l deposi ts overlying
EROSION is the wearing away of the grou nd surface as a bedroc k.
res ult of the movemen t of wi nd, wate r or ice.
SOILS ENGIN EER. See Geotechni cal Engineer.
EXCAVATION is the mec ha ni cal re moval of earth
mate ri al. SOILS ENGINEEIUNG . See Geotecilili ca l Engineering.
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial TERRACE is a relatively level step co ns tructed in the
me'I IlS. face of a graded s lope surface for drai nage and
mai IIt ena nce purposes.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER is II registered Civ il
En gin ee r with spec ial qualifi ca ti on in the prac tice of
Geo tec hn ical Engineering as recognized by the Bo.ard of
Civi l Engincering of thc Professiona l Regulation
Commission as endorsed by the Specially Division of
109.3 r)ennits Required Sl<lbility of a public w:ly or drainage channel, the owner of
the property upon whi ch the excavation or fill is located,
109.3.1 Gencral or other person or agent in control of said property, upon
Exce pt as specified in Section 109.3.2 of this section, no receipt of notice in writing from the building official,
person shall do any gmd ing without first having obtained sha ll within the period specified therein repair or
.1 gra ding pCnllit from the building official. eliminate such excavat ion or embankment (O eliminate the
hazan.l and 10 be in confonnance with the requirements of
109.3.2 Exempted Work this code. Requirements for excavations shall he referred
to Chapter 3 of thi. code.
A grading permit shall not be required for the following:
I. Grading in an isolated. sc lf~co lllaiJ)cd area if [here is 109.5 Grading Permit Requirements
no dnngcr to priv'lIc Or public properly.
109.5.1 General
2. An excavation below finished grade for basements
and footings of a building, retnining wall or other Except as exempted in Section 109.3.2 of this code, no
stnlcture authorized by a valid building permit. Thi s person shall do any grading without first obtaining a
shall nol exempt any fill made with the material from grading permit from the building official. A separate
such excavation or cxempt any excavation ha ving an pem)it sha ll be obtained for each si te, and may cover both
. unsupported hcight greater than 1.5 m after the excavations and fill s.
completion of such Slmcture;
109.5.2 Grading DeSignation
3. Cemetery graves;
Grading in excess of 4.000 m) shall be perfonned ill
4. Refuse di sposal sites cont rolled by other regulmions; accordance with the approved grading plan prepared by a
civil engineer, and shall be designated as "engineered
5. Exc:lvations for wells, or trenches for utilities;
grading." Grading involving less Ihan 4,000 1111 shall be
6. Mining, quan'ying, excavating, processing or designated "regular grading" unless the permittee chooses
stock piling of rock , sa nd, gravel, aggregate or clay to have the grading performed as engineered grading, or
controlled by other regulations. provided slich the building official determines Ih31 special conditions or
operations do flot affect the ItHera l suppon of, or unusual hazards exist, in which case grading shall
increase stresses in, soil on adjoining propeflies; conform to the requirements for engineered grading.
7. Exploratory excavat ions performcd under the
109.5.3 Engineered Grading Requirements
direction of a registcred geotechnical engineer;
Application for a gradi ng pennil shnll be accompanied by
8. An excava ti on that ( I) is less than 600 mm in depth two sets of plans and specifications, and supporting data
Of (2) docs not create <l cut slope grea ter [han 1,5 m in co nsisting of a geotechnicill engineering repofl.
height and steeper th an ! unit venical in I Y2 units Additionally. the application shall state lhe estimated
horizo ntal (66.7 % slope); and quantities of work involved. The plans and specifi cations
9. A fill less than JOO mill in depth and placed on shall be prepared and sig ned by the civi l engineer licensed
natttrni terrain wi th a slope flatter th<l ll 1 unit vertical to prepare such plans or spec ifi cations when required by
in 5 units hori zo ntal (20% slope). Or less than 900 {he build ing official.
111min depth, not imcndcd 10 suppor( structurcs, that
docs not exceed 40 Ill) on anyone lot and docs not Specifications shall contain
information covering
obSlmct a drainage course. constmcl ion and malerial requirements. Plans shall be
drawn to scale upon subs tantial paper or cloth and shall be
Exemption from the pennil requirements of thi s sec ti on of sufficient clarity to indicate the nature and extent of (he
shall flot be deemed 10 grant authorization for any work to work proposed and show in detail thilt th ey will conform
be done in any manlier in violation of the provisions or to th e provisions of this code and all rc!e val1l laws.
this code or any oth er laws or ordinances or this ordinances, rules and regulations . The first sheet of eac h
jurisdiction. set of plans shall give location of the work, the nam e and
,lddrcss of {he oWlH.~1'. and the perso n hy whom th ey were
109.4 Hazards prcp'l l'cd .
The plans shall include lhe following information: of the person who prepared the plan . The pl:m shall
include the followin g information :
I. General vi cinity map of lhe proposed s ite;
I. General vicinity map of the proposed site;
2. Property limits and accurate contours of eX isti ng
ground and details of terrain and area drainage; 2. Limiting dimensions a nd depth of cut and fill;
3. Limiting dimensions elevati ons or f'inhih co ntours to J. Provisions for lateral earth SUPPOI' or shori ng; l.\Ild
be achieved by the grading, and proposed dmin agc
4. Loca tion of an)' bu ild ings or structures where work is
channels and rel ated COnSII1J ction;
w be pcr:onned , and the location of any buildings Or
4. Detailed plans of all surface and subsurface drainage stnJcture ~ \~' ithin 4 .5 III of the proposed grading.
devices, w;.!Ils, cribbing, dams <lnd other protective
devices to be constructed with, or as a part of. the 109.6 Grading Inspeclion
proposed work, IOgether with a map showi ng the
drainage arc.\ and the estimated runoff of the arc,l 109.6.1 General
serveO by an y drains; Grading operariolls for which a permit is required shall be
5. Location of a ny buildings or struc tures on the subject 10 inspection by the building official. Inspection
property where the work is to be pcrfonncd and the of grading opera tions shall be provided by the
locatioll of any buildings or s(ruClUres on l:lllu of geolechnical engineer reHlined 10 provide such services in
adjacen t owners that arc within 4.5 m of the property accordance with Section 109.5.5 for engineered grading
or that may be affected by the proposed grading <lnd as required by the building official for regular
opermiolls; grading.
official. In the event of changed conditions, the permittee tests, other substamiatin g data, and com ments all any
shall be respo nsible for infonning the bui lding oflici nl of changes made during grading and thei r effect on the
such change and shall provide revi sed plans for approval. recomrncndmions made in th e approved geotechni cal
engineering investigati on report. GeotcdUl ical
109.6.5 BUilding Official engincers shall submit a statement that, to the besl of
The building orfi cial shall inspect Ihe projeci at the their knowledge. the work wi thin their aren of
vario us stilges of work requiri ng approviJl to detc rmine responsibilities is in accord ance wit h (he approved
{h<l{ ndequate cOl1 lrol is being exercised by Ihe geotechni cal engineering repon and applicable
professional co nsultants. provisions of thi s sec tion.
3. The gradi ng conl ractor shall submit in a fNIll
109.6 .6 NOlilicalion of No ncompliance prescribed by the building official a slmemCI, i of
If, in the course of fuHilJing their respcctive duties under co nfonnance to said as-buill plan and .he
thi s chapter, the civil engineer or the geotech ni cal speci ficati ons.
engineer rind s that the work is not being done in
confo nnance with thi s chapter or the appro ved,., gradin g 109.7.2 Nolification of Complel ioll
plans, the disc repanc ies shall be reported immediately in The permi ttee shall notify the building official when the
writ ing to the permittee and to the building offi cial. grading operati on is ready fo r final inspec tion. '; n:-li
permission by the bui lding official shall not be giver .!" '
109.6.7 T r ansfer of Rcsponsibilily all work, including installation of all drainage f ? !
If the civil engineer or the geotechnical engineer-of- .md their protecti ve devices. and all erosion ~'
record is changed during grading, {he work shall be measu res have been com pleted in accordance W I·': 1;:'_
stopped ulllil the replace me nl has i.lgreed in writing to final approved gnlding plan , and the requi red fep(l: !
accept their responsi bility within (he area of techni cal been submitted by the engi neer-or-record.
co mpetellce for approval upo n completi on of the work. It
shall be the duly of th e pennittee to notify the building
official in wl;ting of such Change prio r \0 the.
recolnmeJ)cement of such grading.
Chapter 2
SIXTH EDITION
Table of Contents
SECTION 208 ICAHTHQUAKE LOAI)S .............................. ....... .. ........................ ...... ... ...... .... .. ..... ......... .... .................. ... .. 72
2·2 C HAPTt:f~ 2 -. Minimum Design Loads
SECTIO N 210 RAI N LOADS .......................................................................... ... ..... ................. .......................................... 111
210.1 Roof Drainage ..... ..... ... ........... .......... ................. III
2 10,2 Design Rain Loads ..... , ..................... ........ 111
2 ] 0.3 Ponding Instabili ty ...... .. 111
210.4 Controlled Drailwgc ......... 111
I
!
SECTION 211 FLOOD LOADS ............. ....................................... ...................................................................................... 111
211. 1 Ge neral.. .
2 J 1.2 Definitions,
21 1.3 Establishme nt of Flood Hazard Areas, . ,
2 11.4 DeSign and Constructioll ........
...... .......... ........... 111
......... .... 111
.. ..... ..... ..
.............. ... .
....... 11 2
....... . 11 2
I
2 1 1.5 Flood Hazard Documentation ............................. ........................... ...... 113
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
2·4 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
GA RAG E is a building or portion thereof in which motor 2. Any masonry or concrete walt that supports m ore
vehicle containing flammable or combusHble liquids or than 2.90 kN/m of vertical load in addition to its Own
gas in its tank is stored, repai red or kept. weigh!.
GARA GE, PRIVATE, is a bu ilding or a portio n of a EXTERIOR WALL is any wa ll or elemen t of a wall, Or
building, not more than 90 111 2 in area, in which only any membcr or group of members , that defines th e
motor vehicles used by the tenants of the building or exterior bound aries or courts of a build in g an d that has a
buil din gs on lhe premises are kepi or stored. slope of 60 degrees or greutcr with th e horizontul plane.
LIMIT STATE is a condit ion beyond whicJ; i\ structure NONBEARIN G WALL is any wall thaI is not a bearin g
or member becomes unfi t for service and is judged to be wall.
no longer useful for its intended func tion (serviceability
limit state) or (0 be unsafe (strength limit state). PARAPET W AL L is Ihat part of any wall entirely above
Ihe roof linc.
LI VE L O ADS are those loads produced by the use and
occupancy of the building or Olher structure and do nOl RETA INING WALL is a wall designed to resist the
include dead load, construction load. or environmental lateral displacement of soil or other materials.
loads suc h as wind load, earthquake load and nuid load.
202. 1 Wa lls
IA(V+ F) (203 -1 )
th
N"_1IiOrlcJI Structural Code of tile Philippine s 6 Edition Volume 1
2·6 CHAPTER 2 .- Minimum Design Loads
E
O.60 D + - +H . (203 -1 5)
1.4
D + L + L,(or R) (203- 16)
D+ L+W (203 -1 7)
E
D + L+ (203·18)
1.4
wh ere:
I, :::
1.0 for noors iii placcs of pu blic assembl y. for live
loads in excess of 4.8 kP<I. and for glJnlge liv.:.lo<ld.
::; 0.5 for olher live loads
Em := th e Il1tlXilll ll J1l effect or horizontal tllld verti cal
forces as scl fon h in Section 208.5. 1.1
Table 204- 1 Mi nimum Densities for Design Loads fro m Materials (kN/m3)
tli
National Structural Code o f the PI1i lippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2-8 CHAPTER 2 - Minimurn Design Loads
Table 204-2 Minimum Design Dead Loads (kPa) (Use actual loads when available)
Composition:
Three-ply ready roofing .......... 0.05
Terrazzo (38 mm) directly on
.. ................................ 0.91
Nog'ou; CijJj'I.15 , 148
slab.. 800 1.40 . 1.53 . 2:6 i
Four-ply fclt and gravel ........... O.26 Terrazzos (25 mm) on stone- 6oii ' .. "--'i:so" 1.63 22rj'
Five-ply felt and gravel ........... 0.29 concrete fill ............................ !.53 400 .......... !~J2rJ 192-1254 "
Copper or tin ............................ 0.05 TClTilzZO (25 mm), 50 Illm stone
Full '2.50 ,2.63 '359'
Comlgated asbestos-cement concrete.. ...1.53
roofing .................................... 0.19 Wood block (76 mm) on mastic, !Y..~~~/~11.l.}2~.r"\_~.i~X.?r Un it ..... , ..
Deck, metal 20 gage. . ............ 0.12 no fill.. .................. 0.48 · !'J.O.g~(?l~1 1.24 1.34 172 .
Deck, metal, 18 gage ................... 0.14 Wood block (76 mm) 011 J3 rnm 800 1.59 I. 72 2.25
Fiberboard, 13 1llJ11 . . .......... 0.04 mortar base ........ ............. ...... 0.77
600 . 1.69 1.87 . 2:44 .
Gypsum sheathing, 13 mIll ......... 0.10 400 1.98 2.11 . 282
FLOORS, WOOD-JOIST (no Full 2.69 2.82 . 3:88
Insulation, roof boards (per mm plaster) r.---"'~'
thickness) - - - - _ ....... 21.2 .k.r~.r~ny. _p~,~~,i.tX(}r~J[.lJt
Cellular glass 0.0013 Joist
300 .
~gist SpacinE
' 4(JtJ"-' . 6tJtJ" !'l_ogr."Ol!t '1 .J.}? __ . 1.44 r '1;8~ : :
Fibrous glass 0.0021 Sizes
(mm) mm ; mm mm
·?99. I. _
}}1_..! 1.82 L. 2.39
Fiberboard 0.0028 600! 1.83 .. L 1.96 259
Perlite 0.0015 i 0.30
50xl50 .1..-
.:
0.25
- -.----.~~-.-, .. ---
0.25 400 2.13 2.2 292 .
polystyrcne foam 0.0004 1.50x200 0.30 0.30 i 0.25 Full . r 2.84 " 2.97! 3:97 .
0.0009 50x250 i IUS ·.r:o..3i>~-l
Urethane foam with skin
.1.. 0.30
Plywood (per mm thickness) 0.0060
Rigid Insulation, 13 mrn . 0.04 50x300 0.40 0.35 0.30
Skylight, metal frame, FRAME PARTITIONS
J 0 nun wirc glass 0.38
Movable steel partitions ... 0.19
Slate,S Illlll 0.34
Wood or steel studs, ! 3 mill
Slate, 6 mm 0.48 gypsum board each side.. . 0.38
Waterproofing membranes:
Wood studs, 50 x 100,
Bituminous, gravel-covered. 0.26
unplastcred 0.19
Bituminous, smooth surface .0.07
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered
Liquid, applied ..................... 0.05
one side.. .. .......................... 0.57
Single-ply, sheet ................... 0.03
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered
Wood Sheathing (per mOl
two side ... ··· .. ···· ...................... 0.96
thickness) ............................ 0.0057
Wood Shingles ........................... 0.14
gross weight of the maximum size vehicle to be accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4 as appropriate,
accommodated. Parking garages for the storage of private producing the greatest stresses shall govern.
or pleasure-type motor vehicles with no repair or
refueling shall have a floor system designed for a 205.3.4 Special Loads
concentrated load of not less than 9 kN acting on an area Provision shall be made for the special vertical and lateral
of 0.015 rn 2 without uniform live loads. The condition of loads as set forth in Table 205-2.
concentrated or uniform live load, combined in
2. Armories 7.2 0
I--------------+----------i--------------·-·--------
Fixed seats 2.9 0
3. Theaters, assembly areas J and Movable seats 4.8 o
auditoriums.
Lobbies and platforms 4.8 o
Stages areas 7.2 o
4. Bowling alleys, poolrooms and similar
recreational areas
3.6 o
5. Catwalk for maintenance access 1.9 1.3
- - - - 1 - - - - .---.---
6. Cornices and marquees 3.6
4
o
- - - - - - - - - - -..- .--.-.-----..- --.----.--.-----... --- _ . _--_._-----1---
7. Dining roOnls and restaurants 4.8 o
8. Exit facilities 5 4.8
---------. - . - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .--..----.----11----.- .--..-----..---.-
General storage and/or repair 4.8
9. Garages - . - -..---------.--.-- --.-.-.-...---------- '- - - - - - - - 1
Private or pleasure-type 1110tor 1.9
_____._._____________.____+___ + __._________+____._._. ___. _.__
-'-vc"I"'1i"'c.::lc'--,,5("'0o.ra'"g"'>c'-_ _
Wards and rooms 1.9 4.5 '
I--;-;----:--,---;;--~-+------------ ---------
I O. Hospitals Laboratories & operating 2.9 4.5 2
f-____~r..::o~o_"Ill.::S'- _______ . __.____ 0 _.0 . _ _ • ." • __ o~"'o_._~_~._. _. _______ _
Concentrated
Usc 01' Occupancy Uniform Load 1
~ ..,......... ,. ...... _.• -..... ...... ... . ... ..• .. ... . .,_ .. "-,, .......
' .._-- ..._'....... . _.... .. _- --- ._.,. ....... ......
' - .. _-- .. .. -..,.---..-.... . .. ... -.
~- - , "
~
-_ ........ _.•.Load
_-- _... - ..... ~ .. _.....
Category Description .., kPa kN
Ca ll Ce llters & B PO 2 .9 9 .0
------- ._---
Lobbies & ground floor
4.8 9.0
conidors
13. Office
Orrices 2.4 9.0'
Building corridors above
3.8 9.0
Brou nd floor
Press rooms 7.2 11.0 '
14. Print ing plants
Composing and linotype
4.8 9.0 '
rooms
-- -
Basic floor area 1.9 0'
Ex tcrior balcon ies 2.9' 0
15. Rcsidelllial 8
Decks 1.9' 0
Storage 1.9 0
16. Rcs lroo ms 9 -- -- --
17. Reviewing sl<Incls, grands tands,
- -
Bleachers, and folding and telescoping -- 4.8 0
seatin g .... .. ---_ _-_
Same as area served or
18. Roof decks
Occupancy
-- --
Cla ssrooms 1.9 45 '
Lig ht 0.0 --
21. Storage ---------.---_ .. _---_._---- _..---------- --_.- ,-,
- ..------
Heavy
.. _-_ .. 12.0 --
4.5 2
--
Retail 4.8
22. Stores
Wholesale 6.0 13.4 1
U1
National S truc tural CorJe or (I'le Philippinos G Edition Volume 1
2-12 CHAPTEli 2. ... Minimum Design Loads
Components !.28
f-------.------- -
9. Vehicle barriers 27 kN'
S('l' See
10. J-landrails
Noll' I() Note 10
See
Over 2.4 III Total
! J. Storage racks Table
high loads"
208-/2
12. Fire sprinkler 1.1 kN plus See
stnJctural weight of Tahfe
water-filled
support Ii 208-/2
----- -- - - _. _______i.~~~c____"_______ _
2()5.4 Roof Live Load s For th ose conditi ons where light ~g agc metal preformed
structural .sheets serve as the SUpp0l1 and finish of roofs ,
205.4, I General roof slructum l members <lITangcd to create continuity
Roofs shall be designed for the un;( live loads. L" set
shall be considered adequate if designed for full dead
loads on all spans in combination wi th the most cri tical
fonh in Table 205-3, The li ve loads shall be assumed to
act vertically lipoll the area projected 011 a horizontal one of the following superimposed loads:
plane. I. The uniform roof live load. Ln set forth in Table 205-
) on all s pilns.
205.4.2 Distribution of Luads
2. A conccnlr<ued gravity load, Ln of 9 kN plnced on
Where uiliform roof loads arc involved in the design of any span supporting a tributary ,uea greater than 18
$tructural Illcmbcr$ arranged to create continu ity, 111 2 to creat e maximum st resses in the member,
consideration may be limited to full dc,ld load$ 011 all whenever this loadi ng creales greater stresses than
spans in co mbination with full roof live loads on adjacent those caused by the uniform live load . The
spans and on al ternate spans. concenl rated load shall bc placed on the member over
Exceptio'l: a length of 750 mill along the span. The concentrated
load need 110t be applied to more than one span
Altenzate spa~1 loading need flot be considered where the sillHl!tanc()usl y,
uniform roof live load is 1.0 kPa 'or more.
J, Water <'lCculllulmioll as prescrihed in Section 206.7.
111
National Structural CO(j G of U18 PhiliPPUHJS 6 Edition VOIUI11e 1
2·14 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design l.oads
205.4.3 Unbalanced Loading The live load reduction shall not exceed ·m i' Ci,-'~: l4 t ;n
Unbalanced loads shall be used where such loading will garages for the storage of pri vate pleasure cars havius. a
result in larger members or connections. Trusses and capaci ty of not more than nine passengers per veh icle.
arches shall be designed to resist the stresses caused by
unit live loads on one half of the span jf such loading 205.6 Alternate Floor Live Load Reduction
results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any As an alternate to Equ,Hion (205~ I ), the unil live loads set
portion than the stresses produced by the required unit forth in Table 205~1 Illay be reduced in accordance wilh
live load on the entire span. For roofs whose structures Equation 205·3 o~ any member, including Oat slabs,
arc composed of a stressed shell. framed or solid. wherein having an inOuence area of 40 m 1 or morc.
s tresses caused by any poim loading arc distributed
throughou t the area of the shell, the requirements for
unbalanced unit live load design l11<1y be reduced 50 (205-3)
percen!.
where:
205.4.4 Special Roof Loads
AI = influence area, 1112
Roofs 10 be used for special purposes shall be designed
L = reduced design live load per square meler of area
for appropriale loads as approved by Ihe building official.
supponed by the member
Greenhouse roof bars, purlins and rafters shall be
L" = unreduced design live load per square meter of area
designed to carry a 0.45 kN concentrated load. LT. in
supponed by the member (Table 205-\)
addition to the uniform live load
The influ ence area AI is four times the tributary area for a
205.5 Reduction of Live Loads
co lumn , two times the tributary area for a beam, equal to
The design live load determined using the IInit live loads the panel area for a lW() ~ way slab, and equ al to the
as sel fMh in Table 205-1 for floors and Table 20S-}. product of the span and th e full flange width for a precast
Method 2, for roofs may be reduced 011 any member T-beam
supporting more than 15 m2, including Oat slabs, except
for floors in places of public assembly and for live loads The reduced live load s hall nOI be less Ihall 50 percell I of
greater than 4.8 kPa. in accordance wit h the following the unit live load La for members receiving load frolll one
cqUl.ttion: level only, nor less than 40 percent of the unit live load La
R = r(A -15) (205-1 ) for other members.
where:
A = area of floor or roof supported by the member,
square meter, m 2
D = dead load per squ are meIer of area suppo rted by
th e member. kPa
L = uni t live load per square meIer of area supported by
the member. kPa
R = reduction in percentage, %.
r = rate of reduction equal to 0.08 for nOOni. Sec Table
205-3 for roofs
th
National Structural Code of the Plli!ippines 6 Edition VoIU01 0 1
2- 16 CHAP TEI1 2 - Minimum Design Loads
resist the upward loads caused by the expansive so il s, or 206.10 Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas
the expansive soil shall be removed or stabili zed around In addition 10 other design requireme nts of this chapte r,
<md beneath the structure. hcliport and helistop la nding or touchdown <ueas shall be
designed for the [allowing loads, combincd in accordance
206.9 Crane Loads wi lh Scc lion 203.3 or 203.4:
206.9.2 Maximum Wheel Load The dead load plus a uniformlivc load. L, of 4.8 kPa. The
The maximum wheel loads shall be the wheel loads rcq uircd liye load may be reduced in ac.cordance with
produced by Ihe weighl of Ihe bridge. as appl icable, plus Seclion 205.5 o r 205.6.
Ihe sum of the rated capacity and (he weight of (he trolley
with the trolley posi tioned all its ru nway whe re Ihe
resulting load effect is ma ximum .
207.2 Definitions
The following definitions apply to the provisions of
Section 207 .
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2-18 CHAPTER 2 --- Minimum Design Loads
These conditions are expressed by the following GLAZING. Glass or transparent or translucent plastic
equations: sheet used in windows, doors, skyl ights, or cu rtain wal ls.
I. A .. > 1.10 A",
GLAZING, IMPACT n ES ISTANT. Glazing that has
2_ Ao > smaller of (0.5m 2 or 0.01 Ax) and been shown by testi ng in accordance with ASTM EI886
A",IAs; S 0.20 and ASTM £1 996 or other approved test methods 10
withstand the impact of wind -borne missiles likely to be
nUILDlNG OR OTIIER STRUCTU RE, REGULA R- generated in wind-borne debris regions during design
SHAPED. A building or other structure having no winds.
unusual geometrical irrcguhuity in spatial forlll.
HILL. With respect 10 topogr;'lphic effects in Section
nUII-DING RIGID. A building or other st ru cture whose 207.5_7 , a land su rface charac terized by strong relief in
fundamental frequency is greater than or equal to I H z. any horizontal di rection (Figure 207~4)
WIND-DORNE DEBRIS REGIONS. Area, wi thin eq ui va len t to Gf with R (resonan t response factor)
typhoon prone regions located: assumed as zero
Gf ; gust effect factor for MWFRS of flexible buildings
I. Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high water Iinc
and othcr structures, including poles, masts,
where the basic wind speed is equal (Q or greater tlwn
billboards, and trussed lowers; also called
180 kph.
"dynamic response faclor"
2. In areas where the basic wind speed is equal to or G(.~m ;;combined net pressure coefficient for a parapet
greater than 190 kph. GCp = product of external pressure coefficient and gust
effect factor to be used in the dcterillinatio n of
207.3 Symbols and Notalions wind loads for buildings
The following symbols and notation apply only to the GCp/ ;; product·, of equivalent extemal pressure
provisions of Section 207: coefficient and gust effect factor to be used in the
dctenninalion of wind loads for MWFRS of low·
A = effective wind area, 1112 rise bu ildings
Aa ::: ampJilUde factor for estimation of III [or other GC~,; = product of imernal pressure coefficient and gus t
structures. effect factor fa be used in the determination of
AI ::: area of opcn buildings and other struclUres cit h l~r wind loads for buildings
norillal to lhe wind direction or projected on a gQ ;; peak factor for backgrou nd response in Eqs. 207·4
plane normal to the wind direction , m 2 and 207-8
Ac ::: the gross area of that wall in which A(I is identified, CN ;; peak factor for resonant response in Eq. 207·8
m' g, ;; peak factor for wind response in Eqs. 207.4 and
Agi ::: the sum of the gross surface areas of the buildi ng 207-8
envelope (wall s and roof) not including A $' rn 2 N ;; height ofhilJ or cscarpment in Figure 207A, III
All :;: : total area of openings in a wall that receives II = mean roof height of a building or height of other
positive ex ternal pressure, m 2 structure, except that cave height sha ll be used for
A"i :;;: [he sum of the areas of openings in th e bui ldin g roof angle Oof les s than or equa l to 10", III
enve lope (walls and roof) not including A", 1112 fir = roof eave height at a part icular wall , or the average
A"S' == total area of ope nings in the building envelope. m2 height if the eave varies along the wall
As ;:: gross area of the solid freestandin g wall or solid '\1" = impo rtance factor
sign, 111 2 I; ;; intensity of turbulen ce from Eq , 207-5
a = width of preS$ure coefficient zone, 111 kill ::: we ight distribution factor for est im ati on of tl\ for
B == horizontal dimens ion of a bu ilding, lower or other other structures
s tnlcture measured normal to wind di rection, III K f ' Kz. KJ ;; multipliers in Figure 207-4 to obtain K :f
lJo == horizon tal dimensio n at the base of a structu re, III K,f = wind directionali ty faClaf in Table 207·2
ill! = horizontal dimension <u the top of a structure, In K" ::: veloc it y pressure exposure coefficient eva lu ated at
BOI• == average horizontal dime nsion of a structure, or heigh t z;; II
taken as average of Bo aJld Ih. III K= ;; veloci ty prcssure exposure coelTicient evaluated at
b :;: : mean hourly wind speed factor in Eq. 207- I 4 frolll height z
Table 207-5 K., :; : topographic factor as defined in Section 207.5.7
L :; horizontal dimension of a building measured
b ; 3-second gust speed factor from Table 207-5
parallel to the wind direction. m
C/ ;: force coefficient to be used in the dClcnnination o f
,.-" ::: distance upwind of crest of hill or escarpment in
wind loads for olher structures
rig 207A to where the difference in ground
eN == net pre..'isure coefficient to be used in determination elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment, III
of wind loads for ope n buildings
e ;; external pressure coefficient to be used ill the
L: = integral length scale of turbulence, 111 .
l•
detennination of wi nd loads for buildings L, ;; horizontal dimension of return corner for a sol id
C :; lUrbulcil cc in tensity faclor in Eq. 207-5 from T'lbl e: frees tandin g wa ll or solid s ign from Figure 207·20.
207-5 III
f) :; diametcr of a circula r s lmcturc or member, III t illlegra l length scale factor from Table 207·5, III
D' ; depth of protmding elements such as ribs and f1I, = mass ratio. o r the rati o of att ached masses (c.g.
spoilers, III <lnteIHl<!S, cables, lighting, ,1Ild othe r appu rt enances)
Do = su rfacc drag coefficient at the top 5% of the tower or other vert ica l
P ; design wind force for other st ructures, kN structure to the 10lal mass of the (owe r or other
G :; gust effcct factor for rigid buildings; al!lo coli lcd structure alone; for attached masses Ht lower levels
"simplified dynamic response factor" and is
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volu me 1
2·20 CH AP TER 2 .. Minimum Design Loads
of the tower. an equivalent mass ratio shall be Zg :;:; nominal height of the atmospheric boundary layer
taken used in thi s standard Values appear in Tab le 207-5
Mn :::; mass factor for esti mation of III for other stru ctures Zmitl :::: exposure constant from Table 207~5
N, = reduced frequency from Eq . 207·12 (J. 3·second gust~speed power Jaw exponent from
:::
shedding, instabi lit y due to ga lloping or nutter; and windward and leewa rd net pressures, fJJ shall be
does not have a site location for which channeling determined by the following equation:
effects Or buffeting in the wake of upwind
(207-1 )
obstructions warran t special consideratio n.
7. The buildi ng has and approximately symmetri cal 207.4.2.1 .1 Minimum Pressures
cross-sec tion ill each direction with either a flat roof
The load effects of the design wind pressures from
or a gable or hip roof wit h 0::: 45°.
Section 207.4.2. 1 shall not be less th an the minimum load
8. The building is exe mpted from torsional load cases as case from Section 207. 1.4 .J assllming the pressures, PSI
indicated in Note 5 of Figure 207-10, or the torsional for zones A, B, C, and D all equal to +0.50 kPa, while
load cases defined in Note 5 do not con trol the design assumin g zones E, F, 0, and H all equal 100 kPa.
of any of the MWFRSs of the building.
207.4.2.2 Components and Cladding
207.4.1.2 Components and Cladding Net design wind pressures, Pnc" for the components and
For the design of co mponcms and cladding the bui ldi ng cladding of buildings designed using Method I represent
must meet all [he conditions: the net pressures (sum of internal and external) to be
applied nonnal to each building surface as shown in Fig.
1. The mea n roof height h must be less than or equal
207-3. Pntl shall be detennined by the following equation:
to 18 m.
(207-2)
2. The building is enclosed as defined in Secti on 207 .2
and conforms to the wind-borne debris provisions of
Section 2075.9.3. 207.4.2.2.1 Minimum Pressures
The posi tive design wind pressures, PfIt"/, from Section
3. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
207.4 .2.2 shall not be less th an +0.50 kPa, and the
as defined in Section 207.2.
negative design wind pressures . PnCfl from Section
4. The building docs /l ot have response charac teristics 207 .4.2.2 shall not be less th an -0.50 kPa.
making it subject to across wind loadin g, vortex
shedd ing, ins ta bility due to galloping or flutter; and 207.4.3 Air Penneable Cladding
does nol have a sile location for which channeling Design wind loads de termined from Figure 207 .3 shall be
effects or buffeting in the wake or upwind used for all air permeable claddin g unless approved les t
obstructions warra nt special co nsideration . data or the recognized literature demonstrate lower loads
5. The bu ilding has either a nat roof, a gable roof with 0 for the type of air permeable cladding being considered .
< 45°, or a hip roof wI O:s 27°.
207.5 Method 2 - Analytical Procedure
207.4.2 D(~sign Procedure
207.5.1 Scope
I. The basic wind speed V shall be determined in
A building or other struct ure whose design wind loads are
accordance wilh Section 207.5.4. The wind sha ll be
de termined in accordance with th is section shall meet all
assumed to come fro m any horizont al directi on.
of the following conditions:
2. An importance factor I". shall be det ermined ill
J. The building or other structure is a regular·shaped
accordance with Section 207.5.5.
bu ilding or slmcture as defined in Secti on 207.2.
3. An ex posure category shall be determined in
2. The building or other st rll cture does not have
acc ordancc wi th Secti on 207.5 .6.
respo nse win d loading, vortex shedding, instability
4. A heighl and exposure adjustll1cnt coeffi cient ,A, shall due to g~l lI opin g or flutler; or does nol have a site
be determined from ri gu res 207~2 and 207~3. locmioJl for which chanlle ling effect or buffeting in
the wake of upwind obstruc tions warrant special
207.4.2.I I\:Jain Wind-F'orcc Resisting System consideration.
SimpliJicd de sign wind pressures, p... for the MWFRSs of
low -rise simple diaphragm buildings represellt the net 207.5.2 Limitations
pressures (sum of internal and ex ternal) to be applied 10 The pro vis ion of Sect ion 207 .5 take i nlo consideration the
the Ilorizoillal and ve rti cal projectio ns of btli lding surfaces load ma gnifi cation effecl caused by gusts in resonance
as sho wn in Fi gures 207- r an d 207-2. For the horizontal with al ong-wind vibrat io ns of llexib le building or other
pressures (;I.o nes A, B, C. D), PJ is the combinat ion of the structures. Buildings or other st ructures not mee ting the
1h
National Structural Code of U"l e Phi lippine s 6 Edition Volume 1
2·22 CHAPTER 2 - Minimu m Design Loads
requirements of Section 207.5.1. or having unl/suaJ shapes 207.5 .4.1 an d 207.5.4 .2. The wind sh,,;\ D;: :::'l ~ : \1! p i'd ;\\
or response characteristi cs shall be designed usi ng come from any horizon tal direction.
recogni zed literature documenting such wind load effects
or shall usc the wi nd tUHnel procedure speci fied in 207.5.4.1 Special Wind Regions
Section 207.6. The basic wind speed shall be increased whcu.:: rc.:;ords O f
experience indicate that Ihe wi nd speeds arc higher th an
207.5.2.1 Shielding those refl ected in T able 207-1. Mountainous lCITa in,
There s hall be no reductions in velocity pressure du e to gorges, and special regi ons sh~ill be examined for unusual
apparent shieldin g aflord cd by buildin gs and other wind conditions. The authority havin g jurisoicl ion shall ,
structures o r terrai n features. if necessary, adjust the values given in Table :W: i to
. account for higher local wind speeds. Such ndj u'c\ il)C iJ!
207.5.2.2 Air Permeable Cladding shall be based on meteorological infonnation and an
Design wind loads delcmlincd from Section 207.5 shall estimate of the basic wind speed obtained in accordance
be used for air permeable cladding unless approved lest with the provisions of Secti on 207.5.4 .2.
data or recogni zed literature demonstrate lower loads for
I the lype of air perm eable cladding being considered. 207.5.4.2 Estimation of Basic Wind Speeds from
I Regional Climatic Data
207.5.3 Design Procedure Regional climatic data shall only be used in lieu of the
I I.
2.
The basic wind speed V and wind directionality
factor Kd shall be detennined in accordance with
Secti on 207.5.4 and Table 207·2 respecti vely.
An importance factor I,v shall be determined in
basic wind speeds given in T able 207 · 1 when: ( I )
approved extreme-value statis tic al -analysis procedures
have been employed in reducing the data; and (2) the
length of record, sa mpling error, averaging time,
anemometer height, data quality. and terrain exposure
accordance with Section 207.5.5. have been taken into account.
3. A n exposure category or exposure ca tegories and
207.5.4.3 Limitation
ve locity pressure ex posure coefficient Kt or Kit , as
applicable, shall be dctennined for each wind Extreme typhoons have not been considered in
direction in accordance with Section 207 .5.6. developing the basic wind·speed distributions.
4. A topographic faclOr K!,t shall be determi ned in 207.5.4.4 Wind Directionality Faclor
accordance wit h Secti on 207.5.7.
The wind direc ti onality factor, Kill shall be determined
5. A gus t effect Factor G or GI , as applicable, shall be frol11 Table 207· 2. This fac tor shall on ly be applied when
determined in accordance with Section 207.5.8. used in conjunc tion wit h load combinations speci fied in
Sections 203.3 and 20104 .
6. An enclosure classification' shall be determi ned in
accordance with Section 207 .5.9.
7. Ime rn al pressure coe ffi ciclH GC,li shall be determined
in accordan ce with Section 207.5. J I. J •
8. External pressure coeffi cients Cp or GC.~'I' or force
coefficients CI' as applicable, shall be determined in
accordance with Secti on 207.5.11.2 or 207.5.1 U.
respec t ively.
9. Velocity pressure q, or q", as applicable, shall be
determined in acco rd ance with Section 207.5 . 10.
I O. Des ign wind load p or F sljaiJ he detc rm ined ill
accordance with Section, 207.5.12. 207.5.13.
207.5. 14, and 207.5 .15. as appl icable.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2-24 CHAPTEH 2··· Minimum Design Loads
(207·3)
(207 ·8)
where K I , K1 and KJ are given in Figure 207~4.
(207.7)
1/4 1/6.5 1/9 Levels and Wind Zones specified in ASTM EI886 and
---=--- 0.45
.... -
0.65 0.80 ASTM E1996.
b --_._...•
c _. 0.30 _._._-----~-
0.20 ..
0.15
~~--- ---~~
debris regions. glazing that is nOt impact away from) the fro nl (exterior) side of th e
resistant or protected with till impac t resislanl parapet
cove ring, shall be treated "s an opening in lJlI = ve loci ty press ure eval uated at the top of the
accordance wi th Secti on 207.5.9.3. ror positi ve parapet
int ernal pressure evalUilli on. qi may Gel''' = combincd net press ure cocfficient
conserv<lli ve ly be e valuated at height" ('Ii = ql.) = + 1.5 for wind ward parapet
G = g US! effect factor from Sec ti o n 207.5.8. = - I .0 for leeward pa rapet
c" = external press ure coefficient from Figure 207-6
or 207·8. 207.5.12.3 Design Wind Load Cases
(G(~lI) = internal pressure coefficient from Figure 207-5 Th e. MWFRS of buildings of all heights, whose wind
q and <Ii shall be evalutlieq llsin g exposure londs have be-cn dctcrmin ed under the provisions of
defined ill Secti on 207.5 .6.3. Prcss ure shall be Seclions 207.5. 12.2. I and 207.5.1 2.2.3, shall be des igned
applied si muil nncousl y on wi ndward and for the wind load cl-l ses as defined ill Fig. 207-9. The
leewa rd walls a nd on roof s urface as defi ned in eccentri cit y e for rigid structu res shall be meas ured frolll
Figures 207·6 and 207·8. the geometric cent er of the building face and shall be
considered for eac h principal axis (ex. ey). The
207.5.12.2.2 Low·Rise Building
, Altern atively, design wind press ures for the MWFRS of
eccentri city e for nexible structures shall be determi ned
from the fol lowing equation and shall be considered for
! Jow -rise bu ildings shall be dete rm ined by Ihe fo ll owing each principal ax i s (ex. e ,.):
j, equat io n:
i e Q + 1.7/ , J(g"Qe Q )' + (CN Re R ) ' (207·2 1)
(207·18) e= - ---
I 1+ 1.71, J(g"Q)' +(gR R)'
where
wh ere
q" =- velocity pressu re evalu ated at mean roof
height 11 using exposure defined in =- eccentricity e as determined for rigid structures
Secli on 207 .5 .6.3 in Figure 207·9
(GCIJj ) :::: external press ure coeffi cient frol1l Fi gure 207 - = distan ce be tw een til e clastic shear cent er and
10 centcr of Ill:lSS of each fl oor
(GCI ,,) = intemal pressure coeffi cient froll1 Figure 207-5 / " g Q.Q. gR. Ii shall be as defined in Secli on 207.5.8
207.5.12.2.3 fl exible Buildiugs
The sign of the eccen tricity e shall be plus or minus.
Des ign wind pressures for the MWFRS of flexible
whichever causes the morc severe load effect.
bu ildi ngs shall be delc nnined !'mlll the following
cqu<ltion: Exeeplion:
Olle-sto"ry buildings with h less lhan or equa} .to 10 IrIJ
bujldj!,g~ tWO ~'or!~~ 9' less framed . 1V;,h Iight'{rame
whe re q. qi. Cpo and (CGpi ) arc as defi ned ill Secti on co~'si . · !:ti~n..- j:m'q QlIt(4l"ngs. /)Vo sto.r!es or I~s~ 4.es~g~ed
207.5. 12.2.1 and (Ij = gust effect facto r is defined as ill wit~'!/. '. . . p'lr.}JgM.f~lfeta"~nifF!trdesignet:tli>'-·load
Scclion 207.5.8.2. c(kt!'i" ba:siMtlff~Fjkur~;'2b7S9: ,c'" " " ,:' , " '.
111
National Structura l CoeJe of tile PJ'IilipPlnes 6 Edition Vot ume '1
2·30 C HAPTER 2 _. Minimum Design loads
(20 7-23)
Two load cases shall be co nsidered. Load ~ ',,' /'.: ~ ~a ll
consisl o f applying the app licable posit ive w;,11 prc:-.:-. u rc
where
from Figure 207-I IA or Figure 207- 17 !t o illI: !-;"(lIl(
q =. {h for wi ndward walls caicuialcd <II height l surface o f the parapet while appl yi ng I!:-.: ;ll'i·;il'I!, le
above the ground negati ve ed ge o r corner zone roof pressure flt .1l1 I-igu res
q :::. qh for leeward wall s, side wall s, and roo fs. 207- 11 throu gh 207-1 7 to the back surface. Load Case B
e valuated at height if $hall consist of applying the applicable posil ive wall
l!; ;;:: q" for windward walls, side walls, leeward walls, press ure from Figure 207-IIA or Fi gure 2.(J' )· I'J 10 th e
and roo fs o f enclosed buildings and for negati ve back o f the parapet surface, and appl yi ng Ihe :Ipplicab le
inte rnal pressure e va lua tion in partia ll y e nclosed negat ive wall pressure fro m Fi gure 207- i I A or Figure
buildings 207- 17 to the front surface. Edge and corner Wiles. sha ll
qi :::. q: for posi ti ve internal press ure eva luation ill be arranged as shown in Figu res 207- 11 thronl~h 207 -1 7 .
part iall y cilcloscd bu ildi ngs where heig ht z is GCp shall be detcnn ined for appropriate i''iO{ Ing le and
defined as the level o f the highes t opcning in the effec tive win d arca from Fi gures 20 7~ 11 Ih)'();II',h 207 ~ J 7.
building thaI could affect the positive internal If intcrnal press ure is present, both load t.::::·:;;.', ,' .hnuld bc.
pressure. For buildings sited in wind-born e evaluated un der positive and negati ve internal press ure.
debri s regions, glazing th at is not impact
res is(ant or protec(cd wit h an impact-resislant 207.5.13 Des ign Wind Loads on Open Bui ld ings
coveri ng , ~h all be treated as an opening in with Monos lo pe, Pitch ed , or Troughed Il oo fs
accordance with Section 207.5.9.3. For pos itive
inte rn al pressure eval uati on, qi may 207.5.13.1 General
conserva tive ly be evaluated at height " (q ; = q,,)
( Gel') :::: ex ternal press ure coefficient from Fi gure 207 · I 7 207.13. J.1 Sign Convention
(GC,,;) = internal press ure coeffi ci.ent given in Fi gure Pl us and min us sign s sig nify press ure ac tin g towa rd and
207-5 away from the lOp s urface of the roof, fcspeCl ivtdy.
q and qi shall be eva lu ated using exposure derined in
Sec ti on 207.5.6.3. 207.5.13.1.2 C ritical Lo ad Condition
Net pressure coeffi cien ts eN incl ude contrib utions from
207.5.12.4.3 Alternalive Design Wind Press ures for
Components and Cladding in Buildings with 18m
< 27m
<" top and boltom surf5ccs. All load cases shown for cnch
roo f angle shall be illv C'stiga led.
Alternati ve to th e req uirements o f Sectio n 207. S.12.4 .2, 207.5.13.2 Molin Wind-Force Resisting Systems
the design o f compo nent s and cladding fo r build ings wit h Th e net design pressure fo r the MWFRSs of l1)olloslopc,
a mean roo f height greater tha n 18m and less tha n 27 m pi tched, or troughed roo fs shall be dCh.·nllillt ~ d I,'! t!i~~
values from Figures 207-11 through 207- 17 sha ll be used following equat ion:
on ly if the heighl to wid th ratio is o ne or less (except iI:\
pe rm itt ed hy Note (, of Figure 207-17) an d 10'1. 207-22 is (207-251
used .
where
207.5.12.4.4 Parapets ve-lod lY press ure cvalu,l1 cd at mean roo f height II
=:
The dc:\ ign wind pressure o n (hc compollc nts and lIsi ng lh e ex pos ure as defi netl in Section
c huJdin g clc lllellls of parapel:-; shall be designed by the 207 .5.0.3 tlm t results in the. high~s! Wii ld l\lads
rol lowing equation: ror any wi nd direction at the site
G = gust crfect factor from Seclion 207.5. X
= net pressure coc nicicnt determined from Figures = projected area normal to the wind CX.CCpl where
207- 18A through 207-1 8D Cf is specified for the actual su rface area, mZ
For frcc roofs with an angle of phme of roof from 207.5.15.1 Rooftop Structures and Equipment for
horizontal 8 less than or equal to Y' and containing fascia Buildings with II :S 18((/
panels. Ihe fascia panel shall be considered an inverted The force 011 rooftop structures and equipment wi th Af
parapet. The contribution of loads on the fasc ia to Ihe less than 0.1 O/3h locat ed on buildings with Ii $ 18 III shall
MWFRS loads shall be determined lIsing Section be determined from Eq. 207-28, increased by a factor of
207.5.12.2.4 with If,. equal to q". 1.9. The factor shall be permitted to be reduced linearly
from J.9 to J.O as th e value of Aj is increased from 0.101317
207.5.13.3 Component and Cladding Elements to Bh.
The net design wind pressure for component and ctadding
elcments of lllonosJope. pitched, and troughcd roofs shall 207.5.15.2 Structures Supporting Antennas, C'lblcs,
be dClcnnincd by the following equation : and Other Attachments and Appurtenances
(207 -26) The wi nd loads on all stl1lclures supponing attachments
and appu11cnances including antenna· and cablc-
where suppol1ing structures shall take into account the wind
loads on all supported antennas, cables, 3l1achmcllls, and
q, = velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof hcight Ii appul1enances.
using Ihe exposure as defined in Section
207.5.6.3 that resu hs in Ihe highest wind loads
Guidance on wind loads on su pported antcllntlS shall be
for any wind direction at the site
obtained from the TfA- 222-G (2005) sta ndard unless
= gust-cffect faclOr from Section 207.5.8 sufficient suppolling evidence can be obtained from
= net pressure coefficient detcI1l1ined from Figures
recognized literature or frolll wind tunnel tests.
207-19A through 207-19C
Guidance on wind IOilds on supported cables shall be
207.5.14 Design Wind Loads on Solid Freestanding obtained from the ASCE Manual of Practice #74
Walls and Solid Signs
(G uidelines on Electrical Trclnsmission Line Structural
The design wind force for sol id freestanding walls and Loading) except that the gust effect factor for cables as
solid signs shall be determined by the followi ng formula : give n in Section 207.7.3. or unless sufficient su pporting
evidence can be obtai ned from recogn ized litermure or
(207 -27)
from wind tunnel tests.
where
Thc wind loads on suppo rt ed antennas, cables.
qh = th e velocity pressure evaluated at height II illlachments, ilnd appuncll,mccs shall be applied at the
(defined in Figure 207-20) using exposure III lo(.:ali on of support 0 11 the support i ng structure.
Section 207.5.6.4.1
Gf = gus t-effect factor from Section 207.5.8 207.6 Method 3 - ""ind Tunnel Procedurc
Cf = nel force coefficient from f-igure 207-20
A.I ::: the gross area of the solid frees tandin g wall or 207.6.1 Scope
solid sign , rn z
Wind tunnel tests sh<1 11 be used where required by Section
207.5.2. Wind tunnel testing shall be permitted in lieu of
207.5.15 Design Wind Loads on Other Structures
Methods I and 2 for any building or structure.
The design wind force for other strlJclllres shall be
dctcnnined hy the following equation: 207.6.2 Test Conditions
(207-28) Wind tUllnel les ts, or s im ilar em ploying fluid s olhcr than
air. lIsed for the determinat ion of design w ind loads for
whcre any building or ot he r stnlcl urc. sl1<l1l hc conduc ted in
accordance with thi s secti on. Tests for the determination
velocity prcssure CVillU <lt cd al hcight l of the. of mean and nuclllfliing forces ,mel press ures shall meet
centroid of <lfC<1 It, u sing C}lpOSUfe defined in .!l1 of lhe following conditions:
Section 207.5.6.3
G = gust -effect factor from Section 207.5.K J. Thc nalunll atmos pheric bmllld<lfY la ye r has been
C, = force (:oclTicicnls from Figures 207-2 1 through modeled III account fo r thc variati o n of wind speed
207-n wit h height.
Nill ional Stru clul',tl Code of lhe Phil i pplrH:!~ (-) :! , Edition Volul'll n 1
2 -3~ CHI\PTE'~ 2·· Minimum Design l.oeds
The 100ili damping ratio ,Bshall be taken as American Society of Testing and Materials (AS'j'M)
ASTM Inlemalional
fl =fl, + fl. ,,; 0.06 (207-43) 100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
207.9 Consensus Sland:t ..ds a nd O lher Referenced
J)(IClIlll c n(s
®
®
® @
© ©
Transverse
-.... -.... Longitudinal
Note.s:
Pn·_~SItH·.f ,\'/10""1 (11'(, applied (0 I/:e /101';:011101 fllld n~rlical proiectlO/l.s. for ('xpo.ntl"(' n. ell Ii =- 9 m. I .. = I ,f), om! K" ~ J.0. t ft/iust /()
mile!" t'omlilious usmg Equalioll 207-1 ,
2. 111l! (oad pa[Wr'II.f ,tltOlt'1I slwll he applied 10 ca(," ("orner of/he building ill lui'll n.t the reference c<mler. (S<'!: Figure 207·10;.
3. For III(' c/".tigll o/1I1t' fungi/lIllil/ol M WFRS use e'" 0°, alit/locale the wile ElF. Gill bOlluc/ory a llhc' mid-/(,l/gIII of lite buildillg.
,I. Load cases I (l1/(1 ]lII l/sl he checked Inr 25° < 8 ;S 45°, Load case 2 of 2Y' is provided OIl (V fo r i llll'f 1W/(1tioll betll'l.'efl 25 0 /0 30°,
5. PIllS alld mimls signs sigllify pressures acting IQ II'f) I't/ and away /ro m the p roje<.'{ed sur/aces. n!,I"pecl i l'<'Iy.
6, For ro(~{s lopC',~ o lllerihal! those shown, lineCJr illtl!l]m!(1lioll i,~ p ermifled ,
7, The IOta! horizoll/a//oad shall 1101 be less IIl(ln (hat determined by assllming /1s c () ill zones B & D,
R nil! zrme pr('ss lJl'es I'cpresen / the/allowing:
1/0rizOIllai pn).~,wrl' ;on£'s ,- Sum o/Ihe windward atul /eewllrd f/(~t {.W/Il q{ illferna/ (1l1d external) pressures 011 \Jer/ h:al
proje-clioll 0/'
A - t.:' ld w ne oj 1\'0/1 C - In ferior 1011(' O/ lI'CJII
IJ ., 1;'1/{1 :one (~rrooJ D - I nferior W il l! of roof
V('rl h'o//m'sslII'c Z(JII("f - N e! (.~lIm O./ill /I 'nIa} lind eXl er/lfIl) pres,wrl's 01/ horizonlo! projali(U/ (~f'
E - /;'m/ :!OII(' of lI'i"dl\'(lr(/ roo/ G - 11I1('rior 10m' 0/ wjllt/ward rmif
r -, /;'1/(1 ZO/l(' o./il'cward roof I I- Inferior zOlle o/It'cword 1'00./
y, 11'11,'1'<' =01/1' I~" rlr (J /il/I,\' /Ifl (/ nJ()/ overhang on the windward ,tid,' of thl' /milding, U,H' Emt (111(/ G OII for the prt~,nllrt! 011 II/{·
/lOri:OIl(lIl jlJ'(Jjl" IUJl/I!f lire (wC'r /tmrg, OverJumg,{ (III ,he I('cwftnl (IIUI,fitle edgt',f shl/II hal'(' ill(' luuir :Of/(' prl'~.flln> (fJlJ'Ii~'d,
/0, NmfllioJl:
If) IIl' I'('l'lrl II} le/ul horizontal di"'(~J/sioll or f) 411, whic/rel'f!r i,f slII/IIft,,-. hrt! /lilt I('.{,r ,11m/ ('il/lrr 4% HI it'U,I" /lIJri:mll(l1
tlilJJ('II,1'flnI or 0 , 9111 ,
II +, ML'(II/ rmd'/lI'iglil, m, ,'X('('pi ,hal em'e I!n);"/.fhalllw !ls('dln/' mq((lIIgit·x < In°,
e AlIl::le (?(,,//IIi(' (?(r()t~{Jhll" '10";;11111(/1. degrc('5,
Adjustment Factor
for Building Height and Exposure A
..__.
Mean roof ~ ..-.---,.
Exposure
_ height (Ill) B C D
4.5 1. 00 1.21 --.. . 1.47
~
--~
6.0 .. -~-.-.- - 1.00 1.29 1.55
7.5 1. 00 1.35 1.61
-~~-.---.~-
9.0 -.~-
1.00 1.40 1.66 -
11.0 1.05 1.45 1.70
12.0 1.09 1.49 1.74
13.7 1.12 1.53 1.78
15.2 1.16
--_._._--- 1.56
-~~-- - -1.81
---
16.8 1.19 1.59 1.84
18.0 1.22 1.62 -~~
WALLS AND ROOFS
Basic
Roof Vcrtical Pressures, kPa Overhangs
Wind
Speed
... -~ _..._ - - ---
(kril) E F G H Eoil G Oh
ISO -0.79 -0.45 -0.55 -0.35 -1.1 I -~
-0.79 -0.48 -0.55 -0.37 -1.1 I -0.87
-0.79 -0.52 -0.55 -0.40 -1.11 -0.87
25
-~------- ..-
30 to 45
-.----.----~~-
250 o to 5
-.----~--
10
._.._._---_15
.•. _-_.
20
[
-]
NOles:
Interior Zones
Rook· :zoo. 1 I w.... . z.on. "
• End Zones
RcloOf• . Zone 21 Waite · Ion. 15
,_ Pn's."ul'I' sholl''' art! applh'ti llorll/(//Iu ,11(' .\'/Irftu:e. for ('XI'(/,\ /I/"(: /J. flf h ""· 9111, I~. <.~ 1.0. and K:. = 1,0, A ((jll.tf 10 of/WI" cclIJdiljolls IIsing
Eqllllfirlll 207· 1. .
l'llis (lm/lllinlls siN,II'v .I'igllf/j' pressu re.l" (/eli,,}.! 10 1l"(/ l'd (l ml (tIl'IIY from {he .vllif aces. I'f!spec lil·/' /y. ,.
3. FOI" hip roo/i' wilh e::; 25°. lone 3 shall he 11'l'11I(~d as lOll e 2.
4. For 1'{li'l'I i" I' I"ind {/I'f'(I.I' h<.'/ \\ '(,(,II (hose ~ i \'(m . \'o /lle may he "lItl'l]l o/a(('d, o{/!('rwiSI' IIS(, fhe 1'' ','lI(: a,\'socia/ed will, (he lower e!ll'cli\lc wind
(/r('C/.
5_ Nllffllhm :
1/ ' " II} pern" 11 oj lellsi horizol/tlll dim"/Is ;oll 01" ()Ab. 1\"/tidw l'('r is xfI/(/lIer, bill 11111 I(':ro,f dum (, j/her 4 % o/ll'dS! horiZ(}lIIul dimel/sio/l m '
n.9111.
" •., M('(II1 11ll{1t6glt!. III m. I'XC'('/l1 thllt C'dVi' h (·I.~hf shalf ht' lI.w ·dIiw rO<~(lI /1glf!'" < /0°,
n =- All}.!'!' n/p/ml(' u(l'(wffrl)/11 Iwn:rJ/lIUI. rlt'W'j'I '.r,
Adjustment Factor fo r
· I an dE:. xposure, Ie
B til·Id·lO gs II. eIgHt
Mean roof Exposure
heigh! (m) B .. C D
4.5 ."_M•. 1.00 1.2 1 I A7
6.0 1.00 .- 1.29 1.5 5
7.5 1.00 1.35 1.6 1
-
9.0 1.00 l AO 1.66
11 .0 1.05 IA5 1.70
12.0 1.09 1.49 1.74
13.7 1.12 1. 53 1.78
15.2 1. 16 1.56 1. 8 1
-
16.8 1.1 9 1.59 1.84
18.0 1. 22 1.62 1.87
Ne! Desig n Wind Pressure, /J'Kh kP" (Exp osu re 13 at " =I0 111 with 1= 1.0 and Kd = 1.0)
Effective
Roof Basic Wind Speed V (kph )
Ang le
wind
(0)
Zone area
(m' ) 150 200 250
Figure 20 7· 3;). (co l1t 'd) - Design Wind Pressu res on Walls & Roo f ofE tlc loscd :
l3 uildings with It 5" 18 Ill , Components and Cladding ... Me thod I
Net Des ign Wind Pressure, POOh kPa (Exposure B at II =10 In with J = 1.0 and KJ = 1.0)
Effective
Roof Basic Wind Speed V (kph)
wind
Angle Zone
area
(deg) 150 200 250
(m')
I 1.0 O.4J -0.69 0.78 0.78 1.20 -1.9 1
I 2.0 0.40 -0.67 0.71 0.71 1.10 - 1.86
I 4.5 0.34 -0.64 0.62 0.62 0.95 -1.78
1 9.5 0.30 -0.62 0.55 0.55 0:85 -1.73
2 1.0 0.43 -1. 20 0.78 0.7 8 1.20 -3.33
e > 7 to 2 2.0 0.40 - 1.10 0.71 0.71 1.10 -3.06
27 2 4.5 0.34 -0.97 0.62 0.62 0.95 -2.71
2 9.5 0.30 -0.88 0.55 0.55 0.85 -2.44
3 1.0 0.43 -1.77 0.78 0.78 1.20 -4.92
3 2.0 0.40 -1.65 0.71 0.71 1.10 -4.60
3 4.5 0.34 -1.50 0.62 0.62 0.95 -4. 18
3 9.5 0.30 -1.39 0.55 0.55 0.85 -3.86
1 1.0 0.69 -0.75 1.23 1.23 1.91 -2.09
I 2.0 0.67 -0.7 1 1.20 1.20 1.86 -1.98
1 4.5 0.64 -0.66 1.1 5 1.15 1.78 -1.84
1 9.5 0.62 -0.62 1.12 1. 12 1.73 -1.73
2 1.0 0.69 -0.88 1.23 1.23 1.91 -2.44
0 > 27 2 2.0 0.67 -0.84 1.20 1.20 1.86 -2.33
1o 45 2 4.5 0.64 -0.79 1.1 5 1.15 1.78 -2. 19
2 9.5 0.62 -0.75 1.11 1.11 1.73 -2.09
3
- -_ . 1.0 0.69 -0.88 --- 1.23 1.23 1.9 1 -2.44
3 2.0 0.67 -0.84 1.20 1.20 1.86 -2.33
3 4.5 0.64 -0.79 1.1 5 1. 15 1.78 -2.19
-
3 9.5 0.62 -0.75 1.1 2 1.12 1.73 -2.09
4 1.0 0.75 -0.8 1 1.35 1.35 2.09 -2 .26
4 2.0 0.72 -0.78 1.28 1.28 1.99 -2 .17
4 4.5 0.67 -0.74 1.21 1.2 1 1.87 -2.05
4 9.5 0.64 -0.70 1.14 1.14 1.77 -1.95
4 46.5 0.56 -0.62 1.01 1.01 1.56 -1.73
Wall
5
..-.--_.-
". -
5
-_.•... _--_
1.0.. - .. - ."-", _-_
-0.26
..0.75 .
~_ .024.. __
. 1.35 1.35 2.09 -2.79
-2.60
- -- --_.
2.0_-_._.- 0.72
"- - -
1.28 1.28 1.99 .
5 4.5 0.67 -0.22 1.2 I 1.2 I 1.87 -2.36
-.
5
--_. 9.5 0.64 -0.20 1.14 1. 14 1. 77 -2.17
5 46.5 0.56 -0.62 1.0 I 1.0 I 1.56 -1.73
Figurc 207-3h (conl'd) - Design Wind Pressures on Walls & Roof of Enc losed
Buildings wi!h " .:S I R 111, Components <lIld Cladding - Method I
V{Z)
Z
-V(Z)
Speed-up Z -Spe
Hil
..-
._--- K, Multiplier K, Multiplier K3 Multiplier
3-0 -.-
3-0 All
HlL" 2-0 2-0 xlI~h 2-0 zlLh 2-0 2-0
Axisym. Other Axisym.
Ridge Escarp Escarp Ridge Escarp
Hill _._
Hill Cases
0.2 0.29 0.17 0.21 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.25 0.36 0.21 0.26 0.50 0.88 0.67 0.10 0.74 0.78 - 0.67
0.30 0.43 0.26 0.32 1.00 0.75 0.33 0.20 0.55 0.61 0.45
ro:-:lS 0.51 0.30 0.37 1.50 0.63 0.00 030 0.41 OA7 -- .. 030 -.~----
I. For m!l/('.\' HIL,. and :JL,. other {liall (ho.H' shoWI/, lineal' il1lerpolalioll is perm/lied.
2. {:O/"IfIL;, > 0.5, (lSSIIIII(, /-1Il.;, ,":0 O.5jbr ('valuating K,l1lJd slIh.I'(i!lIfe 211/or ,.,Jor {'will/Olillg K., alld K.l-
J. Mliltipli('rs al"e based 011 rhe (lSSl/lI1ptiOIl rllal approoches 1111' hill OJ" escarplII(,lI( a/ollg fhe dircctioll oj"maXi/llllfl1 stope.
4, Nolafion"
!l '" lIeighl o!"hifl or escalpmellt re/(I{il'(' 10 Ihe IIpwind /erroill, III,
/,1, c, /Ji.v/ollce IIfI\\'illli o(eres/ (0 where (he d((rerence ill g/'Olind del'atioll is hal(thc heighl o(lli/! or ('.I·CU/"PIIH'II/, II!
K I ~~ "-oclor 10 (U'COIIIl(./(){" shape <?({opographic/(!(I(/I/"e alld maximum .Ipeed-lip e(T('cl,
K: ,.~ Fac(or (I) IICCOIlllt/Of' reduclion ill .Ipeed-lip with dislance up1l'illd or dOll'lIl1'illd (!(c/"esl.
K, '" Factor /0 ac('olilltf()/" reductioll ill ,Ipeed,up wilh hdghl ah()\'(' /oud terraill.
X /)islilllce (1I/)lI'll1<1 01' dOll'l1l1'illd) /i'Olll Ihe ("J'esl to fhe hili/ding site, III.
Z " /feight olio\'(' /01'0/ ground Icl'('3. III
I' :~ j{orizon/ol aflcl/I{(IfiOIl flu'for.
/" ., lIeighl alll'/!II(1lionfllC/ol".
Equations:
II
Hill Shape Exposure )' Upwind Downwind
B C D of Crest of Crest
2-dimensional ridges (or valleys
with negative H in K,I(HlL,)
1.30 1.45 1.55 3 1.5 1.5
2-dimensional escarpments 0.75 0.85 0.95 2.5 1.5 4 ,
3-dimensional axisym. hill 0.95 1.05 1.15 4 1.5 1.5
,f
Figure 207-4 (cont'd): Topographic Factor, K" - Method 2
NOles:
I. Plus and minus signs s ign ify pressures acting toward and away from the internal sUI/aas.
respectively.
2. Values of GCp' shall be used with q, or q" as specified in Section 207.5.12.
3. Two cases shall be considered to determine 'he critical load requirements for the appropriate
condition:
(i) a positive value ojGCpi applied to all ifltemal sw/aces
(ii) a Ilegative value o/GCpi applied to all internal sUl/aces
PlAN ELEVATION
-_ q,r;Cp
1- L
ELEVATION ELEVATION
q"Gc"
L L---- L ----J
PLAN ELEVATION
~---
---------------,-_.
- RoofPrcSSUfe Coefficients, C" fOf use with Cfll
Wind
Windward Leeward
Direction
----_. -~-~--
----IT<-~)
~.--.-,---- - Angle, IJ Idegrees) Angle, () de )rces -
hlL 10 - IS 20 25 30 35 --_.45 > 60 10 10 15 >2 a
-0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0"'0* -OJ -0.5 -0.6
::: 0.25_.. -0.18 0.0· 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.010
Normal to ~---
-0.9 -0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0.0 • --05 -0.5 -0.6
ridge for ()
0.5 -0.18 ._-.:2.lL _ 0.0' 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.010
:: 10° -- -----~
-1.3 ** -1.0 -0.7 -0.5 -OJ -0.2 0.0' -0.7 -0.6 -0.6
_ _ "m :: I.Q_ -0.18 -0.18 -0.18 0.0 • 0.2 __ ~ 02. __ 00111 ...
Horizontal distance from
Cp
* Value is provided for interpolation purposes,
- windward edge
Normal to
::: 0.5
o to hl2 -0.9, -0.18
ridge for () 1-------.. hl2 to II _ -0.9,-QJL
< 10 and II to 211 -0.5, -0.18 ** Value can be reduced linearly with arca over
Parallel to > 211 -0.3, -0.18 which it is applicable as follows: ---_.-
ridge for
all 0 o to h12 .1.3 •• , -0.18
Area 1m')
< 9
Reduction Factor
.
1.0 .. _--
. __
1.0 ._-
'" > h/2 -0.7, ·0.18
23
---------,-_._---- 0.9 ------.-----~.,---.-
1. FIllS alld lIIillllS sigl1.\' sigll({I' pre,I'slIn's (lcling IOw(/rd (llId (1\\'oyJi'ollllhe .I'll/fixes, respeclively,
2, Linear interpolalion is permil(edJiJr value.t (~f LIB: hlL (llId () othel' Ihall shown. Interpolation shall only he ('wTied out b('tween )lo/ues o(the salll('.I'i
Where no valu(' o(lhe same sigll is given, assume O,OIbr illl<'I]JOlalio/l purposes.
3, Where 111'0 values ()I(~, are fisled, {hi.\' illdic(lies Ihal the windw(lrd roofslope is subjecled 10 eilher posilive or lIegalille pressures (lnd Ihe r()(!(SlnlCI,
shall he desigllcd/i:n- bOlh conditiOlls. II/IC'/potalioll for inlermcdiale ratios olhlL ill Ihis case shall ollly he carried oul belweel/ (~, l'allle,l' (~f like ,I'(f!,11
4. For mOllos/ope roo/i', {,lIlire rQ(~(,wljiJce i,l' eilher a windward OJ' leeward sill/ace.
5, Forjlexihfe huildingl' 115e appropriale G, a.l· delermilled by Section 207,5,8.
rI. Reier 10 Figure ]07- 7(i)r dOilies (llld Figure 207-8(i)/' arched /'oof~
7, NOlalion:
fJ ~ I IOl'i20nla/ dimension o(/Jlli/dillg, ill m, IIlNI,wred normal 10 willd direclioll
L Iloriwlllal dimC'nsion of buildillg, ill m, measured paJ'alfd 10 wind direclioll.
1/ M('(l1I r()(?( heighl in III, ex('c/ilihol ('()I'(' heighl ,dl(dl hI' us(,d/or 0 :S /() degn't's,
I- ,-- lIeighl (lho\!(' grollnd. m.
(! GII.I'I {:IT('CfJiICIOI'
({:, ,qlo VelocilY pn'x,I'lII'(', Nlml. ('wlll/llled (II /'("I,/)('Clilll' height.
f) Angle ofll{(lJI{' o(roor(rolll horizonlal, degrees.
,\' For IIWll.Hlnl roo/i'. the lop horiuJ!/1a1 sl/rfrU'(' (llId feew(Jrd il1cfil1('(/ Sll/jiU'1' ,I'half 17(' Irealed as lecw(lrd sllIjiwes/i'olll Ihe lah/(',
Fxn'jlls/ilr MWFR,<,,' ',I' ollhe l'oo(co/lsiSlillf: (~/mo/JIelll /'c,I'islingfmlllcs, IiiI' 10101 horizonlo! shear shalf 1/01 h(' 1("I's Ihll/l Iha! d('/erlllilled hi' Ii,', '('('{il
willd(hrc('s Oil l'oo(,wr(ace,I'.
III For mo/slopes gn'lIll'1' Ihal! 80", II.1'C (~, 0.8
I· o
:?J'l --0 ·1
A (h 0 10 =025)
+0. 8
A (hoID=O) \
'\
+0.4 1\ ~ ~ A (holD 2: 1.0)
+0.'
~ V
7~ ----
;;;-
~ / /
7 / V C (h"ID=O)
,,
1/ /
, / /
----- ____ ""
C (holD 2:0.5)
,-- ----::::.
" -/--
, ,,
\ / , /
>! "I,
"~ V
B (h"ID=O)
,
- -j-/
1/ "
/ --- - B (hoID2:0.5)
~1,6
\ ~ --~
V
~1.8
1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.' 0.'
Ratlo of Rise to Diameter, flO
Noles:
'Figure 207-7 External Pressure Coefficients, C~) for loads 011 Domed Roofs
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures for all Heights
Main Wind- Force Resisting System ·- Method 2
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2·46 CHIIPTE H 2·- Minimum Design Loads
ARCHED ROOFS
C,
Rise- ta-span
Conditjons Windward Center half Leeward
ratio, ,.
quarter quarter
Roof on elevated structure 0 < ,.< 0.2 -0.9 -0.7 -,. -0.5
0.2 < r < 0.3 • 1.5,. - 0.3 -0.7 - r -0.5
0.3 < r< 0.6 2.75/'-0.7 ·0.7 - r -0.5
Roof springing from grou nd
0<,.~0.6 1.4,. -0.7 - ,. -0.5
.
level
Wlrell tlse rise-Io-spar! ratio is 0.2.$r:S 0.3. alternate coefficients given by 6r-2.1 .thoU also be used/or ,he
windward Quarter.
Notes:
I. Values listed are/or Ihe '/cferminOliOIl oj average loads all main wincl force resisting systems.
2. Plus mId mimi.! signs Signify pressures actillg IOlVord and alVoy from the sill/aces. respectively.
J. For wind directed pamllcllo the (lxis oJlhe are/J. use pressure cocjficiellfsfrom Figllre 107-6 with wind dil'e('(ed parallel 10
ridge.
4. For components and cladding: ( I) AI roo/perimeter, use Ihe exlemal pressure coelJiciellls ill Figure 207·/ ,lI'ilh 0 h(Jscd
on spring line slope and (2)/or remail/ing roof areas. lise exlernal pressure coefflcielJ(J' of this table mrdtll)/ictl hy 0.87.
Figure 207 -8 External Pressure Coeffic ients, Cp for loads on Arched Roofs
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures for all He ig ht s
Main Wind- Force Resisting System/Compo nents and Cladding - Method 2
O. 75P >'Y
0. 75Pwx
CASE 1 CASE 3
0. 75Pwx
Case 1. Full design wind pressure acting 011 the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the structure,
considered separa tely along each principal axis.
Case 2. Th ree quaners of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each princi pal axis of
the structure in conjunct ion with a torsional moment as shown, co nside red separately for each principal axis.
Case 3. Wincl loading as defi ned in Case 1, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of lhe specified value.
Case 4. Willd loadi ng as defined in Case 2, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified value.
NOll's '
I. /){'.~igll wind pre.Hures/n/' windward and Ic('word fa ce.( slta" be d('lcrmilJcd in a/'{'on/ rlllct! wilh IIII' provi.riolls o(Sec/s. 10 7.5. 11.2. 1 {1m/
l fil. 5.ll.l . .l (IS (lflplirah/e l or buildings 01 (Ill hcighlJ.
1. /Ji(lj.!I'(/I".~ .f/lOlI' plan vi{' w'f olh/.i/dins:.
J Nolo/iflll :
Por I' I'll) ~. Willi/ward/aCt! dc.rigll fln's.W/l'e (JCfi11f; ill Ihe x. y prillC/lm/ (lxi.f. n·spl'(·f/\'('~)'.
PI r P I1 /. ('('lI·ardlucl' d(·,\' i~1I pre.uw'(' fiNing in tlu~ x. y prine/jNII (lx i..-. rt!.ljJt'ctively.
' ;'
(' ((' 1', ('1) -- /;'c'('('II{ricity/iw liJe x, y prillcil)(l{ (lxis oJtl1t! structure. f'(!.\pt:cliw ()'.
A"I ,- TO/ :~il/lJiI! /IIOIII/'Itt pel' IIl/il heiglrt (lClilll,: abolll a \'l'rl/ca! axi.~ Il/lhe blli/ding.
(~ ./ ...
..•... •... ,-....
......
,
•~ .. 0 ...
«) o
"
-- ,
«) / .. / ~~ o
~.~
.~
Transverse Direction
....
(j)
Longitudinal Dlrectlon
BASIC LOAD CASES
Figure 207·10 External Pressure Coefficients. Ge,.on Low· Rise Walls & Roo[,
of Enclosed. Partially Enclosed Buildings with" ,; I R m.
Main Wind· Force Resistin g System ·· Method 2
I. PIII.~ om' //lilli/X signs signiJjl pr(!.\'slIrc:.' (K/illg (oward and (Ill'oy/rom Ihe slIrjiu.y!.f, re.rpeOillcly.
1. For l'(lIU1~:" % other thl/1/ 11m.\'(: show". iiI/cor illfl'lpolofiolJ ;.1' pCl'lllif((!(J,
3. 711(' bllildillg must be designed for all wind directions rising Ih(, R loading patterns .f/IOWI/. nil! load pllltems are applh·t! 10 l'lll:h
ImiMi/1; {:orlll'r ill turllS as tile Reforellce Corner.
4 Comhil/o/iOlls o.f eXlema/ IIml illlcmal pre.ts/m!s (see Figure 107·5) shall be evalllnted a.f reqllired 10 obtain lite mOM .revere
londings.
5. For 111(' torsional/Dad cases showlI below. the pres.tures ii, lOlles desiglltl/ed wilh a "'" (1 T. 2T, IT. 4T) shaff be 25% of Ihe full
desigll willd prC.fsures (zolle J. 2. 3. 4).
6. £xce}Jlioll : Qlle -"ton'), buildings with len Ilion or equal 10 10 III buildillgs fWO slories or less framed wilh light !rollle CO lls/mel ion.
lIIul huildillgs fwo swries or Jess dcsignated willi fll'xible diaphragms lIeed not be designed for Ille larsiOllof lond cases.
7. TOl'siall(lllomlillg sha/J apply fa of( eight basic load palle,."s 1I.<:illg Ih e figllres below applied at cflch referellce comer.
8. Excepi for momt!lII.resistillg frames. tile total horizonlal sllMr shaJl IIot be less Ihon Ihat determilled by lIeglecting willd farces 011
raul sllI/ace.f.
9. For the (/t'.<:ign of tfte MWr"RS providing laleml rt'Sislanc(! i" a dil'eCli(J1I parallel f() a rit/ge. lille' orlor flat roO/f. lise 0 =- 0 0 atld
loca/e flte la/IC 213 boundfll)' (// rhe mid·lcl/glll olthe Imildillg.
10. The /'oolpr(!ssure coefficicfJ! GC~f. II'hell neg(llil'e ill zolle 2 or 2E. shall be applied ill zOlle 212 E. for a dis/(UJce [ram the edge 0/1'00/
equal 10 0.5 limes (he horizontal dimension 0/ rhe building paml"" 10 Ihe directioll ollhe MWFRS being design ed or 2.5 lim('s Ihe
efll'e heigill. hr. at Ihe windward 11'(1/1. whichever is less: lite remainder of zone 212 E. extending 10 {he ridge line .l'lwll usc rhe
preSS/Ire coe.Oicienl GC"lfiJl' zone 3/3 e.
j 1. No/(uiOIl.'
II ~ 10 pl~I,(,(!1/1 (~f Icasl horiZO/lwl dillle'lI.n'OIl or O,4h, which ever is ,fIIf{//"~r. hut 110/ It!!>.\, IIwll eit/wl' 4% (llc(Jsl horiZOIl/(J1 dimem';rm
01'0.9111
Ii <:MlUJII rno/height. m, except thm eIJl'(~ heighl slllJlI be uset/forO :; I(YO
e = Angle alp/one ofroo[from horizontal. degrees
-
Transvel se Direction On!£Ilt'LJdlnal Direction
Figure 207- 10 (conI 'd) EXlernal Pressure Coemcien'" GC"ro ll Low-Rise Willis & Roof.,
of Enclosed, Partia ll y Enclosed 8uildings \~ilh II :5' 18 m,
Main Wind-Force Resistin g System-Method 2
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volul11 e 1
).··SO CHAPTEF{ 2·· Minimum Design Loads
-1.8
c. J.-- c--
o(!) -1.6
(5)
-1.4
..-" ""-- i'--..
c: -1.2 -0
.-o
Q)
-1.0 -- f-- ~
---- ----: ~
.0.6
~Q) .0.4
o
o .0.2
o
~
:J +0.2
C/)
C/) +0.4
~ +0.6
a.
-ro +0.8
k- -
c: +1.0
L. 0&(5) L----- I----" ..- -
2X +1.2
WALLS
NOles:
l~l -14-
~
• .-- <V, ® -r--·------l-·- --,,,<v
- - - 1- - ----
,,
®
---" ----1-
,
I
,
I
I
I ,
I
0: I
,0 9
I
,
I
I
,
,
,
]
;1=-L<V""-.1.:·-_-""':O®c:..-_-_---'--_-...:®"'-_
_ · -_-:,-,0~3
.•.•
-3.0 ·2.S
C- 0 Rc bf
o ·La
oQ. ·5.
•
...c-
C>
\ C> ·3 .0
• 0 u' ar an g ?'
Q)
"(5
·u
\ • \
!i:Q)
-2.0
0 \
-2.0
•
.,." 1--' • f------.
o -1.8 f----.- I~ ~.-
o 0
\
·u
S~&@-
f!
:J
_1.2
~ -:--
..
-
,\
·1.1 •
"-
''"~" -1.0
--
-1.0
<.,
1"-
..-
a. < .•
• \ - .,.,
tv
....c
< .• f-- tv
E
....
0
...
< .•
S .,..... f-0®·{i)
o
:2:1
Q)
)(
w
0.1 0 .9 1 .9
+aJ~
0.1
.,---' 0.9 1 .9
-
4 .6 9 .3 18.6 46.5 92 .9
GABLE ROOFS 0 :s t
No/e,\".'
Fig ure 207-1 113 External Pressure Coem c ient', Ge" on Gable Roofs
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with" " 18 III
Co mponents and Cladding - Method 2
National Stru ctural Code of th~) Philippines 6 'h Edition VOl lHl'l8 1
2·52 CHAP TEr< '2 .- Minimum Design l.oads
I I I I
I I I I
I I I r
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e
1:-1-._.-._ ._....J]
I I I I
(3)1
r
CD 1(3){3)1
I I
CD I@
I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
t= ®i-(J)-:®®:-®-:®
I I I I
.,..
.. ,.
- ' r-
·z
·z .4 ®
O
C-
"
(!)
..J
.,
c ., .•
·z .2
-2 "" " -+ .....
z.O C-
'0 ,
.8 ., .7
O
(!)
it3o ., .4
. .• -Q} - ..J -4 . • -'-r-'-- ~'
_.
......
.,
"-
.,
C -3. 81-@-.----..
-3.7
o .2
"" 1.'
........
'0 ·3 .8
-\
-+--
-- I-
.,e ... ..
·1 .0 -(f if ·3. 4r..-..
:J
Ql
o -3. ,
o -3 .0
'\
'"
E ... 4 - e .,.8 _.
0..
iii
... Z
:J
''"" •
.,. '\.
.__.. 2.'
...c 0
-_.
- e z ·Z. 4
® -+ _. -
S ...
...
z '0.
I- = .." ..3• 0.. .2.
-2.0 .,-. __ .....-;: .
Z.,
...e : -(j)-@&(F' to
...C 0 .1 0.9 1 .9 4 .6 9.318.6 46.592.9
I. Vertical senft! dC/JOit's Gel' to be Il,H:d II'llh q~ . lIori:mulIl salle del/ofes eIfective wind area, ill !illll(Jl'~' 1JI('lt" :", III I,
2. sigl/s signify p""ssw 'cs (Iclillg IOlI'ord (lml (lway/rom III(' .wlI/nC('.f. r('.o:pf'("(jW/),.
PillS (llId 1i ! :II11S
J. E(u:h component .{Iwl( be dl'SIgllcd fnr fllllximlim pn.nfil'(.' (lnd " ego/ille I'res,u/I"(·s.
4. Vallles t!fGCpfor roof OI't·rh(lIlg.f il/ell/rle pl'C",r.urre c(1rltributiolufl'om bOlh IIppt'r /lilli/ower slIr{f/(;(·....
5. For hip roo!'; willi 7° < () ~ 1 r,
edge / r idge sirips and pressllf"(' c()l:fl/cit'llIS {"r ridJ.:.{•.r l!fguh/('d midi- shal/lIppi!' 011 I'uell hip.
(j /,'or '"i' w l?fr wilh 0:::: 25°. Wile' 3 ,r/mll h<'/rc·u/c·t! II.r ZOI/C' 2
7. No/a fioll.\·:
Il '" If) jlern'lI f ~rf('(lsl hOri201l(liI {1i1ll ('n<:i(lII.~ or (J.t/II , II'hkh{>I'(!" is .H1l11l1er. hilI Iwl !t'ss thall ('illl('l" 1% '!{ it'rUI "/lri~(mllll dillll'l!..iu;;
orfJ.9 m
h ,~ Mean 1'(J(!f Jwight. m. ext'ept thtlt ('IH '(! /r etg"l .I·hall be fl.snl jiJI' (}:5 f()Q
{} ~~ Angle (~f plane f!f 1'01!lfmlll horizonw/. IJ('gl'('{!'\'
ftft/ft
-j- ®_l® ®L ~ JQ2
:.r- &321__
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I I
I I I I {)
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I h
I I I I
@I G) r®@1 G) r®
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..... _---_ .._..... __. _ - - - - '
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
·1'.'~---·---'-"---~-r-~-~~
a.
Q ._-
(!)
..r
I:
w, = 0.25 to 0.7.1
W
STEPPED ROOFS
Note,I':
011 Ihe 101l'('r/cl'('/ o/jla(, stepped 1"IJ()f.i· ,\"11011'11 ill Figure 2()7· /2, the ::011(' d("I'igllolioll.\' olld prI'SJIII"(' coefficiellts ."/;ml/i "! i
1/ /J shalf appzv, except lliar at the 1"()(!/~lIp"er 11'(11/ inICl".I'CClioll(s). ::0111' 3 .\'ha// he {reared (IS zone 2 (lnd ZOIW ) shu!! h, 1,'01('(/ t:x
ZOIl(, 1. Posifin' wlll/('.\" of GC:~. (,(/110/ to tho.\'{' /hl" walls ill Figur(' ]{)7·j fA sl1r11/ apply (III (he cross·hatched (/n'O.l' sholl'/! in Figure
207-12.
2. N%/ivlls :
h .~ 1.5111 ill Figure 20l· f 2. hllll/Of greater fhall 30 m
h '" Meall J'()(!f height. //I
hi ,- hi or II! ill Figure 207-12: II'~ h/ -j 11 :: h, :0: 3 III, h/h ,~ (U /0 0.7
W c", /Juilding width ill Figure }07-/2
W,'''' If / o/" W!or WI ill Figu/"e207/2. If ~' IVI + W., or WI -I We -1- WI W/Il' '" n.25 {0 0.75
o ""' Angle o(plane (!{/"()(?fli·o/11 horizollfal. d('grees
,,
:®
,
,
1 -_._.!!W
--- --
_ __
·3.0 -
·2 .6
@
-_.. 1
30'< 0 S 45'
1 2.6
. 2.5
·3 .0 ·2 .6 --
0. ·2 6f-®- I 0. ·2 4i-<?>
0-
10'<0 <30" 2.7
() ·2 () ·2 .2 -- -- ~
,
C,!)
....c
·2 .4
·2 .2
@ "
.........
'\.. 2.2
C,!). .2.0
....C · 1. B
(j)
'\.. '-
2.0
1 .7
·2 .0
" .1.6 ..- -
.~
-'"
Ql
() . 1. 4------ _.-
f () ·1 .6
L'\..
I C!l ------ 1.7
ifQl ifQl · 1. 2 -, -- ..
\
I
0
()
·1 .6
·1 .4
·1 .2
-- ----- - 1.6
1.1 o
()
· 1 . 0 ..
<{) . 8
_. .: -- f---
--- _ .
..- 1 .1
~ ·1 . 0 6 -
:l <{). B 4
Vl
Vl .{). 6 2
~ .{). 4 0 -
!l.
.{). 2 - - -- - · - · -- I - - - . +0. 2
(ij
0-'--
_ -- _.- f--.. roc +0 .4 - ·--- -- I- .- - - - I·-
.- _.
.-~-
C
.- -
L. <{). 2 · - -···· _ _·-- .... - -- .. L. 6--·-
....x
Ql
- _. --- 1- ....x
Q)
W
+0.4
+0. 6
(j)@&@
---- I=- +0.4
-_. - - +0 .• W
+0 .8
Q)@&@ .
+ 0.8
1.0
+0.8
0.1
---- 0 .91 .9 4 .69.318.646.592.9
0.91 .9 4 .69.318.646.592 .9 0 .1
figure 207·13 EXlemal Pressure Coe m cicnls, Ge" on Mullisl'an Gable Roofs
of Enclosed. Parlially Enclosed l3uildings wilh " ,; I Rill
Componen ts and Cladding ·- Method 2
National Structural Code or the Philippines 6U1 Edition Volume 1
2··56 CHAPTE:H 2 -.. Minimum Design l.oads
I l-:r -3.0
® i-----~-----L~ ~L
-2.8
·2.6
® - -2.6
, ,, ,' '
O
C-
·2.4 K
I :
N ____
,, ,I, ~ -2.2
1M '
0: ,
,:
, ,
CD1
!4--
,
;~
,-
;(2
:,
-2.0
-1.8
·1.6
®
®
~
'" '" -1.B
-1.6
-1.5
-.,--f·----:,
,, ,, -1.4 f---W "'---
,, ~ -1.3
r
, ·1.2 -1.2
<:t ' , -1.1
""-->__ L_®_' . J.i_- _-_- _®_;_- _-_- _-!. .r_~. . .J- - ~ -1.0
-0.8
1-0
-0.6
-;
...c: -0.4
~ -0.2
W 0
All ZONES
+0.2 <
+0.4 +0.:
o+---=::,.,
,--------,1
+0.6
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
1--1. ~w --~
MONOS LOPE ROOFS 3" :::: 0 :::: 10"
Noles :
Figure 207-14A External Pressure Cocfticients, Gel' on Monoslope Roofs 3° < e ~ 10°
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with h ~ 18 III
Components and Cladding -- Method 2
'--.
I~ I
I
(-------------1
I I
""
IdJ II II
, I
I I
I I
I I
---~ I
.J'0'ii~~~~=l=+=~
I I
I I -2.9
I I -2.8 i="®
~ I: CD I
:~ -2~ 1-----1--+":---1-+--1---
I I
I I CL
-2.4 f------I-i-"--',,,I--I--+--l--I
I I
U -221----+-+-+-+-r---j-1
.---I----~ : C)
""
IdJ
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
II
·l
-2.01------11--1--+-+-1--- -
·I! 1-=:----- ---1--+--+-1---1---
-1.8 r@~----k::,,-+-i-
.. .0
. --. - 1 - ·1.6
"
~e
I I
L _ __ ______ _ __ J
·IA -~I- ----1--+--j
: (2J ~ I---r.;-------·-I~ r------
.~1.~ I--{B_l-_--_-~_-_-·-+·,~-~--~--:O·--t~=t'---=·::t=t=!~:H
.1.3
::l
::l
e
C-
-Ur--··-----I---
-j).8 - - - - - -- - - - - ---I--- - - - - -
as
E - j ) A -
S . C 1 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -.-
0-·----·----- -- . _- --- - 1---
~2t~~~~t=j:~~j==t=~~
+0.4 ALLZON"RS --- m
9+--""1
h
Effective Wind Area, m'
NOles '
3 I>IIIS lil/d lIli/IIIS .\·igll.~ sigllil.i- pres,l"IIl"e.\' (lclillg toward and (/\\·oy./i·olll fire .I'III/OC(,S. res/wclil'ely
4. each COIII/HIII('111 sh(lll he d(,s(i~lIed/()r mi/ximllll! po.vil/\'e (lild I/egalil'{' prex.I"II/'e.\'.
5. NO{(J/joll.\'.
/I If) /)('l"n'lIl o(l('os( /wri::()Iliu/ diml'lIsionl' OJ" O.4h, w/iic/iCI'cr i ,l' .1'11)(///('1', hilt 1I01/('.\'.\' thall ('ililc/' 4 pcrcCllt o({ensl horizontol
dimcnl'i()11 or O. 9 111
II Mel/II roof'/I('(I!,lir,1II
Jj' Iluitdill,!!. lI'ill/h , III
o ": Ang/e o(p{(J/1(' 1!/mo(ji'Olll hori::oll/ol, dc,!!.n'I's
Figure 207-1413 External Pressure Coefficients, GC~J 011 Monoslopc Roofs 10° < eS; 30°
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with II :s; J 8 III
C()Jl1pol1cnts and Cladding .- Method 2
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2·58 CHAPTEH 2 - Minimum Design Loads
...
... 4 ~(SPANAI
, 3 ..
-4 .1
-4 .0
------..
~.--. @i.-----·~m--mf® 3::: ·a. • '-
__ : I ·3 .
• \
r--
! ,: ·3.
·a.
• ® - \ "'.2
1, 1, 2
®!;
:
,
,,
ii"'2
0 ) ,i'6
,
'
:,
C-
()
Cl
·3.0
." •
." •
@(SPANB.C & DJ
'" .~
I,
--
~ -- -2 .6
.,.•,
·2.
, ..;
, ' c: 0)
" \
r--
~
;,;i
1
j
~i· ··- --®·-·---· --Kr 3:::
: QI
'0
IEQI
o
-2. 0
·1.
·1,
•
•
~
-1.6
()
~
::>
III
-1.4
-1.2
-1.0
'" "-- ~
.-
-1.1
III
~ -<l .•
0- -<l ••
til -<l.'
c:
.... -<l,2
~ o
x
W +0.2
I-- . . ! . . .w- - - I +0,'
+0 .• ~ -- - +0.4
+0 .7
-- .-
+0 .• +0.6
@
+1.0
+1 .1
+1 .2 [--®
+1.4
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
SA WTOOTH ROOFS
No r!'!.;
Wind
- f
Wind
ho
I· o ·1
DOMED ROOFS
Notes:
I. Verlical gale denotes (J(~, to be used I\'ilh (j(h{) + J) where (fit) + f) is [he heigh! althe lOp of lire dome.
2 PlU,I" and in us signs signify pr(,ssures aClil1g /oll'ard and awayjmln IIie SUI/aces, respec/il'ely.
III
3 Each componeili shall be designed for moximulIl posilive and negative pressures.
4 Values app~l' (o 0::: h,ID:5 0.5. 0.2 'S.jlD:-:: 0.5.
5. () '" () degrces 011 dome spring lillc. () ." 9() degree.\" (II dome celller top pOinf.I is 1I/('(JsuI"cdji'om spring tim' fo lOp.
10 100 500
-3.6 ---
·3. 4
·3 . 2
® -- .3 .2
'--.....
·3.0
a. '--..... -- -
·2 .8
U
(!) ·2. 6 " - --
~
i'-.
· 2 .4
'-- . 2 .3
·2. 2
-2.0 ~--
r--------..
® '--
·1. 8 · 1 .8
·1 .6 "'---- ~ · 1 .6
·1.4
·1 .2
ill
--- --- '" '--.....
-1 .4
,i +1l.6 - +0.6
,,, +1l.8 f-@&® J-- j-----' +0.9
,, +1 .0
, 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9 .318.8 46.592.9
.., ,--
®i @) ~
, Effective Wind Area, m2
,,
... ,
WALL ELEVATION
WALLS AND ROO FS
Noll'S:
L L
Wind Wind
Direction Direction
=>
y= 0° r- h
<==
y = 180°
I. Cm- allti (~L dl'/I/wt III~I JlY('S.rIII"('.~ (C<JI1lribulioll!;ji-om lOp (wd haltom !iW!W."(I.I) jar windward ami leelVal'd halfo! roo/sill/ace.... re.fjll!t'fiwfy.
]. Clt'flr wind flow dCfl/OI('s rdolil'e1y /IIW/Jsfrucln/ldnd fiow with hlockng(~ It!SS rhall 01" equal (0 50%. Obsfructed willdflow denoles objects ludow
roof illhihilillg lI'iml/low (::> 500/0 blockage).
.i. For I'll /lies off) bmw('{'11 7.5 0 alld 45°, linear illtC!'1'oiflliol/ is permiued. For WIllies v/O le.fs l/tall 7. :; .... lI.ft: ''',lIlos/ope roof /0(1(/ cm:Oicit'III ....
<I PIlls a1l(/ mitlllS sf}.:lI.\' .flgnj[v Im',H"lwe:; acting lUII'llI'd:; iJlld aWlly/rom the top rQ(ifsUliace. I"c.tp('clil'cly.
5. All /aod ClI:;t'-$ sholl'lIfiw (>lIdl roof{1/1J:le sholl /It' I//\'(':;{igatl'd
I'i. Notatiolls:
I. "CO= IIwizoll(al (iimt'llsiOIl.r ofrm!{, 1Itl'(lSfIlWI ill lire a/I)II!! WII/d direclio/l, m
II -"'0 Meml rim! heighl. m
)' '"" /JJr('cfioll flwilltl. drf,I'I!I'.t
n '" Augle t?{phllll' o/moffi·{)IIIIl()ri;::tmla/. dI'W'('('s
Wind
Direction
=>
1=0
0
I. C'H fllld C"'"L t/('IJ()/C' I/e'l {JH!UIIH'!, (cIJII(ril"'fioll.f from /(If! (lild Imllam sfll/acC'.f) /rw willdw(/rd alld h'(!ward 1111 If of mq{ sUlfaces.
r(".~fI(~(· ri ' -1'~1'
1. Clenr II-jllllj/o\\' (Ii.'l1o/c's rl:'faln'('~)' flIl()h.W1ICfc'(/ ."iml jlOII' willi "hkkagl' it'....f dum or equ(ll 10 50% Oh.f/I'U('/l't/ wind JIm" ,',
o"jet'ls heloll' roo/inhlbifing wi"d flow (;, 51Y',1, blockage).
J For I'all/('.\" 11/0 bdll'('I'1f 7.Jt> IIml 45 °, fill/~tlr ;1//1''1)o/l1liol/ ;.f pcrmiffl·d. For ndues of 0 les.f ,hUll 7,.s", lise mmmslfJpl' r,;.,. .".
l"OC'{liC;f'IILf.
4. PIf;s (llId JII i/llls sigllx !.igll!ly pr(',~,ql1"l'~ tlc ling IQII'(ll'ds nllcl (lway/rollllhe fOp ru0.f.mr!il('(', /'(,,\'Pl!('fil'(!~I"
5, AII/llod I '(m'.~ s/'m..,1 for cal'll m~fllng/(' ,~/UlII hI' illllf.'slignlcd,
(j, N"fllfioll.c
I . ." l/orj:;()I/fa{ dill/I'IIS;OIH o{l'tllIl 1I/('f1.mrnl i ll III(' a/olll! wil/d din'clio l/, III
II "" Me(ln nm{ heigili. III ' .
;' :'0 /)in'{'/ioll o{ll·il/(l. de}!I'('(',\'
(} " AII,~/I' ofpiml(' lI{n)t!(/i 'om 1101'1::0111(11, t!cgl'l'I'.\
Wind
Direction
=>
1=0'
"
Wind Directi on y - 0°, 180°
Roo r Obstructed Wind
Load Case Clear Wind Flow
Angle, 0 Flow
C NII' CNI• CNIf' eN/.
A - 1.1 0.3 -1.6 -0.5
7.5 0
--_.._. B -0. 2 1.2 -0.9 -0. 8
15°
A - 1.1 OA - 1.2 -0. 5
13 0. 1 1.1 -0.6 -0.8
A - 1.1 -0. 1 -1.2 -0.6
22.5°
13 -0.1 0.8 -0.8 -0.8
A -1 .3 -0.3 -I A -0.4
30°
B -0. 1 0.9 -0.2 -0.5
A -1.3 -0.6 - IA -0.3
37.5°
B 0.2 0.6 -0.3 -OA
A - 1. 1 -0. 9 -1.2 -0. 3
45°
B .. 0.3 .. _.0.5 -OJ -0.4
~ .. -.---..-. _ _____ .~ _ ~ ~L_
I. C"fr (ll/d CA1. dCllofC' lief pr('SJIII'("S (colllriblllioll.{ from lOp tlIUI IJO/(om .nll!u('e.f)Ior wil/dward all d leell'tJnl halfof rc1()f.5/lrfilCC.~.
re.fJ)(!C:lil'(!~;"
!. C/(>nr wmff flow d ellOU',l' relo(/I'('(v 1fl1O/J.<;iI1lC/ed ",indflow wilh blockage less thatl or eql/a/lo 50% ObslIll(:lc:d 1I'illd/lo11' dC1ltJ/t's
obJect.r be/ow roof ;uhibitillg w /1Id flow (> 50% blockage).
). For \'(I/II("J l~rO belln'c'/I 7.5 0 (111(/ 45°, linea/' jl/((,I'flo(ution is ,wrmiued. For I'(lhu'.t 010 less th(lll 7.5°, N.H! mOllosfop<, r()(~rlotld
(·oefJichmu.
" I'{ux ll lld lIIillll.\· .1'iW IS siJ: I1 (l.i' p n!.\'.mr('s (le/ illg lowards mId away/ro ll1 l he lOp m o.r.~ 1IJf(j(;l', re.ljJ('clil,eI)'.
5. All food (' (I.''' '.\' show/1 fhr ('(I e), /'01?f angle .\'II(lfI he if/I'C',\·ligal('d.
fi. NOla/jOlIS:
I, ~: 110l'i1.IIIIIIII dill"'llsiolls I!f I m~t: fI1 ('(I.I'II/'et/ ill ,hl' a/o il!!, wind din'('(ioll. //I
11'-- M('wl /'(I(~r"dgh f. m
;' ". /)iq 'ClffllI (~rll'illd. (/t'gr(,l'I;
fJ Alm~It'llfJlI(JII(, ofmo/fi'of1l Iwrizol/(rll, df'grC'C'.\·
<C
Monoslope
l} Wind Direction
y=90·
l} Wind Direction
y=90·
l} Wind Direction
y=90·
Horizontal Obstructed
Clear Wind Flow
D istance [rOll1 Roof Angle Wind Flow
Load Case -------_._-_._-
Windward ()
Edge eN eN
.-.. - ~ .- - - .•-
a L
3
2
1
2
3
'-_._ - - - - - h e
-jalal--
l -.----~--.-.---I-.
Roof Effcctivc eN
Angle Wind Clear Wind flow Obstructed Wind Flow
0 Area _ .2.""C 3 Zone 2 Zone I Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1
- -
< a' 2.4 · 3.3 1.8 ·1.7 1.2 - 1.1 I -3.6 0.8 - 1.8 0.5 - 1.2
0' >0\ < 40 2 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 - -1.1 0.8 - 1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 - 1.2
> 4a"2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 - 1.1 1.2 - 1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 - 1.2 0.5 -1.2
< {[2 3.2 -4 .2 2.4 -2.1 1.6 - 1.4 1.6 -5.1 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
7.5" >n2, < 4a 2 2.4 -2.1 2.4 -2.1 1.6 -1.4 1.2 -2.6 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
> 4a 2 1.6 -1.4 1.6 - 1.4 1.6 -1.4 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -I. 7 0.8 - 1.7
< a' 3.6 -3 .8 2.7 -2 .9 1.8 : 1.9 2.4 -4.2 1.8 -3 .2 1.2 -2. 1
15° . >a~ . .~~_cC._ 2.7
> 4a'.. •.. - iT ~ 1.8
-2.9 _..._---
2.7 1. 8 - 1.9 1. 8
- -..2'L. __
-3.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2 .1
----
-_._- ----_
< oJ
_ ---- - 1.8 .. -1.9._-
- -- 1.2
---- -:..l4- -2.1 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1
5.2 -5 3.9 -3. 8 2.6 ·2 .5 3.2 -4.6 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -2.3
30° > 0 2, < 4a 2 3.9 ·3.8 3.9 -3.8 2.6 -2.5 2.4 -3.5 2.4 -3 .5 1.6 -2. 3
> 4a 1 2.6 ·2.5 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3
< (J l 5.2 -4 .6 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -2 .3 4.2 -3.8 3.2 -2.9 2 .1 - 1.9
45° >a~, < 4(1' 3.9 -3.5 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -2.3 3.2 -2.9 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
> 4(12 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.1 -1.9 2. 1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9
N o les:
.~ . CompO/WI/IS /11/(/ daddiltJ! c'/ellle-1I1s shnlJ he ,Ic~\·i.f!,m·d/m· positive' nlld lIeRlIlil't' ""f!,~SI'rt' ("oe.Uici('lll.\" showl/,
fI, Nora/il)/l,I':
(/ '"" jO ';-'r; (!( I"{/'\'I hOl'i:nlllfil rlill /Clfs irllls Ill' 0..111, whid,,·w·1' i.l· smaller hill /lO( (e,I',I' Ihrlll 4% (l(er/sf hm'/zoll/al diIlH'"Siofls or n,9 ",
" ,\fe{/II I'of!(h cighf, III
'- 11111';;;1111/(/1 dimell ,l'jOiI O{hllildillg IIIctl,wreri ill '/llolI).! wind din ·' nioll. III
f) ,~ AII}!./l' (lli i/mll' flf /'Imf limll horiUIllff/I. (h'.~n·l"~
111
Nationa l Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume ,1
2-66 CHAPTER 2· Minimum Design Loads
, ......... L ··········
3
2
1
2
L
" .. ......
-
······1
2
L
--1
1 1
2
3
0<10'
Roof Effective eN
An g le Wind C lear Wind Flow Obstnlcted Wind Flow
0 Area Zone 3 Zo ne 2 Zone I Zon e 3 Zone 2 Zone I
< a' 2.4 -3.3 1. 8 - 1.7 1.2 . I. I I -3. 6 0.8 - 1.8 0.5 -1.2
O· >a 2 , < 4a 2
--
1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1. 1 0.8 · 1.8 0.8 - 1.8 0.5 - 1.2
--
> 4a 2
< a'
1.2
2.2
- 1.1
-4 .2
1.2
2.4
·1. 1
-2. 1
1.2
1.6
- 1.1
-1.4
0.5
1.6
-1.2
·5 .1
0.5
1.2
- 1.2
-2. 6
0.5
0.8 -1.7
.:-#-
7.5° , < 4a
2 2
>a 1.7 -2. 1 2.4 -2. 1 1.6 - 1.4 1.2 -2.6 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
> 40 2 l.l -1.4 1.6 - I. .4 1.6 - 1.4 0 .8 .1.7 0.8 - 1. 7 0.8 -1.7
< a' 2.2 -3. 8 2.7 ·2 .9 1.8 - 1.9 2.4 -4 .2 1.8 -3 .2 1.2 -2. 1
15° >0 2, < 4a 2 J.7 2.9 -2 .7 ·2.9 1.8 ·1.9 1. 8 -3.2 1. 8 -3.2 1.2 -2. 1
> 4a2 1. 1 - 1.9 1.8 -1.9 ' 1.8 · 1. 9 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2 .1 1.2 -2. 1
< a' 2.6 -5 3.9 -3.8 2.6 -2.5 3.2 ·4.6 2.4 -3 .5 1.6 -2.3
30° >a 2 , < 4(12 2.0 -3.8 3.9 ·3.8 2.6 -2.5 2.4 ·3 .5 2.4 -3 .5 1.6 ..:g..
> 4a 1 1.3 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3
< a' 2.2 -4.6 3.9 ·3.5 2.6 -2.3 4 .2 -3.8 3.2 -2.9 2.1 - 1.9
45° >a 2 , < 4a 2 1.7 -3.5 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -2.3 3.2 -2.9 3.2 -2.9 2.1 - 1.9
> 4a 2 1.1 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2. 1 -1.9 2.1 · 1.9 2.1 · 1.9
Nul!',\':
L L L
0<10'
DF
l_--_--_---_ L_--:-~-=----
O;e: 10'
!
!\
I Roof
Angle
Effccl ive
W ind Clea r Wind Flow
eN
Obstru cted Wind Flow
0 Area Zone 3 Zo ne 2 Zone I Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone!
- ---- - ---,.-- -
< a' 2.4 - -3 .3 1.8 - 1.7
---_. 1. 2 - I. I I -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 - 1.2
0° > (1 2, < 4(/2 1.8 - 1.7 1.8 - 1.7 J.2 - 1.1 .0.8 - 1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 - 1.2
> 40 2 L2 - I. I 1. 2 - 1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 - 1.2 0.5 - 1.2 0.5 -1. 2
< a1 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 I -4.8 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
7.5 0 >a , < 4a 1
2
1.8 -1.7 1. 8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
> 40 2 1.2 -1. 1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 - 1.1 0_5 -1.6 0.5 - 1.6 O.S -1.6
< a' 2.2 -2.2 1.7 - 1.7 1. 1 - I. I I -2.4 0.8 - 1.8 0.5 - 1.2
-- >a>, 4(12
15° 2 < 4(1 2
1. 7 .... - 1.7
.-- l~ -I 7 1. 1 -1.1 0.8
---_. - 1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
...l:.L - I . 1 I I -I I
--',,:l- - 1.1 0.5 - 1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1 .2
30°
--~-
>1I J., < 4a? 1.4
--'-4-
-2.6
-2
1.4
1.4
-2
-2
0.9
0.9
-1-~1- .
-1.3
I
0.8
-2.8
-2. 1
0.8
0.8
-2.
-2.1
1 0.5
0.5
- I.~-
- 1.4
> 40 2 0.9 - 1.3 1.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.5 -1.4 0.5 - 1.4 0.5 - I .4
< (11 1.6 -2 .2 1.2 - 1.7 0.8 - 1.1 I -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0. 5 -1.2
45° > 0 , < 4a 2
2 1.2 - 1.7 1.2 -1.7 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 -1 .8 0.8 - 1.8 0.5 - 1.2
> 4a 2 0.8 -1.1 1.8 -1. 1 0.8 - 1.1 0.5 - 1.2 0.5 - 1.2 0.5 - 1.2
NOles :
I. eN tinfOIl' 111'1 pn's.wrl'S ("ollfri /)/ffilUl .,-/nll1/ lOp (111(/ iWl/om ,n uf(u:('.'i)
1 Clem' lI'imlJlm,' t/l' IW(t'S n'llIfil 'l'~)' /limbs/melt'" willi/ jim ." with h/tlci;ag(> k~.\· I"f1Il ,II' ,'q ual II} 50%. Ob.~fnl( ·1I!11 lI"illd lloll"d('l/ ofes objt'cls hdoll'
mof il/!tihi/Jlll: \I'illdjl()\\' ( > 5fJ% hfo('/'(IJ:('j.
J. For l'<IIIIe'.I' a/II ath ..,. thflll Ihoxe .,-llt/WI!. /il/('/Ir ill/("1;o/fllioll ix p"nllilleel
'1 1':1i. 011(/ m im(.\" .figtls .vigll/ji' pH's.wn's /tefmg /o 1l'IInls (11111 aWflyji'()/11 the tol' nu!/slIIj(/Cl'. r,-~~p( '(·fi ndy.
5. COl~I"(}I/(·IIf.,· ({lid claddi ng ( 'h·fI/('''/.~ .I}/(/II II(' dl'.{iglwd./i}l· posilil 'e (/mlll('gl1fil'I' preS."ll'(' " oeOiCI{'II/,f slm,.'I/.
fi . Na/afiolls :
(} 10% 1!(lnl.l'1 /tor iWIII,,1 "illll'll sioll.\' or (J Ail, u,h icht'\'('r ix SlI1ol/(,1' hut 1/01 /t'.I',\' I/'all 4'!'~ o(ll!(/ ,I'I horizonfa l dimemiol1.\' or n.9 m
" /'.1('(1/1 m{}rtll' lj~h l , //I
I. eo' /(Ol'/zoll /al dillH'II.I' itl l/ ofhlliltiillJ:, lII('tl.~IfIl'(/ 11/ (/I()II.~ \\'im/ dir('('litm. 11/
(J '"""~ AI/KI t' ,!fplwl(' t!frm!l.Ii'lltll !wl'i::oll lai. d(Xrccx
,
~ ..."" .!:'.... _--- -j I
--p-j-'"
<~~~~~~~~~~~=~~]_;:1 CASE A
WIND
I
,
GROUND SURFAce
ELEVATION view ./ i F\·--II.. _ ...
;j J~H~' ,....'j ":lJ
r_ -:::.:·_=======--==.:::::=:.:.:=-....::_ __
;;:'-"'1]-"'.1"'"
r
WIND
RA,NGE
~
CASEB
-
,
tU N
'---1
~
GROUND SURFACE 1
.-..\ - ; "-
(UN --. • WIND
CROSS-SECTION VIEW RANGE
. - ._-_......_-----_.-
...-..!ti.CASE A & CASE B ------
Clearance Aspect Ratio, Bls
Ratio, "II! < 0.05 0. 1 0.2 0.5 1 2 4 5 10 20 30 40
1 1.80 1.70 1.65 1. 55 1.45 lAO 1.35 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30
0.9 1.85 1.75 1.70 1.60 l.S5 1.50 1.4 5 lA S lAO 1.40 1.40 l AO
0.7 1.90 1. 85 175 1.70 1. 65 1.60 1.60 1. 55 1. 55 1.55 1.55 1.55
0.5 1.95 1.85 1.80 1.75 1.75 1.70 1. 70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.75
0.3 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1. 80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85
0.2 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1. 80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1. 85 1.90 1.90 1.95
< 0. 16 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.85 1. 80 1.80 1.8 5 1. 85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
.- C r, CASE <: .._._ - --_.__.. .."_._-_._-"-_...-."-
Aspect Ratio.
Regi on Aspect Ratio, /31" Re gion
Bls
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 > 45
o tos 2.25 2.60 2.90 3. 10' 330· 3.40' 3.55 ' 3.65' 3.75* o tos 4.00' 4.30'
s to 2s 1. 50 1. 70 1.90 2.00 2. 15 2.25 2.30 2.3 5 2.4 5 s to 2s 2.60 2.55
2s to 3s 1. 15 1.30 1A5 1.55 1. 65 1.70 1.75 1.85 2s to 3" 2.00 1.95
3s to lOs 1.1 0 1.05 I .Q5 1.05 1.05 1.00 0.95 3s to 4.> 1.50 1. 85
4s to 5s 1.35 1.85
Figllre 207·20 Force Coefficients, Cion Solid Freestanding Walls & Solid Signs
of all Height s Other Strllctures ... Method 2
Association of S~ructurClI Engineers of the Ptlilippu)cs
CHAI:>TEf~ 2 -. Minimum Design Loads 2··69
,.-- ._----
Cross-Section . ___.____...___LYp.<'.gf Surface _. _____ -... ..-.-------
hID
--~ --
- -- 2 . 0··~
.jguarc (wind norma! to f~lCC)
._----- All ._._----.__ ..!.1...~ 1.4
Square (wind along di~gonal) All - .- 1.0 1.1 1.5
Hexagonal or Octagonal All 1.0 J.2 1.4
-
Moderatelt Smooth 0.5 0.6 0.7
Rough (D'ID = 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9
Round (1)£>25) Vert rough (D'lf) -: 0.08L _ _ -_. 0.8 1.0 0.2
(1)~ >5.3, D in Ill, q, in kPa
All 0.7 0.8 J.2
•. __. __ ._- - - - - - -
NOles:
I. 711(' d!'sign wind force shall he ("alculated based on the area of/luI structure projected 0/1 a plane I/omw{ /0 Ihe wind directioll. The force slwll be
assumed to act parallel 10 fhe wind directioll.
2. Unear illte/po/alion is permilled for hiD values OIher [hall sholl'lI.
3. Nowlion:
f) '" Diameler of circu/or cross-section ond Icast horizolllal dimen~iolls (~rsqu(lre. hexagonal or octagollal cross-sectiolls al elevolion /lnder
consideration, m;
D' '" Depth (~(prol,./(dillg elements sllch (IS ribs alld spoilen'< 111:
II '" Heigh( (?is(rucrure. 111: and
q; '" Velocity pressure ('valuated at heighr z above ground. kP(I .
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2·l0 CHAr-'TE!, 2 .. Minimum Design l.oads
~.
Rounded Members
{;
flat· Sided D,Jq; " 2.5 Dfq, >2.5
Members
D,Jq; ,; 5.3 Dfi >5.3
.-
<0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8
0.1 to 0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9
..
0.3 to 0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
Noles:
/. Signs lI'ilh openings comprising 30% or //lore a/the gross area are ch1.l'sijied {J.\' OpCII signs
2. The calculalion oj the desigll wind forces shafl he based an the area 0/ 0/1 e:tposed members and eiemcl1H projected 011 (I plant' lion:·
(0 (he wind directioll. Forces shall be assumed (0 (lct paral/ello the wind direcfioll.
3. 71lc area A/collsisten! with Iheseji.Jrce coe/ficiclI/s is Ihe solid area projected norma! 10 the willd riil"/!Clioll.
4. Notation:
c "0 Ralio o/.wlid area 10 gross area
1J "" Diameter 0/ a typical round member. m
(j: '" Velocity pressure evaluated af heighl z aiJol'{! ground. kPa
Notes:
I. For all lI'il1d directions considered. Ihe IIrea A, ("ollsi.I'fell/ wilh {he ,I'!'ec!liedj()/"("(' ('ot{{1icicl!l.\' shall be rhe solid area (?(a IOll'er/lxl'
projected 011 rhe plane o/r/Jmf{lce/of {he lower segment under cOllsideration
2 The specijied;;,,.ce cm/jieien!,\' are/ill' {OIl'as will! structural allg!e,I' or .I'imilllljll1l-sided members.
3. For lOwers cOlllaining rOllnded mem/)el".\', il is (/('ceptable to mulliply lhe .I'pec(jil'd .FJrei' ('o{~((icicllix h.l' the /iJ/IO\\'illg faclOr when
d('fcrmilling wind/orees 011 .mel! 1II('lIIben '
fUll:! + f).57, /)liI I/O!;:' 1.0
4. IVilld threes shalf be applied in the direcliOlls re:m/tillg in m(/XilllUIII membel" ji)N'('S and reactiolls. For t{)l\'NS with square erO.I·S-
.I'r!(·tion.I·. wind (orc!!s shall be fIIUlliplied by Ihe j()ffowillg/aclOl" when the wind is direcled along a IOIVC'r di(lgonal
I -I- 0.751:.1)//11101 > 1.2
5. Wind /orce.l· Oil lower appllrtenallces slich (l.\' ladders. conduil.\". lights. ('{('\'IIlO!".\". ('1(" sha/l he calclllilled lI.I'illg appropriate force
coe/ficir!ntsjor Ihe.I'e elements.
(; Nolatioll:
""' Ratio {?j'solid area to gross area O/OIlC lower/ace for (hc segmel1lllndel" comic/emfioll.
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2··'1/. CHM'lEP 2 .. Mirllfllurn Design l. oa(15
N
20" ~
•
,;
HI"
i
HI" ZONE II
V • (200kph) ZONE I
I I
i
V • (250kph)
14"
12"
10"
v "' (150kph)
I'J"
.'
I •
- .• . . • . - •• .•...... . _ • • j
.1 . •... •
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM is an essentially com- DESIGN SEISMI C FORCE is .he minimum .ota!
plete space fmme that provides support for gravity loads. strength design base shea r, fa ctored and distributed in
Sec Secti o n 208 .4.6.2. accordn nce with Section 208.5 .
DIAPHRAGM or SHEAR WALL CHORD is the ORDINARY BRACE D FRAME (O BF) is " steel·
boundary clement of' a diaphragm or shear w<1 11 that is bnlccd fralllc designcd in accordance wit h {he provisions
assumed to takc axial stresses analogous to the nanges or of Section 527 or 528 or concrete-braced frame designcd
a beam. in accordance with Section 421.
DIAPllnAGM STRUT (drag stru t, tic, coliector) is the ORDINARY MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME
element of a diaphragm parallel to the applied load that (OIHRF) is a momcnt- resisting fi'ame nol meeting special
collects and transrers dia phragm shcfIr to the vertical- detai ling requi rements fo r ductile behavior.
resisting clcments or distributcs loads within the
diaphragm. Such members may take axial tension or ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the earthquake load
compression. effects on structural eleme nts common ( 0 the lateral-
force~resisting systems along two orthogonal axes.
DRIFT. See "story drift."
OVERSTRENGTH is a characteristic of stl1lctures
DUAL SYSTEM is a combinatio n of momcnt-resisting where the actual strength is larger than the design
frames and shear walls or braced frames designed in strength. The degree of ove rstrength is materia l-and
accordance wi th Ihe criteria of Section 208.4.6.4 . systc m~d cpen dcllt .
ECCENTRI C ALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a Pil EFFECT is the secondary effec t on shears, axial
steel-braced frame designed in conformance with Sect ion forces and moments of frame mem bers due to the action
528. of the vertical loads ind uced by hori zontal displacemen t
of the stnlCture resulting from various loading.
ELASTIC RESPONSE PARAMETERS arc forces and
defonnatiolls determ ined from an clastic dynamic analysis SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist latern l forces
lIsing an unreduced ground motion representation, in parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred to as
accorda nce with Sect ion 208.6 . vertical diaphragm or stlllctural wa!!).
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES arc those st nlctures that arc SHEAR WALL-FRAME INTERA CTIV E SYSTEM
necessary for emergency operations subsequent to <I lIses combinations of shear walls and fmmcs designed to
natural disas ter. resist latera) forces in propol1ion (0 the ir relative
rigidi ties, cons idering interaction between shear wa lls and
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT or SYSTEM is one whose frames on alI levels.
deformation undcr la teral load is significantly largcr than
adjoining parts of the system. Limiting ratios for dclini ng SOFT STORY is olle ill which th e lateral stiffness is less
specific ncxibl e elemcnts are sct fOrlh in Section 208.5.6. than 70 percent of the stiffness of the story above. Sec
Tobie 208-9.
HOIlIZONTAL BRA C ING SYSTEM is a horizonta l
truss system that serves thc samc fun ction as a di<1phragm. SPACE FRAME is a three-dim ensional struct\ !ral
system, wi th out bearing walls ) composed of mCIri!)(".iS
INTERMEOIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME inte rconnected so as to function :'IS a complete sclf-
(Ii\1RF) is a concrete rrame designed in accordance wilh contained unit with or \vithollt the <lid of horizontal
Scction 412 . diaphragms or noor~bracjllg systems.
MOMENT- IU:S ISTI , G F I(AMI-: is " [',\l11C in which S PECIAL MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (SMRF)
members and joints Me cap.lblc or resis ting forccs is a morncnl-resisting frame speciall y detailed 10 provide
prinwri ly by Oexure.
ductile behavior and comply with the requirements given C li =seismic coef'flciellt, as set forth in Table 208-7
jnChapter 4 or 5, C[ numerical coemclent given in Section 208.5.2.2
:=:
moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide De = the length of a shear wall in the first stOI), in the
ductile behavior and comply with the provisions of direction parallel to the applied forces, m
Section 525 . E, E", Em' E,. = earthquake loads set forth in Section
208.5.1, N
STORY is the space between levels, Story x is the story F I , FII.I;~- "" design seismic force applied to Level i, 17
below icvel x. or ,r, respectively, N
f'~) "" design seismic force all a part of the structure, N
STORY DRIFT is the lateral displacement of one level Fpx =-:-: design seismic force on a diaphragm, N
relative to the level above or below. F[ = that portion of the base shear, V. considered
concentrated at the top of the structure in addition
STORY DRIFT RATIO is the story drift divided by the toF,ION
story height. f = lateral force at Level i for use in Equation 208- I 0,
N
STORY SHEAR, V" is the summation of design lateral g ;;:: acceleration due to gravity;;:: 9.815 m/sec 2
forces above the story under consideration. h" h",hl , ~"" height above the base to Level i, 11 or \
respectively, III
STRENGTH is the capacity of an clement or a mcmber = importance factor given in Table 208-\
to rcsist factored load as specified in Chapters 2, 3,4, 5 I" = importance factor for llonstructura1 component
and 7. as given in Table 208-1
L = live load on a structural clement
STRUCTURE is an asscmblagc of framing members Level i =: level of the structure referred to by the
w "0 the total seismic dead load dcfined in Sections the design approach used in the design of the structure,
208.5.1.1 and 208.5.2.1, N provided load combinations of Section 203.4 are utilized.
Wi. IV,\' that portion of W located at or assigned to Level i
:0:
The procedures and the limitations for tile design of 208.4.3 Site Geology and Soil Characteristics
structures shall be determined considering seismic zoning, Each site shall be assigned a soil profile type based on
site characteristics, occupancy, configuration, structural properly substantiated geotechnical data using the site
system and height in accordance with this section. categorization procedure set forth in Section 208.10 and
Structures shall be designed with adequate strength to Table 208·2.
withstand the latera! ciisplacements induced by the Design
Basis Ground Motion, considering the inelastic response
of the structurc and the inherent redundancy, overstrength
and ductility of the lateral force-resisting system.
;",'r:
Source Known Seism ic So ut'ee 2 Seismic
Seismic Sour'cc D\ ti lt ;~~t.'ll
TlP! S5k lll 2 10k 'll Source
Description 1\'1ax i~;;;-~-\1;nl-e;~
A 12 1.0 Type
---- .. M. ~ll.~!! "d.!2...11L.
B 1.0 1.0 Faults that are
- - - - -- ........._ _L<2.. _ ....... __._
C _I L .... _ .. ca pable of
'fab le 208-5 Ncar-Source FlI<: tor, N,,) producing large
-~ .......... --_. A ma gnitude events M ,? 7.0
Sr.ismic Closest Oi stance To
Source Known Seismic Soul"ce l
and that have a
Typo $ 5 km 10km
hi gh rate of seismic
~ 15 km
A 1.6 1.2 1.0
ac ti vity. ... __._--
- All faults other
B 1.2 1.0 1.0 B (han Types A and 6.5 ~ M < 7.0
.. ..
- C.
C 1.0 1.0 1.0 Paults that are not
Notes/or Tahle's ]08.4 and 108.j : capable of
TIl(' Nl'aT-Sauro.! Foctor m;l)' hI' based 011 tilt' IiI/ifill' illlel]1OluluJII producing Jarge
of 1'1IJII('.~ jiJr distal/CeS 0Ii11'1' Iilol/ lhos(- shou'l/ i" til(' lahle . magnitude
C M<6.5
The closes! di.HIUIC(' to .'u'ismic SO/iTCf! .\,Itull 1>1' tllh'lI as til(' earthquakes and
mil/imuflt diJt(lIl(,(' betwe"" til(' sifl~ (llid thl' urca i!l'Jcribl'd lIy tIl('
that have a
verticaf projer'lion of {he ,WI/rei! Oil llie ,1'llijiICI' (i.e .. slIIfaC('
projection (~/jillllt p lul/e) . 77w XIII/aCe projectiol/ lI('ed IWt il/{'/lId('
relatively low rate
porrioll.~ of ,II, .I'Olln 'l! al dt'pfhs olIO kill or gn'tlla. TIlt' largest L...,-- of seis mic activity.
value 0/ 'he Nt'(lI'·Sourct' Factor cOJ!sid~'ring I//! source.I' shall IJ(' SuhduClio/! S()lIr(,(',\' shall be I!m/ll(lled on f1 site-specijlc basis.
IIsed/or ",'sigll.
Table 208-7 - Seismic CoefGcient, C
So il Profil e Seismic Zone Z
Type Z ~ 0.2 Z ~ O.4
SA 0 . 16 0. 32Na
SI! 0.20 OAONa
So 0.24 OAON,
S" 0.28 OA4N.
S, 0.34 OA4N.
S,.- See Footllote I a/Table 208·8
208.4.6.1 fleadng Wall Sys tem 208.4.8 Selection of Lateral Force Procedure
A structu ra l sys tem without a complete vertica l Joad- Ally structure may bel and certain structures defined
carrying space frame. nCilring wall s or bracing systems below shall be, designed usin g th e dynamic lateral -force
provide su pport for all or most gr;wily loads. Resistance procedurcs ofScclion 20R.6.
10 latera l load is provided by slH!Hr Willis or braced
frames .
th
NatiofliJl Struc tural Code of It'll.'! Pililippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
?-80 CHAPTEH 2 -- Minimum Design loads
208.4.8.1 Simplified Static soils at the site and shail conform to Section 208.6.2,
The simplified static lateral-force procedure sct forth in Item 4.
Section 208.5.2.3 may be used for the following
stnlcllHCS of Occupancy Category IV or V: 208.4.9 System Limitations
208.5 Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related For braced frames, the value of ri is equal to the
Effects maximum horizontal force component in a single brace
element divided by the total story shear.
208.5.1 Earthquake Loads and Modeling
Requirements For moment frames, ri shall be taken as the maximum of
the sLIm of the shears in any two adjacent columns in a
208.s.l.l Earthquake Loads moment frame bay divided by the story shear. For
StJ1lctures shall be designed for ground motion producing columns common to two bays with moment-resisting
structural response and seismic forces in any horizontal connections on opposite sides at LeVCI i in the direction
direction. The following earthquake loads shal! be used in under consideration, 70 percent of . the shear in th,1t
the load combinations set forth in Section 203: column may be used in the column shear summation.
(208·1 ) For shear walls, I"i shall be taken as the maximum value or
the product of the wall shear multiplied by 31 'wand
(208·2) divided by the total story shear, where I,.. is the length of
the wall in meter.
where:
E = the earthquake load on an element of the structure For dual systems, ri shall be taken as the maximum valur:
resulting from the combination of the horizontal of ri as defined above considering a!llateral~load-resisting
component, Ell> and the vertical component, E, .. elements. The lateral loads shal! be distributed to
E" = the earthquake load due to the base shear, V, as set clements based on relative rigidities considering the
forth in Section 208.5.2 or the design lateral force, interaction of the dual system. For dual systems, the value
Fp, as set forth in Section 208.7. of p need not exceed 80 percent of the value calculated
E", = the estimated maximum earthquake force that can abovc.
be developed in the stlUcture as set forth in Section
208.5.1.1, and used in the design of specific p shall not be taken less than 1.0 and need not be greater
elements of the structure, as specifically identilled than 1.5. For special moment-resisting frames, except
in this code. when used in dual systems, p shaH not exceed 1.25. The
E, . = the load effect resulting from the vertical Ilumber of bays of special momcnt-resisting frames shall
component of the earthquake ground motion and is be increased to reducc r, such that p is less than or equal
equal to an addition of o.~/Dto the dead load to 1.25.
effect, f), for Strength Design, and may be taken as /!.,xception:
zero for Allowable Stress Design.
All may be taken as the average floor area in the upper
.0" = the seismic force amplification factor that is setback portion 0/ the building where a larger base area
required to account for structural overstrength, as exists at the ground floor.
set forth in Section 208.5.3.1.
p = Reliability/Redundancy Factor as given by the
When calculating drift, or when the structure is located in
following equation:
SeismiC Zone 2, p shall be taken equal to ! .0.
20B.S.2 Static Force Procedure The val ue of A, shall be determined from Ihe followi ng
equa ti on:
208.S.2.1 Dcsignllase Shear
The total des ign base shear in a given direction sha ll be (208- 9)
determined from the following equati on:
The total design base shcar need not exceed the 2. Method Il :
following:
The fundamental period T' may be calculatcd lIsi ng the
2.5C, 1 structu ral properties and deforma tional characteristics of
V = - - - '- W (20H-S) th e res isti ng elemcnts ill a properly su bstantiHted analysis.
II
The <Hwlysis shall be in accordance with the requi rements
Ill' Seelion 208 .5. 1.2. The value of T from Melhod 13 shall
!lot exceed a vallie 30 percent greater than the value of T
ob tained from Method A ill Seism ic Zone 4, and 40
percell1 in Seismic Zone 2.
--_ _-_
NL
....
NL
...
·····_h .••.•.
- - ------.-
• Special Slee l plate shear wa lls 8 2.8 NL NL -- .
.-----.
·• Masonry shea r wa ll wit h slee l OMRF
Sleel EBF with sleel SMRF
4.2
8.5
2.8
2.8
NL
NL
50
-_. _-----. --
NL
-
• Stecl EBF wi lh slee l OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
· Special concentrically braced frames wi th steel
SM RF
7.5 2.8 NL NL
-.
· Special concentrically braced frames with steel
OMRF
4.2 2.8 NL 50
-
E. Du al SJ'stem witlt Intermediate IWomelll Frames
• Special slccl co ncen lrically braced frame 6 2.8 NL NP
• Composite steel and concrete concentrically 5.5 2.8 NL NP
braced frame
• Ordinary co mposite braced frame 3.5 2.8 NL NP
• Ordinary composite reinforced co ncrete shear 5 2.8 NL NP
walls with stee l elements
I"~ Calltilel'ered Columll Buildill!! Systems
• Specia l steel moment frallies 2.2 2.0 10 10
• fnterl11cdiatc steel moment frames 1.2 2.0 10 NP
• Ordinary sleell110ment frames 1.0 2.0 10 NP
• Cantilevered colu mn elements 2.2 2.0 NL 10
G. Steel Systems lI ot Specifically Detailed fo r
Seism ic R esistance, Excluding Cantilever S},stel1ls
3 3 NL NP
--
· •
Masollry s hear walls w ith SMRF
Masonry s hear wa lls with steel OMRF
5.5
4.2
2.8
2.8
NL
Nt.
50
50
_.
I,
1
I
approximatel y in accordance with the principles of
Equations (208-13), (208-14) and (208-15) or any other
ralional distributi oll. The c lastic de Oect ions. 0;, shall be
calculated using th e applied lateral forces,r,.
208.5.2.3.2 Vert ical Distribution
The rorces at each level shall be calcu lated usi ng the
following equation :
3C0 w.
F .::: __ (208-1 2)
II th
N(llional Stru ctural Cod e of the PhilipPines 6 Edition Vo turn e 1
I
I
2-88 CHAPTEI< 2 -_. Minim urn Design l.oads
ex ceed Ca ~11pX' but shall no t be less than O.Sea wpx . R 208.5.4.2 Combinations along Different Axes
and llo shall be laken from Table 208-1 L In Seismic Zone 4 where a structure has a bearing wall
system in only one direction, the value of R used for
208.5.3 Dctcrm.ination of Seismic Factors design in the orthogonal direction shall not be greater lhan
thaI used for the bearing wall system.
208.5.3,1 Determination of llo
Any com bination of bearing wall systems, building frame
Fo r spec ific e le ments of the structure, as s pec ifically
systems, dual systems or moment-resisting frame systems
identified in this code, the minimum design strength shall may be used to resist seismic forces in struCtures less than
be the product of the seismic force overstrength factor nn 50 m in height. On ly combinati ons of dual systems and
and the design seismic forces set f0l1h in Section 208.5. special moment-resisting frames shall be used to resist
For both Allowab le SU·ess Design and Strength Design, seismic forces in structures exceeding 50 m in height in
the Seismic Force Overslrength Factor, flo. shall be taken Seismic Zone 4.
from Table 208- I I .
208.5.4.3 Combinations along the Same Axis
208.5.3.2 Determination of R
Where a combination of different structural systems is
The value for II shal1 be taken from Table 208·1 I. utilized to resist latera! forces in the same direction, the
value of R used for design in Ihat direction shall not be
208.5.4 Combinations of Structural Systems greater than the least value for any of the systems utilized
Where com binations of structura l syste ms arc in that same directi on.
incorpo rated inl o th e same stru cture, the requirements of
this sec tion shall be satisfied. 208.5.5 Vertical Distribution of Force
The lotal force shall be distribu ted over the hei ght of the
208.5.4.1 Vertica l Combinations stru clure in confom1ance with Equations (2 08-1 3), (208 -
The value of R used in the design of any story shall be 14) and (208- I 5) in the absence of a more rigorous
less than or equJI to the value of R llsed in the give n procedure.
direction for the story above.
"
v =r~ + IF; (208-1 3)
Exception:
(= 1
This requirement Ileed not be applied 10 a slory where the
dead weight above that stolY is less than 10 percellt of Ihe Thc con ccntrated force F, at the top, wh ic h is ill additi on
fatal dead weight a/the Slruc[w·e. 10 r:
I, shall be dc«::rmined fro m th e equation:
F = (V - F,)w,."-,. (20S-ls )
x " 208.5,7 Horizo nta l To rsio n al Mo m ent s
L Wihi Provisions shall be made fo r th e increased shears resuit ing
;=1 from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not
flex ible. The most severe load combination for each
At each level designated as x, the force F, shall be applied clemen! sha ll be considered for design.
over the area of the bu ilding in ac cordance wi th the mass
distribut ion at that leve l. Struc tural di splacements and The torsional design moment at a given story shall be the
design seismic forces shall be calculated as the e rfect of moment resulting from eccentricities between applied
forces F, and F, applied at the appropriate levels above desi gn lateral forces at levels above that story and the
the base. vertica l-resisting elements in that story plus an accidental·
torsion.
208,5.6 Ho r izo ntal Dist ri b nti on of Shea r
The design story shear. V.n in any story is the sum of the The acciden tal torsiona l moment shall be determi ned by
forces F, and F, above th at story. V, shall be distri buted to assuming the mass is displaced as required by Section
the various elements of the vertical lateral fo rce~resi s ti ng 208 .5 .6.
system in proportion to their rigidities. considering the
rigidity of the diaphragm. See Section 208.8.2.3 for rigid Where torsi onal irregularity exists, as defined in Table
e lemen ts that are not intended to be part. of the lateral 20S- 10, the effects shall be accounted for by increasing
fo rc e~ resisting systems. the accidenta l torsion at each level by an amplification
rae tor, A n determined from the following equation:
Where diaphragms are not fl exible, the mass at each level
shall be assumed to be disp laced from the calculated
center of mass in each direction a distance equal to 5 (208 -1 6)
percent of the building dimension al that level
perpendicular to the direc tion of the fo rce under
where:
considerati on. The effec t of thi s displ acement on the
story shear distri bu tion shall be considered. Om,/! = the average of the displacements at the extreme
points of th e structure at Level x, mOl
Diaphrag ms shall be considered flexi ble fo r the purposes O (tIUX = the maximum displacement at Level x, mm
of distribution of story shear and torsional moment when
the max imum lateral defo rmation of the diaphragm is The val ue of Ax need no t exceed 3.0
more th an two limes lhe average story dri ft of the
associated story. This may be determined by comparing 208.5.8 Overturn ing
the compu ted midpoint in ~pl ane deflection of the
Every structure shall be designed to resist lhe overtull1ing
diaphragm itself und er lateral load with the story drift of
effects caused by earthquake forces speci fied in Section
adjoining vertical-resisting elements under equi va lent
208.5.5. At any level, the overturn ing moments to be
tribu tary l.te ra l load.
resisted shall be determ ined using those seismic forces (F/
and F,) th at act on levels above the level under
consideration. At any level, the incrementa l changes of
the design overturnin g moment shall be di stributed to the
various resi sting elements in the manner prescribed in
Section 20S.S.6. Overturning effects on every element
shall be carried down to the fou ndation. See Sect ions
207. 1 and 208. 8 for combining gra vi ty and seismic fo rces.
,j
!
!
,~
i
I National Stru ctural Code of the Phil ippi nes 6'" Editio n Volume 1
I
I,
1
.;itf'
! ._n, o o!- ( .' .' . ..
2-90 CHAP1TF< 2 ... Minimum Design Loa ds
208.5.10 Story Drift Limitation representation and shall be performed using accepted
Story drifts shall be computed using the Maximum principles of dynamics.
Inelastic Response Displacement, 11 M .
Structures that arc designed in accordance with this
208.5.10.1 Calculated section shall comply with all other applicable
requirements of these provisions.
Calculated story drift llsing !!.'d shall not exceed 0.025
times the story height for structures having a fundamental
208.6.2 Ground Motion
period of less than 0.7 sec. For structures having a
fundamental period of 0.7 sec or greater, the calculated The ground motion representation shall, as a minimum, be
,tDlY drill shall not exceed 0.020 times the stOIY height. one having a I O-percent probability of being exceeded in
50 years, shall not be reduced by the quantity R and may
Exceptions: be one of the following:
1. l'lzese drift limits may be exceeded when it is 1. An elastic design response spectlllm constructed in
demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated by accordance with Figure 208-3, using the values of en
both stmctural elements and nonstructural elements and C. consistent with the specific site. The design
that could affect life safety. The drift used in this acceleration ordinates shall be multiplied by the
assessment shall be based upon the Maximum acceleration of gravity, 9.815 mfsec 2•
Inelastic Response Displacement, LlM .
2. A sitewspecific elastic design response spectrum
2. There shall be no drift limit in single-story steel- based on the geologic, tectonic, seismologic and soil
framed structures whose primaty use is limited to characteristics associated with the specific site. The
storage, jactories or workshops. Minor accessOlY spectrum shall be developed for a damping ratio of
uses shall be allowed. Structures on which this 0.05, unless a different value is shown to be
exception is used shall !lot have equipment attached consistent with the anticipated structural behavior at
to the structural Fame or shall have such equipment the intensity of shaking established for the site.
detailed to accommodate the additional drift. Walls
3. Ground motion time histories developed for the
that are laterally supported by the steel frame shall
specific site shall be representative of actual
be designed to accommodate the drift in accordance
earthquake motions. Response spectra from time
with Section 208.8.2.3.
histories, either individually or in combination, shall
approximate the site design spectrum conforming to
208.5.10.2 Limitations
Section 208.6.2, Item 2.
The design lateral forces used to determine the calculated
drift may disregard the limitations of Equation (208-6) 4. For stJ1lctures on Soil Profile Type Sr, the following
and (208-7) alld may be based 011 the period determined requirements shall apply when required by Section
from Equation (208-10) neglecting the 30 or 40 percent 208.4.8.3. Item 4:
limitations of Section 208.S.2.2, Item 2. 4.1 The ground motion representation shall be
developed in accordance with Items 2 and 3.
208.5.11 Vertical Component
4.2 Possible amplification of building response due
The following requirements apply in Seismic Zone 4
to the effects of soil-stl1lcture interaction and
only. Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed
lengthening of building period caused by
for a net upward force of O.7Ca/~r inelastic behavior shall be considered.
s. The vertical component of' ground motion may be
In addition to all other applicable load combinations, defined by scaling corresponding horizontal
horizontal prestressed cOlllponents shall be designed using accelerations by a factor of (wo- thirds. Alterna;ivc
not 1110re ill;!n SO percent of' the dead load for the gravity factors may be used \vhen substantiated by ~itew
load, alone or in combination with the lateral force specific data. Where the Near Source Factor, Nil' is
efJCds. greater than 1.0, site-specific vertical response
spectra shall be used in lieu of the factor of two-
208.6 Dynamic Analysis Procedures thirds.
calculation or the significant rcntures of its dynamic combined by recognized methods. When lhr ee-
response. A three-dimensiona l model shall be used for dimcnsiona l modcls arc used fo r analysis, mo dal
the dYlllllllic analys is of sll1lc(ures wit h highl y irregular interactio n efleClS shall be considered when co mbining
plan config urat ions such as those havi ng a pla n modal IlH1X im<1.
ilTegularity detl ncd in Tab le 208- J 0 and hav ing a ri gid or
semi- rig id diap hmg m. The stiffn ess properti es used in th e 208.6.5.4 Rl'dutlion of Elastic Response Parameters
analysis and ge neral mathematica l modeling shall be in for Design
accordance \-vith Section 208.5.1.2 . Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced for purposes
of design ill acco rda nce with the foll owing itcms, \\. itll th e
208.6.4 Description of Analysis Procedures limitation th at in no case shall th e Elas ti c Response
I)aramciers b ~ reduced sllch thaI the co rresrond ing des ign
208.6.4.1 Hes!,ollse SpectrullI Allalysis base shear is less th an th e Elasti c Response Base Shear
An elasti c dyn.lI mic ana lys is of a st ru cture uti lizing the divided by Ihe va lue o f R.
peak dynamic response of all modes hav ing a signifi cant
I. For all regular structures where the ground motion
contri bution to total stmclura l response. Peak moda l
representalion comp lies wilh Seclion 208.6.2, Item I,
responses arc calcu lated usi ng the ordinates of the
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced such
appro priate response spectrum curve which correspond to
that the correspond ing design base shear is not less
th e modal periods. Maximum mod<1 1 contribut ions arc
than 90 percent o f the base shear detenn ined in
combined in a stat istical manner to oblHin <til approximate
acco rdance wilh Section 208.5.2.
[olal slmc(ura l response.
2. For all regul ar strucrures where the ground motio n
reprcscntati on compli es with Sect ion 208.6.2 , hem 2,
208.6.4.2 Time History Analysis
Elastic Res ponse Parameters mny be reduced such
An analysis of th e dynamic response of a structure at each that the co n esponding design base shear is not less
increment of time when the base is subj ected to a specific than 80 percent of the base shear detelmined ill
ground Illotion time history. accordance with Section 208 .5.2 .
208.6.5 Re sponse Speclrll III Analysis 3. f<or all irregula r stru ctures, regardless of th e ground
Illotion re presentation, Elastic Response Parameters
208.6.5. 1 Res ponse Spectrum Represe ntation and may be reduced sllch that the cOITespondi ng design
Interpretation or Results
basc shear is not less {han 100 percenl or the base
shear determined in accordance wit h Section 208.5.2.
The ground motion represl'll!<ltion shall be in accordance
\v ith Section 208.0.2. The corresponding response The corresponding reduced design seismic fo rces sha ll be
parnmclcrs, including fo rces. momen ts and displacC'lllcnts, used for design in ~ccordance wilh Section 203.
shall be denoted <is Elasti c Res ponse Parametcrs. Elas tic
Response Para mc{C rs Illay be rrduccd in acco rdance with 208.6.5.5 Direclion a l Errecls
Sec lio n 208.6.5 .4. Directiona l effec ts fo r horizontal groun d Illotion shall
con form 10 the req uirements of Sectio n 208.5. 1. The
The base shCHr for a given direct iol1 . de term ined usin g effects of vert ica l ground moti ol1s on horizontal
dynamic analysis must not be less thall th e value obtained cantilevers and pres tressed elements shall be qmsiciered
by the equivalent lateral force meth od of" Section 208.5 .2. in accordance with Section 208.5.1 t . Altcrnately. vertical
In this case, alt co rresponding rC!-ipo nse P,lr(l1l1ctcrs arc seismic re s p o ll s ~ Illay be determined by dynamic response
adjusted pro portiona tely. me thods ; in no case shall the response uscd for design b(.:
Jess than that obtllinc<1 by the slatic mc th od.
208.6.5.2 Number or Modes
TilL' requ irc mcnt of Section 20K.6.4. 1 II1<1t all signifi cant 208. 6.5.6 TO"sion
modes be inc ludcd may he sCltisfied hy demonstrating lhat The analysis sllflll HCCO Ulll ror to rsionall'flcc{s. including
for the modes cOJlsidered. <II least 90 percent or thl.! ;Jct:jdcn t ~1 torsional efrects as presc ribed in Sect ion
participating mass of the strurlure is im:ludcd in th\.' 20X.5.7. Where thl'cc·dimcn:.;ional mode-Is :lrc uscd for
calcu lation of response I(w each principal hori7.ontal ana lysis, erfects of accidcnwl torsion shall be accou nted
direct ion. fiJI" by appro priate adjust ments in the model slich il f;
adjust men t of" mass loca lions. or by equ ivale nt statio:
208 .6.5,] COlllhini llg Modes procedures such as pro vided in Sect ion 208.5.0.
The pcn k member j()]"ces. di sp lacements. slory f()fI:cs,
story shears ;llld base reactions I()r" l~ ach mode shall be
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2-94 CHAPTEF~ 2 -' MlOimwn Design l.oads
When the stmctural fa il ure of Ihe lateral-force-resist ing Forces dctcnnillcd lIsing Equation (20 r.:-:,·j \..>:. t·: .-, .(;;
systems of nonrigid equi pment would cause a life hazard, shall be lIsed to design members and cO IH;\'·c! j ;".~') (:;;11
such systems shall be designed to resist the seismic fo rces tra nsfer these fo rces to Ihe scismic·n""'· '1;;' ...: .... ~i....:l -".
prescribed ill Section 208.7.2. M embers and connection design Shidi l.i 'tC 11,.:. ;·' f'IJ
co mbi nati ons (11)(1 rac tors speci fi ed in S~ · C!ii.)n . ~0 3.3 ll l"
When permissible design strengt hs and oth er accept ance 203 .4 . The Reliabi lity/Redundancy Factor, !), may be
criteria arc not contained in or referenced by this code, taken eqLlal to 1.0.
such criteria shall be obtained from approved national
standards subject to the approval of th e building official. For appli cabl e (orees and Component p,.' : ' O Jl ': (·
Modification Facto rs in connectors for c;\"l<..~ r i )l p. ;: ;.j
208.7.2 Desigll for Total La tHai Force diaphrag ms, refe r to Sections 208.8.2. 3, 2tnU\./ . .. Hi
The total design lateral seismic fo rce, FI" shall be 208.8.2.8.
delenn incd from the fol lowing equation:
f-orces shall be appl ied in the horizontal di rc<.:I!OH::, \'.Ih il:!:
(208 - 18) result in [he 1110st crilicalload ings for design .
Altern atively, Fp may be calculated using the fo llowing 208.7 .3 Specifying Lateral Forces
equ ation:
Design speci fi ca tions for equi pment sha ll either spcci r/
F = P
P
aCI(
R
P 1
1I
+
II)WP) ---L (208-1 9)
Ihe design lateral fo rces prescri bed he rein or reference
these pro visions.
I' "I"
Except that I'~' shall 1I0t be less than O.7C,/pWp and 208.7.4 Relative Motion of Equipment AII. chment,
need not be more than 4C~JpJ1~) . For equipment in Categories I and II bui ldin gs as dcfincti
in Table 103 · 1, th e lateral-force design ~; h a l! considc) (l,c
where : effec ts of rela tive motion of th e poin ts of attachmen l to
the structure, usi ng the drift based upon AM.
h.f the clement or componcn! atta chme nt elevation
=
wiLh respect LO grade. fi x shall n01 be taken less tha n
0.0 . 208.7.5 Alternative Designs
h,. = the stnlClure roof elevation wit h respect 10 grade. Where an approved national stand ard or approved
n,l = the in·slruc ture Componelll Amplification Factor physical tes t dala provide a basis ror the earthquake·
that varies from 1.0 to 2.5. resis tant design of a particular type of equipment or other
nonstructural component, sllch a standard or data may be
A va lue for "" shall be selecled from Table 208-12. .lcccplea as a basis for design of the items wit h thc
Altemalively, this factor may be detenn ined based on the fo llowing limita ti ons:
dynam ic properti es or e mp irical da ta of the co mponen t J. These provisions sha ll prov ide minim um va lues for
and the structure thai supports il. The va lue shall not be th e design of the anchorage and th e mem bers an d
taken less th an 1.0. connections th at transfer the forces to th e seismic-
resisting system.
Rp is the Componenl Response ·Modification Factor that
shall be taken from Table 208-1 2, except that Rp for 2. The force, I;~h and the overturning mo ment used in
anch orages shall eq ual !.5 for shall ow ex pansion anch or the design of th e nonstl1lctural component sh;\!1 ,i' .
bo ilS, shallow chem ical anchors or shallow cast·in·p lace be less than 80 percent of the vn lucs that WO\i ~.:
anchors. Sha llow anchors are th ose wit h ti n embedme nt obtained lIsing these provisions.
IcngtlHo·diamcter ratio of less tha n 8. When anchorage is
co nstructcd ofnonducti lc mate rials, or by lise of adhesive,
Rp shall equal 1.0.
Structures
c. All interi6r~bcaring and non-bearing walls 1.0 3.0 2
2. Penthouse (except when framed by an extension of the
2.5 4.0
stmcturai frame)
3 . CO ,l;1cci;O-[~·;-'f~·~-p-~~'f;~b;:i~-~tcd-st;;;-~iu~·a"j -ci ~~~;e~-t~-~ti~c~---
1.0 3.0 3
walls. See also Section 208.7.2
I. Exterior and interior oll1amentations and appendages. 2.5 3.0
... _.....- --------
2. Chimneys, stacks and trussed towers supported on or
p~oj.~~!.ing_.~_~2.'::'~!l!£.~~_2r _.~ __ ......_".___._ . _. . ~ .. __ ..._ ...... __._ __ ~_._.~~ __.__ .. _
a. Laterally braced or anchored to the structural frame at 2.5 3.0
c_~.!.~~~r~ __()f ~!:l~.~.~" _......_..... _ ..____ " .......__ .. ___ .~_. _.~ .. _....___ ._____ _
.~. P5?it_)t_~~l~~ _t!1~i~ __
b. Laterally braced or anchored to tbe structural frame at 1.0 3.0
O!' ,~bov.c .theil: centers o.f m~ss _. .." ._...~ .. __ ~ .. __._,_. __._____________ ~. __.__ _
3. Signs and billboards 2.5 3.0
2. NOllstructural
Components 4. Storage racks (include contents) over 1.8 m tall. 2.5 4.0 4
. .. --------.------ - -··---·-··t----~
5. Permanent floor-supported cabinets and book stacks more 1.0 3.0 5
tl.la_t~JJ.m_ in ..l!~.jg!.l~. __ (i!lclud~_c:()n!e~~s). __ . ______;____.. _._.. _. _.... __._ .__._______ _ _1
6. 0nchorage and lateral bracing for suspended ceilings and 1.0 3.0 3, 6, 7, 8
hght fi.~~_u~es ........__ .._____ .. _. __ ... _______--1
7. Access floor systems 1.0 3.0 4,5,9
- ~ ~- . ~-- ---- - -
8. Masonry or concrete fences over 1.8 m high 1.0 3.0
.. -- ---- -_ .. _-
9, Partitions, 1.0 3.0
.~___;_~-_:_;c___;- -- .- - . - -- . --~- - -.- - .----.-- - ---_._- f----
I . Tanks and vessels (include contents), including support
1.0 3.0
systems.
I . I --·--··--~
5, 10, ll,
2. Electrical, mechanical and plumbing equipment and
1.0 3.0 12,13,14,
associated conduit and ductwork and piping.
15, 16
3. Any flexible equipment iaterally bt~aced or anchored to the
I _ .. -
..... 5-:io,T4:-
2.5 3.0
3. Equipment stnlctural ft~atl.lC at a point_ ~e!.ow tl~~_t~_~~.~!t.~r ofmas~ .. 11,1.2 _
4. Anchorage of emergency power supply systems and
essential communications equipment. Anchorage and
support systems for battery racks and fuel tanks necessary 1.0 3.0 17, 18
for operation of emergency equipment. See also Section
208.7.2 - - --
5. Tcmporary containers with flammable or hazardous
1.0 3.0 1
19
_ _ __.___ ._~ _ _.~ ___._____.._.!.1.1,ltcriaJs._____ _ _ _ ~ ___..~~ ___,___._ _._______+_----1---
I. Rigid comroncnts with ductile material and attachments. 1.0 3.0
1h
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2-96 CHAPTEI~ 2 ,-. Minimum Design Loads
Ground supported steel storage racks lIIay he designed IIsing Ihe prol'i.\"jo/l,I' (~f'S(,Cfi(Jl/s 208.1), Lood and /"esi.\'{III1C1'jilC/o/" design /lilly be
".\wl JiJr the design oj cold.jonned sfeel 1111'111/;<'1;\', pl"(JI'ided sei,\"lIIi(' dO'ign /hrce.\" are i'ill/o/ to or grea/e!" 11/(111 {hose ,Ipeei/ied ill Sec/ioll
208.7.2 or 208.9.2 as appropriate.
OI1/Y anchorage or resfrail1l.I' /leed be designed
6 Ceilillg weight shall include all Iig"fJixfures and olher equII)lIIl!n! or parliliollS Ihal are lalemlly xupporled II.!' Ihe ceiling For purposes
of determilling fhe .I·e/slllicjoree, (l ceiling weight o/nolless (han 0.2 kPa shall he used.
1 Ceilings eonslrucled of lath and plaster or gypsum board screw or lIail (Jtlached to slI.Ipellded memher.l· fh(lt supp()rt 0 c('iling {It 0111'
level extelldiJlgfrom wall to wall need not be ana~!'zed, provided (he walf,l' (lre I/of over 15 lIIelers oparl.
Light jixrures and /l/eclwllical services illstalled ill metal slI.Ipellsioll sy.l'lel/ls for aco/lstical IiII' (llId lay-in panel cei(ings shilll he
independently supporledJrolll Ihe SIn/crure abol'l! as specified in VBe Standard 25-2, Parr II/,
Y W,Ior accessjloor systems shall be the dead /otl(1 of the (lCCessjloor system pIllS 25 percenf'q(lhe/loor livc load pIllS a 0.5 kPo parlilioll
load allowal/ee.
III Eqllipment includes, but I:V /lot limited to, boilers, chillers, heal exchallgers, pumps, tlir·jwlldling IIl1its, cooling tOl\'ers, control pal/e/s,
motors, switchgear, trallsformers and life-safety equipment. II shall indude major cO/lduit, dUelillg and piping, which serl'ices such
machill(")' and equipmenl and/ire sprinkl£'r systems. See Sec/ioll 208. 7.2I()r addilioll(ll rcquireml'III.I'jor t/e/{'/'minillg ar/i)}' nonrigid or
flexibly mO/lnted eq!(lj)ment.
II Seismic res(raints may he omilledFom pipiflg and duct supports ((all fhe/rAlowing condiliOlls are sa{i.~·lied:
/II Latera! molioll (?((he 1)lI)illg or duel lI'il! not calise damaging impacl lI'i[h Olher systems
IUThe piping or due[ l:~ made of ducri!e materia/willi ductile connections.
II J Latera! motiOIl of rhe piping or duct does not cause impact I?fFogife appurlentlnces (e.g. , sprinkler hem/s) with (11/.1' olher eqllipmenl.
pll)ing or structllral member.
'14 Lateral mOliOIl o/lhe PII)illg or duct does 1I0t cause loss q( system vertical support.
11.1 Rod-III/lip, supports oIless than 300 mm in length halle top cOl/nections Ihm callnOI del'elop mOlllenfs.
116 Support membcn cantile\'ered lip Fall! IhC'/loor are checkedj(!r slability.
11 Seismic res/milliS may be omilledji'Olll electrical raceways, meh as cable trays, con(hlil and Ims ducts, i/allthej(}/fllwing ('Oll(/iliol/.\· (Ire
sali·Vied:
I.' 1 Lateral 1II0lioll of [he Nl('C'II'ay wi/lllol calise damagillg impact lI'ilh olher syslems
I.' " L(l/eral moliOIl o/the raceway does /lot cause loss (?fsy.~tem vertica! SlippOr/.
I.' J Rod-hllng SlIpporls o(less than 300 IIIIIJ in lenglh hOI'<' rop cOlllleuiolls Ilwl callnot del'<,loll //lOll/ellis
1.'.<Support members ct/I/tilel'ercd upFoIII fhejloor are checked/or siahilil)'
J.I Piping ducls (lnd electrical race\I'ays, which IIIIIS[ he /III/Cliol/o! Iollo\\'ing all e(luhquoke. spllnlling /J('/lI'l'ell di[li>rell/ hllildillgs or
slructural ,1),.1'/('111.1' .1'//111/ be sI41iciellilyflexible 10 withstand Idatil'" lI1olio/! oj.I'I{/lporl POilllS assllming out-or/lhIlS" /IIOliU!l.I·
I. Vibration isolalors supporting equipment sil(1/1 he designcd j()r hl/eml l!lads or reslmined /iml/ displacing laterll/~1' hy oilier 111('(111.1'
Reslrai!1l shall also be pnll'ided. \I'lliell limits valiea! displacelllcnt. .weh that hI/era I reslraillt.l· do nOI hecome diwngoged. (1/, (111(/ R,,/iJ/'
eqllll)ll1el1l supporlcd (In I'ihration I:wiators shall be lakell as 2.5 and 1,5, reSpeClil'e!y, except Ihal [( Ihe isolalioll mounling Fame is
supported by shalfow or e:q)(ll/sioll allchor,~, Ihe design forces .f<)r fhe (/lIcllor,\' calculaled hy Equalion (20!) . 18).or (208 - /9) (incl/lding
limits), shalf be additionally II1Uflll)/ied by/actor (42.0.
15 Equipmellt anchorage sha/lIlO{ be designed such tllatloads are re.~isfed by g/'Q\Jityjikliol! (e.g., /ricriol/ dips).
16 Expansion (I/lcllor,\', which are required to r('siSI seismic loads in lellsioll ..\'hal/ 1101 be II,H'd where operational \'ihNlling loads are
present.
J1 /.lo\'('lIIen[ (?( compon('nts wilhill dectrical cllbillet.I·, rack,ol/d skid-mounter! equipll/{'II! (ll/d portiOIl,I' (:/skid-lIIl11l11led e/ectrOIlWc/llll1iclIl
equipmenl (hat ilia.\' calise damage 10 other compollents /).1' di.lpillcing, shl/If he reslrirled lIy IIl1llchlll('l/t 10 a!lchored ('(/'IIIIIII{'III or
support/rallies.
I." /Jatteries Oil racks .1'110/1 h(' restrail/cd agaill.H IIIOVellll'l1!..i1l aI/ direcliOIl dll(' 10 ('orlhqurlke(o/,c('.\'
IV 5;eismic reSlrllillls lIIoy incll/dc .I'/raps, chaillS. holls, harner.l· or olher lII('chollislIIS fhat pn'I'(,I/{ sliding. /ol/ing alld IIr('(lch ojrllJ/lllilllllcll1
I!I/lollllllab/e and toxic materials. Friction/illn's IIf(lY I/of he IIsed 10 r('.I'i.l'1 lotl'rof III(/(lI' ill III(' l'e.I'lroilils IIntes.\' flosilil'{' II/,lil; restrailll i.1
provided which {'IISIII'('S [hal fhc/i'ictioll/or('es act c()/llil!l/O/ls~l'.
I
required by design to be part of the lateralMforee-resisting
Consideration shall be given to design for uplin effects system, s hall be designed andlor detailed to be adequate
caused by seismic loads. to mainlain suppor! of design dead plus live loads whell
subjected to lhe ex pecled deformations caused by seismic
I
forces . P6 effects on such clements shall be considered.
I fn Seismic Zones 2 and 4, provision shall be made for th e
effects of earthquake forces actin g in a direction other Ex pected deformations shall be detcnnill ed as the grea ter
than the principal ax es in each of the following of the Maximum inelastic Response Displacement, 11 M •
circumstances: cons idering PI1 effecls determined in accordance wit h
Section 208.5.9.2 or the defollnation induced by a story
I. The structure has plan irregularity Type 5 as given in drin of 0.0025 limes the story height. W hen computing
Table 208-1 0. expecfed deformations, the stiffening effect of those
Ir 2. The stnlcture IlHs pJan irregularity Type I as given in clemen ts not part of the laleral-fo rce-res isting system
i Table 208-10 for both maj or axes. sha ll be neg lected.
~ the
co mputing Ihe forces induced by expected deformations,
axial load ill the column due to seismic forces Ihe restraining effect of adjoining rigid structures and
~f'ting in either direction is less than 20 percent of the
nonslructural elCIl.1enlS shall be cons idered and a rational
~olunlll axial load capacity. va lu e of member and restraint stiffness shall be used.
Inelasti c dcfonnations of members and connections may
The requirement that orth ogona l effects be considered be considered in the evaluation. provided the assumed
may be sat is fied by designing slich elements for 100 ca lculn tcd capacities <Ire consistent wilh member and
perccnt of thc prescribed design seismic forces in one connection design and detailing.
direction plus 30 perce nt of th e prescribed design seism ic
forces in the pi! rpcndicular direction. The combination For concrete and masonry clements that are pan of the
requiring th e greater com ponent strength shall be used for Ia(c ral - fOfce-resi sting system, the assumed fl exural and
design . AIIl'rnat ively, the erfects of the t\I./O ortho!.!o nal shear stiffness pro pcl'lies sha ll not exceed one half of th e
directions may be combincd 011 a square rOOI of thc~ SUIll g ross section pmpcrlics unless fl rational crackcd ~ scction
of the sqllorcs (SRSS) basis. When the SRSS mcthou or ilna lysis is performed. Additional deformations Ihat Illay
combining directional c ffecl s is used, eilch Icrm compulcd result from foundcHinn ncx ibilily and diaphragm
shall be assi gned th e sign Ihat will result ill (he 1110st deflections shall be considered. For concrete clements not
conservative result. part or the hllera l- forcc~rcs i st iJl g sys tem, see Section
421 .9.
L
2-9B CHAf'TEH 2 .. MirlHmml Design Loads
208.8.2.3.1 Adjoining Rigid Elements A positive connection for resist ing horizontal forl,.:c aCling
Moment-resisting frames and shear walls may be parallel to th e member shall be provided for each h( am ,
enc losed by or adjoined by more rigid clements. provided gi rder or truss. This force shal l not bc less thall (L ·). ..../
it can be shown that the participation or failure of the times the dead plus live load.
more rigid elements wi ll not impa.ir the vertical and
lateml- load-resisting abi lity of the gravity load and ' 208.8.2.4 Collector Elements
lateral-fo rce-resisting sys tems. The eflccts of adjoining Collector e!ements shall be provided that are capable of
rigid clements shall be considered w'l':en assessing transferring the seismic forces originating ill o!hn
whe ther a structure shall be des ignated rcguial or ilTcgular portions of the struc tu rc to the clcment providing : he
in Section 208.4.5. resistance to those forces.
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated to effectively ---,'' ' --'' -'- w,,,, (208-20)
transfer forces to the reinforcing steel. Requirements for
developing anchorage forces in diaphragms arc given in
2:" w;
i",x
Section 208.8.2.8. Diaphragm deformation shall be
considered in the design of the supported walls. The force F"., determined from Equation (208-20) need
not exceed! .OCr/wp.\"> but shall not be less than O.5CJwpJ:'
208.8.2.6.1 Olll-of-Plane Wall Anchorage to Flexible
Diaphragms \Vhcn the diaphragm is required to transfer design seismic
This section shall apply in SeISmic Zone 4 where flexible forces from the yertical~resisting clements above the
diaphragms, as defined in Section 208.5.6, provide lateral diaphragm to olher vertical-resisting elements below the
support for walls. diaphragm due to offset in the placement of the elements
or to changes in stiffness in the veliical elements, these
I. Elements of the wall anchorage system shall be forces shaH be added to those detennined from Equation
designed for the forces specified in Section 208.7 (208-20).
where Rp ~ 3.0 and Q p ~ 1.5.
3. Design seismic forces for flexible diaphragms
2. In Seismic Zone 4, the value of Fp used for the design providing lateral supports for walls or frames of
of the elements of the wall anchorage system shall masonry or concrete shall be determined using
not be less than 6.1 kN per lineal meter of wall Equation (208-20) based all the load determined in
substituted for E. accordance with Section 208.5.2 using a R not
3. See Section 206.4 for minimum design forces in exceeding 4.
other seismic zones. 4. Diaphragms supporting concrete or masonry walls
4. When clements of thc wall anchorage system are not shaH have continuous ties or struts between
loaded concentrically or are not perpendicular to the diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces
wall, the system shall be designed to resist all specified in Section 20S.8.2.7. Added chords of
components of the forces induced by the eccentricity. subdiaphragms may be used to form subdiapluagms
to transmit the anchorage forces to the main
5. When pilasters are present in the waH, the anchorage continuous crossties. The maximum length-to-width
force at the pilasters shall be calculated considering ratio of the wood structural sub-diaphragm shall be
the additional load transferred from the wall panels to 2Y,: I.
the pilasters. However, the minimum anchorage force
at a floor or roof shall be that specified in Section 5. Where wood diaphragms are lIsed to latera!ly support
208.8.2.7. I, Item I. concrete or masonry walls, the anchorage shall
conform to Section 208.8.2.7. In Seismic Zone 2
6. The strength design forces for steel clements of the and 4, anchorage shall not be accomplished by lise of
wall anchorage system shall be 1.4 times the forces toenails or nails subject to withdrawal, wood ledgers
otherwise required by this section. or framing sha!lnot be used in cross-grain bending or
7. The strength design forces for wood elements of the cross-grain tension, and the continuous ties required
wall anchorage system shall be 0.S5 times the force by item 4 shall be in addition to the diaphragm
otherwise required by this section and these wood sheathing.
clements shall have a minimur" actual net thickness 6. Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elcments in
of63.5 mm. structures in Seismic Zonc 4, having a plan
irregularity of Type I, 2, 3 or 4 in Table 208- I0, shall
208.8.2.7 Diaphragms be designed without considering either the one-third
!. The dcOcction in the plane of the diaphragm shall not increase or the dun:tion of load illcrease considered
exceed the permissible deflection of the attached in allowable stresses for elements resisting
clements. Permissible deflection shall be that earthquake forces.
deflection that wil! permit the attached clement to 7. In structures in Seismic Zone 4 having a plan
maintain its structural integrity uncleI' the individual irregularity or Typc 2 ill Table 20g~IO, diaphraglli
loading and continue to support the prescribed loads. chords and drat! Illcmbers shall be designed
2. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist considering illdcp~'lldcnt movement or the projecting
the forces determined in accordance with the wings or tile structure. Each of these diaphragm
following equation:
National Structural Code of the PhilipPines bill Eclition Volume 1
~.100 CHAPTER 2 -. Minimum Design Loads
c lements shall be des ign ed for the mo re severe of the sha ll be designed to provide the s trength required [ 0 res ist
following two assumptions: [he displacements induced by the minimum lateral forces
specified in this section. Design shall conform to the
a. Motion of the projec ting wings in the same
applicable prov isions of other sections as modified by the
direction.
provisio ns contained in Section 208.9.
b. Motion of the projecting wi ngs jn opposi ng
directions. 208.9.1.2 C riteria
Exception: The minimu m design seismic forces prescribed in th is
section a re a( a le"c1 that produces displacements in a
This reQl'irell!e!1! (TIllY•. ··be deemed..· satiifl.ed if. .-.the fi xed base, clastic model of the s tructure, comparable to
procedllr!2S of;§ec(ion 20R,'6 in cOlljullctio~ with a Ih ree- th ose expected of th e real stnl ctllre when responding to
dimellsiQllpl . m.odel haye ..been IIsed to. de(ermine the the Design Basis Ground Motion. Reductions in these
lalera/ seismic forces for design. forces using th e coefficient R is permitted where the
design of nonbu ilding st ructures provides sufficient
208.8.2.8 F raming Below the Base strength and ductility, consis tent with the provisions
The strength and stiffness of the framing between the base specified herein for buildings, [0 resi st the effec ts of
and Ihe foundation shall not be less than that o f the seismic ground mo tions as rep resented by these design
supers tructure. The special detailing requirements of forces.
Chapte r.; 4, 5 and 7, as appropriate, shall apply to
columns supporting discont inu ous lateral-force-resisting When applicable, design strengths and other detailed
clements and 10 SM RF, IMR F, EBF, STMF and design criteria shall be obtai ned from o ther sec tions or
MMR WF system elements below the basel which are their referenced s tandards. The des ign of nonbuilding
requ ired to transmit the forces resulting from lateral loads s tJUctures sha ll use the load combi nat ions or factor~
to the foundation. specified in Secti on 203.3 or 203.4. For nonbuildin g
st ructures designed usi ng Secti on 20B.9.3 , 208.9.4 or
i 208 .8.2.9 Building Sepa rations 208.9. 5, the Re li ability/Red undancy Fac[or, p, ma y be
th
Natiorli:1 1Structural Code of the Philipp ine s G Ecliti on Vo lurn(; 1
2- 1U2 CHAP TEr~ 2 _. Minimum Design Loads
Table 208-13 R and flo Factors for Nonbuilding 3. (H > 3 m of peat and/or higL:/ ,''C:' "..
Stmctures where H = thickness of so il ).
STRUCTURE TYPE R
4. Very high plasti city clays
I. Vesse ls, including tanks and 5. (11 > 7.5 III with PI > 75).
pressurized spheres, on braced or 2,2 2 .0
6. Very thick sofVmedilllll stiff cI ,y.;
unbmccd legs.
2. Casl- i;l-pl acc cOllcrclc-silos ';;1(1 7. (H > 36 '~l).
chimneys having walls con tinuo us 3.6 2.0
to Ihe foundations ~ep!id~i; ,\, - .,; ..".'!i\:. ~'J'1'~
- -- ----.
.;/Ji rno.wni"·'~ _., ,e ,>,,:~';
3. Dfsl~ibu lcd- ~11~ss ~~llIikv~;
such as sl acks,
irii,Qll iM's,q(('Pi:i!kt '
Jh.'!/f~t ~'fee, ·TfPe SD slu.!! l i;;;~-~
SllUctUfCS
chimneys, silos and skirt-
2.9 2.0 la ' -
supJ)ortcd vertical vessels. S ·Tjlle ..~i
. d nol be' 'OSS""'2;!
4. Trussed to~~~ rs '(f~ccs-[a~ding or b!iil<!in "t4eJer:inill~s .(hQI S¢.il P!" jii,'
guyed), guyed stacks and 2.9 2.0 be pr.eSe'1ftii. the #fe or .i~ . Ihe evenl Ihat
clljlll':t~Ys: ~ estabJishi!4 bjigeoJiCim;c'qj.!/Ibi4.·
5. Caruilcvcrcd column -Iype
slnrClures. 2.2 2.0
The criteria set forth in the definition for Soil PfO filc Type
6. Coo ling towers.
SF requiring site-specific evaluatio n s ha H be .... 01i:.. idered. If
3.6 2.0
the si te corresponds to these cr iteria, Ihe s ite shall be
.- ':i.-· Bi~-s ';'~~j h~ppcrs 0;; b ~~~~~i ~;.. -. - classificd as Soil Profile Type S,' and " si te-specific
2.9 2.0
.. ,~!.~:~:.~c.~~_ I.cS_s .. ~ •... .. .....
~ -." evaluation shall be conducted.
8. Stomgc rack s. 3.6 2.0
208.10.2.1 v" Average Shear Wave Vol "cit)'
9. Signs and billboards. 3.6 2.0 Vs shall be detennined in accordance wit h the following
(208-25)
208.10.2 Definitions
Soil profile types are defined as follows:
where:
s.. '·Iard rock with Illcasmcd shear wave veloc ity,
I ' .• > 1500 IIl/s . til = thi ckness of Layer i in m
V,n = shear wave velocity in La yer i in ntis
SR Rock wi th 760 IIlls < I'. 5: 1500 IIl/s.
Sc Very den se soil and soft rock with 208.10.2.2 N, Average Field Standard Penetration
360 rnls < v.! :::; 760 ll1/s or with Resistance and N tl" Average Standard Penefration
ei ther N > 50 o r s,, ;' Ion kP a. Resistance for Co hesion less Soil Layer'
N and Nell shall be determined in accord ance wi th tbe
S" S tiff soi l with 180 IIl/s'; v.,,; 360 IIlls o r following eq uati on:
wi th IS'; N,; 50 or 50 kPa ,; s,,'; 100 kPa .
St" 1\ so il profile wi th l's < J 80 Ill/S or
any profile wit h more than 3 III o f soft c la y defined (208 -26)
as soi l wi th PI > 20, W IIIo " ~ 40 perce nt an d
x" < 25 kPa .
S,.· ~o il s requiring .:) it c~s pcc i(j c evaluation :
(208·2'.')
I. Soi ls vulnerable to poten ti a l ra ilurc or co llapse
under se is mic loading s lich as liqucliab lc so ils,
quid nnd highly sensitive clays, co llaps ible
wcnkly cClllcrHcd soils.
where:
2. Peals andlor highly organic clays
d, =0 thickness of L.ayer i in mill
ds = thc total thickllc!is ofcohesiolllcss soillaycrs ill thc and fracturing. Where hard rock conditions are known 10
top 30 In be continuous to a depth of 30 m, surficial shear wave
N, :~ the standard pcnctralion resistance of soi l layer in velocity measUJ emcnls may be extrapolated 10 assess V.I"
accordance with approved nationally recognized. The rock catego ries. Soi l Profile Types 5',{ Hnd Sfl. shall
standards not be used if th<.°re is Illo rc than 3 meters of soil between
the rock surface (did the bottom of' the sprcttd footi ng or
208.10 .2.3 s,,, Avera ge Undrained Shea r Strength mat rou ndat io n.
SII shall be determined in accordance wil h 1he fo llowing
equation: The definitions prese nted herein shall npply to the upper
30 meters orthe site profi le. Profiles co nt aini ng d isti nc tly
differen t so il layers sllall be su bdivided into those la:if:rs
(208-28) designated by a number from I 10 11 at the bottom, whe re
there are a tota l of 11 dist inct laye rs inl hc upper 30 meters.
The symbol i the n refer to cillY one or the hlyers between I
where: and 11.
de ~ the total thickness (I OO-d,) of cohesive soil layers 208. 1 I Alt ern a ti ve E arthqu a ke Loa d P.-ocedur c
in the top 30 m
The earthquake load proeedur" of ASCE/SE I 7-05 may be
Sus = the undrained shear strength in accordance with used in determin ing the carthquake loads as an alternative
approved nationa ll y recognized standards, 110t to
procedure subject to re liable res(~a rch wo rk commissioned
exceed 250 kPa
by the owner or the e n gi neer~oll ~ record to provide for all
data req uired due to the non~avai l a b i l ity or Phi\'olcs~
208.10.2.4 Soft Clay Profile , SE iss ued spec tra l accelerati on maps for all areas in the
The ex istcn ce ora lOla I thic kn css of sa lt clay greater than Philip pines.
3 III shall be in ves ti ga ted where a soft clay layer is
defi ned by Sli < 24 kPa, 11'' ' ' '::: 40 percell ! and PI > 20. If T he e ng ineer-on ~ reco rd shall be respo nsib le fo r the
these criteri a are met, the site shall be class ified as Soil spect ral acce leration and oth er rcla! i.:d data not issued by
Profi le Type Sf. Phivolcs used in the delerminatioJ: of the earthquake
loads. This altemative earthquake 103.1 procedure shall be
208.10.2 .5 So il Profil es So SD a nd S f subject 10 Peer Review and approv~d of the Bu ild ing
Sites wi th Soil Profile T ypes Sc. So and Sf sha ll be Orncial.
classi fied by using one of the following three methods
with l-:<; . Nand Sj' computed ill all cases a5 speci fied ill
Section 20X.1 0.2.
1. I'~ for the lOp 30 meters (I'~ method).
2. N Ii,,' the top 30 meters (N me thod).
3. Nm lor cohesionle," soil laye rs (PI < 20) in Ihe top
30 III and average Sj/ for cohesi ve soi l layers ( .nl .> 20)
ill the top 30 ill (.I'" meth od).
16'"
"" 200
,, '"
1200'
' .00'
.'"
600'
127 00'
Figure 20S-2A. Seismic SO llrces: Active Faults and Trenches in the Philippines
'"''
,
·t
"""
1600'
Logend
_ _ _ Active Fault: solid line- onland :
dashed line- offshore
$ capital CltyfTown
I) 00'
140W
.,
j
OG cl"
Q.~
-~ ".,
...
~ ...
, - -- - -- 1
i i
II
b
,I
. )
'~ ;
J
i L _ _ __ _ __
11 to:!'
-." .
o
111')
Fi g ure 20X- 2C Scis mic Sources: /\(;Ii vc Fau lts in Ef1 s! Central Ph ilippi nes
CHAP TER 2 - Minimum Design Load s 2,107
"",
~.
, ,'
"
j
,
1,",
\~~~
t
"I:,;
,
I
!
I
!
:',
- /l0lY
:v
I
Q
i{ <1
S." .leu
~~~
;:~,
.. ,:' ' 't,
6
=
. "
. ,"7'
.'
.~.
.-P .:\>
o
1100'
10 00'
\!O 00'
Figure 208-2D. Seismic Sources: Aclive F<lu lts in Wesl CcnlraJ Ph ilippines
111
N8tionHI Structural CocJe of the Philippine s 6 Editi on Vo lume 1
L
2- 108 Cf~Af>TER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
''''
Legend
- - _ Acttve Fault: solid lin e- onland ,
... ... dashed line- offshore
IlJ 00'
-------------------------------_._._-- -- -- -- - - -
Co nt ro l Periods
1~ = CJ 2.SCa
T = n?T
.1
c.
f
f a --J......------'-_ __ J _ _ ••••• _
f ••• ~ ""O""""'_ _ _ .L_____'__ ••••• I _. _ _
· _ .L-._.L._ •• _ - ' - - - : ___ - ' _ _ .J..- .
t o 0.2 4 5
2 3
I
I
TolTs Period (TITs )
t
i Figure 208-3 - Design Response Spectra
Nallon (-l l Stru c tural CO(j(~ of 11'18 PhlliPPI f"H:)S r/' Edition Vo lun1e 1
2-110 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
1 tilr 1tfJ-'
....
•...
- .
ZONE 4
•• ZONE 2
...
••
\\ ' ICre;
(h, ::: addiLional depth of water on the undeflcctcd roof
above the inlet of s(-condary drainage system at
its design flow (i.e .. the hydraulic head), in mm
d = , t,'plh of water on the undefl ected roof up to the
in let of secondary drainage system when the
prinary drainage sy,;rcm is blocked (Le., the stati c
heac), in mm
R = rain I"c.·ad all the untie "lected roof, in kN/m2
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Volun1e 1
?'-112 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
D ES IG N FLOO D. The flood associated w',th the greater FLOOD HAZARD AR E A SU BJ ECT TO HIGH
of the following two areas: VELOCITYWAV E ACTION, Area within the flood
hazard area that is subject to high velocity wave action.
I. Area with a flood plain subject tn a l·percent or
greater c hance of flooding in any year; or FLO ODWA y, The channel of the river, creek o r Olher
2. Area designated as a nood haZc1.rd arca on a watercourse and the adjaccnt Itllld arcas that must be
community 'S Oood hazud ma'i), or olhelwisc legally reserved in order (0 discharge the base flood without
designated. cumulatively increasing the water surface elevation more
than a designated height.
D ES IGN FLOOD E LEVAT) ' J . The e levation of the
"oesign Oood," includi ng W 3 ve heigh t, relative: to the LOWEST FLOOR. The fl oor of the lowest enclosed
datum specified on the co n ' nu ni ty's legally designated area, including basement, but excluding any unfinished or
flood hazard map, The desif".1 fl ood elevation shall be the
elevation of the highes t ex sting grade of the building's flood -resistant enclosure. lIsable solely for vehicle
perimeter plus the depth J11 1,mber (in meters) speci ried on parking, building access or limited storage provided that
the flood hazard map, such enclosure is not built so as to render the structure in
violation of this section.
DRY FLOO DP R O O F r\'G, A combinatioll of design
modifications that resll ;!s in a building or structure, ST A RT OF CONSTIWCfl ON , The diltc of permit
including the attelldant u :·,I ity and sanitary faci lities, being issuance for new cOllslruclioll and substantial
water tight with walls ' mbstantially impermeable to the improvemcnts to existing structures, provided the actual
passage of water and v lith stru ctural components havi ng star! of construction, repair, rccC)nstlllction, rehab ilitatio n,
the capacity to resist h) ads .1S identified illlhc code. addit ion, plilcement or ot her improvemen t is within 180
days afte r thc date of issuancc. The actual slllrt of
EXI STI NG C ONS" ,. RUCTlON , Any buildings and co nstru ction means the fi rst placement of perman ent
st ru ctures flH" \\"1 !ich the "s tart o f co nstructio n" co nstruction of a bui ldi ng (inc lud ing n manufactured
co mmcnced be fo rc the effective dat c of th e co mmunit y 'S home) on a site, such as th e pou rin g of II slab or footings,
Association of Structura l Engineers of U·le Ph!lippines
CHAP TEH 2 ... Minimum Design l.oads . 2-113
th
National Structural Corle of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volurnc 1
Associat ion of StrlJcluml EngIneers of the Philippines
NSCP C101-10
Chapter 3
EXCAVATIONS AND
GEOMATERIALS
SIXTH EDITION
Table of Contents
SECTION 3()1 • GENERAL ...................................... ............................................................................................................... 3
301. I Scope ......... ..... ................................................................................. ......... .......................... ..................... ...................... 3
301.2 Qualily and Design ....... ......... ..................... .. .................................... ...... ................. ..... .. ... ....... ........ .... ..... .................... 3
30 1.3 All owable Bearing Pressures ..... ..................................... ... .... .. .. ........ ........ .... ................... ................ .. ....... ... ... ............. . 3
SECTION 302 - EXCAVATION AND FILLS ........................................................................................................................ 3
302. I General ........................................ .... ... ......................... ....... .. ................................ ............................. ... ...... ..... ... ... ........ 3
302.2 Cuts .. .......................................... ......... ..... .......... ..... ..... ........... .... ................................. ...... ......... ......... ........................ 3
302.3 Excava ti ons .. .......... .. ... ..................................... .. .... .......... .. ....... .... ............................. .... .. ... ..... ............. ...................... .. 3
302.4 Fills ......................... .......................... .... ................. ......... ...... ............... .. ....... .. ..... ... ............ ...... ... .... ........................ .. .... 4
302.5 Selbacks ........................................ .................... ..... .............. .............. ... ... ....... ..... ................ .......................................... 5
302.5 Drainage and Terraci ng ... ..................................................................... ...... .. ................................................................. 6
302.6 Erosion Contro!. ...... ................. ............... ..................................... ... ....... .......................................................... .............. 6
SECTION 303 - FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................ 7
303. I General .......................... ...... ........................................ .... .............................................................................................. 7
303.2 Soil Classification .......................................................................... ..................................................................... ............ 7
303.3 Questionable Soil .................... .. ................ ............ ...... ................................. .. ....................... ........................ ........ ......... 7
303.4 Liquefaclion Sludy ...... ................................... .......................... .. .. .............. ............. .. ....................... ............ ....... ......... 7
303.5 Expansive Soil .. ............ ...... ...... .................... .. ........................... ................ ... ........................................ ... .................. 7
t 303.6 Compressible Soils ............................................................................ ........................................................................ 8
!f 303.7 RepOrts.... ....................... ............................. ... .. .. ..... ................................... .. ....................................... ........ 8
303.8 Soil Tesls .................. ........ . ...... ....................... .......... ....................... . ................................. .. ...... ....................... ... 9
303.9 Liquefaction Potenlial and Soil Sirength Loss.................... ................................. ............................. .. .. 9
303 .10 Adjacenl Loads.................. .......................................... ................ .. ......................... .. ............ ........................ 10
tt 303 .11 Drain.ge........................................... ....... .. .... ...... ....... ........................................ ........ .... ... ........... ....... ............... 10
I
303. 12 Plate Load Test ................................... .. ............ .. ........ .................................................... ................ .... .. ....... .... ....... 10
SECTION 304 - ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LA TERAL PRESSURES ......................................................... 10
304. 1 From Geotechnical Site Investigation and As sl~ss m e n( ...... ,........... ....... ............. ............... .. ................. ... .. .......... 10
304.2 Pres umplive Load·Bearing and Lateral Resisting Values ........ .. ......................... ....... ....... .......... ...... ........... JO
304.3 Mininlunl Allowable Pressures... .............. .... .................. . .. ....... .. _........ ...... . ,....... .. ........... ... .... .... ....... I J
304.4 Fou ndmi ons Adjace nt to Exisl ing Retainin g/Basement Walls.. ,...... ,............ ... .................. ......... J 1
SECTION 305 · FOOTINGS .......................................... ........................................... .................................... ......................... 12
305. 1 General ................................................................................................... ................................................................... 12
305.2 FOOling Design .... .... ....................................................... ............... ................. .... ........... ....... .................................... 12
305.3 Bearin g Walls ................. .......................................................................... .................................................... .............. 12
305.4 S lepped Foundalions .. .............................................. ............................................................. .......... ............... .............. 12
305.5 Footi ngs on or Adjacenllo Slopes............................................................... .. .......................................................... J3
305.6 Foundalion PI ales Or Sills ........... ....... ....................................... .......... ...................... ....... ......... .. ................ ................ 13
305.7 Designs Emp loyi ng Lateral Bearin g .................................. .. .............. ..... .... ........... ....... ................ ... .... .............. ..... ..... 14
305. 8 Grillage Footi ngs .................. ......... .. .................................................... ...... ......................... .. ............................ ......... 14
305.9 Bleac her Fooli ngs .. .... .. .... .. ............. .. ..... ... ... .................. .............................................. ... ... .......... ... ...... .. ... ..... .............. 14
SECTION 306 · PILES - GENERAL REQUIREM E NTS ................................................................................................... IS
306. I General .......... ............................. ......... ................... ...... ................ ...... .. ....... .................................... ......................... .. .. 15
306.2 Interco nnection ............................................. "... .... ........................ .................... .......... ,... ., ........ .. ........... ...... .. ......... 15
306.3 DClernlinalion o f Allo\vablc Loads ............... .......................................... ................................ ....... ................ ...... ....... 15
306.4 Stalic Load Test...... .. ........................ ... ............................................................................................................ 15
306.5 Dynamic Load Tes l...................................................................... ............... .. ..................................................... 15
306.6 COhl1111l Act ion .................. ................ ........................... ................... ............................... .. ... 15
306.7 Group ACl io n .................... ............................. ................ ........... ............... ....... ....................... 15
306.8 Pi les In S ubs id ing Areas.... ................ .... .......... .. ............................... 16
306.9 Jellin g .................................... ................... .................... .. .. 16
306. 10 Pro lc<.:lion Of Pile Materials ........................ ..... ... .. 16
306. 1 I Allowable Loads.......... .......... ................. .................. . ................ ....................... ..... 16
306. I 2 Usc of Hi gber Allowable Pile Stresses ............ .... .. .. ........ . ............... .. .. 16
SECTION 307 . PILES - SPECIFIC REQUiREMENTS ....................................... ............................................................. 17
lh
National Structural COdE: of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
307.1 Round Wood Piles.
307.2 Uncased Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles ..
307.3 Metal-Cased Concrete Piles ..
307.4 Precast C:oncretc Piles .............................................................................................. ...... . ..
307.) Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles (Pretensioncd) ..
307.6 Structural Steel Piles .. 10
, ')
307.7 Coocrete·Filied Steel Pipe P i l e s . . )
SECTION 308 . FOUNDATION CONSTl!UCTlON·SEISMIC ZONE 4 ........................................................ " . ........... 19
308.1 General.. ()
~08.2 Foundation and ()eotcchnicallnvestigations .
3tnLl Footings and Foundations ..
308.4 Pier and Pile Foundations. /0
30X.) Driven Pile Foundations.. ;i
306.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations.. . ..................... .
SECTION 309 - SPECIAL FOUNDATION, SLOPE STABlLIZA TION AND MATERIALS OF
CO NSTl! UCTI 0 N .................................... .............................................................................................................................. 22
, CHAPTER 3 - Gelleral & Excavation and Fills 3-3
302.2.2Slol'e
The slope of cut surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for
the intended use and shall be no steeper than 1 unit vertical
in 2 unit s horizont al (50% slope) unless a geotechni cal
engineeri ng, or both, staling that the site has been
investigated, and giving an opinion that a cut at a steeper
slope will be stable and not create a hazard to pub lic or
private property, is submitted and approved. Such cuts shall
be protected against erosion or degradation by sufficient
cover, drain age, engineering andlor bi otechnical means.
th
National Structural Cod e of tlie Philippines 6 Edition Vo lume 1
3 -4 CHAP TER 3 - General & Excavation and Fills
Top of
Slope PA*
: 1-115 but
~ ~ 0.60 m3
: min. an
. -, I
.r
Toe of
3 In max .. 7'
PA*
Sl~pe
C ut or Fill ,
, I
i
Natura\ 1or F- -I
~ IIII S I
~ < HI2 bJ!! 0.6 m,> : Slope Grade
: mi n. and 6 m :
max. H
1
Natural or Finish
Grade
* Permit Area Boundary
In cases where the existing adjacellt building will have No (ill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to
morc bascmcllls tha n the proposed bui ld ing. Ihe foundati on any bu ilding or slmClUrc unl ess such building or stru ctu re is
of lhe proposed building should be designed so ;IS not 10 capable of wi thstanding the additional vertic<ll and
impart add itional lateral eanh pressures on the existing horizontal loads c allsed by Ih e fill or surcharge ,
build ing (sec scc ti on 304.4).
Fill slopes shall not be constlllcted 0 11 natural slo pes Slccpe r
th an I unil vcrt ica l in 2 un its horizonta l (50% slope),
provided fUfiher th aI benc hes shall be made 'to kcy in the
subsequent fill materia l.
i
unils horizon,.,1 (20% s lope) shall be OlleaSI 3 m wide. delailed slope stability study. Selback dimensions shall be
horizontal distances measured perpendicular to the site
The area beyond the loe of fill shall be sloped to drain or a boundary. Setback dimensions shall be as shown in Figure
paved drain shall be provided_ When fill is to be placed 302-1.
over a cut, the bench under the toe of fill shall be at least 3
III wide but the cut shall be made before placing the fill and
302.5.2 Top of C UI Slope
onJy after acccpt.mce by the geotechnical engi neer as a
The top of cut s lopes shall not be made nearer [0 a s ile
suitable found ation for fill .
boundary line than one fifth of thc vertical height of cut
with a minimum of 0.6 III and a maximum of 3 m . Th(
302.4.3 Fill Material
sctback may need to be increased for any required
Any organic or deleterious ma terial shall be removed and interceptor drains.
will not be permitted in fills_ Except as pennined by the
geoteChnical engineer, no rock or similar irreduc ible
Ii material with a maximum dimension greater than 200 mill
shall be buried or placed in [ills.
302.5.3 Toe of Fill Slope
The toe of fi 11 slope shall be made not nearer to tbe site
boundary line than one half the height of the slope with ~,
ftxception: minimu11l of 0.6 In and a maximum of 6 m. Where a ft::
~~e placemem of larger rock may be permitted when Ihe
slope is to be located near the s ite boundary and Ih,
adjacent off-site propcl1y is developed , special precaution:
I
geotechnical engineer properly devises a method of
shall be incorporated in the work as the building offici:.:.!
placement. alld contitlf(ollsly inspects its placemellf alld
deems necessary to protect the adjoining propel1y fro !:
approves lire fill stability_ The following conditions shall
damage as a re su lt of" such grading. These precautions m <! ~;
also apply:
I include but are not limited to:
1_ Prior to issuance of the gradinB permit, pOlential rock
I. Additional setbacks.
f disposal areas shall be delineated on the grading plan.
2_ Provisio n for retaining or slough walls.
2. Rock sizes greater Ihon 300 111m in maximwn
dimension shall be 3 m or more below grade, measured 3. Mechanical s tabilizati o n or chemical lreulmen( of I~ ;:
vC!'(ically_ fill slope surface to minimize eros ion.
3. Rocks shall be placed so w· 10 assure filling of all voids 4. Rockfall protection
wilh well-grotled soil.
5_ Provis ions Cor the contro l of surface wate rs.
302.4.4 Co mpa ction
302.5.4 Modification of Slope Location
All rill s shall bc co mpac ted in lifts Ilot exceedi ng 200 Illlll
The hui lding offici'll may approve allc lllatc sctback s. Ti·
ill th ickncss 10 II min imuill of" CJ5 percent of maximum
buildin g offici al l1lay requ ire an investigation ' ~! ' .
density as determined by ASTM Standard D- I 557. In-
rccollllllcn<i<l!ion by a qualified geotec hn ical engincC';'
place dcns it y shall be determincd in .\ccordancc with
demonstrate thill th e inten t of thi s section has been sat is; .. -
ASTM D-1556. D-2Ifl? 1)·2922. D-lO I? or eq ui va len t.
For clean granular mah.:/"ials. thc lise of the foreg oing
procedures is i n;'l pproprialc. Rcl,Hi vc dcnsi lY critc ri a shall
111
N;·l!IOI·l~li Slnl c tlHcll Code of !he Phi lippine s 6 Editi on Volume 1
3-6 CHAPTER 3 -- General & Excavalion and Fills
Exception:
302.5 Drainage and Terracing
The gradient from Ihe bllildillg pad may be I perccm fr all
302.5.1 General of the following conditions exisl Ihroughout fli £.' per;;:;1
Unless o therwise indicated 011 the approved grading plan, area:
drainage facilities and terracing shall conform to the 1. No proposedji fls ore greater thall 3 m maximum depth.
provisions of this section for cut Or fill slopes Sleeper than I
unit vertical ill 3 units horizontal (33.3% slope). 2. No proposed finish cut or fill slope f(lces have a
vertical height in excess of 3 m.
302.5.2 Terrace 3. No existing slope faces steeper than 1 IInit verlh.",,: in
Terraces ill !CHst 2 III in width sha ll be estti bl ished at nOI 10 units horizontal (10% slope) hGlle a vertical hc,iglll
more than 10 III ve nical intervals o n all ellt o r fill slopes to ill excess of 3 m.
contro l sUlface drainage and debris except Lhal where on ly
o ne lerracc is required, it s hall be al mid-height. For cuI or 302.5.5 Interceptor Drains
fill slopes greater than 20 III and up to 40 111 in vertical Paved or Lined interceptor drains shall be in stalled alo ng
height, one terrace at approximately mid-height shall be 4 the top of all cut slopes where the tributary drainage area
m in width . Ten'ace widths an d spacing for cut and fill above slopes toward the cut has a drainage path greater than
s lopes greater than 40 m in height shall be designed by the 12 m measured horizontally. Interceptor drains shall be
civil engineer and approved by the buildi ng official. paved with a minimum of 75 mm of concrete or gu nile and
Suitable access shall be provided to permit proper cleaning re info rced. They sh:lIl have a m in imum depth of 300 mOl
and maintcnance. ilnd a minimum paved width of 750 mm measured
horizontally across the drain. The slope o f drain shall be
Swales Qr ditches on terraces shall bc designed 10 approved by the building offic ial.
effectively co ll ect surface water and di sc harge to an outfall.
It shall have a minimum gradient of 0.5 percent and must be 302.6 Erosion Conlrol
paved with reinforced concrete not less than 75 mm in
thickness or an approved equal paving material. 302.6.1 Slopes
The faces of c ul and fill s lopes shall be prepared and
A si ngle ru n of swale or ditch s hall not coll ect runoff from a
maintained to con trol ngainst erosio n. Thi s conLrol m3Y
tri but<JIY area exceedi ng 1,000 m2 (projected area) without
consist of effecti ve planting adapted to or indigenous (Q the
discharging into a down drain .
loca lity. The protection for the slopes shall be installed as
soo n as practicable and prior to calling for final approval.
302.5.3 Subsurface Drainage
Where cut slopes arc not subjec t to erosion due to the
Cut and fill slopes shall be provided with surface drainage erosion-resistant character of the material s, sllch protection
as necessary for stability. may be omillcd .
For buildings with basements, it is recommend ed that the The building offiCial may waive this evaluation upon receipt
depth of boring should ex tend to twice the least plan afwritten opinion of a qualified geotechnical engineer that
dimension of th e structure ' s footpri nt plus the depth of the liquefaction is not probable.
basement.
303.5 Expansive Soil
An exhaustive geotech nical invcstig.ltion should also be Soils meeting all four of the following provisions shall be
conducted in Ci.lSCS of questionable soils, expilnsive so ils, considered expansive. except that tests to show com pl iance
unknown groundwater table to determi ne whether the with Items I, 2 a nd 3 shall not be required if the test
exist ing ground wale!" table is above Of" within 1.5 m be lo w presc ribed in hem 4 is conducted:
the elevation of the lowest 0001' level or whe re such floor is
located below the finished ground level adjacent to th e !. Plasticity index (PI) of 15 or greater, determined in
foundation, pil e foundations, or in rock stra ta where the acco rdance with ASTM D 4318.and Liquid Limi t > 50.
roc k is sllspected to be of doubtful characteristics or 2. More than 10 percent of the soil particles pass a No.
indicmc variati ons in the structure of" th e rock or wlwrc 200 sieve (75 111), determined in accordance with
solution cavities or vo ids are expected to be prcse nt in the ASTM D 422.
rock.
3. Marc than 10 percent of the soil parti cles arc less than
The building official lIlay req uire that the interpretation and 5 micrometers in sile, determined in accordan ce with
eval uation of the resu lts of the foundation invcstigation be ASTM [) 422.
made by a regis tcred civil engineer experienced and 4. Ex pansion index grea ter than 20, determined in
knowledgeable in th e field of geotechn ica l cnginccring. accordance with ASTM D 4829.
Soi l classifi cat ion shall. be based on observat ion <l nd any Foo tin g or foundati on desig n nced not compl y wit h Section
necessary field or l<lbora tory tests of tin:: materials disclosed 303.5.3 or 303.5.4 where the so il is rcmoved in accordance
by borings or excavations made in appropriate locations . with Sect ion 303.5.4, nor where the building offi cial
approves stabilization of the soil ill accordance with Section
301.5.5.
I
NotlOll al S ll"l!(:tural Code·) of tile Pl1ilippll"les G" Edition Volume 1
3-8 CHAPTER 3 - General & Excavalion and Fills
303.5.5 Stabiliza ti on
303.5.2 Foundations Where the active zone of expansive soi l ~ is stabi li zed in lieu
Footings or foundatio ns placed o n or wit hin the active zone of designing footi ngs or fou ndations in accord<H1ce Wi lh
of expansive soils shall be designed to res ist differenti al Section 306.2, the soi l shall be stabili zed hy chemi cal
vo lume chnnges and to prevent st l1Jctural damage to the . lreat ment, dewntering, pre-satu rati on or equ iva lent
suppoJ1cd structure. Defl ec ti on and rac king of the teC hni ques.
supported shall be limited to that which will not interfere
wi th the usabil ity and serviceability of the structure. 303.6 Compressible Soils
If th e boreholes show tlHl t the propo!'ed slruc tul'cs arc to be
Found ati ons placed below where vo lume change occurs or buill abo ve co mpressible ti ne·grain ed soi ls (wi th N< 6), it
below expansive soil shall com ply with the following is recomme nded th at conw li darion tests be perform ed ill
provisions: accordance with ASTM D 2435 to determine the settl emelll
I. Fou ndat ions ex tending into or pe netrating expa nsive parameters for the si te.
soils shall be designed to prevent uplift of the
supported structure. If wide, massive loads within the slmctures to be built on
compressible fine -grained soils are to be expec ted for
2. Foundations penetrating expansive soils shall be prolonged periods of time built, the settlement effects on
designed (Q res ist forces exerted on the fou ndation due adjacent SlruClu rc.1) shou ld be evaluated as we ll.
to soi l volume changes or shall be isolated from Ihe
expansive soil. 303.7 Reports
The soi l classification and design bearing capacity shall be
303.5.3 Slab on G round Foundations
shown 0 11 the plans, unless the fou ndation co nforms to
Momen ts, shears and deflections for use in designing slab· Tab le 305-1. The build ing official ma y require submission
on·ground mat or raft foundations on expa nsive soils shall of a written repon of th e investigation , whi ch shall include,
be determin ed in accordance with WRIICRSI Design of but need not be limited to, the followin g informati on:
S!ab·on-Ground Found~ti on s or PTJ Standard
Requ irements fo r Analys is of Shallow Concre te I. A plOl showing the locat ion of all test borings and/or
Foundations on Ex pansive Soils. Using the moments, excava ti ons.
shea rs and deflecti ons detemu ned above, prestressed slabs· 2. Desc riptions and classifi cati ons of the materia ls
on·groun d, mat or raft foundations on expansive soils sha ll encountered.
be designed in accordance wi th PTJ Standard Requ irements
fo r Design of Shalfow Post·Tensioned Concrete 3. Elevation of the waler table, if encountered.
Foundat ions on Expansive Soils. It shall be permitted to 4. Recommendations for foundation Iype and design
analyze and des ign such slabs by other methods tilat criteria, including bcuri ng capacity, provisions to
account for soil·s truclu re interaction, the defo rmed shape of mitigate the effects of diffcrential scttlements and
th e soil support, the place or s tiffened plme action of the ex pansive soils, provisions to mitigate the effects of
slab as well as both cemer lift and edge lift conditions. liquefaction and soi l strc ngth , provisions for spec ial
Such alt ernative methods sha ll be ra tional and the basis fo r fo undation solutio ns and ground improvement, and the
all aspects and param ete rs of the method shall be ava ilab le effec ts of adjaccnt loads.
for peer rev iew.
5. Expected total and differentia! settlement.
303.5.4 Removal of Expa nsive Soil 6. Laboratory test resu lt s or soil sam ples.
Where expansive soil is removed in lieu of designing
7. Field borehole lug co nta ining the following
footings or foundations in accordance wilh Secti on 302.3.2,
informat ion
the soil shall be removed 10 a de pth sufficient to ensure a
constant moist ure contenL in Ihe rema;ning soil. FiJI a) Project locmioll
material shall not cont ain ex pansive soils <1 11<1 shall comply b) Deplh of borehole
with Section 302.3.3. c) Ground elevation
d) Grollnd water t;tblc c!cv.atio!1
Exception:
c) Date !'tarled and finished
Expansive soil need not be removed 10 the depth of constant
moisture, provided the confining pressure in the expallsive T he soil ciassific.ltion and dcs ign·beari ng capacity shall bc
soil created by the fill and supported s/ruClllre exceeds the shown on the pla ns, un lc:-s the foundat ion con forms to
swell pressure. Tab le 305- 1.
When expansi ve soils are present, the bui lding official may
Table 303·3 Geophysical Tests
require thai speci,ll provisions be made in Ihe roundati on
design and constmction to safeguard against damage due to Field Test ASTM Output Data I
this expansiveness. The building official may require a Designation Parameter Obtained
special in vestigati on and report to provide these design and
construction criteria.
Geophysical Tests
Table 303-2 Laboratory and Field Tests Seismic refract ion
Laboratory I
Field Test
I ASTMJ Test I Parameter
Output OatH I
nCS i 1!Il ~lfioJ1 Obtained
Seismic D5777-00 Maps su bsurface
geologic conditions,
reflection
Classification oj .soils lithologic unit s and
fractures.
Moisture content D2216-05 Moisturel Waler
con lent Ground D7128 Maps lateral
Penetrating continuity of
Grain size D422-63 Soil grad ation
Radar lithologic units and
analysis
detects changes in
Atterberg Li mits D4318-05 Liq uid limit, plasti c
the acoustic
Ii mi t
properties of
uses D2487-00 Classificati on of
subsurface
soils
geomatcrials.
Specific Gravity D854-05 Specific gravity
Cross hol e D6432-99 p-wave and !i-Wave
Shrinkage Limit D427-04 Shri nka~e limit velocity
seismic survey
Organic Matter D2974-00 Moisture content, ash determination.
conteiH and percent
elastic modul i
orl!a nic mutter in soi l
. detcllllination
Swedis h Weight 115 N~w-value indicating,
undrain ed so il shear Geo-resisti vity D4428 CO!Tosion Potential
Sounding Test A 1221:2002
strength Survey or so ils, Electrical
UCT Test (Soi ls) D2166-00 Strength parameters grounding,
Tri-ax ial (UU D2850-03a Strength parameters slratigraEhic stlldie~ _
Test)
Tri-axial (CU D4767-04 Strength parameters 303.8 Soil Tes ts
Test) Tables 301-2 and 103 -3 summarize the commonly used
Oedollleter ( I -D D2435-04 Consoli dation fi eld and labora to ry tests needed in determining the in-situ
Consolidation) parameters so il parameters for use in foundati on design and analysis.
Laboratory Va ne D4648-05 Strengt ll parameters
Shear 303.9 Liquefaction Poten tial and Soil Strength Loss
Direct Shear 1)3080-04 Strength pa ram cters
Test When required by Section 3(H.3. the poten ti al for soil
UCT for Intact D2938-95 Strength parameters liqucfaction and soi l strength loss during eal1hquakes shall
Rock be cvaluated during the geotechnical investigation. The
Standard D1586-99 N- va lue geotech nical evalua ti on shall assess potenti,11 liqueractio n
Penetration Tes t susceptib ility potentia! t:onsequc nccs of any liquefaction
Modified Proctor D IS57-02 Max imum dry ;l!ld soil stre ngth loss, including estimation of differential
Test densit l' se ttl ement. lat cr;i1 movement or reduction in fo undation
Standard Proc'{or tvlaximulll dry ='t1i l-hcill'i ng cap;lcit y. <llld di scu ss mitigating Illea!; ures.
D698-00"
Test de nsi ty Sud ! me:lsurcs sha ll he given consideralion in lh e design of
the bui ld ing and may include. but are not limi led to, ground
Field Density I) IS56·00 Maximull1 dry
slabil izatio n. selet:!ion or appropr i,lt c foundati on type and
Test density
depths. =,ckc tio n of <Ippropri alc structural S)'slemS to
Cil R t,,1> Test D ISH3-05 CIl R
Cone Penclnltion 1)3441-05 Soil strength
'I(.Tollllllodat l! anli cipalcd displacements. or :lIly
t:olllhin'lli o" of these measures.
~~~ ___,________,_._..._. ______J.~~~~~.!::.~ _.. _._. ____ ._
The potential I'llI' liqu(:rat:tioll :llld soil stre ngth loss shall \J; '
ev,lIu;IIt.',d for a sile peak ground ac:ccler,llioll that .•IS
mini mum. confo rms to the proba hi lity o f cxccct!;lIl,
s pceilicd in SCd ioll 20K.fl.1. Peak grollnd Cleeclerillion m:":
hJ;lllond i S !!Ucl lJ !,ll COd (; 0 1 Ii 1(-: PI1I IIPi J1 :k:'; (( hl:\IO!l \J()llllill'~ 1
3-10 CHAPTEri 3 --. General & Excavation and Fills
Presumptive JO:l<J-bcaring values shall apply to lll<Ilcrials 304.3 Minimum Allowable Press ures.
with similar ph ysical characteristics and dispositions. Mud, The recommended all owable foundali on and lateral values
prganic silt, orga nic clays, peat or unprepared fi ll shall not shall be with the allow ab le stress design load co mbin ations
be assumed 10 have a presum ptive load-bearing capacity specifi ed in Secti on 203.4.
unless data from a geotech ni cal site assessmcllI and ,
jnvcst igalion to substantiate the use of such a value arc
.,, submjued.
304.4 Fo undations Adjacenf to Exis ting
., Relainin g/Basemcnt "" all.1i
! In cases where the adjacent building will have more
For clay, sandy day, si lty clay and cla yey silt, in no case
basemcnls th an (he prob'oscd bu ilding, lhe foundation of the
shaJllhc latera l slid ing resistance eKceed one-half the dead
proposed build ing shqukl be designed so as not to impal1
load.
addi ti ollallatcrnl earth pressu res on th e existing building.
It is (he responsibililY of lhe engineer-DC-record 10
determine the applicability of these presLi mptive values for
Lhe Project.
Table 304-1 Allowable Foundation lind Lmcrai Pressure
!
Latera l
Allowable Gearing Lateral Sliding'
Foundation I1 clow Nftl ura l
! Class of Materials l
Pressure! Grade· l
-----
i ( kJ'a ) (kPaJm of
Coeffici cntS
Rcsistance6
(kPa)
deplh)
f
! L Mass.i ve Crystalline Bedrock 200 200 0.70
!
2. Sedimentary and Foli ated Rock 100 60 0.35
II
3. Sand y Grave l and /or Grave l(GW & GP) 100 30 0.35
N;)llollal S lrllcl llr~:ll Code of lilt;; PhlllPPill OS (,' :.dltlon \lOlll l: 1f~
3"12 CHAPTER 3 - General & Excavalion and Fills
J 250 250 450 200 600 I. A o ne~story \Vood or metal{rame building 1101 used
2
, Wlt",-(, 1111I1 ~jW{ for human occupancy alld 1I()l over 40 m if! floo r
f·lIIlth'fllll.{ IUC foulld_ fimllll.t:J: mlll/rmmltllmi/J J'hnlf a rea may be cOllstructed witll walls supported all a
{II' 1"I'{1II;"1'11 11/ SI', 'li(1/I 305. 1,
fl .\
Tilt' ~rrm/l(!IfIll!l' r ,hi' fllNlr flllly IN' I'.IH/wtln! /(I Ihl' cll' l'(l/jml 0ll{lf' wood foundarion plale permallelllly Illlder lile waler
If/I' IIJI'I~frHlIIlIg. wble when permitled by the buildillg official.
I FIH/I/Ilmillll 111((,\- .\up/Hn'l (I TtIO[ ill mldi/;o/I UI 1111' 51i,1ll1r1l1'11 !"IIlmlll'"
"f jloorJ. . FllwU/fII;mlS _1//PfHlrlin.s: rfHifl' only .f/wlllJl" (1.1 rl'i/llir(!11 jf/r 2, nit! support of buildings by /lOsts embedded ill eartli
IIIPI'"nillg tJII(' jloor_ shall be designed as specified ill Section 305.7. Wood
Till' (ir/JlII "11',,,/)(,,/111('/1/ IIIIIM (l1\\,(lr.1 111' bl'l,,1I' flO/l'll/iul 11.('/"" 11/ posts or poles embedded ill earth shall be pressure
.ff 11/11-
treated with an approved preservative, Steel posts or
poles shall be protected as specified ill Seclioll
305.2 Fnoling Design
306.10.
Except for special provisions of Section 307 coveri ng the
dc .. igl1 uf' piles. all p0l1io!ls of footing s .. hall he designed 305 .4 Slepped !'oundalions
in m:cord;lllcc with the :-tl11clUml provisions of thi s ernie
Foundations for all buildings where the surface of the
and :-hall he designed to.:illinimi7_c diffcrellli ;'ll ... cttlcmcnt
ground slope.... morc than I lInil VCl1ica l in I (J units
whcn nc('cssary ;Intl thl" effects of expansive soils whl"1l
horizolllal ( 10% .'dope) shall hc level or shall he s(eppcd
prc.<:;cnt .
so (hal both top and bouom of such foundation arc level.
Top of Slope
~:
Face O(SII1lClurC
Hn but
need not
exceed
4.5m m..'tx.
,7' l Of.5,'_IO_.P"
N,ll tOn<;lJ ~;!ruclu r<-Ij Code of the Pllil ippHw s G ' Edilioll Volume 1
ti
3·14 CHAPTEli3 -- General & Excavation cllld Fills
more than :WO mm or Jess than seven bolt diameters from 305.7.2.3 Vertical load
c~c h e nd of the piece. A properl y sized nut :111(\ washer The resistance to vertical loads is dCl crmi ",cil I,.: ~: i C
shall be liglll cncd 0 11 each boIL to Ihe plate_ Foundati on allowable soiJ·bcaring pressure sct forth ill T:!! : _. ," :
"hlles an d sills shall be the kind or wood specified in
Chapter 6.
305.7.3 Backfill
The backfill in the annular space around column not
305.7 Designs Employing L·atcraJ Hearing
em bedded in poured footings shall be by one of the
following methods:
305.7.1 General
Constructio n employing posts or poles as columlls 1. Backfill shall be of concrete with an UJtiIlHi l.;. s! !"r nglh
eillbedded ill e:lrth or embedded in concrete fOOlings in of ! 5 MPa at 28 days. The hole shall not lw ks': IiLH l
the earth m;IY be used and designed (() res ist both axia l 100 mill large r (h an the diameter of the Cf\ IUlIln :~ t ils
and 1~ll c ntl loads. Th e depth to resis t latera l loads shall be bottom or 100 mm larger than ~h t: ,: .. .. O Ili:!
determined by means of the design edteri,l eswb lished dimensi on of a Squ fU"C or rectan gu lar coi u !lII'.
he rein or other IllclllOds ;lpp roved by the build ing official . 2. Backfill shall be of clean sand . The sand shall be
thoroughly co mpac ted by tampin g in la yers not morc
305.7.2 DeSign C"il eria than 200 I11I1l in thickness.
( f ----)
normal force impo~ed on the soil by the weight of the
d= 2II 1+
4.3/i
1+ - - - (305·1 ) footing or slab.
11
where:
305.7.4.1 Posts embedded in eanh shall no. be used '0
provide latera l suppOrt for siructural or nOllslruclural
maleri als such as pl aster, masonry or concrete un less
2.3 P
A bracing is provided.
S,"
h = uia me ter of rollnd post or foo ting or diilgonill 305.8 Gril lage Footings
d i lll~n sio n nf squa re post or foo tin g. III When grillage footings of Sll1lclura l steel shapes <I re used
d = depth of emhedment in (~art h in 111 btl l 1101 ove r 3.5 o n soi ls. they sha ll be co mpletel y e mbedded in concrete.
III for p"q')ose of com pIlling lateral pressure. III Concrele covel' shall be m least 150 mOl all the bOIl O Ill
II = d ist:1I1CC from ground surface 10 poilU of and al least 100 mill at all olher points,
applic;ltion of P, m
P = applied lateral force. kN 305.9 Bleacher Footings
S, = allow:!blc late ral soil-bearing pressure as set forth Footings for open -air seating facilities sh;l!1 comply with
in T,lblc 304- 1 based on a depth of one third the Chap.er 3.
depth of embedment, kPa
.,'1 = allowabl e latc ral soil-bcclring press ure as set forth ExceptiOlIS:
ill Tahle ~04- 1 hased O il it depth equal to the depth Temporary open -t,;r porlllble bleacher.'i may be JUPI)(l! : :·d
o r cmhedmCIll. kPa IIpon wood ,'iil/s or .\'I(~el plates placed directly UpOIi the
.r: mull •...J surface. prm-idetf soil pl"l'.\·sure doC's /l of ('x: I'(~d
J05.7.2.2 COllsll'a in cd 50kPa.
The following fnrllwlil llIi1y hI..' u:ie(1 [0 del cnninc the
depth of emhedment requ ired to rc."is l 1;l1(,l'ill loads where
constrain t i ~ provi ded :tI Ihe ground surface, such as iI
rigid floor or pave mcnt.
005·2)
CHAPTEFi 3 - General & Excavation and Fills 3·1 b
',
3 -16 CHAJ'TF.:f1 ~~ ,.. Genera! & Excavation and Pills
306.8 Piles in Subsiding Areas 306.12 Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses
Where piles are dri ve n through subs iding fill s or other Allowable compressive stresses greater than those
s ubsiding Siratil .1Ild dClive suppon from underlying specified in Section 307 s hall be pelmilted wh" '-' ~
firmer materials, consideralion shall be given (0 the substantiating data justifying such higher stresses are
downward frictional forces, which may be imposed on Ihe submitted to and approved by the building official. Such
piles by Ihe subsiding upper st raw which :-;Ilall be substant iating data shall be included in the foundation
deductive fromlhc nel pile 10<ld c.lpacily, in vcslig;:nion repon in accordance wilh Section 306, 1.
306.9 Jelling
In stallmion of pilcs hy wal eI' jelling shall nol be uscd
excepl wherc .lI1d as spccifically permi{lcd by {he building
official. When uscd, jetting shall be carried oul in slich a
manner Ihm tile carrying capacity of existing piles and
sl l1icturcs shall not be impaired, After withdrawal of the
jet , piles shall be dri ve n down untillhc required res istance
is obtained ,
307.3.1 Ma(erial
Concrete used in metal-cased concrete piles shall have a
307.1 Round Wood Piles specified compressive st rength i'e
of nOI less than l7
MP•.
307.1.1 Ma(erial
Except where ulltre:ncd piles arc permitted, wood piles 307.3.2 Installation
'>'. shall be pressure treated. Untreated piles may be used Every metal casing for a concrete pile shall have a scaled
only when it has been establ ished that the cutoff will be tip with a diameter of not less than 200 mm .
below lowes t groundwater level assumed to exist during
[he life ortlle sll1lc lurc. Concrete piles cast in place in metal shells shall have
shells driven for their full length in contact with the
307.1.2 Allowable Stresses surrounding soil and left permanenlly in place. The shells
The allowable unit stresses for round woodpiles shall nOt shaH be sufficiently strong to resis t collapse and
exceed those set forth in Chapter 6 . sufficiently watertight to exclude waler and foreign
material during the placing of concrete.
The allowable va lues listed in. for compression parallel 10
the grain III extreme fiber in bending are based on load Piles shall be driven in such order and with such spacing
sharing as OCClII'S in a pile cluster. for piles which as to ensure against distortion of or injury to piles already
support their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25 in place. No pile shall be driven within four and one~haJf
shall be applied to compression pluallel to the grain average pile diameters of a pile filled with concrete k:-;s
values (md 1.30 to extreme fiber in bending values. than 24 hours old unless approved by the geotechnic;,~J
engineer.
307.2 UncHsed Cast~In~Place Concrete Piles
307.3.3 Allowable Stresses
307.2.1 Ma(erial Allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified :i;
Concrete piles cast in place against earth in drilled or Section 307.2.2, except that the allowable concrek s[r ( ~·
bored holes shall be made in such a manner as to ensure may be increased to a maximum value of 0.401'" fo r that
the exclusion of any foreign matter and to secure a rull~ portion of the pile meeting the following co nditions :
sized shafi .
I. The thickness of the meta! casing is not less thall 1.7
mill (No. 14 carbon sheet steel gage);
The drilled or cxcav<ltco hole sha ll be prevented from
collapse or cOlllaminatioll by colhtpsing soils. Thorough 2. The casing is seamless or is provided with seams c·
c1eani ng of the hole shall be asslIreo <'I nd displHccmenl of eq ual strenglh and is of a confi gurati on lh ,H \\!~ ::
the soil cuuings by nOlation shall be ass ured. The le ngth in-place concre ·: ~ ;
provide confinementlo the cast M
of such pile shall be limited 10 not more than 30 times the
3. Tile specified co mpressive strength f' .. sha:i r:~'
average diameter. Concrete shall have a specified
exceed 35 MPa and the ratio of steel mi l .J;'
compressive strenglhj'(' of 1l00Iess than 17 MPa.
specified yield strength F,. to concrete spt.-..:ifii,
Exception: comp ressive strength!'" shall not be less than 6 ; ;Ul .·
The length of pile may exceed 30 rim es the diameter 4. The pile diameter is not greater than 400 mm .
provided th e design and installation of the pile foundation
is III accordance with all approved foundation 307.4 Precast Concrete Piles
iflvestigatioll report.
307.4.1 Ma(erials
307.2.2 Allow,,!)le Stresses Precast concrete piles shall have a specific i comprc<;si
The all owable compressive stress in the concrete shn ll not ~a reJlglhf'•. of not less than 20 MPa. and sh,JI! dey .. ,."
exceed 0.3V·,.. The allowable compressive st ress or compress ive strength of not less than 20 MPa I.. ere
reinrorcement shall not exceed 34 percent or the yie ld dri ving.
Mrenglh or the steel or 175 MPa.
307.4.2 Reinforcement Tics
The !ongitudimd reinforccmcnt in driven precast (' fl JlO
pil es shall be laterally tied with steel lies or wire · .
Tics and spirals shaI! nOt be spaced morc than ·
ap,lrt, centcr to cellter, for a di stance of 600 mill frol11 the loads. The effective prestress in the pile sh;i;l ;;',l( h' ; ("'~::;
ends and not more Ihan 200 mm elsewhere. The gage o f than 2.5 MPa for pi les up (0 10 III in !enrol: :/!\~ L,;
lics and spiraJs shall be as follows: piles up to 15 m in length , and 5 MPa Iv: I ) ' ' ' : ' t~ · ..: . . ~~ r
than 15m in length.
I. For piles ha ving a diameter of 400 mill or less, wire
shall nol be smaller than 5 min ;
T he compressive stress in the concrete du e !o c".!'::-na ll y
2. For piles, having a diameter of morc: than 400 mil1 app lied load shall not exceed:
and Jess than 500 mm, wire shall /l ot be smaller than . -,!'.' .)
f) mm; a.nd
each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be allowable axial stress may be increased aboV(! rl5 iliii'"
spaced 25 mOl center to center. alld 0.35F}~ hut Jhall llot exceed O.5Fr
For piles having a diameter of 600 mill or less, wire shall 307.6.3 Minimulll Dimensions
not be smaller than 5 111111 .
Seclions of dri ven Ii -piles shall co mply with lhr
rollowing:
For piles having a diameter greater than 600 I11Ill bu t less
tha n 9(X) mill, wire shall not be smaller (lw l1 6 mrn. 1. The flan ge projection shall not exceed 14 li~l W" :lle
minim um thickness of meta! ill either tl w n·""
For piles having a dinrllelcr grcfltcr (han gOO mill, wire the web, and the flnnge widths shall not :J~' k " .'
shall not be smaller Ihan 7 mill. 1')0 percenl of the dcplh or the secti on.
2. The nominal dcp(h ill the direction of the '. \( L ... .. ;""
307.5.J All owa ble St resses
not he less than 200 mill.
Precast prestressed piling shall he designed 10 resist
stresses induced by handling nnd driving as \vc ll as by
111
Ncll iOl'w l Struc tural Cod e of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
3-20 CHAI'TEI1 3 _. General & Excavation and Fills
308.4 Pier and Pile Found.tio wi thin seven pile dia mclers of the pile cap and lhe
Where a stmclUre is assigned to Seismic Zo ne 4 in interfaces of soft (0 mediu m stiff clay or liquefiable strata.
accordan ce Wi lh Seclion 208.4 •• he following sha ll appl y. Grade bea ms shall be des igned as beams in accord ance
Individual pilc caps, piers or piles shall be interconnected Secti on 4. When grade beams have Ihe capacity to rcsis t
by ties. Tics shall be capable of carrying, in tension and the forces from the load combinations in Section 203.
com pression . 10 % of Ihe maximum axial load unless it
can be demonstrated Ihal cquiv;'l lcnt restraim is pro vided 308.4.3 FlexII,.al Slrength
by reinforced concrete beams within slabs on grade,
reinforced concrete slabs on grade, confinemen! by Where the vcrtical la t c ral ~ro rce ~re s i s tin g elements are
competent rock, hard cohesive soi ls or very dense (';ol umns, the grade bea m or pile eel p nex ural strengths
granular soi ls. Conc rete shall have a specified shall exceed the column flexural strength. The connection
compressive strength of not less than 21 MPa at 28 days. between batter piles and grade beams or pile caps shall be
designed to resi st the nominal st rength of lhe pile actin g ·
Exception: (IS a short column. Bauer piles and the ir connection shall
Pie rs supporting foundation walls, isolated interior posts be capable of resisting forces and moments frol11thc load
detailed so the pier is not subject 10 lateral loads. lightly co mbinat ions of Sectio n 203 .
loaded exterior decks and palios alld occupancy category
IV and V specified in Section 103 not exceeding two 308.5 Driven Pile Foundations
stories of light-frame construction, are flot subject to
interconnection if it call be shown the soils are of 308.5.1 Precast Connete Piles
adequate stiffness, subject to the approval of the building Where a struclllre is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 the
official. iongilUdinal reinforce ment wi th a min imum steel ratio o f
0.0 1 shall be provided throughout the Icngt h of precast
308.4.1 Connection to Pile Cap concrete piles, Within three pil e diarnct ers of the bottom
For piles required to resist up lift forces or Lo pro vide of the pile cap, th e longitudiJl<l1 reinforcement shall be
rotati onal res traint, design of anchorage of piles into {he confined with closed lies or spirals of a miniinum 10 mm
pile cap shall be provided considering {hc combined effect diame ter. Ties or spirals shall be provided at a mn ximulH
of axial forces due '0 uplift and bending momen .. due '0 spacing or eight times (he diameter of the smalles t
fixity (0 the pile cap. Anchorage shall deve lop a min imu m longitudinal bar, not to exceed 150 111111 throughout the
or 25 perccnt of the strength of th e pile in (e nsio n. re mainde r of the pi le. the closed ti es or spirals shall ha ve
An chorage into the pile ca p shall be capable of a maximum spacing of J 6 limes the smalles t longitudinal
developing the following: bar diamc ter not 10 exceed 200 min.
I. In the case of uplift , lhe lesser of lhc nominal le nsile 308.S.2 Precast Prestressed Piles
strcngth of the longi llldi nal reinforcemcnt ill a
Where a stl1Jclurc is assigned \0 Seismic Zone 4, the
conc ret e pile, or the nominal te nsile strength of a
following shall "ppl)'. The mi nimu m vo lulIletric ratio of
s[eeJ pile. or (he pile uplift soil nomina l st rength
spira! reinforcement shall not be less than O.()()7 or the
factored by 1.3 or the axi al tensi on rorce res ulting
amount required by the follow ing formul a for th e upper 6
from the load combinations of Secti on 203.
11') of the pi Ie.
2. 1n the case of rotational restrai nt, the lesser of the
ax ial and shear forces and moments resulti ng from p.=OI2J,.jJ•• (308.5.1 )
the load combina tions of Section 203 or development
where :
of the full axia l, bendin g and shear nominal stren gth
of .he pile. I. Spccilied compressive strl~ nglh of ro ncrcte, MPa
I,," = Yi eld stren gth of spiral rc inforc ell1 ~~n t. 586 MPa
308.4.2 Desigll I)ct;:lils for Pie rs, I)ilcs and Gracie p, ;:: Spiral reinforce ment index (vol ume of
Beams spiral/v()lu me of core)
Pie rs or piles shall he designed and constructed 10
withsta nd Ill <lX imUIll imposed cu r v<l t ure.~ from eel l1hquake At least o n c~h a lr the vo lullletri c ratio requ ired hy Eq. 4~1
ground moti ons and structure respoJlse. Curvatures sha ll sh;lI ! he provided below t!w upper 6 III or the pi le. The
include free-field soil strains modified for soi l-pile pile cap co nnection hy mea ns of dowels. Pile cap
structure inlcrnction couplcd wil h pier or pi le connect ion by meall.'i or developi ng pile. reinforcin g strand
deformati ons induced oy l<llenll pier or pile res istance to is pe rmilled provided lhat th e pik reinforcing strand
st ru cture seismic forces. Concrcte piers or piles Oil soil rC"wlts in a duclile conllcclioll.
type Sf: or S" sites, <IS determ ined in Secti on 20RA.l. shall
he des igned and delailed ill ~Icco rdance with Sections 410
Ihe total pile length in Ihe soil is 10.5 III or less, the but nOl less than:
transverse rei nfo rcement in the ductile region shaH
Ouough tile length of the pile. Where the pile length
10.5 m. rhe ductile pile region shall be taken as
A" =O. 1 2Sh,(.L)[~+ lAP]
f,. 2 f,A,
(308.5.6)
i
" Circular spiral rcinforcClllcnl shall be spliced by lapping mm
2
one full tum and bending the end of the spiral to a 90- A, :: Gross area of pi le. 111m2
degree hook or by usc of a mechanical or welded splice. f.· := Specifi ed compressive strength of concrete, MPa
Chapter 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
, SIXTH EDITION
Table of Contents
401 • GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 7
....... ..... ..... ........ ............................................................................................................................ 7
.2 Scope .... ....................... ................. .. ............... ............. .............. .. ........................................... .. ................... 7
402 • DEFINITIONS ...................................................... ..... ................................................. ................................ 8
:.- .... -.~" 403 ~ SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTS AND MATERIAI.S ................. ,............... ..................... ............... 13
.... ............. .. ................... . .. 13
Tests of Ma terials ........ .... .. ... ......... .. ........... .. ........................ ........ 13
Ccnlcnt... .. .. ...... ... ....... .... .. ..... .. . 13
Aggregates .. .. ....................... ........................ ...... ............... .. .. 13
Water .. ....... .......... .... .... ........ ...... .. ... 13
S teel Reinforcement.. ..... . .... .... .... . ... ..... ... .. .. ............... 14
Admixtures ", ... ," ..... ..... .... ... .. ... 15
Storage of Materials.. ............ ......... ......... .............. ............... .. ....... ....... 16
S tandards Cited in this Chapter ........................... ... ...... .. .......... ... ... .... . .... ........ ..... .. .......... ........... 16
• SECTION 404 . DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS ...... .......................................................... ....................................... 18
............... . ......... . ... .... ..................... 18
· 404.2 Definitions ... .. ... ................. .. ............ .. .... .. ... .. ....... ... 18
404.3 Genera l . ...................... ......................... ........................... ........ ... 19
404.4 Exposu re Categories and Classes. .. ...... .... .. .. .. 19
404 .5 Special Exposure Co ndi tions. ....... .............. ........ ........ .............. . .. .. .................... 19
404.6 RcquiremcllI s for Concrete Mixtures .. :. ............................ ..... ... . .... ............. .. 19
404.7 Alternati ve CemelHitious Materials for Sulphate Exposure. .. . ... 19
404.8 Water-Cem en titi ous Materials Ratio .... ..... .. ...... ". . . ..... 19
404.9 Corrosion Protection o f Re inforce ment .. ................ ........... . ............................... 19
SECTION 405 ~ CONCRETE QUALITY, MIXING AND PLA CIN G ....................................................................... 21
405.1 Notations.. .... .... ... .... .. .. .... .. ... ...... . . .... .. ... ... .... 2 1
405.2 Geo eral ........ .. .. .. ....... 21
405.3 Selection of Concrete Proportions .. ... .. ............ ..... ............... ... 21
405.4 Propollio ning on the Basis of Field Experience and Tri .d Mixtures. or Both. .. ..... ... .... . ...... 22
405.5 Proportioning without Field Experience or Tri al Mixtures .. .... 23
405.6 Average Strength Reducti on .. .......... .... .. .............. .... .... ..... 23
405.7 Evaluat ion and Acceptance of Concrete ... . ......... 23
405.8 Prepa ration of Equipmcill and Place of Deposit ................. . .. 25
405.9 Mixin g. .. ...... .... ... . .... .... .... .. .... 25
405. 10 Conveying ........................ .. ...... 25
405. 11 Deposi ting ................... ................ ...26
405.12 Curing.. ............... ............ .. ..... .... ........ .... .. ... 26
4.05.13 Hot Weather Requirements. ............ .. .... ................ ... .... .... ....... . . .. .. 26
SECTION 406 . FORMWORK, EMBEDDED PIPES AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ..................................... 26
406. 1 Design of Forrmvo rk .... ............................ .... .......... .. .. .. ..... 27
406.2 Removal of Forms, Shores and Re sllOring .... .. 27
406.3 Conduils and Pi pes E.mbcddcd in Concrete. ................ ......... .. 27
406.4 Construction Joi nts ...... ... ... ......... ...... .. ...... .............. ... ..... ......... .. ..... . ... 28
SECTION 407 . DETAILS Oil REINFOR CEMENT .................. ... ........... ......... .................... ............................... .... .... 28
407.1 Notations.. . ...... 29
407.2 Stil ildard '·Iooks.. .. .............. ..... . .. . ...... .. 29
407.3 Minimum Bend Di,llllctcrs..... ................ . .... 29
407.4 Bendin g of Reinforcement. . . .. 29
407.5 Su rfa ce Conditio ns of Reinforcement. . . ... ... . 29
407.6 Placing Rcinfo rcemcnt.. ...... .. .... .... ...... .................... . 29
407.7 S pacing Limils for Re inforcc mcIlL.. . .... 30
407.8 Co ncrete Protection for Reinforce mellt .. 3 1
407.9 Special H. cinforccment Details for Col um ns ...... ... 32
407. 10 Connections .... ... ...... .. .... . .. J:\
4·2 CHAI'lTI14 . Concrete
408.8 Stiffness .
408.9 Effective Stiffness [0 Determine Lateral Deflections ....
408.10 Span Length ... ,.,." .. ,.. ".
408, II Columns ,. ,."" ... " ......... " .. ,.,. ,.,., .. ,.".,." .. , ."" .. ,.. " .. ,."."" ..... .
408.12 AITangement of Live Load
408.13 T-beam Construction ................................................. .
408.14 Joist Constl1lction ..
408.15 Separate Floor Finish.. ......................................... . .., .. ".·11
SECTION 409 - STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS ...............•.................... ,., ..,,42
409.1 Notations .. -12
409.2 General.. /. .
41 LID Pro visions for Brac kelS and Corbels... ........ ............................................ ....... ......... .................. ........ 65
41 Lll Provisions for Walls ............................................... ........... ........ .............. .......................... . .. ......................... 66
41 Ll2 Transfer of Moments to Columns.. ......... .... .. .. ....... ..... .. ....... .. ... ...... ..................... .. ......... ........................... 67
41 Ll3 Provisions for Slabs and Footings ........ ................ .................................................................................................. 67
SECTION 412 - DEVELOPMENT AND SPLlCES OF REINFORCEMENT ........................................................ 70
412.1 Notations.............................. .. ............................ .... ..... ........ ... .... ............ .. .. . ... ...... ... 70
412.2 Development of Reinforcemcl1l - General......... ... 71
412.3 DevelopmclII of Defonned Bars and Deformed Wi. ~~ in Tension................ . ............. ,... ... ....... ......... ........ 7 1
41 2.4 Development of Defonned Bars in Compression. ............................... "............. .... ... ... ..... ,... 72
412.5 Development of Bundled Bars.:.......................... .. ......... ........................... .................. ........................... ............ 72
412.6 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension ........ ........................................................ .72
412.7 Development of Headed and Mechanically Anc ho red [ 'cfofmcd Bars in Tension ..... ....... 73
412.8 Development of 'Welded Deformed Wire Reinforcer. l ~nt in Tension .... .... .. ... ..... ".... ... ........ ....... .... . .. .. 73
412.9 Development of Welded Plain Wire Reinforcemenl il Tension..... ...... ... ....... .. ............ ...... ............ ......... .... 73
412.10 Development of PreSlressi ng Strand ................. ............. ...................................................... .............................. .......... 74
412.1 I Development of flexu ral Reinforcement - GeneraL.... .. ..... ,.................... ........... ...... " .. ....... ............. .............. ....... ...... 74
412.1 2 De velopment of Positi ve Moment Reinforcemenl... .. .......................................... ......... ....................... ........ ............ 74
412.13 Development of Negative Moment Rei nforcement ..... .................. ..... .. .. ................ . ... ...... 75
412.14 Development of Web Rein force ment ........... ....... ... ...... ............ ...... .... ........ ................... .. 75
4 12. 15 Splices of Reinforcement - General...................... ..... ................ .... .. ..... ...... ........... ... 76
412.16 Spl ices of Deformed Bars and Defomled Wire in Tensi· \11...... ........... .......... ...................... ...... .. 76
412.17 Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression .... .... ................ ................. . ........................................................................ 77
412.1 8 Special Spli ces Requirements fo r Columns .... ..... ............................................. ... ........................................ .. ......... .... 77
412.19 Splices of Welded Deformed Wire Reinforcement in Tens '0"-. ........... .. ............ .. ................................................ ........ 77
412.20 Splices of Welded Plain Wire Reinforcement in Tension .... ....... ........ ......... ............... ..................... 78
SECTION 413 - TWO-WAY SLAB SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................. 78
413.1 Notat ions ....... ............. ......... .............. .. .. ............... ..... ... ....... .......... .... .. 78
413.2 Scope .......................................... ............................. .......... .... . ..... .......................................................... 79
413.3 Definitions ... ........... .... ........ ............................. ................... .. .. ................. .... ........................ 79
413.4 Slab Reinforcement .... ... .. ...................... ......................... ... ... ............ .............. ....... ........ . .............. . ........ 79
413 .5 Openings in Slab Systems ........ .............. ....... ....... .. .. .............................................................................. 8 1
413.6 Design Proced ures ..... .............. .................... ..... ................... .. ..... ....... 82
413.7 Direcl Design Method.... .................... ........ ..... .. .. .. ........ 82
413.8 Equivalcl1I Frame Method . .................... ............................ ...... . .... 85
SECTION 414 - WALLS ............. .................. .......................................... ........................... .................................................... 86
414.1 Notations ........... .... .... .............................. ... ........... .... .... ........... 87
II
414.2 Scope ....... .............. ....... .... ................................ ..... ............. .......................... .... 87
414.3 General .... .. ... ........ . ............. ...... . ...... ........ ...... ............... ....... .............. ........ 87
. 414.4 Minimum Rcinforcemcnt...... .. ...... ....... .... .................. .. .... ....... .. . 87
414.5 Walls Design as Compression Members. .. .. .... .... ... ................ .. ... 88
414.6 Empirical Design Method ............. ... ......................................... ... .................... ........ .............................. 88
i
!
414.7 Non-Bearing Walls. ............. .. ........ .............................. ... ................. ............. ........................... ... ......... 88
414.8 Walls as Grade Beams ........... ....... .............. ........ ........ ........ ..... .. .......... ... .. ........ ............ .... ... .......... ...... .. .................... 89
414.9 Altemale Design of Slender Walls .......................... ... ............................ ... ................... ....................................... ........ 89
SECTION 415 - FOOTINGS .......................................................................... .. . .................................................................... 89
415.1 Notalions. .... .......... ...... ... ...... ........... .... ..... ..... ..... .... .............. . .. .................. .. ...90
415.2 Scope ... ....... .. ... ................ .......... .... ...... ..... ........... ................ ... .... ........... .. ........... 90
4 t5.3l/},;<is and Reactions....... .. ....... .......... ....................................... ......... ........................ .... ()O
4l5.4 Footings Su pporting Circu lar o r Regular Polygon-S haped Columns or PCl.k.. als ..... . .............. .. ............. -:"0
415 .5 MOJllent in Footi ngs ................................ ,.......................... ..... ............. ....... ........................... .......... ....... ,.. 90
415.6 Shear in Footings......................... ............... .................. .......... .... ....................... 90
415.7 Development of Reinforcement in Footings ...... ... ............. .. .. .. .... ,,' 9 1
415.8 Minimum Footi ng Depth ...... ..... ...... ......... . .. ....... 91
415.9 Transfer of Force al Base of Column, Wall or Reinforcement Pedestal .. ............ . .......... ..... ................ ......... 91
415. 10 Sloped or Stepped Footings ..... ...................... ........................... ....... 92
415 . 11 Combi ned Footi ngs and Mats ................................. ... .................... .... ....... 92
415.12 Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings ...................... . ................... _.................... _............ ... .. .... 92
SECTION 416 -PRECAST CONCRETE .................................... _ .. .................................................................................... 92
416. i Notal ioTls ........ . .. _..... _.... __ ............. .. ....................................... -- .... -.......... 92
416.2 Scope_ .... _............................ _........................................... _.. .. .. _.......... _.............. ...92
416.3 General .................... . .. ........ _.............. 92
4 ) 6.4 Distribution of Forces among Members ........................... . .. ...... ..... ....... _.. _...... 92
416_5 Member Design ..................... .. ............ .. ... 93
416.6 Structural Int egrit y .. .. ......... ........... 93
4 J 6.7 Con llection and Bearing Design _.. _93
416.8 Items Embcdue '[ \ncr Concrete Placement ............... . ...... _................ . ............. 94
416.9 Ma rking aud Ide ntification................ ............... ...................................................................... ....... ... ........ 94
4 16.10 I-Iandling ... __ ... _.. _... _......... ...... _.. _.. ___ ......... _.......... .... ........ ..... _.. __ ...... .... _.. _._ ... _......................... .... _.... _...... _.... _..... 94
416.1 J Strength Evaluation of Precast Construction ..... _................ ..... ,............. ................. .......... ................ ... ........................ 94
SECTION 41 7 - COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL Mi;, ..\!8ERS ........................ ................................................... 95
417_1 Nota tions. .. .... _.... .. . .. ........... _ ........................................................................ _................ 95
417.2 Scope.. ..... ........ .......... .. ... ........... _.................................... _........... _ .............. 95
4 17. 3 General .... _.. _.... ...... ............ ...... .......... .. .. _.......... .. .. ...... 95
417.4 Shoring.. .............. ................... .. ........ _..... _ .......... __ ...... _....... _............ _............... _........ _.. _........... 95
417_5 Yenieal Shear Strength ................... ...................... .. ... _.. _...... _........ .................... _......... _.................................... 95
4 ) 7_6 Hori zontal Shear Strength ..... ................ ........... ....... .. ......... .. ............................................................. ................... 95
417_7 Ties for Horizontal Shear .......... .. _.................. _.. _........... _ .. _.. ___ ............ _........................ _................. _ .. _96
SECTION 418 - PR ESTRESSED CON C RETE .................. .......... ........................................................................................ 97
418_1 Notations ............................ _....... . ....................................................... .. ................ _............ 97
4 18_2 Scope ...... .. _.... _.. _..................... _.. .... ...... ....... .. .... _.... ..... .. ....... 97
418 .3 Gene ral ............ _........... .. .. ........ ... _.......... ........ .... .... ........... .. .. .......... .. .. .... .... 97
418.4 Design Assumpti ons .. ................... . ..................... _.... 98
418.5 Permissible Stresses ill COllcrc lc - Flexural Members _...................... 98
418.6 Permissible Stress in Prestressi ng Tendons ............... . _............ _.. _..... __ ._ .. _..... ____ .. ___ .. _.......... .. __ ............ __ ...... ___ .... _.. _ .. ___ 99
418_7 Loss of Prestress ...... _...... _........ _................. .. .. ...... .. .. .. __ .................... 99
4 18 .7.2 friction Loss in Post-Tensioning Tendons .. ......................... ............ 99
418.8 Flexural Strength ...... _ .................. _ ... 100
418.9 Limits for Reinforcc mcnt of Flex ural Members .... ...... 100
4 18.1 0 Minim um Bonded Reinforcemcnt .100
4 I 8. II Stat ically Jnc.kl cl"minatc S tructures ..... .... .............. .... ....... ..... ........ ............. 101
418.12 Compression Members - Com bined Fl ex ural iH' .. i Axial Loads . .... 101
4 18_13 Slab Systems: ...... .. _..................... _ ...... ............ ____ ................. _.... _ .............................. 102
4 18. 14 Post -Tensioned Tendon An chorage Zones. ................... .. .................. 103
4 I 8.15 Design of Anchorngc Zones for Monoslra nd ( Jr Single 16 I11Ill Diamcter Bar Tendons ........... ...... ........... .......... ........ 104
4 18.16 Design of Anchorage Zones for Mullislr:HH!,' J T L' ndons ................................................................................ 104
418.1 7 Corrosion Protection for Unboudcd Prc ~ll ~' .sing Tendons. . . .......................................... .. ............. ......... . 105
4 18.18 Post-Tensio ning Ducts.. .. .. _.. __ ..... .. .. __ .. __ ........ . 105
418.! 9 Grou t for Bonded Prcstressing Tendon ·- .......... .... .............. .. ... .......... ... 105
4 18.20 Protcction for Prestrcssing Steel ..... ... ......... .. ...................... 105
4 18.21 Applicat ion and Measurement of Prc" t· .:ssing Forec........ . ............................................................................. 105
4 18.22 Post-Tensioning Anchorages ,mel COl!. tiers ......... ................. . ......... .......... .................... .... .............. ................ 106
4 ! 8.23 External Pust · Tensioning .. .............. ............................. ... . .............. ...... .......... 109
SECTION 419 - SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATE MEMHERS .......... .............. .. ...... __ .............. " .. __ .... .. .......................... ·109
419. 1 Notatio ns .... ......... ... .................... 109
4 19.2 Scope And Definit ions .................. . ................... 109
419.1 Analysis and Design. ......... ....... . ... J 10
4 19.4 Design strength ()f Materials.. .110
419.5 Shell Rci nforcemcIlL .... . .... ....... .... .............. .... .......... ...................... ......... 110
4 19.6 Construction ...... . ..... ......... ................... .................................... 11 1
SECTIO N 420 - STI!ENGTH EY ..II .UATION OF EX ISTING STlWCTURES .............. ........................................ __ ..... 112
420_1 Notations.... __ .. _........ ___ __ __ .. ___ .. __ _ __ ____ ......... __ .. __ .. __ .... _.... ___ ..... 112
420.2 Strength Ev,liulitioll·Gencral ........... __ ........ ... ..... ..... ................. ..... ................. 11 2
CHAPTEli 4" Concreto 4":i
420.3 Determination of Required Dimensions and Material PropcI1ics ...... .................. .............. .. .... 112
420A Load Test Procedure. .............. ......................... ................... .112
420.5 Loading Criteria .................... ........................ ... 113
420.6 Acceptance Criteria ............ .......... ............... ...... . .......... ............... ...................... 113
420.7 Provisions for Lower Load Rating.. ....... . .............. . ...... 113
420.8 Safety ............................ .............. ................. ....... ..... . ......................... 113
SECTION 421 - EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT STRUCTURES .................................................................................... II3
421.1 Notations.. ...... ...... .............. ........ . . ............ .............. ..... .. ... 114
421.2 Definitions. ...................................... ......... ..... ..................... .. ... 115
421.3 Genera! Requirements. . .... 116
421.3.0 Mechanical Splices in Special Moment Frames and Special Structural Walls ................... .. ............... ".. II?
42 J.4 Intermediate Precast StI1lc(ural WaJls ..................................... . ............ .. ..................... I J 8
421.5 Flexural Members of Special Moment Frames.. ...... J J 8
421.6 Special Moment Frame Subjected to Bending and Axial Load ............... . ..................... . . I !9
421.7 Joints of Special Moment Frames ..................... ..121
421.8 Special Reinforced Concrete Structural Walts and Coupling Beams ... ............................. .. .. 122
421.9 Stmcturai Diaphragms and Trusses ................. ..... .......... ...... . 125
421.10 Foundations ................. ....................... .. ......... 127
421.11 Members not Designated as P;:U1 of the Seismic~Force~Resisting System.. . ............... .. ........... 128
421.12 Requirements for Intermediate Moment Frames, Seismic Zone 2. ..................... ........ 129
421.13 Special Moment Frames Using Precast Concrete.. . 130
421.14 Ordinary Momcll! Frames.. ............................. ................................ ...................... .. ... J 31
\ 421.15 Special Structural Walls Constlllcted Using Precast Concrete. ........................... .. .... 131
SECTION 422 - STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE ..................................................................................................... 132
422.1 Notations.. ....................... .. .... 132
422.2 Scope.. ................ .............................. ... .............. ................... .. ...... 132
422.3 Limitations ........................................................ .. . ............... 132
422.4 Joints.. .. . 132
422.5 Design Method. ....................................................... .. ........... 133
422.6 Strength Design .... ........ . .................... . .. .......... .. . .. ... 133
422.7 Walls ....................................... .. ....... 134
422.8 Footing ........................................ . .... 134
422.9 Pedestals ..................................................................................... .. . . ........... 135
422. JO Precast Members ...................................................................... . . ............ 135
422.1 J Plain Concrete in Earthquake-Resisting Structures. ................. 135
SECTION 423 - ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE .......................................................................................................... 136
423. J Definitions.. ..................... .. ......... J 36
423.2 Scope. .. ............. 137
423.3 General Requirements. .. .. ....... . ........... ..... .. ........ ! 37
423.4 General Requirements for Strength of Anchors.. . ... 138
423.5 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading.. . ........ 139
426.6 Desing Requirements for Shear Loading.. .......... 141
423.7 Interaction ofTensiie and Shear Forces.... .............. 143
423.8 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thickness to Preclude Splitting Failure.. .143
423.9 Installation of Anchors ................. .. ... ............... .. .. .......... 144
SECTION 424 - ALTERNATE DESIGN [I.1ETIIOI) ....................................................................................... .................. 144
424.1 Notalions.. .... 144
424.2 Scope. .. .. ......... 145
424.3 General. ............. ........................................... . ............ .... ................. .. ... ........... .. .. 145
424.4 Permissible Service Load Stresses .. . ... 145
424.5 Development and Spliccs of Reinforcc1llcrll... ... 145
424.7 Compression Members With or Without Flexure.. ..146
424.R Shear and Torsion.. .. 146
SECTION 425 - ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS FOR REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSEI) CONCRETE
FLEXlJ RA LAND COM PRESSION [\oj EM BEllS .............................................................................................................. 148
425. I Scope. . .. 149
425.2 Redistribution of Negative Moments in Continuous Non-Prestressed Flexural Members ................... ". .. ............. , 1,'19
SECTION 426 - ALTERNATIVE LOAD AND STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS .............................................. 150
SECTION 427 STRUT AND TIE MODELS ....................................................................................................................... 152
427.1 Definitions .............. . ................. ................ 152
427.2 Strut-andTie Model Design Procedure.. ........................ ...................................... ............................... .. ....... 157
427.3 Strength of Struts.. . . ... ..... ............. . ............................ 157
427.4 Strength of Tie$.. ......... 158
427.5 Strength of Nodal Zones.. ............. ........ ............................... .. ....... 159
401.2.5 Thi s chapter does not govern design alld installat ion
of portions of COncrete piles and drilled pi e rs embedded in
ground except for stm cllJrcs in regions of hi gh seismic risk
OJ' assigned to hi gh seismic performance or design
ca tego rie s. Sec Sec ti on 421.10.4 fo r require me nts for
co ncrete piles, drill ed piers. and caissons in stru ctures in
regions o f hi g h scismic ri sk or ~Issig nc d to high sc is'mic
performan cc or des ign Gl tcgorics ..
The foHowing terms are defined for general usc in this BONDED TENDON is a prestressing tendon that is bonded
chapter. Specialized definitions appear in individual concrete either directly or through grouting.
to
sections.
BOUNDARY ELEMENT is that portion along stltldural
ADMIXTURE is material other than water, aggregate, or wall and structural diaphragm edge strengthened by
hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete and longitudinal and transverse reinforcement. Boundary
added to concrete before or during its mixing to modify its clements do not necessarily require increase in the thickness
propcl1ics. of wall or diaphragm. Edges of opening within walls and
diaphragms shall be provided with boundary elements as
AGGREGATE is granular material, slIch as snnd, gravel, required by Section 421,8.6.2 or 421.9.7,5, Sec Section 421.
crushed stone and iron blast-furnace slag, and when used
with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic cement CEMENTlTlOUS MATERIALS arc materials as
concrete or mortar. specified in Scction 403 which have cemcnting value when
used in concrete either by themselves, such as pOitland
AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT is aggregate with a dry, celllent, blended hydraulic cements and expansive cemem,
loose weight of ! 120 kg/nY' or less. or such materials in combination with fly ash, raw or other
calcined natural pozzolans, silica fume, or ground
AIR-DRY WEIGHT is the unit weight of a lightweight granulated blast-furnacc slag.
concrete specimen cured for seven days with neither loss
nor gain of moisture at 15° C to 2r C and dried for 2 I days COLLECTOR ELEMENT is an elemenl that acts in axial
in 50 ± 7 percent relative humidity at 23<1 C ± 1.1 () C. tension or compression to transmit earthquake-induced
forces between a structural diaphragm and a vertical
ANCHORAGE DEVICE IN POST·TENSIONING is a clement of the seismic-force-resisting system. See Section
device used to anchor tendons to concrete member; in 421.
prctensioning, a device used to anchor tendons during
hardening of concrete. COLUMN is a mcmber with a ratio of height-to-Ieast-
lateral dimcnsion of 3 or greatcr used primarily to support
ANCHORAGE ZONE IN POST·TENSIONED axial compressive load. For a tapered mcmber, the least
MEMBERS is the portion of the member through which lateral dimension is thc average or
the top and bottom
the concentratcd prestressing force is transferred to the dimensions of the smaller side.
concrete and distributed more uniformly across the section.
Its extent is equal to the largest dimcnsion of the cross COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS
section. For intcrmediate anchorage devices, the anchorage arc concrete flexural members of precast and cast-in-place
zone includes the disturbed regions ahead of and behind the concrete clements, or both, constructed in separate place-
anchorage devices. ments but so interconnected that all clements respond to
loads as a unit.
BASE OF STRUCTURE is Ihal Icvel at which Ihe
horizontal earthquake ground motions arc .assurlled to be COMPRESSION·CONTROLLED SECTION is a cross
imparted to a building. This Jevel docs not necessarily section in which the net tensile strain in the cxtreme tcnsiOll
coincide with the ground level. Sec Section 421. steel at nominal strength is less than or equal to the
c()lllprcssion"colltrollcd strain limit.
BASIC MONOSTRAND ANCHORAGE DEVICE is
an anchorage device used \vith ;lIlY single strand or a sin,glC' COMPRESSION·CONTROLLED STRAIN LIMIT is
16 I11Ill or smaller diameter bar that satisfies Scction the net tensile strain at balanced strain conditions. Sec
41 B.22.1 and the anchorage device requirements of the Post- Section 4 J 0.4.3.
Tensioning Institu(e's "Speciflcatio/l fo/' UlI/)OIl(/e(/ Single
.)', /'(111(/ Tel/(/olls ". CONCHETE is a ll1ixture of portland cement or any other
hydraulic CClllellt, line aggregate, coarse aggregate (tIle!
BASIC MULTlSTRAND ANCHORAGE DEVICE IS watcr, with or without admixtures.
an anchorage device used with multiple strands. hal'S or
. CONCRETE, NOIlMALWEIGHT is concrete containing hooks with at least six-diameter extension at the other end .
only nggregate Ihat co nforms to ASTM C33. The hooks shall engage peripheral longiludinal bars. TI,e
90-degrce hooks of two successi ve crosslies engaging the
. CONCRETE, SAND-LIGHTWEIGHT is lightweiglll same longitudinal bars shall be alternated end for end. See
concrclc cOiliaining only norm al weight aggregate IhaL Sections 407,421.
confonns to ASTM C33 and only lighlweighl aggregate that
confonns to ASTM C330. CU Il V ATURE FRICTION is friction resulting from bends
or curves in the spccifi ed prestrcssing tendon profile.
CONCRETE, SPECII'IED COM PRESS IV E
STRENGTH OF (j',) is the compressive strength of DEFORlVlED REIN FO R CEMENTS are deformed
concrete used in design and evaluated in accordance with reinforcing bars, bar and rod mats, de(c'nned wire. welded
provisions of Section 405 in MPa. Whenever the quantity smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric
f, is under a radica l sign, square root of numerical val ue conforming 10 Section 403.6.3.
only is intended, and resuh has units of MPa.
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT is the total lateral
CONCIlETE, STRUCTURAL LIGHTWEIGHT is displacement expected for the design-basis earthquake, as
concrete containing lightweight aggregate that conforms to required by the governing code for earthq uake-resistant
" Section 403.4 and has an air-dry unit weight as determined des ign. See Section 42 1.
by "Test Method for Ullit Weight of Smlclurai Lightweight
COllcrete" (ASTM C 567) not exceeding 1840 kg/nI'. In DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS are the combinati on
this code, a li ghtwe ight concrete containi ng on ly li ght we ight of factored loads and forces in Secti on 409.3.
coarse and fine aggregates that co nform to ASTM C330 is
termed "concrete, all-lightweight ", and lightweight co ncrete DESIGN STORY DRIFT RATIO is the relative
containin g li ghtweight aggregate and an equilibrium difference of design displacement in between the top and
density, as determined by ASTM C567, betwee n 1440 bottom of a Slory, divided by the Slory height. See Section
kg/m) and 1840 kg/m3, is termed "concrete, Ji gh twcight." 421 .
CONNECTION is a region that joins two o r more DEVELOPMENT LENGTH is th e lenglh of embedded
members. In Secti on 421, a con nection also refers to a rei nforcement required to develop the design strengl h of
regio n that joins members of which one or more is precast, reinforcemem at a criti caJ sectio n. See Secti on 409.4.3.
for whi ch the following more specific defini ti ons apply:
DIlOP PANEL is a projection below the slab used to
DUCTILE CONNECTION is a connection Ihal reduce the amount of negative reinforcement over a column
experie nces yielding as a result of the. earthq uake design or the minimum required slab thickness. and to increase the
displacements. slnb shear strength. Sec Seclions 413.3.5 and 413.4. 7.
STIlONG CONNECTION a connection Ihat remains DUCT is a conduit (plain or corrugated) to accommodate
elas ti c while adjoining members experience yielding as a prestressing steel for post-tensioned install ation.
res ult of the cal1hquake design displacements. Requirements for post-tensioning ducts are given in Section
418.18.
CONT RA CT DOCUMENTS · arc documents, including
the project drawings and project specifications. covering the EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION (d) is the di slance
requ ired Work . measu red from ex.treme compression fiber to centroid of
tension reinforcement.
CONT RA CTION JOINT is a formed, sawed, or tooled
groove in a concrete structure to create a weakened plane EFFECTIVE PIlESTRESS is Ihe Slress remai ning in
and regulate Ihe location of cracking resu lting frol1l the prestressing tendons after all losses have occu rred.
dimcnsionnl chnngc of different parts m·lhe slnlClU rc . excluding effects of dead load ilnd superimposed load.
COVE ll, SPECIFIED CONCRETE is Ihe diSl.nce EMBEDM ENT LENGTH is Ihe lengl h of embedded
between the outermost surface of embedded reinforcement reinforcement provided beyond a critical section.
and thc closes t (lu ter surrace of the concrete indica ted o n
design drawings o r in project specificat ions. EQUILlUIlIUM DENSITY is th e density of li ghtweiglH
concrete after exposure 10 a relmi ve humidit y of 50 ± 5
c nOSSTIE is a (';OlllinliO liS reinforci ng bar ha vi ng a percent and a tempera ture of 2].00 ± 2.(X)O C for a period of
seismic hook a\ one end and a hook not less than IJO-degrcc lime sufficient to reac h cons tant de nsity (see ASTM C567).
11
National Structural Codo of ti le Philippines 6 \ Edition Volum e 1
4-10 CHAPTER 4 - Concrete
EXTREME TENSION STEEL is the reinforcement MODULUS 01' ELASTICITY is Ihe ratio of normal .<Iress
(prestressed or nonpre.'itrcssed) that is the fm1hesl from the 10 correspondi ng strain for tensile or compressi ve ~; !;c :-,!-,.'.S
extreme compression fiber. below proporlional limit of tnillClial. See Section ~1 'Y-i.i_..
HEADEJ) DEFORMED BARS are deformed reinforcing MOMENT FRAME is a fr.amc in which I1lcl11ber~ and
bars with heads att,lehed at one or both ends. I-leads arc joints res ist forces through Jlcxure, shear, and axial force.
attached to fhe bar end by means such as welding or forging Moment framcs designated as pan of the scismic·for cc~
onto the bar, int ernal threads on the hend mating [0 threads resis ting system sha ll be categorized as follows:
on the bar end, or a separate threaded nut to secure the head
of the bar. The Ilet bealing area of headed dcfonnt'd bar ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME is a c'lSl-in -pl,,;· ... "
equals the gross area of the head minus th e larger of Iht, arC:l precast concrete frame complying with Ihe requirCl1l1..'.ilt:·: i iI'
of the bar and the area of any obstructioll. Sections 401 to 418, and, ill the case of ordinary mOI!:" : ~ l
rrames assigned 10 areas with low seis mi c ri sk. :d:-"'_.I
HEADED SHEAR STUD REINPORCEMENT is a c:o mplying with Section 421 . 14.
reinforcement consisting of individual headed studs. or
groups of studs. wi th anchorage provided by a head at each INTERMEDIATE MOMENT PRAME is a cast- in-place
end or a common base rail consisting of a stee l plate. or frame complying with the requi remeIHs of Section 421.12 II!
shape_ addilion to the requirements for ordinary moment frrlmes.
HOOP is a closed ti e or cOOli nuously wou nd tie . A closed SPECIAL MOM ENT PRAME a cast- ill-plaee fra me
tie can be made up o f severa l reinforcement clements each complying wit h the requi rements of Seclian 42 1.3 .4 thrOllp i:
having hooks at both ends. A continuous ly wound tic shall 42 1.3.7, 42 !.5 through 421. 7, or a precast fraille complyi lfg
have a seismic hook at bolll ends. See Sectio n 42 1. with the requirements of Sectio n 421.5 through 421. ;; .
42 J • J 3.1 through 421 . 13.4. Jn addition, the requireme nts L
ISOLATION JOINT is a separati on bel ween adjoining ordinary momen! frames shall be satisfied.
parts of a concrete structure, usually a vertical plane. at a
designed location such as to interfere least with performance NET TENSILE STRAIN is the lensile sirain at Ilomin;':
of the structure, yet such as to all ow relative movement in strength exclusive of st rains due to effective prestres :~>
three directions and avoid fonnation of cracks elsewhere in creep. shrinkage and Icmperilwfc.
the concrete and through which all or pan of the bonded
reinforcement is inten·upted . PEDESTAL is an Upri glH co mpression member with a rmin
of unsupponed heigh! to average least lateral dimcnsion nol
JACKING FORCE is Ihe lemporary force exerted by cxceeding 3. For a tapered member, the lensl lateral
device that introduces tension into prestressing tendons in dimension is Ihe average of the top und ho ttom dimensions
prestressed concrete. of the smalier side.
JOINT is tI pan ion of struct ure common to intersec ting PLAIN CONCRETE is !-;trllctura l concrete with Ih"1
members. The effect ive cross-seclionnl area of a joint of a reinforcement or with less reinforcement {han Ihe minimlHil
special momcnt frame, AI. for shear strength comp utalions is amouill specilied for reinforccd concrctc.
defined in Seclion 421_7.4.1.
PLAIN REINFORCEMENT is reinforceme lll Lhal doc·;
LOAD, DEAD is the dead weight sllpponed by a member. not co nform to definition of deformed reinforceme n!. Sec
as defined by Section 204 (without load factors). Section 401.6.4.
LOAD, FACTOn g J) i:-) the load, multiplied by ilppropr i<l1c PLASTIC HING E REGION is Ihe Iellgl h of fra ll;;-
load factors, u:-)cd to proportion memhers hy the strength dement over whi ch Il cx ural yielding is intended to OCCli l
de:-iign method of thi s chClptcr. Sec Sections 408.2.1 and d u t.~ to canh quakc design displac.:mcnts, cxte nding not less
409_3_ than a distance. II from the c:rilic:al !-;cclioll where ncxlInll
yiel ding i nitiatc!-;. Sec Section 421 .
LOAD, LIVE is the live load specilicd by Section 205
(without load factors). POST-TENS IONING is il method of prestressing ill which
Icndolls <Ire te nsioned nfter conc retc hilS harde ned.
LOAJ), SEIlVICE is the load specified by Sections 204 10
207 (wit houl load lilclolS). pnECAST CONCRETE is a strucltlral COIKl"el C elemelll
<.:;Isl in othe r than ils final position in Ihe slruclurc.
pRJECmilPIU;SS;ED TENSILE ZONE is that pOI1ion of concrete, to provide corrosion protection, and to contain the
member where flexural tension, calculated corrosion inhibiting coating.
grosS section properties, would occur under
dC<ld and l ive loads if the prestress force was not SHORES arc vertical or incli ned suppon members
des igned to ca rry the weight of the forrnwork, concrete and
constl1lclion loads above.
CONCRETE is stl1JclUral concrete ill
: which internal stresses have bee n int roduced to redu ce SPAN LENGTH . See Secti on 408. 10.
' po!entli'''! tensil e stresses ill concrete res ulting from loads.
SPECIAL' ANCHOHAGE DEVICE is an anchorage
J'RESTRESSING STEgr, is l\ hi gh-strength Sh::cJ cl em e nt device thai satisfi es Section 4 18. 16. 1 and the standardi zed
stich as wire. bar, or :-trand, Of a hundlc o f such cle men ts, acceptance tests of AAS HTO "Standa rd Specifications for
used to impart prcstrc,,, forces to t:oncrclc. Highway Bridg{!s ", 17" Editioll, 2002, Division II, Section
10.3.2.3.
PRETENSIONJNG IS a method of prestressin g in wh ich
tendons arc tensioned be fore co ncrete is pl a(;ed. SPECIAL BOUNDARY ELEMENT is a boundary
clement required by Sec tions 421 ,8,6.2 or 42 1.8.6.3.
REINFORCED CONCRETE is st rllctural concrete
reinforced with 110 less tlum the mini mum amounts of SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is contin uously wound
prestressin g tendons or non prcslrcsscd rein force men t reinforcement in Ihe foml of a cylindri cal heli x.
specified ill this chap ter.
SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH (f;,) is the tensi le
REINFORCEMENT is mate ri al th"lt conform s to Section slrength of concrete delerm ined in accordance with ASTM
403,6, exclud ing prestressin g ten dons unl ess specificall y C496M as described ill "Specificatiolls for Ught weight
included. Aggregar{! for Structural Con crete " (ASTM C330). See
Section 405.2.4.
RESHORES arc sho res pl aced sllu g l y under a CO IKTC iC slab
or othe r stfuclUfal member after the original fo rms and STEEL FIBER·REINFORCED CONCRETE. Conc rete
shores have been re moved rrom a large r area, thus req u iring containing dispersed rando ml y oriented steel fi bers .
the new slab or s[nIctural mcmber to deflect and support its
own weight and existing construction loads applied pri or to STIRUUP is reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion
fh e installat ion of the res hores. stresses in a Slillctural me mber; typicall y bars, wires, or
welded wire fabri c (plain or defonned) bent into L, U or
SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGOHY is a cl ass ification rectan gular shapes and located perpendi cul ar 10 or at an
assigned to a stru cture based on it s occ upancy t:tl lcgo ry and <Ingle to lo ngitudi na l re inforceme nt. The term "stirrups" is
the severit y or the design earthquake ground motion at th e usually (Ipplied to lateral reinforceme nt in llex ural me mbers
site. as defin ed hy the lega ll y adoptcd ge ncral building code. and the term "ties" to (hose in compression membe rs. Sce
also "Tie."
SEISMIC·FORCE·RESISTING SYSTEM is a portion of
the struclUrc designed to res ist earthq uake design forces STRENGTH, DESIGN is the no minal strength multiplied
required by th e legall y adopted general buildin g code using by a st rength -reducti on factor, ¢. See Secti on 409.4 .
the applicable provisions and load combinations.
STnENGTH, NOMINAL is the stren gth o f a memb er o r
SEISMIC HOOK is a hoo k on a stirrup. or crosstie ha ving cross secti on calcula ted in accordance with provisions and
a bend not less th an 135 degrees, exce pt thaI circula r hoops assumptions of thc strc ngth design mcthod of thi s chaptcr
Shall have a bend nor less than 90 degrees. I-Itx)ks shall have before appl ication or any strengl h~reduct ion factors . See
a 6dv, but not less than 75 mm extellsion tha t engages the Section 409.4. 1.
longitUd inal reinforceme nt and pruje<.:ts into the interior of
the stirru p or hoop. Sec Section 407.2.4 and Section 42 1.2. STRENGTH, REQUIRED is the strength of " member or
cross secti on required to resi st factored loads or reltltcd
SHEAR CAP is a projec t below the slab used In increase internal moments and forces ill stich combinations :IS arc
the sl:! h she;lr strength . See Secti on 4 1J.3.6. stipul <lled in Ihis chapter. Scc Sectio n 409.2. 1.
SHEATHING is a malcri:!1 cncas ing a prestressing tl~!l(l on STRESS is the intensi ty of force per unit arCl!.
to prevent bonding the tendon with the surroullding
1h
Nationa l Structural Coclo of the Plli!ippirw s 6 Edition Volume 1
4 -12 CHAPTE11 4 - Concrete
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE is all concrete used for TRANSFER LENGTH is [he length of embedded pre-
s tructural purposes , including plain and reinforced conc rete. tensionedstrand rcquired to transfer the effective prestress to
(he concrete.
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGM is a structural member,
such as a fl oor or roof slab, th at transmits forces acting ill UN BONDED TENDON is tendon in whi ch the
the plane of the member to Ihe vertica l elements of the prestressing steel is prevented from bonding to (he l:oiic retc
seismic-force-resis ti ng syste m. See Secti oll 42J for and is free 10 move relative to the concrete. The prestressing
requirements in the earthquake-resisting structures. force is pcnnanently transferred to the concrete al the
tendon ends by anc horage only.
STRUCTURAL TRUSS is an assemb lage of reinforced
concrete members subjected primarily to ax ial forces. WALL is a member, usually vertical, IIsed to enclose or
separate spaces.
STRUCTURAL WALL is a wa ll propoJ1ioned to resi st
combinations of shears, moments, and axial forces. A shear WELDED WIRE REINFOR CEMENTS are rei nf(.rcing
wall is a structural wall. A structural wall designated as part elements consisting of ca rbon-steel plain or defo rmed Wires,
of Ihe seismic-force-resisting system shall be categorized as confo rming to ASTM A82 or A496, respectively, fabrica ted
fo ll ows: int o sheets 0 1' rolls in accordance with ASTM A 185 or
A497M, respectively; or reinforci ng elements consisti ng of
ORDINARY STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE stainless-steel plain or deformed wires fab ricated into
WALL is a wall complying with the requirements of sheets or roll s conformi ng to ASTM A I 022.
Section 422.
.
,
ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE
'W OBBLE FRICTION in prestressed co ncrete is I'!iction
caused by unintended deviation of prestressi ng sheath or
403.4 Aggregates
= specified yield ""ength of non prestressed "SpecijicariollS Jar Lighrweighr Aggregates for Srl"Ucrurai
reinforcement, MPa COllcme" (ASTM C 330).
::: nomin al diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing strand,
mill Aggregates failing (0 ' meel the above specifications but
which have been shown by special tcsL or aC{lJal service (0
produce concrete of adequate s trength and durability ma y be
Tests of Materials used where authoriz.ed by the engineer-of-rccord.
TIle engineer may require the testing of any 403.4.2 The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate
'materialS used in concrete constnJctioll to determine if shall not be larger than:
malerla" are of quality speci fied.
I. One fifth (1/5) the narrowest dimension between sides
Tests of materials and of concrete s hall be made in of rOfln s; or
' ac,cordal1ce with the standards listed in Section 403 .9. 2. One third (113) the depth of slabs: or
403.2.3 Complete record of tests of Illmclials and of 3. Three fourth s (3/4) Ihe minimum clear spaci ng between
; concrete shall be available for inspect iOIl durin g prog ress of . individual reinforci ng bars or wires, bundl es of bars, or
, work and for two (2) years after COJllph~ lion of [he project, prestressing tendons or dUClS.
· br as required by the implementing agency and shall be
· preserved by the engineer for that purpose. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgmcm of the
engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are sllch
thal concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
· 403.3 Cement
; 403.3.1 Cement shall con form 10 one of the following 403.5 Wat er
tested in accordance with "Tesl Method for Compressive Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 496M). exccpt that
Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 50-nun Cube wire shall not be smaller than size MD25 or larg'·' ii ·i i \i .' i ~
Specimens)" (ASTM C 109). MD200 unless as permitted in Section 403.6 .. h " '"
with a specified yield streilgth /y exceeding . ,'~ i:j lvi r'a, /;.
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0 ..,) ptrC(llt.
403.6 Steel Reinforcement
403.6.3.6 Welded plain wire fabric for concrete
403.6.1 Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement, reinforcement shall conform to "Specijicalio!/.I· /H )'teel
except that plain reinforcement sh:lll be permitted for spirals Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinfo/"u· , iOll"
or prestressing steels; and reil;iorcement consisting of (ASTM A 185M), except that for wire with a ' Id
headed shear studs, structural steel, steel pipe or steel tubing strength fy exceeding 415 MPa, 1,. shall be taken :i\ iIC
shall be permitted only for resisting shear under conditions stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percen!. \Vc-J.:1ed
specified in Section 411.6.6.1(6). intersections shall not be spaced farther apart j i'; ':1 ~(jn ' . :'1 )
in direction of calculated stress, except for ",ii; 'K ,i
403.6.2 Welding of reinforcing bars shall conform to as stirrups in accordance with Section 412.14.2.
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel", ANSIIAWS
DIA of the American Welding Society. Type and location 403.6.3.7 Welded deformed wire fabric I'OJ COllecte
of welded splices and other required welding of reinforcing reinforcement shall confonn to "Specifications for .; ('({
bars shall be indicated on the design drawings or in the Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, fo ,- ("on , .rf'-{(~
project specifications. ASTM reinforcing bar specifications, Reinforcement" (ASTM A 497M), except lhal for wire
except for ASTM A 706M, shall be supplemented to require with a specified yield strength fy exceeding i~)5 MPa, .r;.
a report of material properties necessary to conform to shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of" (LIS pt.TccnL
requirements in ANSI! AWS D1.4. Welded intersections shall not be spaced faIlli, ' ~q!, ! n ; ,an
400 mm in direction of calculated stress, eX I ' T · (01 ·e
403.6.3 Deformed Reinforcements fabric used as stirrups in accordance with SeCl I');) " .". "
Deformed wire larger than MD200 is 'penllitt';';j w li::;]
403.6.3.1 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to one of in welded wire reinforcement conforming :0 /\,' .
the following specifications, except as pennitted by Section A497M, but shall be treated as plain wire for de vtlnplJlC lJ1.
403.6.3.3: and splice design.
1. "Specifications for Deformed and Pia ill Billet-Steel 403.6.3.8 Galvanized reinforcing bars shaU comply wi(\t
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 615M) "Specifications for Zinc"Coated (Galvanized) Steel!Jol.\·.{ il
for seismic resisting members. Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 767M) . Epoxy··coal ed
2. "Specifications for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for reinforcing bars shall comply with "Specification ior
Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 706M) for Epoxy~Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars" (ASTfd A 77.'>1/:' () J
members resisting earthquake induced forces . with "Specifications for Epoxy-Coated Prefabli(,·j!i'o' ci
Reinforcing Bars" (ASTM A 934M). Galvanii:ed (II c,
403.6.3.2 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to one coated reinforcement shall conform to 01;('
of the ASTM specifications listed in Section 403.6.3.1 , specifications listed in Section 403.6.3. I .
except that for bars with/y exceeding 415 MPa,/y shall be
taken as the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent. 403.6.3.9 Epoxy-coated wires and welded wire fal ;) Ii
See Section 409.5. comply with "Srandard Specification for LI)()xy· ("//i : C( "
Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Rei'!f(!/"{"( .'!; II<
403.6.3.3 Deformed reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM (ASTM A 884M). Epoxy-coated wires shall ",,, I,'
AI035 shaH be permitted to be used as transverse Section 403.6.3.5 and epoxy-coated welded wile i (illl;
reinforcement in Section 421.6.4 or spiral reinforcement ill conform to Section 403.6.3.5 or 403.6.3.6.
Section 410.10.3.
403.6.3.10 Deformed stainless-steel wire. and deformed ;;:id
403.6.3.4 Bar mats for concrete reinforcement shall conform plain stainless-steel welded wire for concrete I"cinf01n· l: lit
to "5jJecijicatiollS for Fabricated D(formed Steel Bar Mats shall conform to ASTM l022M, except deformed wire .',i; 'll!
for COllcrete Reillforcemellt" (ASTM A 184M). not be smaller than size MD25 or larger t1' . .. ~
Reinforcing bars used in bar mats shall conform to one of and the yield strength for wire with Iv eXC l"\'; ill'
shall be taken as the stress correspond(ng to a s{rall! 01 U .j)
the specifications listed in Section 403.6.3.1.
percent. Deformed wire larger than MD200 is PCI i' :: : (d
403.6.3.5 Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement shall
where used in welded wire reinforcement confo!"lllilig to
conform to "Specificatiolls for Steel Wire , Dtjomzed, for
i ASTM AI022M. but sha ll be o'eated as plain wire for Section 410./7.7 or 410.17.8. shall confolln to one of the
' development and splice design. Spacing of welded following specifications:
: inte.",;.;ctions shall not exceed 300 mm for plain welded wire
I. "Specifications for Carbon Sree/" (ASTM A 36M).
:: and 400 mm for deformed welded wire in direction of
~ caJculntcd stress, except for welded wire reinforcement used 2. "Specifications for Hi gh-Strenglh Low-All oy Stilletural
'; as stirrups in accQrdance with Section 412.14.2. Steel" (ASTM A 242M).
3. "Specificafiolls Jor High -Strength Low-Alloy
403.6.4 Plain Reinforcement Columbium- Vanadium Sleds of Structural Quality"
(ASTM A 512M) .
. . 403.6.4.1 Plain bars for s piral reinforcement shall conform
4. "Specificatiolls for ihiJ,-Slrength Low-Allo), Slruclural
to one of the following specification: ASTM A615M or
Sleel " with 345 MPa (ASTM A 588M).
A706M .
5. "Specifications for SIrucfIlral ,~hllpeJ" (ASTM
403.6.4.2 Plain wire for spi ral reinforcement shall confonn A992M).
to "Specifications f or Steel Wire. Plain, for Concrete
Reinjorcemem" (ASTM A 82M), except Ihal for wire wilh 403.6.7.2 Steel pi pe or tubin g fo r composite compress ion
a specified yield strength!, exceeding 415 MPa./, shall be members composed of a steel -encased concrete core
the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent. meeting requirements of Section 410.17.6 shall conform to
one of the following specifications:
403.6.5 Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement J. Grade B of "Specifications for Pipe, Steel. Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coaled Welded alld Seamless"
403.6.5.1 Headed studs and headed stud assembl ies shall (ASTM A 53M).
confonn to ASTM AI044M .
2. "Specifica tions for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tllbing ill Rounds and Shapes"
403.6.6 Prestressing Tendons
(ASTM A SOOM) .
403.6.6.1Tendons for prestressed reinforcement shall 3. "Specijications Jo r flor-Formed Welded alld Seamless
confoml to one of the foll ow in g speci fi cati ons : Carboll Sleel Tllbillg" (ASTM A 50 1M).
l. Wire conforming to "Specifications for Uncomed
403.6.8 Steei discon tinuou s fiber reinforcement fo r concrete
Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Con crete "
shall be deformed alld conform to ASTM A820M. Steel
(ASTM A 42 1M).
fibers have a lell gl lHo~diameter ratio not smaller than 50
2. Low-re la xati on wire cOllformin g 10 "SjJecijicoliolls for and not grealcr than 100.
Uncoated Stress- Relieved SU'e/ Wire for Prestressed
Concr ete " including Su pplemcill "Lt) w-Reiaxarioll 403.6.9 Headed defo rmed bars shall co nform to ASTM
Wire " (ASTM A 421 M) A970M and obsll1lclions or interruption s o f th e bar
defonnati ons. if any. shall not extend Illorc lhan 2th rrom
3. Strand conforming (0 "SpecificmiollS for Steel Stn/fld,
the bearing face or the head.
Un COaTed Seven- Wire for Prestressed COl/ crete "
(ASTM A416M).
4. Bar conforming to "Specijicllliolls fo r Uncoated High-
403.7 Admixtures
Strength Steel Bar Jor Prestressing Conc rete " (ASTM
A 122M)
403.7.1 Admixtures fo r water reduction and setting time
modification shall co nform ASTM C494M . Admixtures for
usc in producing nowing concrete shall conform ASTM
403.6.6.2 Wire, strands , and bars not specifically listed in
C IOI7M.
ASTM A 4 16M . A 421M alld A 122M arc allowed.
provided they con form to minimum requirements or Ihesc
403.1.2 Air-entrain ing admixlUrcs shall conform to
spccifications and do not have prOI)Cl1ics that make thcm
less satisractory (han those listed in these s pecificati ons. "Specificmio flslor Air-EllIrai"inlj Admixtures fur CO/l crete"
(ASTM C 260).
403.6.7 Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing 403.7.3 Admixtures to be used in conc rete lhat do 110t
conforl1l lO Sections 403.7.I .ilnd 403.7.2 s ha ll be subject to
403.6.7.J Stmctur<ll steel used with reinforci ng bars in prior approval by the engineer.
co mpositc co mpress io n mcmbers meeting req uirements of
403.7.4 Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride A185/A185·07 Standard Specifications for Steel Welded
from other than impurities from admixture ingredients shall Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
not be used in prestressed concrete, in concrete containing
embedded aluminum, or in concrete cast against stay-in- A242/A242M·04a Standard Specifications for High.
place galvanized steel forms. See Sections 404.6.1 and Strength Low~Alloy StructuraL Steel
406.3.2.
A307/A307~07a Standard Specijication for Carbon
403.7.5 Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall Steel Bolts and Studs, 415 MPa Tensile Strength.
conform to "Specificalions/or Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzo/an for Use as a Mineral Admixture in A416/A416M·()(; Standard Specificatiolls for SIal Slrand,
POri/and Cement Concrete" (ASTM C 618), Uncoated Seven~Wirefor Prestressed Concrete
403.7.6 Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an A42J/A421~05 Standard Specifications for Uncoated
admixture shall conform to "Specifications for Ground Stress~Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete
Granufoted Blast-fumace Slag for Use in Concrete and
Mortars" (ASTM C 989). A496/A496·07 Srandard Specificatians for Steel Wire,
Deformed, jar Concrete Reinforcement
403.7.7 Admixtures used in concrete containing ASTM
C845 expimsive cements shall be compatible with the A497/A497·07 Standard Specifications for Steel Welded
cement and produce no deleterious effects. Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
403.7.8 Silica fume used as an admixture shall conform to ASOO/ASOO·07 Standard Specifications for Cold·Formed
"Specificatioll for Silica Fume for Use in Hydraulic-Cement Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Concrete and Mortar" (ASTM C 1240). Rounds and Shapes
403.9.1 In the absence of the Philippine National Standard A61SIA615M-07 SWlldard Specijications for Deformed
(PNS), Standards of the American Society for Testing and and Plain Billet-Steel Bars jor Concrete Reinforcement
Materials (ASTM) referred to in this chapter listed below
with their serial designations, including year of adoption or A 706/A 706M-06a Standard Specifications for Low-Alloy
revision, arc declared (0 be part of this code as if fully set Steel Deformed Barsfor Concrete Reinforcemelll
forth herein:
A 7221 A 722-07 Standa,.d Sp(~cifica(ions for UnCOOfu/
A361 A36M·05 Standard SpecUlcatiol1S for Carboll High-Strength Steel Bar/or P}'(~stressillg Concrete
,)'tJ'Uct/lral Steel
A 76 7I A 767M ~OS Statu/ard S/J£'cificatiolls for Zi,u -Coaled
A . 531 A53 .. 07Standard SpeClficatiolls for Pipe, Sted, (Galvanized) Steel Barsfor COil crete Reinjoram('J/t
Black and lim-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded (Ind Seamkss
A775/A77SM-07 Standard SpecificatioJls for Ejwxy-
A821 AB2-07 Standard Spec!fications for Steel Wire, Coat(~d Reilljorcint: Slee/ Bars
Plain, for Concrcte Reit(forcemelll
A8201 A820M··06 Swndard SpecificalioJ1s for ,S'teei Fiber'
A 1841 AI 84-06 Standard 5'pec(ficatiolls for Fabricated for Fiber Reinforced CO!lcrde
Dljonlled S'rcel Bar Mats/or COJJcrete ReiJ!forcement
A884/A884M-06 Standard Specifications for Epoxy- CISO-OS Standard S'pecifications for Port/and
. Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Cement
Reinforcement
CI72-04 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly
A934/A934M-07 Standard Specifications for Epoxy- Mixed Concrete
Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
CI92/CI92M-06 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly
. A955/A9SSM-07a Standard Specifications for Deformed Mixed Concrete
and Plain and Stainless Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinjorcemellf C231-04 Standard Method for Air COfltenl of
Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Me/hod
A970/A970M-06 Stondard Specifications for Headed Steel
Bars/or Concrete Reinforcement C260-06 Standard SpeCificaTions for Air-
Entraining Admixtures for Concrere "
A9921A992M-06a Standard Specifications for Structural
Steel Shapes C330-0S Stondard Specifications for Lightweight
Aggregatesfor Structural Concrete
A996/A996M-06a Standard Specifications for Rail-Steel
and Axle Sleel Deformed Bars for Concrete C494/C494M-OSa Standard Specifications for Cltemical
Reinforcement Admixtures for Concrete
A!0221AI022M-07 Standard Specification for Deformed C496/C496M-04 Standard Test Metltod for Splitting
and Plain Stainless Sleel Wire and Welded Wire for Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concn:te SpeCimens
Concrete Reinforcement
C567-05a Standard Test Method for UniT Weight of
AI03SIAI03SM-07 Standard Specification for Deformed Structural LighTweight Concrete
and Plain, Low-Carbon, Chromium, Sleel Ban'for Concrete
Reinforcement CS9SM-07 Standard Specifications for Blended
Hydraulic Cements
AI044/AI044M-OS Standard Specification for Steel Stud
Assemblies/or Shear Reinforcement of ConerNe C618-05 Standard Specifications for Fly Ash and
Raw or Calcined Natura! Pozzohm for Use as a Mineral
C291C29M-03 Stondard Method for Bulk Demity (Unit Admixture on Portland Cemenf Concrete
Weigh!) and Voids in Aggregare
C685/C685M-O I Sralldard Spccificaliolls for ConcrelC
C31/C31 M-06 S'randard Practice f6r Making and Made by VO!llIllNric Barching and Confinuous Mixing
Curing COl/crete Test Specimens in the Field
C84S-04 Standard Spec((ications for expansive
C33-03 Standard SpeCifications for Concrete Hydraulic Cement
Aggregate
C989~06 Standard Specifications for Ground
C39/C39M-05 Standard Test Method for Compressive Granulated BIaSI-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and
Strength of L)lilldrical Concrete Specimens Morlars
C42/C42M-04 Standard M(~lhod of Obtaining and C!OI2-04 Tes! Method for Length Chang(~ (4
Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete l1)Ylraulic-Cement Mortars Exposf.>d {() a Su~(a!e ,)'olurioll
C'J.1IC94M-06 S'tal1(/ard ,S'pec({icarions for Ready-Mixed C lO I7/C J 0 J 7M-OJ Slandard Specifications for t:hemica!
Concrete Admixluresfor Use in Producing F/owinx Concrele
Cl 09/C! 09M-05 Standard Tcst Merhod for Compressive C I J J 6-06/C 1116M~06 Standard SpeCifications for Fiher-
Strength (~( Hydraulic Cemenr Mortars (Using 50-mill Cub(~ Reinforced Concrete
Specimens)
C1157-03 Slwu/ard Pel/tmJl(/!/c(' Seec({tc(lrions
C144-04 ,\'wlldard ";pecUicatiol1s for Ar:grer:of(' for (or lIwlrall./ic Cemenr
Masonry Morrar
th
National Structural Code of the Philippllws 6 Edition Volume "\
4·18 CHAP TEI14 · Concrete
C 1602/C 1602M-()6 Srandard Spcdjications fo r Mixing r.· = specifi ed compressive strength o f co ncrete, MPa.
War er used ill th e Production oj Hydraulic C£!lnent w/e m = maximum watcr-ee mel11iti ous materi al ratio ,
ConcreTe
404.2 Definitions
CIr,09lC I609M-06 SUmdard Test Method fo r Flexural
Performallce of Fiber- Reinforced Concrete (Using Beom Th e Secti on ad dresses th ree ex posure categories that affect
With Third-Poilll Loading) th e req uirements far co nc rete to ensure adeq uate durabi lit y :
403.9.2. "STructural Welding Code - Reillforcing Steel" Exposure Category S applies to concrete in contac t wi th
(ANS I/A W S DI.4/D I.4M :2oo5) of Ihe American Welding so il or water contai ning deleterious amounts of wate rsolub le
Society is declared part of this code as if fully scI fo rth sulfate ions as defined in Section 404.4. J.
here in.
Exposure Category P appli es to conc rete ill contact wilh
403:9.3 Sec ti on 203.3 Comb inin g Loads Us in g Strength water requiri ng low permeabilit y.
DeSIgn. or Load and ResisTance Fac lor Design of thi s code
as if fully sc I forth herein, for the purposes cited in Sectio ns Exposure Category C applies to reinfo rced and prestressed
409.3.3 a nd 426. conc rete ex posed to conditi o ns that require addition :!!
protection against corros ion of reinforcement. Severity \ ,~.
403.9.4 "Spec ification Jor Unhol/ded S ingle Strand 1'e fldoll exposure within each category is defined by classes W l rl i
Marer;,,/'- (AC I 423.7·07)" is decl ared to be pan of this increasing nume ri cal values representin g increasingly se w n '
Code as if fully se t fo nh herein. ex posure conditi ons. A classific ation of "0" is assign'·l·
when the exposu re severity has negligib le effect or docs Il {;~
403.9.5 Seclions 9.21.7. 2 and 9.2 1.7.3 of Divisio n I a nd apply 10 (he s t ~c tura l membe r.
Secli on 10.0. 2.3 of Di vis io n II of AA SHTO "SllIlIdard
Specification for Highway Bridges" (AASHTO I t" Ed iti on, Exposure Category F is subd ivided into four e xposure
2002) arc declared to be pan of Ih is code as if fully SCI fonh classes. However only Exposu re Class FO appl ies II :
herein for the purpose ci ted in Section 418.16. 1. Phili ppine condition; Exposu re C lass F J. Exposure Clas!.
F2. Exposure Class F3 do no t apply as it involve concrete
403.9.6 "Qualfficatiol/ of Post-h'.wafh!(1 M edulll ical exposed 10 cycles of freez ing and thaw in g, in conti nuous
IlI/ cllOrs in CO/lcrete ( Ael 355.2-(7) " is decl ared to be pa rt comaC I with lllo islU re, and whe re e xpos ure 10 deic illt.
of Ih is Code as if full y sel fort h herein . fo r the purpose c ited c he micals is <l nli cipatcd:
in Sec tion 423, A nc horing (Q Concre te .
Exposure Class FO is assigned to co ncrete that wi ll not b~
403.9.7 ··S,r/l clllral Welding Code Steel (A WS exposed to cycles o f freeli ng a nd th a win g.
D 1.1/0 1.1 M:2006)" of the Ameri can Welding Soc ielY "
decl ared ta be P;1I1 o f I h i ~ Code <IS if full y se l forth he rein . Exposure Category S is subdivided into four CXPOS l!I"(.:
classes:
403.9.8 "Acceptance Criteria Jor MOIII!'II' Fmmc.\· B(I.\"('(/ Oil
Srruc:lurof TexrillK (Ael 374. 1-05)" is declared to be p iHl of Exposure Class SO is assigned for condi ti ons where n, ·
this Code as if fu ll y set forth he rei n. water-so lu ble sul fate concen tration in CO il tact wi th COllen.:lt:
is low and injuri ous sulfate attack is not a conce rn .
403 .9.9 "Accrl'wl1cr Criferia Jor Spel."ia/ UlliJOIu/ed
Pn.fr- Tt'usinl1rd Precast Strllclllr(J/ Wafl.\· Bused 011 EXJlosure C lasses Si t S2, and 53 arc assigned for
Valida/iot! Fe.flif/g (AC T ITG-5 . 1-07) ,. is dCcJiln:d to be part structural concrelc members ill direct contact with solub le
of th is Code as if fu ll y SC I fo rth herei n. su lfales in soil or W.1IC r. The severity o f exposure increases
Exposure Category P is subdivided into two expos ure 404.5 Special Exposure C onditions
classes: Concrete that will be subject to the exposure given in Table
404-2 shall confonn to the corresponding maximum water-
Exposure C lass PO SlIllcturaJ members should be assigned cementiti ous materi als ratios and minimum specified
towhen there nre no speci fic penncnbility requirements. concrete compressive strenglh requirements o f that t:lblc.
Exposure Class CO is assigned when exposure conditions 404.7 Alternative Cemenlitio us Materials for Sulphate
do not require addi tional protection against the initiation of Exposure
corros ion of reinforcement
404.7.1 Alternati ve combinat ions of cementitious materials
Exposure Classes C l and C2 are assigned reinforced
10 to those listed in Table 404-2 shall be permitted when tested
and prest ressed concrete members depend ing on the degree for sulfate resistance and meeting the criteri a in Table 404-
of exposure 10 ex ternal so urces of moisture and chlorides in 3.
se rvice.
Exa mples of external so urces of chlorides include concrete 404.8 Water-Cemcntitious Materials Ualio
in direct contact with deicing chemicals, saIl, salt water, The waler~cementiti o u s materi als ratios specified in Tables
brackish water, seawater, or spra y from these sou rces. 404- 1 and 404-2 shall be ca lcul ated using the weight of
cement meeting ASTM C 150. C 59SM. C 845 or C 11 57
plus the weight of ny as h and other pozzolans meeting
404.3 Ge nera l
ASTM C 6 18, slag meeting ASTM C 989, and s ilica fu me
meeti ng ASTM C 1240, if any.
404.3 .1 The v.lue of /",. sh.1I be the greatest of the values
required by Section 404.3. 1, for du rabi lit y in Section 404,
and for structural strength requirement s and shall apply for 404.9 Co rrosion Protection of Reinforceme nt
mi xt ure proponioni ng in Section 405.4 and for evaluation
and (lCceplance of concrete in Secti on 405.7. Concrete 404.9.1 For corrosion of rc inforce ment in
protecti on
mixtllres shall be proportioned 10 comply with the concrete, maximum watc r soluble chl oride ion
maxi mum watcr-ccrnen ti tious material rat io ( w/em) and concentrations in hard ened co ncrete at ages from 28 to 42
other requirem ents based on the exposure class ass igned to days contributed from the ingredients, including water,
tile concrete structural member. All cememili ous matelials aggregates, cementitious materi als and admixtures fihall not
fi pecified ill Secti on 403.3. 1 and the combina ti ons of these exceed the limits of Table 404-2. When testin g is performcd
materials shall be included in calculating the w/cm of the to determine water soluble chloride ion co ntent, test
co ncrete mixture. proced ures shall conform to AS TM C 121 8.
404.3.2 The maximulll wlew limi{,s in Section 404 do not 404.9.2 If concrete with reinforce ment will be ex posed to
appl y to light weigh t concrete. chlorides from sal\. salt water, hrackish \...lter. se<l Will er Of
spray fro m Ihese sources, requirements of Table 404 -2 for
water· water-cementitious materials ratio and concrete
404.4 Ex pos ure C ate go ries and Classes
stren gt h and the minim um co ncrete covcr requiremen ts of
Secliol1 407.8 shall be sil ti sfied . In addition, sec Section
404.4.1 ' nlC engineer·of-record :->h<111 assig.n exposure
418. 15 for unhondcd pres tressed tendons.
clas:->cs based on th e scverit y of the anti cipated ex posu re of
structural concrete. members for each ex posure category
acco rdin g to Table 4()4- I.
111
Natlollal Structura l Code of the Pililippin es 6 Eclition Volum e 1
CHAPTEH 4 " Concrele
~
0
> B
U
Condition
SUft
w N/A
SO 50'1 <0.10 50.1 < 150 PI OA5 3t N/A N/A
f-
V> 0. '" 150:;;50.<1500 P2 OA5 31 N/A N/A
"'
;:0
V>
Moderate SI 0.10 ::;50.1 < 0.20
Seawater
F3 0.45 31 N/A
N/A
1500:5 SO. S
Severe S2 0.20::; 504 :;; 2.00
10,000 Ccmentitiou$ Materials + Types Calcium
Chloride
Very ASTM ASTM ASTM
S3 SO~ > 2.00 504 > 10,000 Admixture
Severe Ct50 C595 CI157
-- 1 - - ' NoT)"p¢ No Type No Type: No
~ [n contact with water where N/A 17
0
.;: .q
- N/A PO
permeability is not required .
rewiClion rnHiclion n:wiClion Re,tric~ion
.; ~:.o
JJ ,
W(MS) .
No
3' .3 rl SI 0.50 28 IS (<70) MS Restriction
In contnc\ with wtller where (MS)
"'---
'"n. "
E
~
Required PI
permeability is not required. IP (11$)
No'
V,
... _- " ~ --~-- . ~-~--~.-.-. " .. ~------------
S2 0.45 31
-.---~
IS «70)
(l1S)
HS I'cnnit!ed
II' (IlS) +
Concrete dry or protected pouolan or
NtA CO
from rnoistme V+ slag! or IS HS+
Not
S3 0.45 3I Poaolan «70) Pozz.o!an I'cnnillcd
(I1S) +
"E
o~
0 0 Concrele exposed to moisture or Slag II [>07.lolan or
or Slag
'g 0
0 u /"vfooerate CI but not to external sources of .\I~g II
-
". e.S:
0
U ~,£
"o u
" chloride.
Concrete exposed to moisture and
.-- " .~- .. HI NIA 17 None
url..2 ---
an cxtemal source of chloride from PI 0.50 28 None
Severe C2 salt, brackish water, seawater, 0'
spray from these sources. Ma~;mum WJter·",lublc
<"bloride jon (0-) wntem;n
L __ •............".- concrele. [>Crcelll by weight
. __ ._~~_m."nl /I
Reinforced I're,lre,,:.cd Related Provisions
Concrele etHlCR'le
-- ..-.. ~
EXpOsure
Class 405.1 Notations
AI6 months A I 18 monlhs
fr = specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
! 51 0.10 percent
Irr ; ;: required average compressive strength of concrete
I used as Ihe basis for se lecti o n of conc rete
proportions, MPa
405.2 General
under conditions of placement to be employed without Table 405-1 Modification Factor for Standard Lk'\"i;J.;ioll
segregation or excessive bleeding. When Less Than 30 Tests arc Available
----------- - -.-.~---.-.----,~---~
20
----~---.---
1.16
--~------~ - --
1.08
- - - -- -
-I
different portions of proposed work, each combination shall
~ 103
be evaluated.
30 or more 1.00
405.3.3 Concrete proportions, including w<\tcr-cementitious / IllIerpo/all! Jor IIIlermedwle /lumber of lesl:..
materials ratio, shall be established on the basis of field 1 Modified slandard devialioll {() be IIsed to determine rNjllired Ii)·,·/ .."
experience and/or trial mixtures with materials to be .\·/reIJgth f" ji"O/lI Section 405.4.2.1
405.4 Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience 405.4.2.1 Required average compressive strengthfcr used H::;
and Trial Mixtures, or Both the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the
larger of Equation (405-1) or (405-2) using the sample
standard deviation, S.I' calculated in accordance with Section
405.4.1 Sample Standard Deviation 405.4.1.1 or 40S.4.1.2.
405.4.1.1 Where a concrete production facility has test F, $ 3SMPa: F" F, -I- 1.34 s, (405 !)
records not morc than 12 months old, a sample standard ./", + 2.33 s, - 3.S
deviation, SJ> shall be established. Test records from which a
standard deviation .'1.11 is calculated: Usc the larger value computed from Eq. 405-\ and 405· :'>,
or:
I. Must represent materials, quality control procedures
and conditions similar to those expected, and changes /",.>3SMPa: t" = t, + 1.34.1, (405-1)
in materials and proportions within the test records shall
not have been morc restricted than those for proposed
t" = 0.90 F, + 2.33 .I., (40S-3)
work. Use the larger value computed from Eq. 405-1 and 405-3.
2. Must represent concrete produced to meet a specified
405.4.2.2 When a concrete production facility docs not have.
strength or strengths i'c within 7 MPa of that specified
ficld strength test records for calculation of standard
for proposed work.
deviation meeting requirements of Section 405.4.1.1 ()'"
3. Must consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two 405.4.1.2, required average strength fu shall be dctermined
groups of consecutive tests totaling at least 30 tests as from Table 405-2 and documentation of average strength
defined in Section 405.7.2.4, except as provided in shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 405.4.3.
Section 405.4.1.2.
Table 405-2 Required Average Compressive Strength
When Data are not Available to Establish a Standard
405.4.1.2 Where a concrete production facility docs not
Deviation
have test records meeting requirements of Section
405.4.1.1(3), but docs have test records [Jot more than 12
months old based on 15 to 29 consccutive tests. a standard
sample deviation S" shall be established as -[Ile product of Less than 21 M Pa I, -I- 7.0
the calculatcd sample standard deviation and the
modification factor of Tahle 405-1. To be acceptable, test 21 '5,[, ::; 15 ./', "'" g.J
records shall Illeet the requircments or Section 40S.4.I.I,
Items I and 2, and represent only a single record of I. Jill', .,. S.II
consecutive tests that span a period of not less than 4S
calendar days.
4. For each walcr-ccmemit iOlls mmcrials ratio or 405.7.1 Concrete shall be tested in accordance with the
cememitiolls malcri.ds content. at Icast three tcst requirements of Scction 405.7.2 through 405.7.5. Qualined
cylinders for each lest age shall be made a nd clIreli in field testing tech ni cians shall perform tests on fresh concrelc
accordance wilh "Method (~r Making alld Cllrilll{ at the job si te, prepare specimens requircd for curi ng under
COl1crele [e.I·{ SPl'Cillll'IIS ill dw Labo/'{llory" (A STM C fi eld conditions. prepare specimens required for testing in
192). Cylinders shall he tested at 2& d:1YS or at test age the laboratory. and reco rd the tempcrnturc of the fresh
designntcd for determination ()f.r,~ concrete when preparing specimens ror st rength tests.
5. From results of cyl inder tcsl.~. :l curve sl1<l1l he plotted Qualified laboratory technicians shall pcrform all requircd
show ing relationship betw ee n wHler-cC111cnlitiollS laboratory lest') .
materials ralin or c{~mc!l[itious materials content and
com pressive strength OIt desi gnillcd tesl age.
405.7.2.1 Samples for strength tests of each class of 405.7.4.1 If required by the engjneer~of~record, rcsults of
concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a strength tests of cylinders cured under field conditions shall
day ,or not less than once for each 120 m3 of concrete, or be provided.
not less than once for each 500 m2 of surface area for slabs
or walls. 405.7.4.2 Ficld .. curcd cylinders shall be cured under field
conditions, in accordance with "Practice for Making and
405.7.2.2 On a given project, if the total volume of concrete Curing Concrete Test ,)"'pecimens ill Ih(~ Fidd" (ASTM C
is such that the frequency of testing requireo. by Section 31M).
405.7.2.1 would provide less than five strength tests for a
given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least nvc 405.7.4_3 Field-cured test cylinders shall be molded at the
randomly selected batches or from each batch if 'fewer than same timc and from the same samples as laboratory-cured
five batches are used. test cylinders.
405.7.2.3 When total quantity of a given class of concrete is 405.7.4.4 Procedures for protecting and curing concrete
less than 40 m3, strength tests arc not required when shall be improved when strength of field-cured cylinders at
evidence of satisfactory strength is submitted to and test age designated for determination of fe is less than 85
approved by the engineer. percent of that of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
The 85 percent limitation shall not apply if field-cured
405.7.2.4 A strength test shall be the average of the strength exceedsf,. by more than 3.5 MPa.
strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of
concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for
405.7.5 Investigation of Low~Strength Test Results
determination offe.
405.7.5.1 If any strength test (see Section 405.7-2.4) of
405.7.3 Laboratory-Cured Specimens laboratory-cured cylinders falls below specified values of Ie
by more than 3_5 MPa (see Section 405.733. Item 2) or if
405.7.3.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in
tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in
accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
protection and curing (see Section 405.7.4.4), steps shall be
Concrete" (ASTM C 172).
taken to ensure that !oad-carrying capacity of the structure is
405.7.3.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and not jeopardized.
laboratory cured in accordance with "Practice for Making
and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM 405.7.5.2 If the likelihood of low-strength concrete is
C 3 J M) and tested in accordance with "Test Method for confirmed and calculations indicate that load-carrying
Compressil'e Strength (~r Cylindrico! Concrete 5jJecimefls" capacity is significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from
(ASTM C 39M). the area in question in accordance with "M(!(hod of
Obtaining alld Testing Drilied Cores and Sawed Beams of
405.7.3.3 Strength level of an individual class of concrete
Concrete" (ASTM C 42M) shall be permitled. In such cases,
shall be considered satisfactory if both the following
three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than
requirements are met:
3.S MPa below specified value off,·.
I. Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive
strength tests (see Section 405.7.2.4) equals or exceeds 405.7.5.3 If concrete in the structure will be dry under
I,· . service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperatures
ISoC to 25°C, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for
2. No individual strength test (average of two cylinders)
seven days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in
falls below.r· by more than 3.S MPa, when f'r is 35
the structure will be Illore than superficially wet under
MPa or less; or by Illore than 0.1 Of'e when Fe is more
service conditions, cores sh;dl be immersed in water for al
than 35 MPa.
least 40 hours and be tested wet.
405.7.3.4 If either or the requirements of Section 405.7.303
405.7.5.4 Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall
arc not mel, steps shall be taken to increase the average or
be considered structurally adequate if the avcnlge of three.
subsequent strength test results. Requirements of Section
cores is equal to at !east 85 percent 01'/,. and if no single
405 .7.5 shall be observed if the requirement of' Item 2 of
corc is Jess than 75 percent ofF.. Additional testing of coreS
Section 405.7.3.3 is nol mel.
extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength
results shall be permitted .
405.7.5.5 If criteria of Section 405 .7.5 .4 arc not met, and if 7. All iait<lIlce an d other unsound materia! shall be
suuctural adequacy remains in doubt, the engineer of record removed before additi onal concrete is placed agains t
shall be permilled to order a strength evaluation in hardened concrete.
accordance with Section 420 for the Cjllestionable portion of
the structu re, or lake other app ropriate action.
405.9 Mixing
405.7.6 Sleel Fiber-Reinforced Concrele 405.9.1 All concrete shall be mi xed unt il there is a uniform
distributi on of materials and shall be discharged completely
405.7.6.1 Acceptance of !'acei libcr-rcinforccd concrete used before mi xer is recharged.
in beallls in accordance with 41l.6.6.1(6) shall be
determined by testing in accordttnce with ASTM C J609. In 405.9.2 Read y-mi xed concrete shall be mixed and delivered
addition, strength tes tin g shall be ill accordance wi th in accordance with requirements of "Specifications for
405.7.1. Ready· Mixed COllerete" (ASTM C 94M) or "Specifica tiolls
Jor COII Cf'ere Made by Volumerric Batching and COlllinllolls
405.7.6.2 Steel tiber-reinforced concrete shall be co nsidered Mixillg " (ASTM C 685M).
acceptable for shear resistance if co nditions ( I), (2), and (3)
are satisfied: 405.9.3 Job-mixed concre te shall be mixed in accordance
wi th th e following:
1. The weight of deformed sleel fibers per cubic rneter of
concrete is greater (han or equal to 60 kg. I. Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of an appro ved
Iype;
2. The residual strength obtained from Ocxural testing
in accord;lI1ce with ASTM CI609 al <I mid-span 2. Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the
deflection of 1/300 of the span length is greater ilwn or lllanuf,lcturcr;
equ al [090 percent of the measured first-peak stre ngth
3. Mixing sh all be continued for at least 1 ~ l/2 minutes
obtained from a Ocxural tcs t or 90 percent of the
slrenglh corresponding to J, [rom Eq . (409· 10). 4. After all malerials are in lhe dru m, unless a shorter lime
whichever is larger; and is shown to be satisfactory by the mi xing un iformit y
tests of "Specifications for Ready-Mixed COflcre{(:"
3. The residual strength obtained from fl exural tcs tin g in
(ASTM C 94M) ;
accorda nce with ASTM C 1609 at .1 mid-span deflecti on
of 1/ 150 of the span length is greater than or eq ual to 75 5. Materials handling, batching and mixing shall conform
percc m of the measured fi rst- peak stre ngth obtained to applicable provisions of "Specifications f or Ready-
from a flexufnl test or 75 perce nt of the stren gth Mixed COllcrete" (ASTM C 94 M) ;
corresponding to f, frolll Eq . (409- 10). whi t hcvc r is
6. A de wilcd record shall be kept to identi fy:
large r.
i a. Number of batr hes produced;
c.
Proporti ons of materials used;
Approximatc
structure;
location of final deposi t in
the following:
d. Time and date of mixing and placing.
1. All equipment for mi xing and transponing co ncrete
shall be clea n;
2. All debris shall bc rcmoved rro m Sp<ICCS to be occ up ied 405.10 Conveying
by concret e;
405.10.1 Concrete shall be co nveyed from mix er to place of
3. Forms shall be properl y coa ted; fi nal depo!\it by me thods th ilt wi ll preven t separation or loss
of materi al",.
4. Masonry filler II nits th ill will be in cont3C1 wil h
co ncrete shall be weI! drench ed;
405.10.2 Conveyin g equipmen t shall be capable of
5. Reinforcement sha ll he thoroug hl y dean of dc le(Criotls provid ing a su ppl y of concrete at si te of place ment wi thout
coatings : .separati on of ingredients and without interrupti ons sufficicnt
to permit Joss or plas ti ci ty b ~lwcen successive increments.
6. Water shall be removed from place of deposit before
co ncret e. is placed unless a trernie is (0 he used or unl ess
ot herwise permitted by lhe engi neer:
111
N3 honl.~! S tructural Code or the Philippines 6 Edillon Volume 1
4-26 CHAPTER 4 - Concrete
405.11.7 When const rucl ion joints are required. joints shall
be made in accordance wit h Seclion 406.4,
405. 12 C u ring
I
406.1.3 Fonns shall be properly braced or tied together to record, on ot her procedures to evaluate concrete
maintain posi lion and shape. slrength.
406.1.4 Forms and their supports shall be designed so as 406.2.2.2 No construction loads exceeding the combination
not 10 damage previously placed structure. of superimposed dead load plus specified live load shall be
I
supported on any unshorcd pOr1i on of the stmctu rc under
406.1.5 Design of fo nnwork shall include co nsideration o r constnlction, unless anal YS is indicates adequate strength to
the following factors: support such additional loads.
1. Rate and method of placing concrete; 406.2.2.3 Form suppo rts for prestressed concrete members
shall not be removed uillil suffi cient prestressing has been
2. Construction loads, including verti cal, horizon tal and
impact loads; app lied 10 enable pre.o:;tresscd members to carry their dead
load and an ticipated construction loads.
3. Special form requi rements for constluction of shells.
folded plates , do mes, architect ural concrete or similar
types of elemen ts. 406.3 Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete
406.1.6 Forms for prestressed conc rete members shall be 406.3.1 Conduits. pipes an d sleeves of any material not
designed alld constnlctcd to permi t 1ll0VC IllCIlI of Ihe h,mnful 10 concrele and within limi tations of Ihis subsection
member wi lhollt damage duri ng application of prestressin g Illay be embedded in eOllcretc with approval of the engineer.
force. provided they arc /lot considered 10 rcpl ace struclUratty the
disp laced concrete.
406.2 R emoval of Forms, Shores a nd Reshorin g 406.3.2 Conduits and pipes of alumin um shall not be
embedded in siructura l co ncrete unless effectively coared or
covered to prevent alu min uffificoncrete reaction or
406.2.1 Removal of Forms
electrol yt ic action bet ween aluminum and steel.
Forms shall be rem oved in such a manner as nol to impair
safety and servicc(lbility of the stm cture. Concrete to be 4Q6.3.3 Conduits, pipcs and sleeves passing through a slab.
exposed by form re mova l shalt ha ve suffi cient st rength not wall or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of
to be damaged by removal opcnl tioll. the cons tnJ crioll .
406.2.2 Rcmov:;1 of Shores and n cshol'ing 406.3.4 Co nduit s and pipes, with their fittings, embedded
within a co lumn sha ll not displace more than 4 pcrcclH of
The pro visio ns of Secti on 406.2.2.1 through 406. 2.2.1 shall
th e area of <.:fOSS sectio n on wh ich stren gth is calcu lated or
apply to slabs and heams except whe re cast Oil the grou nd.
whi ch is required fo r lire protection.
406.2.2.1 I3efore starting cons tru clioll , th e co ntra<.:tor shal]
406.3.5 Except when plans for conduits and pipes arc
develop a proced ure and schedu le for removal of shores and
approved by th e structural enginee r, co ndu its nnd pipes
imaallatioll of reshorcs nnd for calculating Ihe IOilds
embedded within a slab. wall or beam (ot her than those
trans ferred to the sll1lcturc during the process.
merely pass ing through) shall satisfy the following:
111
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Vo lume 1
i
4-28 CHAPTER 4 - Concrete
406.3.5.1 TI,ey shall not be larger ill outside dimension than 406.4.2 fmmediately before new concrete is placed, all
one third the overall thickness of slab, wall or beam in construction joints shall be wetted and standing water
which they are embedded. removed.
406.3.5.2 They shall be spaced not closer than t hrcc 406.4.3 Construction joints shall be so made and located so
diameters or widths 011 cenler. as not to impair thc strength of the. structurc. Provision shall
be made for transfer or shear and oth er forces through
406.3.5.3 They shall not imp<lir significantly the strength of cOJlstruction joints. Sec Sect ioJl 411.8.9.
the construction.
406.4.4 Construction joints in floors shall be located within
406.3.6 Conduits. pipes and sleeves may be considered as the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and girders.
replaci ng slfllclumlly in compression tile di splaced concrete.
provided: 406.4.5 Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance
of two times the width of intersecting beams.
406.3.6.1 They arc not exposed to IlJst ing or other
deterioration. 406.4.6 Bcams, girders or slabs supported by columns Or
wHlls shall not be cast or erected until concrete in lhe
406.3.6.2 They <Ire of uncoated or galv<lnizcd iron or stcel vert ical SUppOl1 mcmbers is no longer plastiC.
not thinner than standard Schedule 40 sleel pipe.
406.4.7 Bcams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals
406.3.6.3 They hnve a nominal inside diameter nO{ over 50 shall be placed monolithically as part of a slab systcm ,
mm and arc spaced nol less than three diameters 011 centers. unless otherwise shown in design draw ings or
specifications.
406.3.7 Pipes and fi ttings shall be designed !O resist effects
of the material, press ure and temperature to which they will
be subjected .
406.3.10 Conc rete cove r for pipes. condu it and linings shall
not be less than 40 mill for concrete exposed to earlh Of
wc,lthc r, or less Ihan 20 mm for concrete not exposed 10
weather or in con tact with ground.
407.2.1 180-degree bend plus 4d" eXlension, bUI nOI less 407.5.1 At the time concrete is placed, reinforccment shall
than 60 111m at free end of bar. be free from mud, oil or other nonmctallic coatings that
decrease bond. Epoxy coatings of steel reinforcement in
407.2.2 90-degree bend plus 12d" extension al rree end or accordance with Sections 403.6.3.8 and 403.6.3.9 shall be
bar. pennitted.
407.2.3 For stirrup and tie hooks: 407.5.2 Reinforcement, except prestressing tendons. with
ru st, mill scale or a combination of both, shall be considered
I. q,16 mm bar and smaller, 90-degree bend plus 6(1" satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions (including
extension at free end of bHr; or height of defonnations) and weight of a hand -wire-brushed
2. q,20 mm and q,25 mm bar. 90-degree bend , plus 12(/" tcst specimen comply with applicable ASTM specifications
extension al frec end of bar; or re ferenced in Section 403.6.
3. $25 nUll bar and smaller, 135-degrce bend plus 6(h 407.5.3 Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free of oi!,
extension at free end of bar. dirt. scale, pitting and excessivc lU St. A light coating of rust
shall be permiltcd.
407.2.4 Seismic hooks as defined in Section 402.
407.3.2 Inside diameter of bends for sti rrups and tics .shall 407.6.2 Un less OIherwise specified hy the engineer-of-
not be less than 4db for ~16 mm bar and smaller. For bars \!cord , reinrorcemenL , prestressing lendons and preslressing
larger (han 4>16 mm, diameter of bend shall be in accordance ducts shall be placed wilhin Ihe followin g tolerances:
wilh Table 407-1.
111
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~·30 CHAI'TER 4 . Concrete
407.6.2.1 Tolerance for depth d, and Ilummum concrete 407.7.3 In spirally reinforced or lied reinforced compression
cover in flexural members, walls and compression members members, clear distance between longitudin al bars shall not
s hall be as follows: be less than LSd. or less than 40 mm. See also Section
r-· 403.4.2.
Effective Dcplh. Tolerance on
Tolerance on d
Minimum Concrete
d 407.7.4 Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply
Co'vcr
also to the clear distance between a contact lap sp lice and
d ,; 200 I11Ill ± lOmm ·10 mOl adjacent splices or bars ..
_.
<I> 2UO /TIm ± 12mm - 12 ,nUll 407.7.5 In walls and slabs olher than concrete jOiSl
construction, primary Oexural reinforcement shall not be
spaced farther apan than three times the wall or slab
except that to lerance for the clear distance (0 fonned soffi ts
thickness, nor farther than 450 111m .
s hall be minus 6 mill and lOlerance for cover shall not
exceed minus one-third the minimum concrete cover
required by the approved plans or specifications. 407.7.6 Dundled Dars
407.6.2.2 Tolerance for longitudinal localion of bends and 407.7.6.1 Groups of parallel rein forcing bars bundled in
ends of reinforcement shall be ±50 mm except at contact to ac~ as a unit shall be limited to four bars in One
discontinuous ends of members where tolerance shall be bundle.
±12 mill at the discontinuous ends of brackets and corbe ls.
and ±25 mm at the discontinuous ends of other members. 407.7.6.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within stilTUPS or
The tolerance for concrete cover of Section 407.6 . 2. 1 shall ties.
also app ly at the discontinuous ends of members.
407.7.6.3 Bars larger Ihan ~36 mm shall not be bundled in
407.6.3 Welded wire fabric (with wire size not greater than beams.
MW30 or M030) used in slabs not exceeding 3 III in span
shall be permitted to be curved from a point near th e top of 407.7.6.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated within
s lab over the support to a point near the bottom of slab at the span of flexural members shall term inale at different
midspan, provided such reinforcement is either continuous points with at least 40db stagger.
ove r, or securely anchored al, support.
407.7.6.5 Where spac ing limitations and minimum concrete
407.6.4 Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for cover are based on bar diameter (//>, a unit of bundled bars
asse mbly of reinforcement. shall be trealed as a single bar of a diameter del;ved from
the equivalent total area.
Exceptions:
1. Rein/arcing steel bars are not required by design.
407.7.7 Prestressing Te ndons and Ducts
2. When specifically approved by the engineer4o,f.record,
welding of crossing bars for assembly purposes ill 407.7.7. 1 Center !0-center spacing
4
of pre-tensioning
Seismic Zone 2 may be permit/ed, provided that data tendons at each end of a member shall not be less than 5db
are submitted to the engineer to show that rht?Te is 110 for wire. nor 4db for strands. except that if concrete strength
detrimental effect on the actioTl of the structural r
at transfer of prestress. c; is 28 MPa or more, min imum
member as a result afwelding of the crossing b.ars. center to center spacing of strands shall be 45 mm for
strands of 12 mm norrtinal diameter or smaller and 50 mm
for strnnds of 16 mm nominal diameter. See also Section
407.7 Spacing Limits for Reinforcement
403.4.2. Closer vertical spacing .tnd bundling of tendon s
sha ll be permiHcd in the middle portion of a span.
407.7.1 The mini mulll clear spacing between parallc:J bars in
a layer sha ll he (It. but not less than 25 1l1111 . See also Section
407.7.7 .2 Bundling of post-lensioning duels shall be
40lA.2.
permitted if it is shown that concrete can be sati sfactorily
placed and if provision is made to prevent the tendons , wlF ~!!
407.7.2 Where paralic! reinforcement is placed in two or tensioned, from breaking through (he duct.
morc layers, bars in thc upper layers Sh'lll be placed directly
ahove bars in the bottom layer with clear distance between
la yers not less than 25 mm.
111
Nationa l Structural Code of the Pllllippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4-32 CHAPTER 4 - Concre le
1. Concrete cast against and permanently 407.8.6.1 For prestressed concrete members exposed to
exposed 10 earth .. . 75 lii;ll corrosive environments or other severe exposure rilleg!"·' ·
2. Concrete exposed LO Cll11h or weather: such as Ihose defined in Section 404, and whid; .lfC
classi fied as Class T or C in Section 418.4.3. spc:cdl e rl
Wall panels. slabs, joislS 2S mm concrete cover shall not be less (han 1.5 limes tlH: !.', ··.· C t·or
Other members ........... .... . 40mm prestressed reinforcement required by Sections filJi X.i. <. Iid
407.8.3. This requirement shall be permitted to be \Vaiv~d if
3. Concrete not exposed to weather or in
the precompressed tensile zone is not in tensi on under
co ntact with ground: sus tained loads.
a. Slabs, walls, joists 20 mm
b. Bc:uns. columns: 407.8.7 Future Extensions
Plimary reinforcement 40111111 Exposed reinforcement, insens and plates inlcndcd for
bonding with future extcnsions shall be prot<~ {;l(;d from
Tics, stirrups. spirals 25 mm corTOsioll.
c. Shell s, folded plate members:
<j>16mm bars, MW200 or MD200 wire, 407.8.8 Fire Proteclion
and smaller ......... ". ... ... .. ........ ...... 10 nun If the National Building Code, of which the N;Jli () nal
Olher reinforcement ............ lit. > 20 ml11 Structural Code of the Philippines (onns a p:lri, j·l:qi1frt :: a
thickness of cover for fire protection greater than (he
407.8.3.2 For pres tressed concrete members exposed to minimum concrete cover specified in Seciion:. tl( ri .,; . 1
earth , weather o r corrosive environmcnl s. and in which through 407.8.7, such greater thickness shall he ~ p(;(; iI H .. j ,
permissible ten sile s tress of Sec ti on 41 8.5. 1. Item 3. is
exceeded. minimum cove r shall be increased 50 percent.
407.9 Special Reinforcement Details for Columns
407.8.3,3 For pres tressed concrcte members manufacturcd
under plant comrol con ditions, min imum concrete cover for 407.9.1 Offset B:trs
nonpreslressed reinforcement shall be as required in Section
Offset bent longitudinal bars shall confoml to (he followir'f::
407.8_2.
407.9.1.1 Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with (lxis
407,8.4 Bundled Bars of co lumn shall not exceed I in 6.
For bundled bars, minimum concrete cover shall not be less
than the equivalent diameter of the bundle, but need not be 407.9.1.2 Portions of bar above and below all off~;c( shall be
greater than 50 mill; except for concrete cast against and parallel to axis of column.
permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall not be
less than 75 mill. 407.9.1.3 Horizontal support at offset bl'n ds ~ ! d1 ; ll~
prov ided by lateral li es, spirals or purts of {Ii;: fL·,,!·
constru ctio n. Hori zontal suppo rt pro vided shaH lie t1. ;.i;·, -J
407.8.5 HC:ld ed Shear Stud J{cinfor(.'clI1cnt to res ist o lle and one·half limes the horizontal ,~}jllp: l(le I H .;f
For headed shear stud reinforcement, speci fied co ncrete th e computed force in the inclined portion or :w urr·,:'1 11. '.
cover for the heads or base raits shall not be Ic..o;s than thill Late ral lies or spirals. if used, shall be placed /lO! m Oil: rb,q)
requi red for the re inforcement in the type of member in 150 mOl from po ints o f bend.
which th e headed shear stud reinforcement is pl'lced.
407.9.1.4 Offset bars shall be belli before ,,1,''C'nc'" i" d."
forms. See Section 407.4.
407.9.1.5 Where a column face is offset 75 mm or greater. 407.11.3 It shall be permitted to waive the lateral
longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent. Separate dowels, reinforcement requirements of Sections 407.11, 410.17 and
lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to the offset 418.12 where tests and structural analyses show adequate
i
!
column faces, shall be provided. Lap splices shall conform
to Section 412.18.
strength and feasibility of construction.
407.11.4 Spirals
407.9.2 Steel Cores Spiral reinforcement for compression members shall
Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite conform to Section 410.10.3 and to the following:
compression members shall be provided by the following:
407.11.4.1 Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous
407.9.2.1 Ends of structural steel cores shall be accurately bar or wire of such size and so assembled as to permit
finished to bear at end-bearing splices, with positive handling and placing without distortion from designed
provision for alignment of one core above the other in dimensions.
concentric contact.
407.11.4.2 For cast-in-place construction, size of spirals
407.9.2.2 At end-bearing splices, bearing shall be shall not be less 10 mm diameter.
considered effective to transfer not more than 50 percent of
the total compressi ve stress in the steel core. 407.11.4.3 Clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed
75 mOl or be less than 25 mm. See also Section 403.4.2.
407.9.2.3 Transfer of stress between column base and
footing shall be designed in accordance with Section 415.9. 407.11.4.4 Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be
provided by one and one-half extra turns of spiral bar or
407.9.2.4 Base of structural steel section shall be designed wire at each end of a spiral unit.
to transfer the total load from the entire composite member
to the footing; or, the base may be designed to transfer the 407.11.4.5 Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced. if needed.
load from the steel core only, provided ample concrete by anyone of the following methods:
section is available for transfer of the portion of the total
I. Lap splices not less than the larger of 300 mm and the
load carried by the reinforced concrete section to the footing
length indicated in one of (a) through (e) below:
by compression in the concrete and by reinforcement.
a. deformed uncoated bar or wire 48 db
407.10 Connections b. plain uncoated bar or wire 72 db
c. epoxy-coated deformed bar or wire. 72 db
407.10.1 At connections of principal framing elements (such
as beams and columns), enclosure shall be provided for d. plain uncoated bar or wire with a
splices of continuing reinforcement and for anchorage of standard stirrup or tic hook in
reinforcement terminating in such connections. accordance with Section 407.2.3 at
ends of lapped spiral reinforcement.
407.10.2 Enclosure at connections may consist of external The hooks shall be embedded within
concrete or internal closed ties, spirals or stirrups. the core confined by the spiral
reinforcement .................................... ........ 48 (h
407.11 Lateral Reinforcement for Compression e. epoxy-coated defonned bar or wire
Members with a standard stirmp or tie hook in
accordance with Section 407.2.3 at
407.11.1 Lateral reinforcement for compression members ends of lapped spiral reinforcement.
shall conform to the provisions of Sections 407.11.4 and The hooks shall be embedded within
407.11.5 and, where shear or torsion reinforcement IS the core confined by the spiral
required, shall also conform to provisions of Section 411. reinforcement ..... 48 db
2. Full mechanical or welded splices in accordance with
407.11.2 Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite Section 412.15.3.
compression members shall conform (0 Section 410.17.
Lateral reinforcement requirements for prestressing tendons 407.11.4.6 Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab in
shall conform to Section 418.12. any story to level of lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above.
407.11.4.7 Where beams or brackets do not frame into all 407.12 La teral Reinforcement for Flexural Members
sides of a column, lics shall extend above tcnninmion of
s piral to uonom of slab, drop panel, or shea r cap. 407.12.1 Compress io n reinforcemen t in beams shall be
enclosed by lies or stirrups satisfying the size ami spacing
407. 11.4.8 III columns with capitals, spirals shall extend to limitations in Section 407 .11.5 or by weld ed wire fabric of
level fit which the diameter or width of capital is twO times
il cq uiva icill area. Suc h tics or stirrups shall be provided
Ihm of th e co lumn . throughout the di stan ce where compression re inforcement is
req uired.
407.11.4.9 Spirals shall be held firmly in place and tru c to
line. 407.12.2 Lateral rei nfo rcemcnt fG!· nexural framing
members subject to stress reversal s or to to rsion at slIppons
407. 11 .5 Tic reinforcement for compression member!) shall shall consist of closed tics, closed stirrups, or spirals
conform to the following: ex tending around Ihe flexural reinforcement.
407.11.5.1 All non prestressed bars shall be enclosed by 407.12.3 Cl osed lies or Slil11Jps may be formed in one picce
latcral (ies. a( least mID mOl in size for longitudinal bars U!32 by overlapping standard stil11Jp or tie end hooks around a
111m or smalier. and at least rnl2 mm in ~ize for liI36 mm, rn42 longi tudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces lap spliced
mm. 1.!J58 111m bars. and bundled longitudinal bars. with a Class B splice (lap of 1.3Id ), or anchored ill
Deformed wire or we lded wire fabric of equivalent area accordance wi lh Section 4 12. 14 .
s hall be permilled.
407. 13 Shrinkage a nd Te mpera ture Reinforcement
407.11.5.2 Vel1ical spac in g of lies shall not exceed 16
longitudinal bar tlinmetcrs , 48 ti e bar or wire diarneters, or 407.13.1 Reinforcement for sh rinka ge and tc mperalllre
leas t dimensioJl of the compression mem ber. st resses normal to fl ex tlrnJ re inforccl'l1ent shal l be provided
in structural slabs whe re the flexural rei nforceme nt extends
407.11.5.3 Ti cs sha ll be arranged slich tl1m every corner and in one direction o nl y.
alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral SUppOI1 provided
by the corne r of 11 tic with an included angie of not more 407. 13.1.1 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall
than 135 degrees and a bar shall be nOt fanher than 150 mill be provided in accordance with ei the r Section 407.J3.2 or
clea r all each side along the lic from such a laterally 407.13.3.
supported bar. Where longi tudinal bars arc IOC.HCd around
the perimcte r of a c ircle, a complete circuhu· lie shall be 407.13.1.2 Where shrinkage and tempcrature movements
pcnnincd.
arc significamiy restrained. the requirement s of Sections
408.3 .4 and 4093.3 sha ll be considered .
4 07. 11.5.4 Tics shill! be locateo vertically not more than on e
half a tic spncing above the lOp of footing or s lab in an y 407.13.2 Deformed reinforcemcnt co nformin g 10 Sect ion
slOry and shall be spaced as provided herein to nol more 403 .6 .3 lIsed for shrinkage and temperature reinforcemcnt
than o ne half a tic spacing below the lowest horizontal
shall be provided in accordance with the following:
reinforcemellt in slab, drop panel, or shear CHP above.
407.13.2.1 Area of shrinkage and te mp erature reinforcement
407.11.5.5 Whe re beams or brackets frallle from fOll r
shall provide at leflst the fo ll ow ing ra tios of re inforcement
d irec ti ons into <I co lumn, terminati on of li es not more than
area to gross con crete area, but not less than 0.00 14:
75 mill below reinforcement in sha ll owes t of slI ch beams or
brackcts shall be pennittcd.
I. Slabs where Grode 280 and Grade 530
deformed bars arc used ....... ... .. ......... .......... 0 .0020
407.11.5.6 Where ,Hlehor bolls are pklccd in (he top or
columns or pe destal s , the bolls shall be enclosed by lateral 2. Slabs where Grade 4 15 deformed bars
reinforcement 111<It al so surrounds at Icit st fOllr vcnkal bars or welded wi re fabric (smooth or
of the colu mn or pedeslal. The laleral reinrorcement shall be deformed) "re used .............................. ...... 0.0018
distributcd within 125 nllll of thc lOp or column or pedcstal.
and shall consist of at least [wo ml2 ml11 or three rnlo nun 3. Slabs where rei nforcement with yield .
bars. stress exceeding 415 MPa measured at
a yield strain of 0 .35 percent is used 0.00 18 x415
J,
407.13.2.2 Shri l1kage and tClllpcralu r~ rein forccmcllI shall 2. At Icast onc-qual1cr of thc posit ivc momcnt
be spaced nol f.wher ap,IJ1 than ri vc timcs the sla b lhickness reinforccment requi red aI midspa n, bUI not less Ih'lll
or 450 mm. two bars.
407.13.2.3 AI <t il secti ons whcre requi red. rei nforcc men t for A l non-con tin uous suppOl1S, the reinforce ment shall be
shrinkage and tcmpe.rillure ~(rcsscs shall develo p the anc hored to develop 1,. at the face of the support lIs in g II
specified yicld strcngth J~ in (elision in .kccord;lncc wit h standard hook satisfying Sec ti on 41 2.6 or headed defonncd
Scclion 41 2. bar sa ti sfying Section 412 .7.
407.13.3 Prestressin g Icndons conforming to Scct ion 407.14.2.3 The co ntinuous moment reinforcement required
403.6.6 used for shrinkage ,lIld temperature reinforcement ill Section 407. 14.2.2 shall bc enclosed by transverxe
shall be provided ill accorda nce wilh the followi ng: reinforcement or the Lype specified in Section 4 11.7.4.1.
The transve rse rcinforcemenl Shilll be an chored as specified
407.13.3.1 Tendons shall be proportioned to provide a ill Section 4 11.7.4.2. The transverse rein forcement need not
mini mu lll average co mpressive Sl rC!\s of 0.70 MPa on gross be extended thro ugh the coluilln .
COll cretc area using effecti ve prestress, after losses, in
accordance wi th Sccti on 418.7. 407.14.2.4 Where splices are required to salisfy Section
407, 14.2.2, (he lOp reinforcement shall be spliccd at or near
407.13.3,2 Spacing of prl.!s lrcssed te ndons shall not exceed midspan and boltom reinforcement shall be spliced near the
i .8 meter..... support . Splices shall be Class B tension splices, or
mechanical or welded splices satisfyi ng Section 4 12. i 5.3 .
407.13.3.3 WIlen the spacing of pres tressed tcndOlls exceeds
1.4 Ill, <Iddi lional bonded shrinkage and temperature 407.14,2.5 In other than perimeter beams . where transverse
reinfo rceme nt conforming with Secti on 407 .13.2 xlmll be reinforce ment as dcfined in Secti on 407 .14.2.3 is provided,
pro vided between (he (c!l tk>ns at slab ed ges extending from there arc 110 addi tion al requirements for longitudinal
the Slil b edge for a distance equal 10 the tendon spacing, integrity reinforcement . Wh ere such transverse
reinforcc melll is nOt provided, nt least one-qual1cr of the
positive 1l10lnCllI rein forcement at midspan, but not less than
407.14 UCCJuircmcnts fo r Stru ctll ra lln tcgrity I WO ba rs, shall pnss through the regi on bounded by the
longiludinal reinforccll1clHof thc COI Ulllll :lIld shall be
407.14,1 III the dc/ailing of re info rce ment and connec ti ons. co ntinuou s or shall be spliced over OJ' ncar the support wilh
members of' . 1 structure shall be effectivel y tied toge ther (0 a Class B tens ion spli ce, or mec hanical or weld ed split:cs
impro ve illlcgri ty of the ove ral l struc ture. sa ti sf yi ng Section 412. 15.3. A I 11011 co ntinuous suppOI1S, the
reinforccment sl1:111 he 'lIlchored 10 (ievel opJ~ at the face ()f
407.J4.2 For cast-I n-plan.' olllslnl<.'tion. I h~' following sh;1I 1 Ihe SUPP()f1 using a standard hook sali s fying Section 4 12.6
c() ll s tillftl~
llIinilllUlll r e quil'l~ lIlcnls : or headed de forilled bar sa tisfying Sct: ti o ll 4! 1 .7.
407,14.2. 1 In joist conslnll' ti oll. its delincd in Sections 407 ,14.2,(' For IlOll presLresscd two-way sl" b COllst rllCli ()]).
408.14.1 through 01 08. 14.3. at lea~1 nile hO(t Olll har shall he set: Sel' tion 41 J .4.R.5.
continuous or shal l he spliced over the support wi th a Class
B tens ion spl icc 0 ]' a Illct' h;m ic al ~)I' welded s plice satisfy ing 407. 14.2.7 For prt:stressed two-way slab cOllslnlcli on. see
Section 412. 1S .] <lod at nOIl-cont inllolls support s sh all be Secti on 4 18. 13 .6 and 41 8 13.7
'1IH.:hored 10 develop f,· a! the face of the slJppon lI sin g a
sta ncbnl honk satisfying Sect ion ~ 11.6 or hcmicd (kfo rmcd
407. 14 ,) For precast concrc te CO]l Slrut'l io n . tcnsio]) lies
bar SiU i~ryi llg Set'! inn 412.7. shall be provided in the transverse. longitudinal. and vcrtit'al
dircction s and arou nd t h ~' perimcter o f the slrllc tll rc In
407.J4,2.2 I k:1Il1S al tl w pcrilllt'!l:r of Ih e St I1l C!\lI\' sh,dl ~rrl~\,:tivdy til' ek lll c lJt s toget her. The provisions of Sec ti on
11 ;1\·\ , ~: ()llt i l1\1\1\1s I'ci nrmccillcill O\:l! Ihe :-.pan kll gth p assin g 4 I (,.!, shall "ppl)' .
throu gh tht: region bounded hy l ile longitudilla l
rcinfnrcl'Illl'1lI o r I Ill! L"lliu llIl1 l'oll si:-tlllg til' ( I ) and (2):
.:107. 14.4 For lif, ·"I,,11 l'oll~trlll'tioll, St'C. St:t't ioIlS .~ 1l.·tX 6
I. 1\1 It'a.\( (llll' -s ixth nf the tens ion rc ill i'orn'm t'1I1 and ..t 18 . 1:IX
I'l'q uil'l'd for ll ~ga ti\'l: 11101111..'1\1 al the :-. uppOl'1. hU I no t
k::-.s 111:111 t\V() 1);lrs:
4·36 CHAPTEI, 4 . Concrete
~
35.8 1006 7.907 36 1019 7.986
.
43.0 1452 11.380 42 1385 10.870
57.3 2581 20.240 58 2642 20.729
--~ .."" •... _ . _ - - - - ' - . _ - - -
40 H.2.J An<.: h llr~ wit hin the St'Olk ' II!' Set'ltlln ,n.\ 111'.. 1:111('(1
in (o nne h.' 10 I r: lII ~ kr l" ;,,ds !~I\vl'l'n rnll n l'~ t l' d Llt' l lIl'n "
s ha ll he Ik:-. ig ned US III~ Sect ion ·123 .
CHAPTI: R 4 . Concrete 4·39
as 4700 .J"/':
NEGATIV E MOMENT:
408.6.2 Modulus of elasticit y Es for nonprestressed
al ex tcrior face of first intcrio r sllppon
Two spans ................. . reinforcement shall be permitted (0 be taken as 200,000
\t l
"I./19
w,.J,,'~/ IO MPa.
More than two spans ..
at other faces of interior support s 1V.,/,/·!11 1
408.6.3 Modulus of elasticity Es for prest ressing tendons
at face of all su pports for: slabs with shall be dClcnnined by lc:-itS or supplied by the
sp:lnS not cxceeding 3 meters; and manufacturer.
beams where ratio of su m of column
sl iffnesses (0 beam stiffness exceeds
408.7 Lightweight Concrete
cigh l at each end of lhe span
al interior face of exterior support for 408.7.1 To account for the usc of liglHweight concrete,
members built integrally with suppons: unless !:>pccifically noted otherwise, a modification factor ),
where support is a spandrel beam
where su pport is a column
w)}'124
w)}1!6
appears as a multiplier of F, in all applicable equations
and sections of this code, where }, = 0.85 for sand-
SHEAR : lightweight COllcrete and 0.75 for all-li ghtweight concrete.
Linear interpolation between 0.75 and 0.85 shall be
at face of first interi or suppon .. .. . ... ..... 1. 15 11',,1,/2 permitted, on the basis of volume tri c fracti ons, when a
a\ face of all ot her slIppOJ1S . ...... ............ 11',,/,,/2 pOl1ion of the ligili weight fine agg regate is replaced with
normal-weight fine aggregate. Linear interpolatio n between
0.85 and 1.0 shall be permitted, on the basis of volu mclric
408.4.4 Stru HlIld -tie models shall be penn illcd to be used frac ti ons. for concrele con taini ng normal-weight fine
in the design of slruclunll concrele. Sec Section 427. aggregate and a blend of li giliweigh t and normal -weight
coarse aggregates. For normal· weigh t conc rete, }. = 1.0. If
average splitting tensile strength of li ght we ight concrete,Fe/>
408.5 Redi stribution of Negative l\1omcnts in
Continuous Nonprestressed Flexural Members is specified, A ~ t" 1(0.56 F, .) $ 1.0.
111
National Structural Corle of tl'l('; Pililippines 6 Edition Volumr? 1
4·40 CHAPTEI, 4 . Concrete
408.11 Columns
408.9 Effective Stiffness to Determine Lateral
408.11.1 Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces
Deflections
from factored loads on all floors or roof and the maximum
moment from factored loads on a single adjacent span of the
408.9.1 Lateral deflections of reinforced concrete building floor or roof under cOllsideration. Loading condition giving
systems resulting from service lateral loads shall be
the maximum ratio of moment to axial load shall also be
computed by either a linear analysis with member stiffness considered.
determined using 1.4 times the flexural stiffness defined in
408.9.2 and 408.9.3 <>1' by a more detailed analysis. Member
408.11.2 In frames or continuous constl1lction,
properties shall not be taken greater than the gross section
consideration shall be given to the effect of unbalanced floor
properties.
or roof loads on both exterior and interior columns and of
eccentric loading due to other causes.
408.9.2 Lateral deflections of reinforced concrete building
systems resulting from factored lateral loads shall be
408.11.3 In computing gravily load moments in columns, it
computed either by linear analysis with member stiffness
shall be permitted to assume far ends of columns built
defined by (I) or (2), or by a more detailed analysis
integrally with the stl1lcture to be fixed.
considering the reduced stiffness of all members under the
loading conditions:
408.11.4 Resistance to moments at any floor or roof level
I. By section properties defined in 410.12.3 (I) through shall be provided by distributing the moment between
(3); or columns immediately above and below the given floor in
proportion to the relati ve column stiffnesses and conditions
2. 50 percent of stiffness values based on gross section
of restraint.
properties.
408.9.3 Where two-way slabs without beams are designated 408.12 Arrangement of Live Load
as part of the seismic-foree-resisting system, lateral
deflections resulting from factored lateral loads shall be 408.12.1 It is permissible to assume that:
permitted to be computed by using linear analysis. The
l. The live load is applied only to the floor or roof under
stiffness of slab members shall be defined by a model that is
consideration; and
in substantial agreement with results of comprehensi ve tests
and analysis and the stiffness of other frame members shall 2. The far ends of columns built integrally with the
be as defined in Section 408.9.2. structure are considered to be fixed.
408.13.3 for beams with a slab on one side on ly. the 408.14.5.2 Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall nol be
effective overhanging flange width shall not exceed: less than one twelfth the clear distance between ribs nor less
than 40 mm.
1, Onc·twclfth the !span"length of the beam;
2. Six limes the slab thickness; or 408.14.5.3 In one-way joisls, rei nforcement normal to Ihe
ribs shall be provided in the Slil b as required by Secti on·
3. Onc·halflhc clear di stance to the next web.
407.13.
408.13.4 Isolated beams. in which Ihe T·shape is used 10
408.14.6 When removable forms or fil lers not complying
provide a flange for additional compression area, shall have
with Seclion408. 14.5 are used:
a flan ge thickness not less than one half the width of web
and an effective fl ange width not more th an four limes the
408.14.6.1 Slab thickness shali not be less than one twelfth
width of web.
the clear distance between ribs, or less than 50 mm .
408.13.5 Where primary ' flexural reinforce ment in a slab
408.14.6.2 Reinforcement normal to the ribs shali be
that is considered as a T·beam flange (excluding joist
provided in the slab as required for flexure. considering load
cons tru ction) is paraliel to Ihe beam, reinforcement
concentrations, if any, but not less than req uired by Section
perpendicular 10 the beam shall be provided in tl,e lOP of tl,e
407.13.
"
t slab in accordance with the following:
408.14.7 Where conduits or pipes as pcrmjlled by Section
408.13.5.1 Transverse reinforcement sha ll be designed to
406.3 are embedded within the slab. slab Ihickness s hall be
carry the factored load on lhe overhang ing s lab widl.h
al least 25 mm greater th an the total overall depth of the
assumed 10 act as a cantilever. For iso latcd beams. the full
conduits or pipes at any poin!.. Conduits or pipes shall not
width of overhanging flange shall be considered. For other
impair sig nificantly the stre ngth of the cons truction.
T-beams, only the effective overhanging slab width need be
considered.
408.14.8 For joist cons truction, contri bution of concrete to
shear strengt h Vc- is permitted lO bc 10 percent morc than
408.13.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced not
that specified in Section 411. It shall be peml ilted lO
farther apart than five times the slab Ihickncss or 450 mill.
increase shear strength using s hear reinforcement or by
widening Ihe ends of the ribs.
408.14 J oist Construction
408.1 5 Separate Floor Finish
408.14.1 Joist constmction consists of a mOllolilh ic
combination of regularly spaced ribs and a top sJab arranged
408.15.1 A floor finish shall not be included as pan of a
to span in one direction 01" two oI1hogonal directions.
strucwral member unless placed monolithically with the
floor slab or designed in accordan ce with requiremen ts of
408.14.2 Ribs shall not be less than 100 Jllln in width and
Section 4 J 7.
shall have a depth of not more than three and one-half times
the minimum width of rib.
408.15.2 It shall be permitted to consider all concrete floor
finishes as part of required cover or tOlal thickness for
408.14.3 Clear spacing between ribs shali nOl exceed 750
nonslructural considerations.
mm.
cI :;:: distance from ext reme compression fiber to y, = distance from centroidal axis of gross section ,
centroid of tension rei nforcement, mrn neglecting rei nforcemelH, to ex.treme fiber in
tI' :;:: distan ce from extreme compression fiber to tension
centroid of compression reinforcement, mm = ratio of flexural sti ffness of beam section to
ds :;:: distance from extreme te ns ion fib er to centroid of flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
tension reinforcement, mm laterall y by center line of adjacent panel , if any. on
tI, :;:: distance from ex tre me compress ion tiber to each side o f beam . Sec Secti on 4 J 3
extreme tension steel, mm
:: average value of Of for all beams on edges of a
£ = load effeclS of earthquake, o r related internal
panel
moments and forces
fJ :: ratio of clear spans in 10ng~lo-sh ol1 direction of
Er :;:: modulus of elasticity of concrete. MPa. See Section
two-way s labs
408.6.1
= time-dependent factor for sustained load. Sec
F ;::;: loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with
Section 409.6. 2.5
well defined densities and controllable maximum
= net tensile strain in ext reme tcnsion ste d at
heights. or related internal moments and forces
fl. = specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa nominal strength
= modification factor rellec ling the rednccd
ff == square rom of specified compressive strength of mechani ca l properties of lightweight concrete. See
co ncrete. MPa Section 408.7. 1
= average splitting tensile stre ngth of lightweight Ad = multipli er for additional l ong~t ime dei1cction as
aggregate concrete, MPa defined in Section 409.6.2.5
f, = modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa p = ratio of nonp restressed tcns ion reinforcement,
J; :: specified yield strength of nonprestressed A/bd
reinforcement , MPa p' = rei nforcement rati o for no nprestressed compressio n
I-I :: loads due to weight and pressure of soi l, water in reinforcement, A 'jbd
soi l, or ot her materials, or related in tern al mome nts Ph :: re inforcement ratio producing balanced strain
and forces conditions. See Section 410.4 .2
II = overall thickness of membe r, mm ¢ = st rength -reducti on fa cto r. See Section 409.4
= moment of inerti a of cracked section trans formed
to concrete. mrn~
I, = effective mOlllent of inertia for co mputati on of 409.2 General
delleclion, 1l11ll4
I, = moment of inertia of gross concrete seclion about 409.2.1 Structures and structural members shall Iw (k~iJ ';! cd
4
cClHroidal ax is. neglecting rein forcement, mm (0 have design strength s at all secti ons at !cil :-.i n;i:, '
L
I
== Jive loads. or re lated in ternal moments and forces
== span length o f beam o r one ~w a y s lab, as defined in
required st rengths calculated for the faclOr.:,! hi:
forces in such combinations as arc sti pulated in l his <.'< l(lc.
."
Section 408 . 10; dear proj ec tion of cantilcver, mrn
I" = length of clear span in long uirection of two-way 409.2.2 Members also sha ll meet all other requi remc nts of
construc tion, measured face to face of supports in thi s code to e nsure adequate perfo rm ance al :lcrvi{ ( to ad
slabs without beams and face to face of beams or levels.
o ther SUpp0l1S in olher cases
1yI" =- maxim um moment in membe r at stage d eflection is 409.2.3 Des ign of Slructures and stru c tural mClllbc'I",'\ Will i'.
comput ed the load faclor combinali ons and st renglh r(' (b ':i '·.~' ";! (.;., .
M" = crack ing mOlllcnt. Sec Equation 409-9 o f Section 426 shall be permiued . Usc ( l l" ;,;.,,,j ilt.:h.
combinations [ rom this chapter in conjunction with st rengt h the appropriatc load combinations of ASCE I SEI 7 shall be
reduction factors of Section 426 shall not be permitted. used.
U = 0.90 [) + 1.0 E + 1.6 Ii (409-7 ) 409.4.2.1 Tension contro lled sections as defin ed in Secti on
410.4 .4 (scc also Scction 409.4.2.7) ............ .... .. .. . 0.90
except as follows:
I . The load factor on tile livc load L in Eq . 409-3 to 409-S 409.4.2.2 Compres sion co ntroll ed sections, as defi ned in
shall bc permitted to be reduced to 0.5 except for Section 410.4.3:
garages, areas occupied as places of public assembl y,
2 1. Members with spiral reinfo rcement
and all areas where L is greater th an 4.8 kN /m • conforming to Secti on 4 10. 10.3 .. .... .......... 0.7S
2. \Vhere wind load W has not been reduced by a
2. Other reinforced 1l1cmbers 0.65
directionality factor. it shaH be permitted to use I.3 W in
place of 1.6W in Eq. 409-4 and 409-6.
foo r sections in whi ch th e net tensile strength, Cr. is between
3. W here E, the lo ad effects of earthquake. is bascd 011 th e limi ts for co mpressio n-controlled im d ten sio n-colHroll ed
ser vice-level seismic fo rces, 1.4£ shall be used in place sectio ns, ¢ shall be pc nniucd 10 be linearl y increased from
of 1.0 E in Eq. 409-S and 409-7. th at fo r co mpressio n-con tro ll ed sectiolls to 0 .90 as c,
inc reases fro m the compression-cont ro ll ed strai n limit to
4. The lo ad factor on H, loads due to weigh t and press ure
of soil, wa ter in soil, or other materi al s, shall be set 0.005 .
cqual to zero in Eq . 409-6 and 409-7 if the stmctural
action due to H co unteracts that due to W or E. Where Altern at ively, when Sec ti o n 425 is used, for mem bers in
lateral earth press ure provides resi stan ce to structural whi ch h' does not exceed 415 MPa, with s ymmetric
ac tions from o ther forces, it shall not be included in Ii reinforcement, and with (II . d')/h not less than 0.70, ¢ shall
but sh all be includ ed in the design res istance. be permitt ed to be in creased linearly 10 0 .90 as ¢ P(l
decreases from 0.10 fr A,( to zero. For other reinforced
409.3.2 If resistance to impact e ffects is laken into accouni mem bers, ¢ shall he permi tt ed to be increased linearly to
in des ign, stich effects shall be included with live load L. . tc
0.90 as ¢ P., dec reases from 0. 10 AK or ¢ Ph, whic hever is
smaller, 10 7.ero.
409.3.3 Estimat io ns o f different ial settlement, creep.
shrinkage , expansio n o f shrinkage-co mpe nsatin g conc rete or 409.4.2 .3 Shea r and torsio n (Sec also Section 409.4.4 for
temperature change shall be based o n a reali stic assess ment shear wn lls <lnd rram cs in Seismic Zo ne 4) 0.75
of suc h effects occ urring in service.
409.4.2.4 Bearin g on concrete (excepl for post-
409.3.4 If a structu re is in <I n ood zone. or is subjected 10 tensio ning anchomge zones) ................ ...................... 0.65
forces from at mos phe ric preci pitatio ns, the Oood loads and
409.4.2.5 Post-ten sioned ancho rage Wiles 085
th
National Structu ra l Code of th e P!)il ippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~-4~ CHA I' TEI1 4 . Concrele
Where bonding of a strand docs not extend (0 the le:nd of the 409.6.2 One-Way Construction (Nonprestressed)
member, strand embedment shall be assumed (0 begin at the
end of Ihe debonded leng.h. Sec also Seclion 412.10.3. 409.6.2. 1 Minimum thickness stipu laled in Table 409 :
shall apply for one-way construction not supporting or
409.4.3 Developmenl lenglhs specified in Sec. ion 4 12 do attached to partitions or other construction likely to be.
no! require a ¢ factor. damaged by large deflections, unless computation of
deflection indicates a lesser thickness Illay be used without
409.4.4 For structures that rely on intermediate precast adverse effects.
structural walls in Seismic Zone 4, special moment frames,
or special structural walls to resist earthquake e.ffccls. E, 409.6.2.2 Where deflections are to be computed, deflections:
that occur immediately on application of load sId! lv'
¢shall be modified as given in Seclion 409.4.4.1 Ihrough
computed by usual methods or formulas for e1as: ic
409.4.4.3:
deflections, considering effects of cracking i~nd
reinforcement on member s tiffness.
409.4.4.1 For any structural member that is designed to
resist E, ¢ for shear shall be 0.60 if the nominal shear
409.6.2.3 Unless stiffness values arc obt:lined by a more
strength of the member is less than the shear corresponding
co mprehensive analysis, immediate deflection shall :lC
to Ihe deve lop ment of the nominal Ocxural st rength of the
computed wilh the modulus of elasticity £c- fo r conc rete as
member. The nominal flexural strength shall be determined '
specified in Section ·108.6. 1 (normnl ·wcight or ligh tweight
considering the most critical factored axial loads and
concrete) and with the effective moment of incnia as
including E;
follows , but not grefttcr than It:.
409.6.2.4 For co ntinuous members, effective moment of 409.6.3.3 For slabs wilh beams spanning between the
inertia shall be pcnnitted to be taken as the average of sllppons on all sides, the mjnimum thickness shall be as
values obtained from Eq. 409-8 for the critical positive and follows:
negative moment sec tions. For prismatic members, effective
moment of inertia shall be permitted to be taken as the value 1. For ll/rn equal to or less than 0.2, the provisions of
obtained from Eq. 409-8 at midspan for si mple and Section 409.6.3 .2 shall apply.
continuous s pans, and at support for cantilevers.
2. For /lfm greater than 0.2 but )10t greater th an 2.0.
the thickness shall not be less Ih an:
409.6.2.5 Unless values are obtained by a more
comprehensive analysis, additional longtime denect ion (409· 12)
h= I. (OR+ "'&'-)
resu lting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members 36+5P(a- ",, - O.2)·14()()
(nonnal -weight or lightweight concrete) shall be determined
by multiplying the immediate denec li on caused by Ihe and not Jess than 125 111m .;
sllstained load considered. by the facmr Ail •
3. For llfrn greater Ihan 2.0, the thickness shall not be Jess
A. - -q- (409- 11 ) than :
• - 1+50p'
where p' shall be the value at midspan for simple and I (0.8
•
+..i.L)
1400
(409·13)
continuous spans, and at su pport for cantil evers. :It is " = -'--:-3-:-6-+-':9-':p;-:-L
permi ttcd to assume the time-dependent factor ~ for
sustained lands to be equal to: and not less than 90 mill .
5 years or Illore ................. 2.0 4. At discontinuous edges, ~U1 edge beam shall be provided
12 months ................................. 1.4 wi th a stiffness ratio Of", not Jess than 0 .80; or the
minimum thickness required by E. .!. 409- 12 or 409- J3
6 months ............... ............ 1.2
shall be in creased by at !C,lst J{) percent in the panel
J mon,hs ............... .......... .. . I .0 wi th a discontillllow; edge.
t1l
National Structoral Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4·46 CHAPTER 4 . Concre te
Table 409-2 - Maximum Pennissible Computed Table 409-3 - Minimum Thickness of Slabs
Defl ections wit hout Tnterior Beams
Wi thout drop panels' With drop panels2
Deflection 10 be Deflection Yield
Type of Member Inte rior Interior
cons idered Limitalion stre ngll! Exteri or panels E)(tcrior panels
panels
._--_._._------ !, -~
MPa
i without with without With
Flat roofs not edge
edge edge edge
supportin g or att ached
to nOIl-stnl c[ural Immediate defl ection _,_' beam be:lIn beam beam'
~
36
~
36
~ ~
-~ 40
I
!
stipulated in Tablo 409-2. Ach = cross-sectional area of a slmctural member
measured to ou tside edges of transverse
reinforcement, mm2
i 409.6.5 Composite Construction Ag
As
::::= gross area of section, 111m2
::: area of non prestressed longitudinal tension
rei nforcement, mm 2
409.6.5.1 Shored Construc tion
II .J.min =m.·nimum amount of nex ural reinforcemen t, mm 2.
If composite nexural members are supported during See Sec.ion 410.6
construction so that, after removal of temporary supports, AH :;::;area of structural steel shape, pipe, or tu bing in
dead load is resisted by the full composite section, it shall be composi te section, mm 2 . See Section 410.17.5
pennitted (0 consider the composite member equivalent to a An ~total area of nonpres tressed longitudinal
monolithically cast member for computation of deflection . reinforcement (bars or steel shapes), mm
2
For non prestressed members, Ule portion of the member in A, ::::= area of structural stee l shape, pipe or tubing in a
compression shall determine whet he r value.~ in Tab le 409-1 composite section, 111m2
for normal-weight or lightweight concrete s hall apply. If AI ~ loaded area, 111m 2
deflection is computed, account shall be taken of curvatures A2 = the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of
resulting from differential shrinkage of precast and cas t-in - a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained
place components, and of axial creep effec ts in a prestressed wholly wi.hin .hc support and having for its uppcr
co ncrete member. base the loaded area, and having side slopes of I
unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope),
2
409.6.5.2 Unshor ed Const ruction mm
b ;:; w idth of compression face of member, mill
If the thiclOlCSS of a nonprestresscd precast nexuraJ member bo.. ;:: web width , mill
meets the requirements o f Table 409-1, de nection need not c "" distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral
be computed. I f (he th ickness of a no npreslressed composite axis, mm
member meets the requirements of Table 409 -1, it is not ;:: clear cover from the nearest surface in ten sion to
required to compute deflection occurri ng aflcr the member the surface o f the nexural ten sion reinforcement ,
beco mes co mposite, bu t the long-time dCnecliol1 of the mrn
precast me mber simI! be investigated for magnitude and ::; a factor relating actual moment diagram to an
Coo
duration of load prior 10 beginning of effecti ve composite equivalent uniform momelll diagram
action. ::; distance from extreme compression fiber to
d
centroid of tension reinforcement, mill
409.6.5.3 Deflecli oll computed in accordance with Sections = thickness of concrete cover measu red frolll extreme
409.6.5. 1, or 409 .6.5.2 shal l not exceed limits stipula.ed in tension fib er to center of bar or wire located closest
Table 409-2. thereto, mm
d, ::; distance from extreme compression fiber to
extreme tension steel, mm
E( :;:: modulus of clasti city of concrete, MPa
E j == modulus of elasticity of reinforcemen t. MPa
1:.."1 ::; n ex ural s ti ffncss of compression member. N_mm 2
Sce Eq. 410·15 illld 410-16
f( = specified compressive slrenglh o f concret.e, MPa
h ::; ca lculated stress in reinforcement at service load s,
MPa
1;., = spccified yield strength f,. of tran:..vcrsed
reinforcement , MPa
h or
= overall dimcnsion o f me mber in dirccti on ac tio n
co ns idered , mm
11l
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
4·48 CHAPTER 4 . Concrete
410.3.4 Stress in reinforcement be low speci fied yield conditions, For Grade 415 reinforce ment, and for all
strength Ir for gmde of reinforcement used shall be taken as prestressed reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the
t"s times steel strain. For strains greater than that compression-controlled st rain limit equal to 0.002.
conesponding to h" stress ill reinforcement shall be
cons idered indcpendem of strain and equal to1;.. 410.4.4 Sections arc tension-controlled if the net tensile
strain in the extreme tension sleel, et, is equal to or greater
410.3.5 Tensile strengt h o f concrete sha ll be neglecp.ed in than 0.005 when the conc rete in compression reaches its
axial and flexural calculation s of reinforced concre te , except assumed strai n limit of 0 .003. Sections with t( between the
where meeting requirements of Section 418.5. compression -controll ed strain limit and 0.005 constitute a
transition region between compress ion-contro lled and
I 410.3.6 The relationship between concrete compressive tension-colltrolled secii,)ns.
I stress distribution and <.:onc rCle strain shall be assumed to be
rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape that 4]0.4.5 For nonpreslressed flexural members and
II resull s in prediction of strength jn substantial agreement
with resu lts of comprehensive lests.
nonprestressed members with factored axial compressive
load less Ihan 0.1 Of,' A" e, at nominal sirength shall not be
less Ihan 0.004.
410.3.7 Requirements or Seclion 410.3.6 may be
considered satisfied by an equivalent recta ngular concrete 410.4.5.1 Use or compression reinrorcemenl shaJJ be
stress distribution defined by the following: permitted in conjunction with additional ten sion
re inforcemenllO increase the strength of flexural members.
410.3.7.1 Concrete Slress of 0.85[, shall be ass umed
unjfofJ1l1 y distributed over an equivalent compression zone 410.4 .6 Design axial load strength ¢Pn of compression
bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight line members shall not be taken greater than the following :
located parallel to the neutral axis at a dis tance a:: (3, c
from the fiber of maximum compressive strain. 410.4.6.1 For nonprestressed members with sp iral
reinforcement confonning to Section 407.11.4 or composite
410.3.7.2 Distance from fiber of maximum strain to the members conforming to Section 410.17 :
neutral axis. c, shall be measured in a dire:ction
(410- 1)
perpendicular LO the axis.
111
National Str.uctural Cod e of the Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
4-50 CHAPTEI1 4 .. Concrete
410.5.2 Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken 410.7.3 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well
into account in determining spacing of lateral supports. distributed within maximum flexural tension zones of a
member cross section as required by Section 410.7.4.
410.6 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members 410.7.4 The spacing s of reinforcement closest to a surface
in tcnsion, s, shall not cxceed that given by:
410.6.1 At every section of a flexural member where (ensile
reinforcement is required by analysis, except as provided in
Sections 410.6.2. 410.6.3 and 410.6.4. A. provided shall not (410-5)
be less than that given by:
A
.,min =
.J4 /"/y b d
W
(410-3) but not greater than 300(2801/.). where co· is the least
distance from surface of reinforcement or prestressing
steelto the tension face. If there is only one bar or wire
and not less than 1.4 bwdl/y nearest to the extreme tension face, s used in Eq. 410-5 is
the width of the extreme tension face.
410.6.2 For a statically determinate T-section with flange
in tension, the area As,min shall be equal to or greater than the Calculated stress in reinforcement Is in MPa closest to the
smaller value given either by: tension face shall be computed based on the unfactored
A.,mln = 2/rr:y
b.d
" (410-4)
moment. It shall be pennitted to take Is 'as 2/3 of specified
yield strength J,..
I. Clear spans, J", equal to or less than four times the area. This provision shall not apply to special moment
overall member depth; or frames or special stlllctural walls in Seismic Zone 4 that are
designed in accordance with Section 42 1.
2. Regions wi th concen trated loads withi n (wice the
member depth from (he face of the support.
410.10 Limits for Reinfor cement of Compression
Deep beams shall be designed either taking in to account M emb ers
nonlinear dist ri buti on of strain, or by Sectio n 427. (See al so
Section 411 .9. land 4 12. 11.6). Lat eral buc klin g shall be 410.10.1 Area of 10ngituainaJ reinforcement, All! for non-
co nsidered. composit e compression members shall not be less than 0.01
or morc than 0.08 times gross area Ag of secti on.
4W.8.2 VII of deep hi.:!ams shall be in accordance with
Section 4 11.9. 41 0.10.2 Mini mum nu mber of longi tudinal bars in
compression members shall be 4 fo r bars wi thin rectangul ar
410.8.3 Mi nimum nexural (ension reinforcemcnt, AI. min. or ci rcu lar ties. 3 for bars witltin triangu lar ties. and 6 for
shall confonn to Section 410.6. bars enclosed by spirals conforming to Section 4 10. 10.3.
410.8.4 Minimum horizontal and vert ical reinforcement in 410.10.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcemen t ratio, Ps. shall not
the side faces of deep flexural members shall be the greater be less than the value gi ven by:
of the requirements of Sections 411.9.4. 4 11.9.5 and
427.3.3. (41 0-6)
410.9.2 Com p ressio n M ember Built Monoli thi cally With I. For compression members not braced against sidesway
W a ll when:
lh
Nati ona l Structura l Code of th e Pll i1 ippines G Edition Volume 1
4.52 CHAPTER 4 . Concrete
410.13. The design of columns in sway frames or stories 410.13.1.3 The effective length factor. k, shall be permitted
shall be based on Section 410.14. to be taken as 1.0.
410.12.4.1 It shall be permitted to assume a column in a 410.13.1.4 For members without transverse loads between
structure is nons way if the increase in column end moments supports, c'1I shall be taken as:
due to second-order effects docs not exceed 5 percent of the
first-order end moments. Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 (M/M,) (410·17)
410.12.4.2 It also shall be permitted to assume a story where M,IM 2 is positive if the column is bent in single
within H structure is nons way if: curvature, and negative if the mem.ber is bent in double
curvature. For members with transverse loads between
supports, e", shall be taken as l.0.
(410·1 I)
410.13.1.5 The factored moment M, in Equation (410·12)
shall not be taken less than
is less than or equal to 0.05, where ,[P" and Vus arc the
total vertical load and the story shear, respectively, in the M 2.min = PI. (15 + O.03h) (410-18)
410.14.1.4 Alternatively. it shall be permitted to calculate 410.17.2 Strength of a composite member shall be
os as; computed for the same limiting conditions applicable to
. I ordinary reinforced concrete members.
< ~----->I (410·22)
0, IP"-
1--··_··· 410.17.3 Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a
0.75IP,
composite member shall be transferred to the concrete by
members or brackets in direct bearing on the composite
where 'fPII is the summation for all the factored vertical
member concrete.
loads in a story and "LPc is the summation for all sway-
resisting columns in ':1 story. Pc is calculated using Eq. 410-
14 with k determined from Section 410.14.1.2 and EI from
410.17.4 All axial load strength not assigned to concrete or
a composite member shall be developed by direct
Section 410.13.1.1, where lid, shall be substituted fol' lidm.
connection to the structural steel shape, pipe or tube.
410.15 Axially Loaded Members Supporting Slab 410.17.5 For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of
System gyration, r, of a composite section shall not be greater than
Axially loadcd members supporting slab system included the value given by:
within the scope of Section 413.2 shall be designed as
provided in Section 410 and in accordance with the O.2EJg +E~~ (410·23)
additional requirements of Section 413.
0.2E,A, + E,A"
410.16 Transmission of Column Loads through 'Floor and, as an alternative to a more accurate calculation, EI in
System Eq. 410·14 shall be taken either as Eq. 410·15; 01'
When the specified compressive strength of concrete in a
column is greater than 1.4 times that specified for a floor
EI ~(~)E I EI
1+ fJdlU ~ K
+
J Ix
(410·24)
system, transmission of load through the floor system shall
be provided by Sections 410.16.1, 410.16.2, or 410.16.3:
410.17.6 Structural Steel Encased Concrete Core
410.16.1 Concrete of strength specified for the column shall
be placed in the floor at the column location. Top surface of 410.17.6.1 For a composite member with concrete corc
the column concrete shall extend 600 mm into the slab from encased by stI1lctural steel, thickness of the steel encasement
face of column. Column concrete shall be well integrated shall not be less than:
with floor concrete, and shall be placed in accordance with
Sections 406.4.6 and 406.4.7.
for each face of width b
410,16.2 Strength of a column through a flnor system shall
be based on the lower value of concrete strength with nor
vertical dowels and spirals as required.
-t; for circular sections of diameter h
h --
410.16.3 For columns laterally supported on foUl' sides by
beams of approximately equal depth or by slabs, it shall be
J
8E .'
permiued to base strength of the column on an assumed
concrete strength in the column joint equal to 75 percent of 410.17.6.2 Longitudinal bars located within the encased
column concrete strength plus 35 percent of floor concrete concrete core shall be permitted to be used in computing An
strength. In the application of this Section, the ratio of and /.u"
column concrete strength to slab concrete strength shall not
be taken greater than 2.5 for design. 410.17.7 Spiral Reinforcement Around Strudllrai Steel
Core
410.17 Composite Compression Members A composite member with spirally reinforced conereii'
around a stmctural steel core shall conform to Sections
410.17.1 Composite compression members shall include all 410.17.7.1 through 410.17.7.4.
such members reinforced longitudinally with structural steel
shapes, pipe or tubing with or without longitudinal bars. 410.17.7.1 Design yield strength of structural steel corc
shall be the specified minimum yield strength for gr;Hic
structural steel used but not to exceed 350 MPa.
410.17.7.2 Spiral reinforcemen l shall conform to Section 410.18.2 Section 4 10, 18 does not apply to post-tensioning
410,10,3, anchorages,
410.17,7,3 Longi tudi nal bars located within the spiral shall
f1 0 t be less than 0.01 or morc than 0.08 times net area of
concrete sectio n.
410.17.8.4 Vert ica l spac ing of lateral lies shall not exceed
16 longitud in al bar diamcters, 48 tie bar diamcters , or one
half times the leas t side dimension of the composite
member.
410.17.8.5 Longit udi nal bars located within the tics sha ll
nOI be less than 0.0 1 or more th an 0.08 limes net area o f
concrete seclion.
111
National Structura l Code of the PhilippifwS 6 Edition Volum e 1
l
4-56 CHAPTER 4 - Concrete
Mmi!x = maximum factored moment at section due to fJ ::::: ratio of long to short dimension; sides of column,
externally applied loads, N~mm concentrated load 01' reaction area, or sides of
Mil :::: nominal flexural strength at section, N-mm footing, see Section 411
Mp = required plastic moment strength of shearhead ::::: factor used to compute Vc in prestressed slabs.
cross section, N-mm = factor used to determine the unbalanced moment
Mu = factored moment at section, N-mm transferred by flexure at slab-column connection.
M\. = moment resistance contributed by shearhead Sec Section 41 I
reinforcement, N-mm
y.. = factor used to determine the unbalanced moment
11 = number of items, such as strength tests, bars, wires, transferred by eccentricity of shear at slab-column
monostrand anchorage devices, anchors or connections. See Section 411.13.7.1
shearhead arms
= I - Yr
Nil = factored axial load normal to cross section ;: ;: number of identical arms of shearhead
occurring simultaneously with VII or TIl; to be taken
= coefficient of friction. See Section 411.8.4.3
as positive for compression, negative for tension, N
NIl(' = factored horizontal tensile force applied at top of
= modification factor reflecting the reduced
mechanical properties of lightweight concrete, all
~)racket or corbel acting simultaneously with V" to
relative to normal weight concrete of the same
be taken as positive for tension, N
compressive strength. See Section 411.8.4.3.
Pcp = outside perimeter of the concrete cross section, nun
p =- ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
/h = perimeter of centerline of oulennost closed
= Ajbd
transverse torsional reinforcement, nun
s =- center-to-center spacing of items, such as = ratio of area of distributed longitudinal
longitudinal reinforcement, transverse reinforcement to gross concrete area perpendicular
reinforcement, prestressing tendons, wires, or to that reinforcement
anchors, mm p, = ratio of area of distributed transverse
S2 = center-to-center spacing of longitudinal shear or reinforcement to gross concrete area perpendicular
torsion reinforcement, mm to that reinforcement
7~ = nominal torsional moment strength, N-mm PI\' ~ Ajb"d
1~ = factored torsional moment at section, N-mm B = angle of compression diagonals in truss analogy for
I ~ thickness of a wall of a hollow section, mm torsion
V, =nominal shear strength provided by concrete, N ¢ = strength reduction factor. See Section 409.4
Vci ;;;: nominal shear strength provided by concrete when
diagonal cracking results from combined shear and
411,2 Shear Strength
moment, N
V(!I' := nominal shear strength provided by concrete when
411.2.1 Except for members designed in accordance with
diagonal cracking results from high principal
Section 427, design of cross sections subject to shear shall
tensile stress in web, N
be based on
Vd = shear force at section due to unfactorcd dead load,
N (41 I-I)
VI =: factored shear force at section due to externally
applied loads occurring simultaneously with M"'(H. where VII is factored shear force at section considered and V,\
N is nominal shear strength computed by
Vn = nominal shear strength, N
Vp = vertical component of effective prestress force at (411-2)
section, N
Vs ;;;: nominal shear strength provided by shear where Vc is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in
reinforcement, N accordance with Seclion 411.4 or Section 4 J 1.5, and VI is
VI. = factored shear force at section, N nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in
V'I ::;:: nominal shear stress, MPa. Sec Section 411.13.6.2 accordance with Section 411.6.6.
)'/ ::::: distance from centroida! axis of gross section,
neglecting reinforcement, to tension face, mm 411.2.1.1 In determining shear strength V,,, the effect of any
a =: angle defining the orientation of reinforcement openings in members shall be considered.
«, =: constant used to compute Vc in slabs and footings
~, = ratio of flexural stiffness of shearhead arm to 411.2.1.2 In determining shear strength V,., whenever
surrounding composite slab scction. Sec Section applicable, effects of axial tension due to creep and
411.13.4.5 shrinkage in restrained members shaH be considered and
effects of inclined flexural compression ill variable-depth
members shall be permitted to be included.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4·58 CHA PTER 4· Concrete
411.2.2 The values Of..Jf': used in SCClion41i1 shall not J. ~ f" 1(0.56 JF:.) ,; 1.0.
exceed 8.0 Mra. except as allowed in Section 411.2 .2. 1.
N.B. Sect. 411 .3 nol in AC I. ad apted from NSCr 5~ Ed.
(4" 8-11 )
wei ght coarse aggregates. For normal wei ght co nc rete , ), =
1.0. If av erage splitting tensile strength of li ghtweight where: M", -- M "Nil
- ---
con crete.Pn. is specified,
However, Vc shall not be taken greater than: 411.5.3.1 Shear strength V,; shall be computed by
(411-7) V.
.j-j-:- b
= A. --' d
V M
+ V + _,_
. _= (411-10)
co 20'" I' " M rn"~
but Vc need not be taken less than 0.17), ff by.Li nor shall
411.5.5 In a pretensioned member where bonding of some
tendons does not extend to end of member, a reduced
prestress shall be considered when computing Vc in
Vc be taken greatcr than 0.42), jf~ bud nor the value
accordance with Section 411.5.2 or 411.5.3. The value of
given in Sections 4 I J .5.4 or 411.5.5. VlldlM" shal! not be Vcwca!culated using the reduced pr{'stress shall also be taken
takcn greater than ! .0, where M" occurs simultaneously as thc maximum limit for Equatioi( (411-9). Prestress force
with V" at section considered. due to tendons for which bonding docs not cxtend to end of
mcmber may be assumcd to vary linearly from zero at the
411.5.3 Vc shall be pennittcd to be computed in accordance point at which bonding commences to a maximum at a
with Sections 411.5.3.1 and 41 1.5.3.2 where Vc shall be the distance from this point equal to the transfer length,
lesser of Vci or V'.l>". assumed to be 50 diamcters for strand and 100 diameters for
single wire.
th
National Structural Code of the Ptlilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4 ·60 CHAPTER 4 . Concrete
I. Slinl1ps perpendicular to axis of member; 411.6.6.1 A minimum area of shear fl'i nforcc ment, A".min,
2. Welded wire fabric with wires loc<tlcd pcrpcndiclJl:lr to shall be provided in all reinforced COw'n .":. flexural
axis of member; and members (prestressed and nonpres(resscJ ) Wht:T:. / // eXCe{~i~",
O.5¢V(". except in members satisfying one or ;..orc of (i )
3. Spirals, circu lar ties, or hoops. through (6):
411.6.1.2 For lIonprcslfcssed members. shear reinforcement Solid slabs and footings;
shall be penrullcd to also consist 0[:
1. HoIlow~core units with tOlal unlopped depth Ilot
I. SlinlJps making an angle of 45 degrees or morc with
iongilUdinallcnsion reinforcement; greater than 300 mm and h ollow ~c o rc un its where
2. Longitudinal reinforcemclH Wil h belli porti on Jll<lkjng 2. Vu is not greater than O.S¢ V("".;
nn angl e of 30 degrees or more wi th the longitudi nal
3. Concrete joist construction defined by Section 408.14 ;
tension reinforcement;
4. Bcams with (owl depth, Ii not greate r thnn 250 mm~
3. Combinati on of stilTUPS and bent longitudinal
reinforcement. 5. Beams integral with slabs with total depth, " not greater
than 600 mm, and not greater than 2 .~) limes thickness
411.6.2 Tile values of 1;. and 1,./ llsed in the design of shear of flange or 0.50 th e width of web;
rein fo rce ment shall not exceed 41 5 MPa, except the value
6. Beams constructed of steel ti bc r.. r e i nro ~ ·c ed, 110nn;;I
shall not exceed 550 MPa for a we lded defo rm ed wire
weight concrete with It' not exceedil1 g 4~J MPa, h Ho i
rei nforcemenl.
greater than 600 mill, and Vu not grealer (han ¢O. J 7
411.6.3 Where the provisions of Section 411.6 are applied ffb.d
to prestresscd mcmbers. d shall be laken as the di stance
from extreme comp ression fiber to centroid of the 411.6.6.2 Minimum shear reinforcement rcquir:·mcnts of
pres tressed and non prestressed longitudinni tension Section 411.6.6.1 shall be waived if sh uwn by test that
rei nforcement, if an y. bUlllecd not be taken less than 0.80h. required nominal nexural, Mn and shear :-.' rcngth , "" can be
developed when shear reinforcement is ( ·,It(ed . .,l;·h I.esl
411.6.4 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear shall simulate effects of differential '!! icm,' ,. creej:,
reinforcement shall extend to a distance d frolll extre me shri nkage and temperature change, be,!}"': 0 11 : H ;disli:
compression fiber <lnd shall be anchored at both ends assessmelll of such effects occurring in sen ice.
according to Section 412.14 to develop the design yield
strength of reinforcement. 411.6.6.3 Where shear reinforcemenl' is reqlli re(\ ,,)' :-'ectioJ '
4 11 .6.6. 1 or for strength and where Secril,;} 4; I.; i ·. ;J ow ~
411.6.5 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinforcement torsion to be neglected, the min imulll :~ ..~:! o ~ :.he.l'·
reinforcement for prestressed (except as . ) j )\lidj'~ ; !i ' " " li' J;
411.6.5.1 Spac ing of shear reinforcement placed 4 I 1.6.6.4) and nonpre5tressed member', :-.1: d ;1:. '.\ . ',11',
perpendi cular to axis of member 5h311 not exceed dl2 in by:
nonprcstrcsscd memhers and O.75h in prest ressed melnbcrs.
b .f
nor 600 mill. A . = 0.062 Vrr;-j'
r . 1IlI11. J r; j
~ (4 11·1 3)
y'
411.6.5.2 Inclined slim.lps and belli longitudinal
reinforcement shall be so spaced {hat every 45·c!egrcc linc, but shall not be less than (0.35b ...'i)IJ;." WIL i~: i) .. .',,:.
extending tow.mJ the reaction frOI11 mid ~d c pth of member in millimeters.
d/2 10 longilUdi nal tension reinforcement. shall be crossed
by al le.lsl one line of shear reinforcement.
411.6.6.4 For prestressed members with effective prestress 411.6.7.6 Where shear reinforcement consists of a series of
force not Jess than 40 percent of the tensile strength of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-up bars at
flexural reinforcement, A"min shall not be less than the different distances from the support, shear strength Vs shall
,mailer value from Equatio;\s (411-13) and (411-14). be computed by Eq. 411-16.
A- v, min -
AI"!'" s
80! d
y
Jfl
b
".
(411-14) 411.6.7.7 Only the center Ulfee fourths of the inclined
portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be considered
effective for shear reinforcement
411.6.7 Design of Shear Reinforcement 411.6.7.8 Where more than one type of shear reinforcement
is used to reinforce the same portion of a member, shear
411.6.7.1 Where factored shear force VII exceeds shear strength, Vs shall be computed as the sum of the Vf values
strength ¢Vn shear reinforcement shall be provided to computed for the various types of shear reinforcement.
satisfy Equations (411-1) and (411-2), where shear strengU\
V~ shall be computed in accordance with Sections 411.6.7.2 411,6,7,9 Shear strength V, shall not be taken greater Ulan
through 411.6.7.9. 0.66.JT: bwd.
411.6.7.2 Where shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis
of member is used, 411.7 Design for Torsion
V =
, A.../Yld (411-15)
Design for torsion shall be in accordance with Sections
411.7.1 through 411.7.6, or 411.7.7.
s
where A" is the area of shear reinforcement within spacing s. 411.7,1 Threshold Torsion
It shall be pennitted to neglect torsion effects if the factored
411.6.7.3 Where circular ties, hoops, or spirals are used as torsional moment Tu is less than:
shear reinforcement, V, shall be computed using equation
(411-15) where d is defined in Section 411.4.3 for circular 1. For nonprestressed members:
members, Ay shall be taken as two times the area of the bar
in a circular tie, hoop, or spiral at a spacing s, s is measured (411-18)
in a direction parallcl to longitudinal reinforcement, and 1)'1
is the specified yield strength of circular tie, hoop or spiral
reinforcernent. 2. For prestressed members:
Vo =A.,.J"d
- - - (sma+cosa
. ) (411-16) 3. For nonpreslressed members subjected to an axial
s tensile or compressi ve force:
for a beam with flanges is less th an thal computed for the a concentrated torque OCClI rs within this di stance, the critical
sa me beam ignoring the flanges. section for design shall be at the face of the SUppOIl.
411.7.2.1 Hlhe factored torsional moment, r u , in a member 411.7.3.) The cross-secti onal dimensions shall be such lhat:
is required to maintain equilihrium and exceeds the
I. For sol id secti ons:
minimum val ue given in Section 411.7. 1, the member shall
be designed to carry Tu in accordance wit h Sections 411.7.3
through 41 1.7.6.
(4 11 ·24)
411.7.2.2 In a staticall y indeterminate structure where
reductio n of the torsional moment in a member can occur
2. For hollow sections:
due to redi stri bution of internal forces upon cracking. the
3
ry(A':)R-
¢,l vi,
P:;
. ,
A.,lfT:
I
+ 0.33
(4 11 ·23) where I is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at
the locat ion where tile stresses arc being chec ked.
2. 37.5 degrees for preslre.o;;sed mcmbers wilh an effective 2. A closed cage of welded wire fabric with transverse
prestrcss force not less than 40 percent of the tensile wires perpendicular to the axis of the member; or
strength of the longitudinal reinforcement.
3. In l10 nprestressed beams, spiral reinforcement.
411. 7.3. 7 Tile additional longitudinal re inforcement
411.7.4.2 Transverse torsional reinfo rcement shall be
r(;quired for IOrsion shall not be less than :
anchored by one of the foll o wing:
A, f,., '0 1. A 135-degree standard hook, or seisrnjc hook as
A, = P .,,_._'- cot· (411-28)
" s j' defined in Sec lion 402, around a longilUdinal b,u';
."
2. According to Sections 412.14.2.1, 412.14.2.2 Of
where 0 shi.lll be Ihe sa me value used in Eq. 411-27 and A, 412. 14.2.3 in regions where the concrete SUITounding
1\' shall be Hlken as the a mount compuled from Eq. 4 f 1-27 lhe anchorage is restrained against spalling by a flange
nol m odified in accordance with Section 411 .7 .5.2 or or slab or similar me mbe r.
4 11.7.5.3 ; J,., refers to closed transve rse torsional
rei nforcemem, and J,. refers lO lo ngitudinal torsional 411.7.4.3 Longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall be
reinforcement. de velo ped 01 bolh ends.
411.7.3.8 Reinforccmcm required for torsion shall be added 411.7.4.4 For hollo w sections in torsio n, the di stance
to thal required for the shear, moment and axial force thaI measured from the centerlinc of the lransverse torsional
ac t in combinati on with the LOrsion . The most restricti ve reinforcement to the in side face .of the wall of a hollow
requircl1lcnl s fo r reinforcement spacing and placement must seclion shall not be less th an O.SAo/,!p"
be met.
2. The spaci ng of th e long iwdinal reinforcemclll including 411.7.5.3 Where torsional reinforcement is required by
tendons shall sat isfy the requirements in Section Section 411.7.5. I, the minimum total area of longitudinal
411.7.6.2. lo rsiona l reinforcement, AI.mil! shall be computed by:
1h
National S tructural Code of the Pllilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4·64 CHAPTEH 4 . Concrele
411.7.6.2 The longitudinal reinforcement required for 411.8.4.2 Where shear-fri ction reinforcement is inclined to
torsion s hall be di stributed around the perimeter of the shear plane, such thm the shear force produces tension in
closed !itinups with a maximum spacing of 300 mm, The shear-friction reinforcement. shear strength V" shall be
longitudinal bars or tendons shall be inside the stirrups. computed by:
There shall be at least one longitudinal bar or tendon in each
corner of the stin-ups. Longitudinal bill'S shall have a VII = 1I'1f,. (psin a + cosa) (4 11 ·32)
diameter at least 1'124 of the stirrup spacing but not less than where a is angle between shear- fri cti on reinforcement and
a 10 rnm . shear planc.
4J 1.7.6.3 Torsion reinforccmclH shi.tlJ be provided for a 411 .8.4.3 The coefficient of friction JI in Eq. 411 -31 and
distance of at least (b, + d) beyond the point required by Eq. 411·32 shall be taken as:
analysis.
Concrete placed monolithically ... ..... . 1.4'<
411.7.7 Alternative Design For Tors ion Concrete placed against hardened concrete with
surface intentionally roughened as specified in
For torsion design of solid sections within the scope of this
Sec tion 411. 8.9 1.0,<
Chapter wit h an aspect ratio, hlb{, of 3 or greater, it shall be
pennitlcd to usc another procedure, the adequacy or whi ch Concrete placed agai nst hardened
has been shown by analysis and substantial agreement with concrete not intentional! y roughened .... O.6il.
results of comprehensive tests. Sections 4 1 1.7 .4 and 411.7.6
s hall apply. Concrete anchored to il!i-rolled structural steel by
headed studs or by reinforci ng bars (see Section
411.8.10) .......... 0.7-'
411.8 Shear· Friction
where A = 1.0 for normal-weight concrete, 0.75 for all-
411.8.1 Provisions of Section 411 .8 are to be appJied w here li gh tweight concrete. Other\vise, ,{ shall be determined
it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a gi ven based on volumetric proportions of ligh twe ight and nonnal-
plane. such as an existing or potential crack, an interface weight aggregates as specined in Sec ti on 408.7. 1. but sh,d l
between dissimilar materials. or an interface between two not exceed 0.85.
concretes cast a{ dirferent times.
411.8.5 For nonna l-weight concrete either placed
411.8.2 Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer as monolithically or placed against hardened co ncrele with
described in Section 411.8.1 shall be based on Eq. 411 - 1 surface intenti onall y roughened as specified in Section
where V" is calculated in accordance with provisions of 411 .8.9, V" shall not excecci the small cst o f O.2f,'A" (3. 3 +
Sect ions 4 11.X.3 or 4 11 .8.4. 0.08;:: ) II .. and I IA ... where Ac is area of co ncrete section
resislin g shear lransfer. For <111 other cases, V" shall not
411.8.3 A crack Sh;'lll be assumed to occur along the shear exceed the smaller of 0.21,.'11,. Or 5.5A,,, Where concretes of
plane considered . The required arca of shear-friction different strengths arc cast aga inst each other. the value of
reinforcement A'l across lhe shear plane Illay be designed J..' used (0 evaluate V" shall be that or the lowcr-strcngm
usi ng cither Section 411.8.4 or any oliler shear transfer concrete.
design methods that result in prediction or strength 1[1
substantial agreement wit h results of co mprehensive lcsls. 411.8.6 The value of 1;. used ror de sign of shear-friction
reinforcement shall not exceed 415 MPa.
411 .8.3.1 Provisions of Sections 41 1.8.5 throu gh 41 1.8. 10
s hall apply for all calculations of shCilr transfer strength . 411.8.7 Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by
additional reinforcement. Pcnnanenl !lei cOll1pn~ssiol1 j!cross
she'lr pl,me sh.1I1 be permitted to he taken as addi tive to
411.8.4 Shea r-Fri ction Design Method A ,i... the force ill the shear· friction reinforcement. when
calcu lating required A,:t
411.8.4.1 Where shear-fri cli on reinforce ment IS
perpendicular 10 sheilI' plane. shl~:!r strength VII shall be 411.8.8 Shc;:II··friction reinforcement shall he appropri<lleJy
<.:o mpul cd by: pl;lccd along the shear plane and shall be tllI(:l l(l: ,·: 10
(411 -31)
develop f •. , on bOlh sides by emhcdmen!. hooks or WC';:i illg
h ) special devices .
for shear transfer shall be clean and frcc of iai tancc, If J1 is 411.10.2 Depth at ootside edge of bearing area shall not be
assumed equal to J .O..?, interface sha ll be roughened to a full less than O.5d. .
.lInplitudc of approximately 6 mm.
411.10.3 Secti on at face o f support shall be designed to
411.8.10 Whcn shear is tr~ms ferred between as-rolled steel resist si mu/(aneous ly a shear Vi/o a factored moment [V"al' +
and co ncrete using headed slUd s or welded rei nforci ng bars, N,l(' (II - tf)]. and a factored horizontal tensile force Nil,.,
steel shall be clea n and free of paint.
411.10.3.1 In all design calculations in accordance with
Section 411.10, strength·reduction factor ¢ shall be taken
411.9 Deep Beams
equal to 0.75.
411 .9.1 The provisions o f thi s sectio n shall appl y for
411.10.3.2 Design of shear-frict ion reinforcement A"j to
members with I" Ilot exceedi ng four limes the overall
resist shear V" shall be in accorda nce with Secti on 4 11 .8.
member depth or regions of beams with concent rated loads
withi n (wice the member depth from Ihe support Ihal are
411.10.3.2.1 Fo r nOnllal -weight concrete, shear s trength Vn
loaded on one face and supported on the opposi te face so
shall not exceed the smallest of 0.2t,b.,d.(3.3+ 0.08!,' )b.d.
Ihal Ihe co mpression struls can develop between the loads
and Ilb.d-
and the supports. Sec also Section 412.11.6.
411.9.6 It shall be permitted 10 provide reinforcement 411.10.3,5 Area of primary ten sion reinforcement Au' shall
satisfying Section 427 .3.3 instead of the minimum be made less than the larger of (AI + A.) or (2A'I/3 + A.).
hoJizontal and vertical reinforcement specified in Secti ons
411.9A and 411.9.5 . 411.10.4 Total area, of A,,, of closed sti rrups or lies parallel
to primary tension reinforce ment shall not less than O.5(AJ'c-
A,,). Distribute A,.
uniformly within (2i3)d, adjacent to
411.I0 Provisions for Brackets and Corbels primary tension reinforccm en.
411.10. 1 Brackets and corbels with a shear span -ta-depth 411.10.5 A"i bdshall not be less than 0.04 (j',i/,.).
ratio 0,.1 d less than 2 shall be permitted to be designed
using Section 427. Design shall be permitted using Sections 411.10.6 At front face of brac ket or corbel, primary tension
411.10.3 and 411 .1OA for brackets and corbels wit h: reinforcement As shall be anchored by one of the following:
I. a" /d not greater Ihan I; and J. Bya structural weld to a transverse bar of at least equa l
2. Subject tv factored horizontal te ns il e force. Nut:. not s ize; weld to be des igncd to deve lop specified yield
larger than V,.. slrcnglh/y of primary tension reinforcement;
2. l3y bendi ng primary tension reinforcement back to fonn
The requirements of Sections 41 1. 10.2. 411.10.3.2.1. a horizontal loop; or
411.10.3.2.2. 411.10.5. 411.10.6. and 411.10.7 shall apply
to design of brackets and corbels. Erfective depth d shall be 3. By some other means of positive anchorage.
de term ined at the f'lce of the SUppOIl .
th
National Struc turC:J! Co·de of the Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
4-66 CHAP TEll 4 - Concre te
411.10.7 Bearing area on bracket or corbel shall not project whe re I,.. is the ove rall length of the wall, and Nu is posi ti ve
beyond straight portion of primary tension reinforcement, for c{)mpression and negative for tensioll. If (MjVII - I", 12)
nor project beyond interior face of transverse anchor bar (if is negative, Eq. 4 J 1·34 shall not apply.
one is provided).
411.11.1 Secti ons located closer to wa ll base Ihan a di stance.
/,,/2 or one half thc wa ll hc ight, wh ichever is less, shall be
411.11 Provisions for Walls pcrmillcd to be designed for the sCllne VI" as Ih:\I computed at
a diswnce 1.. 12 or one half the height.
411.11.1 Design for shear fo rces perpend icu lar to facc of
wa ll shall be in accordance wil h provisions for slabs in
411.11.8 W hell (actol\;u shear force VI. is less than ¢VJ2,
Sec ti on 411 . 13. Design for hori zont al shear forces in plane
re inforcement shall be provided in accordance wi th Secti on
o f wall shall be in accordance wilh Secti on 411 . 11 .2 through
4 I 1. 11 .9 or in accordance with Sec ti on 41 4. When V"
411 . 11.9, Alternatively, it shall be permilled to des ign walls
exceeds ¢ V,. 12, wall reinrorcement for resisting shear shall
with a height not exceeding two rimes the length of [he wall
be provided in acco rdance with Section 411.11 .9.
for horizontal shear forces in accordance with Secti ons 427
and 411.11.9,2 throu gh 411.11.9.5,
411.11.9 Design of Shear Reinforcement for Walls
411.11.2 Design of hori z.ontal section for shear in plane of
wa ll shall be based o n Eqs. 411- 1 and 411 -2, where shear 411.1 I .9.1 Where ractored shear rorce VII exceeds shc:.il"
st reng th Vco shall be in acco rda nce wit h Section 4 11 .11.5 or strength ¢ V,., hO I;zonlal shear reinforcement shall be
4 11 . J J.6 and shear strength Vs shall be in accorda nce wi th provided to s'lIis ry Eqs. 4 11 - 1 and 4 11-2. where shea r
Secti on 411. 11.9, strength V, shall be com puted by
411.11.3 Shear strength VII at an y horizollla! sectio n for V ~ A,J,d (411 -35)
,
shear in plane of wall shall not be taken greater than s
(5/6) Jf'e lid, where II i s thickn ess or wall, and d is dcl1ned where Al • is area of horizontal shear reinfo rce ment withi n
in Section 41 J . 11 .4. spacing s. and distance d is determ ined in i:\ccordance with
Section 4 11 . 1 1.4. Vert ical she:lr re inforce ment shall be
411 .11.4 For design ror hori zontal shear forces in pl;me of provided in accordance wi th Section 411.11.9.4.
wa ll , d shall be taken eq ual to 0,8'." A larger value of d,
equal to the distance fro m ext reme co mpression fiber 10 4J ] .11 .9.2 Rati o or
horizom:1I shear rei nforccmcnl arca to
ce nter o f fo rce of a ll rein forcemelll in tension, shall be gro!'s co nc re te are:1 or vertical sccli on, Pr . slmll not be less
permilled to be used w hen determined by a strai n Ih a" 0,0025 .
co mpatibility an alysis.
4 J 1. t 1.9.3 SP'lc.i ll g of horiwntal sllcar reinforce ment shall
411.J1.5 Unless a mOre detailed calculation is made in ]Jot exceed the small est of /".15, 311 and 450 111m, where I",
acco rdancc with Secti on 4 J J . 11 ,6, shear strcngth VI" shall is th e overa!l length of th e waiL
not be taken greater th an ( 1/6 ) f f hd for wa lls subject
411.11.9.4 Ra tio of vertical shea r rei nrorcement area 10
to ax ial co mpression, or V,. shall not be take n grea ter than
gross concrete area or horizontal sccl ion, P,. shall not be Ie $:->
the va lue given in Sectio n 41 1.4 .2.3 r<'l r wa lls subject to
than the larger or:
axia l tension.
and O . OC~;) . The vaill (! of 1'1 calculated by Eq. 411 ·36 need
(411 -33)
not be greater th an 1', required by Sec tion 411 . 11 .9. 1. In Eq.
4 11-.16. I". is Ihe overall length or the \vall. il nd II ... is the
or overall height of Ihe wall.
(411 -3 4 )
411.12 Transrer of Moments to Colullllls IransfCITed between a slab and a column, Section 411.13.7
shall apply.
411.12.1 When gravily lo.d, wind, earlhquake, or ol her
lateral forces cause Iransfer of momenl al conncctions of 411.13.2.1 ror nonpreSiressed sl.bs and fomings, Vc shall be
framing clcments 10 columns, the shcar res uhing from Ihe s maliesl of ( I), (2), and (3):
moment transfcr shall be considered in lhe design of lateral
reinforcement in th e columns. I. v, o 1.
6
(II 2fJ.)A ~f' b
-.j}""
d
(411·37)
411.12.2 Except for con nections not part of a primary where f3 is the ratio of long side 10 short side of the column,
seismic load-resistin g system that arc res trained 011 four co ncentra.tcd load Of reacti on area;
sides by bea ms or slabs of appro ximately equal depth,
co nnections shal! have lateral reinforcement not less than
Ihal required by Eq. 4 11 - 13 within the column for a depth
2. V,. ~ ~
12
(ah,dr. + 2) A 'f'"" b
v) C 0
d (4 11 ·3&)
1. Edges or corners of col ulll lls, concent rnted loads or 2. The va lue of F in Eq. 4 11 -40 shall nOI be rakcn
reaction areas; and
grealcr th;:lll 5.8 MPa: and
2. Changes in sinh thickness such as edges of cap itals,
3. III each direction, /,'( shall not be less than 0.9 MPa, nor
drop panels, or shcar caps. be taken greatcr than 3.5 MPa.
For two-way action. the slab of rooting shal! be designed in 411.13.3 Shear reinrorcemcnt consisling of bars or wires
acco rdance with Sections 411 . 13.2 through 41 1.13 .6. anu singlc¥lcg or multiple-leg stilTUpS shall he permitt ed in
sl;!hs and rootings with d greater th an or eqnal to 150 1111ll .
4J 1.13.1.3 Par square or rectangul ar colu mns, concentratcd but not less than 16 times the shear reinforce ment bar
loads or reacti ons arcas, the critical scct ions with four diametcr. Shear reinforcc mcnt shaH be in accordan ce wi th
straight s ides shall bc permittcd. Secliolls 4 I I. J3 .3. I Ihrongh 4 I I. 13.3.4.
411.13.2 TIle design or a slab or foot ing for two·way action 411.13 .3.1 V. shall be compnled by Eq. 411·2, where V,
is based on Eqs. 4 I I· I and 4 I 1·2. Vc s h. 1i be compUlcd in
.ccordance wilh Secli on 4 11.1 3.2. 1, 411 . 13.2.2 or
shall nol be laken grealer Ihan ( 1/6) ).. F ".d, .nd V, shall
4 11 . 13_3.1. VJ: shall be computed in accordan ce with he calculatcd in accordance with Section 41 1.6 In Eq. 411 -
Section 41 1_13 .3. For slabs with shear heads, VII shall bc in 15 , A,. shall bc takcn as the cross-scctional area of all legs of
accordance with Section 41 1.13.4. Wh cn momcnt is
reinforcement on one peripheral line that is geometrically where ¢ is for tension-controlled members, 71 is the number
similar to the perimeter of the column section. of spearhead arms, and II' is the minimum length of each
shearhead ann required to comply with requirements o{
411.13.3.2 Vn shall not be taken greater than 0.5 Sections 41 1.13.4.7 and 41 I. 13.4.8.
) F, b" d.
411.13.4.7 The critical slab section for shear shall be
perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shatl cross each
411.13.3.3 The distance between the column face and the shearhead ann at three fourths the distance [I,. - (c,/2)] from
first line of of stirrup legs that surround the columns shall the column face to the end of the shearhead arm. The critical
not exceed d/2. The sparing between adjacent stirrups legs section shall be located so that its perimeter i>{) is a
in the first line of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 2d minimum, but need not be closer than the perimeter dellned
measured in a direction parallel to a1coiumn face. The in Section 41 L13. 1.2(1).
spacing between the successive lines of shear reinforcement
that surround the column shall not exceed dl2 measured in a
direction perpendicular to the column face. 411.13.4.8 VI! shall not be taken greater than (I/3) If:
bod, on the critical section defined in Section 41 J. J 3.4.7.
411.13.3.4 Slab shear reinforcement shall satisfy the When shearhead reinforcement is provided, VI! shall not be
anchorage requirements of Section 412.14 and shall engage
the longitudinal flexural reinforcement in the direction being
taken greater than 0.58 ff bod on the critical section
considered. defined in Section 41 L13. 1.2(1).
411.13.4 Shear reinforcement consisting of steel J- or 411.13.4.9 The moment resistance M,. contributed to each
channel- shaped sections (shearheads) shall be permitted in slab column strip computed by a shearhead shal! not be
slabs. The provisions of Sections 411.13.4.1 through taken greater than:
41 L13A.9 shall apply where shear due to gravity load is
transferred at interior column supports. Where moment is
transferred to columns, Section 41 L13.7.3 shall apply.
M
,
=¢a"v".(l
2 1/ '
_2) 2
(41142)
411.13.4.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes where ¢ is for tension-controlled members, 1} is the Humber
fabricated by welding with a full penetration weld into of arms, and I,. is the length of each shearhead arm actually
identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be provided. However, M,. shall not be taken larger than the
interrupted within the column section. smallest of:
the co ncrete cove r all the bottom Oe:Ulral reinforcement; (2) concentrated load or rcactlOn area and tangent to the
the concrete cove r on the head of the stud; and (3) one-half boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffecti ve.
the ba r diameter o f Ihe botlOrn flex ural rein fo rcement
41 J.l3 .6.2 For slabs with shearheads. the ineffective
411.13.5. 1 For the critical sect ion defin ed in Section portio n of the perimeter sh:t ll be one half of that defined in
4 11.1 3.1.2. V" shall be computed using Eq. 411 ·2. with V, Seclion 4 11 . 13.6.1
and V" nUl exceed in g O.25A~ b"d and O.66~ b"d.
respecti vely. V.I shall be calc ulated using Eq. 41 1- 15 with AI' 411.13.7 T ransfer of M o m ent in Slab-ColullllI
equal to th e cross-sectio nal area of all the shear Co nnections
reinforce ment on One periphe ral line that is approximmcl y
parall e l (0 the pc rimc te r of the co lumn section, whe re s is 4 11.1 3 .7. 1 Whe re gmv ily load, wind, earthqua ke or otht l
the spac ing o f the peripheral lines of headed shear stud lateral forces cause transfer of unba lanced moment. Mil,
between 11 slab and a column, a frac tion yptu of the
rein fo rcement. III" /(b.,<) sha ll not be less than 0. 17 ~. unba lilnced mo men t s ha ll be transferred by flcxu re in
accordance wit h Section 4 13.6.3. T he remai nder of the
411 .13.5.2 The spaci ng belween the column face a nd the unbalanced mome nt given by 'XMw shall be considered to be
first pe riphera l line of shear rein fo rcement sha ll nOI e xceed transfcrred by eccent ricity of shear about the cCIH roid of the
d12. The spaci ng be tween perip hera l lines of shear cri tical section defi ned in Section 4 J 1.13.1.2 where:
reinforcement . measured in a direct io n perpend icul ar 10 any
facc o f the co lumn, sha ll be constant. For prestressed slabs y,. = ( I ·)t) (411·43)
or foo tings satisfying Sec ti o n 4 11.13.2.2 . this spacing shall
not e xceed O.75d; fo r aJl ot her slabs ~lI1d footings, the 411. 13.7.2 The shear sU'css res ulting fro m mo me nt transfer
spac ing shall be based o n th e value o f Ihc shear slI'ess due to by eccentri c ity of shear sha ll be assu med to vary linearly
fac tored sh eilI' forcl! and unbalanced moment at the cri tical abo1l1 the centroid of th e crit ical sections defi ned in Sec tion
sec tio n defin ed in Sec tion 4 I J .13.1 .2, and shall not exceed: 4 J J .13. 1.2. The ma xim ulll shear stres s due to the factored
shear force. V" and mome nt . Mil shall no t e xceed ¢ V'I:
I. 0.75d whe re maxim um shear stresses du e (0 factored
I. For members wi thout shear rein forcement:
loads are less th an or eq ua l to O.5¢ ff,. ;and
2. 0.50d where maximum shear st resses due 10 f.lctored
¢\', = ¢(~) b,. d
(4 11·44 )
loads arc greater than O.5¢ ~. where V" is as defi ned in Section 411. 13.2. 1 or 4 11.13.2.2.
411.1 3.5.3 The spacing betwcen adjacent shear 2. For members with shear rei nforcement other than
reinforcement cleme nt s . measu red on the perimeter of the she:lrhcads:
first peripheral line of s hear reinforcement , shall not exceed
2d. I' +V )
¢Iv" ;::: ¢ - ' - - ' (411-45)
( b .. d
411.13 .5.4 She<lr stress du e to factored shear fOfce cll1d
mo ment shall not ex(,;eed O. 1 7¢ A~ at the c rit ica l
where Vc and Vs arc de ti ned in Secti o n 4 11.13. 3.1. If shear
re inforce ment is prov ide d, the des ign sha ll take in to account
sec ti on located d/2 outside the ou termost peripheral line of th e vari ati on of shear s lre~s around th e column . The shear
shear re inforceme nt. stress due to factored shear fo rcc and moment shall not
exceed 0. 17(12 ~ til the c ritical sectioll localed tin
411.1 3.6 O penin gs in Slabs
outside Ihe olltermost linc o( the st ilTIiP legs that surround
Whcn openings in slabs afe locmed at ::1 di stance less than 10 the colullIll.
times the slab thickness from a concentrated load or reacl ion
area, or when openings in n at Slilbs are located wi thi n 411.U.7.3 Whe n shear reinforccment consisting of s teel 1-
co lumn strips as defined in Sec ti on 4 13, the critical slab nr channel-shaped sectiolls (shcarhcads) is provided. the
sec tions for shear defined in Section 41 1. 13. 1.2 and Section sum of the shc<lr stresses due to ve ni ca l 1 0~l d ac ting on thc
4 I 1. 13.4 .7 sholl be modi fi ed as fo ll ows: critic'll section defined by Secti on 4 11. 13.4 .7 <lnd the sheHf
stresses resuiting from momClll transferred by ecce ntricity
4 11.13.6.1 For slabs withou t shcarheads. that pan of the of shcaf :JbOllt the centroid o( the cri ti cal section defined in
pcrimeter of the c ritical section that is enclosed by stra ight
li ncs projc(,;ting fro m the ccntro id of the col umn.
h
Nati on al S tru ctura l Code of thr-J P hilippines G: EcJ ilion Vo lumo 1
4 ·70 CHAPTEF! ~ . Concrete
412.1 Notations
=- area of <In indi vidual bar or wire, 111m2
= net bearing area of the head of stud . anchor bolt, or
2
head ed dcfonncd bar, mlll
A, ;::: area of Ilonprcstrcsscd IO!lgitudinal tension
2
reinforce ment, mm
::::; toral cross-sectional area of all transverse
reinfo rcement which is within the spacing .\' and
w hi ch c rosses the potential pJane of splilling
through the reinforcement being developed , 111m2
= web width. Or diameter of circula r section, mm
= small er of: (1) the distance from center of a bar or
wire lO the nearest concrete su rface, and (2) onc-
hal f the cenlcr-to-ccnter sp<lcing o f bnrs or wires
being developed, mill. Sec Sec ti on 412.3.4
rI ;::: distan ce from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of tension reinforce ment, mm
:::: nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing
strand, mm
i, :::: specified compressive stre ngth of concrete, MPa
r:t<Jius of bend and one har diameter), 111111 . Sec 412.3 Development of Defor med Bars and Deformed
SCClioll 412.6 Wire in Tension
Idl ;; development length in tension of headed deformed
bar, measured from the critical sec tion to the 412.3.1 Developmentlcnglh, Iii. in lenns of diameter, db, for
bearing face of the head, mm. See Seclion 412.7 deformed bars and deformed wire in lension shall be
Mil ;; nominal moment strength at secti on, N~mm dctcrmined from either Section 412 .3.2 or 412.3.3 and Ihe
= AIr(d· al2) app licable modification factors of Section 412.3.4 and
N ;; number of bars in a "lyer being spliced or 4 12.3.5, but I,{ shall not be less th an 300 mil).
developed at a critical section
n ;; number of bars or wires being spli ced or developed 412.3.2 For deformed bars or deformed wi rc, lei sh.al! be as
.along the plane of spl itting follows:
s ;; cen ter-Io-center spacing of items, such as
longitudinal reinforcement, transverse ffi20 mill bars <Ind
reinforcement , prestrc.'ising tendons, wires, or 1i125 nun bars and
sma ller mid
larger
(Illchors, min deformed wi res
$... ;; spacing of wire 1O be developed or spliced, Jlllll C!car spilcint of bars
V., = factored shear force al section, N beillg dcvclol>cd or
~pl i ce d 1101 less Ihan
p" ;; ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area
d~. cleilr cover nOI less
of tens ion reinforcement at section. Ilwn (I". ;md stirrups or
f'V'~)d /.
). == modification factor reflecting the reduced lies (hroughout 1.1 not
mechanical properties of lightweight COl1crel:c. all less lhall the code ( ( /;/f,V', }
minimum 2.1J.J"T:
relativc to normal-weight concrcte of the same
01
lUff: "
co mpressi ve strength. See Sections 412.3.4(4) and Clear spacing of bars
4 12.6.2 being developed or
= factor used to modify devclopmellt length based on spliced nOI tess lhun
rei nforccmcnt coating, see Section 412.3.4 2dl , and clear cover
.... ~.9Llcss than (h
= factor used to modify development leilgth bas(!d Oil
=
reinforcement size, see Section 412.3.4
rnctor used 10 modify development length based on Olher Ca~C"~
1 [_ I,.VI,VI, _ }
IA:t fj, "
[ I,·",",
lI:tff "
}I
reinforcement location, see Section 412.3.4 I
;; faclOr used to modify developme nt length for
welded deformed wi re reinforcement in tcnsio n,
412.3.3 For deformed bars or deformed wi re. 1,/ shal l be:
sec Section 412.8
(4 12· 1)
412.20cvclopmen( of Reinforccmenl- General
the development JCIlgth or splice, IjII :;: 1.3. For other 412.5.2 For determining the appropriate spacing and COV':'::r
situations, !f/I = 1.0; values in Section 412.3.2, the confinement term in :·>'~[i'.m
412.3.3, and the Vir factor in Section 412.3.'1U), a ;)f
2. For epoxy-coated bars or wires with cover less than
bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar 01' a JiiliiiU ; .~J.'
3(h, or clear spacing less than 6db , VIe ::;: 1.5. For all
derived from the equivalent total area and having a (:,:ntn ,d
other epoxy-coated bars or wires, VIe:::: 1.2. For
that coincides with that of the bundled bars.
uncoated and zinc-coated (galvanized)
reinforcement, l.fIt ::;:: J .0. However, the product VI/Vie
need not be greater than 1.7; 412.6 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension
3. Fc.>! ta20 mill bars and smaller and dcfonncd wires, VIs
412.6.1 Development length 1"'1 in 111m for deformed b;1!'~' . 'I
;:;:; 0.80. For 25 mill diameter and larger bars;
tension terminating in a standard hook (see S(;clioll -'107 .~),
4. 'Ils:= l.0; and shall be determined from Section 412.6.2 and the.
modification factor or factors of Section 4JX6.) ~;:!;,
5. Where lightweight concrete is used, A shall not
: shall not be less than 8(h or less than 150 mill.
exceed 0.75 unless fc, is specified (see Section 408.7).
Where normal-weight concrete i~ used, A.::;: 1.0.
412.6.2 For deformed bars. idb shall be (024\11, i.l) II:;) ,;
with IfIr taken as 1.2 for epoxy~coated reinfo!\'cmc!!L :Ul(i
412.3.5 Excess Reinforcement
taken as 0.75 for lightweight concrete. For odlcr C:1:;'-.:5, ~o'
Reduction in development length shall be permitted where and) shall be taken as J .0.
rcinforcemcIH in a flexural member is in excess of that
required by analysis except where anchorage or 412.6.3 Length ldh in Section 412.6.2 shall be penniHed t(:
development for 1;. is specifically required or the be multiplied by the following applicable factors:
reinforcement is designed under provisions of Section
421.3.1.5 .. « ... «.... [(As.lequil"l:d}/(As.provided)] 1. For 36 mm bar diameter and smaller honks \'.'i(h sick.
cover normal to plane of hook) not less than h.i Inm,
and for 90~degree hook with cover 0)) . :,1' C.\\C; :;iu::
412.4 Development of Deformed Bars in Compression beyond hook not less than :-)0 Ifj)i)
............ n. 'j
412.4.1 Development length for deformed bars and
deformed wire in compression, {dc> shall be determined from 2. For 90-degree hooks of f1l36 mm bars an,' ~:i)r ::", 111::'
Section 4! 2.4.2 and applicable modification factors of are either enclosed within ties or stirrups I :'l"f)( "·<lieu);',,
Section 4 I 2.4.3, but Ide shall not be less than 200 mIn. to the bar being developed, spaced not gr(';' i.j !iJan 3(/;.
along [dll; or enclosed within ties or stiln'p~: pa:;;1!el If
412.4.2 For deformed bars and deformcd wire, I'k shall be the bar being developed, spaced not gr('~lin th;m 3rJ"
along the length of the tail extension or () !lOoL plu::
taken as the larger of (0.24f,/ Je.jT:) d" and (0.043/,) d"
bend
with). as given in Section 412.3.4 (4). ... .cHi
412.4.3 Length ide in Section 412.4.2 shall be permitted to 3. For ISO-degree hooks of 036 mm bars and :;malk: !h<:.
be multiplied by the applicable factors for: arc enclosed within ties or stirrups perpcn!l:culal io thr
bar being developed, spaced not greate)" 1r!, ; ,1(;)).:
1. Reinforcement in excess of that required by analysis
...................................................... (As required)/(A provided)
Where anchorage or development r
j
4. I,
2. Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not specifically required, reinforcement in (',
less than 6 mrn diameter and not more than 100 mOl required by analysis .. .... (As It":"
pitch or within 12 mm diameter ties in conformance
(' with Section 407.11.5 and spaced at not more than 100 In Sections 412.6.3 (2) and 412.6.30). db is IL. ',"',ICltr c:
111m on center . ..... 0.75 the hooked bar, and the first tie or stirrup ,shall l"-lld(!:;e til·
bent portion of the hook, within 2db of the m<:,ide of III
412.5 Development of Bundled Bars bend.
412.5.1 Development length of individual bars within a 412.6.4 For bars being developed by a stil:,,:< itO)K ;'
bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that for the discontinuous ends of members with side COV('T :md lnp (r::
individual bar, increascd 20 percent for 3-bar bundle, and 33 bottom) cover over hook less than 65 mill . .]:(: ,;
percent for 4-bar bundle. shall be enclosed within ties or stirrups peli
bar being developed, spaced not greater th,nl :)\';, ilL ro[; i,:
The first tic or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the Section 412.3.2 or 412.3.3, times welded deformed wire
hook, within 2 (h of the outside of the bend, where db is reinforcement factor, If/k" from Section 412.8.2 or 412.8.3. It
diameter of hooked bar. For this case, the factors of shall be permitted to reduce the development length in
Sections 412.6.3 (2) and (3) shaU not apply. accordance with Section 412.3.5 when applicable, but id
shall not be less than 200 mm except in computation of lap
412.6.5 I-looks shall not be considered effective in splices by Section 412.19. When using the welded deformed
developing bars in compression. wire reinforcement factor, If/w, from Section 412.8.2, it shall
be permitted to use an epoxy-coating factor, If/(, of 1.0 for
epoxy-coated welded deformed wire reinforcement in
412.7 Development of Headed alld Mechanically
Sections 412.3.2 and 412.3.3.
Anchored Deformed Bars in Tension
412.8.2 For welded deformed wire reinforcement with at
412.7.1 Development length for headed deformed bars in
least one cross wire within the development length, ld and
tension, llil' shall be delermined from Section 412.7.2. Use
not less than 50 mm from the point of the critical section,
of heads to develop defonned bars in tension shall be
the welded deformed wire reinforcement factor shall be the
limited to conditions satisfying (I) through (6):
greater of:
I. Bar/, shall not exceed 415 MPa;
2. Bar size shall not exceed f?J36 mm;
3. Concrete shall be normal-weight;
4. Net bearing area of head A brg shall not be less than 4A/!; but need not be taken greater than 1, where s is the spacing
between the wires to be developed.
5. Clear cover for bar shall not be less than lit/>; and
6. Clear spacing between bars shall not be less than 4(h. 412.8.3 For welded deformed wire reinforcement with no
cross wires within the devclopment length or with a single
cross wire less than 50 mm from the point of the critical
412.7.2 For headed deformed bars satisfying Section
section, the wire fabric factor shall be taken as 1, and the
{dl shall be (0.191.f/~/
403.6.9, development length in tension
m: )d", where the value of J/ used to calculate i",
shall
deve!opment length shall be determined as for deformed
wire.
not exceed 40 MPa, and faclor !fI~ shall be taken as 1.2 for
epoxy~coated reinforcement and 1.0 for other cases. Where 412.8.4 When allY plain wires, or defonned wircs larger
reinforcemcnt providcd is in cxcess of that required by than 16 mm diameter, are present in the weldcd deformcd
analysis, except where development of ;;, is specifically wire reinforcement in the direction of the development
required, a factor of (AJ required)/(AJ" provided) may be length, the reinforcement shall be developed ill accordance
applied to the expression for (It. Length {"I shall not be less with Scction412.9.
than the larger of Sd/! and! 50 mm.
412.7.3 Heads shall not be considered effective in 412.9 Development of Welded Plain Wire
developing bars in compression . Reinforcement in Tension
412.7.4 Any mechanical attachment or devicc capable of 412.9.1 Yield strength of welded plain wire reinforcement
developing!;. of reinforcement is allowed, provided that test shall be considered developed by embedment of two cross
results showing the adequacy of such attachment or device wires with the closer cross wire not Icss than 50 mm from
are approved by the building official. Development of the point of the critical section. However, the development
reinforcement shall bc pcrmitted to consist of a combination length fd , ill millimeters, shall not be less than:
of mechanical anchorage plus additional embedment length
of reinforcement between the critical section and the (412·3)
mechanical attachment or device.
412.8 Development of Welded Deformed Wire Where ttl is measured from thc point of the critical section to
Reinforcement in Tension the outermost cross wire, s is thc spacing between the wires
to be developed, and .,tas given in Section 412.3.4 (4).
412.8.1 Devc!opment length of weldcd deformed wire Where reinforcement provided is in excess of that required,
reinforcement in tension, ttl, in millimeters, measured from this length may be reduced in accordance with Section
the point or critical section to thc end of wire shall be 412.3.5. Length td shall not be less than 150 mm except in
computed as the product of the dcvelopmcnt length td , from computation of lap splices by Section 412.20.
412.10 Development of Prestressing Strand 412.11.5 Flexural reinforccment shal l not be tennin(l.lcd in a
tension zone unless one of the following conditions is
412.10.1 Excep t as provided in Section 4 I 2. 10.1.1, seven· satisfied:
wire s trand shall be bonded beyond the critical section , a
di stance not less than: 412.11.5.1 V. at the eu tofT point docs not exceed (213) 9>V, .
f
"
= ( i ") d
21
+( i p, -
7
i" )d " (412-4) 412.11.5.2 Stirrup area in excess of that requircd for shear
II
and torsion is provided along each terminated bar or wire
over a di stance from the tenn ination poi nt eqllal to three
Expressions in parentheses are used as co nslants wllhou( fOUl1hs the effecti ve depth of member. Excess slirrup area
units, where db is strand di ameter in millimeters. and.!;,.. and A,_ shall not be less than 0.4 I b,..s i" _Spacing s shull not
fJr <lfC expressed in MPa. exceed dl(8/3b) where Pb is the ratio of area of reinforcement
cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at the sec tion.
412.10.1.1 Embedment less than Id shall be permitted at a
sectioJl of a member provided the design strand stress at Ihal 412.11.5.3 For 1lI36 mm bar alld smaller, continuing
section docs not exceed values ob tained from the bi linear rei nforcement provides dou ble the area required for flexure
relationship defined by Eq . 412-4 . at the cutoff point and V. docs not exceed (3f4)9>V,.
412.10.2 Limiting fh e investigation 10 cros s sections nearest 412.11.6 Adequate anc horage shall be provided for tensiOIl
each end of {he me mber that arc required to develop full reinforcement in nex ural members where reinforce ment
design strength under specified factored loads shall be stress is not directl y propo rt ional to moment. such as sloped,
permitted except where bonding of one or marc strands docs stepped or tapered foo tings; brackets; deep flex ural
not extcnd to the end of (he member. or whcre conce ntrated members; or members in which tension rei nforcemen t is not
loads arc aprlied with in the strand development length. parallel to compression facc. See Sections 412.12.4 and
41 2. 13.4 for deep fl ex ural members .
412.10.3 Where bonding of a strand docs not ex tend to end
of member, and design includes tension at service load in
pre-compressed [ensile zone as permined by Section 412.12 Development of Positive Moment Reinforcement
418.5.2 . development length. Id specified in Secti on
4 I 2.1 0.1 shall be do ub led . 412.12.1 A t least one third the positive moment
reinforcement in simple members and one fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in con tinuous members shall
412.11 Development of n exu ra l Reinfo rcement - General extend along the sa me face of member into the sup port. In
beams. sllch reinforce men t shall ex tend illlo the suppOrt at
412.1 I.J Devclopment of tension rcinforccn1cIlI by bending least 150 mill.
across the web to be anch ored or mad e con tinuou s with
fcinrorccm~nl on the opposite fnee of me mber shall be 412.12.2 When a flexural membe r is part of a primary
perlnitlcd. lateral-load-resisting system, positive moment rein force-
ment required to be extended into the support by' Section
412.11.2 Critical sect ions for devclopment o f reinforcement 412. 12. I shall be anchored to develop the specified yield
in nexural mcmbers nfe at points of maximum stress and at strength/I. in tension at the face of suppo rt.
points wi th in the spa n whe re adjacent reinforcement
termina tes or is ben I. Provisions of Section 412.12.3 must 412.12.3 At simple supports and at points of inncction.
be satisfi ed . positive moment tension reinforcement shall be limited to a
diameter such that ld computed for 1;. by Section 412.3
412.11.3 Reinforce mcnt sh<lll ex tend beyond the point flt satisfies Eq. 4 12-5, except Eq. 41 2-5 need not be sati sfi ed
which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a dista nce for reinforcement terminating beyond center line of simpk
equal to the cfTccl ivc depth of melllber or 12dl " whichever is SUPPOf1S by a standard hook or a mechani cal anchorage at
greater. exccpt at ~ tlppon s of si mpl e spans and at free end of Icast cq ui va lent to a stand ard hook.
canti levers.
M
I,,$-
"+f
412.11.4 Conti nuing reinforcement shall have an VII "
embedment length Il ot less than the development length //(
beyond the point where bent or terminated tension
reinforce ment is 110 longe r required to resist ncxure.
where: 412.14.2.1 For III I 6 mm bar and MD 200 wire, and smaller,
and for 000 mm and 1lI25 mm bars wil h !,., of 280 MPa or
:\ M" is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the section
to be stressed to /y; less, a standard stimlp hook around longitudinal
reinforcement.
Vu is calculated at the section;
fa at a support shall be the embedment length beyond 412.14.2.2 For !ll20 rnm and 025 mill stirrups with.!;.( greater
center of support; or tiian 280 MPa, a standard stirrup hook around a
longitudinal bar plus an embedment between mid-height of
fa at a point of inOcction shall be limited to the effective the member and the outside end of the hook equal to or
depth of member or l2(h. whichever is greater.
grealer.lhan 0.17dJ,.,
An in crease of 30 percent in the value of M,/Vu shall be A.[f:
permitted when the ends of reinforccmclH are confined by a
compressive reaction. 412.14.2,3 For each leg of welded smool h wire fabric
forming simple U-stirrups, either:
412.12.4 AI simple suppons of deep fl exu ral members,
I. Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 50 mm spacing
positive moment te nsion reinforcement shall be anchored to
along Ihe member al Ihe lOp of Ihe U; or
develop the specified yield strength h in tension at the face
of support except that jf design is canied out using Section 2. One longitudinal wire located not marc than d/4 from
427, the positive moment tension reinforcement shall be the compression face and a second wire closer to the
anchored in accordance with Section 427.4.3. At interior compression face and spaced not less than 50 mm from
supports of deep beams, positive moment tension the first wire. The second wire shall be permitted to be
reinforcement shall be continllous or be spliced with that of localed on Ihe slirrup leg beyond a bend, Or on a bend
the adjacent spans. with an inside diameter of bend not less than 8db.
412.14 De\'elopmenf of 'Veb Reinforcement 412.14.5 Pairs of U-stirrups or tics so placed as to for m a
closed unit shall he consi de red properly spl iced when
412.14.1 Web reinrorcement shall be carried as close to length s of laps arc 1.31//. In members .It Icast 450 111m deep.
comprc~s·i{)n <l nd tension surfaces of member as cover such splices with AJ,./ not more than 40 kN per leg may be
requirements and proximity of other reinforcement pcnllit:-;. co n$ide red adequate if stirnlj) legs extend the fu ll avai lable
depth of member.
412.14.2 Ends of single leg, simple U- or multiple U-
stirrups :-ohall be anchored as required by the following:
th
National Structural Code of Ule Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4-76 CHAPTER 4 - Concrete
412.16.6 Sp li ces in tension lie members sha ll be m ade with if one half or fewer of the bars are spl iced at an y sec tion and
a fuJI mechani cal o r full welded splice in accordance with alternate Jap splices are staggered by 'd'
Secti o ns 412.15.3 .2 or 412.15.3.4 and splices in adjacent
bars shall be staggered at least 750 mill. 412.18.2.3 Where the bar stress due to factored loads is
grea ter than 0.5 h in te nsio n, lap splices shall be Class B
tension lap splices.
412.17 Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression
412.18.2.4 In tied rei nfo rced com press ion members, where
412. 17.1 Com prcssion lap splice length shall be 0.07 1fA . .
lies throughou t the lap splice length have an effective area
for 1,. of 420 MP. or less, or (0.13 I, - 24) d. for 1,. g,,;,ner
not less than 0.0015hs, lap splice le ngt h shall be permitted
thall 4 15 MPa. but nol less than 300 mill. For fo less than
to be Illu lti plied by 0.83, but lap length shall not be less th an
2 J M P'l, length of lap shall be increased by one third.
300 mill. Tie legs perpend icul ar to dimension" shall be
lI sed in determining effecti ve area.
412.17.2 When bars of different size are lap spli ced in
compress io n, splice length shall be the larger I",., of la rger
412.18.2.5 In spirally reinforced compression members, lap
bar Hl1d co mpression lap splice length of smaller bar. Lap
splice length of bars within a spiral sha ll be permitted to be
spli ces of 42 and 58 mill diamete r bars to 36 mm di ameter
multipl ied by 0.75, but lap le ngth shall not be less than 300
;md smaller bars shall be pcr milted .
mm .
412. 17 .3 Welded sp lices or mechanical connect ions lIsetl in
compression shall meet requirements of Sections 4 12. 15•.3.3 412.18.3 Welded Splices o r Mechanical Connectors in
an d 4 12 . 15.3.4. Columns
412.17.4 E nd-Bearing Splices Welded splices or mechanical connectol"!i in columns sha ll
meet the req uireme nt s of Secti on 4 12.15.3.3 o r 4 12. 15 .3 .4 .
412.17.4.1 Tn bars requ ired fo r co mpression (J·n])'.
transmissio!l of compressive stress by bearing of square cut
ends held in concentric co ntact by a suita ble device shal! bc 412.18.4 End-hearing Splices in Columns
pcnnittcd. End-beari ng spli ces complying wi th Secti on 41 2.17.4 shall
be permitted 10 be used fo r colum n bars stressed in
412.1 7 .4.2 Bar cnds shall (ermin,lIc in nat surfaces wi th in co mp ression provided the splices are staggered or add iti onal
1.5 degrees of a right ang le to the u;.; is of the bars and shall bars nrc provided at splice locat ions. The conti nui ng bars in
be filled within 3 degrees of fu ll bearing after assembly. each fa ce o f Ihe column shall have a tensile st rength, based
0 11 the specified yield strength h., not less tha n 0.25/1, limes
412.17.4.3 End-bearing splices shall be used only in the area of the vert ical rein fo rce mcnt in that facc.
me m hers containing closed tics. closed sti rrups or spirals.
412.19 Splices of \-\'cldcd Dcfornwd Wire
412.18 Spedal Spikes Requiremcnts for Columns Reinforcemcnt in Tension
412.HU Lilp s pl ices, bult we lded spi kes, mcchnni cal 412.19.1 Mi nimulll lengt h o f lap fo r 1,1)) splicc..... o f wel ded
co nnecti ons or end-beari ng splices shall be used wi th the de formed wi re fabl;c measu red be tween the ends o f each
limi tations of Sect ions 4 12. J 8.2 through 412. ! 8.4. A spl ice fabric sheet shall not be less th an 1.3/d or 200 mm. and the
shnll satisfy req uiremcnts for all load cOJllb in:ltiOlls for the ovcrhlp measured between ou termos t eros!'; wi res of each
column. fabric sheet shall not be less than 50 mill, I" shall be the
deve lop men t le ngth for Ihe .specificd yield stre ngth 1.~. in
accorda nce with Secti on 4 12 .R.
4 J 2.1 H.2 Lap Spikes ill Columns
412.19.2 Lap spli ces of wel ded deform ed wire
4q.1H. 2.1 Where th e bar stress du e (l factored l()l1d ~, is rei n foru' lllcnt , with no cross wires within the lap splice
r ()!llprl~ss i ve . lap sp lices sha ll co nform 10 S~~c ti o ns 4! 2. 17. 1
Ic.n gth . shall be determined as for (kf"onn cd wire.
and 412.17 .2. and where :lp pl it~ab!e, to Sec tio n 4 J 2.1 X.2 ,ll or
"II ~ . I K25 . 412.19.3 Where any pl aul wires, or de formed wi res large r
nl
Nafiondl SIIUctt ll"i" ll Co cle of the PhilipPIi"l (-!-s G Edition Vol\l1"t1(·: 1
4·78 CHAPTEI'4·· Concrete
1h
National StllJCturai Code of tile PhilipPines 6 Edition Volume '1
4·80 CHAPTEI1 4 . Concrole
Figure 413-1 Extensions for Reinforcements in Slabs without Beams (Sec Section 412.! 2. J for reinforcement extension int n
supports)
MINIMUM As
STRIP LOCATION WITH DROP PANELS
0
0,301n 0,331n
50%
TOP
REMAINDER
COLUMN
STRIP
BonOM 100%
Splices shall be
least two bars
permitted in this region
or wires shall 1111
conform 10 13,3,6.5 I
MIDDLE
STRIP 50%
BOnOM 150 mm Max. 0.151. Max. 0.151.
REMAINDER
Face of support
Cenler to center Center to center span
It It
Extenor support Intenor support Ext 101
(No slab continuity) (Continuity provided) (No s!ab ml1lll'''lII,
413.4.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to .\ 4 13.4.8 Delails of Reinforcement in Slabs without Beams
discontinuous edge shall ex tend (0 the edge of slnb aud ha ve
embedment, straight or hooked, at leasl 150 !l1l11 in spandrel 413.4.8.1 In addition to the other requirements of Section
beams, columns or walls. 413.4, reinforcement in slabs without beams shall have
min im um cxtensions as prescribed in Figure 41 3- 1.
413.4.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to II
discontinuolls edge shall be bent, hooked or otherwise 413.4.8.2 Where adjacent spans are unequal, extension of
llllchored, in spandrel beams, co luillns or walls, to be ncgative moment reinforcement beyond the face of support
developed at f;lce of StJPPOJ1 according to provisions of as prescribed in Figure 4 I 3-1 shall be based on requiremcnts
Section 412. of longer spa n.
413.4.5 Where a slab is nOI s li pPol1ed by a spandrel beam 413.4.8.3 Ilelll bars shall be pennilled only when dcplh-
or W,lJl at <1 discontinuous edge or where a slab cMti levers span ratio pennils use of bends 45 degrees or less.
beyond [he support, anchorage of reinforcement shall be
permitted within the slab. 413.4.8.4 In framcs where two-way slabs act as primary
members reSisting lateral loads, lcngths of reinforcement
413.4.6 At exte rior corners of slabs su pported by edge shall be delcnnined by analysis but shall not be less than
walls or where onc or mOre edge beams have a value of 0., those prescribed .in Figure 413-1.
greater than 1.0, lOp and bottom slab reinforcement shall be
provided at exterior comers in accordance wi th Secti ons 413.4.8.5 All bo([om bars or wires within the column strip.
413.4.6. llhrough 413.4 .6.4 : in each direction, shall be continuous or spliced with Class
B splices or with mechanical or welded splices satisfying
413.4.6.1 Corner reinforcement in both top and bottom of Seclion 412.15.3. Splices shall be located as shown in
slab s hall be sufficien t to resist a moment equal 10 the Figure 413-1. At least two of the column strip bOllom bars
maximulTl positive moment (per meIer of width) in the slab or wires in each direction shall pass within thc regio n
panel. bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column
and shall be anchored at ex terior SUpp0l1S .
413.4.6.2 Tile lllomelH shall be assumed to be about an axis
perpe ndi cular to the diagonal from the corner in the lap of 413.4.8.6 In slabs with shearheads and in lifl·slab
the slab and about an axis parallel to the diagonal from the construclion where it is not practical to pass the bottom bars
corner in the bottom of the slab. reql~red by Section 413.4.8.5 Lhrough the column, at least
(wo bonded bOllom bars or wires in each direction shall pass
413.4 .6.3 Corner reinforce ment shall be provided for a through the shea rh ead or lifting collar as close to the column
distance in each direction from the corner equal 10 one-fifth as pract icable and be co ntinuous or spliced with a Class A
th e longer span. splice. At ex terior columns, the reinforcement shall be
.mchored at the shearhead or lifting foHnL
413.4.6.4 ConteI' r~inrorcc mcill shall be pl<1ccd parallel 10
the diagollul in the lOp of the slab and perpendicular [0 the
413.5 Openings in Slab Systems
diagonal in the hallom of the slab. Alternatively, the special
reinforcement Sh ;'l ll be placed ill two layers pilrallcl 10 the
413.5.1 Openings of any siz.e shall be permitted in slab
sides of the slab in both the top and h0l10111 of the sl ab .
sys tems if shown by analysis lhal the desi gn strength is at
least equal 10 the sirength considering Sections 409.3 and
413.4.7 When n drop panel is used to reduce the a!llount of
409.4, and that all serviceabil it y condi tions. including the
negative moment reinforcemcnt over the column of a flat
s pecified Iimil.'\ on deflcclions .• Ire mel.
:-;Iab, the tiilllCIlSiolls of thc drop panel shall be in accordance
wilh Section 41 :t3.5. In computing required slab
413.5 .2 As (11) altcrnate In spcciill analysis ns required by
rcinforcclllcllI. the thickness of the drop panel below the
Section 413 ..1 .1, openings shall be permitlcd ill slab syslems
shih shall not be ilSSlIlIlCtl 10 be greatcr than one-quar:er Ik
wiLhout bt. . ams only in ,lccnrdancc with Ihe follow i ng:
<.I ist,mcc from lhe edge or drop pa nel 10 the r<l cc 01 the
column or coillmil capital.
413.5.2.1 Ope nings or <l ilY size shall be permitted in th e area
co I)) ll10nto illtl~rs('clin g mid dle strips, provided lOla! alllOunt
or reinfo rce ll'lcnt rt.'q uircd for Ihc pand withollt the opening
b ma intaincd.
4 -82 CHAPTEIi 4 - Concreto
413.5.2.2 In the area co mmo n to intersecting column stlips, onc~half slab or drop panel thickness (1.511) outside opposi te
flot more than onc-eighth the width of column strip in either faces of the column or c"pilal, where Mil is the moment to
span shall be interrupted by openings. An amou nl of be transferred and
reinforcement equ ivalent to thaI intermptcd by an opening
sha ll be added on the sides of Ihe opening. (4 13- 1)
413.5.2.4 Shear requirements of Section 411.13.6 shall be I .• For edge columns with unb~llanced moments about an
satisfied. an axis parallel to the edge, It = 1.0 provided that Vu at
an edge support docs not excced O.75¢V,. or al a comer
support does not exceed 0.5q,V,..
413.6 Design Procedures
2. For unbalanced moments al interior SUppOI1S. and for
413.6.1 A slab system shal! be desig ned by any procedu re edge co lumns with unbalanced momcnts about an axis
snl is fyi ng conditi ons of equilibrium and geomet ric transverse to the edge, inc rea se '}f to as much as 1.25
compati bilit y, jf shown that the design strengt h at every ti mes the value from Eq, 413 ~ 1 , but not more than '}j=
section is at l ea~t equal to the required strength set fo nh in 1.0, provided that V" at the su pport docs !lot exceed
Sec ti ons 409.3 and 409.4 and that all serviceab ility O.4<pVf . The net tensi le strain CI' ca lculated for the
co nditi o ns. including limits on defl ec ti ons, arc mel. effective slab width ciefined in Section 413.6.3.2, shall
not bc less than 0 .0 I O.
413.6.1.1 Desig n of a slab system for gravity loads
in clud in g th e slab and beams. if any, between supports and The value of V,. in items ( I) and (2) shall be cakul31cd in
supporting co lumns or walls forming orthogo na l fr amcs. by accordance wi th Section 411. 13.2.1.
ei lhe r the Direct Design Method of Section 413.7 or the
Equiva le nt Frame Method of Section 413 .8, shall be 413.6.3.4 Concentration of rcinfo rceme nt over {he col um n
pc nn iucd . by closer spaci ng or additional rein forcemc lll shall be used
to rcsist moment 011 the effcclive slnb width defined in
41 3.6.1.2 For lateral loads. analysis of frames shall takc into Section 413.6.3.2.
nccount effects of cracking and reinforcemcnt on stiffness of
frame me mbers. 41 3.6.4 Design for tranxfcr of IO:lci fmm sl;'!h to sllppon ing
columns or wiJlIs through shcm' ;lI1d torsion xll.1l1 he in
4) 3.6.1.3 Combining the resuils of the gravity load unalysis accordance with Section 41 I.
with the results of the latcral load analysis shall be
pcrmillcd.
413.7 Di rect Design Method
413.6.2 Thc slab and beams. if any, betwccn suppmls shall
be proportioned for factored moments prevailing al evcry 413,7.1 Limitati on s
section.
Design of slab xys rcms within the following limil<ltim}s hy
the direct design method sh.lI l he permitted:
413.6.3 When gravity load. wind , earthquake or other latcr,,1
forces c<luse transfer of moment between slab a nd co lumn. tI 413.7.1.1 There sh;:tl i he a mi nimum of Ihree c'OIui m',,"
f:-<tClioll of the unbalanced moment shall hc transferred by sp.IIlS in each direction.
flexure in accordance wi th Sections 413.6,3 ,2 and 4 13 .6.1.4 .
4[3.7. 1.2 P:lIlcis shall be rectangular. with it ratio or lungc'"
10 shorter span cenlcr~lo ~cc l1lcr supports within it pant:! no;
413,6.:t l Fra ction of unbalanced moment 110t transferred
greater than 2.
by ncx.ure shall he transfcrred hy eccentric it y of shc:lr in
accordance with Secl ion 4 11 . 13.7. 413.7.1.3 Successive span lengthS ccntcHo·ccnh-r SI! l'Y":··
ill each directio n s hall not differ hy more tlt'"II1 olH>lh ild i~ .. ;
4J3.6,3 .2 A rnlctioll of thc unhahlllccd momcn l given longer sp.m.
by Yr M" sha ll be considered to be Inlnsfcrred hy flexur e
wi th in an cfl'l.!ctivc slab width between lines thaI arc one and
413.7.1.4 Offset of columns by a maximum of I() percent of polygon-shaped supports shall be treated as square supports
the span in direction of offset from either axis between with the same area.
center lines of successive columns shall be permitted.
413.7.1.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and 413.7.3 Neg::ltive and Positive Factored Moments
uniformly distributed over <1n entire panel. Live load shall
not exceed two times dead load. 413.7.3.1 Negative factored moments shall be located at
face of rectangular supports. Circular or regular polygon-
413.7.1.6 For a panel with beams between supports on an shaped supports shall be treated a,s square supports with the
sides, the relative stiffness of beams in two perpendicular same area.
dircclions.
413.7.3.2 In an interior span, total static moment Mo sha!l
(413-2) bc distributeci'<ls follows:
Negati ve factored moment 0.65
shall not be less than 0.2 nor greater than 5.0, whereOfJ and Positive factored moment ................... 0.35
Qj2 are calculated in accordance with Equation (413-3).
413.7.3.3 In an end span, total factored static moment M"
(413-3) shall be distributed as foHows:
·... _---,. (t) (2) (3) -r(4)- --""'-
(5)
Slabs Slab without
413.7.1.7 Moment redistribution as permitted by Section with Beams between
Exterior Exterior
408.5 shall not be applied for slab systems designed by the Edge
I3c~l.It1s Interior SllP[X)rts Edge Fully
between Without With
Direct Design Method. See Section 413.7.7. Unrcs(r~incd
All
Restrained
Edge &lge
Supp\)n~
I
N8!1onal Structural Cocl(:; of tile PlliJipplncs G!' E:dllion Voluille 1
4 ·84 CHAPTER -I. Concrete
(a",,'!,)1 1.0 90 75 45
413.7.5.2 For values o f (a,l ,II,) between 1.0 and zero,
Linear interpolations shall be made between va lues s hown. proportion of column strip momellts resisted by beams sha ll
be obtained by linear interpo lation belwcen 85 and zero
4 13.7.4.2 Colull1n strips shall be proportioned to res ist th e percent.
follow ing percen tage of ex.tenor negative factored moments:
4 13.7.5.3 In additi on to moments calculated for uniform
I,ll, 0.5 1.0 2.0 loads according to Sections 413 .7.2.2. 413.7 .1.1 and
413.7 .5.2, beams shall be proportioned 10 res ist "lI mo mellls
p,~o lao 100 100 ca used by concentrated or linea r loads applied directly to
(a,/,II,) ~ 0 beams, including weight of proj ec ting beam stem above or
(f,,, 2.5 75 75 75
below the slab.
(f, ~ 0 100 100 100
(a,/,II,)/ 1.0
/f,:> 2.5 90 75 45 413.7.6 Factored MOlll en ts in Middl e St ri ps
Linear interpolations shal l be made between values shown, 4 13.7.6.1 T hat portion of nega tiv e nnd pos iti ve factored
where p, is calc ul ated ill Eq . 413·5 and C is calc ula ted in moments not resi sted by column strips ~hall be
Eq.413·6. proponionately assigncd 10 correspo nd in g half midd le
strips.
£"C (413·5)
f3'~2E.1
" . 4 13 .7 .6.2 Each middle strip shall be proportioned to resist
the sum of th e momcnts assigned to its two hal f mi ddle
(4 13·6) strips.
4 13.7.4.4 Column strips shall be proportioned to res ist the 413.7.8 Factored Shear in S lab Sys tems wi th Beams
fo ll owing perccillage o f positive factored IllOrnCI1IS:
413.7 .8. 1 Beams with a,tzlt, eq ual to or grf'.' Ir.r Ilwn J.n
1,1 /, 0.5 1.0 2.0 shall be propo rtioned to resist s hear cau!\cd 1 , ~. r;\f'[·':'- :
--_._-- --'- - - '- '---'- _._ - -- loads on (ributitry areits hound ed by 45-degn.·.c Ii!!,: ::; .!J.: -
(u,/,II, ) ~ 0 60 60 (i()
from the corners of the panels and the cc nlf''' !inf's of fh:-:
(0, 1,11,)1 1.0 90 75 45 Hdjaccnt panels parallcl to (he lo ng s ides.
..---------- ~----- - - -- -
Linear inlerpolations shall be made between values shown :
carry 110 load at a,::; O. shall be permitted . centerline of panel on each side of the centerline or columns
or supports.
413.7.8.3 111 addition to shears calculated according to
Sections 413.7.8. 1 and 41 3.7.8.2, beams shall be 413.8.2.3 Columns or su pports shall be assumed to be
propol1iol1cd to resist s hears caused by factored lo'lds aU<tched to slab·beam st rips by torsional members (Section
applied directly on beams. 413.8.5 ) trans verse to the direction of the span for which
moments are being determined and extending to bounding
4]3.7.8.4 Computations of slab shear slrcngih o n the Interal panel center lines all each side of a column .
ass umption that load is distributed (0 supportin g beams . 1\
accordance with Section 413.7 .8. 1 or 4 13.7.8.2 shall be 413.8.2.4 Frames adjacent ano parallel 10 an edge shall be
permitted. Resistan ce to lOtal shea r occurring on a panel bounded by that edge and the ce nt erline of adjaccnt panel.
shall he provided .
413.8.2.5 Analys is or each equiv.alenl frame in its entirety
413.7.8.5 Shear strength shall satisfy requirements of shall be pennitted. Alternatively, for gravit y loading. a
Section 4 I I. separate anal ysis of each floor or roof wit h far ends of
columns considered fixed shall be permi tted.
413.7.9 Factored MOlllents in Columns and Walls 413.8.2.6 Where slab· beams are analyzed separatel y,
determinmion of moment at a given support assuming (hat
413.7.9.1 Colum ns and wa lls built integrally with a slab the slab·beam is fixed at any su pport two panels distant
system shall resist moments caused by factored loads on the therefro m, shall be permilted provided the slab continues
s lab system. beyond that point.
413.8.1.2 Ncg lc(; ting Ihe change in le ngth of col umlls and 413.8.4.1 Determination of the 1l1 0 lllCIll 01' inerti a of
slabs uu e 10 direct stress, .1I1d derl c{, l.io ns due to she.lr, shall columns ,It any cross section outside of joints or colu mn
be permillcd. capitals using the gross area or concrete ~ha ll be perm itted.
413.8.2. I The stl1lclUrc shall be considered 10 be made up of 413.8.4.3 Momcnt of inert ia of columns from top to bottom
equivalent frames 0 11 colullln lines taken IOll gitudin:lll y nne! of th e slab·bea m ;It a joint s hall be ass umed infinite.
transversely through the building.
1
Nati ona l StrucltJr(11 COd e of li te Philippines 6 1\ Edition Vo lume '1
4·86 CHAPTEI1"· Concre\()
413.8.5 Torsional Members from face of supporting element not greater than one-half
the projection of bracket or capital beyond face of
413.8.5.1 Torsional members (,sec Section 413.8.2.3) shall supP0l1ing element.
be assumed [0 have a constant cross section throughout their
length consisting of the larges! or: 413.8.7.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports shall
be treated as square supports with the same area for location
J. A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the
of critical section for negative design moment.
column, bracket or capital in the direction of the span
for which moments arc being determined; or
413.8.7.4 When slab systems within limitations of Secti{)11
2. F'OI" !llonolithic or fully composite constmclion, the 413.7.1 are analyzed by the Equivalent Frame Method, il
portion of slab specified in (J) above plus that part of shall be permitted to reduce· the resulting computed
the transverse beam above and below the slab; and moments in such propol1ion that the absolute sum of the
positive and average negative moments used in the design
3. The transverse beam as defined in Section 4! 3.3.4.
need not exceed the value obtained from Eq. 413-4.
413.8.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the direction
413.8.7.5 Distribution of moments at critical sections across
of the span for which moments arc being determined, the
the slab-beam strip of each frame to column strips, beams
torsional stiffness shall be multiplied by the ratio of moment
and middle strips as provided in Sections 413.7.4, 413.7.5
of inertia of slab with sllch beam to moment of inertia of
and 413.7.6 shall be permitted if the requirement of Section
slab without such beam.
413.7.1.6 is satisfied.
414.4.2 Minimum ratio of ve rti cal reinforcement area 10 414.5 Walls Design as Co mpression Members
gross concrete area, /1" shall be: Except as provided in Secl ion 414.6, walls subject 10 nxi.aJ
L 0 .0012 for deformed bars 11 0 1 larger than rn l6 mill with load or combined flex ure and axial load shaH be designc'; as
:I spcci (jed yield strength not less than 4 15 MP,l; or compression members in accordance with provisions of
Seclions 410.3, 410.4 , 410. 11, 410. 15. 410. 18, 4 14 .3 nnll
2. 0 .00 15 for other deformed bal's; or 414.4 .
3. 0.0012 for welded wire reinforcement (plain or
deform ed) nOt larger than MW 200 or MD200 414.6 Empirical Design Method
414.4.3 Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement arc.1 10 414.6.1 Walls of solid rectangular cross section shaH he
gross concrete arc, P" shall be: permitted to be designed by the empirical provisions of
I. 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than 16 mill Seclion 414.6 if resultant of all factored load s is localed
d i:l mcter with a specified yield streng th 110 1 less (han within the middle third o f the overall thickness o f wa ll and
415MPa;or . 11 limits of Sections 41 4.3, 414.4 and 4 14 .6 are salis fled.
2. 0.002S for oth er defo rmed bars ; o r 414.6.2 Design axial strength ¢P, of a wall satisfyi ng
J. 0.0020 for welded wire reinforcement (p lai n or limitations of Section 414.6. 1 shall be com pUled by Liq .
deformed) not larger than MW 200 o r MD200. 414-1 unless designed in i.lccordance with Section 414.5.
414.4.4 Wall s morc than 250 111m th ick, except basement ¢,P, = o 55¢f'c A,[I-(;~~JJ (4 14-1)
walls, shall have reinforcement for eac h di rection placed in
two layers parallel with faces of wall in accordance with the
following: where ¢ shall correspond to compression~c()ntrolled sections
1. One la yer co nsisting of not less than one half and not ill accordance with Sect ion 409.4.2.2 and effectivc length
more than two-thirds of total reinforce ment required for faclol' k shall be:
each direct ion shall be placed not less than 50 mm or
more than one-third the thickness of wall from exterior For walls braced lOp and bo ttom against lat eral translati on
surface. and
2. The ol her layer. co nsisting of the balance of required I. Res trained against rotarian at one Or both ends
reinforcemen t in that directi on. s hall be placed not less (top, bOllom. or bOlh) .. . ....... 0.8
than 20 I11Ill o r more than one-third the thickn ess o f 2. Un restra ined against rotation at both ends 1.0
wall from imcrior surface .
For walls not braced against lalcrallranslali on 2.0
414.4.5 Vertical and hori zontal reinforceme nt shall not be
spaced farther '.P<lll than three times the wall thickness, lIor 414.6.3 Minimum Thickness of W"Us Des igned by
f .. nher apall than 450 mill. Empirical Design Method
414.9.2. 1 The wa ll panel shall be designed as a simply = E, (A + P)l . (d -c )' + I .. c" (4 14·7)
suppol1cd. axi;lll y loaded me mber su bjected to an out-of· I" E. ." f,.2d 3
planc uniform later;11 load, with maximulll moments and
deflec tions occurring at midspan.
and the value of E/l:.~, shalinOl be takcn less 111M 6.
414.9.2.2 The <.: ros s section shall be constant over the
height of th e panel.
414.8.4 The maximum dcncctiOIl 4,. due to service loads.
The wall shall be tension-comrollcu. including P6 effects. shilllnol exceed 1,.1150.
414.9.2.4 Rcinforccmcill sh~IJI provide a dcsign strength If Mf ,. maximum moment al midhcight of wal l due to service
loads. includi ng PLI effects, exceeds (2J3) M •." £1 , sh.1I be
(414 -2) calc ulated by Ell . 414 -8
wherc "'-I.. sha ll be oblilincd using the modulus (If fupture, };" LI =2136 !!1,,-2 ~~ M"){6 -21J6 ) (4 14-8)
give n by 1:(1 . 40l)-t). • " ( M .-2IJM .. ' ..
414.9.2.5 Concentrated gravi ty loads applied 10 Ihe wall If M" docs not exceed (2I3) M .... 6 , shall be calculated by
above the design ncxural section shall be assumed to be Eq.414-IO
distributed over a width:
(414-9)
I. Eqllallo the bearing width, pillS (1 width all each side
that increases at a slope of 2 vertical 10 I horizontal where:
down to the dcsign sec tion; but
2. Not gre.Hcr Ilwn the spacing of the concclllrmcd loads:
I!'J = 5M r,l/ (414·10)
" 48 E , 1,
and
3. Docs not extcnd beyond the edges of the wall pancl. '" = 5M), ~_ (414-11)
" 48£•.1..,
414.9.2.6 Venical stresses P,/A g at the midhcighl section
shall nnt exceed O.O(y·... I,.r sll<l ll be c;dcu lalcd by Eq . 4 14-7 and Mil shill l be oblaincd
hy iteration of defl ecti ons.
414.9.3 The design moment strengt h (k\1" fOf ro mhincd
fl ex ure and a:dal loads at the midhcighl s hall he
(4 14-3)
415.4 Footings Su pporti ng Circul ar or Rcgulur Polygo n- 415.6 Shear in Foo tin gs
Shap ed Colu mn s or Pedcs tal s
Fo r locati on of cri tical sections for moment, shear <lll d 41 5.6.1 Shear strength in footings shall be in accn nl ance
developmen t or reinforcemelll in footi ngs. it shaH be with Section 4 11.1] .
permillco to trCaI circular or regular polygon-s haped
concrete col umn s or pcdcstHb as sq uare me mbers with til\! 415.6.2 Locali on of crilical sec tion for shear in 'Ic{:{ml :!'ce
:;amc arCi!. wi th Section 41 1 sh.a ll be measured from face or (:ok!lJ lI.
pedesta l or wall, for footings support in g a co lumn , pedestal
Of wall. ro r foo lings suppon ing a colullln or pedestal wilh
415.5 Moment in Footings steel base pl <lle:-. the criti cal secti on shall be measured fro m
loca tion de li ned in Secti on 4 15 .5.2, Itcm 3.
4]5.5.1 EX lerna l moment o n an y seclio n of a foo ting shall
be determined by passing a vertical planc through the 4J5.6.3 Where the disla nce hctwecll the axis of an y p;~'~ to
(oming and com puti ng the moment of the rorces acting over the axis of the column is Jllore th an t WO times the di~wl1ce
the cn ti re ;lfca of fo()( ing o n olle ~ idc of tl1 ,11 vertical JlI;Jnl~. between the to p or th e pile ca p and til e top of !Il(' pi!; , {ile
pile cap shall sati sfy Sections 4 11 , 13 <Inti 415J).'~. (Jl her pile
ca ps shaH satisfy either Section 427, or both Sections
411.13 and 415.6.4. If Section 427 is used, the effective bearing strength for either surface as given by Section
concrete compression strength of the struts, fw shall be 410.18.
determined using Section 427.3.2.2, Item 2.
415.9.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors
415.6.4 Computation of shear on any section through a between supported and supporting members shall be
footing supported on piles shall be in accordance with adequate (0 transfer:
Sections 415.6.4.1,415.6.4.2, and 415.6.4.3: I. All compressive force that exceeds concrete bearing
strength of either member; and
415.6.4.1 Entire re~iction from any pile whose center is
located dl'i/J2 or' 'more' outside the section shall be 2. Any computed tensile force across interface.
considered as producing shear on that section.
In addition, reinforcement, dowels or mechanical
415.6.4.2 Reaction from any pile whose center is located connectors shaH satisfy Section 415.9.2 or 415.9.3.
dpil )2 or more inside the section shall be considered as
producing no shear in that section. 415.9.1.3 If calculated moments are transferred to
supporting pedestal or footing, reinforcement, dowels or
415.6.4.3 For intennediate positions of pile center, the mechanical connectors shall be adequate to satisfy Section
portion of the pi Ie reaction to be considered (IS producing 412.18.
shear on the section shall be based 011 straight-line
interpolation between full value at dp ",.12 outside the section 415.9.1.4 Lateral forces shall be transferred to supporting
and zero value at dpi /,J2 inside the section. pedestal or footing in accordance with shear-friction
provisions of Section 411.8 or by other appropriate means.
415.7.2 Calculated tellsion or compre~sion in reinforcement 415_9.2.1 For cast-in-place columns and pedestals, area of
at each section shaH be developed on each Side of that reinforcement across interface shail not be less than
section by embedment length, hook tension only or O.005A g , where Ag is the gross area of SUppo!1cd member.
mechanical device, or combinations thereof.
415.9.2.2 For cast-in-place walls, area of reinforcement
415.7.3 Critical sections for development of reinforcement across interface shall not be less than minimum vertical
shall be assullled at the sallle locations as defined III Section reinforcement given in Section 414.4.2.
415.5.2 for maximum factored moment, and at all other
vertical pJanes where changes of section or reinforcement 415.9.2.3 At footings, fM2 n1ln and [1J58 mill longitudinal
occur. See also Section 412.11.6. bars, in compression only, may be lap spliced with dowels
to provide reinforcement required to satisfy Section 415.9.1.
415.8 Minimum Footing Depth Dowels shall not be larger than [1]32 mm bar and shall
Depth of footing above bottom reinforcement shall not be extend into supported member a distance not less than the
less than 150 mill for footings on soil, or not less than 300 larger of ide> of fil42 mOl or ru58 mm bars or the splice length
mm for footings on piles. of the dowels, whichever is greater, and into the footing a
distance not less than the development length, ide of the
dowels.
415.9 Transfer of Forc{~ at Base of Column, \Vall or
Reinforcement Pedestal 415.9.2.4 If a pinned or rocker connection is provided in
cas.-in-place construction, connection shall conform to
415.9.1 Forces and moments at base of column, wall, ill' Sections 415.9.1 and 415.9.3.
pedestal shall be transferred to supporting pedestal or
footing by bearing on concrete and by reinforcement, 415.9.3 In precast construction, anchor bolts or suitable
dowels, and mechanical connectors. mechanical connectors shall be permitted for satisfying
Section 4! 5.9.1. Anchor bolts shall be designed in
415.9.1.1 Bearing 011 concrete at contact surface between accordance with Scclion 42~.
supported and supporting l11ember shall not exceed concrete
415.10.2 Sloped or stepped footings designed (I S n unit ShOll! 416.3. 1 Design of prectlst members and connections shall
be constructcd to ensu re action <IS a unit. include loading (ltld rcslraim conditio ns from initi ,,1
fabri cat ion to end use in the Slrucrure, including fo rm
rcm ovill , storage. Inlnsportatioll lind erection.
415.11 Combined Footings and Mats
416 .3.2 When precast members are incorpol'fur.d ill!o a
415.11.1 Footings supponi ng Illore thall aile column.
struc tural sys tem. the forces and deformations {lI., ·ui J"i lifl i!l
pedestal. or wall (combincd footings or mil ts) sha ll be
;lnd adjace nt 10 cOllnections shall be included in Iht dcsign.
propol1ioned to resist the factored loads and induced
reactions, in accordance with appropriate design
4 J6.3.3 Tolcr'lIlccs for both precast mcmbl'r~ and
rcquirements of lIlis codc.
illlcrf<lcing mcmbers shall be specified. Design of" pr(' ca~i
members ilild cnnl1~ctions :-;Imll include Ihe effecls of (hese
415.11.2 The Direct Des ign Method of Section 411 shall
IOlen.lI1("cs.
1101 be used for design of cOlllbincd footings and milts.
416.4.2. 1 In-plane force paths shall be continu Dus through 2. Precast wall panels shall have a minimum of two ties
Doth connections and members. per panel, wit h a nomi nal tensile strength not less than
44 kN per tic ;
4J6.4.2.2 Where tension forces occur, a cont inuous paLh of
3. When design forces result ill no tension at th e base, the
slcel or steel reinforcement shall be provided.
lies requ ired by Sec tio n 416.6.1.3. Ite111 2. shall be
pcrmi ll ed 10 be anchored illlo an approp ri ate ly
416.5 Member Design rein forced concrete noor slab 011 grade.
416.6.1.4 Connection details that rely solely on friction
416.5.1 In one-way precast /1001' an d roof' slabs and in onc-
ca used by gravilY loads sha ll nOI be used.
way precast, prestressed wall panels, all no! wider than 3.7
Ill, and where members arc ' not mec hani cally co nnected 10 416.6.2 Por precasi··concrete bearing wall structures three or
cause restraint ill the transverse di recti on, the sh rinkage and more stori es in height, the following minimum provisions
tempcrcuure reinforce ment requirement s o f Section 407 . 13 shall apply:
in the direct io n normal to the flexural reinforce ll1elll shall be
416.6.2.1 Longitud inal and tran sversc lies shall bc provided
pcnni ued 10 be waived. This waiver shall not apply to
in floor and roof sys tems to provide a nominal strength of
members which require reinforcement to resist transverse
22 kN/m of widlh or lenglh. Tics shall be provided ove r
fle xural stresses.
interior wall supports and between members and exterior
walls. Tics shall be positi oned in or within 600 mm of the
416.5.2 For precast. nonpreslrcssed wall s the reinforcement
plane of the fl oor or roof systcm.
shall be designed in accorda nce wilh the provisions of
Sections 410 or414 . exce pt that the area or
horizontal and 416.6.2.2 Longitudinal lies parallcl 10 floor or roof s lab
vert ical reinforcem ent 511<111 eac h be not less than O.OO IA!:, spans shall be spaced not more Ihan 3 m on ce nters.
where Ag is the gross cross-sec tional area o f the wall panel. Provisions shall be made to transfer forces around openings.
Spacing of reinforce men t shall not exceed 5 limes the wall
416.6.2.3 Transverse ti es perpendicular to floor or roof sl ab
thickness nOr 750 111m for interior wall s or 450 mm for
spans shall be spaced not greater than the bealing wall
ex terior wall s.
spaci ng.
416.6.2.4 Ties around the perimeter of each Ooor and roof,
416.6 Structural 1ntegrity wi thin 1.2 III of the edge, shall prov ide a nominal strength in
tension nOllcss Ih an 70 kN .
416.6.1 Except where the provis ions of Sc<.:tion 416.6.2
govern, the minimum provisions of Sections 4 16.6. 1.1 416.6.2.5 Vcn ical tens io n lies s hall be provided in all walls
through 4 16.6.1.4 for slru clUrai integrity shall app ly to al l and shall be continuous over thc height o f the bu ildin g.
precast cO ll crete struc tures: They sha ll prov ide a nominal tensi le stren gth not less than
44 kN per horizontal meIer of wa ll. Not less than two lies
41 6.6. 1.1 Longitudinal and transverse li es required by shall be provided fo r cilch precasl pallci.
Seclion 407. 14 .3 shall connect members 10 a latera l load
resistin g system.
416.7 Connection and Bearing Design
416.6.1.2 Where precast elements form floor or roof 416.7.1 Forces sha1l be permitted to be tran sferred between
diaphragms, the connections between diaphragm and those members by grouted joints, shear keys, mechanical
members being laterall y suppol1ed shall have a nominal COll nectors, reinforcing stee l co nnections, reinfo rced topping
tens ile strength capable of resisting not less than 4.4 kN/m. or a co mbination of these means .
416.6.1.3 Ve rti c:!! tension tic req ui re ments o f Section 416.7.1.1 The adequacy of connectio ns to transfer forces
407. 14.3 shall appl y 10 all ve ni cal struchl r;ll mc mbcrs, between members shall he detennined by analysis or by Lest.
('xeepl cladding, ill UJ slwll be ac hi eved by prov id ing Where shear is Ihe primary res ult of imposed loading. it
co~, nccliol1 s .11 horiz.ontal joints in <lL:cordan ce with the
sha ll be permiHed to lise the pro vis io ns o f Sect ion 41 1.8 as
followi ng: applicable.
I. Precast nllul1lllS s hall have i! nornimd strength in
tension nol less than I.4Ag , in N. For columns with a 416.7.1.2 When designing;! co nnection using materials with
larger cross sec tion tha n required by cOlIsiiJer:llioll of different structura l properties. their relali vc st iffnesscs,
loading. reduced effective area AG • based on (fOSS
It st rength s and ductili ties s hall be co ns idered.
seclioll requirl~ d
btll not less Ih an olle-hal f the (olal arc.l.
s hall be permitt ed:
416.8 lIems Embedded After Concr.le Placement 416.11.1.2 The test load shall be th at load whi ch, when
applied to the precast me mber alone. induces Ihe same lol ;,!
416.8.1 When appro ved by the engi neer, embedded items force in the te nsion rei nforcement as would be induced hy
s uch as dowels or inserts that either protrude from the loading the composite mem ber with th e test load required by
concrete or rem ai n exposed for inspecli o n shall be permitted Section 420.4 .2.
to be embedded while the concre te is in a plastic state
provided that: 416,11.2 The provisions of Section 420.6 shall be th e basi·;
rejiwJi on of the element.
416.8.1.1 Embedded items are not required to be hooked or
tied to reinforcement within the concrete.
417.2.2 All provision s of this code shall nppJy 10 compos ite 417.6 Horizontal Shear Strength
concrete fl e xural ll1 e mlH~ r s, except as specifi cally modi fied
in thi s Secti on. 417.6.1 in a compo:> ite member, full transfer of horizollwl
shear forces shall be assured at contac t surfaces of
intercon nected e lements.
417.3 General
417.6.2 For the prov isions of 4 17.6, d shall be taken as the
417.3.1 The usc of an e ntire composite member or portio ns distance from ext re me co mpress io n fi ber ror enure
thereo r for resistin g shciIf illld mo me nt s ha ll be permitted . co mpos it e sec tio n 10 cent ro id or prcslressed and
nonpresll'csscd longilll di na l tension rcinforccment, if any,
417.3.2 Individual cJerlH.:llt s shall he in vcs tigat(~d for all but need 110t be ta ke n less than (l .BOh for prestressed
critical stages or loading. concrete members.
417.6.3 Unless calculated in accorda nce with Seclion 417.7 T ics ror Hori zont al Shea r
417.6.4. design of cross sections subject to horizontal shear
shall be based on 417.7.1 When ties arc provided to transfer horizontal she;~;-.
tie area shall not be less than that requ ired by Sec!i\!q
(4 17- 1)
4 11 .6.5.3 and tic spacing shall not exceed four times th:'
where Vol is factored shear force a[ secti on considered and Icas t dime ns ion or supportcd clement. or 600 mm.
V II}, is nominal hori zontal shear strength in acco rd ance with
Ihe foll owin g: 417.7.2 Tics for hori zo lllal shea r shall consist of single bars
or wire, mUltiple leg stirrups. or vCrli callcgs of welded v,<le
417.6.3.1 Where C('l1~:ICt surfaces arc clear, free of lai tancc fabri c (plain or de formed).
an d intemionall y roughened, shear strength V,III shall not be
take n grea ter tha n O.55b,d, in newtons. 41 7.7.3 All lies shall be fu ll y anchored into interconnected
clcments in accordance with Scction 4 12. 14 ,
417.6.3.2 Where minimum ties are provided in accordan ce
wilh Section 417.7 and contact surfaces are clean and free of
laitance, but not intentionally roughened, shear strength Vnh
shall not be taken greater than O.55b,.d. in newtons.
418.3.3 Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be Prestressed two-way slab systems shall be designed as Class
considered in design. U with!, :0 O.SOJ];·.
418.3.4 Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining
construction of elastic and plastic deformations, deflections, The serviceability requirements for each class are
changes in length and rotations due to prestressing. Effects summarized in Table 418-2. For comparison, Table 418-2
of temperature and shrinkage shall also be included. also shows conesponding requirements for nonprestressed
members.
418.3.5 Possibility of buckling in a member between points
where concrete and prestressing tendons are in contact and 418.4.4 For Class U and Class T flexural members, stresses
of buckling in thin webs and flanges shall be considered. at service loads shall be permitted to be calculated using the
uncracked section. For Class C flexural members, stresses aJ
418.3.6 In computing section properties prior to bonding of service loads shall be calculated using the cracked
prestressing tendons, effect of loss of area due to open ducts transformed section.
shall be considered.
418.4.5 Deflections of prestressed flexural members shall be
418.3.7 The serviceability requirements for each class are calculated in accordance with Section 409.6.
summarized in Table 418-1. For comparison, Table 418-1
also shows corresponding requirements for nonprestressed
members. 418.5 Permissible Stresses in Concrete - Flexural
Members
418.4.2.1 Strains vary linearly with depth through entire 0.25 Jl, at other locations, additional bop·-; '"
load range. reinforcement shall be provided in the tensile 7-01':,' iii
resist the total tensile force in concrete computed \vifll
418.4.2.2 At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension. the assumption of an uncracked section.
418.5.4.1 The spac ing requirement s shall be met by 2. Elastic shorten ing o f co ncrete;
Ilonprcstrcssed reinforcement and bonded tendons. The 3. Creep of concrete;
spacing o f bonded tendons shall no! exceed 2/3 of t!lC
maximum spacin g permitted for Ilonprestressed 4. Shrinkage of con crete;
reinforcemenl. 5. Relaxation of ICIl<JOIl stress;
6. Friction loss due to int en ded or unintended curvalUre
Wh ere both reinfo rcement and bonded te nd ons are used [Q
in post-tens io ning tendons .
mee t the spaci ng requirement, the spacing between a bar
and a tendon shall not exceed 5/6 o f th al permi tted by
Sec tion 41 0.7.4. See also Section 418 .5.4.3. 418.7.2 Friction Loss in Post-Tensioning Tendons
418.5.4.2 In applyin g Eq . lOA to prestressing tendons, A.ft,,\ 418.7.2.1 Pp, force in pos t-tensionin g tendons a di stance ',,,
shall be substituted for .f..., where ~r" ., sha ll be takcn as the from th e jacking end shall be comput ed by:
calculated stress in the prestressing stee l at servi ce loads
based on a c racked section analys is minus the ) - ( KI fI' ~. /f f! a I" )
P px = I 11je (41 8- 1)
decompressio n st ress hl("' It shall be penn itled to take /d,'
equal to the effective stress in the prestressing steel [,,,. Sec
also Section 418.5.4.3 . When (KI11.,+J1P CI,I.t) is not greater than OJ, P 11,C sha ll be
permitted to be computed by:
418.5.4.3 In applying Eq. 10-5 to prestressing tendons, the
magnitude of 6/"s shall not exceed 250 MPa . When AJ;" is (418·2)
less th an or equal to 140 MPa, the spacin g requirement s of
Sections 418.5.4.1 and 418.5.4.2 shall not apply. 418.7.2.2 Friction loss sha ll be based 0 11 experime ntally
determin ed wobble K .~uld curvature P I' frictio n coeffi cie nts
418.5.4.4 Where h of a bea m e xceed s 900 III III , the area or and shri ll be verified duri ng tendon stressi ng operations.
iongiludi ll:ll ski ll reinforcemen t consistin g of reinforce lne ll!
418.7.2.3 Values o f K and p J' coenicien ts used in design
or bond ed tendo ns shall be prov id ed as required by Section
shall be shown on design drawings.
410.7.7.
418.7.3 W he re loss o f pres tress in member ·may occur due
to connecti on of me mber to IIdj oi ni ng cons tmc li o n, such
loss of prest ress shall be IIl10wed for ill des ig n.
418.8.1 Design moment st rength of fl ex ural members shall 418.9.1 Pres lressed concrete secti ons shall hr ! '.! '. ' :'>-d 's
be computed by the strength des ign methods of this chapter. c Hher I c n s ion ~c onlroll ed . transition, or (OlliP:""::, j <m_
For prestressing tendons, ];,.1' shall be subst ituted for ,h. in CO lli rolled sec ti ons, in accordance with Secti ons 4Iu.j .3 and
strength computations. 410.3.4 . The appropriat e strength redu ction fac\t)J's, if , from
Seclion 409.4 shall apply.
418.8.2 As an ahcrnati vc to a more accu rate determination
(,; If'S based Oil .strain compatibility, the following 418.9,2 Total ilmounl I of prestressed and 1l01l111 :'Slrc.ssed
"J)[Jl'Oxirnatc va lues OfJ,~f shall be permitted to be used if IS( reinforcement in members with bonded pres;),' \SI: d
is nol Jess Ihan 0.5/,,;. reinforcement shall be :Idequate to develop a fal;lorclj w.hl
I. For members with bonded tendons: at least 1.2 times the cracking load computed \ )1: th:' i,;:, !". '~ f
(he modulus of rupture fr specified in St'( ", . .!!!";: -~
I 1" = I ,.., (I - ~[p ~ This provision shall be permincd to bc W 1U Yc! ,(': . • "",
PI 1',. +..!!-.
d ,.
(0 -
I'
(O 'J]) (418·3)
members with shear and flexural st rength a ll ea ~;l !9!:ce \iii\!
required by Seclion 409.3.
where", is pl//e' , ",' is pJ//e', and YP is 0.55 for 1./1..
nol less Ihan 0.80; 0.40 for /,.//,.. nol Jess Ihan 0.85; and 418.9.3 Part or all of the bonded reinforcclJ !!'i,; l om;i :;li!
0.28 for1.//'", nol less Ihan 0.90. of bars or tendons shall be provided as clos!: :.'; !,::w! lc ab lt
to the tensi on face in prestressed nex ural lllcmlwf s. In
members prestressed with unbonded tendolls, fl:i . fl,':! I Il1Ul l'
If any cOlilpression rein forcement is lakcn into account bo nded reinforcement consisting of bars or K n<.loll:'> ~.~, ;; !I b·'
when calcu lnling J,.s by Eq. 4 J 8·3. the term as required by Sccli on 418. I O.
[
P p -f,,,,, d (
+ - --{/)-{U 'J] 418.10 Minimum Bonded Reinforcement
. f ~ til'
:-; hall be taken not less tha n 0.17 and d' shall be no 418.10.1 A minimum area of bonded rcinfor('cl'twJ'd . . Id l !II .
greater thill) 0 . 15 (/1)' provided in all fl exural members wiill UiJtollfi(.i i
prestressing tendons as required by Sect ioJ)!: ·1 :::.iiJ.1.. : 'I!:
2. For members with unbonded tendons and with a span -
418.10.3.
to-dcpth ratio of 35 or less:
418.10.2 Except as provided in Section 41 8.IOJ. IIl:Hi mull
/ P;/ +70+~ (4 18·4)
area of bonded reinforce ment shall be COl1l rHlkd hy:
'" 100
P"
A, = 0.004A,.,
but /,,, ill Eq. 418-4 shall not he I<lkcn grea ter Ihan j~ •..
nor grcmer tha ll (k. + 4 15).
where ACl is area of thai part of cross seelie:, i){'t".'!,· n i!,
3. Fo r mcmbers with un bonded prestressing tendons nexura l tension face and ce nt er of gravity of i:.' .,;.:.. :,' , ', .;,.
and with a span-to-depth ratio greater than 35:
418.10.2.1 Bonded reinforcement requin~d ~.,' i .• ; . :: ;
f,,, ; / " + 70 +3~' (418·5 ) shall be uniformly distributed over prC-C\lI :li" " :""~ \l:'}
. P" zo ne as close as practi ca ble to extreme ten siUli iii;;;.
but /,,, ill Eq . 418-5 shall not he takcn grea ter than /;')"
418.10.2.2 Bonded rei nforcement sh,lIl f,' lei!"; ',
nor grcillcr tlw n <hI' + 2 10).
rega rdless of service load stress conditions .
. 418.H.3 NOll prcs trcsscd rei nforcc mellt con forming to
418.10.3 ror two-way flal slab syste ms, . mi r:: .. :":l,; ., a ili itj
Section 403 .6.3 , if lIsed with prestressing tendons, 511<111 be d islribution o f bonded reinforcement shall he , 1•• I . -: '_,;] .:d in
pc rmi!1cd to he considered 10 contribute 10 the tensile force
Secli on, 4 I 8. 10.3. 1, 4 I 8. I0 .:1.2, and 4 I 8. IOJ.·I.
and 10 be included in moment stren gth co mputations at .1
strcss equal to the specified yield strength fro Other
418.10.3.1 Bond ed rei nforcement ShilJl not i . ;;.. ; .. "
nonprcslresscd reinforceme nt shall be permitted to be
positi ve momen t ;lfCa s whc reji, Ihe cxtrcm ' '. -.:,'
included in strength computatiolls onl y if a strai n
tension in the pre~ comp ressed tcnsile lone :~\ ':!': "i,'" i,~·,,1
cOlll p.Hibili ty analysis is made 10 determine stresses in such
(afler ;dI OW<lllcc ror prcstress losscs) docs 1I ~, : , : •• ('l:': u.,·,
reinfo rcc rncnt.
J7.:
r ·. = I'~ (618-X)
lnl cnncdialc colullllls (/,.1 d greater than II but less than K):
K
(618-9)
619.1 General
(618-10) Timher co nnectors and fasten ers may be used to transmit
forces bet ween wood members and bet ween wood and
metal members. 111C allowable loads and installation of
Long column ( Ir/ d of K or grcillcr):
timber connectors and fasteners shall be in accard:mce with
the tables as provided ill th.is Chapler. The allowable IOHds
(618- 11) and installation of timber connec tors shall be (\s set forth in
Tables 6.2. 6.17. 6 . 19. and 6.20.
618.5 Compression at Angle fo Grain Safe loads and design practice s for Iypes of connectors and
The allowable unit stress in compression at an ilngle of load fasteners not mentioned or fully covered may be determined
(0 grain between 0° find 90° shall be computed from the ill a manner permiucd by the Building Official.
Hankinson Equal iOIl as follows :
619.2 noll'
F = I~. f~.J.
(618- 12) Safe loads in kN for bolts ill shear ill se.asoned lumber shall
II I;~. sill 1 0 + I~'J. cos] 0 not exceed the values sci forth in Table 6.17.
Allowable values F,: shall be adjusted for duration of load Allowable shear values used to co nnect a wood LO concrete
before lise in Hankinson's Equation. Values of F" and 1~J. or masonry are. permitted to be determined as olle half the
are not subjected to duration of load modifications . tabulated double shear values for a wood member twice the
'. ,,:. ,:.:. .... . ,~ thickness of the member attached to the conCrete or
masonry.
A wire nail dri vcn parallel to the grai n of the wood shall not
be subjected more than two thirds of the lateral load
allowed when driven perpendicul ar to the grain. Toenails
shall not be subjected more Ih an five sixths of the lateral
load allowed for nails driven perpendicular to the grain.
1h
Nalionai Siruciural Code of Ihe Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
6·28 CHAPTEH G . Wood
P--
PI2
1,~~""
__ ~ WITHDRAWAL
./ __ MAIN
MEMBEll
619.5.1.1 Wood Screws and Lag Screws
PI2 I
Wood and lag screws shall be used where there is limited
penetration, especially in a withdrawal design, as these
provide greater resistance. Design of th e sc rews shall be in Figure 6J9.S.2-C: Tocnail Connecti oIl Withdrawal from
accord ance with the provjsion s set fOl1h in thi s Chapter. Side Gr~,in
418.10.4.2 In negat ive momen t arC;:ls. bonded 4J8.12 Compression Members - Co mbin ed F1exm·.. 1 and
reinforcement shall ex tend one-six th the de.l r span, I,,, on Axial Loads
eac h side of support.
418.12.1 Prestressed conc rete mcmbers subject to
418.10.4.3 Where bo nded reinforcem ent is provided for co mbined flexure and axial load, with or without
nonprcslressed reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the
design moment stre ngt h, ¢A1., in acco rdance with Section
st rength design methods of this chapter. Effects of prest ress.
418.8.3, or for tens il e st ress conditions in accordance with
creep. shrinkage and Icmpcralllrc cha nge sha ll he included.
Secti on 4! 8. 10.3.2. minimum length also shal! conform to
provis ions of Section 412.
i1 l
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Voltll'llr? 1
4-102 CHAPTEf14 - Concrete
418.14.3.3 The gClIcrHI-zone requircmelHs of Section 418.14.5.3 The stress ing seq uence shall be specified on the
4 18. 143.2 are satisfied by Sections 418.14.4, 4 18.14.5, design drawings and considered in the design.
418.14.6 and whichever one of Section 4 I 8. 15.2 o r 418. I 5.3
or 418. 16.3 is applicable. 418.14.5.4 Three-dimens ional effects shall be considered
ill design and ana lyzed using three- dime ns iona l procedures
or approximated by considering the summation of effects
418.14.4 Nominal Material Strengths
for tw o ort hogonal planes.
418.14.4.1 Nominal te nsile streng th of bonded
418.14.5.5 For intermediate anc horage devices, bonded
reinforcemcnl is limited to J,. for l1onprcstrcs$ed
reinforcement shall be prov ided 10 trilllsfer at least 0.35 p.•"
reinforce ment ;md to h,,' for pres tressed rcin forceme nt
into the concrete section behind {he anchor. Such
Nomina l tensi le stress of unhomJcd prestressed rein -
reinforce ment shall be placed symmetrically around the
forcement for resisting tensile forces in th e anchorage zone
anchorage devices and shall be full y developed both behind
shall be limited to!,,)::; h .. +70,
and aheHd o f the anchorage devices ,
418.15 Design of Anchorage Zones for Monos trand or 418.16. 1 Local Zone Design
Single 16 nlln J)iamctcf B~lr Tendons
l3asic mu ltist rand tlnchoragc devices and local zo ne
reinforcement shall meel the requirement ::; 'II" t\/'.S HTO
418.15.1 Local Z<lIle Design "Standard SpecificatitJl1.rfor Highway Bridgd, " Division 1,
MOllostrand or single 111 16 111111 or smallcr b'lf anchorage Articles 9.21.7.2.2 Ihrough 9.21.7 .2.4.
devices and local lone reinforcc mcm shall mcel the
requiremen ts of the AC I 42.1.7 or thc special anchorage Special anc horage devices shall siltisfy (he tests rl~qujred in
AASHTO "Standard Spec{(icariolls for fligh ll ·ilY /)ridge s, "
dcvi(.:c requirem ents of Section 418. I 6.2.
Division 1, Art icle 9.2 1.7 .3 and described , II .A.AS HTO
"Sumdard Specijlcariolls fnr Highway IJridj;es, " 17111
4J8.15.2 Gellc r al~'l'..A)IIC Design for Slab Telldons Edilion, 2002, Division II, Anicle 10.3.2.3.
418.15.2.3 If the center-to-center spaci ng of anchorage Ihe req uiremenls or Sl'ctions 418.14.3 Ihro !, ~~i ; .: 1~;.: ·1 .. t.
418.17 Corrosion Prot(~ction for Unbondcd Prcstrcssing 418.19.2.4 Admixtures conforming to Section 403.7 and
Tendons known to have no injurious effects on grout, steel, or
concrete shall be permitted. Calcium chloride shall not be
418.17.1 Unbonded tcndons shall be encased with used.
sheathing. Thc tendons shall be completely coated and the
sheathing around the tendon filled with suitable material to
inhibit corrosion. 418.19.3 Selection of Grout Proportions
418.17.2 Sheathing shall be watct1ight and continuous over 418.19.3.1 Propol1ions of materials for grout shall be based
entire length to be uhbonded. on either of the following:
1. Results of tests OJl fresh and hardened grout prior to
418.17.3 For applications in corrosive environments, the beginning grouting operations; or
sheathing sl1<111 be connectcd to all stressing, intermediate
2. Prior documented experience with similar materials and
and fixcd anchorages in a watertight fashion.
equipment and under comparable field conditions.
418.17.4 Unbonded single strand tendons shall be protccted
418.19.3.2 Cement used in the work shall correspond to
against cotTosion in accordance with ACt 423.7.
that on which selection of grout prop011iol1s was based.
418.18 Post-Tensioning Ducts 418.19.3.3 Water content shall be minimum necessary for
proper pumping of grout; however, water-cement ratio shall
418.18.1 Ducts for grouted tendons shall be mortar-tight and not exceed 0.45 by weight.
nonreactive with concrete, tendons, grout, and corrosion
inhibitor. 418.19.3.4 Water shall not be added to increase grout
nowability that has been decreased by delayed use of the
418.18.2 Ducts for grouted single wire, single strand, or grout.
single bar tendons shall have an inside diametcr at least 6
mm larger than tendon dinmcter.
418.19.4 Mixing and Pumping Grout
418.18.3 Ducts for grouted multiple Wire, multiple strand, or
418.19.4.1 Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable of
multiple bar tendons shall have an inside cross-sectional
continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that will
area at leas! two Ii IllCS the cross-sectional area of tendons.
produce uniform distribution of materials, passed through
screens, and pumped in a manner that will completely fil!
418.18.4 Ducts shall be maintained free of ponded water if
the ducts.
members to be grouted arc exposed (0 tcmperatures below
freezing prior to grouting.
418.19.4.2 Temperature of members at time of grouting
shall be above 2°e and shall be maintained above 2°C until
418.19 Grout for Bonded Prestressing Tendons field-cured 50 mrn cubes of grout reach a minimum
compressive strength of 5.5 MPa.
418.19.1 Grout shall consist of ponland cement and water;
or portland cemcnt, sand, and water. 418.19.4.3 Grout temperatures shall not be above 32°C
during mixing and pumping.
418.19.2 Materials for grout shall conform to Sections
418.19.2.1 through 418.19.2.4.
418.20 Protection for Prestressing Steel
4HU9.2.1 Portland celllcnt shall conform to Section 403 3. Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of prestressing
steel shall be performed so that prestressing stee! is not
418.19.2.2 W<Her shall conform to Section 403.5. subject to excessive temperatures, welding sparks, or ground
currents.
418.19.2.3 Sand, if used, shall conform to "S{(mr/ard
S{Jec!/iC(/fioll for Ag;.:!'(?gate for Masonl), Mortar" (ASTM
C! 44) except that gradation shall be permitted to be
modified as necessary to obtain satisfactory workability.
-0
.s
:;'" 0'" OJ
.:c
~
Wobble
.•. _----
.. .____ ~y.£fflci~~~~~~~cr _~_ _. __...__c()cffi
ClIrv'lturc
cienI , JifJ?cr rad ian
O.15-=-0.25 --' .
~ --~---~ ---- -- - ~.- - .- -- . - --
~
Wire tendons 0.0033·0.0049 ..- - .-
0
~
'0
"" '"'"
~ .c
--~.-- .
O. 08 ·())O
<:!
'"
I-- " (/)
High·strenglh bars
__ _._-_._
._ .....strand ..•_--_. __
OJ)003·0.0020---.---.
._.. -.-.--.....--.-.-- ----.-0:1"5:0.25·-
........._.- - ----- . 7·wire .
00016·0.0066
.•--.. ..---- ----- .. _-- ---
---- ~~.---
., u
Wire tendons
- -
O.O033·().0066 O. 05·0 15
'"'"
. '""
'0
'0 0
~
7-wirc strand O.()O33·().OO66 OJ)5·0 15
"0
.t:> ~
'0
" '"
;:;> I--
'0
'"
'"
Wire tendons 0.00 IO·(). 0066 o. 05·() 15
'"'"
~
~
----- ----~-- ---- ---- .. -- --~--
'"
~ 7-wirc strand 0.00 I(J.(U)()66 OJ)5·0.15
'"
L _ _ ...
Prestressed
Nonprcstrcssed
Class U Class T Class C
Transition betwee n
Assullled behavior Uncrac ked Cracked Cracked
uncmckcd and cr acked
Gross sec tion
Section properties for stress Gross section Crack section
Secti on No requirement
calculation at service loads Sectio n 4 18.4 .4 Sec li on 41 8.4.4
4 18.4.4
Sectio n
Allowable stress at trallsfer Secli on 41 8.5. 1 Sec ti on 41 8.5.1 No requirement
41 8.5. 1
ABowabJc compressive stress
based 011 Section
SeclioIl41 8.5.2 No requirement No requirement
4 18.5.2
uncracked section p,'operties
Tensile stress at service loads
Sect. 418.4.3
so62 ft 0.62 ft <ft sft No requirement No requirement
Sect. 409.6.2,
Sec t. 409 .6.4.1 Sect. 409.6.4 . 1
Sect. 409.6.4. 1 409.6.3
Deflection calculation basis Cracked section, Cracked section,
Gross section Effective moment
bilinear bilinear
of inertia
--.----~ .
.... _-_.. _."_ .. _...
Seclion 410.7.4
No
Crack control No requirement Modified by Sect. Section 410.7.4
requirement
418.5.4.1
.._ ._.
--
Computatioll of Alp.\' orfs for _..• Cracked seclion MI(A s x lever arm).
-
crack control analysis or O.6fy
No
Side skin reinforcement No rcquirement Scction 410.7.7 Sec lion 4 10.7.7
rcq tl iremell l
,,
35.0 955.0 7.520 32.0 806.0
. ........ __ .....•.•._---- .. _------- ..
, ,(I
----,--~-.-.--.--.-- ----~-.-
tll
Nation,·)1 Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4-110 CHAPTER 4 -- Siruciural Concrelo
419.2.7 Elastic Analysis 419.3.7 The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on be proportioned for the required strength and serviceability,
equilibrium, compatibility of strains, and assumed elastic using either the strength design method of Section 408.2 . I
behavior, and representing to a suitable approximation the or the alternate design method of Section 408 .2.2.
three-dimensional action of the shell together with its
auxiliary members. 419.3.8 She\! instability shall be investiWlled and shown
by
419.3 Analysis and Design 419.3.11 In a region where membrane cracking is predicted,
the nominal compressive strength parallel to the cracks
419.3.1 Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis for shall be taken as 0.4(".
determining internal forces and displacements of thin shells.
This behavior shall be permitted to be established by 419.4 Design strength of Materials
computations based on an analysis of the uncracked
concrete stmcture in which the material is assumed linearly 419.4.1 Specified compressive strength o/" conere!etc at 2g
clastic, homogeneous and isotropic. Poisson's ratio of days shall not be less than 21 MPa .
concrete shall be permitted to be taken equal to zero .
419.4.2 Specifled yicld strength o/" nonprestressed
419.3.2 Inclastic analysis shall be permitted to be used reinforcclllcrH./;. shall not exceed 415 MFa.
where it can be shown that such methods provide a safe
basis for design.
419.5 Shell Reinforcement
419.3.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and
external loads shall be made to ensure consistency of 419.5.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist
results. tensile stresses frolll internal membrane /"{)rL'c~;. to resi ~~ ~
tension from bending and twisting mOllle );: s, iu control
4]9.3.4 Experimental or numerical analysis procedures shrinkage and temperature cracking and as special
shall be permitted where it can be shown that such reinforcement as shell bOllndaries, load a!lachnll"llts ;11,;1
procedures provide a safe basis for design . shell openings.
419.3.5 Approxi mate methods of anal ysis shall be 419.5.2 Tensile reinforcement s!lalJ be provided in two or
permitted where it can be shown that such methods provide more directions and shall be proportioned Sl !("!; that it,:
a safe basis for design . resistance in any direction equals or exceeds the component
of internal forces in that dircction .
419.3.6 In prestressed shells, the analysis shaH also
consider behavior under loads induced during prestressing, Alternatively, reinforcement for the mell1br;!i .' i it .(' ;11 the.
at cracking load and at factored load. Where prestressing slab shall bc calculated as thc reinforcCI11C,i! ) til
tendons arc draped within a shell, design shall take into resist axial tensile forces plus the. tensile fI~ :
account force components on the she!! resulting from the friction required to transfer shear across ;.~ j<, u ~ •.' .. . :;, ; , .:
of thc membrane. The asslimcd coefficient of friction. fl. that the minimum development Icngth shalll>e 1.2/d hut not
shall not exceed that specified in Section 411.8.4.3. less than 500 mm.
419.5.3 The area of shell relnforcemelll ,II <lny section as 419.5.12 Splice developmenl lenglhs of shell
measured in(wo onhogonal directions shall not be less than reinforcement shall be governed by the provisions of
[he slab shrinkage or temperature reinforce ment rcqllin::<1by Section 412, except thaI the minimum splice length of
Seclioll 407. 13. tension bars shall be 1.2 limcs the value required by Sectioll
412 but nol less than 500 Illm . The !lumber of splices in
419.5.4 Reinforcemellt for shear and bending moments principal tensile reinforcement shi.lll be kept to a practical
about nxes in the plane of the shell slab shall be calculated minimum. Where splices arc nccessary. lhey shall be
in accordn~l{'e with Sections 410. 41 I and 413. staggered at least Id with not mord than onc-third of the
rcinforccment spliced at any section.
419.5.5 The area of shell tension reinforce ment shillJ be
limited so tll3.1 the reinforcement will yield before either
419.6 Construction
crushing of concrete in compression or shell buckling can
lake place.
419.6. 1 \Vhc ll removHI of fonnwork is based on a specific
modulus of elasticity of concrete because of stability or
419.5.6 In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement
denection considermions. the value of the modulus of
shall, if practical. be placed in the general directions of the
elasticity E(. shall be detennined from ncxural tCSIS of field-
principal tcnsilc IllCll1br<Ule forces. Where this is not
clired beam specimens. The Il umbe r of teSI specimens. the
practic<ll. it shall be pemlitted to place me mbran e
dimcnsions of lest beam $pecimens .md test procedures
reinforce ment in two or more component directi ons.
sha ll be specified by the engi neer-of-record.
419.5.7 If th e direc ti on of reinforcement varies more than
10 degrees from th e direction of principal tensile membrane
41 9.6.2 Tile lolerances ror Ille shape or ll1e shell shall be
spl.!cificcl. If construction res ults in deviations from the
force, th e alllou rl( of reinforcement shall be reviewed in
shape greater than the specified to lerances. an analys is of
relat ion to cracki ng at se rvice loads .
the effect of the deviations shall be made and any required
remedia l aCl i ons shall be taken to ens ure safe behavior.
419.5.8 Where Ihe magnilude or Ihe pri ncipal lensile
membrane stress wit hi n th e shell varies great ly over Ihe
area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total
tension Illay be concentrated in the regions of largest tensile
stress where it can be shown Ihal this provides ,I safe basis
for design. Howeve r, the ratio of shell reinforcement in any
portion of the tens il e zo ne shall no( be less than OJJOJ5
oased on the ovcrallthickness of the shell.
response during (he 10;1(..1 test satisfies the :lcccpt ancc th e critical regions of the struclUral d :.;., "
criteria, the structure or part of the stfllcturC shal l be strength is in doub t. More than one te;..!! , '. i •. ;H_"
permitted (0 remai n in !-icrvicc for <I specified lime pe riod . Ir shall be used if a single arnllll't'W .. ~ ! \\"~ 11
deemed nccessa ry by the engincer, peri odic reevalu ati olls simultaneous ly res ult in ma xim uill V,ill! ( S ': ;i.:
shall be conduc ted. (suc h as dcncction. rotat io n or stre ... :·;) 1:,'.\ ',:;,:.,,' ."
demo nstrate the adeq uacy or the structure.
420.4.2 Load Inlensily 420.6.2 Meas ured maximum de fl ect ions shall satisfy onc
nle IOlal lesl load (incl uding dead load already in place) of the following condit ions:
shall nol be less Ihan Ihe larger of ( I), (2), and (3): 2
I!. < I, (420- 1)
I. 1.15D + I.5L + O.4(L,or R) , - 20,000"
2. 1.1 5D + 0.9L + I.5(L, or R)
(420-2)
3. IJD
The load faclor on Ihe Ii ve load Lin. (2) shall b'i. p.ennilled If the measured maximum and residual denections, ~I and
to be reduced to 0.45 except for garages, areas ' occupie~ :as I!., , do not sat isfy Eq. 420-1 or 420-2, it shall be permitted
places of public assembly. and all Meas. where L is greater [0 repeat the load test.
2
than 4.8 kN/m . II shall be permitted to reduce L in •
accordance with the provisions of the applicable code . The repeal lest shall be conducted not earlier than 72 hours
afte r removal of th e first tes t load. The pOL1ion of (Ile
420.4.3 A load tcst shall not be made until Ihat portion of stnlcture tested in the repeat test shall be considered
the structure to be subject to load is at least 56 days old . If accept able if defl ec ti o n recovery sa tisfied the conditiun:
the owner of the Slnlcture, the cont ractor, and all involved
, -<~
parties agree, it sha ll be pCfll1iH Cd to make Ihe test at an (420-3)
I!.
earlier age. 5
420.5 Loading Crileria where ..1; is the maximulll deflection measured during the
second test relative 10 the posit ion of the stru cture at (he
420.5.1 The initial value for all applicable respon se beginning of th e seco nd tesl.
measuremenls (such as deflecti on, rotation, strain, ~ Iip ,
crack widths) shall be obtained nOl more th an one hour 420.6.3 Stl1Jctural members tested shall not have cracks
before application of the first load increment. indicating the imminence of shear failure.
Meas urements shall be made at locations where maximum
response is expected. Additional mcasurements shall be 420.6.4 In regions of structural members without tran sverse
made ifrcquircd . reinforcement. appearance of stru ctural cracks inclined (0
the longi tud inal axis and having a hori zontal projection
420.5.2 Test load shall be applied in not less than four longer th an the depth o f the member at mid-point of the
approximately equal in cre ments. crack shall be cvalu<tled.
420.5.3 Un iform tcst load s hall be applied ill a ma nner to 420.6.5 In regions of anchorage and lap spli ces, the
ensure uniform distribution of (he load lransmiucd to the appearance along the line of reinforcement o f II series of
Structure or portion of the stru cturc being tested. Arching of short inclined cracks or horizontal cnlcks sh:ill be
the applied load shall be avoided. evaluated.
420.5.4 A set of response measureme nts shall be made 420.7 Provisions for Lower Load Rliling
after each load increment is appli ed and after the total load
If the s tructure under in vestigation does not satisfy
has been app li ed all the structure for at least 24 hours.
conditions or criteria of Sections 420.2.2, 420.6.2 or
420.6.3, the slnlcture may be permi lled for usc aI a lower
420.5.5 TOlal lest load s hall be removed immediately aner
load rating based 011 the results of the load test or analysis,
all response measurements defined in Section 420.5.4 arc
if approved by the building offici'll.
made.
111
Nalional Structural Code of the Philippines 6 [(!ition Volume 1
4-114 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
a : : : angle defining the orientation of rcinforcC Il1CIll, hoo ks of two successive cross ties e ngaging the same
Sections 411. 421 and 427 longi tudinaJ bars shall be ahemated end for end.
a;. : : : coeffi cient defi ni ng the relative cont ribut ion of
concre te sirength 10 nomin:11 wall strength , Sec DESIGN DISPLACEMENT. Total lateral displacement
Equation 42 1-7. ex pected fo r the desig n-basis ea l1hqu ake, as required by Ihe
4. ::::: des ign di splaceme nt, mm , Sectio n 42 1 governin g code for earthqu ake-res istant design.
p = rati o of nonprcstrcsscd tension reinforcement
= A/ (/>"). Secti ons 411. 41 3. 421 and 425 . DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS. Combinati ons of
::::: ratio of area of distributed longitudinal fa ctored loads and forces specified in Section 409 .3.
reinforce ment (0 gross concrete area
pC'1)cndicllinr DETAILED PLAIN CONCRETE STRUCTURAL
to th at reinforcement, Sectio ns 4 1 J, 414 and 42 1 WALL. A wall co mpl yi ng with the requircn~e nts of Secti on
PI = r.ali o o f area of d istributed transverse 422 . including Section 422 .7.
rcinforccmCnllO gross concrete area perpcndi cuJar
(0 th aI reinfo rcement, Secti ons 4 1/. 414 and 421 DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR WITH A
p, ::::: rati o of yo lume of spiral reinforceme nt to to lal STANDARD HOOK. The shonest distance between the
volu me of core co nfined by the spiral crit ical section (where the sirengt h o f the bar is to be
rc inforccmcllI (measured oul-(Q-Qu t of spirals) develo ped) and a tangent to the ou ler edge of the 90-degrce
::::: ratio of area of distributed reinforcement hook.
P.·
perpendicular lO the plane o f An to gross concrete
area A f~ DRY CONNECTION. A connection used between precast
= stren gt h-reduction factor me m bers whic h does not q ualify as a wet connec tio n.
BASE OF STRUCTURE. Level at whi ch eaJ1hquake I·IOOP. A closed ti c or continuously wound tic. A closed
motion s are ass umed to be- imparted to a building. Thi s tic can be made up of severa l reinforcin g c lem e nts, each
le ve l d oes not necessari ly coinc id e w ith th e grou nd leve l. hav in g seismi c hooks at bot h ends. A co nt inuously wou nd
lie s ha ll have a seismi c hook a t bo th ends_
BOUNDARY ELEMENTS. Portions along " ructu ral wall
and sl niclural d i<tphragm edges s trengthened by JOINT. The geometric vo lume common to illlcrsecling
long itudina l and transverse re inforccment. Boundary membe rs.
clements do not nccc....sarily requi re an increase in th e
thickness or the wall or di:lphragm. Edges of openings LAT ERAL FORC E RESISTI. G SYSTEM. That ponion
wit hi n walls ilnd cli.lph ragms shall be provided wilh of the struct ure co mposed of mem be rs propoJ1ioned to
bound ary e lements as requ ired by Secti o ns 421.8.6, and resist forces related to cm11lqua kc e ffec ts.
42 1.9.7.5.
LIGHTWEIGHT-AGGREGATE CONCRETE. AII -
COLLECTOR ELEMENTS. Ele men t' thai ,erve 10 li g htw eight or sand -li ght weight aggregate co nc rete made
transmit the incrti a l fo rces within structural diaphragms to with lightweight aggregates cO llfonning to Sec ti o n 403.4 .
members of the lateral-foree-resisting syste ms.
MOMENT FRAME. Space frames in which mem bers and
CONFINED CORE. The area within the co re defined by
j oi nts res ist forces th rough ncx ure, shear, a nd, axial force.
h,..
. Mo me nt fr am es shall be categorized as fo ll ows:
th
National S iru ctural Code of th e PI)ilippin es 6 Edition Volu me 1
4·116 CHAPTER 4 - Struclural Concrele
SI'ECIAL MOMENT FRAME. A cast-in -place frame ORDINARY STRUCTURAL PLAIN CO NOWT ;.:
complying with the require ment s of Sections 421.3.3 WALL. A wall complying with the requiremen ts of Sec ti on
through 421.3 .7, 421.5 throu gh 42 1.7, or a pre"aS! frame 422, excluding Sec tion 422.7.
complying with the requirements of Secti ons 421.3.3
through 421.3.7, 42 1.5 throu gh 421.7, 421.1 3. III addition, ORDINARY REINFORCED CON C',m Tfi
the req ui rement s for o rdinary mo me nt frames s hall be STlWCTURAL WALLS. A wall cOll1pl yi ng w,' h the
s ati sfied . requirements of Sections 40 1 thro ugh 418.
NONLIN EAR ACTION LOCATION . Th e ce llter o f the INTE RMEDIATE I'RECAST STRUCTURAL ' -"ALL .
region of yielding in Ilexufc, shcm o r axial action . A wall complying with all applicab le requil clllt" .1 s or
Sect ions 401 through 418 in additi on to 42 1.4.
NONLINEAR ACTION REGION . The member le ngth
over which nonlinear action takes place. It shall be taken as SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALL. 1\ cas t-'''-pb" ,·. " ..
extendi ng a distance of no less than 1112 on either s ide of the precast wall complying with the requi rements d .<~ ····1io
nonlinear action locati on. 421.3.3 through 421.3.7, 421. 8 and 421.15, as "pi;lie "!"., ;' .
addit ion to the requiremen ts for ordi nary rc in!"orced
SEISMIC 1·100K. A hook on a Slirl1lp, hoop o r crosS!ie concrete structural walls.
ha vin g a bend not less [han 135 deg rees . except tlh'll circular
hoops s hall have a be nd no t Jess th an 90 degree s. Hoo ks STRUT. An clement of a structural diaphragH ' u·.·· ! Itl
s hall have a six-di ameter (but n OI less than 75 mill), prov ide cOIH inui! y around an opening in lhe diap!iJ;lt;·
ex tension Ihal en gages the longi tudinal reinforcement and
projects into the interior of {he stirrup o r hoop. TrE ELEMENTS. Elements that serve to trm lSllIi r I :::nia
forces and prevent separation of building cornpO!:wh ;inch
SHELL CONCnETE. Concrete outside th e tra nsverse as foo lings and walls.
rei nforcement confining the con crete.
WALL PIER. A wall segmen t with a hori w ll t3[ ;, I?n, ~
SPECIAL BOUNDARY ELEMENTS. 1loundary thickness ratio between 2.5 a nd 6, and whose cl t:ili l~ c j r ~ i:: ;,'
c lemctll s required by Sections 42 1.8.6 .3 or 42 1.8.6.4 . at leas t two ti mes its horizonlal length.
SPECIFI ED LATERAL FORCES. Lateral forces W ET CONNECTION. Uses an y of the "dici ng I, ,,'ti,,,,:o.
corres ponding to the appropriate di stributi on of lhe des ign to connect precnst members and uses ca s t-in-pl at:e (;(l!Il'n!.h.~
base shear force prescribed by the governing code for or grou t to fill the s plicing closure. see Sections 4 2J .'; Of
421.3.1.4 Structures assigned to seism ic zone 2 shall 421.3.4.3 Speci fied compressive strength of lightweight
satisfy Sections 421.J.1 .2 and 421.3.1.7. concrct c,!c' , shall not exceed 35 MPa unless demonstrated
by experimental evidence that structural members made
421.3.1.5 SlruclUrcs ass igned to seism ic zone 4 s hall wi th that lightweight concrete provide strength and
satisfy Sections 421.3. 1.2 through 421. 3. 1.7 and 421.9. toughness equal to or exceeding those of comparable
421.10. and 421. 1 I. members made with normal weight concrete of the same
strengLh . Modificalion factor 1 for Iightwciglu concretc in
421.3.1.6 A reinforced concrete stru ctural system not thi s Secti on shaH be in accordance with Section 408.7. (
satisfying Il1c - reCJuirements of this Section shall be unless specificall y noted o thclwi se.
pcnnillcd if it is demonst rated by expcrimclHal evidence
and analysis thaI the proposed sys tem w1J[ have strength 421.3.5 Rei nforcement in Special Moment Fram es and
and lOughncss equal to or exceeding those provided by a
Special Structural Walls
comparable monolithic reinforced co ncrete structure
satisfyin g this Secli <> l1.
421.3.5.1 Requirements of 421.3.5 apply to special' moment
frames and special structural walls and coupling beams.
421.3.2 Analysis and Proportioning of Structural
) Members 421.3.5.2 Defomled reinforcement resisting earthquakc-
induced flexu ral and axial forces in frame members.
421.3.2.1 The interaction of all st ru ctural and nOllsi l1lctural structural walls, and co upling beams, shall comply with
1 members wh ich ntmcriall y affec l the linear and Ilonlincaf ASTM A 706M. ASTM A615M Grades 280 and 420
421.3.4 Concrete in Speci ~11 '''loment Frames and 421.3.6.1 Mechanical splices shall be classified as either
Special Structural Walls Type 1 or Type 2 mechanical splices. as fo llows:
42J .3A.l Req uiremcnts of Section 421 J.4 apply to speci al Type J Splice. Mechan ical splices shaH co nform to Section
4 12. 15.3 .2:
1ll0lllCI1l fnlln cs and s pecia l struc tural walls and coupling
beams.
Type 2 S pli ce. Mecha nical splices shall conform to Secti on
4 I 2. 15.3.2 <lnd slw ll develop the specified (cns il e strength
421.3.4.2 Compressive ~ t rcllg (h .f'.. shall be no! less (han
21 MPa. of the spliced bar.
th
National Slructural Code of the Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
4-118 CHAPTEF14 -- Structural Concrete
421.5 Flexural Members of Special Moment Frames 421.5.2.4 Mechanical splices shall conform to Secli(i),
421.3.6 and welded splices shall conform to SCClHJil
4213_7.
421.5.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.5 apply to special moment 21.5.2.5 Prestressing, where used, shall sati ,'J,;' i I
frame members that form part of the scismic-force-rc 0 isting through (4), unless used in a special moment frame ;;::;
system and arc proportioned primarily to resist flexure. permitted by Section 421.8.3:
These frame members shall also satisfy the following
conditions; I. The average prestress, .I;"., calculated for an arca (
to the smallest cross-sectional dimension or [i l (',
421.5.1.1 Factored axial compressive force on the meillber, member multiplied by the perpcndicular cro.\~;":: ' >: ;;,"
P shall110t exceed (A,J/IO).
II ,
dimension shall not exceed the smaller or 3.5 1\-) i';i Hii\;
/' 110.
421.5.1.2 Clear span for the members, /", sha!1 not be less
than fOllr times its crfectivc depth.
2. Prestressing steel shall be unbonded in potential plastic shall have their 90~degree hook.1.i at opposite sides of th e
hinge regions. and the calculated strains ill prestressing flexural member. If the longitudinal reinrorcing bars
sieel under the design displacement shall be less than I secured by the crosslies arc confined by a slab on only one
percent s;ide of the flexural frame member, the 90-degree hooks of
the crossti es shaJI all be placed on that side.
3. Prestressing steel shall 1101 contribute 10 more than one-
qU<111er of (he posi (i ve or negative flexura l si rength at
the criti cal section in a plastic hin ge region and shall be 421.5.4 Shear Strength Requirements
anchored at or beyond the exterior face of (he joint.
421.5.3.4 Where hoops arc not required , sti rrups wit h 421.6.1.1 The short cst cros!Hicctional dimensi on, measured
seism ic hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a distallce not 011 IIstrai ght line passing through the geometric ccnt~~i.d,
more than tll2 throughout Ille length or the member. shall not be less (ban 300 mOl. .
42],5.3.5 Stirrups or ti c.Ii required ({) fcs ist sheilI' shall bc 421.6.1.2 The ratio of the shortest cross-sec tional
hoops ove r lengths of members il S specified in Sections dimension 10 the perpendicular dimension shall not be less
42 1.5.3.1. Ihan 0.4.
th
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum a 1
4-120 CHAPTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete
421.6.2.1 Flexural strength of any column shall satisfy 421.6.4.1 Transverse reinforcement as required in ~"'er' ) " )S
Section 421.6.2.2 or 421.6.2.3. 421.6.4.2 through 421.6.4.4 shall be provided ov,,'" ". ·,,'h
10 from each joint face and on both sides of allY .'-;('.r' 'In
421.6.2.2 The flexural strengths of the columns shall satisfy where flexural yielding is likely to occur as :\ i(~S!lj if
Eq.421-1. inelastic lateral displacements of the frame. Length /0 c;L:tll
LM", " (6!5)LM"r, (421-1) not be less than the largest of (I). (2), and (3):
421.6.3.1 Area of longilUdinal reinforcement, A~I> shall not 421.6.4.4 Amount of transverse reinforcement required ill
be less than 0.01 Ag or more than 0.06 Ai." (I) or (2) shall be provided unless a lar!V:i' ;::;" ,I liin ,.,
required by Section 421.6.5.
421.6.3.2 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section I. The volumetric ratio of spiral or ( i \, I::
421.3.6. J and welded splices shall conform to Section reinforcement, P." shaH not be less than rcqllircd by !
421.3.7.1. Lap splices shall be permitted only within the 421-3:
center hall' of the member length, shall be designed as
tension lap splices, and shall be enclosed within transversc P. = O. I 2 f",. 1/;., {i::?l,
reinforcemcnt conforming to Sections 42! .6.4.2 and and sha!ino( be less than required by L~q
421.6.4.3.
2. The total cross-sectional area of j-;,:;
reinforcement, A,,,, shall not be Jess tlv" !( l[' '(Ii
A,." = O.09(.rb,.!',./f,.,) (42 1-5) the joint. In no case shall Vt' he less til'1I1 .the fac tored shear
determined by analysis of the s l!uctUrc.
42).6.4.5 JJeyond Ihe Icngl h I" speeiJied in Seelion
421.6.4. 1, the colullln shall contain spiral or hoop 421.6.5.2 Transverse reinforce ment over the length s 1//.
reinforcement salisfying Secti on 407. 10 wilh celller-IO- identified in Section 42 1.6.4.1, shHII be propol1ioned to
ccnler spacing. s, not exceedi ng the smaller of six tinllcs the resist shear assuming VI" :;; 0 when both of the following
diameter of the smallest longitudinal column bars and 150 conditions occur:
mnl, unless <I larger amou nt of transverse reinforcement is
req uired by SCClions 42 I .6.3.2 or 42 I .6.5.
I. The earthquake-induced shear force, calculated in
accordance with Secti on 421.6.5. 1, represe nts onc- balf
or mo re of the max imum requ ired shear strength within
421.6.4.6 Columns supporting react ions from discOlllinucd
I,,;
stiff members. such as walls, shall satisfy (I) and (2):
2. The factored ax ial co mpressive force, PII , including
J. Transverse rei nfo rcement as spec ified in Sectio ns
ca nhquake effeels is less Iha n A,t,120.
42 1.6.4.2 lilrollgh 42 1.6.4 .4 shall be provided over
their full height beneath the le vel at whi ch the
di scontinuity occurs if the factored axia l com p r,~ssivc 421.7 Jointl) of Special Mom ent Frames
force in these members, relmed to earthquake eCfect,
exceeds AJ·J IO. Where design forces have been 421.7.1 Scope
magn ifi ed 10 aCColl nt for the over slrenglh of" the
ven ical clements of the seismic-foree-resisting system , Requ irements of Section 42 1.7 npp ly to beam-column joints
Ihe limi l of AI.: /I 0 ,baJJ be illcrea,ed 10 A"f.'/4. of" special moment frames formin g pan of the seismic-
force~resisting systelll.
2. Transverse reinforcement sha!1 ex tend illto the
di sco minllcd member at least Id the l:lrgesl
longitudina l bar, where Id is determined ill 421.7.2 General Requirements
accordance with Section 421.7.5. Where th e lower
e nd of the colum n terminates on a wall , th e req uired 421.7.2.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforce ment at the
tran sverse re inforcemcnt shaH ex tend into the joint face shall be determined by assu min g thaI the stress in
wall il! . least Id of the larges t longitudinal column the flexurallcns ile reinforceme nt is 1.251;..
bar at the pain t of terminatioll . Where the column
lerminHtcs on a footing or mat, the required 421.7.2.2 Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a
tra nsve rse reinforcemcnt shall extend at least 300 Illm column shall be ex tend ed to the far face of the confined
into the footing or mal. column co re and anchored in tension accordi ng to Seclion
42 J .7.5, and ill compression according to Section 4 J 2.
42) .6.4.7 If the concrete cover olll side the confi ning
In.lllsversc reinrorce me nt specified in Sections 42 1.6.4 . 1. 421.7.2.3 Where longi tud inal beam reinforcement ex ten ds
421.6.4 .), and 421.6.4.0 exceeds 100 mm, add itiona l through a beam-colulllll joint, the column dimensioll
transvcrse reinron.:clllcnt shall be provided . Concretc ,cover parallel to lhe beam reinforcement s hall not be less th an 20
for addi tional transverse rei nforcemen t shall not exceed 100 ti mes [he diameter of the largest longilUd inal bar for
mill and SI)ac ing of additional transverse rein forcc:mcnt normal weight concrete. For lightweight conc rete, the
shall nOI exceed JO() 111m. dimension shall not be less tha n 26 times the bar diameter.
421.7.3.3 -Longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the For lightweight aggregate concrete, the development Icngth ,
column core shall be confined by transverse reinforcement l,th for a bar with a standard 90·degree hook shall not be les!-;
passing through lhe column that satisfies spacing than the. largest of IDrib. 190 mm. and 1.25 times that
req uirements of Section 421.5.3.2, and requirements of requ ired by Eq . 421-6.
Sections 421.5.3.3 and 421.5.3 .6, jf such confin ement is not
provided by a beam framing into the joi nt. The 90-dcgree hook shall be locatcd within the co nfincd
core of'l column or of a bound;lry member.
421.7.4 Shear Strength 421.7.5.2 For bar sizes 10 mill through 36 nun dimncter, lh l.!
development length II' for it straigh t har shall not be Ics~:
421.7.4.1 The nominal Sheil[ strength VII! of the joint shal! than the larger of ( I ) and (2):
nOt be taken greate r than the va lues specified below for
normal weight aggregate concrete. I. times (he leng(h required by Section 421.7.5.1 if (he
depth of the concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar
For joints confined on all four faces . .. .. 1.7 .[1;Aj docs not exceed 300 111m: and
For jOinls confi ned on three faces or on two opposite
2. times the length required by Section 421.7.5.1 if th e
faces J.2 .[1;A/ depth of the concrete cast in one lift bencath the.
bar exceeds 300 mm.
For others 1.0.[1;A/
421.7.5.3 Strai ght bars terminated i.l1 a JOInt shall pa s~
A member Ihal frames illio a face is considered to provide through the con fined co re of a coluilln Or o f 11 boundary
con fin cment to the joint if at least three·fourths of the face mcmber. Any portion of the strai ght embedment length, 1.1
of the joint is covered by the framing member. Extensions no t withi n the confined core shall be increascd by a factor
of beams at least one overall beam depth" beyond the joint of 1.6.
face are permitted to be considered ali confining members.
Exteilsions of beams shall satisfy Sections 421.5. 1.3. 421.7.5.4 If epoxy-coated reinforce ment is used, the
4 2 1.5.2.1, 42 1.5.3.2, 421.5.3.3, alld 421.5.3.6. A joint is develo pment lengths in Sections 421.7 .5.1 through
co nsid ered to be co nfin ed if such confining mcmbers frame 421.7 .5.3 shall be multiplied by (he applicable factor
into all faces of the joint. specificd ill Section 412 .3.4 or 412.6.2.
AI is the effective cross·sec{jonal area within :t join! 421.8 Special neinforccd COllcrc(' Structllral ':Valls and
computed from joint depth times effective joint width. JOlm Coupling Beams
depth shall be the overall depth of the column , II . Effective
joint width shall be the overall width of the colum n. except
where a beam frames inlo a wider column, elTectivc joi nt 421.8.1 Scope
width , halllla< exceed the smaller of (I) alld (2): The requircments of Section 421.8 apply 10 special rein ·
I. Bea m width plus join< depth : forced concrete structural walls and coupling bealns serving
as part of th e earthquake forcc-res isting sys tem. SpCCl;;!
2. Twice the smaller pcrpcndi culill' distan ce from structural walls constructed using precast conc rcte !-illa;!
longi tudinal <lxis of beam to column side. 'l lso comply with Section 421. 15.
: 421.H.2.2 A! leasl two curtain s of reinfon.: cmcm shall be one of the individual wall picrs, v" shall not bc takcn larger
. used in a wa ll if V" cx.n·cus ( 1/6)A"J.J1.. th an 0.8311 ..... . where A, .... is the afca of t:oncrctc sectioll o f"
the indiv jdlml pic r considered .
421.8.2.3 Reinforcement jn ~Irtl (;turil l willis s hall he 421.8.4.5 For horil',ontal wa ll segme nts and coupli ng
developed or spliced for ./;, ill tension in <It'cordance with
Section 4 12 except: beams, \/" slHl Ii not bc t;lkcn !<lrgcr than (5/6)A '1. JT·,-
421.8.4.1 Nomi nal shear strengt h VII of structural walls 421.8.6.1 The need for special boundary elcmenls at the
shall not exceed: edges of structural walls shall be evaluated in accordance
wit h Secti on 42 1.8.6.2 or 421.8.6.3. The requirements of
\I" = A,,·I CI,.(i112 ))',fJ; + p,f, J (42 1-7)
Seeli ons 42 1.8.6.4 and 421.8.6.5 also shall be salislied.
where Ihe cocfficielll CI,. is 0.25 for 11.11". ~ 1.5, is 0.17 for
42J.8.6.2 This scction applies to walls or wall piers that
hJ/II" ~ 2.0, and varies linearl y between O.2~ and 0.17 for
are effectively continuous from the base of structure to top
11,11... belweell I .5 alld 2.0.
of wall aud designed to ha ve a single critical section for
fl ex ure and ax ial loads. Walls not satisfyi ng these
421.8.4.2 In Seelion 421.8.4. 1. Ihe val lie of ,"Iio 11,/1 .. lIsed
requirements shall be designcd by Section 42J .7.6.3.
for dctemlining V for segments of a wall shall be the larger
Il
of the rati os fOf th e entire wall and the segme nt of wall J. Compression z.ones shal! be reinforced with special
co nsid ered . bou ndary clcmenls where:
421.8.4.3 Walls Sh:lll have distril.nllcd shear rei nforcemcnt c ~ .=--,/~._- (42 1-8)
providing resistan ce in \1,1,10 orthogonal directio ns ill [he 600(0.' '' .>
plane of th e wall. If" th e ratio h"l/". docs nOI e.xceed 2.0.
reinforccment I"il!io PI' sh;lil not be less than rcinforccmcnt c in Eq. 421-8 corrcsponds 10 the largest ncu tral (IX is
nltio p". depth calculated fo r the factored ax ial rorce and
nominal moment st rength consistent with the design
421.8.4.4 Nominal shear strength of all wall piers sharing a di splacement ()u. Ratio 6.. 111\1' in Eq. 421-8 shall not be
Common lateral fortc, Vn shall not be assumed to exceed laken less Ih an 0.007.
(2/3)An' \~J whcre An. is the gross arca of concrete 2. Whcrc special boundary clements are required by
bounded by web th ick ness and length of section. For any Seelion 421.7.6.2 (I), Ihe spec ial boundary elemenl
reinforcemen! shall extend YCl1ically fcom the crit ical
seclion it dis{i\JlcC no! less than lhe larger Ilf / .._or M"
42 J .8.6.S Where special boundary clements arc not rC'ql!in~d
/(4 \I..}.
hy Section 42 1.8.6.2 or 421.8.6.3, the following ~L.!l ;.;:
satisfied:
421.8.6.3 Structural walls nol designcd to th e provisions of
Section 421.8.6.2 shall have special boundary elcmen!s al I. If the longitudinal reinforce-ment ratio al thL' ;~',.i;
boundaries and edges arou nd openings of structural walls houndary is grealer than 2.8/];. boundary tran;; \'( ': .
where the Jll<lximuill extreme fiber compressive strcss, reinforcement shall satisfy Sections 421.6.4.2, ,i;
corresponding 10 load combinations including earthquake 421.8.6.4 (I). The maximum longitudinal spacing 0)'
effect, E, exceeds 0.2/,:. The special boundary elcment shall transverse reinforc ement ill the boundary shall :, 01
be permitted to be <l:<.;co ntinucd where the calculated exceed 200 Jlllll ;
compressive su·ess is less than O.15f'~. Stresses shall be
2. Except whell VII in the plane of the w;!l1 h; it.:,:;
calculated for the facLOrcd forces usi ng a linearly elastic
model and gross sect io)) properties. For wa lls wi th Oanges. {han ( 1/12)A •.,.ff,., llorizontal reinftl/"t·t· ;'i:· ..;
an effective nange width as defined in Section 421.8.5.2 Icrminaling 81 Ihe edges of struclUral Willi ·; ·.'.il ! ~ I)u t
shaH be used. boundary elements shall have a stand m·j ··-::L
engaging th e edge rei nforcement or the "dgc
421.8.6.4 Where special boundary clements are required reinforcement shall be enclosed in U·stirn1p:. ::".... ,}
by Section 421.8.6.2 or 421.8.6.3, through (I) through (5) the same size and spacing as. and spliced :l\ ik·
shall be satisfied: horizontal reinforcement.
I. The boul1d~lry clement shall extend horizontfllly from
the extreme co mpression fibe r a dislance 110t less 421.8.7 Coupling Hea llls
than the larger of c ~ 0.11". <lnd (.'/2 . where c is th e
largest neutral axis depth calculated for the factored 421.8.7.1 Coupling beams with aspect ratio 'II Id -;;' { :1):., 0
axial force and nominal moment strength consistent satisfy {he requirements of Section 421.5. The prm'i. ,;·.' ·
with "II; Sections 421.5.1.3 and 421.5.1.4 shall not be rcquir",,~ Ii H
2. In flanged sections, the boundary clement shall include ca n be shown by analysis that the beam has adcqllal(~ )('(:1 '
the effective flange width in compression and shall "ability.
extend at least 300 mm into (he web;
421.8.7.2 Coupling beams wi lh aspect ralio, /" II! ..-: 2, ;!Jld
3. Special boundary element transverse reinforcement with faclOrcd shear force V". exceed ing (1I3V \{ i ., A•. ~
shal l satisfy the requirements of Se~ t ions 421.6.4.2
shall be reinforced with two intersecting grou /!"- 1)1 ;;i:lr:-
th rough 421.6.4.4, except Eq . 421-4 need not be
onally placed bars symmetrical about the midspan, \II ,j- ':s it
satisfied and the transverse reinforcement spacing limit
of Section 421.6.4.3(1) shall be one-third of the least can be shown thaI loss of stiffness and strength ol Ihe
dimension of the boundary elemcl1I; cou pling beams will not impair the vertical load c:· ·'I!lg
capacity of the structure, or the egrcss from the stnll:l f"',!J.
4. Special boundary elemem transverse reinforcement at the integrity of nonstruclUral com ponents itlHi ;· :t·,.
the wall base shall extend in to the support at least the connections 10 the Slnlcturc.
development length , ld' according to Section 421.8.2.3,
of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the special 421.8.7.3 Coupling beams nOI governed by Sr·:·! j"
boundary element unless the special boundary element 421.8.7. 1 or 421.8.7.2 shall be permitted to he: .,' ; i' )
terminates all a footing or mat, where special boundary either with two intersecting groups of bars f-Y;: ,:!"';
element transverse reinforcement sha ll extend at least about the midspan, or according to Sections ,1) 1 ~\ "-
300 mill into the footing or mat ; through 421.5.4.
5. Horizon tal reinforcement in (he wall web shall be
anchored to develop the specified yie ld strenglh f". ;:f
wilhin (he confined core of (he boundary element; .
421.8.7.4 Coupling beams rcillror<.·t~d w ith (WO intcl'<;ccling 421.8.8 Construction Joint~
gro ups III' diagollally placed hm '~ sj'IIlIHelricid ilbout Ihe A ll construction joints ill structu ra l walls shall con form to
midspan shall salisfy (I). (2). and cilher (3) nr (4). Section 406.4 and contac t su rr<lccs shall be roughened as in
Requirell1enls or
Secti on 411.9 sh<lllnut allply: Seclion 411.8.9.
1. The nominal shear stn..:nglh. VII' sImI! be determined
by: 421.8.9 Discontinuous Walls
(42 1-9) Co lumns supporting discontinuous structuml Willis shall be.
reinforced in accorda nce with Section 421.6.4.6.
2. Etlch grmlp or di<lgonal hars shall consist of <I
minimum of four bars provided in two Of more layers.
421.9 Structural Diaphragms and Trusses
The di clgonal bar.> sha ll be embedded into the wall not
less than 1.25 times (he devclopmem knglh ror /; in
te nsion. 421.9.1 Scope
Floor and roof slabs acting as Sll1Jc lUral diaphragms to
3. Eile l! grou p of diagonal hars shall be enclosed
Iransmit design :'lc tiollS ind uced by ea rthquake ground
by transverse reinforcement having oul-(o-out
motions shall be designed in accordance with this Sec ti on
d imensions not smaller than b,/2 in thc direction
42 1.9. Th!:-; Section also applies to strul S, ti l!s, c hords, and
paralicilO b w <lIld b,,!.') along the ot her si des, where b".
co llector clements th at transmit forces induced by
is the web width or the coupling bcam . The earthquakes, as well as tru sses servi ng as parts of the
Iransvcrse re infon.:ement s/Jal l satisfy Sections ea rthquake force-resisting sys tc ms.
42 I .6.4 .2 and 42 I .6.4.4. shall have spacing meas ured
pHrailcl to Ihe diagonal bars satisfyin g Scclion
421.6.4.3 (3 ) and not exceeding six times th e diam cter 421.9.2 Design Forces
o r the diagona l bars, and shall have spacing of cJ'()~s ti es The seismic design forces for stru ctural diaphragms shall be
or legs of hoops measured perpendi cu lar w tIle obta ined from {he lateral load analysis in accorda nce with
diagonal bars no t excecding 350 mill . For Ihe purpose the design load combinatiolls .
of compu tin g AN for usc ill Eqs. 410-6 and 421 · 4, the
conCre te cover as required in Section 407.8 sha ll be
421.9.3 Seismic Load Path
ass umed on ~lll rour sides of each grou p of diC!lgonal
bars. 11le transverse re info rcement , or its alterna.ti vely 421.9.3.1 Alr diaphragms and the ir connect ions shall be
conligured tr<tllsverse reinforcement satis fying the proportioned and de(ai led iO provide for a completc lransfer
spacing and volume rati o requirements of the or fo rces to coll cclOr eleme nts and to the venical clements
transverse reinforcement along the diagonals, shall of the seismic-foree-resisting syste m .
conti nue through the intersection of the diagonal bars.
Additional longitudinal and transverse reinforcement 421.9,3.2 Elemcnts of a stnlctural diaphragm system thai
shall be distributed around the bcam perimeter with are subjected primarily to axial forces and used to transfer
lotal area ill each direction not less than O.002blos and diaphragm shear or flexura l forces around openings or other
spacing not exceeding 300 mm. discont in ui ljes, shall comply with the requirements for
4. Transverse reinforcement shall be provided for the colleclors in Seclions 421.9.7.5 and 421.9.7.6.
entirc beam cross section satisfying Sections 421 .6,4,2.
421.6.4.4, ..md 421.5 .4.2. with long iludina l splicin g l10t 421.9.4 Cast-in-Place Composite-Topping Slab
exceeding the smalle r of 150 mm and six times the Diaphragms
diamcter o f the diagoll<ll b<ll's, and with s paci r:lg o r A composite-lopping slab Gast in place o n i.l precast noor or
c rosslies or legs of hoops both verticall y and roof s hall be pcrlllitt ccl io he used .1S a strucltlral diaphragm
horizon tall y in the plane of the bea m cross sect io n not provi ded the lOpping slab is rei nforced <111(1 it s connections
exceedi ng 200 mill. Each crosslie and each hoo")) leg arc proportioned and detailed to pmv id e for a co mpl ete
shall e n g~\gc a longitudinal b<lf of equal or ~a rge r transfer o f forces 10 chords, collector elements. and the
diameter. h sha ll be permined to configure hoo ps as late ral-force-resisting system. The surface of the previously
specifi ed in Seclion 421.5.3.6. hardened concrete all which the topping sial.> is placed shall
be clean, free of iaitance, and intenti onall y roughened.
tll
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
4 · 12() CHAPT!: R 4 _. SlflIClliral ConOelC
421.9.5 Casl-in-Plner Topping Slab Diaphragms res isting sys tem, thc limi! of 0.2[. ' shall he ilKTc;!scd to
A cast -in-pl;\(,.'c non-l:ompOSilc lOpping on a prccast Ooor or O.v.', and the limit ofO . I S]; ' shall be increased In 0.4[,,' .
roof shall be penni lied 10 serve as a struclural di'lphragm,
provided the casi-i n-place lopping acting alone is 421.9.7.6 LongilUdi nal reinforceme nt 1'0.. colleclor
propol1ioncd and dCI<ti led lO resisllhe design forccs. cleme nts iii splices alHI illlchoragc I'.ones shall have either:
shear plane. Area of distributed reinforccment in topping 421.10.2.3 Columns or boundary clements of special
slab shall satisfy Scction 407.13.2.1 in cach direction. reinforced concrete structural walls that have an edge
within one-half the footing depth from an edge of the
421.9.9.4 Above joints betwecn precast elemerlls in footing shall have transverse reinforcement in accordance
noncomposite and composite cast-in-place topping slab with Sections 421.6.4.2 through 42 J .6.4.4 provided below
diaphragms, VII shall not exceed the jimits in Section the top of the footing. This reinforcement shaH extend into
411.8.5 where Ac is computed using the thickness of the the fOOling a distance no less than the smaller of the depth
topping slab only. of the footing, mat, or pile cap, or the development length
in tension.
421.9.10 Construction Joints
421.10.2.4 Where earthquake effects create uplift forces in
All construction joints in diaphragms shall conform to boundary elements of special rcinforced concrete structural
Section 406.4 and contact surfaces shall be roughened as in waHs or columns, flexural reinforcement shall be provided
Section 411.8.9. in the top of the footing, mat or pile cap to resist the design
load combinations, and shall not be less than required by
421.9.11 Structural Trusses Section 410.6.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~ ...
421.10.4.2 Piles, piers, or caissons rl!~i~ ling tens iull loaus it shall be pcnllllll'd 10 ap ply th:.: rl· lltl i rl..~lll l'l lI .... of Sect ion
shall ha ve continuous longitudill'll fcillforccmcill over the 421. 11.4 . For two way ~ " Ibs wi thuut bl"!.iI11S, slab.colul1l1l
length resisting design tension fon:cs. The longitud inal cnnnccliolls slwli 1l1L'I,.' ! Ihe rl'lj ll in.: mcllIs of Secti o jj
reinforce ment shall bc dChlilcd to trans fer (c nsion forces 42 1.11.6.
within the pile ca p 10 ~u pport cd structu ral members.
421.1 1.3 Wh ere !he indu ced 1ll011H!lIl s al1d shears under
421.10.4.3 Where tension fon..: es illdu~cd by earthquake design displ acement.. . of Sl"l"liOIl 421. I 1.2 combil1ed with
effects <Irc transfe rred between pile cap or mal foundat io n Ihe factored gravity mome nts and shean.; do 110 t exceed the
and precast pile by reinforcin g bars grou ted or p(l s t ~ design moment and shear strength of tl w frame lIlelllber, thl~
il :wllled in the lOp of the pile, the grouting. system shall conditions of Sc(.:tions 421.! 1. )', 1, 421 . 11.l .". an.; !
.il
have been Ul!lIIollstratcd by test to develop al least 125 ~2 I .1 1.33 shall he satisfied. For this purpose, the l:r:l vi h
perccnt of the speci ti.cd yield st rength of the b(tr. IOCld combi nat ions ( 1.21)+ I .OL+O.·2S) Or 0.9D. whicl ;t~"e r ·i·~
critical. sh<lll bc used. The Imld fa ctor on the live b .ld !
421.10.4.4 Piles, piers. or caissons shall havc transverse sha ll be pcrmincd 10 he reduced 10 0.5 except for !!;!I·;lt~\:·::
reinforcemellt in accordance with Secti ons 42 1.6.4 .2 areas occupied (I S places o r publ i<: asscmbly. ~I!ld all a r~:;i ~
through 42 1.6.4.4 at the following locati ons: where L is greater tha n 4.M kN/m:'.
1. AI the lap of the member fo r at teast .') limes the
421.J 1.3.1 Members with fac tored gravity a xi al forces !l O!
member cross-sectional dime nsion, hut nol less than
exceeding AJ'.I10 shill I satisfy Sections 42 1.).:?!. Stirrup'i
1.8 Ill. below the bUllom of the pile cap:
sha ll be spaced not more th;111 tll2 throu ghout the length of
2. For the portion of piles in soil that is not capahJc o f thc mcmber.
pro vidi ng lateral support, or in air and water, alon g th e
entire unsupPol1ed length plus th e length required in 421.11.3,2 Members with factored gra vi ty ax ial fo rces
Section 42 I. I O.4. 4( I). exceeding A!lj"",/IU, shall satisfy Sections tl21.6. 3.J,
42 ! .6.4.2, and 421 .6.5. Thc rnaxilllllill longitud illr!! ~;paci : i }:
421.10.4,5 For precast concrete driven piles, the length of or tics shall be S,/ for Ihe full column height. The s}xlCi pg s,)
transverse reinforcemel1t provided shall be suffi cient to shall not exceed the smaller of six diamet ers of (ile ;\!\Wlk:,l
account for potential varia tions in the elc.vlI tion in pile tips. longillldinal bar e nc losed, and 150 111m.
421.10.4.6 Conc rete piles, piers, or caissons in foundmions 421.11.3.3 Members wilh factored gra vity axiili fl)r('(~':
supporting one- and two-story stud bearing wall exceeding O.35 P" shall satisfy Secti ons 421.1 1.3.2 ;:J!d
construction are exempt from the tr<'ll sverse re inforcement 421.6.4.7. The amount of transverse rei nforccBwHt providt·,j
requirements of Sections 42 1. 10.4.4 and 421.10.4.5. shall be one~ h alf of that required by Section 41.1 .(l.4.4 bUI
shall not exceed a spacing S(I for the full mem ber lenglh.
421.10.4.7 Pile caps incorpora ting bauer piles shall be
designed to resi st the full compressive strength of the bauer 421,11.4 Ir the inuuccd moment or shell r II nd'-!" design
piles act ing as short columns. The slendemess effects of displacements , (5", exceeds ¢Mn or ¢V., (Il" t;:c; fram t
balter piles shall be considered for the pOl1ion of ihc pi les in member, or ir
ind uced moments ;ue not cal: .· l;M:d, H1C
soil that is not capable of providing laterClI support, or in air co nditions of Sect io ns 421.11.4.1, 421 .11.·:.2, au d
or water. 421.1 1.4.3 shall be sati sfied.
depending all the magnitude of moments induced in those 421.6.5 and 421.7.3. J.
members if subjected to the desi gn di splacement, 0". If
effects of design displacements arc not explicitly checked,
421.11.5 I)rccast C()Jlcrctc frame mcmbers assLJmcd llot to reinforcement details in any span resisting moments caused
contributc to lateral resistance, including their cOllnections, by lateral force /:.; shall satisfy Section 421.12.6.
shall satisfy (I), (2), and 0), in addition to Sections
421.11.2 through 421.11.4: 421.12.3 Design shear strength of beams, ¢VII' and
J. Tics specificd ill Section 42l.lJ.3.2 shall be provided columns resisting earthquake effect E shall not be less than
over the elltire colullln height, including the dl~pth of the smaller of (1) and (2):
the beams; I. The sum of the shear associated with development of
2. Structural integrity rcinforcement, as specified in nominal moment strengths of the member at each
Section 416.6, shall be provided; and retrained !!pd of the clear span and the shear calculated
for factored gravity loads;
3. Bearing length at support of a beam shall be at least 50
mm longer than determined frolll calculations 2. The maximum shear obtained froln design load
using bearing strength values from Section 41O.18. combinations that include earthquake effect E, with E
assumed to be twice that prescribed in Section 208.
421.11.6 For slab-column connections of two-way slabs
without beams, slab shear reinforcement satisfying the 421.12.4 Beams
requirements of Sections 411.13.3 and 411.13.5 and
providing V~ not less than 0.29 JT
b;;d shall extend at least 421.12.4.1 The positive moment strength at the face of the
four times the slnb thickness frolll the face of the support, joint shall be not less than one-third the negative moment
unless either (I) or (2) is satisfied: strength provided at that face of the joint. Neither the
negative nor the positive moment strength at any section
J. The requiremcllts of Section 411. I 3.7 using the
along the length of the member shall be less than one-fifth
design shear \lug and the induced moment transferred the maximum moment strength provided at the face of
between the slab and column under the design
either joint.
displacement;
2. The design story drift ratio docs not exceed the larger 421.12.4.2 At both ends of the member, stirrups shall be
orO.D05 and [0.035 - 0.05(1I,,/¢II,)). provided over lengths equal to twice the member depth h
measured from the face of the supporting member toward
Design story dri ft rati.o shall be taken as the larger of the midspan. The first stiITIlp shal! be located at not more than
design story drift ratios of the adjacent stories above and 50 mm from the face of the supporting member. Maximum
below the slab-column connection. Ve is defined in Section stirrup spacing shall not exceed the smallest of:
411.13.2. Vug is the factored shear force on the slab critical I. d/4;
section for two-way action, calculated for the load
combination 1.2D + I.OL + 0.2S. 2. Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal
bar enclosed;
The load factor on the live load, L, shall be permitted to be 3. Twenty four times the diameter of the stirrup bar; and
reduced to 0.5 except for garages, areas occupied as places
4. 300 nun.
of public assembly, and all areas where L is greater than 4.8
kN/m2
421.12.4.3 Stirrups shall be placed at not morc than dl2
throughout the length of the member.
421.12 Requirements for Intermediate I\1oment Frames,
Seismic Zone 2
421.12.5 Columns
421.12.1 The requirements of Section 421.12 apply to
421.12.5.1 Columns shall be spirally reinforced in
intermediate moment frames forming part of the scismic-
accordance with Sections 407.11.4 or shall conform with
force-resisting system in addition to those of Sections 401
Sections 421.12.5.2 through 421.12.5.4. Section 421.12.5.5
through 418.
shal! apply to all colulllns, and Section 421.12.5.6 shall
apply to all columns supporting discontinuous stiff
421.12.2 Reinforcement details in a frame member shall
members.
satisfy Section 421.12.4 if the factored compressive axial
load for the member does not exceed At/'jlO. If Pil is
larger, frame reinforcement details shall satisfy Section
421.12.5. Where a two-way slab system without beams
forms a part of the seisI1lic~force-resisting system,
421.12.5.2 AI both ends of the column. hoops shall be 421.12.6.2 Reinforcemcnt placed wililin the effect i Ve
pro vided ill sp:lci ng SOl Over "I length I" measu red from thc widt h speci fi ed in Secti on 4 11.6.3.2 shall be propo l1 io ncd
j Oi lll facc. Spacing .\'/. sha ll !lot exceed the small e st oj' (I). to resis t 11A'I~loIIr Efl'cctive slab wid th for exte rior and co rnel'
(2). (3). and (4); l:l>nncclions shall not ex tend beyond the column face a
distance grc<I1c r than (", mcasured perpendi cular to the s lab
I. Ei gh t times the diametcr or the smallest longi tudinal
sp an .
bar enclosed;
2. 24 times the diameter of the lic bar: 421.12.6.3 Not Jess than o ne~halr of the reinforce ment in
Ihe column strip at SUppOI1 shall be placed wi thin the
3. Onc·llUlf of the smallest cross sccti oll <l l dimcn":')Jl of
effecti ve slab width specified in Secti on 4 13.6.3.2.
thc column ; ~i,nd
4. 300 nlln 421.12.6.4 Nol less Ihan one-fou rt h o[ Ihe lOp
reinfo rcement at the support in the column strip sll<l ll be
Lenglh I" shall nOI be less Ihall Ihe largesl 0 [:
cont inuous th roughout lhe span.
I. One·sixlh of the clear span of the membc.r;
421.12.6.5 Continuous bottom reinforcement in the
2. Ma xi mulll cross-sectional dimension of the column;
column strip shall be not less than o ll c~third of the top
and
reinforcement at the support in the column slIip.
3. 450 mm.
421.12.6.6 NOl less Ihan one-hair o[ all bOllom
421.12.5.3 The first lie shall be loc,ated at not more th an re inforcement and all bottom column strip reinforcement at
s./l fro m the joint face. midspan shall he cominuous and sllflll de velop its yield
strenglh, .f;., at f<lce of support as defined in Section
421.12.5.4 Outside the length 1,,, spacing of transvcrse 41 3.7.2.5.
reinforcem ent shall conform (() Sections 407.1! and
411.6.5. 1. 421.12.6_7 Al di sconlinuous edges o [ Ihe slab all lOp and
bOllom reinforcement at suppon shall be and shall be
421.12.5.5 l oi nt reinforcement shal l conform to Section deve loped at the face of suppo n as defi ned in Section
411.1 2. 4 13.7.2.5.
421.12.5.6 Columns suppol1ing reac ti ons fro m 421.12.6.8 At th e critical sec tions for columns defined in
discontinuous stiff members, such as walls, shall be Section 4 I 1.13.1.2, lwo ~ way shear caused by factored
provided wilh transverse reinforcement at th e spacing, s," as gra vity loads shall not exceed O.4¢Vr' where Vt shall be
defined in Seclion 42 1.12.5.2 over Ihe [ul1 heighI benealh calculmed as defined in Sectio n 411.1 3.2. 1 for
the le vel at whi ch the discontinuit y occurs if (he porti on of nonprestrcssed slabs and in Seelioll 411 .13.2.2 for
fac tored axial co mpressive force in these mem bers related prestressed slabs. It shall be permitted to waive this
to earthqu ake effects exceeds AJ,' flO. Where design forces requi rement if the slab design satisfies requirements of
have becn magnified to aCCOUfl{ for the overstrenglh of the Seclion 42 1.11.6.
vertical elements of th e seismic- fo rce~resi sting system, th e
limil o[ AI,' 110 shall be increased 10 AI,' 14. This
421.13 Special Moment Frames Using Precast Concrete
transverse reinforcement shall extend above and below the
columns as required in 42 1.6.4 .6 (2).
421.13.1 Scope
421.12.6 TWO-Way Slabs Without Beams Requirements of Section 421.13 app ly to speciaJ mOlrw> t
frames conslm cteu llsin g precas t concrete fonning pari u[
the seismi c-forcc-resistin g sys tem.
421.12.6.1 Factored sltlb moment at support incl udin g
earthqllake effects. E, shall be dctennined for load
combinalions defined by &15 . 409-5 and 409-7. All 421.13.2 Special moment frames with ductile COllllcctions
reinforcement provided to re sist M,f, the pOlt ion of slab constru cted using precast co ncrete shall satisfy (I ) an d (2)
moment balanced by sllppon mome nt shall be placed within and all requirements for special moment frames constfllcll.(:
the column strip defined in Sectio n 4 13.3. 1. with cas l -i n~pl ace concrete:
I. Vn for connecti ons computed acco rding to Sf' ''!!''''
4 11 .8.4 shall nOI be less Ihan 2V, . wh,-!e L ".
caleulaled according 10 Seclion 421.5 .4.1 or 4 ?.1.('. 5.1 ;
2. Mechanical splices of beam reinforcement shal! be 421.14.3 Columns having clear height less than or equal
located not closer than hl2 from the joint face and shall (0five times the dimension c,
shall be designed for shear in
meet the requirements of Sections 42! .3.6. accordance with Section 421.12.3.
421.14.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.14 apply to ordinary moment
frames forming part of the seismic-foree-resisting system.
422.1 Nolalions
422.3. 1 Provisions of Section 422 shall apply for design of
Ax = gross <lrca o f sec ti on, mm:! s tru ctural pl ai n concrete members defined as eith er
AI = loaded <lrca, 111m 2 unreinforccd or cont;ti nin g less rr:;nforcement than t h;:o:
A2 = the .Irea of the lower base of the hu·gcsl frustum of minimum alllount specified in thi s code ror rcinforl:(.·,- ! j,
.1 pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge co ntai ned
concretc. See Secti on 402. .j
wholly within the suppon and havi ng for its upper
base the loaded area, and having side slopes of I
422.3.2 Use of structural plain concrete shall be limited to :
vertical to 2 horizontal. mm?
b :: widt h o f member, mm I. Members that arc contin uously supported by soil or
b" :: perimeter of criti cal secti on for shear Ln footings. supported by other structural members capablc of
111111 provid ing conti nu ous vertical suppo rt ;
8" :: nominal bearing load
2. Members for whi c h arch act ion provides compress io n
/" . :: specified co mpressi ve stre ngth o f co nc rete. MPa
under a ll condit ions of loadin g; or
Sec Seci ion 405
ff :: square root of specified co mpressive s-t rcnglh of 3. Wall, and pedestals. Sec Secli ons 422.7 and 422.9.
Assoc iali ol1 of S tructura l Eng ineers of the Phil ipp ine s
CHAP rt:= n -1 .• StrllcllI ra l Concrete 4- 133
421-.5 Design Method 422.6.2 Des ign of cross scc t ion~ subject In comrrcs~i()11
shall he based on:
422.5.1 StmcIlIfil l plain concre te membe rs shall be
(JPt! ~ P" (422-4)
~ des igned for adcquill c sire ngth in accordallce WiLh the code,
/: using load faclOrs and design strength . whe re PI' is factored load Hnd »11 is nomin al com p re~s i()11
I strc ngth co mputed by:
I 422.5.2 Factored load s and forces shall be in co mbinations
as in Section 409 .3 .
·1· (.32
0.60} , I - -!,---) (4 22-5)
p" 0
11 ' JA I
(422-10)
422.5.8 When comput ing strength in flexure. combined
flex ure and axial load, and shear, the ent ire cross section of
a member shall be considered in des ign. except fo r conc rete
for two-way aClion but nol greater than O.22.l../T: bjl.
cast aga ins t soil where overa ll thi c kness II sha ll be take n as
50 mm less tha n act ual thi c kness . In Eq . 422- 10./1 correspo nd s '0 rat io of long s ide 10 short
sid e of co ncentrated load or reaclion area.
422.6 Strength Design
422.6.5 Design of bearin g areas subject to compress ion
422.6.1 Design of cross sections subj ect to ne xure shall shall be based on:
be (422-11 )
b ased on
(422- 1) where E" is rac tored bearing load and Bn is the nomina l
bearing strength of loaded a rea A I computed by:
where Mu is factored mo me nt and Mt! is nomiB<t1 moment
strength computed by B, = 0.85!" AI (422- 12)
M" = (51J2)J../T: S," (422-2) except where the supporting surface is wider Oil all side.,
than the loaded area, design bea ring strenglh on the loaded
if tension controls, and
arca shall be m ultipli ed by JA, I A, bu. not more .han 2.
(422-3)
if compressi on contro ls, whe re. Sill is th e correspondin g
elastic section modulu s.
PfI~' = 0.45!' (~
A [1 - (-'"--)
32h 'I (422-14)
plate, for footing supporting a column with SiC": ba~:c:
plate.
422.8.6.2 ShenT strength 01" structural plain conc rete 422.J0.4 Prct:;:lst mcmbers sh311 he adcquiltcly bri.lced and
footings in the vicinity of concentnucd loads or react ions suppol1ed during erection to ensure proper alignment and
shall be governed by the more severe of two conditions: siructllml integrity until pcrmanent connections are
completed.
J. Beflln actioll for footing. with a cr il ic~1I section
extending ill H pl<llle across the enlire fooling width and
,I
loca ted at uistancc II from face of concentrated load 422.1) Plain C{)ncrete in Earthquukc·Rcsisting
or reaction areil. For this condition, th e foolin g shall be Structures
des igned in accordance with Eq. 422·9;
422.1 1.1 Stl1lctures design ed for earthquake induced forces
2. Two·way <1ctiol1 for r~)(Jting. with 11 critical secti{J\1
in regions or high scislIlic risk or assigned to high sc i~mi c
perpendicular to plane of footing and l<leated so that its
performance or design categori es. e.g. zone 4, shall not
perimeter bu is a minimum , but need not approach
have foundation elements of slnicturaJ plain concrete,
closer Ihan "12 to perimeter of concentrated load or
except as follows:
reaction area. For this condition, the footing shall be
designed in accorda nce with Eq . 422-10. I. For detached one· and Iwo·family dwellings three
stories or less in height and constructed with stud
422.8.7 Circular or regular polygon shaped concrete bearing walls, plain concrete footings without
columns or pedestal s shall be permitlcd ( 0 be (reated as longitudinal reinforce ments supponing walls and
squa re members with the same area for location of crilical isolated plain concrete footings supponing columns or
sections for moment and shear. pedestals arc permitted;
2: Fm all other Structures, pJain concrete footings
422.8.8 Factored bearing load, Bu, on concrete at contnct
supporting cast·in·place reinforced conc rete or
surface between supportillg and supported member shall not
reinforced mas onry w(llls arc permitted provided the
exceed design bearing stre ngth, ¢B'I> for eilher surface as foo tings are reinforced longit udina lly with not less than
given in Section 422.6.5.
two continuous reinforcing bars. Bars shall not be
small er than 12 111m diameter and shall have a 10lal
422.9 Pedestals area of not less thall 0.002 times the gross cross-
sectional area of the footing . Continuity of
422.9.1 Plain conc rete pedestals shall be designed for reinforcement shall be provided at comers and
vertical, lateraJ .tod other loads 10 which they are subjected. intersections;
3. For detached one· and two-family dwellings three
422.9.2 Ralio of unsupported height to average least stories or less in height and constructed with stud
lateraldimension of plain concrete pedestals shall not bearing walls, plain concrete fou ndations or basement
exceed 3. walls arc pClluitled provided lhe wall is nOl less (han
190 nun thick and retains no more than 1.2 111 of
422.9.3 Maximum factored axial load, p., applied to plain unbalanced fill.
Concrete pedestals shall nOI exceed design bearing strengt h,
¢B", given in Section 422.6.5.
1h
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
4· 136 CHAPTE R 4 -. Structural Concre te
423.1 Dcl1l1itiOIl' E DGE DISTANCE. The di s lHll tC from tl1(' ('che of the
conc rete surface to Ih e center of the nearest anc! ll)! :
ANC}fOH A stcel element either cast into co ncrete or
post·inslallcd into a hardened concrcte mcmbcr und uscd to EFFECTIV E EMIlf;DMENT DEPTH . The ("'crail <Iep,h
transmit app li ed loads, including headed bolts, hooked bolts through which the ·1I"·' hor transfers force ,,', . .; !itllll the
(J- Or L-bolt) , hetl(jed studs, expansion unchors, or undercut surft)u lldi ng concrcte. The effective cmbct!ll i:',,! ,it pt h w ill
anchors. norma lly bc the depth of the conc retc fai l1lfl: su rface in
tension application s. For cast -i n headed an,l,t,; hl,li ' and
ANCHOR GROUP. A number of anchors of headed studs, the effective embedment dep n. ,: lW:;l,Ll red
approximatcly equal effective e mbedment depth with each from the bc.:1ring comac t s urface of the head .
anchor s pnced lit less than 311 tt frolll One or more adjacent
anchors when subjected to tension or 3£.'0/ from one or more EXPANSION ANCHOn. A post-in~la ll ed :tndHlr, in·W l1ed
adjacent anchors when subjec ted to shear. Only (ho se imo hardened co ncrete that tran sfers load s It ) :H r' lIi:, the
anchors susceptible to the particular failure mode under co ncrete by direct bearing or friction or bo;;;. ;:-::I,;:I.!;ion
investigation shall be included in the group. anchors may be torque ·controlled, where tht ,- ,.j,a lisi,.Hl is
achicved by a to rqu e acting a ll the scrc\'.' 1)1' holt; or
ANCHOH PULLOUT STRENGTH. The ,treng.h displacemenl-comrollcd, where the expnnsil .j ,;", adlicved
correspo nding 10 the anchoring device or a major by impact forces acting 011 a slee ve 01 !,jll!' and the
component of the device sliding o ut fro m th e concrete expansion is cOlllro ll cd by the length of trav ri Ld (1 )(: skeve
withollt breaking out a sub stant ial portion of the or plug.
surrounding conc re te.
EX I'ANSION SLEEVE. The ou 'er pOri "I' "" ""I'",,·';on
ANCHOR RErNFOHCEMENT. Reinforcemen. used '0 anchor lhal i ~ forced outward by the cent c! p.t:!, l·illi, l by
applied torque or impact, to bear against (Iii.: ~.j(h:~ oj the
transfer the full design load from the anchors into the
structuralmcmber. Scc Section 423.5.2.9 or 423.6.2.9. predrilled hole.
ATTACHM ENT. The SlruClUral asse mbly. eXlernal.o .he FIVE PEH CENT FRACTILE. A s' a'iSlic,,! Inill Il 'Mlling
surface of the conc reLe, that transmits loads to or receives 90 perccnt confidence that there is 95 percellt r.ll hiJ hilil y of
load s from !~Ie anchor. the actual strength exceeding the nominal strcllt:lil .
BHITTLE STEEL ELEMENT. An elemen! wi.h a .ensile HEADED STUD. A steel anc hor confnUli ll!! to the
{cst elongation of less than 14 percent, or reducti o n in area requirements of A WS D 1. 1 and affix.ed to it F !;;!< or si milar
orIess .han 30 percen •• or bo.h . stcel attachment by the stud arc welding III ,(·!·::S before
ca sting.
CAST·IN ANCHOR. A headed bol •. headed slUd. or
HOOKED BOLT. A casl -in ancho r ancholi't! 111::1111" by
hooked bolt inst alled befo re plac ing concrete.
bearing of .he 90·degree bend (L·bol,) or I"" :. ,. "
-Ild
(J-boIL) against the concrete, at its cmbed,k.1 (:lid. ;~ lId
CONCHETE IlREAKOUT STRENGTH. The Slreng.h
correspondi ng to a volume o f concrete surrounding th e ha ving a mi nimu m ell of 3dn .
anchor or grCllp of anc ll ors separating from the member.
POST·INSTALLED ANCIIOR. All alld ,. ',,, ::.:' ill
Ilardencd concrete . Ex pan~i on anchors ;!lld lIIHh,.. rcut
CONCRETE PRYOUT STRE GTH. The slreng.h
ancllors arc ex<tmplcs o f post ~in s t ;l llcd allcJltll.,,>.
con'esponding to formation of a concrete spa ll behind shon ,
stifr a nchors displ,lced in the direction opposi te 10 the
applied ~hca r force. PROJECTED AREA, The area 011 the fr('c ~'ud :';' I' of the
concrete member thaI is llsed to represent Ill;, . ;(: Il
DISTANCE SLEEVE. A sleeve .hal encases .he ccn.er th c ass umed rectilinear failure surface.
part of an undercut anchor, a torque-conlrolled cApansioLl
anchor, or a di splacemen t-controlled expans ion anchor, but SIDE-FACE BLOWOUT STRENGTH .. '.,
does nOl expand. anchors with deeper cmbedmcnt but t h ij~L, :.! .. ,: ' .'. -:
corresponding to concrete spalling Oil tim side :-,1((; mOUlni
Ihe ~mbcddcd head while no major bn:i1koul occurs al tile 423.2.4 I_oad i.I PI>licmions that arc predominantly high l'ye le
lOp (;OJ)(.'fC le slIrfal·c. fatigue or impact Jo'lds are nOI covcred by thi s secti oll.
tll
National Structural Code: of tile Philippines G Edition Volume 1
4·I:m CHAPT H~ 4 ·- Structural COI1(;Ielc
accordance with Secti on 423.3.3 .3. For the ,mehor.Ii of SlUt! consideration oj: (Nu,' eithe r ¢N'h OJ' fjJII,·bx' and l'it hl'f ¢V
cp
bearing wall s, it sh;J!I be permitted to take the design or .pVCf'.\:
strength of the anchors as 0.5 times (he desi gn strength
det crm ined i ll <lCCOrdallt'c wi th Secti on 421.3.J.3. 423.4.1.3 Whe n bm h N,,,, and \','" (l rc prese nt .~
interaction crfccts shall be considcwd in accordance Witl;
423.3.4 M~)(l il1t.: alion fa cto r ). for ligh t weight concrete ill Seclioll 423.4.3 .
Ihis appendi x shall be in accordan ce with Section 408.7.1
unless specifically noted otherwi se. 423.4.2 The nominal strength for any anchor or gro up of
anchors shall be based on design models that result in
423.3.5 Th e vallles ')!" ~.' used fo r cnk:u lation purposes in predictions of strength in substanti al Clgrcelllcnl wit h reS ults
this appendi x shall not exceed 70 MPn for cast-i n .:111ch9r5, of comprehe nsive tests. The materials lIsed in the tests shall
and 55 MPa for post· installed anc hors. Testing is required be compati ble wit h the materials used in th e structu re. The
for posl-i nswlled anchors when used in concrete with J,.' nominal strength shall be based 011 the 5 percen t fnlctile of
greater than 55 MPa. the basic individual anchor strength . For nomin.l l strengths
related to concrete strength. modifications for size effects,
the number of anchors, the effects of close spacing of
423.4 General itequircments for Strength of Anchors
anchors, proximity to edges, dep th of the concrete member,
eccentric loadings of anchor group~. and presence or
423.4. 1 Strength design of anchors shall be based either
absence of crack ing shall be taken into account. Limits 011
on computation using design models that satisfy the
edge distances and anchor spacing in the design models
requirements of Secti on 423.4 .2. or 0 11 tes t eva luat ion using
shall be consisten t wi th the lests [hill veri fied the model.
the 5 percc nt rraclile of les t result s for the following:
1. Steel strength of anchor in tension (Section 423.5.1); 423.4.2.1 The effect of reinfo rcemen t provided to restrain
the conc rete breako ut sha ll be permitted 10 be included in
2. Steel st rength of anchor ill shear (Sec tion 423.6.1);
the design mod els used to satisfy Section 423. 4. 2. Where
3. Concre te breakout strength of anc hor in tension anchor reinforceme nt is provided in accordance with
(Sect ion 423.5.2); Secli ons 423.5.2.9 alld 423.6.2.9. o<1lclllalioll of Ihe
concrete breakout strengt h in accordance wi th Secti ons
4. Concrete breakout strength of anchor in shear
423.5.2 alld 423.6.2 is 1101 requ ired .
(Sec li on 423.6.2);
5. Pullout st rength of anc hor in ten sion (Sec tion 423.5.3); 423.4.2.2 For anc hors with diameters not exceedi ng 50
ITIm, and tensile embedments not exceeding 635 mm in
6. Concrete side· face blowout strength of anchor in
depth, the concrete breakout strength requirements shall be
tension (Section 423.5.4); and
co ns idered satisfied by [he design procedure of Sections
7. Concrete pryollt strength of anchor in shear (Section 423.5.2 alld 423.6 .2.
423.6.3).
423.4.3 Resi stance to combi ned tensile and shear loads
In additi on, anchors shall satisfy th e requi red edge shall be considered in design using un interaction
di stan ces, spaci ngs, and thi cknesses to p;ecl ude splilting expression that re sults in co mput ati on of strength in
failure, as required in Section 423.8. subs tantial agree men t wi th results of comprehensive tests.
This requirement shall be considered sati sfied by Section
423.4.1.1 For th e design of anch ors, except as required in 423.7.
Seclion 4 23.0.3 .
423.4.4 Strengt h reduc ti on factor ¢ for anchors in concrete
¢N,, ?: N u" (423 - 1) shall be as follows when the load co mbi nat ions Section >102.
(423-2) nrc used:
I. Anchor govcrned by strength of a ducti le steel clement
423.4.1.2 III Eq . (423·1) and (423·2) . ¢N" and ¢V" arc Ihe
lowest design strengths determined fmlll all appropriate a) Tension loads ........ .. ...... .................. .......0.75
failure. modes. (W" is the lowest design strength in tension b) Shear loads .. ............................. .....0.65
of an anchor or group of anchors as determined from
considerati on of (>N.1(II fliNt"', either ¢N.,'" or t/JNstJK' and either 2. Anchor governed by strength of a brittle steel element
¢Nrh or ¢NCb&' ¢V" is the lowest design strength in shear of a) Tension loads .. ..................... ..... ....... 0.6)
an anchor or a group of anchors as determined from
b) Shear loads ..... ................................. 0.60
3. Andwr governed hy conc rete breakout, side-face 423.5.2 Concrete llreakouf Strength of Anchor in
blowuul. puiloUl. or pryollt strength Tension
where
423.5.1 Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension
kc 10 for cast-in anchors; and
kc == 7 for post -installed anchors.
423.5.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in tension as
governed by the steel, N~ , shall be evaluated by
The value of k, for post-installed anchors shall be pennilled
calculations based on the properties of the anchor material
to be incfeased above 7 based on ACI 355 .2 pfoduct-
and the physical dimensions of the anchor.
spccific tests. but shall in no case exceed to.
423 .5.1.2 The no minal st re ngth of a single anchor Of group
Ahcrnativcly. for cast-in headed s tuds and headed bolts
of anc hors in tension. N 1fI • shall not exceed
wi lh 280 min::; hcf~ 635 mm. Nb sll3ll not e xceed
N'(I = nAn·.N/ufI) (423·3)
Nb ~ 16A ff: hJ '" (423-8)
where 11 is the number of anchors in the group, A st,N is the
effec ti ve cross -sectional area of a single anchor in ten sion, 423.S.2.3Where anchors arc located less th an l .5hcf from
mm 2, alld /Ilm shall not be taken greater than the smaller of three or mOfe edges, the value of htj used in Eq. 423-4
1.91,., and 860 MPa. through 423-11 shall be (he greater of c o.mll /l.5 and one-
third of the maximum spacing between anchors within the
group.
423.5.2.5 Th e modification factor for edge effec ts for but II'(p,Nd eten n in cd fr olll Bq. 423- 13 shall flot be taken less
si ngle anc hors or anchor groups load ed ill le nsio n, Ifltd,N. than 1.5h,,! Ie", . wherc the c ritic a l dista nce ell( is defined in
shall be co mputcd as Scction 423.8.6 .
For all othcr cases, incl uding c<l st-in anc ho rs, 1fI'l"1\' shall be
th e ll Vlcd,N= 1.0 (423- 10) taken as ! .0.
lil
National Structural Code of the Pili li ppines 6 Eclition Volume 1
-,
"
A,. vi.here I,. is th e load -bearing length of the au t hor fe' ., 'l e<lr:
V.I, = -A '-. '" '" "I V (42J.2 1)
'f' ",{.I' 'f' ,.1" '" ".I' "
H .. I,. = h'f lo r andlOfs wit h a consl;UH stiffness over the
full length o f embedded sec tio n. :.;uch as he,h ir;l
2. Por she Hr ro rce perpendicu lar to Ih ~ edge o n iI group (If stud s or post-in sta lled anchors wit h one wInd;,,,
anchor.-;
she ll ovcr full length of the embedmcnt de pth;
(42).22)
I... = 2d" for torque-controlled ex pan sion :tllchors with !l
distance sleevc separated from expansion sieev(..
3. For shear force parallel 10 an edge. V,." or 1"'/;K she, ll be and in no e'lse shall I,. exceed 8£1" in all c<lses.
prnnilted 10 be twice thl' v,lluc of the shear force
determined from Eq. 42l-2 1 o r 423-22, respectivcly. 423.6.2.3 r-or cast-i n headed st uds, headed hoils , Or
wi lh (he. Sh Cili' force aSS trrn l~<..I (0 ,1(;1 pc'~rpc ndi cular to (he hooked bolts OWl ;ire cOlltinuously we lded to s leel
edge and with 1,II"dy taken equa l (0 1.0. nua chmcnts having a rni nimuill th ickness equal to the
greate r of I () 111m and half of the an chor diam eter, the bas i<'
4. For ilm.: hors loc a(l~d at a c"Orner, Ih e li rn itine nomin al co ncrete breakou t stre ngth in shear of C! sin gle anchor I \
concrete bn~lIko Ui strength sha ll be delerJ11ine~j for cac h crac ked concrete. VII> shall not exceed :
edge, and the minimum va illc sh all be used.
\I,. =066(1:rJd~Aff(C."Y' (423·2:> j
Factors '1'.·, .1'. Vlr,I.\ ', VIr. I'. and '1III.v are defined in Sec ti o ns
423 .6.2.5.423.6.2.6, '123.6.2.7, and 423 .6.2.8, respeclivcly. where I.. is defin ed in Sec tion 423.6.2.2. prov ided that:
\I" is the basic co nc rete brea kout stre ngth va lu c for a si ngle
I. For grou ps of anchors. (he strength is dctermined bas...,)
anchor. A I',· is the projected areH of the fai lure surface on the
on the strength of {he row of anchors farthest from I t,:
s ide of the conc rete member a l its edge for a single anchor
edge:
o r a group of ancho rs. It shall be permitted to e.valuate All,
as the base uf a tru ncated half pyra mid projec ted on the side 2. Anchor spacing. s, is not less than 65 mm .: and
face of the me mbe r where the top of the ha lf pyramid is
3. Re inforcement is pro vided at the corners if Col'S 1.511,":"
gi ven by (he ax is of the anchor row selected as c ri tical. The
value of C-li shall be taken HS the di stance from the edge 10
423.6.2.4 Whcre an chors arc inO uellced by th ree or 111m,'.
this axi s. A ve shall not exceed AI,cOl where n is the number
e dges, the va lue of e(l} used in Eqs . 423 -23 through 423 - 2~)
of anchors ill the grollI'.
shall not exceed th e greatest of: c,JI.5 in either dirccli O!; ,
h(l 11.5; and one ~ third of the maximum spaci ng bctwc(;:ij
A vn, is the projec ted area for a single anch or in a deep
anc hors within th e group.
memb er with a di stance from edges eq ual or greater than
1.5ca ! in the directi on perpe ndicular 10 the shear force. It
423.6.2.5 The modifi cation faClOr fo r anchor grOt!p .
shal! be permitted to evaluate AI'n' as the bnse of a ha lf
loaded ecccntric<.l ll y in shc ar.lf/rc. "\ shall he compu ted a~::
pyramid with a side length pamllel to the edge of 3c", and il
depth of 1.5c;o1 (423·26)
A \'r.o = 4 .5«('(I/)~ (423-23)
423.6.2.8 The modification factor for anchors located in a !i..",_ + N ,,, ~ 1.2 (423-32)
concrete member where ha < I.Seal> Vlh,V shall be computed ¢N" ¢V"
as:
423.8 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and
'fh.y -
- J1.5C.,
Il"
(423-29)
Thickness to Preclude Splitting Failure
Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors and
but Wh. vshall not be taken less than 1.0. minimum thicknesses of members shall conform to
Sections 423.8.1 through 423.8.O, unless supplementary
423.6.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is either developed reinforcement is provided to control splitting. Lesser values
in accordance with Section 412 Oil both sides of the from product-specific tests perfornied in accordance with
breakout surface, or encloses the anchor and is developed ACI 355.2 shall bc permitted.
beyond the breakout surface, the design strength of the.
anchor reinforccment shall be permitled to be used instead 423.8.1 Unless determined in accordance with Section
of the concrete breakout strcngth in determining ¢VII. A 423.8.4, minimum center-to-center spacing of anchors shall
strength reduction factor of 0.75 shall be used in the design be 4d(l for untorqued cast-in anchors, and 6d(l for torqued
of the anchor reinforcement. cast-in anchors and post-installed anchors.
423.8.3 Unless determined in ;H..- c.:ordilllt"l' with Se<.: tion 424,1 Notations
423.8.4. millillltll1l edge distan u:s for posl -in slalicd anchors
Some notat io n defi nitiolls arc modi li ed from thost" in lh~~
shall be based on the gn':'l!t~f or specified COV\!!'
main body or th e t'otl e for ~pccific lise in Ihe :q)plication of'
requircmellts for reinforcclllell[ in Sl.!c tion 407 .8, ur
Sec (ion 424.
minimum edge di slancc requireme1lts for the product s as
determined by "':'-s ts in <lCCOrdi! r ll: ('~ with ACI \"'1. 2, and ;\J: = gross an.:a or secti on, mm 2
sha ll not be Ics.'\ lhan 2.0 limes the maximum aggregate A,. = <lrca o f shear rcinforccmclH wit hin a
size. In Ihe <lhscncc of prodw.: t-spcd li e ACf 355.2 lest distalH.;c x. mill:!
infonnillioll. the min imum edge di stan cc shall be taken as Af = londed area
not less than : A} = maxi mum urea of the portion of Ill'.' ·upponing
UnderCUI anchors .... ... .. ... ....... .. .... .. ...... .. ... 6d" surface thilt is geomctrica lly si mil ar to and
conccntri c with the loaded area
Torque-controll cd anchors ...... ... ......... ..... ... .... . 8d"
h" = perimcter of critical scction for slabs and
Displaccmelll-controlJeu ,.II1CI1OI"S ....... .. . ..... IOd" footings, mm
b" = wcb width , Of diametcr of circultlr s('.ct in n, mm
423.8.4 For a nc hors where install at ion docs not prod uce a d = dislanc.:c from ext reme co mpressioll flbcr to
s pl itti ng forcc a nd tha t wi ll remain ulltorqued , if the edge centroid o( tension reinforcement, mill
distallce or spacing is less th an those speci fied in Sections E,. = modulu s of elasli city of concre te. IviPa. See
423.8.1 to 423,8.3, calculations sha ll be performed by Secti on 408.6. J
substituting ror d" a smaller va lue d'" (hal meets the E, : ;:;: modld us o f elasticity of rcinforcement, MPa.
requirements of Sections 423. 8, I to 423.8 .3. Calc ulated Sec Section 408.6. 2
forccs applied to the anchor shall be limited to th e va lues j',. = specified com pressive stren gth of concrete,
corresponding to an anchor havin g a diameter of cI'O' Mr". Sec Section 405.
= square root of specified co mpressive slrength of
423.8.5 The va lue of ""1
for an ex pansioll or undercut
concrete, MPa
posi- installed anchor shall not exceed the grealcr of 2/3 o(
thc member thickness and th e member thi ckn ess minus 100 :::: average spliuing tensile strength of lightwe ight
mm. aggregate concrete. MPa. Sec 40.') .?.4
f, = permissible tensile st ress in reinfort:cm::n; , MP:l
423.8.6 Unless determined from tension tesls ill f, :::: specificd yield strength of rei nforcement, MPa.
accordance with ACI 355.2. the cri tical edge distance, clI(" Sec Secti on 403.6.3
shall nol be takcn less tha n: M = design moment
/I :::: modular rnli o o f elas ti city
U ndcrcut anchors .... 2.511" = £.1/£(,
Torque~con troJled anchors N = design axia l load normal to noss :·;eclion
.... 4h(,/
occurring si multaneously with Vj to be taken as
Displacement-controlled an c hors ... . 4h~! positi ve for co mpression, negative [or tensioll ,
and to include effects of tensioll due :(: creep
423.8.7 Proj ect drawings and project specifications shall and shrink age
specify use of anchors with a minimum edge dist ance as = spacing of shear reinforcemen t in dir('ction
assumed in des ign. parallel to longi tudinal reinforce.Jnr.nt , ): 1!: ;
I' :::: des ign shea r stress
423.9 In s lal1 ~lti o n of Anchors
= permissible shear stress carri ed hy n i: ' ,t.:ir,
MPa
:::: permissiblc horizonlal shcar strcss. Ml ';(
423.9.1 Anchors shall be in stalled in accordance with the
= design shcar force at section
proj ect drawings, project spcc ifi cations and/or
a :::: angle between inclined st irrups .ntO longia:dina!
manufacturer's installation procedures.
axis of member
= ratio of long s ide LO short side or (;OWT = . .d
load or reaction area
PI" = rali o of tension re inforcement
=Alb,,"
424.3.1 Load fHctors and strength reduction fac tors ¢ shall 424.5.1 Development and splices of re inforce ment shall be
be taken as unity for members designed by th e Alternale as required in Section 412 of this chapter.
Design Method.
424.5.2 In satisfyin g requirements of Sectio n 4 I 2.12.3, Mil
424.3.2 It shall be permitled to proportion members fo r 75 shall be taken as computed moment ca pacity assumi ng all
perce nt of capacities required by o lher parts of Section 424 pos itive moment tension reinfo rcement at the secti o n to be
when considering wind or earthquake forces co mbined with stressed to the permissible tcns il e stress h, and Vu shall be
o the r load s , provided the resulting sect ion is no t less than taken as un factored shear force aI the section.
Ih at required for the combinatio n of dead and live load .
426.6.1 Flexure
424.3.3 When dead load reduces effects of ot her loads.
m embers shall be designed for 85 percent of dead load in Fo r investigation of st resses at service loads, straight-line
combination with the other loads. theory for flexure shaH be used with the following
ass umptions:
424.4 Permissiule Service Load Stresses 424.6. 1 Strains vary linearly as th e di stance from the
neutral axis, except for deep flexural members with overall
424.4.1 Stresses in concretc shall not exceed the foll owing:: depth· span ratios g reater than 215 for continu ous s pans anti
I. Flexure
4/5 for simple spans. a nonlinear di stributi on of strain shall
be co nsidered . See Section 410.8 of thi s Chapter.
Extreme fiber stress in compress ion .
2. Shear'
Bcams and olle·way s hlbs and foolings:
Shear c"rried by co nc rete, \Ie .. ......009 JT , If shear reiuforcement is provided, see Sectiolls 424 .8.7.4 and 424.8.7.5
Maximum shear carri e d by concrete plus shear I When the !iuppor!ing SurfOlCC is wider un all sides 111:111 the loaded ilrC:l.
reinforcemen t, lie **. O.38JT permiss ible bearing stress Oil the loaded area sh:tll be permitted 1(1 he
multiplied by ~ 1\ I A, but not more than 2. When the slIr>porting surface
is sloped or stepped , Al shall be permitted to be taken as the area of the
lower base of the largest f!1Jslum of a Tight pyramid or cone contained
, For morc detailed calcula!ion of !he shear slress carried by COI\C [\~tc I',
wholly within the support and baving for ils upper base the loaded area,
and shear values for lightweight aggregate concrete, see Section 424.8.4. and having side slopes of I vc:rtical-to 2 horizontal.
H Desiglled in at:cordi111Ce with Section 408. J 2 of this code.
424.6.2 Stn::'ss-slnlin rel ationship or l.:Olil.:rCIC i ~ .. st ra ight torsion shall be taken as 55 pcn.:c nt of thl! v.li u('s givcn in
linc UIH..I CI' se rvice loads wilhill pC!rmissible sCfvil.'c load Section 411 .
su·esses.
times the des ign axial load. and the fa c tor 0.75 shall be
taken equal to 1.0.
but Vc simI! not excecd 0. 14 JT .Quanti ty VdlM shall not
be. taken greater than J .0, where M is des ign moment
424.7.3 Wall s s hall be desi gned in accorci:a nce with occurri ng simu ltaneously wi th Vat sec ti o n considered.
Section 414 of thi s secti o n with ncxurc a nd axial load
capacities ta ken as 40 percent of thaI compu ted using 424.8.4.5 For membcrs subject to axia l compression. it
Sectioll4 14. III Eq. 414·1 , ¢ shall be taken eq ual to 1.0. shall be pennilled 10 compu te 1'(' by
inlc rpo]'ll ion sha ll be pcrm illctJ whcn pania l sand 424.8.5.5 Mini mum She;! r Uci nforcc mcnt
re pl accmc nt is used .
424.8.5.5.1 A minimulIl area or !-ohear re info rce ment Shilli
424.8.4.7 In de tc rmi ning shcar stress carried hy co ncrete be prov ided jll ali re info rced concrete flex lI f<l 1 me mbe rs
1'(., whenever appli cab le. effects o fa x. i al tensi on duc {O whe re desig n shear strc:ss )I is g rc.llc r than o n e~ hal r the
creep and shrinkage in restrained mem bers shall be r e rlll is~ i b ic shear st ress \If carried by conc re te. e xcept :
incl uded and it shall be pcrmillcd to in c lud e e ffec ts or
I. Slabs and footin gs;
incli ned flexural compressio n ill variabl e-dep th members.
2. Co nc rete joist cons(rll cti o n defi ned by Sect ion 40g , 14
of this section;
424.8.5 Shea r Stress C;l r ri cd by Shear Ucinfo rcemcnt
3. Bea m with total depth Jl o t greater than 250mrn. 2.5
times thic kness of flan ge, 0 [" o n e~ha l f the wid th of we b,
424.8.5. 1 Types of Shea r Reinforcement
whicheve r is gre atest.
Shear re in forceme nt shall consist of o ne o f the fo ll ow ing:
J. StiITups pcrpe nd ic ul ar 10 ax is of membcr; 424.8.5.5.2 Minimu m shear re inforceme nt req uire ~m e n( s
of Sec ti o n 424.8 .5.5. 1 shall be pcnni tled to be waived if
2. W el ded wi re fa bric with wi res located perpendicular to shown by test that required ultim ate fl ex ural a nd shear
ax is of mem ber mak ing an anglc of 45 degrees or more stre ngth ca ll be developed when shear reinfo rceme nt is
wi th longitudin al tensio n reinforcem ent ; o milted.
3, Longi tud inal re info rce ment wit h bent portion ma king
an ang le of 30 degrees or mo re wilh lo ngitudinal 424 .8.5.5.3 Where shea r re info rcement is requ ired by
ten sion rei nfo rce me nt; Sec tion 424 .8.5.5. I o r by anal ysis , minim um are a of she ar
re info rce ment shall be compu ted by:
4. Combinat io ns of sti rrups and bent longitud inal rein -
forcement ; A,. = b,sI3(,. (424· 5)
424.8.5.2 De sign yie ld strength of shear re info rcement 424.8.5.6 Design of Shea r Reinforcement
shall no. exceed 41 5 MPa.
424.8.5.6.1 Where design shear stress \' exceeds shear
424.8.5.3 Stirrups and olher bars or wires used as s hear stre ss c arried by co nc rete \/f , shear re inforcemen t shall be
rein fo rcement sha ll extend Lo a dista nce d from ex treme prov ided ill accordance wit h Sec tions 424.8 .5.6. 2 thro ugh
compression fi ber and shall be anc ho red at both end s 424.8.5.6.8.
accord ing to Secti o n 412. 14 of thi s sec ti o n to develop
design yie ld stre ngth of re inforcement . 424.8.5.6.2 W hen s hear re in fo rce me nt perpendic ular to
axis of member is used:
424.8.5.4 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinfo rcem ent A,. = (v - v,)b"s 1[,. (424·6)
424.8.5.4.1 Spacing of shear reinforcemen. placed 424.8.5.6.3 When incli ned stirrups are used as shear
perpendicular to a xis of me mber shall no t ex ceed d/2, nor rei nforccmel1 t;
600 mm .
(v-v , k ." (424·7)
424.8.5.4.2 Inc lined sti rru ps and be nt lo ngitudin a l A,. = (,(s in a + cos a)
re inforcement shall be so spaced lhat eve ry 4 S ~ deg ree line ,
extending toward the reaction fro m Ill i d~d ep{ h o f me mbe r
424.8.5.6.4 Whe n shear re inforcement consis(s o f ;l s ingl e
(d/2) to l o ng itudinal tCrl:-;i on reinforceme nt . shall be crossed
bar or a single group of para lle l bars, all ben t up at the sa me
by al icasl o ne li lle of shear re in forcemen t.
di sta nce from the suppo l1:
425.2 Redistribution of Negative Moments in 425.418.9.1 Ratio of prestressed and non prestressed
Continuous Nonprestrcssed Flexural Members reinforcement used for computation of moment strength of
For cri teria on momcllI redistri bution for prestressed a member, e xcept as provided in 425.4 18.9.2, s hall be such
concrete members, see Sec ti on 425.41 8. 11.4 . Ihal co,. [(oJ, + (dld,)(co - <0' )J. or [<0,•. + (dldp)(<O •. - 00 ••• )] is
not grea ter Ihan 0.36Pl. except as pe rmitted in Secti on
425.2.1 Except where approximarc values for moments 425.41892.
are used , it shall be pcnnilted to decre ase factored moments
calculated by elastic theory at sections of maximu lll Ratio (tll' is co mpuled as p,fp//t. Ratios 0)... a nd wpw are
negative or maximum positive moment and in any span of co mputed as 0) and wI" respectivel y. except that when
continuous nexu ral members for any assumed load ing co mputi ng P and PI' • b". shall be used in place of b and the
arrangemcill by not more than: area of reinforcement Of prestressing steel required to
develop the compressive strength of the web only shall be
20 (I- P;,p') percent (425 - 1) used in place of A, or A pI' Rati o w'... is computed as 00',
except that when computing P'. b ... shall be used in pl ace of
b.
425.2.2 Redistribution of moments shall be made only
whcnlhc section at whi ch moment is reduced is so design ed 425.418.9.2 \\' hen a reinforcemen t rati o exceeds the lim;t
th at fJ or p - p' is not greater th an 0.501'11> specifi ed in Section 425.4 18.9. 1 is provided, de.<;igll
moment slre ngt h sha ll not exceed the moment st rength
w he re: based on the co mpress ion portion of the moment couple.
425.418 .9.:\ Tma l allloun! of prestressed and 425.418.11.4.3 The reduced nwment shall be used for
lIonprcstn:ssc::d reinforce mcnt shall be i1dcquatc to deve lop iI calcui<tling redistributed moments :11 all other sect io ns
fac tored load ilt least 1.2 limes the cracking load computed wi thin the spa ns . Static equilibrium shnll be maintai ned
1)1} tile basis of the 11IOd uius of rupture!, specil'ied ill Section <lncr redistribu tion of momen ts ror CHcli loading
409.6.2.3. This provision shall be permitted to he \v.lived ammgemenl.
for: .::~~~:~~·/~~,*':~~~~i.f;i ~;' :.",:;'1.
. . .:
(425·3)
426.409.2.2 For stlUc tures thaI also re sist W, wind load, or 426.409.3.1 Design strength provided by .1 mcmber, its
E , the load effects of earthquake. U shall not be less than connections to other membcrs, and its cross sections. in
the larger of E<I" 426- I. 426-2, and 426-3: terms of nexurc, axial load. shear, and torsion. shall be
taken as Ihe nominal strength calculated in accordance with
U; 0.75(1.4D + J7L) + (J.6W or J.O£)
requirements and assumptions of this Code, multiplied by
(426-2) the ¢ [actors ill Secti ons 426.409.3.2, 426.409.3.4. and
426.409.3.5 .
and
U=0.9D+(J.6Wor 1.0£) (426·3) 426.409.3.2 Strength reduction f<lcwf ¢ shall be <IS
Where W has not been reduced by a direc tionality factor, it follows:
shall be permitted to use I.3W in place of 1.6W in E<IS. 426-
2 and 426-3. Wh ere E is based on service-level seismic 426.409.3,2.1 Tension-controlled secti ons, as defined III
forces, 1.4£ shall be u'ed in place of 1.0£ in Eqs. 426-2 and Section 410.4.4 (Sec also Section 426.409.3.2.7) ........
426-3. 0.90
426.409.2.3 For stmctures that re sist H, loads due to 426.409.3.2.2 Compression-controlled sections, as defined
weight and press ure of soil. water in soil. or other related in Section 410.4.3:
materials, U shall r,ot be less than the larger of Eqs. 426- I I. Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to
and 426-4: Section 410. 1003 .. 0.75
2. Other reinforce.d membe rs 0.70
U= I.4D+ 1.7L+ 1.7/-1 (426-4)
For sections in which lhe net tensile strain in the exlre!l1(~
In Eg. 426-4, where D or l. reduce the effect of II, 0.9/J tension steel at nominal strengt h, c" is between the limits
shall be substituted for lAD, clnd z.ero value of L shall be for compression-controlled and tension-controlled sections.
used to determine the greatest required strength U. ¢ shall be pcnnillcd to be linearly in cre~lscd from that for
compression·controlled secti ons to 0.90 as 1:1 increases from
426.409.2.4 For struct ures that resist F, load due to weight th e compression co ntrolled strain limit to 0.005.
and pressure of nuids with well-defined densities, the load
factor for F shall be lA, and F shall be added to all loadi ng Alternatively, when Section 425 is used , for members ill
combinat1ons that include L. which ];. docs ' not exceed 415 MPa. with symmetric
reinforcement, and with (d - d')/h not less than 0.70, ¢ shall
426.409.3.2.3 Shear and torsion ... .. .. ... . 0.R5 B-REG ION. A port ion or a member in which th e pianC'.
sections ass um ption of nexurc Iheo ry from SC(;iion 410. ':. 2
426.409.3.2.4 bearing on concre te (except for post- call be applied.
tcnsioned anc horage zones and stnlt-<Ind-lic
models) . . . . 0 .70 DISCONTINUITY. An abrupt chan ge in geome try nr
loading.
426.409.3.2.5 PosHensioned an chorage zones. 0.80
D-REG10N. The ponion of a Incm ber withi n <I di stance, h,
426.409.3.2.6 Strut-and-ti e models (Section 427), and from a force discontinuity or ~ geometric dis(;olltinu it/
slnl!!), lics. nodal zones, and bearing areas in such model s
0.85
DEEP BEAM. Sec Sections 410.8.1 and 4 ! 1.9.1. ~~~~..:.
Figu re 427 -2(,). 427-2(b), and 427- 3.
426.409.3.2.7 Flexure sections without axial load in pre~
ten sioned mem be rs where strand embedment is less than
NODAL ZONE. The volume or co nc rete ,1I'OllllU ;t ',ode
the development length as provided in Section
412. 10. 1. 1...... ..... .... ...... .. .... ............................ ... 0.85 that is assumed to trans fer strut -und-tic forc!.';,. ; 1I1rou;', the
node . Hi slOrically. hyd rosl3tic noda l zones ;j ~; s h o ",·r~ ii,
426.409.3.3 Development lengths specified in Sec tion 41 2 Figure 427- 4 werc used . These we re largely S('li, : "'_ ;:, ' ">
do not require a ¢-factor. whal a rc called extended noda l lones, shown in Fi l~.ur(' :12 7·
5.
426.409.3.4 For structures lhat rely on intermediate
precast structural wall s in region s of high seismi c risk or NODE. Th e point in a joinJ. in a strut-and-ti c model wll e re.
assigned ( 0 hi gh seismic performance o r design categories the axes of the s tnllS. tics, a nd concent rat ed (ll rco :.;.1, :: ,. ! !I
(seism ic zone 4), spec ial momenl frames, or special the joint intersect.
struclU ral wall s to resist E, ¢ sha ll be modified as given in
(l) through (3): STRUT. A compression member in a slrul ":I!HI-lie IlL'del.
A st rut represen ts the resuhalll of a parall el or a fall-shaped
i. For any structural member that is designed to resis t E.
compression fi eld.
¢ for s hear shall be 0.60 if the nomi nal shear
strength of the member is less than th e shear BOTTLE-SHAPED STRUT. A strut th at is wieler at mil'
correspondin g to the development of the nominal
length than a t its cnd s.
flexural strength of the member. TIle nominal
flexural strength shall be determined cons idering the
STRUT-AND-TIE MODEL. A tru ss model nf a struc- 'I;'!
most critic al factored axial loads and including E;
member or of a D-region ill such a mClllb, .', \ ;-'i ! de \J,
2. For diaphragms, if> for shear shall not exceed the struts a nd ties connected at nodes, cap<lbk ,Jl i,;-;dd: ': "- .',
mi ni mum ¢ for shear used for the vertical the factored loads to the supports or (0 adj;:I{"'!.
component s o f the primary latc ral·forcewresisting
system; TIE. A te ns ion memb er in a strut -and -tic I~ , : <
3. ror joints and diagonally reinforced coupli ng bea.ms , ¢
fo r shear shall be 0.85.
res ult!i in bearing stresses thin arc equa l 10 the st resses ill
427. 1. 1 J)isl'on tinuily the Mruts. The bea rin g phne 011 the left s ide of Figure 427-
A dis(.·olll illuity ill the stress distribution occurs al a chan ge 4(h) is used to represe nt an aCIU,d l ie an chorage. The tic
in the geome try of:l stru ctural clemcnt or at II cO Jl('cntratcd force <.:<lrl be anchored by a plate. or through developmenl
10<ld or n!'K ti oli . St. VellHIl( 's principle indi cates that the or st raight or hoo ked hm's, ilS shown in Figure 427·4{c).
stresses due to axial load and bending approach" linear
di stributi on at <I di stance approximaICly cq Ll<I1 to th e overa ll The shaded areas ill Fi gu re 427 ~ 5(a) lind (b) nrc extend ed
height or the member, 11, away from the discontinuit y. For nodal zones. A n exte nded nod:11 zolle is thaI porti on o f a
this rcaso n, discominuilics nre assumed (O ex tend a distan ce
member bou nded by lhc inlCJ'seclion of the cffec livc··q rut
h rrOJ11 'lIlC secti on where the load or change in geometry
occurs. F:igll re 427- J (a) shows typical geometric width , I!I" and th e effective li e widlh, 11', (sec Sec ti on
di scontinuities, and Pigure 427-1 (b) shows combined 427.4 .2).
geome tri ca l and loading discontinuities.
'h
National Struc tural Code o f Ihe Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
-'I 1!;ll CHAP I F f ~ t1 - - Str'llcl(Jr~11 Cr)fl(.;r el {~
h1I(tf=r~--.Gi-)I h2 - D-region
J......I ... -+-t
h1 h2
mm
WillWlill
h
1 [h
I I I I
h av =2h , I 1._~_=_2--,L
h_ . t
1- Min. of 25 deg - "I
(b) Shear span, av = 2h, limit for a deep beam
D-region D-regio
(t{ , - , tDIh
I. 2h ,I I'
mmlll HI III
CJ .Jl
t t t Ii+-: _ h--'-'C
l
a'v_> _2h_ _, 1 - ,_------'
av_> _~h_h_ :I
(b) Loading and geometric discontinuities (c) Shear span, av > 2h, slender beam
Fi gu re 427 ·-1 I) -Regions An d Disco nt inu ities
(,sinO
w,
th
N<~non(ll Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
"
.,.,
tl 1S6 CHAP fEFl4 .. S!ruCiUfi!1 Concrete ,
c,
c,-....".....,~
c,
C
I
:C
(a) C-C-C Node (b) C-C- T Node
T
T
~ Critical soction for
f development f)(
. tie reinforcemenl
c
(c) Tension force anchored by bond
~~ed
(wo compressive forces and one tensile 2
force, and so on. /
to compute Ao
(8) (b)
427.1.5 Strut
In design, struts arc usually idealized as prismatic Figure 427~8 Bottle-shaped Strut: (a) Cracking of a
compression members, as shown by the straight line Bottle-shaped Strut; and (b) Strut-and-
outlines of the struts in Figures 427-2 and 427-3. If the Tie Model of a Bottle-shaped Strut
effective compression strength};", differs at the two ends of
a strut, due either to different nodal zone strengths at the
two ends, or to different bearing lengths, the strut is 427.2 Strut-andTie Model Design Procedure
idealized as a uniformly tapered compression member.
427.2.1 It shall be permitted to design stI1Jctural concrete
Bottle-shaped struts - A bottle-shaped strut is a strut members or D-regions in such members, by modeling the
located in a part of a member where the width of the member or region as an idealized truss. The truss model
compressed concrete at mid length of the strut can spread shall contain struts, ties, and nodes as defined in Section
laterally. The curved dashed outlines of the struts in Figure 427.1. The truss model shall be capable of transfen'ing all
427-3 and the curved solid outlines in Figure 427-8 factored loads to the supports or adjacent B-rcgions.
approximate the boundaries of bottle-shaped struts. A split
cylinder test is an example of a bottle-shaped strut. The 427.2.2 The strut-and-tic model shall be in equilibriulll with
the applied loads and the reactions.
internal lateral spread of the applied compression force in
such a test leads to a transverse tension that splits the
427.2.3 In determining the geometry of the truss, the
specimen. dimensions of the struts, ties, and nodal zones shall be taken
into accounl.
To simplify design, bottle-shaped struts are idealized either
as prismatic or as uniformly tapered, and crack-control 427.2.4 Ties shall be permitted to cross struts. Struts shaH
reinforcement from Section 427.3.3 is provided to resist the cross or overlap only at nodes.
transverse tension. The amount of confining transverse
reinforcement can be computed using the strut-and-tie 427.2.5 The ang1e, e,
between the axes of any strut and any
model shown in Figure 427-8(b) with the struts that tie entering a single node shall not be taken as less than 25
represent the spread of the compression force acting at a degrees.
slope of 1:2 to the axis 'of the applied compressive force.
Altematively for to' not exceeding 40 MPa, Eq. 427-4 can 427.2.6 Design of struts, ties, and nodal zones shall be
be used. The cross-sectional area At of a bottle-shaped strut based on:
is taken as the smaller of the cross-sectional areas at the two (427-1)
ends of the strut. Sec Figure 427-8(a).
where Fu is the factored force acting in a strut, in a tic, or
on one face of a nodal zone; 1~1 is the nominal strength of
the strut, tic, or nodal zone; and ¢ is specified in Section
409.3.2.6.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
427.3 S(J'c l1 ~th (If Struts (427·4)
427.3.1 The l1 omin ;d comp ressive strength of' ;1 str ul wil en! A" is th e tollil ,Ire;! of sli rfaL' c r~inrorc cmelll al
'\lilhoHI h)lI gilUdinal n:i nfon..:elllcllI. r~", sh;dl be wkcll as spaci ng x, in the Hh I<l ye r ~ If reinforcement crossing a Slnu
:It an <1I1!;1..:: Uj to thl: ;)xi:-: of ihe stnll .
the smallcr value of:
r~,\ =./;,A" (427·2) 427.3.3,2 TIll' rc inh>n.:e mcn! requ ired in Sect ion 427.3 .3
shall be placed in ei ther two orthogona l directi ons at ang les
al th e IwO end ... of II}!! stru t, where 11(1 is thL ..:.oss-stttion:tI (.(, and 11.1 10 the axis uf the st rut. or in one dircction at an
ilrca al Ol h! end of Iht' sI nH. and /.1' is the slllilJ lrr ()f ( I) <I nel angk (I. !O the axis or the strut. If the reinforccment is in
(2): only one directi on, 0. sha ll not be less thall 40 dcgrees.
I. The clTcctivc compressive strenglh of the conc rete in
the SInH given in Secti on 427.3.2; 427.3.4 If docllmentcd hy tests ,tnt! atwlyses, il shall be
permitled 10 lise an increased effective compressive
2. The effecti ve compressive strenglh of th (.'. concrete ill strength of a strut due to confining reinfo rcement.
the nodal 7.0nc given in Scc iion 427.5.2.
427 .3.5 The usc of compression reinforcement shall be
427.3,2 T he effecti ve comprcssi ve strength of the pe rm itted {O increase Ihe si rength of it SinH . Comp ression
concrete, };.,. in a strut shall be taken as : reinforcement shan be properl y anc hored, parallel to the
axis of the SU·III . located wit hin the stru t. and encl osed in
/.e = (J.XS/IJ.' (427· ) 1
tics or sp irah salisfying Section 407. 11. In such cases, the
Homin,,1 stre nglh ('I f il longi tudinall y re in forced strut is:
427.3.2.1 For a stlllt of un iform cr()ss~seclion a! area over
ils lel1glh ... ... .. ............. /1, = 1.0 1':,., =};,A ,., + A:);' (427·5) .. .
427 .3.2.2 For stmls located such thai Ihe width or the
427.4 Strength or ·ncs
midsecti on of the sinH is large r than th e widt h (II Ihe nodes
(bottle·shaped slnns): 427.4.1 The nom inal strengt h of a tic. F,,,, shall bc taken as:
J. Wit h reinforce ment sati sfy ing Sec ti on 42 7.3.3 . (427-6)
p, =0 .75
where (f..,. + 1:-:../;'; shall not exceed ;;I.\" and A,l' is zero for
2. WithOl1t reinforcement sati sfying Section nonprcst resscd members .
427.3.3 ... ................ If, = O.6(J!'
where the VIII lie of I.. is defined i n Secti on 408.7.1. In Eq. 427-6, it shall be pCllnillcd to (ake (~hl equal (04 15
MPa for bonded prestressed reinforc ement, or 70 MPa for
427.3.2.3 For struts in tension members, or the tension ullbonded prestressed reinforcement. Otller values of (51;,
Oanges of members .... ......... .. /1, = OAO shall be permitted whcn justified by analysis.
427.3.2.4 For all other ease s p, = O.60i. 427.4.2 Th e axis of th e reinforcement ill II tie shall coincide
with the axis of the ti e in Ihe stl1l t·and-tic model. The
effec ti ve tie width assumed in design WI can vary betw{'('11
427.3.3 Ir the value or p, speciried ill Section 427 .3.2 .2( I) is
the following limi ls. depending on the di stribution of the ( i(;
used. the axis of the st rlll shall be crossed by reinforccmcllI
reinrorcement.
propoJlioncd to resist Ihe tran sverse ten sile force res ulling
fro m the compression force spreading ill the SInH . It Sh'll! I. If the hars in the tic- <If!.! in olle layer. the crrecti ve lie
he permitted to assume the co mpressive force in the strut width C'1n b(~ taken a~ the diameler of tile bars inlilc tic
spreads <It <I slope of 2 longillldinal to 1 transverse 10 the plus twice th e cover to [he su rfa ce of the bars, as
axis of the strut.
show n in Fi gure 427-5(a); ;llld
427.].3.1 For // 110t greater Ihal1 40 MPa, th e 2. A practical uppcr limil of thc tic width cn n be Ifll:(1\ ::s
requirement of Sectio n 427.3.3 shall be pcrmiHed to be thc wid th cO ITcspomlin g to the width ill a h ydro~t:'hC
satisfi ed by the axi s of lhe sInH being crossed by layers of nod al zone, calc ulat ed as :
reinforcement th at satisfy Eq . 427-4: (427·7)
"" _. =1-:, {(f..b.)
427.4.3 Tic reinforcement shall be anchored by mechanical 427.5.2.2 In Jlodal zoncs anchoring 011('
devices, post··tensioning anchorage devices. standard hooks. lie .. /1" ~ 0.80;
or straight bar devclopment as required by Sections
427.4.3.1 through 427.4.3.4. or
427.4.3.1 Nodal lones shall develop thc difference between 427.5.2.3 In nodal zones anchoring two or more lics
the tic force on olle side of the node and the tic force 011 the /i" ~ 0.611.
other side.
427.5.3 In a three-dimensional strut-and-tie model, the area
427.4.3.2 At nodal zones anchoring one lie. the tic force of each face of" a nodal zone shall not be less than thaI given
shall be developed at the point where the centroid of the in Section 427.5. I. and the shape of each face of the nodal
reinforcement in a tic leaves the extended nodal zone and zones shaJ! be similar to the shape of the projection of the
enters the span. end of the struts onl0 the corresponding faces of the nodal
zones.
427.4.3.3 At nodal zones anchoring two or more tics, the lie
force in each direction shall be developed at the point wher~
the centroid of the reinforcement in the lie !eaves the
extended nodal lone.
(427-8)
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
NSCP C101-10
Chapter 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL
SIXTH EDITION
th
Nalional Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
CH AP TEl1 5 " Steel an d Metals 5· '
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 5 • STEEL ANI) METALS SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS ..................... II
PAIr!' I • SPECIFICATION FOR ST EE L MEMBEHS ...................... ............ ..... ............................... ............................... 11
SyMBOLS ..... ................................................. .............................. ........ ................................. ................... ... ................. ............ II
DEFINITIONS ...... ............................................... ........................................... .. ............ ....... .................................................... 18
SECTION 501 . GENERAL PROVISIONS .. ..... ............... ......... ...... ........... .... ...................................................................... 28
501. 1 Scope ... .. ............... .. .................. ..... .. ..... .... .......... .... ........ ....................... 28
50 1.2 Referenced Specifications. Codes and Standards ...... ... .... ..... ..... ... ....... ......... .. .... .. ...... ....... 28
501 .3 Matena!. ... ................ ... ......................... .. ........... ................... 30
50 1.4 Structu ra l Design Drawings and Speci fi catiolls.... .. ............... ............... ............. ......... . ...... 32
SECTION 502· DESIGN REQUiR EMENTS .................. ........................................... ......................................................... 32
502.! Gcneral Pro visions .. .. .......... 33
502.2 LoaJs and LoHd Combi llal ions ..... . .... 33
502.3 Design B'ISis, ............ " .... ...... ........ . .. ..... 33
502.4 Classification of Sections for Local Buck li ng .............................................. . .......... 35
502.4. Un sriffencd Elements ......... .. ..... . ........... .... .... ..35
502.5 FabJi c.: ation , Erection and Quality Co ntrol .. ...... ....... ........ ..... 36
502.6 Evaluation of Ex istin g Stnlctures. ...36
SECTION 503 ... ................................. ................. .............................................................................................................. ....... 39
STABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESI GN .... ................... .............................. ..................................... .................. .................. 39
503. J Stability Design Requirc l11cllls ... .. ... ............... ...39
503.2 Cal c ulation of Required Strength s... ........ .... .. ...... . ... .... ..... . ...... 40
SECTION 504 . DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION ..................................................................................... .......... 42
504 . J Sle nderness Limi tations ...... .. . ....... 43
504.2 Tensilc Strength .... ............... . .. ... 43
504.3 Area DClermin:uion ...... .... .... . .. .. 43
504.4 Bui(( ·up Members ..... .. .......... ... .. ... ... . 44
504.5 Pin -Co nnected Membe rs ... ....... ....... ...... ...... " .. .. .... ....... ...... ...... 44
504.6 Eyebars ..... .. ...... . ...... 46
SECTION 505 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSJON ........................ ...................... ...................................... 46
505.1 General Provisions ................ ............................ . ................... 46
505.2 Slenderness Limit.llion s a nd Effective Le ngth .......... . ,, ' ......... .46
505.3 Compress ive Strcngth for Flexural Buckling of Members With out Slende r Elcmc lH s . .... . .. ... ......... .... . .. .. 47
505 .4 Compress i ve: S trength for Torsio na l and Fl ex ural-Tors ional Buck l ing of Members without Sle nder Ele ment s, ........ ... 47
505.5 Single Angle Co mpression Membe rs ............ ,..... ....... 48
505.6 Bu ilt- up Mc mber, .. ................ ............... .............. .. ......... 49
505.7 Membe rs with Slender Elements .. .... 50
SECTION 506 ·DES IGN OF MEMB ERS FOR FLEXURE .............. .......... ........................... ............................................ 52
506. 1 Gen eral Provisions ..... ........ ..... ....... ......... ..... 53
506.2 Dou bly SY lllm e tri c Com pac t I-Shaped Me mb ers and Channel s Bent abou t their Major Axi s..... . ..... 55
506.3 Doubly Symmc lric I-S haped Members with Com pac t \Vebs and Noncompacl or Sle nder Fl a nges Ben l about their
Major Axis ............................ ...... ... ......... .......................................................................................... ..... .............. .. ...... 56
506.4 Other I-Shaped Members w ith Compact or Noncompac\ Webs Bent about their Major Axis ,........... .... ,..... .................. 56
506.5 Doubl y Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I·Shaped Members with Slender Webs Bcnt about their Major AxiL ........ 58
111
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5 ? C HAP T!: H 5 . Steel and Meta ls
506.6 1·Shapcd Mcmbr.:rs and Ciwllnl!is Gent abo ut their Minor Axi s ..................... .')~
506.7 Square illH.1 Rct:liUlgu!ar HSS and Box-sh,lpcd Members ........ . .. .. 59
506.8 Rou nd IISS ............. .. .... ......... .. .......... .. ··· ··· ··· ..... 6u
506.9 Tees and Dou ble A ngles Lo,lded ill the Plane of Symmetry ................ . .. ..... 60
506.10 S ingl e Angles................. ................ .. ..................... .. 61
506.11 Rcclangular Bars and Rounds .. ... ........... .... .... ........ . ........... . . ..... ... 62
506.1 2 Unsymmetrical Shapes ....... ................... ................ . ..... ·........ ·...... ...... ·... 63
506.13 Prop~r! ions of Beams and Girders.... . .......... ....... . .. . ...... ... .... . ......... ....... . . .. ........... ...... 63
SECTION 507 • DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR ................................................................................................ 65
507.1 General Prov isions... . ............ . ·· ··· .... .. .. 6)
507.2 Mcmber!'> with Unstiffened or Stiffe ncd Webs .. .. .... .. 65
507.3 Tension field A clion .. ...................... ............ ... .. ..... ....... ..................... ..... ........ 66
507.4 Single Angles ................................ .. .......... .. . . ... .. ..... C'}
507.5 Rectangula r HSS and Box Members .............. .. .. ..... 67
507 .6 Round HSS .......................... .... .. ................. .. .. 67
507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Do ubly Symmetric Shapes .................................................................. . .... 67
507 .8 Beams and Girders with Web Openings ................ ......................... ...................................... . .. ... 67
SECTION 508 . DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COM IlINED FORCES AND TORSION ............................................ 68
508. 1 Do ubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flex ure a nd Axial Force ... ... ........ ............. ....................... .. 68
508.2 Unsymlllctric and other Me mbcr$ Subject to Fl exure Ilnd Axial force ..... .. .... ........ ... ......................... . .. .69
508.1 Members under Torsion <lnd Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear andlor Ax ial Force .. .. .70
SECTION 509· DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBE RS ................................................................................. .. . . ..... 71
509.1 General Provisions ........ ............. . . .. ...... 72
50~.2 Axial Members .... . .. 7:'
509.3 Flexural Members ..................... . .,'
.... ' .,
503.3 Flexurlll Strength of Concrete -Enc ased and Filled Members.. . .. .._...... 7g
509.4 Combined Axi a l Force and Flexure.................. ............... ... ............... .. ................ . ..... 79
509.5 Special Cases ......................................................... ..................................................................................... ..... 79
SECTION 510· DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................ ...... ....... .. .. 79
510.1 General Provis io ns ... 79
510.2 Welds.. .......... .. ............ . ... 81
510.3 Bolls and Threaded Pans ... .......................................... . ..87
510.4 A ffected El e ments of Members and Connecting Elements .... ............ . . ..... ....... _.. .. 92
510.5 Fill ers.. ............... .. ............ ........ .. ................. . .... 9:\
510.6 Splices.. .. .. ... .. .. ......... ........................ ........... ..... . ........ .. 93
510.7 Bearing Sirength ................... .. .......... ........... ................ .. .91
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing o n Concrete .... . .. 0,'~
510.9 Anchor Rods and Embedments ...... .............. .. . . ... i)/t
SID.IO Flanges and Webs with COllcentrated Forces ........ ...... ....... ... ... .......... . . ... ... 1) . ;
SECTION 512· DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY ................................................................ ..... .............. .... .................. 110
512.1 General Provis io ns .............................. . .. , I Ii
;.
512.2 Camber ........... .. .................................................................................................................. ..
512.3 Defiections ................................................................ .................. ........................................ .................. . ..
512.4 Drift ............................................................................................ ............................................................... .
512.5 Vibration ......................... .................... ......................... .... .......................... ...
512.6 Wind·Induced Motion ........................... .. .............. .......................... ........... ........................ .
APPENDIX A-3 - DESIGN FOR FATIGUE """"""""""""", .. """"""""""""" .. ,, ....... ,,""""""""""" " ,,"""""""", .. ,,'" 117
A-3. 1 Ge ner;d .,', ........ ,......... ........ .................. ,.......................................................................... ,.................................. 11 7
A·3.2 Calculation of Maximulll St resses and Siress Ranges ........................................................... ....................................... I J8
A-3 .3 Design Siress Range .......... ....................................................................................... " ..................................... ....... 118
A-3,4 BoilS and Threaded P.rts ...... .. ....................... " ........................................................................................................ .. .. 119
A-3.5 Special Fabrication and Erection Req uirements .............. ... ............ ................................................................. " .......... 119
APPENDIX A-4 - STRUCTURAL DESI GN FO R FIRE CONDITlONS" ....... "."""" .. ..... ."" .. " .. "."".""",, ...... ,, .......... Il9
A-4.1 General Pro vi sions ... ........................................... ................................. ................ ..................... ................ .. ,........... ...... 120
A-4 .2 Structural Design for Fire Conditions by Ana lysis ......... .. ................................................ .. ................... ...... .............. .... 136
A-4 .3 Design by Qn.lificalion Tesling ................................................ ,.. ,............ ..................... .................................... ,.......... 138
APPENDIX A-5 - EVALUA TlON OF EXISTIN G STRU CTURES .. ,_"""." .. """"", .. "".""" .. "."""""" """,,.,, ........ ,,",139
A·S. I Ge neral Provisions ............ ......... .. ................................................... .. ................... ...................... .... ............................. 139
A-5.2 Material Pro pel1i es ............................. ........... ...... .. _............................. .................................. .............. .. ...................... 139
A-5.3 E valumion by Slmclural Anal ysis ......... ................. _......................... .. .................... .............. ,........................................ 140
A-5,4 Evalllalio n by Load Tests ....................................... _............................... .............. .. ,... ,............... .. ................................. 140
A-55 Evalualio n Reporl ." ............... .... ............................ _........ ....... " .............. ... ............................................ ,...................... 140
APPENDIX A-6 - STAB ILITY BRA CING FO J( CO L UMNS AND BEA MS ........ " " " """" ... " ...... """""""",, .. ,, ......,," 140
A·6. J General Pro visio ns .. ............................. ............................ .......... .... ..................... ,..................... ,............ 141
A-6.2 Columns ................... .. .. ............... .. ............................................ .. ........................... ...... 141
A-6.3 Bea ms ........ .. ............. .. .. .................................................................................................................................... 141
APPENDIX A- 7 • DIRECT ANALYSIS M ETHOD "' _" " """""""".""""."."" .... _" ... ""." .... """".",, ..... ,,"",, ......... ""'"'' 143
A·7. 1 Gener.1 RequirelllenlS .............................. . ,........... _....... ,......... ,........................................... ...................... ........ " ........ 143
A-7.2 Notion.1 Loads ... . .. ......................................... ....... "..... .... .. ......... " .............. .. ..... " ................. 143
A-7.3 Design -A nalysis Constraints .... .......... ... ........... ... ........ ..... ............ 143
PART 2A • SEJSMIC PROVISION FOR STRUCTUHAL STEEL BUILDINGS ,,'''''''''''''''''''''''''''',,'''''''''' ,,"" " " " ,," 145
th
National Structural Code of the PI1ilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
:}·4 CHAPTER 5 . Steel and Metals
SyMBOLS ....... ................... ................... ........... .. ................ ... ........ ... ................................. ........................ ............. ................ 145
DEFINITIONS ..... ... ................................ .............. ........................ ............................... ................ .... .. .. ..... ............................. 147
PART 2A . SECTION 514 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING PROVISIONS ...... ............................ ......................... 150
514 . Scope .. ... ......... ................................. ................................. . . ............ ................ ... .... ISO
SECTION 515· REFERENCED SPEC IFI CATIONS, COnES, AND STANDARDS .......·...···... ··.·............··.·.··... ·....... 151
SECTION 516· GENERA L SEISMIC n ES IGN REQUIREMENTS .............. .... ..... ............. ... ............................ ....... .... 151
SECTI(h 517· LOADS, LOAD COM B I NATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS .................. ··.. ·.. ·.· ... · ............... 15i
517. 1 Loads and LO<ld Co mbinations ................ .. .... ....... . ..... 152
5 17 .2 Nominal Strength ... ... ......... . . .. . .. .......... .. 152
SECTION 518· STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRA WINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DHAWINGS, AND
ERECTION DRA WiNGS .............. ............................................ ..................... ............. ................. .......................... .............. 152
5 18. 1 Structural Design Drawings Hnd Spccifictltimls .......... _.. .......................... . 152
5 18.2 Shop Drawings .......................... .................................................................... ..... 152
5 I 8.3 Ercction Dra\vings ....... ............ . ...... ........ ....... ............ ...... .. ........ .. ................. , .. . ............. ......... 153
SECTION 519· MATERIALS .................. ....... ........... .......................................... ............................................................. .. 153
5 19 . 1 Material Specifications ....... .,...... ................. . ............ ................... . . ........ 153
5 19.2 Material Propcni cs for Delcnn inalion of Rcqui red Strength of Mcmbers and Co nnect ions, ..... .. ...... 153
519.3 Heavy Section CVN Requireme nts. ..... ... .... ...... . ... .. .... ... .... ,., .. . . .. .. 154
SECTION 520· CO NNECTIONS , JOINTS, AND FASTENERS .................................................................................... 155
520.1. Scope ... ............... ... .... 155
520.2 Bol ted Join ts .......... .................... . ............. 155
5203 Welded Joint s ............................ . .... ....... 155
520.4 PrOleeled Zone. ........ ............. .................... .. .. ......... .......... 158
520.5 Continuity Pl ates and Stiffeners .................. 158
SECTION 521 . MEMBERS ........ ..... ............... ........................................................ ............................................................ 159
52 1. 1 Scope ........ ............. .. .... .. ... ............ ... ........ . .......................... 159
52 1.2 Classification or Sections for Loca l Bucklin g .... .. 159
52 1.3 Column Stren gth ... .... .... ...... ........ ..... ..... ..... .. . . . ••. ....... 159
52 1.4 Column Splices ...... ...... .... . 159
52 1.5 Column Bases .. ................ ... . .. IGO
521 .6 H·Piles ..... . . 160
SECTION 522· SP EC IAL MOM ENT FRAMES (SMF) ..................................... ...................... ....................................... 161
522.1 Scope ............ ........... .. .. ....... ............ ................. ........... ... ...... ..•..•... .............. .............. ................ ............. 161
522.2 Beam-Io-Columll Connections ,.................................... ...... , ....... , .. 161
522.3 Panel Zone of Bcam-to-Colulllll Connecti ons (Beam Web PClrallcl lo Col umn \Veh) ............ .............. . ..... 167.
522.4 Beam and Column Limi tati o ns . ............................. .I (,?
.')22 .5 Continuit y Plat es .............. ............. ,. .... . ............ ... .... .... ...... . .. l( '
522 .6 Column- Beam Mome nt Ratio. ........ .... .. .. .......... ... ...... ... .. ................. ..... .... .. ........... . l: - ~
522 .7 La teral Bracing at Beam -In-Column Connections ..... ...... ... ........ ... ... .... ...... . . 1(>:\
522 .8 Lateral Bnlci ng of Beams .. ......... ..... .... H)';
522.9 Column Splices .... ............ ... . ..164
SECTION 523· I NTERMEI))A TE MOMENT FRA~-IlCS (IMF) .. .......................... ............................. .... ....................... ](.4
523 .1 Scope ..... ........ ....................... ........ . .. ...... .. .. ... ........................ ......... ............ ............ .. .. .... ........... .......... .• . ' "
523 .2 Beanl-to-Coiunlll Co nnect ions ...... ........... ,... , .... ........ , ........ , ....... ............... , .... .... ........... , ... , .. , ..................... , ....... " ,
523.3 Panel Zone of Beam-la-Column Connections (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web) ............ ............................ ....... .. . .J
523.4 Beam and Column Limitations. ............ .... ............... .. ........... ............. .... ... .. .... ,.. ..................... ,(,5
523 .5 Contin ui ty Plates.. ...... .. ........ ...... . .. ................... .. .... .... . ..... ............. .. ... .. .. .... ...... ... . ' 65
523 .6 Col umn -Beam MOnlclll Rat io ....... .. .............. . .................... ............ 165
SECTION 524 . ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OM F) ....................... ............. ... ............. .......................... ....... ,....... 166
524.1 Scope . ....... .......... .. .... .... ....... ... ..... ........... ..... ...... .......... ............... . ......................... .... 166
524.2 Beam·lu·Col umn ........... ...................... .................... .................. .............. .. ................. 166
524.3 Pimcl Zone of BcanH o-Column Con necti ons (Beam Web Paralle l To Colu mn Web) ... 167
524.4 Beam and Col umll Limitations........ ....... ........ ........ ....... ......... ......... .. .. .. 168
524.5 Conlinuily I'lllle5.. ..... . ... ............. ...... .... ........ ... ............... .168
524.6 Columll-Beam Moment Ratio......... ............... ................. . loS
524.7 Lateral Bracing al Beam-Io-Column Connections .................................................... .. ........................... " ... ........... 168
524.8 Laleral Bracing of Bea ms ............. .. .......... ........................... .. ............................................................... 168
524.9 Col umn Splices.. ......... ........................................... ........... ............ .... .................. .. ......... ..................... .... 168
SECTION 525· SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES (STMF) ......................... ........................... .............................. 169
525.1 Scope ............... . ... . 169
525.2 Special Segmenl .... ........... . .... ... 169
525.3 Slrenglh of Special Segmenl Members .... ..... .. .. 169
525.4 Sirengih of Non·Special Segmenl rs....................... .. ............. . .. ........ 169
525.5 Widlh·Thickness Limilalions .......................................... ................... ........... . .. ............................................... 169
525.6 Laleral Bracing ........................................... ...... .. .. ......................... 170
SECTION 526 · SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (SCBF) ....................................... .................... 170
526.1 Scope ..... ........ ...... ... .......... .... ........ ............... . . .......... 170
526.2 Members ............ .. ....... .......... ...... ............. ....... .. ............ ... .. .. 170
526.3 Required Slrenglh of Bracing Conneelions .. .. .. 17 1
526.4 Special Bracing Configuration Requiremenls ......................... .............. ................... .................... ................ .. 17 1
526.5 Column Splices ........................................................... ........... ....... .................................... ........................................... 172
526.6 Protected Zone ..... ... ......................... .. .... .. ... ......... ............... ............... .. ..... ........ ... ...... .. ... ............................................ .. 172
SECTION 527· ORDINARY CONCENTRI CALLY BRACED FRAMES (OCBF) ...................................................... I72
527.1 Scope.. ..................... ............................. .............................. .. ...... ........ ................................................ 172
527 .2 Bracing Members ........ ..... .. . .. ................ . ........ ...... ..... ........ .... ... 172
527.3 Special Bracing Configuralion..... .......................... .... ............... .. ..... ...... ...... .. ... 172
527.4 Bracing Conneelion'...... .... ............... ........................ ............... ........... .. .... ............... .. ..... 173
527.5 OCBF above Seismic Isolation SySiems..................................................................................................................... 173
SECTION 528· ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF) ................................................................................... 173
528.1 Scope ... ............................... ................. ............................................................................................... ........................... 173
528.2 Links ......................................................................... .. .............. ..... ........................... .. ..................... .. ........................... 173
528.3 Link Stiffeners .......... ....... ....................... ............. ....... .. ............................................... 174
528.4 Lin k·l o·Column Connections ............................................... .......... .. ......... ..... ............... .... ............ 174
528.5 Lateral Bracing of Link ... ........................... .......... ......................... .. .... .... ............. ............ ...... ....... .......... ........... 175
528.6 Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link .............................................................................. ....... ............................. 175
528.7 Beam·to·Column Connections ......... ... ..................... ..... ................................................................................................ 175
528.8 Required Slrenglh of Col umns .................................. ... ................................................... .................................. ...... 176
528.9 Protected ZOlle .......................... .. ............ ........ ............................ ......... ..... ............ .. .................. ..... ................................ 176
528.10 Demand Critical Welds................. ............................................ .. ...... .. ............................................. .. .............. 176
SECTION 529 ·IlUCKLING·RESTRAINED IlRACED FRAMES (IlRIlF) .................................................................. 176
529.1 Scope .. ......................... ....................... ........................................ ....................... ... ............. . .. ............. 176
529.2 Bracing Members .......................................................................................... .................. ........................ .. .................. 176
529.4 Special Requirements ......................................................................................................................... ....................... 177
529.5 Beams and Columns ............................... .... ............................................................................. .. ................................... 178
529.6 Protected Zone .. .. ........ .. ....................... ..... ............................... ... ........... ............................................ ... ........................ 178
SECTION 530· SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SI'SW) ......................................................................................... 179
rh
National Structural Code of tl're Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
!) B CHAP"!"!: n:.:, Steel (]n(J /·Act,jb
I
,
553.2 Tension Member.; .........
553 .3 Flex ural Menlbers ...... ,...
553.4 Conce ntri cilily
.. .......... .. .................................................................................................................. 243
.. ........................ ,.....
Loaded Compression Members ..
553.5 Co mbilwd Axi,ll Load and Bending.. .............. .
.............. . ... ..................................... 24]
.....................
................
.. .................. 259
.. ....... 262
SECTION 554 - STRUCTURAL ASSEMBLIESAND SySTEMS ................................................................................... 2G5
554. 1 Built-Up Sections.. .................................... ................ .... .. .............. .. 265
554 .2 Mixed Systems ........... ................ .......... .... .. .. .. ......... .............. .............. ...................... ...266
554.3 Lateral and Stability Bracing .... .................... ............. ................. .. .............................................. 266
554.4 Cold -Formed S teel Light-Frame Construction .......................................... ... .. ................................................ 268
554.5 Floor. Roof. or Wall SteCi Diaphragm Construction ...................... ,............. .. ............................................ .............. 268
554 .6 Metal Roof aud Wall System .... .................................................................................................................................. .. 269
SECTION 555 - CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS ...... ...... _.. _..................... _......... __ ..... _...... _................................................ 275
555.1 General I'ro"isions .......... ............................................................................... ..... ........................................................... 275
555.2 Welded Connections .............................. ................................................ ............................... ......................................... 275
555.3 Bolted Connec ti on ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 1
555.4 Screw Connections ............................. ........................................................ .. .. ..... ...... .. .................................. ... .. 283
555.5 Ruplure .................................. ...... .................................................................... ..... ......................................................... 285
555 .6 Connecting to Other Materials .. ...... .... .......................................................... ............. .................................................. 286
SECT/ON SSG - TESTS FOR SPECIAL CASES ....... _........ _.............................................................................................. 286
556. J Tests for Determining Structural Performance .. . ....................... . .......... .... ................. ... ................. .. .... 286
556.2 Tests for Confirming Structural Performance" .. "........................ .... ...... .. ............. ".".......... .. ... 288
556.3 Tests for Determinin g Mechanical Properties ." .................... ".............. .. .. ..................................... . . " .,288
SECTION 557 - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS FOR
CYCLIC LOADING (FA TIGUE)................................ ....... .................... ................................... ........................................... 290
557. 1 General ................................... ..... ................................................................................................................................. 290
557.2 C<llculalion of Maximum Stresses and S tress Ranges ............ ....................... ......................... ................ ...................... 29 1
557.3 Design Stress Range ............... ..................................................................................... ..... ............................................. 29 I
557.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts .......... ...... .. ............................................................................................................................. 29 1
557.5 Special Fabrication Requirements ............................................ ... ................ .... ......................... ............... ..................... 292
SECTION C-I - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS USING THE DIRECT
STRENGTH METHOD .................. _................................................................................................................. .................... 292
C-I Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members Using the Direct Strength Method .................................................... 292
1h
National Structural Code of the Pil ilippil10S 6 Edition Volume 1
SECTION C·2 . SECON()·ORnEIt ANA I. I'SI'S ........... .................................................................. .................................. 299
C.2. 1 Gellera l HcquirclIlcllts ...................... . ................................... ········ ....... 299
C.2.2 Design and Ana lys is COIlSII':li IlI S ....... . ............................ .. 299
SECTIO N C3 - Af)()ITlONAL PROVi SiONS ... ... ............................. ... ........ ......................... : .......................................... 300
C.3.1 Scope . ................ . ......................... .... 300
C.3.2 Olhor Sle<is .................. . ................ ............ 300
C.3 .3 Londs .. ..... .. ....... .. .. ........... .... . . ........ 300
C.3.4 RcfcrclH.:cd Documellts ................ ,' . ........... _......... . ... .... ..... ........ .............................................. ...... . 300
C.3 .S Tension Members ..... . .................................................................. . 30 1
C.3.6 Liglll-Framc Steel Constru clioll ... . ..................... .. ..... .............. ......... ........ ........... ..... ..... 301
C.3.? Welded Connections ... ........... ............... ................ .......... ... .. .... .. ............... ............. ..302
C.3.8 Bolted Connecti ons .... . ..... :~O7.
C.3.9 RuplUrc..... .................. . .................. ................. ......... ..... .. ... ..... ......... . ......... ......... ...... ......... - ........ .... 30(j
referred to as the Specification, shall apply 10 the design Chord gross area, mm 2
of the structural steel system, where the steel elements arc Gross area subject to shear, Illm
J
defined in the AISC Code of Slttlidard Practice for Steel Net area of member, 111m2
Buildings and Bridges, Section 2.1. Net area subject to tension, mm
2
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
c,. 1.:ttt:r;ll-lorsional buckling lllodifit,lI ion factor F,., Elastic nl!xul"ill bllc~ling stl"l'SS about the major
for nonu niform momCIH diagrams when hoth axis. MPa
ends of (he.' unsupported segment ;lrc braced I;/:x,\" ElcCll"odl! class ification number, MPa
COCfriC iCll1 rclaling rela tive brace stiffn ess and 1':.,. Elastic l1exural buckling stress about the minor
(, t.:U(V;IHJrc
COm>lil1l1 lHlscd 011 slress ca tegory. giVl'1l in
axis, MPa
Elastil.' torsiollal huck ling stress. MP"
Table 501').1 A caltu latcd strcss lIsed ill the calculation of
Coefficient assu ming no lateral tr;lll slalion of th e nominal flexural strength. MPa
frame Nominal torsional stre ngth
Ponding ncxibilit y coefficient fo r primary Nominal tensi!!: ..:trcss Fill ,or shear stress, rnv
member in a flat roof from Table: ) I 03.2. M I'a
c. Coefficient for web 5idcsway buckling Nominal tcnsile strc.'iS from T<lblc 510.3.2, MPa
C, Ponding flexibility coefficient for second.try Nominal tensile stress Illodilied 10 include th e
member in a flat roof effects ofshe;Jri ng stress, MPH
C,. Web shear coefficient Nominal shear stress from T:lblc 510.1.2, MPa
Cn· Warping constant , rnm (' Design stress range, MPa
D Nominal dead load Threshold fati gue stress range, maximuill stress
f) Outside diameter of round HSS member. !Hill . ran ge ror indefinite design lil"e frolll Table 501-
f) Outside diameter, mill ) . 1. Mla
D Ou tside diameter of round HSS main member. F Specified minim um tensile st rength of the type
111 III
" of steel being lIsed, MPa
D Chord diameter. mm P" Specified minimu m tensile stre ngth of a stud
D" Outside diameter of rOllnd I-tSS branch meJ1Jber. sh("1I" connect or, MPa
mill Specified minimum tcnsile st rength of the
Factor us ed in Equation 507 .3 -), depe ndent on cOllfl ec ted material , MPa
type of transverse stiffeners used in a plme Speci fi ed minimum tensil e strength of HSS
girder material. MPa
In slip-critical co nn ections, a multiplier that Speci fi ed minimum tensile stre ngt h of thc type
rencets the ratio of the mean installed bolt of steel being used at elevated temperature, MPa
pretension (0 the specified minimum bolt Nominal strength of th e we ld metal per unit
pretension area. MPa
E Modulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000 MPa Nominal stress in any ilh weld c.icmcnl, MPa
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete = x component of stress Fwi , MPa
0.043w/' JT:.
MPa
1'.
y component of stress Fwi , MPa
Specil1ed minimum yield stress of the type of
Modulus of elasti ci ty or concrete. at elevated steel being lIsed, MPa. As used in (h is
te mperatu re, MPa. Specification, "yield stress" denotes either the
Effective stiffness of composite section, N_mm 2• specified minimum yield point (for those steels
Mod ulus of elastiCity of steel at e1evatcd that have a yield point) or speci fied yield
temperature, MPa strength (for those steels that do not have a yield
Es Modulus of elasticity of steel =200 000 Mra point).
F" Available ax ial stress at th e. point of Spccilied minimum yield stress of the
consideration, MPa compression flange, MPH
Nominal strength of th e base metal per unit area, Specified minim um yield stress of the colu mn
MPa web. MPa
Available flexural strc.ss at the point of F, Specified mi nim um yie ld stress of HSS member
consideration about the major axis, MPa material. MPa
Ava ilable flex ural slress at the poi nl ' of Specified minillllim yield stress of HSS main
consideration about the min or axis, MPH member material , MPa
Available stress, MPa Specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch
Critical stress, MPa member material. MPa
Buckling stress for the section as determined by SpeCified 1ll11lJIll UIH yield $ ~ reS1> of Il l"':'
analysis. MPa overlapping bra nc h material, MPa
Critical stress about the minor axis, MPa Specified 1l1immUIl1 yield ~t rcss of I!!:'
Critical torsional buckling st ress, MPa overlapped branch materi al, MP;l
EI:!stic critical buckling stress, MPa
th
National Stru ctural Code of til e Pll ilippines 6 Edition VO!lJnlC 1
. ..
.~,>
\,
,
~
M, 'f' R cq llir~d in-plant.' Ik xura l st rength ill branch. /' Rcq ui rnl <lxiil l :-.tfcngth in hra nch. N
N- 1Il1ll 1', Rcqui n:d axial stfl' ogth ill chord. N
M , "I' Rcqui rt.'d ow-or-plant' flexural strcngth in P" Req uired :Ixial strength in c:olllprc','iinn. N
hnllich . N- mm 1', Memher yie ld st r~ l1 g t h, N
M" Required l1 exllral strength in chord_ using. LRFD (i pull reduction factor for slende r t:omprcss io ll
load cornbil\iII i on~. N-1ll1ll . cknH.'llts.
M, Yield moment aholJt the <lx is or bcnding. N-Illlll 00 Rcdut'tion for slender stiffelled
MI S!lIaller Illome nt , calculated from a firsi-Mder compression clements.
nJlalysis, at th e ends of that portion of' the Cho rd-st ress interac tioll p;\rarncte.r.
mcmbcr unbmcc{. i;! th e plane of bending linda Nominal st rength of one slUd shear l'Ollllc.cior, N
considera ti on, N-mm Reduction f"m:tor for slender u n ~ l i fTe n('.d
M"!, Larger moment , c.llc ulatcd from a lirst-(Inlt.'r comprcssion clements.
i11l<1l ys is, lit the ends of that P0l1i oll of the /I Nominal load due to fili nwalc r or snow,
member unbracccf in the plane of bCllll ing tinder exclusive of the pon ding t'olllrihulill!l, i\·1Pa
ct Hlsideration, N-mm /I Sei smic response modiliea ti on coe ffici!.":nt .
N Length of be<l ring (nol less than k for cnd beam /I" Required strength (ASD).
reactions). mill . NUl. Redu ction factor for joints using a pair or
N BCilrin g length of-the load. measured parililel to Inllls vcrsc fillet welds only.
the axis of the HSS member, (or measured ilt TOSS Coefficient 10 account for group effect.
the width of the HSS in the case of the loaded Faclor in Equation 50J-6h dcpcm.l en t on Iype of
cap plates), mill. system.
N Number of slress range flu ctuatioJl s in desi gn /I", Cross-sec ti on Illollosy mrnctry parameter.
life . R" Nominal st rcngth , spct' if"ied ill Section 502
N" Number of bolts carrying the appli ed tension. through.') J I.
N, Additional lateral load. RII Nomina! slip resi sta nce, N
N, Notional lateral load applied al level j, N R'I Position erfect factor for shea r studs
N j Number or slip planes. R, Web piast ifi cat ioll factor
0,. Overlap connection coefficient. "
R"JI' Reduction factor for reinforced or nonrcinforced
P Pilch, Ilun per thread. transverse pani al"joilH"pcnetralioJ) (PJP) groove
PI" Required brace strength, N welds
P,. Avaiitlble axial compressive strength, N N fl/ Web plastificalion faclOr corresponding to the
P, AV<lilable tensile strength. N tension nange yielding limit Slate
Pc·" Avai lable compressive strength ou t of the plane Required strengt h <LRFD>
of bending. N Total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded
P("I,P("] Elastic critical buckling load for braced and fillet welds, as determin ed in accordance with
unbraced frame, respectively, N Table 5 10.2.5
Pd _ Euler buckJing load, evaluated in the plane of R"'f Tala.! nominal strength of transversely loaded
bending. N fillet welds, as detennined in 'lccordance wil h
ptrUJ Firsl~order axial force using LRFD Of ASD load Table 510.2.5 without the alternate in Sect ion
combinations as a result of lateral translation of 510.2.4 <a>
the frame only (ten sion or compression), N S Elastic section modulus of round HSS, Illml
P II(I.r J First~order axial force using LRFD or ASD load S Lowest elastic section modulus rel<lti ve to the
combinations, assuming there is no lateral axis of bending, mm J
translation of the frame (tension or S Spacing of secondary members, Ill.
compression),N S Chord elastic secti on modulus, 1ll1l1"'
1'" Nominal axial strength, N Sc Elastic section modulus to Illt~ toe il '
P" Nominal axial compressive strengt h wit hollt compression relative to lhe axis of bending, mn<
consideration of length effects, N Effecti ve section modulus about Inajor <lxis, Ill m ;
P" Nominal bearing strengt h of concrete, N Elastic section modulus referred to tension and
3
Pr Required seco nd-order axial strength using compression flan ges. respecti vely, mm
LRFD or ASD load combi nations, N Elastic secti on modulus taken about the prillcip;!l
Pr Required axial compressive strength using axes, mm 3
LRFD or ASD load combinations. N Sy For channels, taken as the minimum see:;·:)) :
P, Required tensile strength using LRFD or ASD modulus
load combinations, N T Nominal forces and deformations due !o L::
Pr Required strength, N design-basis fire defined in Section 1\-4.2.1
Tensioll force due 10 ASD load combinations, . he width b is th e distant:e from the free edge to
kN I 'le first row of '-:!stcHers or line of we lds , o r the
d i 'itancc bc t wc<.~ 11 adjacclII lines or fa ste ners o r
Min im um fasten er tens ion g ive n in Table li l ~ cs of welds: fo r rectang ul ar HSS , the widt h b
SIOJ. I ,kN is Ille clear di stance between the webs less the
Available tors ional strength, N-Ill!ll insi de corner radills on each side, mill
Nomin:d IOrsiona l strength, N-IllJ11 h Wid!.!j of thl! angle leg resisting the shew' for ce,
Required torsional strength, N-Il1J11 mm
Tension force.: due to LRFD load combi(1alions, h'i Width l)f column fl ange, mm
kN b, Rcducuj erfec tive width, mm
u Sheil!' hig (;II.:lor bItT Effecti ve edge distance; the distance from the
u Utiliz<lt ion nui o edge of t l}(~ hole to the edge of the pari me asured
U., Reduc tion coefficient. used in calcul ating bloc k in the di recti on norma l (0 the applied force, m m
s hear rupture strength b ..... , Effective w idth or the branch face welded to the
u,' Stress index chord
U, Stress index bN W Effe.Cliw 'wi dth of the branch face welded to the
V Required shear force introduced to colu mn, N Qverlapp<,'d brace.
V' Required shear force transfen"cd by shear b, Flange w idt l), mm
co nn ectors, N "f,' Compression nangc width, 111 m
V, Available s hear streng th , N bf , Width oftensiv il fl ange. mill
V" Nominal shear st rength. N hI Longe r leg of a f, gle, mill
V, Req ui red shear strength eH the locati on of the b" S honeI' leg o r .11} /~Je. mill
stiffener, N b, Stiffener width for o ll e-sid ed stiffeners, 1111ll
v, Required shear strength usin g LRFD or ASD d Nominal fastener lliametcr, mm
load combinations, N d Full nominal depth of the section, mill
v, Gravit y load from the LRFD load co mbination d Full nomin a! de pth I 'f tee, 111111
or J.6 tim es the ASD load combinmion applied d Depth of rectangular bar, 111m
at level i, N d Full nominal deplh of ",cctlon, 111m
)', Hole re du cti on coefficie nt, N d Full nonunal depth of It 'C, mm
Z Plasti c secti o n mod ul us about the axis of d Dinmeter, 111m
bending, mill) d Pin diameter, mill
z, Branch plastic sectio n modulus abou t the correct d RoBe r diameter, mill
axi s of be nding, 111111" dlJ Beam depth. I11Ill
Plastic sec tion modulus abou t the principal axes, d Nominal diameter (body or sl .:mk diameter), Illill
J
mm ti," Column depth, mOl
a C lear d istance be twee n transverse sti ffeners, l! Eccentricity in a truss c.;oll llectic..·n. positive being
111111 . away from the branches, m ill
a D islallCC between cOll nectors in a built -up e"""'!'1 Dist<lIlce from the edge of slUd sila.llk to the stee l
member, 111111 deck web, measured at mid-heigh!. of the deck
Sh0l1 est di stan ce from edge of pin hole to edge ri b, and in th e load bearing direction I) f th e stud
" of member measured parallel to direction of (in otller word s, in the direction of I.naximum
force, mm moment for a simply supported beam ), 1ll ,'1 }
a Half th e length of the nonwelded root fa ce in the ii! Required axial stress at the poiI'I , of
direction or
th e th ickness of the te nsio!l-loCl ded co nsideration lIsi ng LRf-n or ASO ,!,)ad
plate, Illlll combinations. MPa
(1,,- Rat io of two times the web area in co m press ion .Ii"",. :, Required fl ex unl l stress .11 {he point 0 1
due to appli cati on of major axis bendi ng moment considerat io n (major .. xis. minor axis) using
alone lO the area of the comprc.o.;sion !lange LRFD or ASD IO<ld combinatio ns, MPa
components /'c. Spec ifi ed minimulll co mpress ivc stlcngth of
/, Outside width of leg in compression, Illlll conc rcte., MPa
b Full width of longest angle leg, mill [ 1'1" Spec ified minimum compressive stn 'ngth or
b 'Widt h o f ullstiffcncd com pression e leme nt ; for concrete at clevtt tc temperatures, MPa
fl anges of I-shaped members and tees, the widt h J, Slress due to D + R (the nominal dead lead + tloc
b is ha lf the fil II -flange width, bf ; for legs or nominal load due to minwater or snow c.xcl lls ive
angles and flanges of cha nn els and zees, the of the ponding contribu tion), MPa
width b is the full nominal dim ension; ror plates, j., Req uired shear st rength pCI' unit area, 1\1]> 1',
g Transvc rsL' c:.:cntcr-h>-rcnter spadng tgage) r, Mini mum radius of gyrat ion of individunl
between fastener gage lines, 111m component in a built-up rncmht.:L I11Ill
g Gap hetw(.~cn lUes of branch members in a Radi us or gyralU)1I uf indi vidu al co mponent
gapped K- co nnc ctioll, neglecting th e wdd s, 111m relative (0 its centroidal axis paralkl 10 member
Clear distance between /langes less the liJIel or axi s of buckling. mill
" corner r.adius for rolled shapes; fl Jr built -up
sections. the di stance between adj(l( ellt li nes of
r oO Pola r radius of gynllion alHHIl the shear t.:c ntcr,
n1l11
fasteners or the dear distance bct v.'ccn Jlangcs r, Radius of gyralion oj" the !lange comp(1)L!llls ill
when welds arc used; for tCC!'i. the ove rall depth; flexur;!l compression plus one-thi rd of the web
ror rectangul<lr I-ISS, the clear di st<tncc between arca in cumpression due to app lil;alion of maj or
the flanges less the inside comer radius 011 each axis bending mome nt alone
side, mm Effective radius of gyration used in th e
Distance between centroids of individual determination or
Lr for the lateral-torsional
" components pcrpendiculnr to the member ClJ>;is or
buckling, mill
buckling limi t stale fo r majo r <lJ>;is bending of
doubl y symmetric compact I-shaped members
",. Twice the di sta nce from the ce ntroid {o the
following: the in side face of the co mp res sion r,
ilnd channels
Radius of gyrati on aboul geometriC axis paraUcl
nangc less the fillet or corner radius , for rolled to connected leg. mill
shapes; th e nearcs t line of fasteners at the r, Radius of gyra ti on about y-iIXis, mill
compression nangc or the ill side faces of the r Radiu s of gyrati on for the minor principal axis,
compression l1ange wh en welds arc used, for ml1l
builHIj> secti ons, mm Longitudilwl ccnter-iQ-(;CIHCr spacing (pitch) of
h" Distance between flange .;cnt roi ds, mill any two consecutive ho les, mill
II f' Twicc the di slallce frolll the plastic neutral axis Thickness of clemen!. mm
to thc nearest line of faste ners at th e co mpression Wall thickl1 ess, mill
llallge or the inside face of the compression Angle leg thickness. mill
nange when welds arc· used, mill Width of rectangul ar bar parallcl to ilxis or
h~, . Hole factor bending. 111m
j Factor defined by Equation 507.2 -6 for Thickness of connected material, 111m
minimum Ploment of' incniH for a Thickness of pliitc , II1Ill
transverse stiffcnr r. Design Willi thi ckne ss for HSS equal to 0.93
k Distance from ouler face of flange to the web toc times the nominal wall thickness for ERW HSS
of fillel, mm and equal to [he 110minal wall thickness ror SA W
k Outside corm:.r radius of the HSS, which is I-ISS, Illill
permitled 10 he taken as I.St i r unknow n. Illlll Total thickness of fillers, mill
k,. Coefficie nt tor slender ullstiffened clements, mill Design wall thi ck ness of HSS ma in membe r, mm
k.\ Slip-criti c.ll combined ten sion and shear r" Design wall thi cknes s of HSS branch member,
coe ffici ~ nt mm
k,_ Web pl,ale buckling coefficient Thick ness of the overla pping branch. I11Ill
I Largr st laterall y unhraced length along either Thickness of the overlapped branch. mm
flan i!-c at the point of load , mm Thickness of the column nan ge, Illlll
L(' nglh of be.aring, mill Thicknes:-; of th e loaded flange, Illlll
tl'nglh of cOll nection in th e direction of loading, Flange thickness of channel shear co nnector, mm
111m Compression flange thickness. mill
II Number or nodal braced points within the spa ll Thickness or plale, 111m
II Threads per mill Thickness of ten sio n loaded plale, mm
p RHtio of cleme nt i deformation to its deformation Thick ness or the .Htac hed transverse pl at(~, Jllin
at maximum stress Web sliffener thickness. mill
Proj ected length of the overlappin g branch o n the Weh lhickness o f ciw lln c l :-;hear conncctor, I11Ill
chord Beam web thickn ess, 1ll1ll
q O vcrlnp le ngt h lIlea:mrcd along the connecting Web thickness, mill
face of the chord bene at h th e t wO branches t". Column web thickncss. 111111
r Governi ng radius of gyratio n, mm I,.. Thickness of clement, 111m
Distance frolll instantaneous cellter of rOlation to \I' Width of cover plate, Inm
we ld clement with minimum u hi ratio, nun \I' Weld leg si ze, mill
Subscript relating symbol to major principal axis Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the
bending branches of a gapped K-connection to the width
II' Plate width, mill oj" thc chord for rcctangular HSS
Leg size of thl' reinforcing or contouring ri Ilet , ir Load length parameter, applicable only to
'/
any, in the direction of the thickness or the rcctangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
tension-loaded plate, mm contact 'of the branch with the chord in the plane
w, Weight or COJlcrete per unit volume (90 '.s II', < oj" the connection to the chord width
1
155 Ibsm or 1500 W,':' 2500kg/m\ Slenderness parameter
11', A vcr-age width or concrete db or haunch, mm
Limiting slenderness parameter for compact
x Suh'\'Tipt relating symbol to strong axis
clement
Coordinates of' the shear center with respecI to
Limiting slenderness parametcr for compact
the centroid, mm
nange
,\ Connection eccentricity, mill
Limiting slenderness parameter for compact web
Y Subscript relating symbol to weak axis
Limiting slcnderness parameter for noncompact
Subscript rclating symbol 10 minor principal axis
element
bcnding
Limiting slendcrness parameter for noncom pact
{/ FaCIOI' uscd in 132 equal
flange
1/ Scparation ratio for built-up compression Limiting slenderness parameter for noncom pact
members:;;:; __ .12......" web
2rib Mean slip coefficient for class A or B surfaces,
/1 Reduction factor gi ven by Equation 5 J 0.2-1 as applicable, or as established by tests
/1 Width ratio; the ratio or branch diameter to chord Resistance nlCtor, specified in Section 502
diameter for round HSS; the ratio of overall through 5 I 1
branch width to chord width for rectangular HSS Resistance factor for bearing on concrete
/1, Brace stiffness requirement excluding web Resistance factor for flexure
dist0I1ion, N-Il1Il1/radian Resistance factor for compression.
Rcquircd brace stiffncss Resistance factor for axially loaded composite
Effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters columns
of the two branch members ill a K-conncction Resistance faclOr for shear on the failure path
divided by eight times the chord width Resistance factor for torsion
If"",1 Effective outside punching parameter Resistance factor for tension
jJ"", Web distor1ional stiffness, including the effect of Resistance factor for shear
web transverse stiffeners, if any, N-mmlradian Safety factor
/1" Section propCI1y for unequal leg angles, positive Safety factor for bearing on concrete
for short legs in compression and negative for Safety factor for llexure
long legs in compression Safety factor for compression
First-order interstory drift due to the design Safety factor for axially loaded composite
loads, mill .columns
First-order interstory drift due to lateral forces, Safety factor for shear on the failure path
mm Safety factor for torsion
Deformation of weld elements at intcrmediatc Safety factor for tension
stress levels, linearly proportioned to the critical Safety factor for shear
deformation based on distance from the Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal
instantaneous center of rotation, ri, mm reinforcing
Deformation of weld clcment at maximum () Angle of loading measured from the weld
stress, mm longitudinal axis, degrees
.1" Deformation of weld clement at ultimate stress o Acute anglc between the branch and chord,
(fracture), usually in clement flU1hest from degrees
instantaneous center of rotation, 111111 Slrain corresponding to compressive strength,
Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the f'c
)'
diameter to the wall thickness for round HSS; thc ", Parameter for reduced flexural sliffness using the
direct analysis mel hod
ratio of one-half the width to wall thickness for
rectangular HSS
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
1))4
ALLOWABLE STRENGTH_ Nominal strength dividcd BLOCK SHEAR RUPTU RE. In a connecti on, li mit
by th e safety factor. R "I D. state of tension fra ctu re alo ng o ne path and shear yielding
or shear fracture along another path .
ALLOWABLE STRESS. Allowabl e strcngth dividcd by
the app rop ria te section property, such as secti on mod ul us BRACED FRAME. An essent ia ll y vertical tn:
or cross-secti on area. sys tem that provides resistance to latera! forces ;''''~
provides stabilit y fo r the structural system.
AMPL IFI CA TION FACTOR Multipli cr o f the
resu lts o f first-order ana lysis to reflect second - o rder BRANCH FACE. Wall o f HSS branch I11cmber.
efrccts _
BRANCH M E MBER. For !-ISS co nnecti ons. melll! ,. _
AS!) (ALLOWABLE STRENGTH DES IGN). Mct hod th ai tem1inatcs at a chord member or main meil iber.
of propol1ioning stmc tural components slI ch thaI the
allowable st rength equals or exceeds the required strength BUCKLING. Limit state of sudden change in I ~ ;C
of the component under the ac tio n of th e ASD load geometry or a structure or an y of its clements unde: i.
combinations. cri tical loading condition.
ASD LOAD COMllINA TION _ Load comb inati o n in BUCKLING STRENGTH. Nomina l strength for
th is code intended for allowable strength design buckling or instabilit y limi t stales.
(a llowable stress des ign)_
BUILT-UP MEMBER, C RO SS-Snr";'!c; : '.
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDI C TION. SECTION, SHAPE. Member. cross-s",:ti"n. ,,-," ,-,:
Orga ni z:lIion. political subd ivision, office or indi vidua l shape fabricated from structural stee l ~:, 'I1I {" JiI -; i- .:
charged wi th the responsibility of admi ni stering and weldcd or bolted together.
enforcing the provisio ns of thi s code.
CAMBER . Curvature rabricated int o ;t hC; ! ~1 ·1 (' 'rll ~s
AVA ILABLE STRENGTH _ Des ign strength or so a~ to compensate fo r denection indt :~l~ d by III .. i:;.
allow:tble strength, as appropriate.
C!-IARPY V-NOTC H IMPA CT T EST. St.. "d"rd
AVA ILAB LE STR ESS_ Dcsign strcss or allowahle dynamic test mc;tsuri ng notch I\;~ :: L!lt';';,
stress, as appropriate. specimen.
AVERAGE RIB WIDTH. Average wid th o f the ri ll of a CHORD MEMBER. For !iSS. pri.:. :.::.-
corrugat ion in a fonned sleel deck. extends through a truss co nn ecti on.
CLADDJNG. E Xlcrior cove ring or slrLl(; llI rc. CROSS CONNECTION. HSS co nn ec ti on in which
forces in bran ch members or connecting cle meJlt s
COLD·FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAIL transve rse to the main member are primarily equili bra ted
MJt:MIIEn . Shape manufaclu rcd by press-bnlking by forces in otliel' bra nch members or connecting
blanks shc<lrcd from sheets, cut length s of coi ls o r elciTlcn l ~ 011 the opposi te side of the mai n member.
plates. or hy roll fonning co ld - or hot- rolled co il s or
shects; both fOllning operations being performed at DESI GN LOAD. App lied Iliad detcnnincd ill
ambient nXlJll Icmpenlture. that is. without mani fest accordance with either LRFD load co mbinati ons or
addition of hem such as would be required for hot ASD load combinations, whichever is applicable.
(arming.
DESIGN STRENGTH. Resistance factor multiplied by
COLUMN. Stru ctural member that IHI!; the primary the nominal stren gth. ¢RI!.
function of resisting (lxi nJ forcc.
DESIGN STRESS RANGE. Magnitude of change in
COMDINED SYSTEM. StnlCture comprised of two or st ress due to th e repeated appli cHtion and removal of
more lateral load-resisting syslems of diffe rent type. service live loads. Por locations subject 10 stress reversa l
il is the algebraic difference of the peak stresscs.
COMPA CT SECTION. Section capable of developing .a
fully pi<lsti c stress distribution and possessing a rotation DESIGN STRESS. Design strength divided by the
capacity of approximately three before the onset of local appropriate sec tion propcrty, such as section modulus
buckJing. or cross section area.
CONCRETE· ENCASED BEAM. Beam totally encased DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD. Design method for
in concrete cast integrally wi th the sial>. stability that captures the effects or residual stresses and
initi al out-of-plumbness or frames by reduci ng
CONNECTION. Combination of struc tu ra l eJemeHls stiffness a nd appl ying flotional londs ill a second-o rder
and joints used to trall!;mi t forces between two or mo re analysis.
members.
DIRECT BOND INTERACTION. Mechan ism by
COPE . Cutou t made in a structura l member to remove ,\ which force is transferred between stee l and concrete
nmlge and co nform to the sha pe oj' an intersect ing in a com posilc seclion by bo nd stress.
member.
DISTORTIONAL FAILURE. Limit state 'of an HSS
COVER PLATE. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of truss connect ion based on distortion of a rectangular
a member to increase cross-sectional area, section HSS c hord member into a rhomboidal shape.
m odulus or moment of inertia.
DISTORTIONAL STIFFNESS. Oul·of·plane flexural
stiffness of web.
DOUBLE CURVATURE. Deformed shape of a beam EYEBAH. Pin-connected tcnsion rneml)(:r of uniform
with one or more inflection points within the span. thickncss, with forged or thermally cut head of greater
width than the body, propo!1ioncd to provide
DOUBLE-CONCENTRATED FORCES. Two equal pproximately equal strength in the head and body.
and opposite forces that form a couple on the same
side or the loaded member. FACTORED LOAD, Product of a load factor and the
nomina! load .
DOUBLER. Plate added to, and parallel with, a beam or
column web 10 increase resistllllce to concentrated forces. FASTENER. Generic term for bolts. rivets. nr other
cOllnecting devices.
IHUFT. Lateral deflection of' structure.
FATIGUE. Limit state of crack initiation and growth
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR, K. Ratio between resulting fro III repeated application of live loads.
the effective length and the unbraccd length of the
member. FA YING SURFACE. Contact surface of cOllnectioil
elements transmitting a shear forcc .
EFFECTIVE LENGTH. Length of an otherwise
identical column with the samc strcngth when analyzed FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMN. Composite colulll;]
with pinned end conditions. consisting of a shell of HSS or stee! pipe lJ!led with
SLJ:uctural concrete.
EFFECTIVE NET AnEA. Net area modified to account
for the effect of shear lag. FILLER METAL. Metal or alloy 10 be added in making
a welded joint.
EFFECTIVE SECTION MODULUS. Section modulus
reduced to account for buckling of slender compression FILLER. Plate used to build lip the thickness of O]]C
clements. component.
EFFECTIVE WIDTH. Reduced width of a plate or FILLET WELD REINFORCEMENT. Fillet weld ,;
slab with an assumed uniform stress distribution which added to groove welds.
produces the same effect on the behavior of a structural
member as the actual plate or slab width with its FILLET WELD. Weld of generally triangular CI""; ,·.
nonuniform stress distribution . section made between intersecting surfaces of clcments.
ELASTIC ANALYSIS. Structural analysis based on the FIRST-ORDEH ANALYSIS. Structnral analysis in
assumption that the structure rcturns to its original which equilibrium conditions arc formulated on the:
geometry 011 removal of the load. undcformed structure; second-order effects arc neglected.
FLEXURAL BUC KLINC. Buckling mode in which GRA VfTY LOAD. Load, such as that produced by dr.:aJ
il (om pn:ssion memher de flects lalcrn ll y without twist and live loads, acti ng in the downwa rd direction .
or change in LTOSS ~sct..' t j() nal shape.
GUlP (OF HOLT). Th ickne~s of materia l th rough whic h
FLEXURAL-TOHSIONAL BUCKLING. Buck ling a bol! passes.
mode ill whi ch II com pression mem ber bends and
(wists simultaneo usly wi thout change ill cross-sectional ROOVE WELD. Weld ill a groove between t:o lln cc lioll
shape. clements. Sec also AWS D 1.1. .
FORCE. Hcs ult ant of di stribution of stress over a GUSSET PLATE. Plate clement co nnecti ng tru s:\
presc ribed "rca. members or <l stru t or brace 10 a beam or colum n.
FORMED SECTION. See cold- fo rmed stee l structural HORIZONTAL SHEAR. Force at the in terfa('('
member. between steel and concrete surfaces in <I composih.:
beam.
FORM ED STEEL DECK. In co mposite construc ti o n.
sleel col d formed inlo a decking profile used as a HSS. Squa re, rectangular or round hollow stnlctural steel
pennanenl concrete form. section produced in acco rdance wi th a pipe or tubing
product specificali on.
F ULLY RESTRAINED MOMENT CONN E CTlON_
Connection capable of Iransfen'i ng moment with User Now: A pipe can be designed using the same
negligi bl e rot ati on betwee n connected members. design rules for round HSS sections as long as · it
confonns to ASTM A53 Class B and the appropriate
GAGE. Transve rse ce nter-Io-center spacing of fasteners. parameters are used in the design.
GAP CONNECTION. HSS truss connection with a gap INELASTIC ANALYSIS . Structural anal ysis th aI takes
or space on (he chord face be tween intersecting branch int o acco un t inelastic material beha vior, incl uding plastic
members. analys is.
G EOMETRI C AXIS. Axi s parallel to web. flange or INSTAIllLlTY. Limit state reached in the loading of
angle leg. it sll1Jctural component. fra me or structure in whic h a
slight disturbance in the loads or geometry product.....
GIRDER FILLER. NalTow piece of s heet steel used as a large displacements.
fi ll between th e edge o f" a deck sheet and th e flange of a
gi rd er in a composite floo r system co nstru cted using a JOINT ECCENTRICITY. For HSS tru ss co nn ec tion.
formed steel deck. perpendicular distan ce from chord member ce nt er oj'
gravity 10 infersection of branch member work poi nts.
GIRDER. Sec Beam.
Joi nt t. Area wh ere two or more ends, surfaces, or
GIRT. Horizo nt al st llH;tura l member th at su pport s wall edges arc aft ached. Calegorized by type of fastener or
p:lIlels and is prim aril y subjected to bending under we ld used and method of force transfer.
horizon tal loads, such as wind load.
K- CONNECTION. !-ISS connectio n in which forrt'.....
GOUG E. Relatively smooth surface groove or cavi ly in bnmch members or cO llnecting elemen ts tnllls vcrsc
n:.sulting from plasti c dcfoflllfltion or remo va l of material. 10 the ma in member [Ire primarily cquilibriated by fOref!,
in other branch members or connecting elemenls 011 the
GRA VITY AXIS. Axis through the cent er of gravity of a same side of the main member.
member along its le ngth.
LA C ING. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in "
GRAVITY FRAME. Poni on of the framing system not lattice confi guration, th at connects two steel sil nlh::;
included in the la ternl load resisting system. together.
1h
National Structural Code of the Phili ppi nes 6 Edition Volume 1
LAP JOINT. Juint between two ovcrl<l pping cO llllect ion LOCAL C IHPPLI NG. Lillli t SW l l' 0 1' 10(.";11 ra il ul"llofweb
c1cments in parall c l planes. plat e in the immed iat e vicinit y of a n)lll"C nl r .. l l~d load or
rcm:linn.
LATERAL BRACING. Diago nal brat'ing. shea,.
walls o r equivalent mC'lIls for provid ing in· pl allc LOCAL YIELDING. Yi~ l ding that occurs in;1 local arC'l
lateral sta hilit y. or un element.
LOAD. Force Of Olher ac tion that resu lts fro m the we igh t MOMENT CONNECTION. Conllection that
o f building mate ri als. occupants and their possessions, tra nsm it s bendi ng momcnt bCI weell ( ('Ilncctcd
envirollJ1lcnl<ll effects. differential 1ll0VC IIll!I l1 1, or members.
restrain cd dimensional changes.
MOMENT FRAME. Framing 'ysle m Ii;;" .lro" d,.;
LOAD EFFECT. Perces. Stresses and ucfonnat iolls resistance to lateral loads and provides sltlbilipf' 10 the
produ ced in a stru ctu ral componenl by structural system. primarily by shear i!nd ' ;, '::,: ..:. Gf
the framing mcmbers and the ir connection:.
Ihe appli ed load,.
NET AREA. Gro5s area reduccd to aCCOIE1< ~o : ;,: ,\'C~:
LOAD FACTOR Fac IoI' {hilt acco unt s for dev iations material.
o f the nominal load from the actu al load. for
uncertainti es in the an al ys is thal l ransfo rllls the 10,1d! ill w 11 NODAL BRACE. Brace thaI 1'1\.··.';.:,1:; I •• ;' .
load effect and for the probabilit y that more tha n olle or twist indcpendentl y o f 0:]; I
Illo vc m c n t iii..'J _: .,i
ex tre me load will occur simultaneous ly. adjaccllt brace po ints (sec relati ve brace),
LOCAL H1~NDING. Limit stale of la rge deformation NOM INAL DI !'VIENSION. Designated or llieordic;,;
o f a O:lI1gc under a concentrated te nsile force. dimension , as in Ihe tahles or section pi ,.:--:.
LOCAL BUC KLING. Limil Slale of buckling of a NOMINAL LOAD. Magniwtl e of Ihe 1o,, '!
compression element within a cross section. this code.
OUT-OJi'-PLANE IIlJCKLING. Lim it state of a PLASTIFICATION. 111 an HSS con ne cti on, limit stale
hea m-col um n belll about its Jll (~io r axis while bHsed 011 an oU I-of-pla ne ncxural yie ld line mechanism in
lateral buckling or lateral -torsional buckling is not the chord <It a branch member connection.
prevent ed by laleral bracing.
PLATE G IRD E R. Buill -up beam_
OVERLAP CONNECTION. HSS lru ss coll ileeti oll
in wh ich imersecting imUlch members overl ap. PLUG WELD. We ld m.ute in a circular hol e in one
element of ajoint fusing that clement to an othe r element.
PANEL ZONE. Web arc;] or bemll-IO-colull1l1
connection delineated by the extension of bea m and PONDING. Retention of water d ue solely to th e
column fhlll gcs through the connecti on, transmitting deflecti on of Oat roof framing.
moment through a shenr pane l.
POST-B UCKL!. G STRENGTH. Load o r fo rce that
PAHTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE can be ca rried by an element, member, or frame after
WELD (PJ]». Groove weld in which the penetrati o n initial buckling has occ urred .
is intentionall y less than the co mpl ete thickness of the
connected clement. PRETENSION E D JOINT. JOilll wilh high-strength
bolts lightened to the specified minimum pretension.
PARTIALLY RESTRAINED MOMENT
CONNECTION. Con necti on capable of transferrin g PROPERLY DEVELOPED. Reinforcing bars
moment with rotati on between connected members that is detClilcd to yield in a ducti le manner before crushing
not negli gib le. of the concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions
of ACJ 3 18 insofar as deve lopmclll lenglh, s pacing and
PERCENT ELONGATION. Measure of d uctilil y, cover shall be dee med to be pro perl y developed.
determ ined in a tensil e test ns the max imum elongation () f
the gage length d ivi ded by the original gage length. PRYfNG ACTION. Amplifi cation of the te nsion force in
a bo lr caused by leverage between the poin t of applied
PERMANENT LOAD. Load in which variations load, the bolt and the reliction of the connected elemcm:-i.
over time arc rare or of small magnitude.. All other
loads are variable loads. P UN CHING LOAD. Compooellt of brallch member
force perpendicular to a choro.
th
Nationa l Structural Cod e of th e Philipplnes 6 Edition Vol ume '1
PlJRLIN. Horizontal structural member that supports roof
deck and is primarily subjected to bending under vertical ROTATION CAPACITY. Incremental angular
loads such as snow. wind or dead loads. rotation that a given shape can accept PrJor to
excessive load shedding, defined as the ratio of the
P ~(5 EFFECT. Effect of loads act! ng on the deflected inchl:>tic rotation attained to the idealized clastic rotation
shape of a member between joints or nodes, at first yield.
SIDESWA Y IlUCKLING. Limil sla lc o f lalcra] SPLICE. Co nnec ti o n between two structura l clements
buckling of the tension flange opposite (he location of joined at their ends (0 rorm 11 single. longer elemenl .
a co nccn tr::ncd compress io n force.
STABILITY. Condition re ached in lhc loading of ..1
SIDEWALL CRIPPLING. Limil slalc of web crippling structural co mponent, frame or structure in which a
01" the si dewall s of i.I chord member at a HSS truss slight di sturbance in fhc load s or geometry does !lot
connection. produce large d ispl;'lcemcnts.
SIDEWALL CRUSHING. Limil Siaic based o n STIFFENED ELEMENT. Flal compression elemenl
bearing strength of chord member sidewall ill HSS with adjoi ning out -o f-plane clements along both edges
truss cOllnect i oJl . parallcllo the dirct:tion of loading.
SIMPLE CONNECTION. Connection thm lnmsmi ts STIFFENER. StruclU ral element, usually an angle or
neg l igible hending moment between connected plaLc, <luached to a member to distribute load, transfer
lllcm bcrs. shear or preve nt buck ling.
l
National Structura l Code of 111(-J Ptlili ppine s 6 f'. Edition Volume 1
.,
..
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS. DClerminalioo or 10ild TORSIONAL HHAC1NG. Br;lci ng resis ti ng twist of ·i~·
effects on members and COllllcc lions bmicd on principles beam or column.
of'sll1IclUral mechanics.
TORSIONAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode ill ,',·h ieh
STRUCTunAL COMPONENT. Member. w nneclOr, a compression membe r twi sts about its :-.11<'.,:- c.. : nt cr
connecting element or assemblage. <IX IS.
STRUCTURAL STEEL. SICcl clemeols as de lined in TORSIONAL YIELI>ING . Yielding Ihal Occ urs due 10
Seclion 2.1 or Ihe AISC Code of SIaooard Pracl ice ror torsion.
Steel Buildings and Bridges.
TRANSVEnSE REINFORCEMENT. Slcel
STRUCTURAL SYSTEM. An assemblage of load· reinforcement in the forlll or closee! ties or welded
can'ying components thaI arc joined together (0 provide wire fabric providing confinement for (he concrete.
imcracliol1 or interdependence. surrounding the steel shape core in an encased concrete
composite column .
T·CONNECTION. HSS conneclion in wh ich Ihe
bmnch member or connecting element is pcrpcndi cu J,u' TRANSVERSE STIFFENER. Web sl iffenCl' (,riented
to the main member and in which forces lransverse to the perpendicular to the flange s, att ac hed to the web.
main member arc primaJily equilibriatcd by shear in th e
main member. TUBING. Sec HS S.
TENSILE RUPTURE. Lim il Slale or ruplllre (rraclure) TURN·OF· NUT METHOD. Procedure whereby rhe
due to tensioll. specified prelens ion in high-s trength bolts is controlled
by rotating the fastener componellt a predetermined
TENSILE STnEWGTH (OF MATERIAL). amount aher the bolt has been silug lightened.
Maximum tensi le stress lhat ~I material is capablc of
sustaining as defined by ASTM. UNDRACED LENGTH. Distance between br:H:ed points
or a membcr, mCilsu rcd between the ce nters o~ ~:l . : ·.i:.; >l[
TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MEMBER). Maximum the bracing members.
tension force th at a member is capablc of sustaining.
UNEVEN LOAD D1STRIIlUTION. In "" lISS
TENSILE YIELDING, Yielding Ihal occurs clue 10 connection, cond ition in which th e In:.;! :';
te nsio n. distriblll cd through the cross secti on nf" ("olHlfTf n i
clemel1ls in a manner thai can be rC<tdily d ct~' i H'::lU;.
TENSION AND SHEAR IWPTUn E. In a bol'l, lim il
s tal e o r rupture (rractu rc) due lO simultaneous tcns ion and UNFRAMED END. The end or a',.'." ..
shear force. res trained against ro tati on by stiffener:.; or {· {lJllj(~cl iol1
cl ements.
TENSION FIELD ACTION. Behil vior of a panel
under shear in which diagona l tensile forces develop UNSTIFFI~NED ELEI\'IENT. Flat COllljl i\·;'Wlil I:kmc.n!
in the web and compressive rorces devclop ill the with an adjoining oUI-of-plane elemeJlt .;;.: : <
transvcrse stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt truss. parallel to the directi oll of loadin g.
THERMALLY CUT, elll wilh gas, plasma or laser, VARIABLE LOAD. Load nOI class iG,:.!
loael,
WEAK AXIS. M illOI' principal cCHtroidal axis of' a crOss: YIELDING (YIELD MOMENT). Yielding allhe
sect ion . extreme fiber on the gross sec tion of a member when the
bending m O llll'!lI rcaches Ihe yiclc.l moment.
WEATHEnING STEEL. High-strength, low-alloy steel
:hat, with suitable precautions, can be used in normal
atmospheric exposures (not marine) without protective L
paint coaling.
The User NOlcs interspersed Ihroughoul arc not pan o r the AC llnlcrn" li o na l (AC I)
Spcci fi c.: atioll,
AC I3 JS-08 Buildillg Code Requir('metlls f or
User Note: User notes arc intended to provide concise St'-Ul'llll"a/ COllcre te (llId CUllltII!'lIrary
and practical gu idance in the application of the
provisions. AC I 3 JSM-08 M errie /Ju i/dilll{ Cude /?('qllirem<!IIf,,' f or
SrJ'l(Cfu!'(I / COllcrete alld Co mlll (, I1 !~! "y
Thi s Specificatio n sets fort h criteri a for the des ign,
fabricati on, and ercc ti on of structural steel buildings and Am eri ca n Institute of S teel COII!-.Irll ctio n, Inc. (AlSC)
oth er st niClUreS, where oth er structu res arc de fined as
those stnJcrures designed. fabricated, and crectcd in a manner AISC 3 03-05 Code of SUlIIdard Prac tice for Sleel
similar to buildings. wiLh building-l ike vert ic;.!1 and lateral Bui/ding!; and Bridges
load resi~tin g element s, Where condi tions are not covered
by the Specificmion. designs are permitted to be based on ANS I/ AISC 34 1·0 5 Se ismic PreJl' isions Jor
tes ts or analysis. subject 10 the approval of the authority
S/rllcl lira / S teel Bu i l ding!;
havi ng jurisdiction. Altematc methods of analys is and design
shall be pcmliucd, provided such alternate methods or
ANSIIA ISCN690-1994(R2004) Specification Jor t"e
criteria arc acceptab le 10 the authority havi ng jurisdiction,
Design. Fabricatioll and £rec rirJlJ of Stet'! Safefr-Rl'faled
Structures lor Nuclear Facililies. includ ing Su pplement
User Note: For the design of structural members, other
No. 2
Ihan holl ow structu ral seclions (HSS). lhal arc cold -
formed to shapes, with elements not more than 25 mm AN S I/AISC N690 L-03 Load and Resistwlce FaclOr
in thickness, the pro visions in the AISI North American
Design Sped[ica lioll fo r Steel Safety· !?"lated StfU Clllres
Specifi calio n for Ihe Design of Co ld- Formed Sleel
fo r Nuclear Facilities
Structural Members are recommended,
Am erican Society of C ivi l E ngin ee rs (ASCE)
5 01 .1.1 Lo w-Seis m ic Appli ca ti ons
When the seismic respo nse modifi cation coeffi cient. R, SEIIASCE 7·02 M inimum Design LO(l(/s for l1uifdin,p',
(as specified in this code) is taken eqlwl to or less than (llld Other SII"f-l(.'llIres ASCElSFPE ',l9-99 SUIII./Ufu'
3, the design, fabrica tion. and erection of stfllcllIr<ll - ClI/cu/llIioll Methm}sfl)I' Structural Fire PrcJl('clicm
steel-framed huildi ng~ and olher st ruc tu res shall co mply
with this Specification , Am er ican Society or Mecha ni cal Engineers (ASI\'l E)
50 1.1.2 Hi g h ~Sc i s mi c
Applica ti olls ASME 13 1 8.2,6~96 Fasteners /0 1' U.W~ ill '\'(I'UN ii:,-'-
Whe n the scismic response modi fi catio n coefficicnt, R, Applications
(as specified in this code) is taken greater than 3, the
design, fabrication and erec tion of struc tural-steel-framed ASM E B46.1-95 SlIrJacc Textllre. SlItiace ROllgh"" •
build ings and other stnlctures shall comply wit h Ihe re- H'avil1ess. alld Lay
quirements in the Seismic Pro visions for Stl1lctural Steel
A I 94/A J94M-04 Sllmdard ~i)ec~{icari()11 Jor Carbon and' A563-04 Standard Specification for Carbc)1I and Alloy
Alloy Steel NUls J(JlBolls For High Prl'ssure o r Steel NUls
Higli''/'l1mperol/(u: S(,I"I'i('(', or 130th
A563M-03 S'umdard Spec(/icarioll for Carbon and Alloy
A216/A2 J 6M·93(2003) Slam/ard SpaijiclIliofl for Steel Sleet NUIS I Metric] A568! A568M-03 Sl£IlIdard
Castings, Carboll, Suitable for FIlSioll Welding, for High Specificarion for Steel, Sheer, Carbon. and High-Strength.
Tempemtul'r! Service Low-Alloy, HOI-Rolled alld Cold-Rolled, Gelleral
Requirements for
A242/A242M-04 Standard Specijicafiol1 for HiKh-Strength
wlv-Alloy Structural Steel A572!A572M-04 Slalidard Specljicolioll for Hi gh-
Strengfl! Low-A 1I0y Columbium- Vanadium StrUCTUral
A283/ A283M-03StGlldard Specificatioll for Low and Steel
Illtermediare Tef/sile Strength Carbon Sleel Plale.'i
A5881A588M-04S(Qndard Specificalioll far High-
A307 -03 Standortl Specification for Carbon St(~el Boils S trength Low-Alloy Sfrllctural
Gild Sluds, 60,000 PSI Tellsile Slrellgl"
Steel wilh 345 MPa Miliimuf1I Yield Poinl 10 100 mill
A325-04 Standard ,~i)ecificar;oIlJor SrrllclUral BO/IS, Steel. Thick
/-leaf Treated. 1201105 ksi Minimum Tensile Slrength
A606-04 Standard Specification Jor Steel, Sheet and
A325M-04 Standard SpecijiclJ.Iiol! for High-Strength Slrip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, fl OE-Roiled and Cold-
Bolts for SlruclUrai Steel Joints (Metric) Rolled, wirh improved ATmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
A354-03a Stalldard Specificatioll for Quellched alld
Tempered Alloy Steel BolES, Studs, and Other Externally A618/A618M-04 SWlldard Specificalion for HOI-Fomlfd
Threaded Fasfell ers Welded and Seamless High -StrengTh Low·Alloy Struclural
TII.bing
A370-03a Standard Test Methods alld Definitions Jor
Mechanical Testing o/Steel Products A673/A673M-04 SIandard Specification for Sampling
Procedurefor Impact Teslillg ofStruclllrtll Steel
A449-04 Stamlord SpecificationJor Quellched alld Tempered
SteeiBolts and Sluds A490-04 Standard Specification for A668/A668M-04 Standard Specificalioll for Sleet
Hem-Treated Sleel Structural BoilS, J50 hi Millimum Forg illgs, Carbon and Alloy, for Genera/Industrial Use
Tel/ sile Strength
A709/A709M-04 Slandard Specificalioll for Carboll and
A490M-04 Slandard Specification forliigh-Slrengl" Sleel liigh·Strength Low-Alloy Stmcrural Steel Shapes. Plates,
BoIlS, Classes 10.9 alld 10.9.3, for Slruclllml Sleel Joillls and Bars and Quenched-and- Temp ered Alloy Structural
(Metric) Steel Plates for Bridges
tl1
National Structural Code of tl18 PlliJippines 6 Edition Volume 1
!5-30 CHAf)TU~~) . Steel and Melals
A 751-0 J SWI/dard Test M('[hods, Pracliu's, and American Welding Society (A WS)
Tf/rmil1o{ogyfor Chemical Alwlysis of Steel Products
AWS Dl. JlD I, IM-20()4 S!mClllral We/din~ Cor/e·"Steei
A847-{}{}a (2001) S'lwulord 5j)('ciji('(ltiO!l for ('o/d-Fom1('d
We/dnl dlld Seam/e.l's 1-1I"!;h-Slrellgth, Low-Allo), StmcfUrof A WS A5, 1-2(X)4 .~j}('c(/ic(l/ioll for Carbo/l STeel Efecfrodes
'jilbi'l~ with Il1Ipr(JI'ed AlfllO.spheric CO!Tosion Resisl(lIJCe MeW/An: Wddi!/~
Fo/' Shielded
A852/A852M-01 Standard ,~jJe(.'lfic(Jtion for Quellched and AWS AS.5-96 SpeC/jicalioll for Low-Alloy Steel
Tempered Low-Alloy Stl'llctum/ Steel Plate wiTh 485 MPa E!eumdesfor Shielded Mew/ Arc Wel</il/I;
Minimum Yield Slrenglh 10 iOO mill 711ick
AWS AS. 17/A5. 17M-97 Specijic(l/j(jh j()r Carbol1 ,\'teel
A9J3/A9I3M-04 Slandard 5jJecijication for High- Eleur()(ks and F/uxesj()r '<;Ilbmerxed Arc Wdding
Slrel/gtll Low-Alloy Steel Shap(!s of Srructura/ Quality,
Producl'd by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process AWS AS. 18:200 I Sj)ec(/icatioll /or Carbon Stec/
(QS7] Electrodes and Rods/or Gas Shidded Arc Welding AWS
AS.20-95 Spec{{icariol1 for Carbon Steel Electrodes jor
A992/A992M-04 Standard Specificatioll for Steel for Flux Cored Arc Weldillg
Structural ShapesJor USl' in Building Framing
AWS. AS.23/AS.23M-97 Specificatio" for Low-Allo), Steel
User Note: ASTM A992 is the most commonly Electrodes and Fluxes/or Submerged Arc Weldillg
referenced specification for W shapes.
AWS AS.2S/AS.25M-97 5jJeq'(icalionj()r Carbon and Low-
AlOI I/A10l IM-04 Standard Spec(ficationfor Steel, Sheet Alloy Stee! Elec!l'Odes alld Fluxes /or Electroslag Welding
and Strip, /-lot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Srrellgrh Low-Alloy wiil! Improved AWS A5.26/A5.26M-97 Specificationfor Carbon and Low-
Formabilil), Alloy Sleel Elecrrodesfor Electrogas Welding
C33-03 Standard Specification/or C()ncrete Aggrl.!gales AWS A5.28·96 SpecificaTio/l for Lmv-Alloy Sted
Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc We/ding
C330·04 Standard Specification for Lightweight
Aggregates for Structural Concrete A WS AS.29: 1998 Specification for Low-Alloy Sled
Electrodesfor Flux Cored Arc We/ding
El 19-00a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of
Building Consrruction and Materials Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
E709-0 I Standard Guide Jar Magnetic Particle S'pecification for SfrucfUra! Joints Using ASTMA325
Examination orA490 Bolts. 2004
th
National Structural Code of til e Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
[)·32 CHAPTEH ~J. Steel and Metals
501.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgings Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform 10
Cast stee! shaH conform to ASTM A2J6/A2J6M, Gr. the Unified Standard Series of ASME 13 I X.2.6 and shall
WeB with Supplementary Requircment S 11. Steel have Class 2/\ tolerances.
forgings shall conform to ASTM A668/A668M. Test
rcpOi1S produced in accordance with the above reference Manufacturer's cCI1ification shall constitute sufikiclll
standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of evidence of conformity with the standards.
conformity with such standards.
501.3.5 Filler Metal ::lnd Flux for Welding
501.1.l Bolts, Washers and Nuts Filler metals and fluxes shall conform 10 one ".):' Ihe
Bolt, washer, and nut material conforming to one of the following specifications of the American VvclcJing
following ASTM specifications is approved for use under Society:
this Specification: AWS AS.l
I. Bolts: AWSAS.S
AWS A5.17/A5.17M
ASTM A307 AWS AS.lS
ASTM A325 IA325M AWSA5.20
ASTM A449 AWS A5.23/A5.23M
ASTM A490 I A490M AWS AS.25/AS.2SM
ASTM 1'1852 A WS AS.261 AS.26M
AWSAS.2S
2. Nuts: AWSAS.29
ASTM A194/A194M AWS AS.32/AS.32M
ASTM AS631 AS63M
Manufacturer's ceI1ification shall constitute sufficient
3. Washers: evidence of conformity with the standards. Filler metals and
fluxes that arc suitable for the intended application shall bl:
ASTM F436/F436M
selected.
4. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators: 501.3.6 Stud Shear Connectors
ASTM 1'959 IF9S9M Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the
requirements of Structural Welding Code-Steel, AWS
[) 1. 1.
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient
evidence of conformity with the standards.
User Note: Studs are made from cold drawn bar, either
501.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods semi-killed or killed aluminum or silicon deoxidized,
conforming to tile requirements of ASTM A291 A29M-04,
Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy,
of the following ASTM specifications is approved for use
Hot-Wrought, General Requirements for.
under this Specification:
ASTM A36/A36M Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficicJ!!
ASTM A193/A193M evidence of conformity with AWSD 1 1.
ASTM A354
ASTM A449 501.4 Structural Design Drawings and Specifkatioll.'j
ASTM AS721 AS72M
ASTM A5881A588M The design drawings and specifications shall meet (lie
ASTM 1'1554 requirements in the Code of Standard Practice for Stee)
Buildings and Bridges, except for deviations specifically
User Note: ASTM F 1554 is the preferred material identified in the design drawings and/or specifications.
speeificationfqr anchor rods.
th
National Structural Code of tile PI1ilippincs 6 Edition Volume 1
5·3G CHAPT[n S . S1eel and Metals
iti~,iif'~lUC()jnplres:sioil Elements
Width Limiting Wiclth~Thjckncss Ratios
Description of Elements Til ic kness 1- - -""-""" - - -- " - - " " "- ""T"" " - - -" -c -" - "" " """""--1 Example
Ratio )'p A/
I\l 1· 111 III
For tapered flanges of rolled sections , the thickness is the 502.6 Evaluation of Existing Structures
nominal valuc halfway betwecn the free edge and the Provisions for the evaluation of existing structures are
corresponding face of the web. presented in Appendix A -5, Evaluation of Existing
Structures.
502.5 Fabrication, Erection and Quality Control
Shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection,
and quality control shall meet the requirement s
stipulated in Section 513, Fabrication, Erection, and
Quality ControL
PR, arc permitted, as specified below. requirements of thi s sec ti on and Appendix A··of.
I. Fully·Restrn ined (FR) Moment Connections Nothing in th is sec ti on is inte nded to cn';,k w i :n IJl~';1
A full y·restrai ncd (FR) moment connecti on trJ.llsfers contractual req uircme l1l fo r th e engir::· t r·of H:Ciif(;
momclll with a negligible rotation bel"'een the responsible for th e stru ctural des ign ( : r ::ny f'!OlCr
connected Inembers. In the analysis of the structure, member of the design team .
the connection may be assumed to allow no relative
rotati on, An FR con nection shall have sufficient User Note: Design by qualification [( ~,> iijji'. i:. :h:'.
st ren gth and st iffness to maintain th e angle between prescriptive method specified in mosi I.)llHdill t I·,de.!;.
the con nected members al the strength limit states, Traditionally, on most projects where the ::rd rfK,,:1 >, file.
prime profcssionaJ, the architect has been i1. ";;!;;'.;: :~'.
2. Parti all y· Reslrained (PR) Moment Connections
party to specify and coordinate I:' i,'(J' : ';: " ': 1
Partiall y·rcslrained (PR ) moment connections
requirements. Design by Engineering An:' " i . .- I . \!
transfer moments. but the rotation between connected
engineering approach to fire protection. D, ,., """, .. ,.. ,.
members is not negligible. In the analysis of Ihe struc·
person(s) responsible for designing for fire rn'ldilin,,' , ..
ture, the forcc·defonnation response chanlctenstics of
contractual matter to be addressed on cae!: i -; " ;
the connection shall be included . The response
charactelistics of a PR connection s}lall be
502.3.11 Design for Corrosion Effect s
documented in the {echnical literature or established
by analytical or experimclllal me'lns. The Where corrosion may impair the 5lrc n g t l ~· " ' n'WI : ":;,;-,'
componc nt elements of a PR con nection shall ha ve of a structure, sU1lctural componellls sh,,; ,;. \1:"
sufficiel1l strenglh, stiffncss. <111(1 dcforl11il1i on tolerate corrosion or shall be protected a;: ..!-' .t ::\:l I I:~.i ,j ...
capacity at the strength limit Slales.
502.3.12 Design "Va ll Thickness for 1I ~;:)
502.3.7 Design for Serviceability The design wall thickness, t, shall be lI srti !;l c:'!(':!!':!ions
Thc overall structure and the individual members, invol ving the wall thi ckness of hol low SUI:' i;;; ,: !-':, . : ;Ol! ::
co nnections, and connectors shall be checked for (HSS). The design wall thi ckness. t. sh",: :',. : -'., .. ,
serviceab ilit y. Pcrformance req uirements for to 0.93 limcs the nominal wn ll thick i ,. !,,,' t- . '
servicea bility design arc given in Secti on 512 . resistanccwelded (ERW) I-ISS and equal ill ,Ii:: "'-1,; ,: 11:,.
thickness for submerged-are -welded (SA \1' ) ; S ;.
8
Uniform compressio n in stems
of tees
dl l NA o 75)tjF,-
U
Flexu re in webs of doubl y
9 symm etric I-shaped secti ons and h l t... 3.76)E/F, 5.70)E/ F,.
chan nels
10
Uniform comp ression in webs of
doubly sym met ri c
sections
I -shaped /i1'1". NA t.49)E/F,-
[[
Flex ure in webs of sin gly-
symmetric I-s haped sec tions h .. / I".
Mp 2
(0.54 ··- - 0.(9)
My
14
Unil<)J"Jll compression ill all other
st iffcncd c lement s
,,/ { NA
I~I k,. = -;:;::;::= , but s hall nol be taken less than 0.15 nor grc;lI l.!r Ihan 0.76 for ca ktd .ttion pU 'l)oscs. (See Cases 2 and ,I)
~, h l r\\"
Ihl Fl. = O.7/~, for minor-axis bending, major axis bending. or sl c l1d ~~ r· wcb built-up I -sllilpcd mcmbers, and major ;,:\; ; bend in g
of compacl and nOllcornpact web built-up I ·shaped mcmbers wilh SlI / S" ?: 0.7 ; F,_ = F/·;,I / S" ~ O-SF, for
bending of co mpact and JlollcOmpacl web buill·Up I-shaped llll~ ll1h crs with S',J S". < 0.7. (See Case 2)
SECTION '503
• ,_ . -, .1.\. ".'_" . , '... ' .
·
. _ .',
.
.. ,,'
or sat isfying this requ ire men t are provided in Append ix 1\-
6, Stabilil Y Bracing for Columns and Beams
STABILITY ANALYSIS AND
DESIGN 503.1.3 System Stability Design Requirements
•This sc<':lion adul'l"!sscs general requi remen ts for the slabili ly
Latera l stabi lity shall be provided by morncnlframes,
bmccdframcs, shear walls, .lndlor other cquivaicill lateral
anal ys is anti desi gn of members and frames. load resisting systems. The {)vcilurning elTer!s of drifl and
the desta bilizing inll ucllcc of gravity loads shall be
The section is organized .as fo ll ows: considered. Force {r::lnsfer and load sharing between
clemen!s of the fra ming sys tems shall be considered .
503.1 Stability Desigll Requirem ents Braced -frame and shca r-wlIlI sy5 tclllS, moment rra mc~,
503.2 Calculation of Required Strengths gravit y framing systems, an d co mbined systems shall
satisfy the fa llowing speci fic requirements:
503.1 Stability Design Requirements
503.1.3a Braced-Frame and Shear-Wall Systems
503.1.1 General Requirements In strucllJres wh ere IHtend stnbility is provided solely by
S labilil Y sha ll be provided fo r th e struc ture as a whole <lnd diago nal bracing, shCH r walls, or cqui valent means, the
for cac h of it s clements. Any method that considers the effective length factor, K , for compression members shall
influence of second-order effec ts (incl ud ing P- tl and P·(5 be taken as 1.0. unless structural analysis indicates that a
effects) , fl exu ral. shear and axial deformations, geometric smaller valuc is appropriate. In braced-framc systems. it is
impe rfectio ns, and member stiffness reduction due to permitted to design the colu rnns. be;.ulls. and diagonal
res idual stresses on the stabili ty of the struclUrc and its members ns a vc nically c;;Inlilevered. ~imply connected
elemeili s is permitted . T he method s prescribed i n thi s truss.
secti on and Appendix A-7, Direc t An alysi s Met hod,
SiHisfy these requi re ments . All compo nent and User Note: Knee-braced frames function as momenl-
frame systems and should be treated as indicated in
cOllnection <.iefonnations that contribu te [0 the lateral Secti on 503. L3b. Eccentri cally braced fram e syslems
displacements shall be considered ill the stability analysis. function as combined systems and should be treated as
indicated in Section 503 . I.3d.
In stru ctures designed by elast ic analysis, individual
member siability and slabilil y o f the st ruct ure as a whole S03.!.31J Moment-Frame Systems
are pro vi ded jointly by: in frames where lateral stability is provided by the
I. C:.liculation of the re qu ired stre ngth s for flexural stiffness of con nected bemns and colu mns. the
mem be rs, connections and other clements usi ng effcc ti ve length fac tor K or elas ti c critical buckling stress.
one oflhe methods specified in Section 503.2.2, and Fe, for columns and beam-columns shall be determined as
specified in Section 503 .2.
2. Satisfaction of the membe r Hlld connec ti on design
requireme nt s in thi s specification based upon those 503.1.3c Gravity Framing Systems
required strengths.
Columns in grav ity framing sys tems shall be desig ned
In stmctures designed by inelastic ana lysi s. the provisions based on their actual length (K = 1.0) unl ess analysis
or Appendix A ·I . Inelasti c Analys is and Des ign, shall be shows that a smaller value ma y be used. TIle lateral stability
satisfied. of gravity framing systems shall be provided by momcn t
frames. braced frames, shear wa lls, and/or other equi valent
503.1.2 Member Stability Dcsig n Requirements lateral load res isting systems. P-IJ. effects due to load 011 the
gravity colu mns slwll be Imnsfc.lTed to the lateral load re-
Individualmcmber stability is provided by S(l ti sfying the
sisting sys tems and shall be considered in the cal<:ulation
provisions or sections 505, 506, 507.508 a nd 509.
of the required st ren gt hs of th e lateral load res istin g
systems.
User Note: Local buckling of cross section components
can be avoided by the use of compact sections deli ned in
Sectio n 502.4.
S03.1.3d Combined Systems
The an alysis and design of members. cOllnections and other
Where clemen ts arc designed to fUllction as braces to elements ill combined systems of moment frames, braced
define. the un braced length of colum ns and beams, the frames, and/or shear walls and gravi ty frames shall meet the
bracing sys tem shall have sufficien t sti ffness and strength requirements of thei r respecti ve systems.
to control member movement at the braced points. Methods
503.2 Cuiculation ()f HC(IUircd Strcngths obtained. for instance, by a firsl-orderelastic ana lysi s) by
Except as pcrmitted in Se.ction 503.2.2 h, required =
Ihe 8, amplifie r, in other word s, M, B2(M"1 + Mil }.
strength s shall bc dctcrrnincu lIsing II sCl'o nd -ord cr
a na l y~is as specifi ed in Sect ion 503.2. 1. Design hy eit her
/J,= "I (503. 2- 3 )
second-order or lirst-ordc r an alysis shall mee t the 1_ aL /~~1I
requ irements speci fied in Secti on 503,2.2. L /~'2
503.2.1 Melhods of Second-Ord er Analysis Uscr Nole: Note th at the 8 , ampl ifier (Eq. 503.2-3) can
Second-order an ti lysis shall confo rm to the requ irements be estimated in preliminary design by using a max imum
in this Secti on. lateral drift limit corresponding to the story shear H in
Equation 503.2-6b.
503.2.1. General Sccond-Orde,· Elaslic Analysi.'
and
An y second-order clastic anal ysis method thai cOllsiders
both P-6. and P-o cffeclr may be used. a = I.OqLRFlj a= 1.6c(AS~
M, = requ ired seco nd-order Oex ura l strength usi ng
The amplified First-Order Elastic Analys is Method LRr-O or ASD load combi nations. N-llllll
defined in Section 503.2. 1b is an accepted mcthod for = fi rst-order moment using LRFD or ASD load
I second-order clastic analysis of braced. moment, ,Hld combinations, assuming there is no lateral
!s combined fram ing sys tems. translation of the frame, N- mm
= firs t-ord er moment using LR FD or ASD load
503.2.10 Second -Order An.lysis OJ" Amplified FirS!- co mbi nat ions caused by 1<lleral trallslation of
Order Elastic Analysis the fmllle onl y, N-rnm.
1', ;::: required seco nd -order axial :-; trcngth using
Uscr Note: A meUtod is provided in thi s section to LRFD or ASD load co mbination s, N.
account for second-order effects in frames by amplifying = fi rs t-order axial i()rec using LRFD or ASD
the axial forces and moments in members and connecti ons load combinations, t.lssum ing there is no
from a firs t ~ ord er analysis. lateral lransJati on of Ihe frame, N.
= total vert ical load supported by the story using
LRfD or ASD load co mbillatiom;. including
The following is an approximale second-order analysis gravi ty column loads, N.
procedure for calculating th e req uired n exural and axial PI, = first-o rder axial force using LRFD or AS!?
stre ngths in mc mbers o f lateral load resisting systems. The load combi nations caused by lateral
rcqu ired second-order fle xura l st rcngth, Mr. and axia l translati on of the frame only, N.
strength, PI", shall be determin ed as follows: C", = a coe rfi cicnt ass umi ng no Itt te ral transla tion
o r th e fr ame whose va lue shall be laken as
(503.2-l a)
foll ows:
(503.2- 10)
a. For beam-co lu mns not subject to Intnsvcrsc
where loading between SUPP 0l1S in the plane of
bending.
__ -,C,-,, ",,-_
"I (503.2-2) (503.2-4)
I- a 1', /1'"
For members subjected to axial compression, lJ, may be where MI and 1'4 1 , calculaled from a fi rs!-
calculated based on th e first-o rd er es timat e PI" Pili + = orde r anal ysis, arc th e small er and larger
P i t. moment s, respecti vc ly. ill (he cnd s of lil,ll
p0l1i on of th e member un bn.lced in the
plane of bending under co nsideration.
User Note: ill is an amplifier to account for second order M/Ml is positive when the member is ben(
effeclS caused by displacements between brace poin ls in reverse cu rva ture. negative when bent in
(P-S) and B, is an amplifier to accoun t for second order single curvature.
effects caused by displacements of braced points (1'-6.) .
b. For beam-columns subjected 10 transverse
For me11lbers i~ .w~ich .!l, :s
1.05, il is conservative to loading between supports, the value of C...
amplify Ihe sUm of Ihe .non-sway and sway momenls (as shall be detennincd either by analysis or
conservatively taken as l.0 for all cases.
P l=~
',. (503.2·5)
503.2.2 Des ign Require m e nt s
'Illesc requi rcments apply 10 all types of braced. momcnt,
,'. (K,Lj2
and combined 1i~\lll i n g sys tcms. Whcre the ratio of second·
= CI,ISlic crilkal buckling rcsi ~ I ;IIl (:l' of orde r drift 10 first ·order drift is cqual to or less lhall 1.5. lilt,
P",
Ihclll!.!mbcr in the plane of hcndil1!!. (,.' lIk'ulatcd required ~ Ircnglh s of members. conneclions and other
based olll hc m;su!1l ption oj' zcm side.sway. N. clements shall be determined by one of Ihe methods
= clasti c cri ti ca l buckling resistan ce for (h e story specified in Sections 503.2.2a or 503.2.2b, or by the Direct
Anal ysis Method of Appendix A-7. Where the ratio or
determ in ed hy sidcs way bu ck ling,:HIl<lJ ysis, N. seco nd··order drift to first ~ order drift is grcater ,th an 1. 5,
the required st rength!,; shall be determined by the DiI·eel
For moment fram es, where sidcsway buckling effect i ve Analysis Method o f Appendix A· 7.
lengt h fac(ors K~ nrc dete rm ined for thc col umns, il is
perm ined 10 calculate thc c last ic slOry sides way buckl ing User Nole: The ratio of second-order drift to ftrst·order
rcsi slancc as drift can be represented by 82. as calculated using
Equation 503.2·3. Alternatively, the ratio can be
calculated by comparing ule results of a second-order
I.I'" =I 1[ ' Ef (503.2·6,,) analysis to the results of a first-order analysis, where the
(K ,L)' analyses are conducted eiuler under LRFD load
combinations directJy Or under ASD load combinations
For a ll IYPCS of lalc l" ll load resisti ng s),ste ms, il is with a 1.6 factor applied to the ASD gravity loads.
pen n itied 10 lISC
For Ihe methods specified in Sections 2.2a or 2.2b:
(5032·6b) I. Analyses shall be conducted according to the design and
loadi ng requirements specified in either Section
where 502.3.3 (LRFD) Or Section 502. 3.4 (AS D).
E = modulus of elast icit ), of steel =200 000 MP" 2. The st ru cture shall be analyzed llsing the nom inal
.- ! .O for braced-fmllle systems; geomet ry and the no mi na l elastic sliffness for all
0.85 for momclH-frame and co mbi ned elements.
syste ms, unless a larger v.tltle is justified by
analysis 503 .2.23 Desig n by Second-Ord er Analysis
= moment of inertia in the planc of bending, Where required stre ngths are determ ined by a sccond·order
4
mm analysis:
L = slUry height, Illlll
K, = effective length factor in Ihe plane of bending, I. 'nlC provisions of Section 503.2. J shall be satisfied.
calcul ated based on the assumption of no 2. For design by ASD, anaJyses shall be canied out under
lateral translation. scI eq ual to 1.0 un less 1.6 timcs the ASD load co mbinations and the rcsults
analysis indicates Ihal a sma ll e r value mny be shall be di vided by 1.6 10 obtain the required
used strength!';.
K2 = effective length factor in the plan e or ben ding,
calculated based on a sidcswa y buckling USCI' Nole: TIle amplified first order analysis metllod of
analysis Se<:tion 503.2.lb incorporates the 1.6 multiplier directl y
in the 0 and lh amplifiers, such that no other
1
and member stiffness reduclion due to residual stresses This additional ialcr:1i loml shall he <':ollsidcrcd
in the analysis. independemly in two 011 hogonil I directions.
:1. Where the ralio of second-order drift 10 lir$I-Ord~f 3. The non -sway :llIlpliliCiUioll or hea nH :olumn 11I{)!IlCntJ;
drift is less Ihall or cyual 10 1.1, members ilrc is considered by i1pplying th e JjJ amplifier of Seclion
permitted 10 be designed using K = 1.0. Otherwise. 503.2.l to the IOlal member momellls.
columns and heam-columns in moment frames shall
be designcd using a K fnctor or co lumn buckling
Siress, Ft', det ermin ed from a si desway buckling
an:! ~ ysis of the slniclUre. Stiffness reduction
adju:il:nel1t due to column inelasticity is p!;rmillcd in
Ihc determination of the K factor. For braced frames,
K for compression members shall be taken as 1.0,
lIllless structural analysis indicates a smaller value
may be used.
where
a = 1.0 (LRFD) a = 1.6 ( ASD)
P, = required axial compressive stre ngth under
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N.
1\ = mcmbcr yicld strength (= A F.,.), N.
2. All load combinations include an additional la teral
land, Nj , applied in combination with other IOtld.s al
each level of the stnlcture, where
SEC'I'lON:5(i4 '< :, : . '" :, ! .'. 1/1, =11.75 (LRFD) 0., =2. 00(ASD)
])Estgl:~Fj~Am~~ ·FQR :
TENSlbN . .. ' " \ " .' , where
504.1 Slenderness Limitations In computing Ilet area fo r tension and shear. the width of a
There is flO maximu m slenderness limi t for design of boil hole shall be taken 2 111111 greater th an the nomi nal
members in te nsion. di mension of lhe hol e.
User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension , For a chai n of holes ex tending across a part in any diagonal
the slendemess ratio VI' preferably should not exceed or zigzag line. thc nct width of the pan shall be obtaincd by
300. This suggest ion does nOI apply to rods or hangers in dedu cting from the gross width the sum of the diameters or
tensiou. slot dimensions as provided in Section 510.3 .2, of all hol es
in the chain, Ilnd addin g, for ellcll gage spilce in the chain.
the quamity J)/ 4g
504.2 Tensile Strength
The design tensile strengt h, ¢, /~, . and the allowable tensile wh ere
strength, I~JQI of tension members. shall he the lower s = longitudinal center-to -center spacing (pitch) of
any Iwo conseclltive holes. mill .
value obtained according to the limit st,l tes of tensil e
g = transverse ce nter-to-centcr spacing (gage)
yielding in th e gross secti on and tensile rupture in the net
between fast ener gage lincs, mill.
section.
1. For tensile yieldin g in the gross section : For an glc:s, the gage. for holes in opposite adjacent Icg ~
shall he the sum of the gages from the bac k of the an gles
I~, = F.r A.'i (504.2- 1) less the thi ckness.
1/1, =0.90 (LRFD ) D, = 1.67 (AS D ) por slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the nel area, /\'"
is Ihe gross area millus the product of the thickness and the
2. For (ensile rupture in (he net sect ion: total width of material that is remo ved to form {he 5101. III
delcnnining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld
(504.2·2) metal shall not be considered as adding to the net area.
th
National Struc tura l Cod e of 1/10 Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
~) 44 CHAPTEH 5· Steel and Metals
(504 .5· 1)
,------------------------------------------------------------------
,;,, ' :Ta,b'!~ 504.3.1 , '
, ; , Sheilr~ilg ,Fa~tots forCo~nections to Tension Members '
'.',' ':. " ' . , .
th
National Structural Code of (1'10 Philippines G Edition Volum G 1
5·4G CHAPTE:H 5 . Steel and Melals
The width of the plale al the pin hole shall nol be less
Ihilll 2b,g + d and the mini mum extension. (I, beyond the
bCClring end of the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the
member, slmll not be less than 1.33 X b 4J
This secti on addresses members subject h> axi al
The corners beyond th e pin hole me pcnnillcd to be cu t at compression th rough the centroidal axis.
45" to Ihe axis of the member. provided the net ,Ifea The scctiPil is organized il S rollows:
beyond the pill hole, on a plane perpendicular La the cut.
is not I c.~s than thaI required beyond the pin hole p.lr:Jllcl (() 505.1 General Provisions
the axis of the member. 505.2 Slenderness Limillliions and Erfective Lcnglh
5053 Compressive Strenglh for Flexural Buckling of
504.6 Eycb;lrs Mem be rs withou t Slender Elcmcllis
i
i 504 ,6.1 Tensile Strength User Note: For members not included in this section the
"
The i.lvailable tensile strengt h of eyeba rs shilll be following sections apply:
determi ncd in accordance with Section 504.2, with A",
tak en as the cross-sectional area of (he body. 508.1 - 508,3 Members subject to combined axial
compression and Dcxure.
For calcu llll ioll purposes, the width of the hod y of the 508.4 Members subjcci to axi al compression
cycba rs shall not exceed eight tim es its thi ckness . and torsion.
5lO.4.4 Compressi ve strength of connecting
504.6.2 Dimensiollal Requirem ents
elemenL".
Eycbars shall be of uniform thickn ess, witholll Composite ax ial members.
50902
reinforcement at the pin holes. and have circular heads
wit h the periphery concentric with the pin hole.
505.1 General Provisions
The radiu s of transition between the circular head and Ihe The design compressive strength . ¢Ie' 1" 1, and !he
eyebar body shall not be less than the head diameter. allowable compressive strength . I'n/ n c" ,Ire dClermincU
as follows :
The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times
the eyebar body width, and the pin hole diameter !-i hall not
be more than I mm greater than the pin diameter. The nomi nal cO.'l1prcssive strength, I'n. shall he the lowest
value obtained according to the limit states omcxur;;~
buckling, (orsional buckling and nexural-torsional buc kling.
For steels having F,. greater than 485 MPa. th e hole
diameter shall not exceed five times the plate th ickness. and I. For doubly sYlllmelric and singly symmetric members
the width of the eye bar body shall be reduced accordingly. the limIt state of Ilcxural buckling is applicable.
A thickness of less than 13 mm is pennissible onl y if
external nuts are provided to tighten pin pl ates and fill er
2. For singl y symmetric and ullsymmetric members, <Inc!
certain doubly sy mm elric members, such as cnl ciform
plates into snug contact. The width from the hol e (~dge to
or built-up colum ns, lhe limit slates of torsional or
th e plate edge perpendi cular to the directi on of applied
nexural~tors i o nal buckling arc also applicable.
load shall be greater than two~ {h irds and, for the purpose
of calculation, not morc th an thiee-fourths times the
eyebm' hodywid th.
Ii I. when
r
ft·
-KL $4.7 1 -
F).
P,.]
or (F, ~ O.44F,.)
1, Fcr = 0.658 P, F,. wherc Ferr taken as Fer from Equal ion 505 .3·2 or
(505.3·2)
[ 505 .3-3. for nexura l buck lin g abo ut thc y-axis of .
KL KL
F
r
= GJ
=-
ry
, and
(5054-3)
en A;=2
(505.3-3) g
F= -
,,'E
-
, (~Lr
b. For singly symmctric members where), is Ihe ';,: is , ,j
r
symmetry:
User Note: TI,e two equations for ~alcu\ating the limits
( F~)' +
and ajJpljcability of Sections 505.3{aj"and 505.3(b). one
based on KU, and one based on F,. provide the same result. F= l'c, 1- \ - 4FnF"
- I-i
-----,!.
' 2 f1 (Ft'J' + FCl ), !.
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5· tH.! CHAPTEH 5 ' Steel and MeWls
L
a. when 05- 580:
(K,,, L)'
'-x
F=("'(K,L)
EC GJ)_I-
r ;:
w
2 + -2
iI,r,
(505.4 - 11 )
I'
For unequal· leg angles wi th leg length rali os less than 1.7
and connected through the shorter leg, KU,. from
G :::: shear modulu s of elast ici ty of steel Equations 505 .5- 1 and 505.5-2 shall be increased by
= 77 200 MPa. adding 4 [(bib.,)' - I], but KU,. of Lbe members sball not be
l x, i y :::: moment of inertia abo ut the princi pal axes. less than 0.95U,., .
mm4.
2. For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connect ed
J = to rsio nal cons tant, mm'! . through tbe longer leg that arc web members of box or
K, :::: effec ti ve length fac lor for torsi onal buckl ing
space trusses with adjacent web members attached to
Xo , y o :::: coordinates of shear center with respect to the
the same side of the gusset pl ate or chord:
centroid. mm.
:::: polar radiu s of gyration about the shear L
center, mm. a. when 05- 5 75:
r, :::: radius of gyration about y-ax is, mm. rx
For 1Illcqual· leg angles with leg length ratios less than 1.7
,lIld connccted through the shorter leg. KU,. rrom (
~~~) = modified column slenderncss of buil l-Up
""Iuations 505 .5-3 and 505..1-4 shall be increased by '" member
adding 61(bl1>,)' - II. but KU,. of the member shall not be
less than 0.82I1r"
where
(~L)o = column slenderness or bu ilt-up member
a , (..'!...)'
At the ends of buih·up compression mcmbers bearing on
'
C)..
KL •. 082
Pl '.,.
(505.6-2)
base plates or milled surfaces, aU components in colllact
Witll one another shall be connected by a weld having a
length not less than the maximum width of the member or
by bolts spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters
apart for a distance equal to II f2 times the maximum width
where of the member.
3. The clear distance between holes in the direction of The nominal compress ive strengt h, P", shal l be delerminctl
stress shaH be not less than the transverse distance based on {he limit states of flexural, torsional and flexural·
between nearest lines of connecting fasteners or torsional buckling.
welds.
(505.7-1 )
4. The peliphery of the holes at all points shall have a
a. when -KL $4 .71 ~E
minimum radius of 38 mm.
- -
As an alternative to perforated cover plates. lacing with r QF,.
tic plates js permitted at each end and at intennediate
points if the lacing is interrupted. Tic plates shall be as
Ilear the ends as practicable. In members providing Ql'l
available strength, tile end tic plates shall have a length of Fa ~ Q O.658/~ {)' (505.7-2)
not less than the distance between the lines of fasteners or [
welds connecting {hem to the components of the member.
Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than
where
I~, = 0877f'~ (505.7·3) a.
b
whcn - ,; 0.64 - -
I
Q, = 1.0
1*Ek,.
F.\.
(505.7-7)
Fr clas tic <.:ritical buckling stress, calculated
pJ,'k PF.'k
using Equations 5053·4 and 505.4-4 for
doubly sYlnll1ctric members, Equations 50,5..3-4 h. when 0.64 - " < b/I ~1. 17 ~
F, I, ,.
and 505.4-5 for singly symmetric members,
41lld Equmioll 505.4-6 for unsYlllmcl ric
Q
members, except for single angles where F, is
calculated using Equation 505.3-4.
1.0 for members with compact and
Q,=1.415 -0.6
{")Rt"·
-
(
-'
Ek(.
(505.7-8)
~
502.4, for uniformly compressed elements 'k
c, when b/I > I. 17 -:!--
Q,fQ(I for members with slender-element \ 1- ,
sections. as defined ill Section 502.4, for
O.90Ek ,.
uniformly compressed elements, Ql = (505.7-9)
F,m
2
Q, = 1.0 (505.7-4)
Q, i '7 ) (F;
=1.415-07\
b
v!i (505.7-5)
c. when bIt> O.9 IJE/ Fy
b. .1*'
when 0.75 -:- <d/I <; 1.03 - -
/ 'y
1*.Fy
(505.7- 18)
where
0.69£
Q, (505.7- 15)
F·ur 3.
when
For axially-loaded circular sections:
£ D
0. 11 - < - <0.45 -
£
where Fy I f 'y
b =width of ullstiffcned compression element, as
defined ill Section 502 .4, mm . ) ~Q =..'l..038£ +3. (505.7-19)
d = th e full llomi nal depth ortee, mill . Q , F,{D/l) 3
:;: thickness of elemem. TllJl1 .
where
505.7.2. Slender Stiffened Elements, Q. D :;: out side diameter, mill .
The reduction factor, Qo for slender stiffened elements is = walllhickness, mOl.
defined as follows:
A,f!
(2,=- (505.7-16)
A
where
where
This section applies to members slIbjec t to simple bending 2. The provisions in Ihis Secti on arc bnscd on the
about OIlC pJim:ipill Ilxis, For simple bending, (he member is ass umption that points of supporl for beams imd girders
loaded in a plane parallel to a plincipal axi s that passes arc rcslmincd against rotation abotH their longitudinal
througl~ the shea!" cCiHcr or is restrained ngai nst twisting at axis.
load POJll!S and suppons ,
The following teITI1S are commOiJ 10 the equations in this
The .section is organized <IS follows: Scction except where noted:
c. = lateral~torsional buckling modification fact or
506.1 General Provi sions for nonuniform moment diagrams when both
506.2 Doubly Symmetric Compact l ~Shapcd Members ends of the unsupp ortcd segment arc braced
and Chmmcls Bent abou t Thei r Major Axis
506.3 Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with R", $3.0
Compact Wcbs and Non-compact or Slender c;, 125M",,, (506. 1-1 )
25M,,,,,+ 3MA +4M/J + 3Mc
Planges Dent about Their Major Axis
506.4 Olher I ~ Shapcd Members with Compact or where
Noncompacl Webs Benl about Their Major Axis
5065 Doubly SymmclJ'ic and Singly Symmetric 1- = absolute value of maximum moment in the
Shaped Members wit h Slender Webs Bent unbraced segme nt, N -mm.
about Their Major Axis = absolute value of moment at quaner point of the
506.6 I-Shaped Members and Channel s Bent about unbraced segmenl, N-mm ,
Their Minor Axis = absolute value of moment at centerline of Ihe
506.7 Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped unbraced segment. N-mm .
Members Me = absolute value of moment at three-quarter
506.X Round HSS point of the unbraced segment, N-mm,
506.9 Tees and Double Ang les Loaded in the Plane of R II ,
= cross-sectio n monosymmctry parameter
Symmetry = 1.0. doubly symmetric members
506.10 Single Angles = 1,0, si ngly symmetric members su bjec ted to
506. 11 Rectangular Bars and Rounds single curvature bending
506.12 Unsymmetrical Shapes
506.13 PropoI1ions of Beams and Girders = 0,5 + 2(!.L)2,
1,-
singly symmetric mcmbers
User Note: For members not included iri this section the subjected to reverse curvature bending
folibiiiing'sdlilins ~~"ly: :: .. ; ., .:. I,· = moment of inertia about the principal y~axis,
508.1-508.3 M,mbers ·subject to.biax;a!·flexure or to mm4.
"... . co.jJiiinciUiexure and1lXi:iiirofee. ',.(" :: momenl of inertia abou t y-axis referred (0 the
508.4 . ,¥ .einbers subject to f1exure;~nd..torsion. compression flange, or if reverse curvature
Append~A,3 Memberssubj¢litt!""f~ti oY· ·· ·, .. , bending, referred to the smaller flange. mm'l .
SeCtion 507 . Design piOvisiorisJ(jr's~iir: . ..
. : . In singly symmetric members subjected 10 reverse
For guidanCe in determining· tlw aiipropriates~tiOllS of tills curvature bending, th e lat era l~t orsionaI buckling strenglh
section to apply, Table User Note 506.1.1 may be used. shall be checked for both n anges.
506.1 General Provisiolls The available flexural strength shall be greater than or
equal to the maximulll required Illoment causing
The design fl exural strength , rp" M n I and the allowable compression within the flange under consideration G, is
nexura l strength, A111 If'l/>. shall be determined as permined to be conservatively taken as J.O for all cases ,
For cantilevers or overhangs where the frec end is
foll ows:
unbraced, C. =1.0.
1, For all provisions in this Section
506.3
-1-. NC,S C LTB,FLI3
5064
II C, NC,S C,NC Y, LTB ,FLB,TFY
506.5
-1--- ±T C. NC,S s Y.LTIl,FLB,TFY
-t-t--LJ -
506.6
t-+ C. NC,S N/A Y,FLIl
506.7
o C. NC,S C, NC Y.FLB, WLB
506.8
-e - N /A N/A Y, LB
I ____ ~ ___.
506. 10
-1=:.-- / ... " N/A N/A Y,LTB , LLB
506. "
.1 N/A N/A Y, LTIl
Y = yielding, LTD = laleral-Iorsional buckling, FLB ;, flange local buckling, WLD = web local buckling, TFY =lension flange
yielding, LLB = leg local buckling, LB =local buckling, C =compacl,
NC = non com pact, S :;; slender
,
The nOllli n<l1 flexural stre ngth, M", shall bc the lower
va l ue obta ined according to the li mit states of yie lding
(plastic moment ) find latend -torsional buc kl ing.
E
4=1.95;,-_.
0.7/',
HeSA, I - . -s/\,J-
-. - . \ 1+ \ 1+6.7{07/';
E Jc
whcn.~
111
National Structural Code of tile Pllilippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
A1'.1 ::::: Ap is the lilllillng. skndcrlu::-,:-, I ~} r it ( (lmpaCI niUlge.
Tahle 502.4 . 1
A'l::::: }')' is the lim iti ng :-. Icndcrncss ror it Illlil compact
TIS may bc approximated accurately and conscrvi:UivcJy as
the radius of gyration of the compression fl anges plus OIlC- !lange,Tahle 502.4 . 1
.ixth of the web:
g := ~_4~ and shal l nol he take n less {han 0.35 nor
, Jill!.. ~
grea ter tha n O.76·.for cakul;uioll IHlrposcs.
User Note: The following shapes have non co mpact User Note: I-shaped members for which lhis section is
flanges for F,::; 345 MPa: W21x48, WI4x99, Wl4 x90, applicable Illay be designed conse rvatively using Seclion
W12x65 , WIOx l2, W8x31, W8x 10, W6 x 15, W6 x9, 506.5.
W6 x 8.5, and M4x6. All other ASTM A6 W, S, M, and
HP , hap"' have com pact flanges for F,,::; 345 MP •. The nominal Ilc xural strcngth , Mil, shall be the lowest value
obtaincd according to the limit stal CS or compression fhmge
yielding. laleral -Iorsional huckling. com pression nangc local
The nomina! ncxu ral strength , M 1/ ' shall he the lower buckl ing and tension nangc yie ld ing.
value obli.lincd accordi ng the limit stat es or latcra l-
(0
tors ional buckling and compression nange l oca l buckling. 506 .4.1 COIllJlression Flange Yieldin g
506.3.1 Lateral-TOI'sional Buckling Mn =R,wM .w· ::; R,K F., S.U· (506.4-1)
For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section
506.2.2 shall apply. 506.4.2 Laleral-Torsional fiu c kling
I. \Vhen!J, ~ LJl. lhc li mit st:.1l e of lateral-torsional
506.3.2 Compression Flange Local Buckling buck ling docs not ilpply.
For secti ons wi th non co mpact fl anges
2. When L" <Lh :S: L
where
~
Sx/"
(506.4 ·9a)
b.
i. = 11.11"
} p ll' ::: J.p ,t hc liJllili ng slende rness for ;t c.:ompilt:l web,
defined in Tabl c 502.4. I
i.nl· ::: )' '-, 1he limit ing slc nde rn ess for <I nOll l'olll pac!
,veb. defined in Tahle 502.4 . 1
~. For secti ons wit h slende r flanges
SUfI.5 Doub ly Symmetric ~llId Singly Syml1lctrk 1-
O.9Ek,Sx..
M" '.
A
, (506.4 - 13) Shap ed Mcmbtl's with Slr lHlc r '""c bs Bent about their
Major Axis
where This scclioll applies 10 doubly sYllll11c lrk" 'IIH..I singly
Fl. ;:: defined in Equa tions 506.4 -6<1 ,md 506.4-6 b symmc(ri c 1- slwpcd mc mbe rs wilh sle nde r webs aUl.Ichcd to
RJ/< . :: lhe wcn pl astifi cali o n racto r. dete rm i.ned by Ihe mid-w idth 0 1" Ihe !langes. be lli abou l Iheir 1I1:1j Ol" (IX is, as
Eqmlliolls 506.4-9 de fin ed in Secti on 502.4
Thc no mimll flex ural sifengih. M". shall be the lowes! value
k,. = ~ <l nd s h.1I 1 nol he wken Icss Ih illl 0 .35 no r obt ained accordi ng 10 (he lim il slates of compressio n n.mgc
v"/' . · yielding, lalc ral-I o rsion al buck li ng. <:o lllprcssio ll llimge IOC'11
greater thall 0 .76 fo r ca lc ulalion purposes buckling and tens io n !la nge yie ld ing.
where F
"
~ C
(' [ F .' - fO.:lF \ { /
I."'-'-1L,,)] S F '
.• 1 • JI
(506.5·3)
The we b pl as tifi l:tIl io n faclOr corres po nd ing 10 Ihe tensio n .1. Whe n LI~ > L ,·
Oangc yieldin g limit st ale, R I •, is determi ncd as fol lows:
a.
w here
(506.4· 15,, ) L I' is defi ned by Eq ual iO Il S06.4 ~ 7
R,i'
It, ,
h. For ->11. 11 11'
I ".
rA-A''' )J
L ::: 1£..r - -- (506.5-5)
r I O .7 /~\,
II
(II [ M" - (M"
= -
M YI
--)
My! 'A.rw-Af/\\'
<-
-
M"
M YI RIlf. is the bending stre ngth red uction fac!O r:
where
(506.4 - 15b) iI"I' ~I a".
1200+300(1 \,.
(':.r.._' S.7
(I<' {i~,
1l),I.O
Association of Stru ctUrA l Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPT En 5 SI()c f <lnd Metal 5·59
(506.5 -8 ) (506.6-2)
(506.6 -3)
3. Por secti ons with sle nder flange sections
"[~r
wh ere
F = 0.9£k,.
(506.5 -9)
(506 .6-4)
where
4 ) ; bit
k = - - - and s hall no t be la ken less than 0.35 nor
c ~h/I" J.pJ = Ap,the limiting slenderness for a co mpact fl ange,
great er than 0, 76 for calcu lation purposes Table 502.4. I
i.rf :::; ~.r,the li mitin g slenderness for a Iloncompact
). = b,,I2I,c flange,Tab le 502 .4 . 1
i'pl = J.p, lhe limiting slenderness for a compact flange.
Table 502.4. 1 = for a chan nel shall be taken as thcminimum
J. lf = .J.r,lhe limiting slenderness for a nO llco mpacl sectio n mod ulu s
fl angc, Table 502.4. I
506,7 Square a nd Rectangul ar HSS and Box-shaped
506.5.4 Tension Flange Vielding Members
I. When SXI ~S:\'{. th e limit state of te nsioll flange Thi s secti on applies to square and rectangul ar !iSS. and
yie lding doe s not apply. doubly symmetric box-shaped mCll1bcrs bent abou t ei th er
Hxi s, ha ving co mpact or non co mpact webs and co mpact,
nOll co mpact or slender Ilangcs as defin ed in Section 502 .4 .
2. When 5.rI<SXf" The nomina l Ilcxura l strength. Mil, shall be the lowest val ue
obt ai ned acco rding III the lim it stales of yieldi ng (pJa:->tir
M" = r,.s u (506..'i-IOj
mome nt ). nangc 10c.1I huckl ing amI web local buckl ing
un der pure I1 cxufc.
S06.6 1·Shapcd Members and Chann els Bent ahout th eil'
Mino r Axis 5(1(, .7 .1 Yieldin g
This sec tion applies 10 I-sh aped mCmbCf!\ and channels bent
Mil =Mfl:;::: I~.z (506-1- 1)
about their minor axis.
where
The nomina! ncxura l strength, 11111 " shall be the lower val ue
z :::; plastic section modul us aboll t the 'Ixis o f
obtained according to the limit states of yieldi ng (plaslic bending, 111m'
moment) and flange local buckling.
N;l\ional Stru ctura l Code of tllE) Phil ippinc'ls GIll Edition VOIUlliG I
:i·GO CHAPTER 5 . Steel and Metals
j'
506.7.2 Flange Local Buckling
I. For compact sections, the limit state of Ibnge local
O.02IE.
M" ~ -.. -~-- + l-y .1 (506.8-2)
buckling does no.! apply.
[
2. For sections with non compact flanges
3. For sections with slender walls
. ,E { "j?i'; )
MIFMI' -(MI' "-f;S 1ST - -4.0 "M1,
(506.8-3)
(506.7-2) where
3. For sections with slender flanges
F = 0.33E
(506.8·4)
(506.7-3)
cr D
where
s = clastic section modulus, mm)
S('jf is the effective section modulus determined with the 506.9 Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of
Symmetry
effective width of [he compression flange taken as:
b, ~1.92,
._10. . . [ 0.38
. - 1--- -,- "b
if]
E
(506.7-4)
This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the
plane of symmetry.
where
Mp = FyZ;t :::; 1.6M y for stems in tension (506.9-2)
(506.7-5) :::; My for stems in compression (506.9-3)
I
tlao --
0.4510
Fy Mil =Mcr
ff)ElyGJ [ r:-::z]
B+vl+BH
L"
The nominal flexural strength, M'l'shall be the lower value (506.9-4)
obtained according to the limit states of yielding (plastic where
moment) and local buckling.
(506.9-5)
506.8.1 Yielding
M,,=M/,=~.Z (506.8-1 ) The plus sign for J3 applies when the stem is in tension and the
minus sign applies when the stern is in compression. If the tip
of the stem is in compression anywhere along the unbraced
506.8.2 Local Buckling length, the negative value of B shall be used.
1. For compact sections, the limit state of flange local
buckling does not apply. 506.9.3 Flange Local Buckling of Tees
.l
. .[
/',., = /'y 1.19 - (J.S( {b Jfi'-"J
~~
i
21 i
--,.
L
(506 .9· 7) where
"
F = 0.69E
(~r
(506.9-8)
I.
iI.
For bending about one of tile geomeu·ic axes of all cqual-
leg angle with no lateral- torsional buckling I)10mCllI
With maximum comprcss ion at the IOC
506.10.2 Lateral-Torsio"al Buck ling 2. For bending abou t Ihe rnajor principal axis of equal-leg
For single angles without comilluous lateral-torsional angles:
restraint alon g the length (a ) When Mr 5; M,·
0.46b,,',2 CI,
M, (506.10-5)
L
M"JO.92-0. 17M')Mr (506. 10.2)
l M"
3. For bending llbout the major plincipal axis of unequal -leg
angles:
when M t >M )"
th
Nalional Siructtlfal Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volwne 1
5 6? CHAl'lTIl 5 . Sleel and Mela ls
where
(506.10·9)
where
(506.12·3)
" 0.42E
(506. 13·4)
Fer ;;; buc kling stress for the section as dcte rmined by F"
analysis. MPa.
where
506.13 Proportions of Beams and Girders ;;; clear distance bet ween tran sverse stiffeners . mill
"
506.13.1 H ole Reductions tn unstiffened girders IJI ... shall not exceed 260. 1l1C ratio of the
This section applies to rolled or built -up shapes, a nd COVCI'* web area to the compress ion flange aren shall not exceed to.
plated bea ms with boles, pro portioned on the basis of
flexural strength o f the gross secti on. 506.13.3 Cover Plates
Flanges of welded beams or girde rs may be varied in
In additi on to the limit slates specified in other sections of thickness or width by spli ci ng a series of plates or by the
this sectio n , the no minal flexural stre ngth, M'l shall be use of cover pl ates.
limited accordi ng to the limit state of tensile rupture of the
te nsion Oange. The total cross-sectio na l a rea of cover plates o f bolted
girders shall no' exceed 70 percent of 'he ,olal fl ange area.
1. For Fit A/II 2: Y, F." AIe' the li mit state of tens il e rup ture
a.
507.2.2 Transverse Stiffeners III these cases, the no minal shear strength, V'P shall be
Trans vc rse s tiffeners are 1I 0 t requ ired de termined according to the provisions of Section 507.2.
wh ere hi t I\" S 2. 46J EJFy , o r where th e rcqu ired shear
507.3.2 Nominal Shear Streng th with Tension Field
strength is less than or equal to the available shear strength Action
provided ill acco rdance with Section 507 .2. 1 for k I' :::: 5. Wh e n tension field ac ti o n is pe rmitted acc ording to
Section 507.3.1, the no mi na! shear strength, VII' with
Tran sverse stiffeners lIsed to devclop the available web shear tension field action, accordin g to th e limit state of tensioll
strength, as provided in Section 507.2.1, shnll have a mom ent field yielding, shall be
of incrtia abollt an axis ill the web center for stiffen er pairs or
about the face in contact with the web plate for sin gle
stiffencrs, whi ch shall not be less than at ;'. j, wh ere
2.5 (507.3· I)
j = - - -nO.5 (507.2·6)
(al II)'
2. For 'II,., > 1.1OJk,.E/ Fy
Transverse stiffene rs arc pennitted to be stopped sha n of thc
tc nsion fl a nge, provided bearing is not needed to ;t ran smit a
concentrated load or reaction . The weld by wh ic h 1ransvcrse
stiffe ne rs are 311ached 10 the web shall be terminalCd lIot less 1'" =0. 6 F y A h{C" + I
than four ti mes nor more than six limes the web thic kness from
the ncar toe to the web-to-nange weld. When si ngle. stiffeners (507.3·2)
are lISed, they shal l be attached to the compression fl ange. if it
consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due where
to torsion in the flange. When lateral bracing is altached to a kl' and C,. arc as defined in Section 507.2. 1.
stiffener. or a pair of stiffen ers, these, in tum, shall be
COlUlccted to the compression fl ange to transmit 1 percent of
the lotal fla nge fo rce, unless the fl ange is co mposed o nl y of 507.3.3. Transverse Stiffeners
angles. Transverse stiffeners subject to tension field aclion sh ~;i :ncel
Bolts connecting sti ffeners to the girder web shall be spaced the requ ire me nts of Section 507 .2 .2 and the !"oHm·,· jog
no t more than 305mm on center. l f imenlliHent fillet welds arc limi tat ions:
(-t..
lIsed, the clear distance between welds shall not be morc than
J 6 times the web thickness nor more Ihan 250 mill .
J. (b/t) t $ 0.56 -
.s \ Fyst
507.3 Tension Ficld Action
507.3.1 Limits on the Use of Tension Field Action 2. A,, > ~, [O. ISD,JtI".(I-CJ;\ (" - 1 8 t~.J;,()
FY,'I
(507.3-3)
Consideration of tension field action is pennitted for fl anged
members whe n the web plate is supported on all four sides where
by flan ges or stiffeners. Consideration of tens ion fi e ld
ac ti on is not permitted for: (bit)" = the width-thi ckn ess rati o of tile stiffener
!
!
507.6 Round HSS 507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Doubly Symmetric
Shapes
The nominal shear strength, Vn • of rou nd HSS. accord in g to
I,
For singly and doubly symmelric shapes loaded in the weak
the limit Slates of shear yi elding and shear buckling, is
ax is without torsion, the nominal shear strength, V'I' for
(507.6-1) each shear resisting element shall be determined using
i A =b f
I, Equation 507.2-1 and Section 507.2. J(b) with w f!
and k" = 1.2
where
p.... = available compressive sirength out of the plane
of bending. N.
M.o). = available Oexural -torsional strength for strung
For design according to Sec tion 502.3.4 (ASD) axis n cxurc determincd from sec tion 506. N·
1'1' ::: req uired t cn~ il c strengt h us ing AS!) load mOl.
combinatio ns, N.
1', = P,I!2 I =a ll owable te nsil e stre ngth , dete rmined If bending occ urs only abou t th e weak axi ~, the momen t
in accorda nce wi th Sec tion 504.2. N. ra ti o in Equa<ion 508 .1-2 shall be neglected.
M, ::: requi red fl exural stre ngt h us ing ASD load
combinations, N·mm. For members with significant biaxial moments (MrlMr 2: 0.05
M,. = Mn/Db=allowable flexuraJ strength determined in both directions), the provisions of Section 508.1.1 shall be
in accordance with section 506, N-mm. followed .
n, ::: safelY factor for tcnsion (see Section 504.2)
0" = safety factor for nexure =:: 1.67 508.2 Unsymmetri c and othe r Membe rs Subject to
Flexure and Axial Force
This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial
rol' doubly symmetric members, C b in section 506 may be
stress (or shapes not covered in Section 508.1. It is
incrcased by 1+ 1.5P'1 permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape
for axial ten sion that acts in lieu of the provisions of Section 50S. I .
\ Pry
where
A morc detailed analysis of the inte raction of fl exure and
tensio n is permj tted in lieu of Eq uations 508.1- 1a and fa = requ ired axial stress at the point of consideration,
50B.I - Ib. MPa.
Fo = available axial stress at the point of
508.1.3 Do ubl y Sy mme tric M e mb er s in S in gle Axis consideration, MPa.
F lex ure and Compression fb ... JlJ: = required flexura l stress at the point of
conside ration, MPa.
For doubly symmetric members in flex.ure .Uld compression
Fb. .~Fb~ = available flexural stress at the point of
with moments primarily in one plane, it is perm.issible to
considerat ion, MPa.
consider the two independent limit SLates, in-plane instability
I\' = sUbscripl relating symbol to major principal axis
and out-oC-plane buckling or flexural ·torsiollal buckling, sep-
bending
arately in lieu of the combined approach provided in
Section 50B. I. I.
z = subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis
bending
I. For the limit stale of in·p lane instability, Equations
50B.1.I shall be used with Pc, M c. and Me determined For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
in the plane of bending. /, = req uired axial st ress usin g LRFD load
combin at ions. MPa.
2. For the limit state of out-of-plane buc kling
F, =desig n axia l s tress, determined in
accordance with sec t ion 505 for
-;!-+
co
M J' ~ l .O
P (--'
M 0:
(508.1-2) compression
tension,MPa .
or Section 504.2 for
1
!
For design "ccording 10 Seclion S02.3.4 (ASD) " fEe:):
In ;: required axial stress us ing ASD lUcid
and
co mbinations. MPa
Fa = FrIDt' ::: ililowable axial stress determined in
:'lcconJancc with section 505 for (508.3·2b)
compression, or Section 504.2 for ten s ion,
MPa _
fb ..Jbt ;::; required flexural stress at the specific locati on in
the cross section using ASD load combinations. but shall not exceed 0.6F)"
Mr._
rb .... Fbl ;::; M" / Q~' = allowable flexural slress detcnnincd in where
; accordance with section 506, MPa. Use the section L :=; length of the member, 111111 .
I!
Qr
Q, =safey faclor for tension (Section S04 _2) I. For rcctangular !iSS
Q" ;::; safely. factor for flexure;::; 1.67
a_ For h/T$ 2A5JEf F,
Equation 508.2-1 shall be evaluated using [he principal
(508.3·3)
bending axes by considering the sense of the fl ex ural stresses
at the cri tical points of the cross section. The nexura l terms
are either added to or subtracted from the axia l tcrm as h . For 2ASfE/ F,. < II/T S 3-07JEri~
appropriate. When the axial force is compression. second order
effects shall be included according to the provisions of F" = 0_6F!. (2.4SJEj Fy )/(h/T) (50B.3-4)
secti on 503.A more detailed analysis of the imeraction of
nexure and tension is-pcnniUed in lieu of Equation 508 .2- J. c. For 3_07 JE/ Fy < hiT S 260
50S.3 Members under Torsion and Combin ed Torsion,
Flexure, Shear and/or Axial Force F" =OASSn' E/(h/T)' (SOB.3 -S )
50S.3.1 Torsional Strength of Round and User, Note! - 1"1!e torsional .she~r . con~\lIu~
Rectangular HSS con_se!'Y~~v~!y t.I\k~/l-.aS: .. "" -
- . '.,. ",' -·itf.p ..:. tf,.t
The de sign torsional strength , rpr~,. and (he allowable C .. ::
Foq round HSS : 2
torsional strength. Tn/fl r •for round and rectangular HSS
sha ll be detennined as follows:
For' l'&WigliJaf HS~-:;
-.; 2;;).{}j.'. ,Xif -i-Xi-4·W:.."jt'.'
(ir =0.90 (LRFD) Q r =L67(ASD)
where
The design torsional slrellglll.lPTI·~1' and (he .lIlowablc
IOrsional strength. I~JQT' for llon·HSS members sha ll be
For design according 10 Seclion 502.3.3 (LRFD) the !owest value obtnined according to the limit states or
Pr = required axial strength using LRFD load yield ing un der norm al stress, shear yieldillg under shear
combinations, N. stress, or buckling, de termin ed ;]s follows:
P,. = ,pPII • design tensile or compressive strength in tPr =O.90(LRFD) fiT =1.67 (ASD)
accordance with section 504 or 505. N.
M, == required flexural strength using LRPD load 1. For the limi t stale of yielding under normal stress
combinations. N-mm.
M, == ¢bMIl,design flexural strength in accordance (508.3-7)
with section 506, N-Illm.
\I, : :;: required shear strength using LRFD load 2. For the limit state of shear yie lding under shear stress
combinations, N.
\'e = design shear strength ill accordance wi th F" = O.6Fy (508.3-8)
seclion 507, N.
= required torsional strength using LRFD load 3. or the lim it Slate of buckling
combinations. N-Il1:m.
T, : :;: design torsional strength in accordance with (508.3-9)
Section 508.3 . 1. N·mm.
where
For design according 10 Seclion 502.3.4 (AS D) ::: buckling stress for the section as determined by
analysis, MPa. Some constrained local yielding
P, : :;: required axial strength using ASD load
is permitted adjacent to areas that remain elastic.
combinations, N.
Pc = P,1D, allowable ten sile o r compressive strength
in accordance with section 504 or 505, N.
M, = required flexural strengtll using ASD load
combinations detemlined in accordance with
Seclion 502.5, N-mm.
Me ::: M,/D1" allowable Oexural strength In
accordance with section 506, N~l1lm.
V, ::: required shear strength llsing ASD load
combinations, N.
Vi' ::: allowable shear strength in accordance with
seclion 507, N.
T, ::: required torsional strength using ASD load
combinations, N-mm.
1~ :::: T,/DT allowable torsional strength in accordance
with Section 508.3. 1, N~mm .
This sc<.: tion ac.h.Jrcsxes composite columns com posed or User Note: The Slrain compalibility method should be us:e.i"
roll ed or buill-up struclUral steel shapes or HSS. and 10 determine nominal strength for irregular sections -a nd
strucltlral co ncrete acting togclher. and stcel heams for cases where tbe "eel dO eS not exhibit e)a,'to-pJW).~
supp0l1ing a reinforced conc rete slab so intcrconn ected behavior. General guidelines for the slrain-compatibiUfh
that the beams .1I1d the slab tiCI toge ther to resist hcndillg. tnedlOd fO'r encased columns are given 'ip 'AISC De~rg-Ir
Silllple and cOJ}li'lu(}uS composilc beams with shcar connectors Guide6 alld ACl31 8 Scclions 10.2 and 10.3. '?("
and concrctc-encased bemns. constnti;ted with or wil hout
temporary shores. arc included . 509.1. 2 Material Limitatiolls
Concrete and ~ I cd reinforc ing bars in c.:()lllposi{~ sys tems
The scction is organized ,IS follows:
511<111 be subject \0 the fo llowi ng lilll ililliolls.
509. 1 General Provisions I. For the determi nation of the availablc strength. COnCrete
509.2 Axial Members shall have:1 com pressive stre ngt h f,~ ornot less than 21
509.3 Flex ural Members
MPa nor morc than 70 MP" for normal weight
509.4 Combined Axial Force mnl Flexure
concrete and not le.'\ s th an 21 MP" nor more than 42
509 .5 Special Cases
MP" for light weight cOI1<.:rcte.
509. 1 General IJrovisiolls
User Not.e:. Higher strength cqncrete materials lTliIY be us"q.
In dctennining load effec ts in mcmbers and co nnec ti ons of' <I for stiffness calculations but may not be relied ,Jlp~.n ·JiiF
stru cture that includes composite members, co nsideration strength calculations unless juslified by testing or analysis.
shall be given to the effcctive sections at the lime each
increment of load is applied. The design. detailing and 2. The specified minimum yield stress or s tru c tural
mate ria] properties related to Ihe concrete and reinforcing steel stecl a nd reinforcing bars lIsed in calculating the
portions of composite const ruction shall comply with the strength of a compositc colum n shall not exceed 525
reinfo rced co ncrete and rei nforcing ba r design MPa.
specifications stipulated by Ihis code. In the absence of a
building code, the provisions in Chapter 4 shall apply. Hi ghcr material strengths are permi llcd when their use is
justified by testi ng or analysis.
509.1.1 Nominal Strength of Co mpos ite Sections
Two Inethods .ne provided for dctcnnining the nominal strength User Note: AdditiolHll reinforced concrete materia'l~
of composite secti ons: the plastic stresS distributi on method limitations are specified in Chapler4.
and the strain -compatibility method.
The tensile strength or thc concrete shall be neglccted in th e 509.1.3 Shear Connectors
determinat ion of the nomin:ll strength or composi te Shea r connectors shall be headed sleel studs not less than
mClllbers. four stud diameters in length after installation, or h ot ~rolkd
steel channels. Shear stud design values shall be taken as p. r
509.1.13 Plastic Stress Distribution Method Secti ons 509.2. 1g and 509.3.2d (2). SlUd connectors sh;.; i
For the plastic stress distribution method. the nominal conform to the requirements of Section 50 1.3.6. Cham:d
strength shall be compu ted ass uming th at steel components connectors sh<l ll conform to the req uire lllclHs of Sec(lu ll
ha ve reached a stress of F \' in either tension or 501.3. 1.
co mpression and concrete co mpon ent s ill co mpression have
50Y.2 Axial Members
rcac hed a stress of 0. 85/; For roun d HSS fillcd w ith
This sect ion applic!-. to two types of composi te axial
concrete, it stress of' 0.95/c· is pCI111illed to be used for members: cncased and filled secti ons.
concrete components in uniform compression to account ror
the errects of concrete confi nemcnt. 509.2. 1 Encased Composi te Col umns
A
Association of Structural Engineers o f tile Philippines
I. The cross-seetio/wl area of' the steel core shall cornprisc where
aI least I percent of rhe total composite cross section.
= area of th e steel section, 111 m2
2. Concrete cnr,lsc mc nl or th e steel core shall be = are a of concrete. mm 2•
reinforced with cOlltinuous longiludilll1l bars illld = area o f co ntinuoll s reinforcing bars, mm 2
latent! lics or spirals . The minimum transverse :::; modulus of elasticity of cOll crelc
reinforcement shall be at lcast 6 mm 2 per mm of lic
spa ci ng . ( 004 3",:5 jZMPa )
3. The minimulll rcillforccmcn( ratio for continuoll s
f:.~ == modulu s of elasti city of slee! :::; 2 10 MPa.
longitIJdinal reinforcing, P.I"/"' shall be 0.004. where /'. = specified compressive strength of concrete,
PSr' is given by: MP,.
F,. = specified mi nim um yield stre ss of steel section.
,1" MP •.
P.1·, - 1\ (509.2-1) :=; specified minimum yield stress of
-[
where
P" =0.877p" (509.2-3 ) The design tensile slrength, 4>1 P'll and allowable tensile
strength , Pn / Q./ I for encas ed composite columns shall be
where
determined for the limit state of yielding as
(509.2-4) (509.2 -8)
(509.2-5)
1/>, =0.90(LRFD) 12, = 1.67 (ASD)
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5- 74 CHAPTE n 5: - Swel and Melals
User Note:. The nominal shear strength of tie reimfprcel1lQQt encased composite column above an d below th e IO;JfI
rnay~e<itt~mll~e.d .s>,4"t"'iJ4jf),w~iflt.f4~ii;;jiii~; ~~~\t tnm sfcr region. The ma ximum connector spacing :-!1:1!1 h , ~
405111111.
of tie reinforgernent, dis ' the-'effective .; depth of the
concrete ' "seetion,'" and . 'so' is':" 'ih6' ,·. s~iidrig ::, of' ·the · . tie Co nnectors (0 transfe r ax ial IO~ld shall be placed on :\~ k:!:.;!
reinforcement. The ' shear dlplidt)f of reinforCeil ' concrete two faces of the steel shape in a configuratioJl symn](.'lric,d
may be determined according to ACr 318, Chapter 11 . about the steel shape axes.
509.2.1.1 r Load Transfer !~ . the composite cross section is built up from Iwn or
Loads applied to ilx ially loaded ellc<lscd composite columns morc encased stcel shapes, the shapes s 1 ~:l !l i ...
shall be trilllsfcrred between the sleel ilnd concrete in interconnected with lacing, tic plates, ballcn pl<tles or simil;l[
tlccord'lJlcc wi th the following requircmcnt s: componcn ts 10 prevcnt buc kling of individua l shnpcs dii (: i.)
load.5 applicd prior to h ~lfdeni ng of the concrete.
I. When (he extcrnal force i s applied directly (o the stee!
section, shear connectors shall be provided to transfer
th e required shcar force, V', as follows:
509.2. L 1g Strength of Stud Shear Connectors
The nominal strength of one slUd shear connector el1l h ~{i ·._ ; c( :
1" =V(I - AJ F.). /p )
(I
in solid conc rete is:
(509.2- 10)
509.2.23 Limitalions
To qualify as a fill ed composite column the fo!1 o\'.. -::
3. When load is applied to the concrete of an encased limitations shall be rnet :
composite colum n by direct bearing the desig.n bearing
stren gt h, ¢lnPp' and tile allowable bearing st rength, The crossM scctional area of the steel /iSS shall comp; ~ ~,~ :H
least 1 percenl of
pp /fl./J' of the co ncrete shal l be:
I. The low l composi tc cross secli on.
(509.2-1 1) 2. The maxim um bit rati o [or a rec tangu lar I-ISS \
¢Ii = 0,65 (LRF~ Q Il =2JI(ASD) a compositc column sha!1 be cqlwi , j
C2 ::::: 0.85 I'm reclangular sec ti ons ;l lld 0.95 for member at least it distance or 2 .5 limes the width of a
circular sccli om; rectangu lar HSS or 2.5 ti mes the d iml1CICr pf a rotlnd HSS
hoth abo ve ilnd below the load tnill sfc r region . '111C maximu m
(509.2·14 ) connect or spacing Shllll he 40SIllJll . .
c, =06+ 1-~)$0.9
509.3 Fltxural Mcmh crs
(5092 · 15)
. lAj"+A.\.
509.3.1 General
th
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5·7G CHAPTE n 5 . Steel and Metals
M" shall be dctcnnined from the plastic strl!S~ di stribution wi th welded slUd sheilI' connectors It) mill or less in
Oil Ihe: composite secti on for the limit slate of yie ld ing diamcter (A WS D 1. 1). SlUd~ shall be welded either
(plastic IIlOIllCnt). through the deck or dircl: tly 10 the steel l:n>ss sectioll. St ud
shear COllncl:lUrs, 'Ifler inslall;uiun. shall cxtend 110{ less
User Nole: All current ASTM A6 W. Sand HP shapes than 38 IllI11 above the lOp of the steel de ck (!Ild there
satisfy the limit given In Section 509.3 .2.(a) for Fy $ shall be at leasl 13 mill of concrete COver above the (OP
of the installed slluls.
345 MP •. '" c. Thc slab thickness above the steel deck shall be ,]0{ Ic.ss
2. For 1>/1 .. > 3.76~Ej F,.. th an 50 mill.
Mil shall be dc te rmined From the ~lIpcrposi ( io l1 of elastic d. Steel deck shall be illlc horcd to all suppol1i ng members
stresses, considering lhe effects of shori ng. for thc limit at a spacing 1101 10 exceed 460 111 Ill . Such anchorage
sHlte of yieldi ng (yield moment). shall be provided by !>Iud connecto rs, a co mbinalion
of stud conneclors and arc spot (p uddl e) we lds, or
509.3.2b Negative Flexurnl Strength other devices specified by the designer.
The design nega tive ncxural st rength, (AM 1/' and the 2. Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicul;lf 10 Steel Beam
Concrete below the top of the steel deck shal! be
allowahle nega tive flexura l st reng th, Mn /n" ,
sha ll be
neglected in dc termining composi te section propcI1ics
determined for the steel secti on alone, in accordance with and ill calculating At, for deck ri bs ori e nted pef¥
th e requircments of Section 506. pendicular to th e stecl beams.
Allernatively, the available negative flexural strengt h shal! be 3. Deck Ribs Oriented Parall el to Steel Beam Concrete
dctermined from the plastic stress di stributi on 011 th e below the top of the steel deck may be included in
compos ite section, for the limit s13te of yi elding (plastic determining composite section properties and shall be
moment ), with included in calculating A~ .
4. Formed steel deck ri bs ovcr supp orting beams may be
1/>" = 0.90 (LRFd)
split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete
provided that : haunch.
1. The steel beam is compaci and is Rdeq ual ely bmced When the nominal depth of steel deck is 38 mill or greater,
according 10 Secrion 506.
the averagc width, HI r of thc sUPP0rled haunch or rib shall
2. Shear connectors connect the slab ( 0 the steel beam in be nOI less than 50 mill for the first stud in the transverse
the negative 1Il0 lllc nl region. row plus four stud diameters for each add itional stud.
3. The slab reinforcement parallcl (Q the steel beam,
within the effecti ve width of the slab, is properly 509.3.2d. Shear Connectors
developed. 1. Load Transfer for Positive Momen t
The entire horizontal shear at the interface between the steel
bea m and the concrete slab shall be .ssumed to be transferred
509.3.2c Strength of Composile Beams with by shear connectors, except for concrc t c~encased beams as
Formed Sleel Deck defined in Secti on 509.3.3. For composite action with
concrete subject to nexural compression, the total horizon tal
1. General
shea r force, V',between tile point of maximum positive
Tile availab le ncx ural strength of composite cOIl~tl1lction momen t and the point of zero momenl fihaJJ be taken as the
consis ting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck lowest value according to the li mi t states of concrete cl1lshing.
connectcd to steel beams shall bc dctermined by tlie te ns ile yield ing of the steel sectioll. or strength of the shc:c:'
applicable. POl1i oilS of Seeliol l 509.3.2a and 509.3.2b, wil li COllllcctors:
the following requi rements:
u. Conc rete crushing
l'I. This section is applicable to decks with nominal rib
height not greater than 75 mill . The average 'v.'idlh of (509.3- 1a)
concrete rib or haunch, w ,. shall be nol less than 50 b. Tensile yielding of th e steel sectio n
mill, but shall not be taken in calculations as morc than
the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck. (509.3-lb)
b. The co ncrete slab shall be connected to the stc-.el beam
c. Strength of shear conllectors
(509J-Ic) steel shape iJnd the rati o of the average rib width
to rib depth ~ 1.5
where :; 0.85; (a) for two studs welded in a steel deck rib
with the deck oriented perpendicular (0 the steel
A,. : ; - arca or concrete s lab within effecti ve widt h shape ; (b) for one ' IUd welded through steel
III III 2 •
deck with th e deck oriented parallel to
A, = area of .'lIce! cross section, 11)111:.'
the steel shape and the ratio of the average rib
EQ" : ; - sum of nominal strengths of shear connectors width to rib depth < 1.5
between the point of maximum positi ve 11lOlllcnt :::: 0.7 for three or more studs welded in a steel deck
and the point of zero moment, N. rib ':"ilh the deck oriented perpendicular to the
2. Load Tran s fer for Negative Moment steel shape
In continuous composite beams where longiludin:ll /II' = 1.0 for studs we lded directly to the stee l shape
reinforcing steel in the negati ve IllOlllent regions is (in other words, not through steel deck or sheet )
cons idered to act compositely with the steel beam, the total and having a haunch delaiJ with not morc
horizontal shear force between the pOint of maximum lhan 50 percent of the lOp flange covered
negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be by deck or sheet stccl closures
taken as the lower value according to the limit states of = 0 .75; (a) for studs welded in a composite slab with
yielding of the steel reinforcement in the slab, or strength of the deck oriented perpendicular to the beam
the shear connectors: and emid-hl 2:2io. (50 mm); (b) for studs
a. Tensile yield ing of the slab reinforcement welded through steel deck, or steel sheet
used as girder filler material, and embedded in a
V ' ::;;- A"P,I'" (509.3-2a) com posite slab with th e deck oriented parallcl10
the beam
where :::: 0.6 for studs welded in a composite slab with
deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and
A, = area of adequHtely developed lon gitudina l
reinforci ng stee l within the effective width of the emid-ht ~ in. (50 mm)
2
concrete slab, mm (~""d./JI distance from the edge of stud shank to the steel
;::;
Fyr = specified minimum yield stress oftlle reinforcing deck web. mea. mea.surcd at mjd~height of the
Sleel, MPa. deck rib. and in the load bearing directi on of the
stud (in other words, in the direction of
a. Strength of shear connectors maximum moment for a simply supported
beam). mm.
(509 .3-2b)
We = weight of concrete per unit volume (1500 ~ w e :::
2500kg/m'.
3. Strenglh of Stud Shear Connec tors
The nominal strength of one slUd shear connector embedded
in solid concrete or in a composi te slab is
where
Asc = cross~scctional
2
area of stud shear co nn ector
' '
n1l11
Ec = modulus of e lasti city of concrete ::::
510.1.3 Moment Connections 5IU.1.6 Beam Copes and \Veld Access Holes
End connections of restrained beams, girders, and trusses All weld access ho!c.s required (0 facilitate welding
shall be designed for the combined effect of forces resulting operations shaH have a length from the toe o/" the weld
from moment and shear induced by the. rigidity of the preparation /l0{ less (han 11/2 times the thickness oj" the material
cOllnections. Response criteria for moment connections m'e in which the hole is made. The height of the access hole shall be
provided in Section 502.3.61>. j 1/2 times the thickness of the matelial with the access hole, t W'
but not !css tlHU1 25 !lllll nor docs it need (0 exceed 50 mll1.
User Note: Sec Section 503 and Appendix A-7 for analysis The access hole shall be detaikd to provide room for weld
requirements to establish the required strength and stiffness backing as needed.
for desigll of connections.
Fo!: sections that arc rolled or welded prior to cutting, the
510.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing Joints edge of the web shall be sloped or curved from the surface
1. When columns bear on bearing plates or are finished to of the flange to the reentrant surface of the access hole. In
bear at splices, there shall be sufficient connectors to hOI-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove
hold all parts securely in place. welds that join the web~to-Oange, all beam copes lmd weld
access holes shall be free of notches and sharp reentrant
2. When compression members other than columns are comers. No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radills
finished to bear, the splice material and its connectors less than 10 mill.
shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be
proportioned for either (i) or (ii) below. It is permissible In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration
to use the less seve-re of the two conditions:
groove welds that join the web-to-flange, all beam copes
a. An axial tensile force of 50 percent of the required and weld acccss holes shall be free of notches and sharp
compressive strength of the member; or reentrant comers. The access hole shaH be permitted to
terminate perpendicular 10 the Oange, providing the weld is
b. The moment and shear resulting from a transverse load terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size away
equal to 2 percent of the required compressive strength from the access holc.
of the member. The transverse load shall be applied at the
location of the splice exclusive of other loads that act on For heavy sections as defined in 501.3.ic and 501.3.ld, the
the member. 'D1e member shall be taken as pinned for the thermally cut surfaces of beam copes and weld access holes
determination of the shears and moments at the splice. shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either
magnetic particle or dye penetrant methods prior to deposition
User Note: All compression joints should also be of splice welds. If the curved transition pOJ1ion of weld
proportioned to resist any tension developed by the load access holes and beam copes arc formed by predrilled or
combinations stipulated in Section 502.2. sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not
be ground. Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes
510.1.5 Splices in Heavy Sections need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to magnetic pal1ic1e methods.
be transmilted through splices in heavy sections, as defined
in Section 501.3.1e and 501.3.1d,by completc joint- 510.1.7 I'hlcement of Welds and Bolts
penetration groove (CJP) welds, material notch-toughness Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member which
requirements as given in Section 501.3.lc and 501.3. ld, transmit axial force into that member shall be sized so that
weld access hole details as given in Section 510.1.6 and the center of gravity a/" the group coincides with the centcr
thermal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements o/" gravity of the member, unless provision is made for III
as given in 513.2.2 shaH apply. The foregoing provision is not eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to c;
applicable to splices of elements of built-up shapes that arc connections of statically loaded single angle, double ang);
welded prior to assembling the shape. and similar members.
J. Column spli ces in all mult i-story structures over 38 m 510.2.1 Grooye Welds
in height.
510.2.10 Effective Area
2. Connection~ of all beams and girders to columns and
The effec ti ve area of groove welds shall he considered as
,IllY other beams and gi rders on which the bracing of
the length of the we ld times the effective throat thickness.
columns is dependent in Slmc(ures over 38 In in height
3. In all structures carrying cra nes of over 50 k.N capacity: The effective throat thickness of a partial-joint-penclfation
roof truss splices and connecti ons of trusses to (P1P) groove weld shall be as s hown in Table 510.2.1.
columns. column spli ces, col umn bracing, knee braces,
and crane supports User Note: The effective throal size of a partial-join!:
penetration groove weld is dependent on the process used
4. Conn ecti ons for the suppon of machinery and other live
and. the weld position. TIle contract documents should either
loads that produce impact or reversal of load
indicale the effective IlU'Oal required or Ille weld streoglh
required. and 'the fabricalor should detail the joinl based 00
Snug-li ghl ened joinlS or joinls wilh ASTM A307 bolls shall
Ille weld process and position 10 be used 10 weld the joint.
be permitted exccpt where otherwise specifi ed.
The effecti ve weld size for fl are groove welds, when filled
flu sh to the surface of a round bar. a 900 bend in a fonned
section, or rectangular HSS shall be as shown in Table
510.2.2. unless other effective throat s arc demonstrated by
tests . The effective size of Oare groove welds filled less
than flu sh shall be as shown in Table 510.2.2, lcss the
greatest perpendicular dimcnsion measured from a line flush
to the bnse metal su rfClce to the weld surface .
------------------------------
Table 510:2.2
Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove
-,;;; -,; '-,_ •-", 'Welds
Welding
Flare Bevel Groove!;01 Flare V Groove
Process
Welding 1------ -------------------- ------------
Groove
Posi{:on GMAWand
Type 5/8 Ii 3/4 Ii
F(llai), H Effective
"""""1'"n Process (AWS FCAW-()
(horiz.), Throat
DI.I. ------------------1------
V(vcrt.),
Figure SMAWand
I 5/16 Ii 5/8 Ii
3.3) FCAW-S
Shielded Meta! Arc
All SAW 5/16R '/2 R
(SMAW)
Gas MClal Arc ra)Por Flare Bevel Groove with R< 10 mm llse
J or U
(GMAW) Flux All only reinforcing fillet weld on filled flush
Groove Depth of
Cored Arc 60' V joint. General Note: R"", radius of join I surface
W) Groove
(can be assullled to be 21 for I-ISS), mm
-
Submerged Arc F J or U
Groove 60' I
(SAW)
Bevel or V I
I,
Gas Metal Arc
(GMAW) Flux
Cored Arc
F,II 4S · Depth of
Bevel Groove
(FCAW)
Material Thickness of Minimum Effective
To 6 inclusive
Throat Thickness,!a) mIn.
Bevel Minus 3 3
mill Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Gas Metal Arc
(GMAW) Flux V.OH 4S · Depth of
Groove
Over 19 to 38 8
Cored Arc Over 38 to 57 10
Bevel nus 3!
(FCAW) Over 57 to 150 13
Over ISO 16
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 8
Larger dlcctivc throat thicklll!s~cs than those ill Table 510.2.2 The minimum effecti ve Icngl h of lilkt welds designcd 011
arc permitted, pro vided the fabricator C<.Ill establish by the basis of strength shall be no! less than fOllr tillles thl'
qualdic<ltion the consistent production of slich larger effective nominal size. or else the size of the weld shall be considered
throilt tllicklu!sscs. Qua lilicHtioli shall consist of sectioning not IU exceed 1/.1 of it s effecti ve Icngth. If longitudinal fillet
the we ld normal to its <Ixi~, at mid-length and Icnninal ends. welds arc lIsed al one in end conneclions of nat-Imr tension
Such sectioning shall be made Oil a number of combinations membcrs. Ihl'. length of each fillet weld shall be nOI less lhan
or material sizes rcprc scll1<Hivc of the range 10 be used in the the perpendicular distance between Ihem. For the effect of"
fabri c.1t i on. longitudinal fillet weld length iJ~ end cOJlnections upon the
effectivc arc;\ of the connectcd '.Jllember,
.. -
sec Section 504.3.3.
510.2.lb Limitations
The minimum effective throat thickness of ;:1 partial ~joiJ1( For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 limes the
penelnllion groove weld shall not be less Ihan the size required leg dimension, it is pemlitled to take the erfective length
to transmit calculated forces nOT the size shown in Table equal 10 the aeluallenglh. When the lenglh of the end-loaded
510.2.3 . Minimum weld size is determined by the thinn er of fillet weld exceeds 100 times the' weld size. the effective
the two parts joined . length shall be delcnnined by multipl ying the nc(Ual lenglh
by the reduction factor, p,
510.2.2 Fillet Welds
,6= 1.2 -O.OOJ:l/w)~ 1.0 (510.2· 1)
510.2.2. Effective Arca where
The errective area of a fillet weld shall re the effcctive length
multiplied by the erfectivc throat. The effective lhroat of a
L = actua llenglh of end·loaded weld, 111111 .
fillel weld shall be the shortest dislance from lhe root 10 the
\\' = weld leg size. mm .
face of tile diagrallll1lmic weld. An increase ill effecti ve Ihroat
When the length of lhe weld exceeds 3(X) times the leg size.
is permilled if consistent penetralion beyond the root of the
diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using lhe Ihe value of {J shall be laken as 0.60.
producti on process and procedure variablcs.
In tcnnittem fillet welds are pennitted to be used to transfer
For fillct welds in holes and slots, the effective Jenglh cakulated stress across a joint or faying surfaces when (he
shall be Ihe length of Ihe cenlerline of Ihe weld along Ihe required strength is less than that developed by a continuous
center of the plane through the th roat. In tbe case of fillet weld of the smallest pemlilted size, and (0 join
overlapping fillets. the effective area shall nOI exceed the componenls of built-up members. The effective length of any
nominal cross·sect ional area of the hole or slot, in the plane segmel1l of intermittent fillet welding shall be not less lhan
of lhe faying surface. four times the weld size, with a minimum of 38mm.
510.2.2b Limitations In lap joints, lhe minimum amount of lap shall be five
times the thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less
The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not Jess than the than 25 nml _ Lap join ts joining plates or bars subjected to
size required to tra nsmit calculated forces, nor the size as axial stress that utilize transverse fillet welds only shall be
shown in Table 510.2.4 . These provisions do not apply to fillet welded along Ole end of both lapped parts. except where
fillet weld reinforcements of partial· or cOT11plel e~joilll· the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficientl y restrained to
penetration groove welds. prevent opening of the joint under maximum loadi ng.
The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall Fillet weld temlinalions (I.fe pennilted to be slopped short or
be : extend 10 the ends or sides of parts or be boxed except as
). Along edges of material less than 6 mm thick, nol limiled by the following:
grea ter than the thi ckness of the material. 1. For lap joints jn which one connected part extends beyond
2. Along edges of material 6 111111 or Illore in th ickness, an edge of another connccted part that is subjecl to
not greater th an th e thic kness of the mat eria l minus calculated tensile strcss, filicI welds shall terminate not
2 mm, unless the weld is especially designated 011 the less them the size of the weld from Ihat edge.
drawings 10 be buill oul. to obtain [uJl·!..Ilfoat thickness. In 2. For cOllnections where nexibility of th e oll tslanding
the as-welded condition, the distan ce between the edge elements is required, when end returns are used, the
of the base metal and the loe of the weld is pcnnined 10 be length of rhe retum shall not exceed four times the
less than 2 mm provided the weld size is clearl)' nominal size of rhe weld nor half the width of the part
verifiable.
3. Pillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5·84 CHAPTEr'1: ~j . Steel and !v1ctals
webs J 9 mm thick or less shall end 110\ less than fou r The thickness of plug or slot we lds in lllmerial mm or Ic.<.;s in
times nor morc than six times the thickness of the web thickness shall be equal to the thickness of (he mat erial. In
from the web toe of the web-lo-flange welds, except material over 16 mm thick, the thi ckness of the weld shall hi;
where lhe ends of" sliffeners are welded to lhe flange. at least one~ ha lf the thickness of the materia l but not less
than 16 111m.
4. Fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a common
plane, shall be interrupted at the com er common to both
510.2.4 Strength
welds.
The design stre ngth, rjJ Rn and the allowable strength.
Usc!" Note: Fillet weld tCJlllinations should be localed
app,r\~xj~~latcly Qilt;,.,.wel'~,I .:sizeJ~om :'. o( ~le~:,.~ge ()f th~
n,
Rn/ of welds shall be the lower v:.ilue of the base material
and rile weld metal strength determined according to the iilllil
sqJ~Jli!c:90·Ji" ,18 , : ~)~niiWA~. H9l~~~f)ij:~'~:, :,: ths~~~e. ' JP~~l,~l. -yillpl
~e\ds t"rminated at tll~ cnd ~fth e joint,' other 'ilion tllOse states of tens ile rupture, shear ruplllre or yielding as
cOlln~Jhlg .s tiffe))efs to -'girdei ,wcbs, ;aie ,noLa. ~!ltlse
correCtioi~' . :" \'. ,, :' " ' <, :'" .-,v"" < ,,.,,
"t?<
<, ,,'c',"I", ''-''''''.:., ,':'','
follows:
2
slot in the plane of the raying surface. mm
AI\' = effective area of th e we ld . 111m2
51O.2.3b Limitatious
Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear The values of ¢, Q,F/JM,f~l'and limitations thereon arc
in lap joints or to prevent buckling of lapped pans and to join given in Table 510.2.5.
component parts of built-up members.
The diameter of the holes for a plu g weld shall not be less Alternatively, for fillet welds loaded in-plane the design
than the thickness of the part containi ng it plus 8 mm, rounded
(0 {he next larger mill, nor greater than the minim um diameter st ren gth, ¢ Rn and th e all owable stre ngth, 11II (0., of. we 11(S 'IS
plus 3 mm or il4 times the thi ckness of the weld. penniued to be determined as follows:
The minimum cen ter-to-center spacing of plug wclds shall I/I=O.75(LIIF~ 0.=2.00(ASI~
be four times the diameter of the hol e.
I. For a linear weld grou p loaded in-plane tbrough the
center of gravity
The lenglh of slot for a slol weld shall not exceed 10
times th e th ickness of the weld. The width of the slot slmll be (5 I 0.2-4)
not less than the thickness of the pan containing it plus 8 mm
rounded to the next larger mill, nor shall it be larger than 21/4
times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be where
semicircuhu' or shall have the comers rounded to a radius of not
less than the th ickness of the part containing it, except those Fw =O.60F"xx (J.()+O.50sinI. 5 e) (510.2-5)
ends which extcnd to the edgc of the part.
and
The minimum spaci ng of lines of slot welds in a direction = electrode classification number, MPa.
tran sverse to their length shall be fo ur limes the width of the = angle of loading measured from the weld
slot. The minimum cent cr- l() ~cen ter spacing in a longitudinal longitudinal axis, degrees
direction on allY line shall be two times [he length of the slot. A... = effective area of the weld, mm2
User Note! . A jinear weld group is , one in _'which nil R"" = the Lolal nomin al strength of transversely loaded
clements ~re in a ii~l e or a;c paralieL -'. , fillet welds, as determined in accordance with
Table 510.2,5 without the alternate in Section
2. For weld clements wi thin a weld group that <I rc loaded
5 10.2.4(a), N.
ill·pJane and an alyzed using an instantaneous cen ter of
rotati on method, the compollent's of the nomina l
5JO.2.5 Combination of Weld s
s trengt h, RIIX and R " .~.;"are 'permitted 10 be determ ined
If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillct ,
as fo ll ows: pl ug. slot) arc co mbi ned in a s ingle joint, the st rength of each
shnl! be sep.mllcly co mput ed with reference to the axi s of the
(510.2-6)
group in order to determine {'he strength o f the combination.
where
5JO.2.6 Filler Melal Requirements
A"y = effect ive area of weld throat of any i th weld The cho ice of eleclrodc ror use with comlcte·joim·
clement , 1ll1l1 2 pcnctrati on groove weld s subject lO tension normal to the
F",j = 0.60 ""XX (1.0 + 0.50 ' in U e)/ (I') (510.2-7) effec tive are a shall comply with the requirements 1'01'
/ ( ,,) ~ [p (I .9 - 0.9 p )]0 ' (5 10.2-8) matching filler meta ls given in AWS Dl .1
= nominal stress in any it h weld eicment. MPa.
User Not~: TIle following User Note Table summari zes
= x co mponc lll of s tress , F Wi the A 'WS 0 I :_. I provisi ons for matching fiBer metal s,
= y compon ent of s tress, Fl1'i c:hhcrfest ric, ti6n,~, ~xist. , For 3. complet~ l.is.~or.base ll}ctals
and prequali1ied h'1atching tiller metals',see AY'lS '".
= LI;/ Ll"" rat io of clcmcill i deformati on to its
Dl.l , Table 3. 1. . ,
deformati on at maximum stress
)I' = weld leg size, mIll.
= disl<lncc from insta ntaneolls center of rotl1t ion to
weld clement with minim uill b.u /'; ratio, 111111,
LI; = defonn nti oll of we ld elements at int ermediate
stress ievels, lincarly pr o po r tion e d 10 the
critical de f ormation based 0 11 distance
fr o m the instant aneous cent er o f rotati on, Ii,
111111.
(510 .2-911)
or
(5 10.2-9b)
where
Effective Required
Load Type and Nominal
Arca Fi ller
Direction Pertinent Strengt h
Relative \0 Metal (FilM (1/' FlY ) lAHM or A w )
Weld Axis mm1
N
$ ~ O.90 Fy Sec
Base 5 10.4
Tension
Normal to weld axis $ ~ O.80 O.6OFlixx Sec
Weld
Q ~ 1.88 SIO.2.1a
Column to base
Compressive stress need 110 1 be considered in
Plate and column
design of welds joining the part s.
splices design ed
Compression ¢ =: 0.90
Scc
Base Fy
Conncctions or Q= I.67 5 10.4
mcmbers designcd Filler metal with II strength
to bear other ¢ = 0.80 Sec level equal 10 or less than
than columns as Weld
n ~ 1.88 O.60f;,:xx SIO.2. Ja matching filler metal is
described in 510. 1.4{b) penniltoo.
9= Sec
Co mpression Base F.\,
n '" Lli7 510.4
Connections not
fin ished-la-bear 9 Sec
Weld O.90FEXX 510.2. 1'
n=
Tension or Tension or compression in parIS joined parallel
Compression to a weld need not be con sidered in design of
P.arallello weld axis welds the
O.60FEXX Sec
Weld
510.2.1a
S hear
Weld
~ = 0,75 Sec
510.2,2:1 Filler me tal wilh ;t strength
n = 2.00 level equal to o r less than
Tension o r Te nsion or comprcssiolll in pans joined parallel matc hing filler metal is
Compression 1011 weld need no t be considered in design of permitted.
J>ar~tI!ellO weld axis welds ' the
Fur nmtch ing, weld IIlclal sce I\WS 1)1 . 1, Secliun JJ..
Fillc r mel;11 with;o ~!rcnglh kl'd nile .~ I ren<,t h kwl
grc;l1er 11i:1Il m;IlChi11~ is p-ermined.
Filler metals wilh ;1 ~u<: nglh !cl'\!! h:.~s lhan tll;uclti ng may be u~cd fo r groo",.. w,-Ids bc!wecn the webs and fI;!lIgc s ur buill-Up sections tt,II1SICITilig shcar loads. ~\r
j' . . \\'h('n~ high r<:s!raim is a concern. In thc~c applieatitln~. the weld joinl sh;tli IX' det,\iletl and till', weld shall be designed lIsing lhe lhickn~ ss of lh~ malerial as
i lhroat. ¢:=o.SQ n", I.SS :Llld O.60FE:XX liS the nO!ninal strcng,lh.
~~; ~:':;:,~:;::~;:,,:":~',;I';i·:O::" :i:sii,~o;n.~ of 510.2.4(,1) are pennillcd ]llOvided the Ilcforma\ion c(llllr~\ihi ]i l yoI' the I':lr;j)us weld clclllenls is ennsidCf("1. ,\llcmalivc1y. Scctions 510.2A(b)
~. Iii 510.2.4(:1) tha i prO\'idc fur deformation compat ibil ity.
'- .
5·88 CH APTER 5 • Steel and ~I/leta!s
:~~
M24
I :~!
205
I ~~~
257
I Description of Fasteners
Stress, l4~1I' Con nections. l~:,v'
MPa MPa
M27 267 A107 boll~ 310 [allt>1 165 tbl!cll fl
In sl ip-critical con nections in w hich the d irec ti on of k}(lding Ove rs ized holes arc perm itt ed in any o r all pl ies of slip-
is toward a n edge of a connected parI, adequate ava il able cri ti cal con ncct ions, but they sh,,11 Ilot be used in bearing-
bearing strength shall be provided based upon the applicable type connections . Hardened washers shall be installed over
req uirements of Secl ion 5 10.3. 10. overs ized holes in an Oll ter ply.
S hort-sl otted hole." are pcnni tted in any or all p lies of slip-
V\' hcn bolt requirem ents cannot be provided by ASTM A325
critical or bearing-type conn ections . The slots arc permitted
lIn ei A325M, FI 852, or A4 90 anel A490M bolts because o j'
witho ut rega rd to d irect ion o f loading in s lip-criti ca l
J'l 'quiremcn ts for lengths exceeding 12 diameters or diameters
connectio ns, but the length shall be norm;ll to the direct ion
exceeding 38 1m}). bolts or threaded rods conforming to
of the load in bearing-lype connectiOns. Vvashers shall be
AST M A354 Gr. BC, A354 Gr. BD, or A449 arc perllli lled
insta ll ed over Sh0l1-slo tled holes in an ouler ply; when high-
to be used in acco rdance with the provisions for lhrci.ldcd
strength bolts are used, such washers shull be luU'<lcned.
roels in Table 510.3.2.
Long-slott ed hol c!-i arc permitted in only one of th e
W he n AS TM A3 54 G r. BC, A3 54 Gr. BD. or A449 bo its
con nected parts of e ithe r a slip-crilical or bearing-typc
a nd th readed rods arc ll sed in slip-cri tical co nnections, the
connection at an indivi dual raying surface. Long-slolled holes
bolt geometry including the head and llut(S) shall be equal
are permitted w itham regard lO direction of loading in slip-
La or (if large r in diameter) proportional to that prov ided by
critical connecti o ns, but shall be normal to the di rect ion of
AST M A325 and A325M, or ASTM A490 a nd A490M
load in bearing-type connecti ons. W here long-sloHcd holes
bolts. Installati on shaH comply with all appli cab le
arc llsed in an outer ply, plate washers, or a contlnllolls bar
requirement s of' the RCSC Specification with modilicatioll s as
w ith standard ho les, havin g a si ze suffi cient to compl etely
requ ired for the increased d ia me ter andl OJ' length to provide
cover t he slot afte r installati on, shall be provi ded. 1n hi gh-
the design pretension.
strength bolted connections, sllch plate washers or continuous
bars shall be noLless than 8 mm th ick and shall be of SU11cturai
510.3.2. Size 'Illd Use ofl-loles grade mate ri al, but need not be hardened. If hardened washers
T he ma ximum sizes o f ho les for bo il s are given ill T a bl e arc required for use of hi gh··strength bolts, the harde ned
5! 0.3.3 , except that larger holes , required for tolerance on washers shall be pl aced over tile outer surface of the pl ate
location of anchor rods in concrete foullu at ioIlS, ~l l'e penniucd washer or bar.
in columll b;'ls e details.
510.3.3 Minimum Spacing
The di sta nce be Lween centers of stand ard , oversized , o r
slotted ho les , shall no t be less than 2 2f:, times the nomi nal
diameter, d, of the fastener; a distance of 3d is preferred .
Hole Dimens ions
510.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance
13,111
S!;lIldanl
O;alU~l.:'r
(DI;t )
Owrsi~.o.: Sho n -Slot L(llI~ ·S !"t The distance from the center of i.\ s ta nda rd ho le to an
(Dia) (Width x l..englll) ( Width xLcngth) edge o f a co nn ected part in a ny d irection sh all not be less
th an eit her the <lpp licabJ c value from Table 5J 0 .3.4, or as
required in Section 5 J 0.3 . 1O. The di stance from the ce nter
M1 6 IS 20 8).; 22 18 x 40
o f' an ove rsized or slotted hole to all edge of a conll ected
M20 22 24 22x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 ;( 55 part shall be no t less tha n that requi red for a stHllda rd hole to
M24 27 30 27 x32 27 x 60 an edge of a con nected part plus the <.lpplic.:1ble increment
M27 30 35 30 xl? 30 x 67 C2 from Table 5 10 .3.5.
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
?:M36 d+3 d+8 (i/+3)x(d+ 10) (,/ + 3}.\' 2.5 (/
User~~~~: '['h~ edg~. 9istaIl~es< in T,~l>les . ~ JO.~.4 me
_ . -- minil!ju,rn ""e,dg~ " ".djstal~~es : ,:,' bas~ .·on stal1~ard fa~ric~,tion
Standard holes or short-slott ed holes transverse to the Pf"J.cticcs and . workmanship tolerances. The appropdate
direct ion of the load shall be provided in accordance wilh provi sions of S eclions 510.3.1 0 and 5 J0.4 muSI be
the provisions of this specification, unless oversized holes, sa ti sfi ed .
ShOIl-sloned holes parallel to the load or 10ng-sloHed holes
are appro ved by th e e ngin eer-of-record. Fin ger shims up to
6 mIn are permitted in slip-c ritical connection s designed on
the bas is o f standard holes w ith out redu cin g the nomin al
shear strength of the faste ner to that specifi ed for slo Lted
holes.
l\lationa l Structu ral Cod e of tile P hili ppines (-3(11 Editio n Vo lume 1
[;.·gO GHAPTEFl S . Steel and Metals
510.3 .5 Maximulll Spacing a nd Edge Distauce ;\;:",;,.; :::,';' '.. ':Tjbjt51013~5,' ',' ", '.
The IIl<lXilll1l1ll dislilnce from the cC lllcr of ilny boll or rivet ':'vid~isilf;EdglDJ~lliri'~~Iiicr~riieilt Ci,:itiJh:~'"
(0 Ihc IIcarcsl edge of pallS in conlact shall he 12 limes thc
thickness of lhe conncctcd pall um.ler considcrati on. but shall Slo((ed Holes
-.-----~---
lUll exceed J 50 mill . The Jongiludinal spaci ng of faslcners
bCIWCCIl clcmenls in cominllous COll\;lct consisting or .1 pIcHe Nominal I Al ug Axis Pcq ){'lUlkulilr I AlII~ Axis
l)iamctcr of I'andle! (0
and a shape or two plates shall be as follows: wEdl:1!
Fastener Oye rslzed Edge
(mm)
Holes
ShUr1 Slots LOllf,
Sims . 1
<22 3
2' 3 O.75d 0
>27
1. IWhcn !cnVlh of ~ t lJl is bs tliall n~.timutll aHI)W"~bt~ (see Tallie ~IO. 3.JMJ. C2 hi
A. Rolled Edges of pcnniucd to be rcduC'c-U by olle·h:oIr the tl iffercnc\! txll"."Cen til ... maximulll :mtl
AI Sheared Platc,o;. :K'lu.l1 ~IOI !C'flg!hs.
Boll Dj.ullcle!" (mill) Shapes or Bars. or
Edges
Thermally Cut Edges
1 I~I
I
! '6
20
28
3'
22
26
I. For painted membe rs or unpainted mc mbers not subject In
corrosion, Ihe spacing shnl! nOl exceed 24 limes 111<:.
thickncss of thc thinncr plate 01' 305 III Ill.
22 38 hll 28
2' 42141 30 2. For unpainted members of weathering steet subject III
27 '8 3' atmospheric corrosion. the spacing shall lIot exceed l--i
30 52 38 limes the th ickness of thc Ihilmer platc or 180 mm .
36 6< '6
Over 36 1.75d I.2sd
5JO.3.6 Tension and Shear Strength of Bolts and
Threaded Parts
The des ign tell sion or shear sirength. f/J RII • and the 3110wablc
fal 1,c~~1 ... d~ discttlCti JR permitted 1(1 Ix used pn1\'ided pro\·isiolls 0(
Scchuu :'i IO.1JO. II~ appropri:uc .•1I1! S3li ~l'i ... d.
!bl FOI ovcfsilCd or ~ t(111cd hok:~. sec Tab le 51003.5
tension or shear strength , R,JQof a silug-lightened or
fel All edge distances in 1 111~ co\umn ;"c permitted 10 be ,cducl,:d 3 I1In\ pretcnsioned high-strength bolt or threaded p:u·t shaH he
Ihe hok U ;I! a [)Oin!
where required s lreuglh docs not exceed 2:'i perccill of the m:u.:illlulO Slten&th dctermined according to the limit states of tensile lupturc Hnd
IheciemCn! . shear mpturc as follows:
Idlll,e~c .\IC pcmliltcd 10 be 32 nun ~t the em.1I of bealll eonOC(1ton ~n&lc$ .
sh... ar end plates.
(510.3- 1)
¢=O.7':{LRFQ Q =20CX:ASD)
wl)ere
510.3.7 Combint'd T ensioll and Shl'ar in Ilc.ilring- The design slip resistHl1ce, ¢ R,p and the allowable slip
Type C onn ec ti uns
resistance. R"jQ,shall be detcrm ined for the li mit sl(II C o r
The ilvailablc tensil e strength or <l bolt subjc(lcd 10
com bi ncd tensi o n <lnd shear shall he determ ined according 10 slip as follows:
the lill li t simes of (CI1SiOll aile! shear I1Jpture :L'i f() ll ows:
(5 10.3-4)
(0 I 0.3-2)
For co nn ections .in whi ch prevention or sli p is a
¢ = 0.7 _~LliFlJ se rv iceability limit state
~ -n./~1I
l "m::::: 1.31-,,( -'- . /'.. :$; Fm. (ASl)
. 'J
where
1'",. JI ;; mea n slip coeffi cient for Class A or B surfaces,
~II =nominal (cnsile stress fro m Ta hlc 5 10.3.2 , M Pa
as appli cable . or as es tablished by tests
;; 0.35 fo r Class A su rfaces (unpai nted clean mil l
Fm· = no mi n<l l shea r s tress fro m T able 5 10.3.2, MP a scale sleel surfaces or sUlfaccs wit h Class A
I .. =the req uired s hear stress, MPa coalings on bl a<;I-eJeaned steel and hot-dipped
galvanized and ro ughened surfaces)
= 0.50 for Class B surfaces (unpainted bl as t-
Thc available sh ear stress of the fastener shall equal or cxceed cleaned steel surfaces or surfaces with Class B
the req uired shear s trength pe r unit Jrea,F, coatings on blast-cleaned steel)
Du ;:: J .13; a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the
User Note: Note that when the req uired stress,f. in either mean installed bolt pretension to lhe specified
shear o r tcnsion. is less than or equal to 20 percent of the minimum boh pretension. The use o r other va lues
corresponding availab le stress, the effects of combined may be approved by the engineer-of- record.
stress need not be invest iga ted. Al so note th al Equations
5 10.3-3a and 51 0.3, 3b can be rewritten so as to find a
11.\( = hole fac tor determined as follows:
nomina l shear stress, F~\" as a fu nction of the required (II) For standard size holes h,,_= I .00
[ensile stress.[,.. (b) For ovcrsizcd and
short-slollcd holes h,,, =0.85
510.3.8 High-Strength !lolls in Slip- C riti cal
(e) For long-sloHed ho lcs h". =0.70
Connections
Nl ::;: number o f slip planes
High-s trength bolts in sli p-c riti cal connections arc permitted Til ::;: minimum fastener tension given in Table
to be designed to prevent slip either as a serviceability limit 510.3.1, kN
slat e or at the required stre ngth limit slate, nlC
connection
mu st also oc checked for shear strength in Hccordancc with User Note: TIlere are special cases where, with oversize .
Sectio ns 510. 3.6 and 5 ! 0.3.7 and bea ring stre ngth in holes and slots parallel to the load, the movement possible
accordance with Sec tions 510.3. 1 and 5 10.3.10. due to connection slip cou ld cause a structural fai lure.
Resistance and safcty faclors arc provided for connccti ons
Slip-cri tical connecti ons shall be designed as follows. unless where slip is prevented unt il the req uired strength load is
otherwise des ignated hy the cnginecr- of- record. Connections reached.
with stJndard hol es or slots transverse to the direction o r rile
load shall be de sign ed ror slil) as a scrvicc:lbility limit Design loads are used for either design method . and all
state, Connections with oversized holes or slots p"rallel 10 connections must be checked for stre ngth as beanng·rype
Ihe directio n of the load shall be designed to prcvclll slip;,1t connections.
the rcquired strength level.
U1
Nation al Structural Code of the Philippines G Edi tion Vol ume 1
5·92 CHAPTEH:>· Steel and MClals
510.3.9 Co mbined Tension and ShcH!' in Slip .. C riti cal Fu = specified mini m um ten sil e strength of the
ConnecOo ll s connec ted materia l, MP"
When a slip·critica! connection is subjected to ;;111 applied Le = clem' di stance. in Ihc direction of the force,
ten sio n that reduces Ihe nct d<llllping forl:c , the available between the edge of the hule and th e edge of
slip res isl<lllcc per bolt, from Section 5JO . 3. 8 ~ shall he th e .uljacelll hole or edge o f the mat erial.
mill
ll1ulliplied by the factor, k.r , as foll ows:
= thi ckness of cOllllec ted material. mill
(510.3·5a)
For co nnections, the beating resistance shall be taken as the
sum of the bearing rc~i s lan c cs of the i ndi vidual bolts.
C. For a bolt in a connection with long-s loHed holes with 2. For tensile nlplurc of connecting e le me nts:
the SIOI [>Clpcndicular to the direclio n of force:
(510.3·60)
¢=O.7S(LRFD, Q=200(ASq
d. For connections made using bolts that pass compll~ lcly
through an unstiffencd box member or HSS, see Section where
510.7 and Equation 510.7·l, At' = effective net area as defined in Section 50~. :; 3,
where 111m 2; for bolted splice plat es ,
A, = A" 5, 0.85A,
d = 1l01!linal holt diameter, mm
510.4.2 Strength of Elements in Shear for KUr > 25 the provisions of Sectio n 505 apply,
The ilvaililhlc ~hc<lr yield strenglh of affec ted and connecting
d~~ lllcnt s in shear shall be the lower value obtained according 510.5 Fillers
III the limi! stales uf sl1ear yielding and shear IlJplurc : In welded consllllction. any filler 6 mill or more in thickness
J. For sheilI' yielding of the clement: shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate and shall be
welded to the part 011 which il is Ijtt ~d with sufficient weld 10
(5104·3) l rall~mit th e splice plate load, applied at the su rfac.:c of the
filler. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be
¢= Loo(umJ Q = 1 .5()(AS~ sunicicllI 10 transmit the splice plate load and shall be long
enough [0 avoid ovcrJotlding the filler along the toe of th e
2, For shear rupture of the clement: weld . Any filler less than 6 111m thick shall have its edges
made nush with the edges of the splice plate and the weld
(5104-4) size shall be the sum of the size necessary 10 caJTY the sp lice
plu s the thickne ss of the filler plate.
¢=O.7S(LRFq
When a bolt th at carries load passes through fillers thai arc
where
equal [0 or less than 6 mm thick, the shear strength shall be
A,iI' == net area subject to shear, mnl. used without reduction. When a bolt that carries load passes
through fillers Ihat arc gretltcr Ihan 6 !Hm thick, one of lhe
510.4.3 Block Shear Strength following requirements shall apply:
Th e available st rength for the limit sta te of block shear I. For fillers that are equal to or less than 19 mm thick, the
rupture alollg a shea r failure path or path(s} and a shear slrcnglh of the boilS shall be mul1iplied by the
perpendi cul ar tension failure path shall be taken as
factor II - 0.4(1 - 0.2 5)J [S .I.: II - 0.01 54 (1 - 6)JJ.
where I is the total thickness of the fill ers up to ! 9 mm
2. The f,lIcrs shall be extended beyond the joint and the
(5IOA·5 ) filler extension shall be secured with enough bolts to
unifomll y distribute the total force in the connected
Q=2.00(ASq element over the combined cross section of the connected
clement and the fill ers;
where
A g ., = gross area subject (Q shear, 111m2 3. The size of the joint shall be increased to
accomlllodate a number of bolts thai is eq ui valent to
Am ::::- nci aren subject to tension. mm2 lhe lOla I number required in (2) above; or
Am' :;:nct area subject to shear, mm ] 4, The joint shall be designed to prevent sli p at required
strength Icvels in accordance with Section 5 10,3,8.
Wh ere thc tension stress is uniform, Ub.t == J: where the 510.6 Splices
tension stress is non uniform, V')s :;:0,5. Groove~welded s plices in plate girders and beams shall
develop the nomi nal strength of the smaller spliced section.
User Note: The cases where Ubs must be taken equal to Other lypes of splices in eros-ii sections of plate girders and
beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at the
0.5.
point of the splice.
510.4.4 Strength of Elements in Compression
510.7 Bearing Strength
The ava il able strength of connectin g clements in
compression for the limit stale., of yie ldillg and buckling The design bearing st rength, ¢ R11 • ilnd the allowable
sll<lll be determined"as follows. bearing strength, R/I In,of surfaces in contac t shall be
determined for the limit stale of bearing (local compressive
For KUr $25 yielding) as foll o ws:
I. For mi lled SUrf'ICCS, pins in reamed, drilled. or hored 5 10.9 AndlOr Rods Hnd Embedments
h()les.lmd ends offiued bearing stiffeners: Anchor rod s shall be designed 10 provide Ihe rClJui l'cd
resi stance to loads on the. completed strucHlrc al the base Dr
(510.7·1) columns including the !let tensile components of illly bendin g
momenl Ilwl Illay rcsu l1 from load combinations s lipuJ;llcd in
where
Section 502 .2. The anchor rods shall be de.... ignc-d in
= specified minimum yield stress, MP,I accordance wI,h the requirements for thread ed parts in
:; projected bearing area, Illln 2 TaI1I 0 510.3.2.
2. For expansion rollers and rockers Larger oversized ;\nd slotled holes arc permitted in base
plates when adequ<l1c bearing is provided for the nU L by
n. fd S635mm
using slruclHra l or plate washers to bridge the ho le.
(5 10.7·2)
User Note: The r~e rl11 i tted ho le s izes and corresponding
washe r dime nsions are given in the AlSC Manual of Steel
b. If d > 25 635 min
Construction
(SI ; Rn = 302(F) -90Y,1/20) (51O.7·}M)
W hen horizon tnl forces nrc prcsclH at column bases, th ese
(S IO.7.}) rorces should, where possible, be resis ted by bearing agai nst
concrete eleme nts or by shear frict ion between the column
where
base plate and the foundation. Whcn anchor rods <-I re (~ s igncd
d ;: d iameter, 111m to res ist horizontal force th e base plate hole size, the anchor
J = length of bearing, n11ll rod setting toleran ce, a nd th e horizo lll al movement of the
column shall be conside red in th e des ign.
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
Proper provision shall be made to transfer th e co lumn loa ds User Note: See Chapter 4 for embedme nt design and for
and mome nt s to the fOOlings and fou ndati ons. shear friction design. See OS HA for special erection
requirements for anchor rods.
In Ih e absence of code regulations. the design bearin g
strength , fA PI" and the allowa bl e bearing strengt h, 510.10 Flanges and Weos with Co ncentrated Forces
This sec ti on applies to sing le·a nd double-
P" l ilc ,for the limit state of concrele cru shing arc
c oncentrated force app lied norma l to the fl ange(s) of
penni tl ed 10 be taken ilS fo llows: wide flange sect ions a nd simi lar built -up shapes. A single-
concentrated force can he ei the r tensi le or compressive .
<1>, = 0.60 (u mi .Q, = 2S(ASD) Double-concentrated forccs are o nc tensi le and one
compressive and form a couple on the same side of the
The nomi nal bearing strength, PI" is de termined as follows: loaded member.
I. On the full area of a concrete support : When the required strength exceeds the available strength as
dctennined for the limit states listed in this section, stiffener.-;
Pp =O.85f~A, (510.8· 1) andlor doublers shall be provided and sh~ll be sized for Iht
difference between the required strength and the avai lahlc
2. On less than th e full area of a conc rete SUPPOI': strength for the appl icable limit state. Stiffeners shall also lll(;t1.
the design requirements ill Section 5 10. 10.8. Doublers ~; h: .i i
(510.8·2)
also mce{ the des ign requ irement in Scc li o n 510. 10 .9.
where
User Note: See Appendix A-6.3 for requirements fo r the
A, ;: area of sleel concentrica ll y bearing 0 11 a ends o f cantilever members.
2
concrete su pport, rnm
A2 ;;; maximum area of the portion of the suppol1ing Stiffeners arc required at unframed e nds or
beams ill
surface that is geometrically similar 10 and accordance will I the requirclnents of Seelioll 510.10.7.
co nce ntric wi th the loaded area, mm 2
510.10.1 Flange Local Bendin g
Thi s section appli es to ten sit e sin gle-co ncentrated forces
and the tensile compone nt of doub le-conce nt rated forces.
The design strength, ¢ Nn , and the allowable strength, I". ::::; web thickness, 111m
R,)r.2.f'or the limit state of flange local bending shall be When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners OJ' a doubler
determined as follows: plate shall be provided.
¢=IOO(LliFlJ Q=150(AS~
where
k = distance from ouler face of the flange to the web
toe of the fillet, mm
. FyII' = specified minimum yield stress of the web,
MPa
N = length of bearing (not less than k for end beam
reactions), mm
=-C,I~.f1 [0.4(hll",)']
b. For NIt! > 0.2
II" -2- -- (5 10. I 0-
h Il bl
7)
b. por, (h/ I,.: XI/b I» 1.7. the limit stille of web sidesway
(5 1O. 10-5b) buckling does not apply.
where
When the required strength of the web ex.ceeds the ,wailable
d = overall depth of the member, mm strength. local lateral bracing shall be provided at bOlh flanges
If = flange Ihi ck nc~s. mm althe point of application of Ihe concentf3tcd forces.
When required. a transverse stiffener, or pair of transverse In Equations 510.10-6 and 510.10-7, Ihe following
stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending at Icasl one-half Ihe definitions apply:
deplh of Ihe web shall be provided .
hf = nangc widlh, 111111 .
510.10.4 Web Sidesway Buckling C, = 6.62 X 10" MPa when 1.1" <My ( LRFD) or
This Section applies only to compressive singlc-colltcnl nllcd 1.51.1" <My (ASD) al Ihe loealion of the force
forces 'Ipplied to members where relative lateral movemclll = 3.31 x 10' MP. when 1.1" ~ My (LRFD) or
between the loaded compression Oangc and lhe tension I.SMa ?: My (ASD) at th e ioccl1ion of the force
flange is not restrained at the point of application of lhe = clear distance between flan ges less the fillet or
concentrated force . " corner radius for rolled shapcs; distance between
adjacent lines of! asteners or the clear distance
The available strength of the web shall be determined as between l1anges whcn welds arc used for built-
follows: up shapes, 111m .
¢=0.8S(LRFQ Q = 1.76(ASD) = iargestiatcrally unbraced lcngth along either the
flange at the point of load, mm.
If = Oange thi ckness. mill .
The nominal strength , R,p for the limit state of web I •. = web thickness. mm .
sidcsway buckJ ing shall be dClcnnined as follows:
User Note: For detenninalion of adequalc restraint, ref~~1!r
if the compression flange is restrained against rotation: Appendix A-6. -:.;
b. For (II/I .. 'N/b f )> 2.3,lhe limit slale of web sidesway TI1C available strength for the limit slatc of web local buckling
buckling does not apply. shall be detennined as follows:
I. If the compression flange is not restrained against When the pair of concentrated compressive forces [0 be
rotation: resisted is applied at a distance from the member end (hat is
less Ihan dl2, R" shall be reduced by 50 percenl.
510.10.6 Web I'II/IC I Zone Shear When required. doubler piate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners
This section appli es to double-concentrated forces applied 511<111 be provided withi n the boumhtries the rigid conncction
In one or bo th na ngcs of a member al lhc same locati on. whose webs lie in a common plane.
The ava i l~l bl c strength of the web panel zone for the li mit state
ofshc.u' yielding shall be de termined as foll ows: Sec Section 5 I 0. 10.9 for doubler plale design req uiremen ts.
';
¢ =O.90(LRFLj Q = 1.67 (A SI~ 510,10,7 Unframed Ends of Hearns and Girders
At unframed ends of beams and girders not otherwise
The Ilomina! strength, R /I shall be determined as follows: restrained aga inst rotati on about th eir longitudinal axes, a
I. When lh (~ '.! ffcCI o f panel-zone deformat ion on frame pai r of tnlllsversc st iffeners. ex tend ing the fuJI depth of the
sf{Jbilil), i.\' not consider ed ill rhe allaly.\';s: web, shall be provided,
<.1. For Pr S O.4 P... 510,10.8 Add itional Stiffener Requirements for
ConcentraCed Forces
R" = O.60F,.dJ '" (5 10 10-9) Stiffeners required to rcsist tensile conccntrated forces shall
be designcU in accordan ce with th e requirements of Section
b. Fo r p , > O.4Pr 504 and welded to the loaded flange and the web. The welds
10 the flange shall be sized for the difference between the
required strength and avail ablc limit stale strength. The
(510.1- 10)
sti ffe ner to web welds shall be sized to transfer to the web
the algebraic difference in tensi le force at the ends of the
J. When frame stability, incl uding pl astic panel-zone stiffener.
defonnation. is considered in the anal ys is:
Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces
a. For p, :.sO. 75Pr shall be designed in accordance with the requirements in
Secti ons 505,6 .2 and 5 10.4,4 and shall either bear on or be
welded to the loaded fl ange and welded to the web. The
we lds 10 the nange shal l be sized for the difference between
the required strcngth and the applicable li mit stale strength.
(510_10- 11 ) The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer to the web the
b . Fo r p , > 0_ 75P, algebraic difference in compression fo rce at (he ends of the
stiffener. For fitted bearing stiffeners. sec Section 5 10.7.
plate del ivering the concclllfiucd load, and grea ter tlwn or
equal 10 the width divided by 15 .
3. Transverse stiffeners shall extend it mi nimul1I o f olle-
hal f the dept h of the member except as required in
5 10.10.5 and 5 10.10.7. This Section covers me mbe r strength design consider<ltions
perwining 10 connections to HSS IIlclllhers and box SCt~t ion s
510.10.9 Add itio nal Doubler Plate for of unifo rm wall th ic kness. Sec also Sec ti on SIO for
Concentrated Forces ad{lition al requ ire ment s fo r bolt ing to lISS.
Doubler plmes required for compression strength shall be
designed in accordance with Ihe requirement s o f Section The Sec tion is organized as follows:
505.
511.1 Concentrated Forces on )-I SS
Doubler plates required for tensi le strenglh shall be designed 511.2 I-ISS-to- HSS Tru ss Connections
in accordance with the requirements of Section 504 . 5 11.3 HSS-Io-HSS Moment Connections
Doubl er plates required for shear strength (see Section
510.10.6) shall be design ed in accord ance ' with the
pro vis io ns of Section 507.
SIl.l Concentrated Forces on IlSS
In additi on, doubler plates shall comply wi th the fo ll owi ng
c riteria: 511. 1.1 Definitions of Parameters
I. The thickness and extent of the doubl er plate s11<111 I! :::: overall width o f rcct<ln gular IISS member,
provide the additionalmalerial necessary to equal or measured 90 degrcc$ to the phlllc of the
exceed the $(rength requirements . connect ion, 111111
Bp :;:: width of plate, measured 90 degrees to the plane
2. 111e doubler plate shall be welded to devel op the
of the connec li on , I11Ill
proporti on of the lotal force transmitted to the doubler J) = outside diameter of round HSS member, mill
plate.
Fy =specifi ed minimum yie ld Slress of HSS
member material , MPa
Fyp = specified min imulll yie ld stress of plate, MPa
PI( = speci fied minimum tensi le strength of HSS
material , MPa
H = overa ll height of rectangular I-lSS member,
measured in the pla ne of the connection, mm
N :::: bearing le ngth o f the load. measured parallel
10 the axis of the HSS member, (or measu red
across the width of the HSS in the case of loaded
cap plates). mm
:::: design waJl thickness of HSS member. mOl
Ip =thi cknc:cis of plate. mm
511.1.2 L imits of Appl icability
'OlC cri tcria hcrcin are applicab le onl y when the connecl::l';
configuration is within the following limi ts of applicah;l i:::
sifeng lh, Rilln, fOf Ihe limit siale of local yielding shall be This limit state need 110 \ be chec ked unless the chord
dClermined as follows : member and brall ch member (connecting clement) have
Ih e same widlh (P = 1.0).
Rn = Fy l' 15.5,{ 1 - 0.8IJJpID)JQf (5 11.1 -1)
c. l . 1 For the limit state of sidewall loca l yielding.
¢ = 0.90 (LRFD) f} = 1.67 (ASD)
where Qj is given by Equation 5 11. 2 ~ I. R" = 2F,.r[5k + N] (511.l-4)
Additional limits of app li cability arc l' = 1.0 (LRFD) f} = 1.50 (AS)))
i. 0.2 < 8p1V "5 1.0 where
2. Dlr S 50 for T·connccl ions and DII ~ 40 for cross-
co nnections k = o Ulsidc comer radius of Ihe HSS. which is
pcrmitlcd to be taken as ! .51 if unknown , mill
Sl1.1.3b Criteria for Rectangular HSS
c. I .2 For the limit stat e of sidewall local crippling, in T-
When a concen tratcd force is distributed transversely to (he
connections,
axis of Ihe HSS Ihe design slrength, ¢Rn, and Ihe allowable
sire nglh, RnlfJ., shall be the lowest value according to [he
limit states of local yielding due to unevcn load dis lrib uti on,
RII =1.612[1 + 3N/(H - 3 1)] (EFy )o"Qf
shear yielding (punc hing) a nd sidewall strength. (5 11.1-5)
Additional Ii mils of applicability are
¢= 0.75 (LRFD) f} = 2.0 (ASD)
I. 0 .25 < 8,,18 '" 1.0 where Qf is given by Equation 5 1 1.2~lO.
2. 8/1 for Ihe loaded HSS wall '" 35 c.I.3 ror the Iimil slate of sidewa ll local buckling in cross·
It. For the limit Slate o f locaJ yielding due 10 uneven load connections,
distribution in the loaded plate,
1111 = 14813,{H - 3r)] (EFy )05Qf (5 11.1-6)
(51 1. 1-2)
l' = 0.90 (LRFD) n = 1.67 (ASD)
¢ = 0 .95 (LRFD) Q = 1.58 (ASD) where QJ is given by Equati on 511.2-10.
h. For Ih e limit state of shear yielding (punching),
a long the axis of the HSS a! the center of the HSS diillllc tcr of a ncctangular HSS with a C "p Plat e.
or widlh , ilnd also acl s perpendicular to Ihe axis directi o n of When (l COIlCClllnllCd force aCls on the end of iI ca pped HSS,
th e i-ISS (or has a co mponent perpendicu lar to the. axis and th e force is in the direction of thc HSS axis. the des ign
dircr;ti'}[I o r Ihe HSS), the design slrength, IfJR'I, ,Iud the strengt h, ¢JRn, and the al lowa ble strengt h. Rl1/n, 511 •.11 b e
allowable stre ngth, RIlIn, perpendicl.;J(If to thc IISS axis dctermined for lhe limi t states o r wall local yielding (due to
shall be dClcrmincd fo r Ihe limit state of
c hord piaslificlHioli tcnsile or comprcss ive fo rces) an d wa ll locn l crippling (du e
as follows . to compressive forces on ly), wi th consideration for shear
lag, as follows.
511.1.4. Crilerion for Round HSS
An additional limit o f applicability is:
DII S 50 fo r T·co nnectiolls and 0 11 .s 40 fo r cross-
connec tio ns
Rn = 5.51')' n( I + O.25NID)Q; (5 11 . 1-8) If (SIp + N) ?: B, the ava ilable Slrength of the I-lSS is
co mputed by summing th e contribulion s of all four HSS
tF 0.90 (LRFD) n = 1.67 (ASD) walls.
where Q/ is given by Equation 511.2-1.
If (SIp + N) < /3, th e available strength of Ihe HSS is
co mputcd by summing (he co ntributions of thc two walls
SI!.1.4b Criterion for Rectangul ar HSS
into which the load is di stributed.
An I1ddilional limit of applicability is :
8/1 for the loaded HSS wall" 40 a. For the limit stale o r wall local yielding, ror one wall.
where
Qf= ( I - U2)o ,
V ·is given by Equalion 511.2-12 (511.1 -12)
ifF' 0.75 (LRFD) n =2.00 (ASD)
511.1.5 Concenlrated Force Distributed
Longitudinally at the Center of Ihe HSS
Width, and Acting Parallel to the H SS Axis
When it conce ntrated rorce is di stributed 10 ngilUdin a il y
alon g the axis of a rectangular HSS, and a lso aCls parallel
bUI eccentric to the ax is direc ti on of the member, the
connection shall be verified as fo]lows:
Fyptp ~ Ful (5 11.1 -10)
2. When the punching load (Pr sin8) in a branch member E ;:;cccenlricity in a truss connection , posili ve being
is essentially equilibraled (wi lhin 20 percenl ) by load s away from Ih e branches, mm
in other branch member(s) on the same side of the Fy ;:; specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
connection, the connection shall be classified as a K- member matcrial , MPa
co nnection_ The relevant gap is between lhe pJimClry I'rb ;:; specified min imu m yie ld stress of HSS branch
branch members whose load s equilibrate. An N- mcmber mat eri al. MPa
connectio n can be considered as a lype of K - Fu ;:; specified minimum (en sile st rength of HSS
connec tio n. material, MPa
g ;:; gap between lUes of branch members in a ga pped
Us~r Noti'! .kK.~iii)~Ii\)fi\YiIh 'oii~'brancIi ¢!Jle.ri!ji.¢ular K-conncctioll, neglecting the: welds , mm
to liie'cbord,is often Cl!liOd .anN-'comi.,qUoniY ;,:' ';; 'J'., , 1·/ = overa ll height of rectangular HSS main member,
measured ill the plane of thc co nnecti on, mill
3. When the punching load CPr sill fJ) is transmitted lib == overall hei ght of rectangular HSS branc h
through the chord member and is equilibrated by member, measured in the plane of the
branch member(s) 011 the opposite side, the connection connection, mm
shall be classified as a cross-connection. , ;:; design wall thickness of HSS main member, mm
4. When a conn ection has more than two primary branch Ib ;:; design wall thickness of HSS branch member,
members or branch me mbers in more than one plane, mill
the co nn ec ti on sha ll be c lassified as a general or f3 ::: the width rat io; th e ratio of branch diameter to
Inulliplanar connection. c hord di ameter =- DblD (or rou nd HSS; the ratio
of overall branch width to chord widlh ;:; Bbl B
When branch members tran smit part of their lo ad as K - for rectangular HSS
connections and pan o f their load as T-, Y -, or cross- ;:; the effect ive width i'Cilio; lhe Slim of the
connecti ons, the nontinaI strength shall be de termined by perimeters of the two branch members in a K·
interpolatio n all the proponi on of eac h in total. connection divided by eight limes the chord
width
For the purposes of thi s Specification, the cen terJincs of r :;::: the c hord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half
branch me mbers and chord members shall lie in a co mmon the diameter 10 the 'wall thickness = DI2I [o r
plane. Rectangular HSS conneclions are furth er limited to round HSS; the ratio o[ one·hal[ the width to
have all members oriented with walls parall e l to the plane. wall thickness:;::: Bnl for rec tangular HSS
For trusses that are made wi th HSS that are connected by '1 = the load length parameter. applicable only to
welding branch members 10 chord me mbers, eccentricities rectangular IISS; Ihe ralio of Ihe lenglh of
w ithin the limits of applicability are p.ermitted wi th o ut contact of the branc h with the chord in the plane
consideration <;>f th e re sultin g moments for the design of the of the connection to the chord width ;:; NIB.
con necti on. where N:: I1blsi nO
o =- acute .angle bet ween the branc h and c hord
(degrees)
S = lhe gnp ratio; the rafi o of th e gap between fil e
bran chcs o f a gapped K connection to lhe width
of Ihe chord = 8/B for rectan gular HSS
511 .2.2 C rileria for Round HSS 3. Tension branch wall slenderness: mti o of diameter to
The in teraction of stress due to chord member forces and willi th ick ness less than or equa l to 50
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated 4. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio o f diameter
through the chord-s tress in teraC li on parameter Q/. to wall thickness less th an or equal to O.OSEIFy
Vlhc n the chord is in tension, 5. Width nuio: 0.2 < DhID:::: 1.0 in general. and 0.4 ~
DblD ~ 1.0 for gapped K-connections
0 =I 6. If a gap connccti on: g grcalcr thall or equal (0 the sum
When the chord is in compression, of the branch wall thi ck nesses
7. If an overlap connecti on: 25%:5 Ov ~ 100%, where 0"
0= 1.0 - 0.3U (J + U) (511.2-1) = (qlp)xlOO%. P is Ihe projected length of lhe
where U is the utilization ratio given by overlappi ng branch on the chord; q is Ihe overlap length
measured along the con necting face of the cho rd
V= IP,IA,F~ + M,ISF,I (51 1.2-2) beneath the two branches. For overl ap con nect ions, the
larger (or if equal diameter, the thicke r) branch is a
where
'·th ru member" connected direct ly to the chord.
P, = required axial stren gth in chord, N;
8. Branc h thickness ratio for overlap con necti ons:
for K-conncctions, P, is to be determined on the
thic kness of overlappin g branch to be less th an or equal
side of til e j oin I Ihat has the iowercomprcssion
(0 Ihe thickness of the overlapped branch
stress (lower U)
M, =required flexural streng th in chord, N-m m 9. Srrenglh: F,.:s: 360 MPa for chord and branches
Ag = chord gross area, mm 2
10. Ductilily: 1-",.1 F" ~ 0.8
I-", =available stress, MPa
S = chord elasti c section modulus, mm 3
Sll.2.2b Branches with Axial Loads in T·, y ~ an d
Fo r design according 10 Secli on 502.3.3 (LRFD):
Cross·Connections
For T· and y. connections, (he design slrength of the branch
p, = Pu =:. req uired axial strength in chord, using ~Pn, or the allowable strength of the branch, P,,/fl shall be
LRFD load combinations, N the lower value obtaincd according [0 the limit stales o[
chord plastification and shear yielding (punching).
M, ::::: Mu ::::: required flexural strength in chord, using
LRFD load combinations, N·mm I. For the limit Siale of chord ptastificati on in T~ and Y-
Fc = Fy , MP. connections,
!'.sine = 1"./,12.0 + I U3D,/D]Q,Q, For design accord ing to Sec tion 502.3.3 (LRF D):
(51 12-6) P, ;:;:: P II = required axial st rength in chord,using
where J)" refers to the co mpression branch only, <lnd
LRFD load combinations, N
Mr :;; Mu ;;:;; required flexural strength in chord. using
.LRFD load co mbinations, N-nliTI
r. = F.. MPa
(511.2· 7)
For des ign accordi ng to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
P, :;: P" = req uired axial strength in chord, usin g
ASD load combinations, N
In gapped connectiolls, g (meas ufed along the crown of" the
M, :::: Mil :::; required flexural strength in chord, usi ng
chord neglecting we ld dimensions ) is positive. In
ASD load combinations, N-mm
overlapped connections, X is negative and eq uals q.
1', = 0.61', . MPa
For the tension bnwch .
511.2.3~ Limits of Applicability
PI/sinS = (P"si nS) com press ion branch The cri teria herein arc applic ab le only w hen the connection
configuratio n i s within the fo llowi ng limits:
(5 11 2-8)
2. POf the limi t state of shear yielding {punching} in 1. Joint ecce ntricity: -O.S5H $ e 5 0.251-1, wh ere H is the
gapped K-connectioJls, chord depth and e is posi ti ve away from th e branches
!,,, = O. 6Fr mIJ;,1 (I ,. sinG)i2sin 'e] (SI I.2-9) 2. Bntllch angle: e ~ 30 ,
¢ = 0.95 (LRFD) n = 1.58 (ASD) 3. Chord wall slenderness: rati o or overall wall width to
thickness less than or equ al to 35 for gapped K-
S11.2.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS con nectio ns and T·, y . and cross-connections; I e..~s than
or equ al to 30 for overlapped K-connections
The interaction of SU'cst,; due (0 chord member forces and
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated 4 . Te nsion branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall
throu gh the chord-s tress in terac tion parameter Qr. width 10 thickness less than OJ' equal to 35
I. When the chord is in tension, 5. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overa ll
wall widlh 10 Ihi c kness less than or equal 10
Qr= I 1.2S(J::IF r,,)05 and also less than 35 for gapped K-
connections and T ~, Y- and cross·connections; less than
2. When the chord is in comp ression ill T -. )' -, and cross- or cq llalto 1.1 (/'.11;\./))°.5 for ove rlapped K,colln ecliolls
con nections,
6. Width ratio: ratio of overall wall width of branch to
(S II2 · IO) overall wa ll width of chord greater than or equal 10 0.25
3. When the chord is in compression in gapped K- for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped K-conncctions;
con nectills, greater than or equal 10 0,35 for gapped K-connec tiolls
0= I. 3 - 0.4 U!Jl<ffS I (S I1. 2- 11 ) 7. Aspect ratio: 0.5 $ ratio of dcpth to width $ 2.0
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines G Edition Volum e 1
~j J(Jtl C HAPTUi 5 · Sleel and Metals
~. Overlap: 25% ~ u,· $ 100%, where (),. = ('III') x 100%. bmllchcs in compression shall be taken as the lower of the
strcngths for sidewall 10c:1I yiel ding and sidewa ll local
{J i!-i the..: projCl:tco length or the overlapping bmnch on
crippling. For Cf(1s:H;on nccli ons with a branch angle less
the dlOrd ; q i!-i the overlap length measured a long the
than 90 degrees. all additional check fo r c hord sidcwf.l1I
L'onnec ti ng face of the chord beneath the two brallches.
she'lr failure mu st be made ill tteCOrdilllcc wi th Sec ti on
For overlap connections. the larger (or if equal width,
507.5.
the thicker) branch is a "thru member" connected
directly to the chord
This limit state need not be checked unless the chord
9. Branch width ratio for overlap connec tions: ratio of member and branc h member have 'he same width (B = 1.0).
overall wall widt h of overl apping bra nch to ove rall wall
widt h of overlapped branch greater than or eqll"sI to For the limit state of loca l yield ing.
0.75
P "sin9 = 2Fy l[Sk + NI (5 11.2-15)
'0. Branch thic kness ratio for overlap con nec ti ons:
thic kness o f overlapping branc h to be less than o r equld $= 1.00 (LRFD) n= 1.50 (ASD)
to the thic kness of the overlapped branch
where
II . Strengt h: I'~\' S; 360 M Pa for chord and branc hes k = outside comer radius of the I-:I SS, which j~i
permilted to be taken as f .sf if unknown. mm
12. Duc lilil y: 1',.11'" $ 0.8 N = bea ring length or
th e load, ptlrallel to the <lxis of
the HS S lll'lin member, Hbls illO. 11m,
13. Ot her limits apply for specific criteria
a. For the limit stale or sidewa ll 10CHI cri ppling, in T- and
51 1.2.3b Bntnehcs with Axial Loads in '1'-, y- Y-connections,
and Cross· Connections
P" sine = 1.61'[ 1 + 3N I(H - 3t))(EF)· )05 Qf
For T·, Y~, and cross-connections, the design stre ngth of the
brun ch, rpPII, or lhe allowable strength of the bran c h, P,/fl, (511.2-16)
shall be the lowest value obtained accordin g to the limit ¢=0.75 (LRFD) n = 2.00 (ASD)
stales of chord wall piastificati on, shear yi elding
(punching), sidewall strength and local yielding due to b. For the limit state of sidewall local c rippling in cross-
uneve n lo ad distribution. In additi on to the l.imits of connections.
applicability in Seeli on 5 11.2.3a, fJ shall not be less Ihall
0.25.
P" sine = [4 81'/(H - 31))(EF)' )05 Q;
(51 1.2- 17)
I. For the li mit slale of c hord wall plastifi cation.
¢ = 0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)
P"sill O = 1', 1212'1/(1 - fJJ + 4/(1 - fJJ°.lJQJ 4. For the lim it state of loca l yielding due to uneven load
($ 11.2- 13) distribution,
t/J= 1.00 (lRFD) fJ= 1.50 (AS D) P,,= F),blb[2Hb+ 2b<o; - 41b)
This limit'state need not be checked when f3 > 0.85. (5 1 L2·I g)
2. For the limil stale of shear yielding (punching), ¢=0.95 (LRFD) n = I. 58 (ASD)
l'"sinO = 0.61'" 8[2'1+ 2fJw,,) (5 11.2-14) wherc
¢=0.95 (LRFD) fJ= 1.58 (ASD) bro , = I I O/(BII)JI F, II(F" ,lh)]B h ~ B"
(5 11 ) is-')
In Equation 5 11. 2- 14 , the effect ive out s ide punc hing Th is limit state need not be c hecked w hen B< 0.85.
jlillTlmctc r /In,, = Sj31y slm ll not exceed P
Sl1.2.3c Branches wilh Axial Loads in Gapped K -
This lim it state need not be c hecked when f3 > (l - l /y), nor Connections
. For gapped K-co llncc!ions, the design strength oj' !l
when fJ < 0.85 and BII" 10.
branch, ¢P n , or th e allowable streng th of the branch, p" 1/(
3. For the limit sl ate of sidewall strength, [h e available shall be the lowest value obtained according to th<.·
st ren gth for branches in tension shall be take n. as the states of chord wall plaSlificati on, shear yi , idlfJ,l',
available stre ngth for sidewall local yielding. For the limil (pullching), shear yielding and local yielding due to Uil(:yeU
glale of sidewall s(renglh, the available strenglh for
I. lh 11/ ? O. I ; . Y/50 POI" the overla pping bntnch, and for overlap 50P/v ~ 0 ,. <
80% measu red wit h rcspeci 10 the overlapping branch,
2. /hl ? 0.35
P,,::: f<~I'I" fhi [2Hhi - 4t/II + b~m + b..",. J (5 1! .2·25)
). :5 0. 5( I - fl.t!)
For the ove rl apping br'lf)ch. and for overlap 80% :::: 0,. ~
4. Gap : g greater tl1<l0 or equal to the sum of the branch
100% measured with re spect to the overlapping branch,
wa llthicknessc5
(51 1.2·26)
5. Th e smaller fib > 0.63 times the larger 8/,
where
For the li mit state of chord wall plastification ,
b,.", is the effeclive wid lh oflhe branch face welded 10
i'" sinO ~ 1',. t'19.8fJ,IiY'·'JQr (5 11.2.20) the chord.
¢ ~ 0.90 (LRFD) Q ~ 1.67 (ASD) ~ [ I O!(BIt)J[ (1')" ,Y( F,bi I., ) ]Bbi 00 Bb, (51 1.2·27)
is the effective width of the branch face welded (Q
a. foor the limit state of shear yieldi ng (punch in g) , the overlapped brace.
P" sinO ~ 0.6F,. 1 131 211 + fJ + ~"''' ] (5 11.2·2 1) b"",. ~ [ I Of(Bbj !tbi )]I (F""i 110, YC!'~'bi I", )] Bbi :5 Bbi
(5 112·28)
¢~ 0.95 (LRFD) Q ~ 1.'i8 (ASD) lib, ;: :;: overall branch widt h of the overlapping branch ,
111m
In the ,lbovc cqlJ<Hj on, the effective ou tside punching
B /JI ;:: overall branch width of Ihe overlapped branch.
p:lramctcr jl'IJJJ == 5 Ply shall nOI exceed P
mm
Thi s limil Slate need only be checked jf BiJ < (8 - 2t) or the Fy/li 5pccificd minimum yield stress of th e
;:::;:
branch is not square . overlappin g branch material, MPa
FYhi ::: specified minimum yield stress orthe overlapped
~. For the limit stale of shear yielding of the chord in the . branch material, MPa
gap, available strength shall be checked in accordance
If" = overall depth of the overlapping branch. nun
wi th Section 507.5. Thi s limi t Slale need only be
Ib/ ;:: Ihickness of th e overlapping branch, mm
checked if the chord is not square.
114 = thickness of the overlapped br~nc h , mm
b. For th e limit state of local yielding due to un eve n load
distribution, For the overlap ped branch. Pn shall not exceed PII of the
overlapping bra nch. calculated using Equation 511.2-24 ,
i'" ~ F,.blb[2f1" + IJ" + h,,,, - 4th] (511.2· 22) 511.2·25. or 5 11.2·26, as applicable, multip lied by the
¢ ~ 0.95 (LRFD ) factor (A bj Fybj lA b; F yui),
Q ~ 1.58 (ASD)
where where
I
_2(11,,-1.2,,) (8 2
L,.- . + 1,-1 " 11) (5 11.2-32)
510 8 round HSS; Ihe rati o of one-half the width h'
wa ll th ickness = 812, for rectangular HSS
Linc;lr inLCrpoli.llion shall be used 10 dCLcrmine /...,. for va lues
:;:: the load length paramcter. applicable only 10
of a between 50 and 60 degrees. In lieu of the above criteri <l " rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
I
in Equati ons 51 1.2·2910 511.2· 32. olher raLional criteria arc contact of the branch wilh the chord in the plane
pcnnillcd. of the connection 10 the chord width ::; NIB,
where N::; Ht/sine
511.3 HSS-to-HSS MOlllent Connections
o :=: acule angle betwccn the branch and cho; ;;
HSS ·to· HSS moment connec ti ons arc defin ed as (degrees)
conn ections titat co nsist of one or two branch mcmbers that
lire directl y welded to a co ntinuolls chord that passcs 511.3.2 Crileri" fo r Round HSS
through th e connection, with [he branch or branches loaded
The interaction of stress due to chord mcmber forces n.nd
by bending moments.
local branch connection forces shall be incorpormed
through rhe chord -);trcss interaction parameter Qr.
A connecti on shall be classi fi ed
When the chord is in tension.
1. As a T·connection when there is one branch and it is
perpendicular to the chord and as it Y-connection when Qr = 1
there is one br:lnch but nOLperpendic ular to (he chord.
Whcn the chord is in compression ,
2. As a cross-c:onnec tio n wh cnlhcrc is a branch 0 11 eac h
(opposite) side of the chord . Qr= 1.0 - O.JU(1 + U) (51 U "
For the purposes of th is Specification, the centcrlines of the where U is the uti li zati on ratio gi vcn by
branch member(s) and the chord member shall lie ill a
U= IP,IA, F, + M,ISF, I
common plane.
where
511.3.1 Definitions or Param eters
1', :;:: requi red axial strength in chord. N
B :;:: overall width of rectangular HSS main member, M, :::: required Oexural strength in chord. N 111111
measured 90 degrees LO the pl.me of the A, :;:: chord gross area. mill
2
4. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter (P/¢p,) + (M,-iplrf!M,-ip)2 + (M,-oplrjM,-op) " 1.0
to wall thickness less than or equal to O.OSEIFr (511.3-7)
5. Width ratio: 0.2 < DblD" 1.0 where
6. Strength: Fy:5 360 MPa for chord and branches P, ::; PI! =
required axial strength in branch, using
LRFD load combinations, N
7. Ductility: FrlFII:5 0.8 = design strength obtained from Section 51 J .2.2b
:0: required in-plane flexural strength in branch,
511.3.2b Branches wilh In-Plane Bending Moments in using LRFD load combinations, N-l11m
T-, y ~ and Cross-Connections 8M ,I .ip :0: design strength obtained from Section 511.3.2b
I. For the limit state of chord plastification, For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
M"sin8 = 5.39F,.I'Y'·SfJ Db QJ (511.3-3) (P,/(P';fl)) + (M,-ipl(M,,-iplfl))' + (M,-opl(M,,-op/Q)) " 1.0
P,. =. required axial strength in chord, N This limit state need not be checked when f) > 0.85.
M, =. required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
2. For the limit state of sidewal! local yielding,
Ag =. chord gross area, mm 2
Fc =. available stress, MPa M" = O.5F:t(Hld 5,)2 (511.3·12)
S =. chord elastic section modulus, mm 3
¢ = 1.00 (LRFD) (3 = 1.50 (AS D)
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
where
P, Pu required axial strength in chord, using
LRFD load combinations, N F,: ::; I~,. for T~connectio!1s
M, MOl required flexural strength in chord,
F: =. 0.8F,. for cross~c()[Hlections
usingLRFDload combinations, N-mm
F, = F,., MPa This limit state need not be checked when fJ < 0.85.
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD): 3. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven load
distribution,
P,. ::; Pa ;:;;: required axial strength in chord, using M" = F,.b[Zb - (I - b,,,;lB,,)B,,li,,l,,j (511.3·13)
ASD load combinations, N
Mr =. Ma ::; required flexural strength in chord, using ¢= 0.95 (LRFD) (3= 1.58 (ASD)
ASD load combinations, N~mm
F, = 0.6F,., MPa where
rpM".""
= required oUI-of-plane Ilexuml strength in bmllch.
using LRFD load combinations. N-mm
:;: design strength obtained from Secti on 51 1. 3.3<:
This lim it stl.1lc need nOI be checked w hen P> 0.85. For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
2. For the limit s(fttc of sidewall local yieldin g. (Pr /( P"I11» + (M,.ip/(Mn.ipln.) + (Mr.fI,,!(M'H!pln) 5 J.O
M" = F'I(Il-I)(I1/, + 51) (511.3- 16) (511.3-21)
512.2 Camber User Note: For more infonnation on connection sli p, rer··
to tbe RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Usi" g
Where camber is used to achieve proper position and
ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts.
location of the structure, the magnitude. direction and
location of camber shall be specified in the stru ctural
drawings.
SECTION 513 . . requin::IHcllls of SC1.:tioll 5/0. /.6. Beam cope!'. amI wdds
Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part 513.3 Shop Painting
of the splice strength shall have the bearing surfaces of
individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling, sawing, or 513.3.1 General Requirements
othcr suitable means. Shop painting and. surface preparation shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the AISC Code of
513.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Shop
Dimensional tolerances shall be III accordance with the paint is not required unless specified by the contract
AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and documents.
Bridges.
513.3.2 Inaccessible Surfaces
513.2.8 Finish of Column Bases Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop
Column bases and base plates shall be finished in assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if
accordance with the following requirements: required by the design documents.
J. Steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in thickness are
513.3.3 Contact Surfaces
permitted without milling, provided a satisfactory
contact bearing is obtained. Stcel bearing plates over 50 Paint is permitted in bearing-type cOllnections. For slip-
111m but not over 100 BUD in thickness arc permitted to critical cOllnections, the faying surface requirements shall
be straightened by pressing or, if presses arc not be ill accordance with the RCSC Specification for Stnlclural
available, by milling for bearing surfaces (except as Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. Section 3.2.2(b).
noted in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section), to
obtain a satisfactory contact bearing. Steel bearing 513.3.4 Finished Surfaces
plates over 100 111m in thickness shall be milled for Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected again.sl
bearing surfaces (except as noted in subparagraphs 2 corrosion by a rust inhibitive coating that can be removed
and 3 of this section). prior to erection, or which has characteristics that make
removal prior to erection unnecessary.
2. Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and colulllll bases
that are grouted to ensure full bead ng contact 011
foundations need not be milled. 513.3.5 Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds
Unless otherwise specified in the design documents,
3. Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld location shall be
complete-joint penetration groove welds arc provided free of materials that would prevent proper welding or
between the column and the bearing plate. produce objectionable fumes during welding.
ehl y
(A-l-l )
A-1.2 Materials
where
Members undergoing plastic hinging shall have a specified
minimum yield stress not exceeding 450 MPa. E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
r:r :;:: specified minimum yield stress of the type uf
A-1.3 Moment Redistribution steel being used, MPa
h :;:: as defined ill Section 502.4.2, mm
Beams and girders composed of compact sections as
PI! :::: required axial strength in compression, N
defined in Section 502.4 and satisfying the unbraced length
1\ :::: member yield strength, N
requirements of Section A-I.?, including composite
I", ::: web thickness, mm
members. may be proportioned for nine-tenths of the
$" :;:: resistance factor for flexure;::: 0.90
negative moments at points of support, produced by the
gravity loading computed by an elastic analysis, provided 2. For flanges of rectangular box and hollow stnl' !llr~;l
that the maximum positive moment is increased by one- sections of uniform thickness subject to bendi;
tenth of the average negative moments. This reduction is not compression, flange cover plates, and diaphraglll
permitted for moments produced by loading on cantilevers between lines of fasteners or welds
and for design according to Sections A-IA through A-I.S of
this appendix. bit S; O.94JE/F).
where
If the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly
framed to the beam or girder, the one-tenth reduction may b ::: as defined in Section 502.4.2, lllm
be used in propor1ioning the column for combined axial :::as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm
force and flexure, provided that the axial force does not 3. For circular hollow sections in flexure
exceed O.15f,Fy A, for LRFD or O.15f,·A,IQ, for ASD,
DI[ ,; O.04SEIF,·
Continuous beams nOl subjected to <lxial loads ;lIld thill dl) (A - I-Il)
nO( contribute to 1;l!t'ral Slability of framed strut'lU rcs ma),
be des igned based on (I first -order inelastic analysis or it $ = 0.90 (LRFD )
plaslic Il1cchani!; 111 antilysi s. Braced frames and moment
'. fnllllcs may be designed bi.lsed 011 a firs t-order ine l:.\ stk
Design by inelastic analysis i!<O permitted for members that
una lysi s or ;t pl<lslic Il1cch;mislll analysis provided th:tt
stabi li ty and second-order effects arc taken into accoulll . arc co mpact as dcfined in Section 502.4 and as modified in
Section A- 1.4 .
Structures may be designed on the basis of a second-ord er
inelastic ana lys is. For beam-columns, connections and The latcrally unbraced length. 1.)1, of the compression nangc
connected members, the required strengths shall he adjacent to plastic hinge locations shall not exceed Lpd ,
detc rmincd as follows.
determined from a second-order inelas tic analysi s , where
equi li brium is satisfied on the deformed geometry, taking
into accounllhe c hange in stiffness due to yie ldi ng. I. For doubly symmelric and singly symmc tric I-s haped
membe rs wi th the compression nange equal to or la rger
than the len!<O ion n,lJlge loaded in the planc of the web:
A-l.Sa Braced Frames
In brac ed fmflles designed 011 the bas is of inelastic analysis. M £
braces shall be des ig ned to remain clastic under lhe design L"" = IO.1 2+ 0.076(-M' )](F)r, (A-I-7)
2 ,
loads. T he required axial strength for col umns and
com press ion braces sha ll not exceed tj;.. (0. 85 I-~)"A,). where
w he re M! = smaller moment at e nd of un braced length of
beam, N-ffilll
<1>.. =0.90 LRFD) M2 = la rger moment at end o f unbrnccd length of
beam, N-mm
A·l.Sb M oment Fra mes 1) · = radius of gyralion about mi nor axi s. mm(MIIM2)
In mo ment frames designed on the basis of inelast ic is positive when moment s calise reverse
analysis , the required axial strength of columns shall not curv<tlllre and negative for single curvature.
exceed ~(0.75F)"A,).
2. For so lid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams:
where
M E E
L pd =[0.17+0.10(-' )I( - ) r,. ~ O. L O(-)"r
¢c = 0.90 (L1~FD) M, F,. . F,.
(A-I-8)
A-1.6 Columns and Other Compression Members
In addi ti on to th e li mits set in Sections A- I .5.a and A-1.5 .b. 111erc is no li mit on Lb for members with circular or square
the req uired axi al stre ngth of col umns designed on the basls c ross sections or for any beam ben I about its minor axis.
of inelastic a nal ysis shall not exceed the design strength,
cf>cPn, detemuncd according to the provi sions of Section A- 1.8 M e muer s under Co m bin ed F or ces
505.3. When ine lastic analysis is used for symmetric members
subj ec t to bending and axial fo rce. Ihe provisions in Section
Design by inelastic am'lysis is pennitted if the colullln 508. ) appl y. Inelastic analysi s is lI ot permitted for members
slenderness rali o, U r, does not exceed 4.71J £/ Fy • subject 10 torsion and combined torsion, flexure. she..1r
an(Vor axial force.
where
34 ~ =r:::r :: _:
3 2 - - -· ·
=_ -.
3.0 - ---- - -
2.8 _._- ---
This appendix provide!; methods for delCnn ining whether a
roof system has adequate strength and stiffness 10 resi st 2.6· -- - - - .- - ...
pondin g. 2.4 -- .-.. -.... --- ._, ..- .- .
2.2 -
The appendix is organized as follows:
~ 2.0 -~=--j~~-:-t---i::····~-'%:j:: - ··-1£- -:: ~ : ~ ==
:ll
1.8 - _ _ _ . _ - -+ _- .-t -
A-2.1 Simplified Des ign for Ponding
A-2.2 Improved Design for Ponding e~ 16
. _ . - -
where
oiJI 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
504L,L"
, Upper Limit of Flexi/)ilily Cons/ani Cp
C=-_·_--
., 1 Fig. A-2·1. Limiting flex ibiliry coefficienr for rh e primaJ)'
d systems.
0.8F, - 10
V,,=( 10 ) (A-2-3)
3 ~
32 ~
-- - -
I - r~! =~~ :J
-
=
- ---
_~. r=~Y. - ':1
3.0 This appcndix applies 10 members and COllllcctiollS sllbjecI
to high cycle loading within the clasti c range of stresses of
frequcncy ,md magnitude sunil' jelll (0 initiate cracking and
2.
progressive. failure, whi ch defines the limit slate o f fatigue .
2-1§li~I?1~Iiittll
2.2
1-""-'-'
!} 2.0 - -
'1_. .._ "
The lolppendix is organized as roll ows:
j ' .8 _. - - A·3 .1
A· 3.2
General
Calculation of Maximum Stresses and
... 1.6
,~
¥, 1.-/
A·3.3
Stress Ranges
Design Stress Range
1.2 A· 3,4 Bolts and Threaded P ailS
1.0 A·3.5 Special Fabrication and Erecti on
0 .• Requirements
O.
A·3,\ General
04 --
The provisions of this Appendix apply to stresses calculated
0.2
on the basis of service loads. Thc maximum permitted slress
00 0. 1 02 0.3 0.-1 0 .5 06 0 .7 due 10 unfaclOre:d loads is O.66Fy.
Upper Limit of FlexilJilty Consr8ri Cs
Stress range is defined as the magnitude of th e change in
Fig. A -2-2. Lilllilitlg fleXibility (:oc/ficieru for rile secolldtll), stress due to the application or removal of the service live
s),stems. load. In the case of a stress reversal, the slrc.."is range shall be
co mputed as the nu merical sum of maximum repeated
For roof framing consisting of a series of equally spaced tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of
wall-bearing beams, the stiffness shall be evaluated as maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at the
fo llows. The beams are considered as secondary members poi nt of probable crack initiati on.
sup ported on an infinitely sliff primary member. For (his
l:lISC, enler Figure A-2-2 with the computed STress index UJ . In the case of complete-joint-penetration but( welds. the
The limiting value of Cs is determined by the intcrce pl of a maximum de sign stre."iS range calculated by Equat ion A-3-)
horizontal line reprcsenting the U~ value and the curve for applies only to welds wiLh intemal soundness meeting the
el ,:::. O. acceptance requirements of Section 6.12.2 or 6. 13.2 of
AWSDLL
Uscr N9(el Ti1e pooding<!eflectioll c<in.l!ibuted by ,a metal
deck is' 4S'uhlIY i $uch h(siii~lfpartiQtilit:iQiill, iX.Jrl~i'Jg No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the live
deflection of ~ r<>of prul~f\liat it IS suffiiiienlm:erely:.to'\UiUt load stress range is less than the thresho ld stress range, Fill.
its mOIl!~nt, of)l!~riia ~r:)n~te~ 9.f!l'.id./!1 ri9~aJ to :it~ ,..p,~ See Table A·3· L
10 3940,mm/m. ',.: " .,' ... :c~' ... ;-" ." ' : , ..,:,; , . .
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the number
For roof fram ing consisting of melal deck spanning between of cycles of application of live load is legs than 20,000.
beams supported on columns, the stiffness shall be
evaluated as follows. Employ Figure A-2- 1 or A-2-2 using The cyclic load rc sistnnce detcrmined by th e provisions of
as CJ the flexibility constant for a I III width of the rooC deck this Appendix is appl icable to structures with su ilable
corrosion prolection or subject only to mildl y corrosive
(S = 1.0) .
atmospheres, slIch as normal atmosphelic conditions. ..
·nle cyclic load resistance determined by the pro visions of
thi$ Appendix is applicable onl y to structures subject to
tem peratures not exceeding 300°F (ISO°C).
RFIJ. [
0.10;. 1.24("'/ 1
0. 167
I,)) S 1.0 and if used, shill: be' continuous. If splicin g is necessary for
long joi nts. the har shall bc joined wit h complete
1I' pCllctnllion bUll joints and the reinforcement ground prior 10
assem bly in the joint.
Jf R"'IJ. = I .0, usc stress category C.
In tra nsversc joints subject to tension. backing hal'S, if used.
A-3.4 Bolls and Threaded Parts shall be removed and thcjoillt back gouged and welded.
The nlngc of st ress .11 sen'ice IO<1ds shall not exceed th e
stress runge computed as follow s. In tran sverse complete-jojnt ~ pe llelrati on T and corner jOints,
a reinforcing lille! weld, not Icss than 6 mm in size shall be
I. For mechanicall y fastened connections loaded in shear. added •.11 rC -cll tralll co rners.
the m:lximum r:mgc of siress in the cOllllccted material
at service loads slwlt not exceed Ihe design stress rilngc
The surfacc roughncss of nil/He cut edges subject to
co mputed using Equ:uion A-3-1 where C, and F rot arc
signifi cant cyc lic tensi le stress ranges shall nOI exceed 25
wken from Sectioll 2 of Table A-J. I.
~lIn. where AS ME B46.1 is the refercnc:c standard.
2. For high- strength bolts, comm on bolts, and threaded
anchor rods with CUI , ground or rolled threads, the Reentrant corne rs at cut s. copes and we ld access holes shall
maximum range of tensile stress on the net tensile area fonn a radius of not less than 10 I11Ill by prcdrilling or
from applied axial load (lnd moment plus load due (0 su bpunching and reamin g a hole, or by thermal cutting to
prying action shall not exceed the design stress range form the radiu s of th e cuI. Jf the radiu s portion is for med by
computed using Equation A+3-1. therm al cutting, the cut surface shall be ground to a bright
metal surface.
The fac tor Cf shall be taken as 3.9 x 108 (as for stre ss
category E'). The thresho ld stress. Fnl shall be laken as For transverse bUH joints in reg ions of hi gh tensile stress,
48 MPa (as for stress cmego r), D). The net tensile arc'l run -off tabs shall be used to pro vide for cascading the weld
is given by Equation A~3·6 . termination olltside the finished joint. End dams shall not be
used. Run~off tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld
(S. I. ) (A -3-6) fini shed nush with the edge of the member.
I
!
APPENDIX A-4
~T,RtJ<;;n.!~LDESIGN FOR F~RE
CONDITIONS
Thi s 1Jppcndi x provides criteria fOl' th e design and
evaluation of' struc tural stee! com pollcllIs, sys tems and
frames for fire condi tions. These cri teria provide for the
determination of the heat input, thennal expansion and
dcgradatinn ill mechanic .. ] propcItics of materials at
clcv.ltcd iCilIpcraturcs that cause progressive decrease ill
strength and stiffness of structural components and systems
at eJcvoHcd temperatures.
---
- - --- -J-----
Des(11 )!IOl)
I
,
SIJCSS
Cj
Cltegol)
Table A-3.t
Fatigue Design Parameters
III
III'"
--T-~--
~
(onstant
-r---------- -r---- ------- -
Till eshold
r ,
Potent),,1 (r,lCk
InltJdtlllll PUlill
- - - -- -- - -- --- -- ------ -------------
-,---. ---- -------- - - ---- - ----- ---- ----- --------- ----
SECTION I -PLAIN MATEItIAL A WA Y FROM ANY WELDING
-----_._. __ .--_._----
"-·I-.··I-·B,l.~c~~~~.;: exc~~;;~' -;I-;:;~:oal~I-T---'-
... . .. _---_.-------- . . --_ ... ,---
---.~-~.~-----. __
wealllcrilig sled, with rolled or
cleaned surf'ace. Flwl1e-cut edges Away from all welds ur
with surface roughncss value of 25 A 2511 x lOs 165
structur,ll connections
pm or less but witllOU! recntrant
corncrs,
---.~,,~--.---.-,-~ ....
1.2 NOll-coaled welilhering sleel
-- ~----.---- ------------- - - - - - -
base metal with rolled or cleaned
surface. Flame-cut edges wilh Away from aJJ welds Of
surface roughness value of 2S pm
II 120 x lOX 1111
structural connections
or less, but without reentrant
corners .
.------.. ~-,
-- -_•. _._ .. _----
13 MClllbef wilh drilled or
reamed holes. Member with
reentrant corners at copes, Cllls,
b!ock~Ollts or other geometrical
A! any external edge or ,H
13 120 x 10' 110
discontinuities hole peri meter
made to
requiremellts of Appendix 3.5,
_~~~.'::.~J2.~~:£~(L!.~.~~~5s hoi e s. - ..
1.4 Rolled cross sections with
weld access holes made to
requirements of Section 510.1.6
At reentrant corner of weld
and Appendix A-3.S. Members
access hole or at any small
with drilled or reamed holes C 44 x 10' 69 hole (may contain bolt for
corllaining bolts for attachment of
minor connections)
light bracing where there is a
small longitudinal component of
brace force.
- - - - - - - ---------- -----------
SECTION 2 - CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal in lap
joints connected by high-strength
Through gross section near
bolts in joints satisfying all B 120 x 10' 110
hole
requirements for slip-critical
connections. .._-
2.2 Base metal at net section of
high-strength bolted joints,
designed on the basis of bearing In net section originating at
B 120 x lOx 110
resistance, btlt fabricated and side of hole
installed to all requirements for
slip-critical cOllllections. .. _----
_._._----_._---_. __ ---~-.~.,,- .".... --~.- ..--- _._-- .... ~ ~.---------.-.~.-- ...... _-----,.
2.3 Base metal al the net section
of other IllCc!1I1l11cally fastened In net section originating at
D 22 x 10H 48
joints except eye bars and pin side of hole
plates
-... --~- ..--- ----- - - - - - - - _..- -------- .- - -~-.-~.--
th
Nationa! Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
_
_--,,-=::!~Ta:::b::.le'..:A:::'!!!:3::c.l~( z::n~t.)=:.:.....--------~---------~~------l
Fafigue.Desigll.Pal'!.m!¢ters_~ .... _ .... _
CO'::_
f. J and 1.2
1.4
.. -----.--.-~~~
Ie! @
2.2
2.3
----------
2.4
.----~-----------------------
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5- 124 CHAPH,H 5 - Steel <in(1 Mel<lls
....
- "-
l i~;;( . ' \(, Table A'3.1(cont.)
, ",
i:':<:-:.' .'
' FMigUe J).e$igl) J!ilfaml.ltllrs '. " '-
{- f:: ---,
~a,:1' -~
<- - - / ... ((I~
(hl--~~.J
:::,..;;:-.- ~
-::::....~~ Rj ~~,
. ~:.:(.... (<il l
---
3.3
C-;---.
~~:" j
(a) ]:1 ~.
( I)) ~
•. )I
~~
3.4
3.5
(~;.-~
~JL)
(.) (b) (el
~ ---"-'
--:-:t'••
3.6
(a)
~~N'~' 1~1h>.
~
----c;
SECTION 4 - LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELIDED END CONNEC'fIONS -----"-
4.1
___ ~___
(al~~~
~~ :,-: . . . .
"'~1(~~"'7
- .....
(b)
U-.:"""'-
"'"~I , u":I.:' '''''7·
t"~1k /'
.,,~....
""'---. - .....-
--
al
transverse end connecti ons of
te nsion -load ed plate clements using
par1ial-joini- pe netrat ion bUll o r T or
In iti ating from geometrical
comer joints. wilh reinforcing or
discontinuity at toe of weld
contouring fill ets, FSR shall be the
extending into base metal or,
sma ller of the toe c rack o r ront
initialing :11 weld ront subject
c rack stress ran ge.
4-1 ~: 10" (i9 to ten sion cxtendi ng up and
Crack initiating from C
then ()til through weld
weld 10C :
Eqn . Nunc provided
Crack initialing frolll C' A-) ·4
Weld roOI:
1h
National St ructura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5 126 CHAP l ER 5 · Sler:! and Met als
5. 1
t:f1
(b )
5.2
5.3
l~i.
r· .-L{
(b)
5.4
5.5
Threshold
Siress COllstant Polcntial Crack
Description Pm
Category Ci M I'a
Init iation Point
. ~.
5.6
(oj
fj'
r.~: :I!
.I
L
··r
J-i~·r·!
f - · ···r··
(c) -J-
··f ,.-<
,~, . ~~ ..
50mm> R E I I x: I O~ 31
~
(0'
--~ ~
(e)
(b) \ - -
6.3
~
Ie)
~ (d)
1 I . Attac hments" as used herein. is defi ned as any steel detail welded to a member which, by ils mere presence and independent of ils
loading. causes a discOl~il1uity in the stress now i~llh c member and thus redu ces Ihe fati guc resistance . ..
th
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
Steet and Melal~~
Illustrative Ty P!C,\
'" I LX<Illlplcs
'
6.4
Ss
(dl
(b~
150 xJO LO
8.2 She,lr on throat of corHinu ulIs ()r
F (Eqn
intcrmitlc nt longil udinal o r In Ihro<11 of weld
A -3-2)
Iransvcrse fi llct we lds .
or slol welch. II x I
E 31 At end of we ld in b;lSC lIlet:.!
150
(Eqn 55 AI fay ing surface
F
A -3-2)
[ high.
strcngth holt s. COllllll on bali s,
threaded anchor rods and han ger
A t the root of the [hreads
rod s with cui , ground or rolled
E' 3.9 x 10' 48 extending into the ten sile
threads. Stress rangc all tensile
stress area.
stress area due to li ve l oad plus
prying acti on when applicable .
th
Nolional Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
Il tuslralivl! Typical Examples
8.1
8.2
-.. c.?~~, ~,
fa) .~~~. :::- (b)
8.3
---~
-_._.._.._---_ .......... _-- -_......._._._----,----- - - - - _ . _----_._._...._...._...._
-_.
8.4
8.5
ti?--
(d)
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ .. _
FIRE BARIUER: ElcmcllI of con stru ction formed of firc- A 4.1.1 Performance Objective
w
resist ing materials ,1Ild lested in acco rd ance with ASTM Structural components. members and building frame
Sl<Indard E 11 9. or other approved st'lndard fi re resistance systems shall be designed so as to maintain their load-
lc st, 10 dCIllOnSll'<He compliance with the Building Code. bearing function during the design-basis fire and 1O slII isfy
olher performancc rcquirements specifil:d for the building
FIRE ENDURANCE: A meas ure of the elapsed time occ up ancy.
during which a material or (lsscmbly con tinu es to exhibit
fire resistance. Deformmion critelia shal l be applied where the means of
providing structural fire resistance. or the design criterill for
FIRE RESISTANCE: That property of asse mbli es that fire barriers, requires co nsiderati on of th e deformat ion of
preve nts or retards the pnssage of excessi ve heat, hot gases the load-carrying structure.
Or names uluJe r cond itions of use and enables them to
continue to perform a stipulated function. Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and
deformations from the design basis fire shall not cause a
FIRE RESISTANCE RATING: The period of time a breach of hori zontal or vertical compal1mentati on.
building clement , component or asscmbly maintains the
abilit y to contain a fire. continues to perform a given A-4.1.2 Des ig n by Engineering Analysis
structural fUllction, or both; as detennined by tcst or
TIle analysis me thods in Section A-4.2 arc permitted to be
methods b<rsed 011 tests.
used to document the anti cipated performan ce of steel
framing when subjected to desig n-basis fire scenarios.
FLASHOVER: The rap id transition 10 a slate of total
Methods in Section A-4.2 provide evidence of compliance
su rfi:Jcc in volvement in a rire of combustible materials
with perfonnancc Objectives established in Secti on A-4 .1.1.
within an enclosure.
The analysis methods in Section A-4. 2 are permj tted to be
HEAT FLUX: Radiant energy per unit surface area.
lIscd to demonstrate an equ ivalency for an alternative
material or method, as permined by the building code.
HEAT R ELEASE RATE: The rate at which thermal
energy is generated by a burning material.
A-4.1.3 Design by Qualification Testing
PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION: Building materials and The qualification testing methods in Section A-4.3 are
systems \vhose abili ty 10 resist the cCfecls of fire does not permitted to be used to document the fire resistaJlce of steel
rely on any outside activat ing condition or mechanism. framing subject lO the standardized fire testin g protocols
required by building codes.
PERFORMANCE-BASED DESIGN: An en gineerin g
approach to st ru ctural design that is based on agreed-upon A-4.1.4 Load Combinations and Required
performa nce goals and objectives, engineering analysis and Strength
qua ntitative assessment of altematives against those design The required strength of the struclUre and its elements shall
goals and objectives using accepted engineeri ng tools, be determined from the following gravi ty load combinat ioll:
methodologies and performance criteri a.
[0.9 or 1.2JD + T+ 0.5L + 0.2S (A-4-1)
PRESCRIPTIVE DESIGN: A design method that
where
documents compliance with general criteria established in a
building code. D = nominal dead load
L = nominal occupancy live load
RtSTRAINED CONSTRUCTION: Floor and roof S ;::: nomi nal snow load
assemblies and ind ividual beams in buildings where the r nominal forces and deformations due to the
surrounding or su pport ing stl1iclUrc is capable of resisting design-basis fire defi ned in Section A-4.2.1
subst antia l thermal expansion throughout the range of
an ti cipated elevated te mpera tures. A lateral noti onal load, N; =O.002Y;, as defined jn Appendix
A-7.2, where Ni = notional lateral load applied at framing
UNRESTRAIN ED CONSTRUCTION: Fl oor and roof
assemblies and individual beams in buildi ngs that arc level i and Yi= gravity load fro m co mbination A-4-J acting
assumed to be free to rotale and expand throughout th e on framing level i, shall be applied in combinati on with the
range of ant ici pated elevated temperatures. loads stipulated in Equation A-4- 1. Unless otherwise
stipulated by the authorit)' havi ng jurisdiction. D. Land S
shall be the nominal loads specified in ASCE 7.
.
Sh :d Tt lll f)('r& lur('
('FII'C)
k,;",E.,.I£ /ty::: / ·,..JF1 /t " ", F... / f , considerin g the tolal combustible mass, in othe r wo rds. fuel
)20
·· load ava ilable in the space. In the case of eit her a locali zed
..
193 1.00 firc or a post-flashover compartment fire, Ihe time dura ti on
1204
13 16
0.90
0.78
· shall be determined as the total combusti ble mass divided
by the mass loss rate, except where determined from
399 0.70 1.00 1.00
427) 0.67 0.94 0.94 Seclion A-4.2. 1.2.
538) 0.49 0.66 0.66
649 ) 0.22 0.35 0.35 A-4.2.1.S Active Fire Prote('.tion Systems
17601 0.11 0 .16 0.16
87 1)
The efrcels of <lclive fire protection systems shall be
0.07 0.07 0.07
19821 0.05 O.o., 0.04 considered when describing Ihe design~ba s is fire.
11 0931 0.02 0.02 0.02
11 204 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 Where automatic smoke and heal ve nts are installed in non-
... Usc ambient pro >ertie5. sprinklered spaces, the resu lting smoke temperature shall be
detenn ined from calcu lation .
A-4.2.1.1 Localized Fire
Wh ere the heat release rate from the fire is insuffi cient 10 A-4.2.2 Temperatures in Structural Systems "der
C,IIISC nashover. a localized fi re exposure shall be ass umed. }i'ire Conditions
In sllc h GISeS , the fuel composition, arrangemem of the fuel Tempera tures within structural members, components anJ
array ami nnnr area occupi ed by the fuel shall be used 10 frames due to the healing condi tions posed by the des ign.
dete rmin e the radiant hea t flu x from [he n ame and smoke bas is fire shall be determined by a heal transfer analysis.
plume to the slmcture.
=
11J .1 ] _ () ,~~_ I.UO ._--
(J,34
prescribed limits of deform ation. The str uctural system shall
--":=F.i~IL ._~~ .... _g:.~.~. ____I . ~~__. - .--0.75
..•.---
0.46
be des igned to sustain l oca l damage with the structural
12HH) O.H6 LOO 0.6 1 - i)5l1..-'::
1~1 61_"_ _ .... OX!, 0.98 0.57 0.62 sys tem as a whole remain ing stahh- .
1'271 0 .71 0.85 0.38 O.RO
- ..
1.538) .. _- 0 .54 0.71 0.20 I.Of> Con tinuolls load paths sha ll be provided to transfer a!l
~-
.-
1(49) 0.58 0.092 1.32 force.; from the exposed region 10 the final poi nt of
17601 0.21 0.45 0.073 1.43 rcsisl<Jncc. The foundation shall be designed to resist the
IR71) 0.10 0.31 0.055 1.41) -- fon:c!' illld to accommodate the deformations developed
19R21 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.50 during Ihl' design-basis fire.
110931 0.01 0.05 0.018 1.50
(12M) 0.00 0.00 0.00 A·4.2.4.2 Strenglh Req uirements a nd Deformation
Limits
A-4.2.3 Malcrial St rengths at Elevated Temperatures Co nformance of the structural sys tem to these requirements
Malcrhd propcJ1ics at elevated temperatures shall he .; hall he demonstrated ~y constructing a mathematical
dClcmlincd rrolll lest data. In the absence of such claw. it is model of the structure based 011 principles of structural
permillcd tn use th!! material pro perties stipulated in this mechanics and evaluating this model for the internal fo rccs
section. These relationships do not apply for steels with a and deformations in th e mcmbers of th e structure developed
yield streng th in excess of 448MPa or concretes with by th e temperatures from Jhe design-b asis firc.
specified compressio n strength in excess of 55 MPa.
Individual members shall be provided with adequate
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels: For strength to resist the shears, axial forces emu moments
calclilmions m temperatures above 65°C, the coefricicnt of detclll1ined in accordance with these provisions .
thermal expansion shall be 1.4 x I O~/<C:: . Thermal
Connecti ons shall develop the strength or (he connected
expansion of nonnal weight ' concrete: For calculalions at
members or the forces indicated above. Where the means of
temperatures above 65°C, the coefficient of thermal
providing fire resistance requires the considerati on of
expansion shaJl be 1.8 x IO"'°C. deformation criteria. the deformation of the structural
~)'S lCIl1. or members thereof, under the design-basis fire
Thermal expansion of li ghtweiglll concre te: For calculations s hall not exceed the prescribed limits.
at temperalUres above 65°C, the coefficiem of thermal
expansion shall be 7.9 x JO'I·C. A·4.2.4.3 Methods of Analysis
111
National Structural Code of U"le Philippines 6 Edition Volum e
!; 138 CHAPlEH 5· Sleel a nd Metals
responsc shall take into <lccoUIH explicitly the <.ictcriof'{ltiull dimcnsiOll<ll hC:1l trans!"er equatioll to cak:ulatc honom
in strength and stiffness wi th incre<ls ing tempcr~tturc. ti ll.: /lange (Cmper:Hurc. That tcmperature sll<lll be taken as
effects of thermal expansions and large defonnatiolls. constant between the bOIlOIll nangc and mid-depth of the
Boundary t.:ondi{iolls lind connection fixity lIlust rcprescill web and shall dccre:lsc lin t.:arly by no more than 25 percent
the proposed slnlclUral design. Material propcrtil!s s hall hc from the mid-depth of Ihe web tu the lOp fl<.lIlgc of the
dcfincd ilS per Section A-4.2.3. beam.
lh
National Structural Code of Ihe Phili ppines 6 Edition Volume 1
~) · 140 C HAPTE:r~ ~; . Steet anti Met als
assumed IU he ASTM A502, Grade I, unless a higher grade such as member dellcctiulls, shall be monito red at criti cal
i s csw hli shcd
th rougil dOcUIHclHation or testing. locati ons during Ihe test, referenced 10 the initiLl I position
before loading, It sball be de!ll onstfil tcd, while ma int aining
A-S.3 Evaluation by Strueturnl Analysis maximuill test load foJ' Olle hour that the deformation of the
structu re does not in crease by more than I () percent above
A-S.3.' DimclIs ionnl Data that ,II the beginning o f the holding period, It is permissible
10 repeal the seq uence if necessary to demonst rate
All dimensions lIsed in Ihe evaluation, such as spans,
column heigills, memher spaci ngs, bnlcing locati() lIs, cross co mp liance.
sectio n dimcllsioJ)s, thicknesses and connecti o:. dct ai ls,
shall be detcrmined fmlll a field survey. Alternatively, when DefoJ'IllHtions or the s tru c t~lre shall also be reco rd ed 24
available, it shall be permitted 10 determine such hours after the test loading is removed to determine the
dimensions from appli cable project design or shop drawings amount of perm anent set. Because the "mounl of acceptabl e
wilh field verificati on of cri tic.:al va lucs. permimcnl deformat ion depends on the specific structure. no
li mit is specified for permanent de formation at maxi mum
A-5.3.2 Strength Evaluation load ing. Where it is not reasible to load {cst the entire
structu re, II segme nt or l onc of not less th an onc complete
Forces (load effects) ill members and co nnectiolls shall be bay, representative of the most crilical conditions, shall be
determined by structllral analysis appli cable to the type of selec ted.
stru cture evaluated . The load effec ts shall be detcrmined for
the loads and faclOred load combinations stipul ated in
A-S.4.2 Serviceability Evaluation
Secti on 502 ,2. The ava il able st ren gth of members and
connections shall be determ ined from il pplica blc provisio ns Wh en load tests arc prescribed, the SlruClU rc shall be loaded
o f Sections 502 through 5 1J of this Speci ficalion . increment all y 10 lhe servi ce load level. Deformations shall
be monitored for a peri od of aile hour. The structure shall
A-S.3.3 Serviceability Evalualion th ell be unload ed and th e deformation recorded.
Where required, the deformati ons at service loads shall be
A· 5.5 Evaluation Report
calcul ated and repo'ned ,
After the ev,alua ti on of an existin g structure has been
A-S.4 Evaluation by Load Tests co mpl eted, the engineer-of-record shall prepare a repon
documentin g the evaluation. The report shall indicate
whethcr the evaluation was performed by structural
A-5.4.1 Determination of Load Rating by Testing
anal ys is, by load testin g or by 11 co mbination or structural
To detennjnt the load rating of an existing Ooor or roo r ana lysis and load testing. Furthermore. when lestin g is
stru cture by testin g, a test load shall be applied pcrfonned. the repon shall include the loads and load
increment al ly in accorda nce wi th the engineer of record 's combination used and the load-deformat ion and time-
plan. The Slnlclure shall be visually inspected for signs of dcfOJ:lllation relationships observed. All relevant
di stress or imminent failure at each load level. Appropriate information obtained from design drawin gs. mill test reports
measures shall be taken if these or any othe r unusual and auxiliary material testing shall also be reported , Finally,
conditions are encountered. the report shall indicate whether the stmc{urc, including all
membe rs and connecti ons. is adequate to withstand the load
The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as {he effec ts.
ma ximum applied test load plus (he in-sit u dead load. The
live load rating of a fl oor stru cture shall be dete rmined by , .', ~.;~)i"':'_~f.~tf.
• ; _",.:•• \ 'J .'i":i·,~):<?i~
setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D + 1.6L, where D is
th e nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load ratin g
for the structure.
The nomjnal live load rating or the noor stnlctu re shall nOI
exceed th at which ca n be calcul ated using applicable
provisions of the spccification . For roof structures, Lr, 5, 01'
R as defined in the Symbols, shall be substitut ed for L.
More se vere load combin ati ons shall be used where
required by thi s code. Peri odic unl oading shall be
considered once th e service load level is attained and after
the onset of inelastic structural behavi or is identified to
document the amount of permanent set and the magnitude
of the inelastic deformations. Deformations of the structure,
fl,,, 1(21' )
= - - ' (I..RFD ) A[21',) ,
[J,,, = " - -- (AS !)
0 \ I.}, . L,.
(A-n-21
This appendix addre sses the minimum brace .')trcnglh and where
stiffness necessary 10 provide member strengths based 011
th e unh :~c('d length betwccn braces with all cfTcctivc length ~ = 0.75 (LRFD) n = 2.00 (AS)))
factor. !" {'qual to l.O .
L" :; disliUlce between bnlccs, in. (mm)
The appcndix is organizcu .IS follows:
For desig n according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
A-6.1 General Provisions p, := required axial co mpressive slrength using LRFD
A-6 .2 Columns
A -6.3 Bcams load combin .tliOils. N
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
curvature bending, the in!lcclioll pOin! shall not be :::: required flexural strength using LRFD lCld
<.:onsidc n:d a brace point. combinations, N-m/l)
fiscc
M,. = required flexural strength using LRFD load
combinations, N-mm where
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) A·7.1 General Rcq uirclllcllts
A·7.2 Noti onal Loads
Mr = required flexural strengt h using LRFD load A·7.3 Design·Analysis Constraints
combinati ons. N-mm
A-7.1 General nequircmcnts
Mcmbers shnll satisfy the provisions of Section 508. 1 with
f or design according 10 Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
the nominal column slrcngths. 1'". determined usin g K =
M" = required Ilcxura! strength usin g ASD load
1.0. Thc required st rength s for members, co nnecti ons and
combinat ions. N·1ll1ll
other structural elemelHs shall be determined using a second
order elastic annlysis Wilh the cons traints presented in
If B.uT < PT. Equation A·6· IO is negati ve . which indicates Secti on A·7 .3.
that tors ional bea/JI bracing will not be effective due to
inadequa te web distorti onal stiffness.
All componenl and connecti on dcfofmtll ions that contribute
to th e IHlcral displacement of the structure shall be
When required. the web stiffener shall extend the full depth cOl1sidcrc<.l in the ana lysis.
of the braced member and shall be aHac hed to the flange if
the torsional brace is also altached to the flange .
A· 7,2 Notional Loads
Alternati vely, it shall be permi ss ible to stop the stiffener
shon by a distance equal lO 4(,,· frolll any beam flan ge that is NOlionalloads sha ll be applied to the lateral fr aming system
not directly attached (Q th e torsional brace. When uJ is Jess (Q account for the effects of geometric im perfections.
than Lq. then Lb in Equati on A-6·9 shall be permitted to be inelastici ty, or both. Notional load s arc lateral loads that arc
taken equal to i.,q . applied at each framing level and specified in terms of the
gravity loads applied at that level. The gravity load used to
dc(cnn inc the noti onal load shall be equal 10 or greater than
the gravity load associated with th e load combination being
A-6.3.1.2b Continuous Torsional Bracing
evaluated. Notional loads shall be applied in the direction
For continuous bracing, use Equations A-6·9, A-6·JO and that adds to the destabilizing effec ts under the specified load
A-6· 13 with Un taken as 1.0 and LII taken as l .q; the braci ng co mbination.
moment and stiffn ess are given per unit span length . The
distonional stiffness for an unsliffencd web is
A-7,3 Design-Analysis Constraints
I. The second -order analysi s shall consider both p·o and
(A·6-l3)
p .6. effects. It is permitled to perform the analysis
lIsing any general second· order analysis method. or by
the amplified first·order analysis method of Section
503.2, provided that the 81 and 8 2 [Helors are based on
the reduced sti ffncsses defi ned in Equations A·7-2 and
A·7 ·3 . Analyses sha ll be conducted according to the
design and loading requirements specified in either
Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) or Section 502 .:1.4 (ASD). For
AS D, the second-order analysis shall be carried out
under 1.6 times the ASD load combinations and th e
results shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
strengths.
I the gril\ it~ ·unly JO;ld nJillbinationl' <llld nol ill (ombin:ttion
with (llhl~ r ialrraJ 10<lcl-..
"r
PART2A ..i I, Moment (If im:11ia or <I v(!rtif.:al boundary dl'mt:ut
(V BE) taken perpendicular \() thc direct ioll of thl~
SEISMIC PRQVI~tQN 11'OR, web plilLC linc, t1lm4
STRUCTURAL S'i1EEL BUILDINGS K Effec:tivc length factor ror prismatic membcr
I. Live load due to OCf.:upalH:y alld 1ll0Vl',Ihk
equi pment, kN
SYMBOLS L Spa n length of the tru ss, IlUll
L Diswllcc between VilE cCI1[CrIiIlCS, mill
Cross-SCCliOllni <lrC<l of n hori:lOlltal bound<lf), Length between points· whkh are ei ther braced
clemen! (I-mEl, 111m2
L"
against lateral <.lisplaceiiu!1lI or compression flange
A, Cross -sc~li onall1rca of a ve rtical boundary clement or braced against twist of the cross section, mill
(VBE), mm2 Link length. 111m
flange arc<l, 111m2 Clear diSlnncc between VUE flanges, mm
Gross area, 111m2 Distance between plastic hinge locations, 111m
CroS!i-scctional area of the s truc tural steel core, Limiting laterally unbraced length for fuli plastic
111m2 flexural strength, uniform momenl case, rom
Area of the yielding segment of steel core, rnm2 Limiting laterally unbraccd length for plastic:
Minimuill arca of tic reinforcement , mm2 analysis, Illlll
Hori zontal area or the steel pl ale in compos ite Length or the special seg ment , mm
L,
sheaf wall, mm2 Required nexural strenglh, using ASD load
M"
A" Area of link stiffener, mm 2 combinations, N·lTun
A". Link web area, 1ll1ll2
M,,, Additional moment due to shear amplificntioll
C" Ratio of required strength to available strength. from the local ion of the plastic.: hinge to the colullln
Cd Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness ilnd ce nterline based on ASD load combi nati ons, N-
curvmurc nun
C" Deflection amplification Nominal flexural strength. N-mm
M"
C, Parameter lI sed for determining the approximate M,,, Nominal flexural strength of the chord me mber
fundamental period of the special segment. N·mm
D Dead load due to Ihe weighl of the structural M Nominal plastic Oexural strength , N·mtn
clements and pc nnanelll features on the building. " Nominal plastic flexural strength modified by ax. ial
MI'"
D Outside diamcter of round HSS. mm load, N-mm
E E:,u1hquakc load Nominal plastic flexura l strength of the beam, N-
M,•,•
E EfreCl of hori z.ontal and venical earthquake· mm
induced loads Expec ted plastic moment, N-mm
E Modulus of elasticity of sleei, 200,000 MP" Nominal p l a~ilic nexural strength of the column,
£I Flexural clastic st iffncss of [hc chord mcmbcrs of N-mm
the special segment, N·mm2 M, Expected nexural strengt h, N-1ll11l ..
Specified minimum yicld stress of the type of steel M ..,. Additional moment due to shear amphfical1ol1
to be used, MPa . As used in the Specification, from the location of the plastic hinge to the column
"yield stress" denotes either the minimum ce nterline based on LRFD load combinations, N-
specifi ed yield poinl (for Ihose Sleels that ha ve a 111m
yield point) or the specified yield strength (for Required flexural strength, using LRFD load
M"
those steels that do not have it yield point) co mbinations, N-mm
Fy of a beam, MPa Expected requ ired flexural strengt h, N·m111
Fy of a column, MPa Required axial strength of a column usjn~ ASD I
Specified minimulll yield stress of the ties, MPn oad combinaliolls, N
Specified minimum yield strc::>s of the steel core, or P,,,. Required compressive stfength lI sing ASD load
aewal yield stress of tile steel co re as determined combinations, N
from a COHPOJltcst, MPa Required strength of lateral bmce ;It ends of the
I', Specifi ed minimulll tensile strcngth, MPa link, N
If H cight of story, which may be takcl1 as the P,. Available axi:11 strength of a column , N
distance betwee n the centerline of Iloor framing al Nominal axial strength of a column , N
P"
each of the levels above and below, or the dislnnce
between the top of Ooor slabs aI each of the levels Nominal compressive strength of the composi te
P"
above and below, mm column calcul ated in accordance with the
I Moment of inertia, mm4 Specificalion, N
1h
National Structural Code of the PhilipPules 6 Edition Volume 1
Nomina! axial compressive strength of diagonal (/ Angle thaI diagonal lllembers make with the
members or the special segment, N horizontal
Nomina! axial tensile strength of diagonal b Width of" compression clement as defined in
members of the special segment, N Specification Section502.4. I. Ill!ll
Nominal axial strength of a composite column at Width oj" COIUIllIl flange, mill
zero cccc!Hricity, N Flange width, 111m
P Required compressive strength, N Width of the concrete cross-section minus the
F r, Required compressive strength using ASD or width of the structural shape Ille;n" d
LRFD load combinations, N pc:'p'.'ndicular to the direction of shear, 111m
Required axial strength of a column or a link using d Nominal fastencr diameter, mm
LRFD load combinations, N d Overall beam depth, nlln
P" Required axial strength of a composite column, d, Overall column depth, mill
N d: Ovcrall pancl zone depth between contiI1U;l.','
P", Required compressive strength lIsing LRFD load plates, mm
combinations, N e FIJF link length, mill
P, Nominal axial yield strength of a member, equal to /" Spccificll compressive strength of concrete, lvl!'u
fy Ag, N II Cle<tr distance hetween flange.s less the filL ·'
P l I, Axial yield strength of steel core, N corner radiu:-- for rolled shapes; and for ht:.i;,
Maximum unbalanced venical load effect applied sections, the distance between' adjacent lin;·',
to a beam by the braces, N fasteners or the dear distance bc!\vecn flanges
Axial forces and moments generated by at least when welds are used; for tees, the overall delhi.;
1.25 times the cxpected nominal shear strength of and for rectangular ItSS, the clear dis!:tIlCl·
the link between the flanges k'ss the inside corner ladil
Ii Seismic re~ponse modification coefficient on each side, mill
/I" Nominal strength, N II Distance between horizontal buundary clemellt
R, Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the centerJines. mIll
specified minimum tensile strength Fu, as related Cross".~cctional dimension of the confined t·"
to overstrcngth in materia! yield stress Ry region in composite columns measured tl":]',,' ·
R" Required strength to-center of the transycrse reinforcement, I11rll
R, Panel zone nominal shear strength II" Distance between flange centroids, mill
R, Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified I Unbraced length between stitches of bUll:· t'j)
minimum yield stress, Fy bracing 11ll'"mbers, mm
Required shear strength using ASD load Unbraccd length of compression or br:v.:ing
(·olllbinations. N member, Illm
V" Nominal shear strength of a member, N Governing radius of gyration, m!Tl
VII<. Expected vertical shear strength of the special r, Radius of gyration about y-axis. 1l1m
seglllent, N SpaciJlg of transverse reinforcement me;)··.I:;·! tI
Nominal shear strength of thc steel plate In a along the longitudinal axis of" the Sill" ·
composite plate. shear wall, N composite member, 111m
Nominal :--hear strength of an active link, N Thickness of connected paJi. m111
Nominal shear strength of an active link modified Thickncss of e1emcnt, mill
by the axial load magnitude, N
v" Required .~hcar strength using LRFD load Thickncss of column web or doubler plate, ill:,l
combinations, N Thickness of beam flange, 111m
Distance from top of steel beam to top of concrcte Thickness of" columll nange, I11Ill
slab or encasement, mm Thickness of flange, 111m
Mnxilllum distance from the. maximum concrete I""" Minimum wa!] thickness of concrcU"
compression· fiber to the plastic ncutral axis, mill rectangular HSS, mm
Plastic section modulus of a member, mm3 Thickness of panel zone Including doubler
Plastic section mociulus of the beam, mm3 mill
Plastic section modulus of the column, mm3 Thickness of web, mill
Plastic section modulus x~axis, mm3 Width of panel zone between column
mm
Minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced
beam section, mm3 x Parametcr used for determining the approx;;;, .:::·
fundamental perinci (I-R2)
I
I
I1bm
I1b,
I1by
V"luc of deformati on quamity,
corresponding to the design story drift
Value of defo rm ation quuntity. 6b, <It firs:t
Organization. political subdivision. oftice or individual
charged with th e responsibi lity of administcring an d
enforcing th e provi sions of this standard.
!
! Q
signi ticanl yicld of test specimcn
A VAILABLE STRENGTH. Design strength or
Safcty f.lctor
Qb Safely factor for flexure = 1.67 nllowablc st rength , :IS appropriate .
II Do
Qc
Q,'
Safe ty factor for co mpression:::;: 1.67
Horizontal seismic overstrengt h facror
Sa fety f'H;ror for shear strength o f panel zone of
bellm-to-column connections
A ngle of diagonal members w ith the
ASD (ALLOWABLE STRENGTH DESIGN), Method
of proponio ning structural components suc h th al tile
allowable strength equals or exceeds the requi red stre ngth
o f th e component under the action of thc ASD load
horizontal co mbin at ions .
I
p' Ratio of required axial force Pu to required shear (IlRBF). Diagonally braced frame saflsfyin g 'he
strength Vu of a link requircmellts of Section 529 in which all members of the
J.I', AI'S Limiting slenderness parameter for com pact brac in g system are subjected primarily to {lxial forces and in
I 'I'
eleme nt
Resistance factor
Resistan ce factor fo r flexure
which the limit statc of compression buckling of braces is
prec luded at forces and deformati ons correspondi ng to 2.0
times the design story drift.
!I 'I'b
<pC
(PI'
Resistance fact9r fo r compres$ion
Resistance factO!" for shear strength of panel zone
of beam -to-column con nee li o ns
BUCKLING-RESTRAINING SYSTEM. Sys tem of
restraints that limits buckling of the steel core in BRBF.
r
'1'" Rcsistance fac(or.for shc" r T hi s syste m includes the casing o n the sleel core and
(Pl' Resistance faclOr for th e shear strength of a structural cJC111CrHS adjoining its connections. The buckli ng-
composite column restrain ing system is intended to permit the tran sverse
Ii lnt crstory drift angle, radians cxpans ion an d longitudinal contraction of the steel core for
),10(0/ Link rolation angle deformations concsponding to 2.0 ti mes {he design story
Strain hardening adjustHlc l1I factor drift.
th
Ncltional Struclural Code of the Philippines 6 Edi\ion Volume ·1
s.§
COLUMN BASE. Assemblage of pla (c~, cOl1nC,~·lO r s. EX PEC TED YIELD STRENGTH. Yield slrength in
bolis, and rods at Ihe base o f a column lIsed to tra nsmit te ns ion o f a member, equal 10 the expecLed yie ld sI!'css
forces bClwcenlhe steel superstructure and the foundatioll. mul ti plied by A. .~.
CONTINUITY I' LATES. Column stiffe ners al II", top EXPECTED TENSILE STRENGTH. Tensile strenglh 0.1'
and bottom of the panel zo ne; also known as transve rse a mem ber, equal to the specified minimum tensile strengt h,
stiffeners. Fu, mu ltip lied by R,.
C ONTRACTOR. Fa bricalor or ereClOr. as app li cable. EXPEC TED YIELD STR ESS. Yield stress of Ihe
material , equal 10 th e specilicd minimum yield stress, Fy,
DI<:MAND CIUTI CAL WELD. Weld so designateD by mullipl ied by R,. .
these Prov isions.
INTERMlmlATE MOM ENT FUAME (1M F). Momcnt
DESIGN EARTHQUAKE. The earthquake represenled by frame sys tem that meets th e re qui remcllLs or Sect ion 523.
Ihe de sign response speclll llll as specifi ed in the NSC P
code. I NTERSTORY DRIFT ANGLE. InlerSlo.ry displacement
divide.d by story hei gh t, radians.
DESIGN STORY DRI FT. Ampli fied story drift (drifl
un der th e desi gn earthquake, including the effccfs of INYERTED-V-BRACED FRAME. Sce V-braced r,.am e.
inelastic action), determined as specified in the NSCP code.
K-A n EA. The k-arca is the region of the web that extends
DESIGN STRENGTH . Res is tance factor multiplied by the from the tangent poi nt of the web ilnd the flange-web fi llet
nominal strenglh, <rRn. (AISe 'Ok" dimension) a distance uf 38 lllm into the web
beyond the " k" dimens ion.
DIAGO NAL nn-ACING. Inclincd stru ctural members
carrying primarily axi al load that arc empl oyed to cn<lbJc a K-BRACED FRA1\-'1E. A bracin g co nfiguration in which
st ru ctural frame lO act as (L truss to resist lateral loads. braces COllllect to a colum n a( a location with no diaphragm
or other OUt-of-plane SUppOI1.
DUAL SYSTEM. Siructural syslcm wilh the fo.llo-wing
features: (I) (In essenliHlly complete space frame that LATERAL BRA C ING ME~mER. Member that is
provides support ror grav it y loads; (2) resiSi<lIlce to laleral designed 10 inhihil Iment! buckl in g or !meral-tor sional
load provided by moment frames (SMF, IM F or OM F) that buck lin g of primary fram ing 111~ll1b ers.
m\~ capable of resisti ng at least 25 percent of the base shear,
and concrete Of slee l s hear wails, or steel hri.lced frClrnes LI~K. In EBF, the segmc nt or it beam Ihat is located
(ERF, SeRF or OCB F); <1nd (3) c(lch system designed to bClweclllhc ends or
two diagonal br;'iccs or between the end
re~i-;i the tolal ialenli load in proportion to its rdati ve of a di ag on:!! brac e and il column. The length of the link is
rigidi l). defined as the clear di st ancc between the end s of two diag
o llaJ braces or hetwee n the di agona l brace find the column
DUCT ILE LIMIT STATE. Du ctile limil ,tates in"'udc face .
member :ll1d cOJ1nec ti on yielding, bearin g deformation at
bolt holes. as well as huckling o f members th al I.:onform to LINK I NTERMEDIATE WEB STIFFENERS. Vertical
the width-thickness limitations t)r Table 52 J -I. FraclUre of a web stiffeners placed within the link in EBF.
member or of i.l connection, or buckling of a conne.ction
e lem cnl. is not a ductile limit s tale. LINK ROTATION ANGLE. lnelmaic angle between thc
link and the beam outs id c of the li nk whcn Ih<.' to\,tl story
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF). drirt is equal to the des ign story drift .
Diagonal ly braccd frame meeting the requirements of
Secti on 15 that has at least one e nd of each brac ing me mber LI NK SHEA R DESIGN STR ENGTH. Lesser of the
con nected to a hcmn a short distance from another beam· to- avail able ~ hear slrength or the link developed rrom the
brace connection or n beam-to-column con necti o n. mo mcnt or sheilI' strength of the link.
EXEMPTED COLll MN. Column not mccting the LOWEST ANTI CIPATED SERVICE
rt:quircments of Equat ion 522-3 for SMF. TEM PE RATURE (LAST). The Io.west I-hour average
tem perature with a IOO-year mean recurrence intcrval.
LRFD (LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR RED UCE D BEAM SECTION. Redu ction ill cross scc,ion
DESIGN). Method of proportioning structural component s over a discrete len gth that promotes a i.O!le or inelastici ty in
such that the design st rength equal s or exceeds th e required the member.
strength of the component under the HClion of the LRFD
load combi nations. REQUIRED STRENGTH. Forces, sli-esses. and
. ' deformations proulIl:cd in a structural co mponent,
LRFD LOAD COMlIlNATION. LO<1d combination in 'he determined by either stru ctur<11 analysis, for the LRFD or
NS CP code intended for strength design (load and ASD load combinations, as appropriate, or as specified by
resistance factor design). the Specification and these Provisions.
MEASURlm FLEXURAL RESISTANCE. Bending RESISTANCE FACTOR, 'I). FaclOr ,ha, accounl s fur
momelll mea sured in a beam at the f;lce of the column, fo r a unavoidable dev iations of the nominal strength from the
bea m-to-column tcst s pecimen tested in accordance wilh actual st rength and for the manner and conseque nces of
Section B-4. fai lure.
NOMINAL LOAD. MagnilUde or 'he load s pccificd by SAFETY FACTOR, n. Factor that accounts for
'he NSCP codc. deviations of the actual strength from the nominal strengt h,
deviation s of the actual load from the nominal load,
NOMINAL STRENGTH. Slrengl h of a slnlclurc or 1I11certailltics in th e analysis thnt transform s the load into a
com pon ent (without the resist ance ractor or sa fely factor 10;:ld erfect and for the manne r ,JIld consequences or fail ure.
applied) to resist the load cffecls t as determined in
accordance with thi s Specification. SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY. ClassiOcalion assigned
to a building by lhe NSCP code based upo n its seism ic ll Se.
ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME group and the des ign spec tral res po nse acce lcnnioll
(OCBF). Diagonally braced frame- meet ing the coefJicicnt s.
requiremcnts of Scction 527 in which all members or th e
brndng system arc subjected primarily In axial forces. SEISMIC LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM (SLI~S).
Assembly of structural e lements in the building that resi sts
OlWINARY MOMENT FRAME (O~11'). M lllllcll! li'ame seismi c load s, incl udin g struts, l:ollectors, chords,
syste m that meets the rc quiremcnts of Section 524. di aphraglns and tru sses. Seismic respomic mudilication
coeflkicnl, R. Facto r that reduces seismic load eCfects to
OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR, QO. FacIOI' spcci lied by strength leve l as specified by the NSCP code.
th e NSCP code in order to determine the amplili cd 'iC'ismic
load, where req uired by these Provi sions. SEISl\1lC USE GROUP. Classification assigned to a
structure based Oil its use as specified by the NSCP code.
PREQUALlFIED CONNECTION. COI1I1«lion ,hat
compli es with the requiremen ts of Section B-J. SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
(SC BJi'). Diagonall y braced frame meeting the requirements
PROTECTED ZONE. Area or l11emb",,, in whi ch of Sectioll 13 in whi ch all members of the bracing system
limitations apply to fabrication and .auac hllll.~ Ill S . Src ,1i1~ subj ected prirmll'il y lO axial forces.
Section 520.4,
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMF). Momen! frame
PROTO TYPE. The cOl1neclion or brace design Ihat IS lO system that meets th e requirem en ts of Section 522.
bc used in the building (SMF, 1MI', EBF, and BRBF).
SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALL (SPSW). Plalc shcar
PROVISIONS. Refers to thi s document, and in reference' waIJ system that meets the requirements of Section 530.
to the AISC Seismic Provisio ns for Structural Steel
Buildings (ANSIIAIS C 34 1). SPECIAL T1WSS MOMENT FRAME (STMF). Truss
mOllll!1l1 frame system (hal meets rhe rcq ui re mcllls of
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN. Wri((cn dcscrip'ion or SCCliotl 525,
qualifications, procedures, quality inspections., rcsouru: s\
and record s to be used to provide assu ralll.:n Ihal Ihe SPECIFICATION. Refers 10 'hc AIS C Specific", ion for
st ru ct ure compl ies with the engineer's qua lit y rcqu:rcmcllls, S'nlcl ural S'eel Buildings (ANS I/A IS C 360).
specificat ions and con trac t doc uments.
[i ··ISO CHAPTFri (S ~ St()(:t and fvh)[aL;
American InstilUlC of Sleel Construction (AISC) The des ign story drift shall be determined as required in the
NSCP code.
Specification Jor Structural Steel Bllildillgs, ANS/IA/SC
360·05 Prequlllified COllnections for Special (llld
Intermediate Sleel Momem Frames for Seismic
Applications, ANSIIA/SC 358-05
National Struclu ral Code of tile Ph iljpp in(~ ~; 6~i""i [clition \lolurn o "1
517.1 Loads and Load Combinations
The loads and load co mbinati oll s shall be as sti pulat ed by
the NSCP code. Where amplified seismi c loads arc requ ired
by these Provisiolls, the horizontal pon ioll of the e;u1hquakc
S18. 1 Structural Design Drawings and Sr~ ecifi ca fiol1s
load E (as defi ned in the N S.(P code) shall be multiplied by SlnlclurllJ design drawings and spcci ri c~ltions shall show the
the ovc rstrength factor. Q u. prescribed by the NSC P codc. work \0 be performed , and include items required by the
Speci fi cation find Ihe following, as app licable:
517.2 Nominal Strength I. Desigllalion of th l! seismi c load resisting syst em
The nomi nal strength of systems. members and conllections (S LRS)
shall co mpl y with the Specificmion, ex<:epl as l110diried
tllroUghout these Provi sions. 2. Designation of the members and connections thaI are
part of the SLRS
3. Configuration o{" the con necti ons
4. Connec ti on materia! speci ri c!llions Hnd sizes
~. Loca ti ons of dema nd critical wc lds
6. Lowesl anli cip<.ned service temperature (LAST) of the
sleel stru cture , if the structure is not enclosed and
Illaintained at a Icmpermure of JO °C or higher
7. Locations and di mcnsions ofprotcctcd zones
8. Loc<.H ions where gusset pl ates arc 10 be detai led to
accom modate inelastic rotation
9. Weld ing requirements as specified in Secti on B·6,
Section I3·6.2 .
The available strength of the element, rpR" for LRFD and R,/
Q for ASD. shall be equal to or grea ter than the required
stre ngth, where R" is the nomin;.11 st rengt h of the connecti on .
The expected lensil e strength , RfF", and the ex.pected yield
stress, R. F\, arc permiltcd to be used in lieu of F.. and FI>
respectively. in dClcnni ning the nominal strength. Rno of
rupture and yie ldi ng limit Slales wi th in the same me mber
for wh ic h (he requ ired strength is dctcnnined .
The values of HI' and R, ror various stee ls are given ill Tnbl e
5 J 9· 1. Other v.~ l ues o f RI , and RI 51mll be permitted ir the
values arc determined b)' testi ng or spccimcns si milar in
s izc and source conducted in accordHl1cc with the
req uire mc nts ror Ihe specified grade or s tee l.
U
National Structura! Code of tile Philippines G ' Edition Volume 1
of failure. Complclc-joint-pcnelfillion (CJP) groove welds
between columns and hase plales should be considcred
oem,lIlo criticlll similar to colulIlll splice welds, whcn CJP
groove welds llsed for COIUIlIIl splices ill th e desig nated
SLRS ha ve bcc n designated dcmand crit ical.
Por ordinary moment frames, Iypica l exa mpl es incl ude Cli>
groove welds in items 1, 2, and 3 above .
!;
f
I,
!
'I- .
. 4,) . .'." , ';'
l'l.lel.lel.l sl.lhl
sharx:d:;cl'liom/b]'lhl
- -.,---,,-,-.,---,, --c--_\--- -. --
Uniform compre ssion in ilangc:s of rolled or buill-up t·
-";-
- - ..- --
bit
--- -- - -- -- -- - - - j - - - -- - -- - - -- - --1
- - j- - -- - - ' - -. -- ---j
0.30JE/Fy
_;.i~.·~
'.'·;:.:.\:.:. . .·.:.;.·....: ~ ~;~J~J,a~,~I'~f~ "';~~:,'c~,7.~.I ;'l,-'-'I-~re-'--'.7i-o-r~'-,7·,-,~le- -g.-~, o~r;,~h-,-g7.--,c~-a-'-'-g. 7,-C-,-.,~,--c.-g--,.- <-,7,-.--·~--=--- ----.-----.--..·---.~~~~~-"1,~,~, '.:.~ ~~~~~-~--==t=========~=~j2t.5~-~=~=========~
__ :~ do uble lingle me mbers wilh sc pc ralOrs, or Oang.cs of ices hIt O.30ji IFy
" '" .,.~ ;. '. " lS i
Uniform compression in SiC Ill:. (J f Ices 19l till a.3ofi IF,.
Webs in flexural co mpn:ssion in OC,tlllS in S M F. Scct iull 2.4 5 'F/t:y
. .... 522 .unlt-ss noted o lher .....ise hIt.. V~
,.- ,"',
Webs in !1cxuraJ comprcssion or combin cd flc.'(ur(: and For C. SO .125[kl - - -- - -\
axial compression !u].[c ].!g],[hl,lij./j)
hl1\\'
.. -!!/ 3.I,JEIFY (I . I.54 C,)
.•
=~
•111)
, . .,S '
"ii5 ..
; .... 'C!
:}~
For Ca > 0.1 25 IkJ
...
1.1 1 ,iEIFy (2 .33·C, )
' en hII. 1.'9 Jf:IFY
'. Roun d HSS in axial and/or fl c.xur<ll C<l m p'r~'~"~';~
Oi~'~I'~I~,IH.II~_\ ------~I~)A"---------I -----'O~.04
""-4'-'( EJF
.~.~F.LLY»_ __ _ -j
Rec tangular HSS in :u :ial and/o.>r flexural compression O.64/EIF"
.. .leU.) bII or loll. ,
1-_ _ __-'--'W'-""b"s"of"'I"·I..:.P"'''"'''''e,,c,,tio,,'-' '' --_ _______ _ _ _ --'_____-',,,,,,"',_ ____.___-'-_ _____._a.9~ElFy}
[a j Req uired for b<!anl~ in SMF Section 522 und SI'SW S~c tion 530
fbi Required for columns in SMF Section 522 . onlcH the r,llios ftom Eq.522.} arc gre:lter than 2.0 where il is l>crmillcd to usc J,. in spcc ilic:ltion Table 50 2,4 1
le J Required for br.ccs ilnd co lunl1ls in ScnF SCClion 526 and brat"cs in OCBF Seclioll 521
(d] It is pemlillcd 10 use),. in Spocific:iU ion Table 502A.I fOt columns in STMF Section 522 and colllmils in EBF Seclio n 528
Ie) Req uired fOf link in EBF Seclion 528 CJ.cCpl iti is per millcd 10 use l.t in Ta ble 502.4. 1 of the: ~p;:ci ricalion fOI n:tnges of links or JcnSlh 1.6 M,fY pa re dcfill: <.l in Secl;l,\n 528
III Di ~gonal web mcbers with in Ihc s pecial segment of STMF Section 5ZS
IsJ Cllord members of STM F SeClion 525
IhJ Requiled for beams and colu mns in ORlJF Seclioll 529
Ii) Required for colu lI1ns in SJ>SW Seelion 530
[j] For colum ns in STMF Section 522 c\llu(1)n ~ in SMI'. ;rthe (<llim [10m E'l. sn ·Jarc gre.alel Ih~11 2.0: for colunms in Eli I' Section 52 8: or EI3 F wcb$ of lin ks of I.::nglh 1.6
M/V ~ (lr less, it is permillcu lU US(' the following f()r I, .
1h
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
I~ 158 CHAPTEF{ 5 · Sleel and Metals
For l!ccciltricilil y braccd frames (EBF). typic.!! cx;unpl cs of weld. II" a cu rved clip IS used. il s h.d l have :1 m i l. ;:~:; : ;:1
demand <.:n ti cal we lds include CJJ> groove welds betwc\!1l rad ius of 12 I1Ull.
link b\!,UllS and columns. Other welds, such as those joining
the web plale to flange plates in built·up ESr:- link bcams, AI the end of th e weld udjaccnt to the column wch/lh ngl..'
and column splice welds when made using CJP groove juncture, weld tabs for co ntinuity plates shall nut he lI st.'d.
welds, should be considered for designation as demand except when permitted by the e ngil1 cc r~ of~ rcco rd. U!l les~:
cri ti cal welds. specified by the cllginecJ'·of"·rccord Ihill th ey be I-C,!ll OVt'(L
weld tabs shall not be removed when used in this locatiO:\.
520.3.3 Recommcll(l,d Joint
Tile usc of Type I welded joints is nO( allowed in seismic
Zone 4. Type' II joints arc recommended as in the usc of
Proprietary W ~~ l ded Joint .
The following requirement shall be mel: 521,4,2 Columns Not Part of lhe Seismic Load
Resisting System
I. The req uired axial co mpressi ve and ten sile strength,
considered in the absence of any applied moment. shall Splices of col um ns that are not a pan of the SLRS shall
be determined lIsing the load combinations stipu lated satisfy the following:
by the NSCP code including the amplified seismic load I. Splices shall be located 1.2 III or morc away from the
2. The required axial compressive and tensile stren gt h beam -Io column conn ections. When the column clear
shall not exceed either of th e following: hei gh t betwee n bea m-to column connecti ons is tess
than 2.4 Ill , splices shall be (11 half the clear height.
n. The maximulll load transferred to the column
conside rin g LlRy (LRFD) or ( 1.1 11 .5) Ry (ASD), as 2. Th". required she<lr streng th of column splices Wilh
appropriate. times the nomi nal stl'engths of the respect to both orthogonal axes of the co lumn shall be
connecting benm or brace clements of lhe building. Mpc IH (LRFD) or Mpc 11.5H (ASD), as appropriate,
where Mpc is the lesser nomin al plasti c fle xu ral
b. The limit as determined from the resistance of the strcngth of (he colu mn sections for the di recti on ill
fo und ation (0 overturning uplift question , and H is the story height.
1h
National Siructural Code o r the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
s- 1GO CHAPTEH 5 . SI(;.'el and Melnls
The special requiremel1l5 in ACI 3 JB, Apptmdi:t' D. for 2. for columns, the required flexural strength Shill! be ,H
"regions of moderme or high seismic risk. orfor sirucllfre.r lea!;t equal 10 the lesser of the (ollowing:
assigned 10 illlermedime or high seismic per/ormllllce or a. 1. 1 R,F,Z (LRfD) or ( 1.111.5) Ii,F,Z (ASD). os
design categories" lI eed //0/ lu.' applied. appropriate, of the column or
521.5.1 Required Axial Strength b. the moment calcu lated using the 1000Id com binations o f'
the NSCP code. includ ing the amplifIed seismic load.
The required ax ial strength of column bases, including their
altachmcnl 10 the foundation, shall be the summation of Ihe
521.6 H-Piles
venica l components of the requi red strength s of the steel
eleinents that nre connec ted to the column basco
521.6.1 Design of H·Piles
521.5.2 Requi red Shear Strength Design of H-piJes shall compl y wi th the provisions or the
Specification regarding design of members subjected to
The required shear strength of colu mn bases, including their
combined loads. H -p iles shall meet the requirements of
attachments to the foundations . shall be the sll lllmmion of
Sectioll 521.2 .2.
the horizontal component of the requ ired st rengths of the
steel elements that arc connected to the columJl base as
521.6.2 B.Hered H-Piles
follows:
Ir baltered (sloped) and vertical piles arc used in a pile
I. For diagonal bracing, the ho rizontal component shall be group, the v.crtica l piles shall be designed to support the
determined from the required strength of bracing combined effects of the dead and live loads without Ihe
connections for the seismic load resisting sys tem participati on of the baltered piles.
(S LRS)
2. For columns, the horizolllal component shall be at least 521.6.3 Tension in H-Pile
equal to the lesser of Ihe fo ll owing: Tension in each pile shall be transferred 10 the pile cap by
mechanical me'lIls slI ch as shea r keys. rcin forcing bars or
a. 2R.,. F). Zx IH (LRFD) OJ' (211.5) Ii,. F, Z, If! (ASD). as
studs welded (0 (h e embedd ed porti on o/' the pik . Dircc!l y
appropriate. of th e columJl ..
below the botlom of the pile ca p, e:lch pi le shall he free of
all:lchmCllls .lnd we lds for a length al least equal to the
depth of the pile cross section.
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Vol ume 1
~)--H)? CHAPTEH~) Steel and Metals
II
522.8 Latent. Bracing of Hc,alJls
DOlh fla nges of beams shall be I.uerall y braced. with ,I
maximum spacing o f LI/ ;::; O.086ryElF\.. Braces sha ll mee t
the provis ions of Equations A-I -7 and A-1-8 of Appendix
A-I.6 of the Specification. where M, = M. = R,ZP, (LR FD)
or M , = M" = R,ZF,.11.5 (ASD). as appropriate. of the beam
;lIld Cd = 1.0. .
I III 'J(ldi ti OI1. lateral braces shall be pl aced ncar cOllcen trated
forces, changes in cross .. scction , and o th er locati ons where
523.2 Beam· to-Column Connections User Note: The plastic hinging zones at the ends of IMF
b~aJ11s should be treated as ' pioteCted 'wnes. The plastic
523.2.1 Requiremenfs hinging zo'nes should be established as part of a
prequalification or qualificiuion program for the connection.
Bcmn·lO-columl1 COIHlcclions used in the se ismic lo'ld
In general, for unreinforced cOnriec·tions, the ·protected zone
rcsisling syslcm (SLRS) shall sati s fy the requ irements of
will extend from the face of the column ' to one half of the
Section 522.2. with the following exceptions:
beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point.
I. The required inlcrslory drift angle shall be a minimu lll
of OJJ2 radian. 523.3 Panel Zone of llea m·to-Column Connections
(lJen," Web ParaUel to Column Web)
2. The required strength in shear shall be dClcrmined as
specified in Section 522.2 . 1, except thaI n lesser valut' No additional requircmellts beyond the Specification.
of V" or V(I' as appropriate, is permitted if justified by
analys is. The requi red shear stre ngth need not exceed 523.4 Bcam and Column Limitations.
the s hear resulting from the appli cat ion o f appropriate The requircmcnts of Section 521.1 shall be sati sfi ed, in
lood combinations in the NSCP code using the addi[ion to the foll owing.
amplified seismic load.
523.4.1 Widlh- Thickness Limitations
523.2.2 Conformancc Dcmonstration Beam and column members shall meet the requireme nts of
Conformance demonstration s hall be as desc ribed in Section Section 52 1.2 . 1, unl css otherwise qualified by tests .
522.2.2 to satisfy th e requirements of Section 523.2. 1 for
IMF, exeepl that a connecti on prcqualificd for IMF in 523.4.2 Beam Flonges
accordance with ANSIIAISC 358, or liS otherwise Abrupt changes in beam flange arca arc not permitted in
determined in a connection prequalilication in accordance plastic hinge rcgions. Drilling of flange holes or trimming
with Section B· l. or as delermined in <1 program of o f beam n angc width is permiued if testing ur qualification
qualification testing ill accordance with Section 0-4. demonstrates that the resulting configuration can develop
stable plastic hinges. The configurati on sha ll be consistent
523.2.3 Welds with a prequalified con nec ti on dcsignated in ANSIIAISC
Unless otherwise designated by ANSIiAISC 358. or 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection
otherwi se determined in a connection prequalification in prequalification in accordance with Secti on B-1 , or in a
::lccordilnce with Section B·l, or as determined ill a· program program of qualifica ti on tes ling in accordance with Section
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4, 1J·4 .
comple te joint · penctratio ll groove welds of beam nanges.
shear plates, and beam webs 10 columns shall be demand 523.5 Continuity Plates
cri tical we lds <I S described in Section 520.3.2. Continuity plates shall be provi de d to be consistent with the
prcqu alified con nec ti ons design.lle.d in ANSIJA ISC 358. or
User Note: For the designation of de mand critical welds, as otherwise delermined in it con necti on preq u,llificalion in
standards such as ANSII AISC 358 and tests addressing accordance wi th Section 13-1 , o r as deten n in ed in a program
specific connections and joints should be used in Jieu of tJ)e of qualificati on testing in accordance with Scction B ~ 4.
more g~ner.al. ·. teqns of these Pr~JVisiol.1S. Where these
PrQvis!ons j~d,i.9.a\e tl)at , R ' p;uticular . ",eld i$. ,designated 523.6 Column·lleam Moment Ratio
demand critical, b),i.i. the 'l1)0re spe,Wc staI),Q¥d'Or ·te.sl ·does
No additional requirement s beyond th e Specification .
nQt Jilak~ ~l'~~;"l . 4¢sigl),a~6Iidtw: mQr~ ' spefj@· s,tan~,~d or
Lat eral Bracing at Beam-lo-Colulllll COllllecti ons No
lesLSAQulq go)i~J;Il, .Like\~ise, thesest"!4iu:ds .,~nd.,.i\'~is: may
E; 211 .1".,. Mel / L" (Eq . 524 · 1) 524.2.2 Requiremenfs ror PR Moment Con llections
PR momen t connections are permitted when the following
Where (his £ is llsed in AS D load combi nations Ihat arc requiremen ts are mel:
additive witli other transi ent loads ilnd that are based o n
SEIIASCE 7, the 0.75 combination factor for transient loads I. Such connections shall be designed for the requ ired
shall not be applied to E. strength as speci fied in Section 524.2. 1above.
2. The nomin al flcxuml strength of the connection, M".
Altertlillivcly, 11 Icsser valuc of V" or \1" is permitted if shall be no less th an 50 percent of M il of the con nected
justifi ed by anal ysis. The required shear strength need not beam or column, whichever is less.
exceed the shea r resu lt ing from Ihe app li cati on of
appropriat e load combinations in the NSCP code lIsing the 3. The stiffness and strength of the PR moment
a mplifi ed seismk load . connec tions shall be considered in the design, includin g
the effect on overall frame stability.
4. For PR moment connecti ons, VII or Va, as appropriate,
shall be determined from the load combination above
plus the shear resulting from thc maximum end
mOJl'lcnt 1h;]1 the connection is capablc of res isting.
524,2.3 Welds
Comple te-joill t-penetrat ion groove wel ds of beam l1anges.
shear plates, and be.1111 webs to columns shall he demand
critical welds as described in Section 520.J .2.
th
Na tional Struclura! Code of lhe Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
524.4 Beam and Co lullllI Limitations 524.9 Column Splices
Nu requirements hl!yond S~ction 521 . 1. Columll splices shall comply with the rcquircmcnls or
Sectioll 521.4.1.
524.5 Continuity Platl's
When FR moment t'ollncctiollS arc madc by me,tIls uf welds
of beam l1angcs Or bC<!!ll · nangc con ncction platcs dircct ly
to col umn fl anges, con tinuit y piCll cs sllll il be provided ill
accordance with Section 5 : (; of the Specification.
Con tin uity pi ales shall also be required when :
l' ,.
The speci al seg ment shall be a protected i:'.one meeling th e 525.5 \Vidth -Thickness Limitati(lils
requi rements of Section 520.4.
Chord members and diagonal web members within the
special segmclll shall meet the requircments of Section
525.3 Strenglh of Special Segmenl Members
52 1.2.2.
The available shear strengl h of Ihe special segmenl sl,,11 be
calculated as the sum of the available shear strength of the
111
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
!i i '/0 CHi\Pl /:·, n b . Steel anti fI.~(H<lIS
= is Ihe nomina! compressive strength of the User Note: Sectioh 527 (OCBF) should be used for tile
-special segment chord mcmber. desig·n of tension-only bracing.
Lateral braces outside 01' the special segment shall ha ve .1 526.2 Members
rc()uired strength of
P" = 0.02 II,. P_. (LR FD) or 526.2. 1 Slenderness
1'" = (0.0211.5) II, I',,, (AS D). as appropriate. Bracing members shall ha ve
70 percent of the total horijl,ontal force along that line is 526.3.2 Ucquired Flcxural Strength
resisted by braces in tension, unless the available strength of The required flexural strcngth of bracing connections shall
each brace in compression is larger than the required be equal to 1.111, Mp (LRFD) or (1.111.5) II, Mp (ASD). as
strength resulting from the application of the appropriate appropriatc, of the brace about the critical buckling axis.
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code including
the amplified seismic load. For the purposes of this EtCepfion:
provision, a line of bracing is defincd as a single line or Brace connections thot meet the requirenwflfs of Sectio/J
parallel lines with a plan ofl<;e( of 10 percent or less of the 526.3.1 and can accommodal(' the inelastic rotations
building dimension per pendicular to the line of bracing. associated with brace post-buckling deformations Ileed not
meellhis requirement.
526.2.4 Width-Thickness Limitations
Column and brace members shall meet the requirements of
Section 521.2.2.
526.3.1 Required Tensile Strength b. The forces in all adjoining braces in compression shall
be assumed to be eqllal to O.3Pn.
The required tensile strength of bracing connections
(including beamH to~column connections if part of the 2. Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both
bracing system) shall be the lesser of the following: flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
maximum spacing of Lho::.Lpi/, as specified by Equation
1. The expected yield strength, in tension, of tile bracing
A-I.I-7 and A-1.1-8 of Appendix A-Iof the
member, determined as RyF\Ag (LRl-;"D) or RJ'~A/I.5
Specification. Latera! braces shall meet the provisions
(AS D), as appropriate.
of Equations A-! .6··7 and A-I.6~8 of Appendix A-I.Gor
the Specification, where M ro::.M"o::.l? y ZFr (LRPD) or
M,=M,,=R,ZF,. II.) (ASD), as appropriate. of the beam
2. The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that
and Cd = 1.0.
can be transferred to the brace by the system.
As a minimum, one set or lateral braces is required at the
point of intersection of the V-type (or inverted V-type)
bracing, unless the beam has sufficient oUl-o[..,plane
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5 172 CHAPTER 5 . Steel nn<l Metals
527.1 Scope
Ordinary concentrically braced fml11es (OC13F) arc expected
to withstand limited inelastic deformations in their members
and conneclions when subjeclcd 10 the forces rcsuhing froln
the mOlions of the design earthquakc. OCBr shalL!llcet thc
requirements in this Section. OCBr tlbovc Ihe isolation
system ill seismically isolated structures shall meet the
526,4,2 K-Type requirements of Sections 527.4and 527.5and need nOl meet
Bracing K·type braced frames are not permitted for SCBF.
i the requircments of Sections 527.2and 527.3.
Kif,. <
- 4)i·;"'".-
.~ \ The cffect of axial force on the link available shear strength
need not be considered if
527.5.2 K-Type Bracing 1'" S 0.151', (LRFD) or
K-type braced frames are not permitted.
1'" S (0.15/1 .5)1',. (ASD). as appropriate.
27.5.3 V-Type and Invcrted-V-Type Bracing. \vhere
Beams in V-type and inve11ed V-type bracing shall be = required axial strength Llsing LRFD load
continuous between columns. combinations, N
<jlV =0.90 (LRFD) nv = 1.67 (ASD) I. Links of lenglhs 1.6Mp /Vp Or less shall be provided
with inlenn ediatc web stiffeners spaced at intervals no!
(Eq . 528- 1) exceed ing (301w -dl5) for a link rotation angle of O.Uil
M". = I.IS Mp (Eq.528-2) radian or (52 tw -dl5 ) for link rotation angles of 0 .02
radian or less. Linear interpolation shall be used fl1:-
1', = 1'" (LRFD) or values bel ween 0.08 and 0.02 radian.
P" (ASD), as appropriate 2. Links of length grea ter than 2.6Mp IVp and less th at:
P,. = P,. (LRFD) or 1',.11.5 (AS D), as appropriate 5Mp IVp shall be prov ided with intc nned iatc web sii ;
fell ers placed at a dist ance of 1.5 timcs bf from cae!.
2. The leoglh of the link shall not cxceed: end of the link.
a. I LIS - O.5p'(A.JAg}] 1.6M"N" 3. Links of lenglh between /.6Mp IVfl and 2.6Mp /V I'
whcn p' (AwIA, ) ?: 0.3 (Eq. 528-3) shall be provided with imemle<.i iale web stiffener!>
meeting the rc quirements of (a) and (b) above.
nor
4. Intermediate web stiffeners arc not required in links of
h. 1.6Mp N , lenglhs grealer lhan 5Mp IV".
when p'( A,JAg} < 0.3 (Eq.528-4) 5. Intermediale wcb stiffeners shall be full depth. Fo;'
where links th at are less than 635 mm in depth, stiffeners an;
required on only one side of the link web. The
AIV= (d - 21/}1". thickness of ollc~sid ed stiffenc!'s shall not be less than
pi = P,IV, tw or 10 mill, whichever is larger, and th e width shal:
and be not less lhan (bf /2)- lw. For links lhal arc 635 Ill'"
ill deplh or greater. similar imcmlediate stiffeners arc.-
where required 011 both sides of the web.
V, = V, (LRFD) or V. (ASD), as appropriate The required st rength of fillet welds connecting a li nk
V, = required shear strength based on LRFD load
combinations. N stiffener to the link web is As,FI' (LRFD) or As,Fr I 1.5
Vo = required shear strength based 0 11 ASD load (AS D), as appropriate. where Ast j's the area of the stiffcIII!.
combinations, N The requ ired strength of fillet welds connecting the stifkH,'"
lO the link flanges is A"F, /4 (LRFD) or A"F,. /4( 1.5) (liSP).
528.2.3 Link Rotation Angle
528.4 Link~to·Cl)lumn Connections
Tile link rotation angle is the inelastic angle belwecn the
Link ~ to ~colunlll
connections must he capable of sustainin:l.
li nk and the beam outside of the link when the total story
drift is equal to the design story drift. 6 . The link rotation the maximum link rot~tioll angle based 0 11 the length of 11;;:
angle shall not exceed the followin g values: link. as specified in Section 528 .2.3. The strenglh of ti ",
connectio n mea sured at the column face shall equal at h' m..!
I. 0.08 radiaos for links of length 1.6Mp /Vp or less. th e nominal shear strength of the link, Vm as specified iil
Section 528.2.2 at (he maximum link rotation angle. Link~
2. 0.02 radians for links of Ienglh 2.6Mp /Vp or grcaler.
to ~ co lumn connections shall satisfy the above requirements
3. The value detennined by linear interpolation between by One of the following:
the above values for links of length between 1.6Mp /VI'
J. Usc a connection prcqualified for EBF in accordance
with Section B~ 1. force s and moments gCJlcralcd by at Ie.!!)! J .25 times the
ex pec ted nominal shea r strength o f Ih c link RyV" , wherc V"
2. Provide qualifying cyclic I('S I results in accordance wilh
is as defincd in Sec tion 528.2.2. The available strcngth or
Section (l·4. Resulls of:ll leasl Iwo cyclic connection
th c diagona l brace shall comply with Spedfical ioll Section
tes ts shall be prov ided and are permitted to be based on
508.
one of the fo llowi ng;
il . Tests rcpm1cd ill resca rch literature or doc umentcd tests Brace membe rs shall meet the requ iremcnls of Section
performed for other projects lhal arc rcpresentative of 52 1.2.1.
project conditi ons. within the limits specifi ed in Secti on
B -4 . 528.6.2 Beam Outside Li nk
t,
h. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and The requi red combined ax.ia l and flexural sirengt h o f Ih e
are represenl ativc of project mcmbe r sizcs. matcrial bcam outside of the li nk shall be dctermined based on load
strcngths. connection con fi gurati ons. and match ing combinations stipulated by the NSCP code. For lo;,td
conncction processes, ~vi t h i n thc limits specified in combinations including seismic effects, a load QJ shall be
Scc tion 8·4 . substituted for the term E where Q I is defincd as the forccs
gencratcd by al least 1.1 timcs the expected no minal shcar
exceptioJl: strength of lh c link, RyV,,, where V.. is as defincd in Section
Wh ere reill/iJrcem em of fhe beal1l-/()-coJlIlIIll cOl/flecfion at 528.2.2. The available strength of the beam outside of the
the link end predudes yieldillg oj fhe beam twl'r th t' link sha ll hc ac term ined by the Speci fi catio n, llluiliplied by
reinforced leng,h. Ihl' fink is permi fl eti to be the beam Ii,,,
seKm(~1II from 111(' eml of the reillforcemeJll 10 rh e JHacl'
CorUl{lCfioll. Wh err such links (lI'{I used alld the link lellg,l!
does nol exceed J.6Mp / \11', cyclic leslinc of Ihe reinforced
connection is not required if rife available .r/rangr" of the
rl!illforced section ami th e COlUwction eqlia/s or eXl'£'eds the
required strellgrh calclilated based upon tile stra in -
hardened lillk as described ill Section 528_8. Full depth
sfiffellers as required ill Seclioll 528.2 .3shall be placed a r
the Iillk~ to- ,.eillforcem ell1 im elface.
528.5 Latcl-al Br aci ng of Li nk AI the con neclion between the di agonal brace and the beam
at the link end of the brace, the intersection o f the brace and
Lateral bracing shall be provided at both the lOp and bottom
beam centerlincs shall be at the end of the link or in thc link ,
link fl anges at the ends of the link. The required Strength of
each latcra! brace at the ends of the link shall be Ph = 0 .06
Mr III", where 110 is the distance between flange cClllfoids ill
528 .6.3 Braci ng Con llectiuns
mill. The required strength of the diagonal brace connections. at
both ends of the bracc. shall be at least equal to the required
For des ign accordi ng 10 Specificati on Section 502.3.3 strength o f the diagonal brace, as defined in Section
(LRFD) 528.6. 1. TIle diagonal brace co nn ection s shall also satis fy
Mr =M,1,exp = R)Zf~r the requirements of Section 526_3.3 _
For des ign accord ing to Specification Section 83.4 (AS D)
No part of Ihe diago nal brace conncc tion at thc link end of
M, = M", ex"I1.5 the brace shall cxtend over the link length. If the brace is
The required brace stiffness shall meel the provisions o f des igned to resist a pOI'lion of the link end moment , then the
Equation A ~ 1.6~ 8 of the Specification, whcre Mr is defincd diagonal uf<lce connection at the link end of the brace sha ll
ahove. Cd = I. and Lb is the link length . he designed as a fully~restraincd moment co nnect ion.
528.6 Diago nal B.. ace and Beam Outside of Li nk 528.7 13ca m-to-Co!UIIlIl Connec ti ons
If the EI3F system factors in Ihe NSC P code require moment
528.6. 1 Diago na l Bracc resist ing con ncctions away frolll the link, th en the be.mHO-
The required co mbi ned axial and flexural strength of th e co lumll connections away from Ih e lin k shall mect the
di agoll ul brace shall be determin ed based on load requirement s for bcaJll-lo-column connections for OMF
combi nati ons st ipu lat ed by the NSCr code. For load specified ill Sections I 1.2 and 11 .5.
combi nati ons including scismic effec ts, a load QI shall be
substituted for th e term E, where Q l is defincd as the axia l
If the EBF system fll 1:IOI"S in the NSCP code do not require
moment resistin g cOllnections away from the ti!lk . then the
SECTION 529
bcam-lo-colulIlli conllections lIW,lY frolll the lin k arc BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED
pennillcd 10 be designed as pinned in the plane oflhe web. FRAMJ£S'il\JinF) · .. ." .
528.8 Required Strength of Columns 529.1 Scope
In addit io n to the requiremcnts in Section 52 1.3. the Buckling-restra ined braced fram es ( BRBFJ; arc expected In
req uired stren gth of columlls shall be det erm ined from load withstand significant inelastic deformations when subjected
combinatiolls as stipul;l(ed by the NSCP code, except that 10 the forces resulting from the moti ons of the design
the seismic IO,ld E.sJmll be the forces gencnHed by 1.1 limes eanhquake. DROP shall meet the requirements ill thi s
the expected nominal shear strength of all links above the Section. Where th e NSCP code docs not contain design
level under considertll ioll . The expected nominal s h e~ r coefficieflls for BRBF, the pro visions of Section B-3 shall
strength of a link is RyV/lI where VII is as defined ill Section apply.
528.2.2.
529.2 Bracing Members
Column members shall meet [he requirements of Section
Bracing members shall be composed of a structural steel
521.2.2 .
core and a system tlim restrains the steel core frolll
buckling.
528.9 Protected Zolle
Links in EBFs 3re a protected zone, and shall satisfy the 529.2.1 Steel Core
req wrements of Section 520.4. Welding all links is
The steel corc shall be designed 10 res ist Ihe en tire axial
permitted for attachment of link stiffeners, as required in
force in the ~race.
Section 528.3.
The brace design ax ial strength , fl)F'y." . (LRFD), an d the
528.10 Demand Critical Welds brace allowable axial strength, PrJ'· /0 (ASD), in tensi on and
Complete-joint-penClration groove welds attaching the link compression, according to the limi t slate of yield ing, sha ll
flanges and the link web to the column are demand critical be determined as follows:
welds, and shall satisfy the r~qujrement s of Section 520.3.2.
(Eq. 529- 1)
<r ~ 0.90 (LRFD) !l ~ 1.67 (AS D)
where
Fysc = specified minimum yield stress of the steel core,
or actual yield stress of the steel core as
determined from a coupon test, MPa.
Asc =net area of steel core, 111m2.
Plates used in the steel core that are 50 mm thick or greater
shall satisfy the minimum notch toughness requirements of
Sec ti on 519.3.
The strain hardening adjustment factor, cu, shall be adjacent brace points.
calculated as the ratio of the maximum tension force
measured from the qualification tests specified in Section B- Uscr Note: The beam has. sufficient oUI,of-plane strength
5, Section B-S.6.3 (for the range of deformations and stiffness if the beam bent in the horizontal plane meets
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
5 · 178 CHt\I)T I::r~ !j - Sleel an(i MelJI:·>
529.5.3 Splices
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 52 1.4:
colu111n splices in BRI3F shall be designed to develop 50
percent of the lesser available flexural strength of the
connected members, dctermi ncd based on thc limit Slale of
yielding. The required shear strength shall be l.Mpc !II
(LRFD) or EMpc 1I.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where EMpc
is the SlIm of the nominal plastic flexural st rengths of the
columns above and below the splice.
1". == thicknes$ of the web, mm. 530.4.2 HB['· to- VBE Connections
L er = clear distan ce between VBE flanges, mm .
J-m E~ to- VBE conn ections shall s.uisfy the req uirements of
Section 524.2, The required shear strength, VI" of a HBE-to-
a is the angle of web yielding in radi ans, itS measured VB E connection s hall be determined in accord;:1I1ce wi th the
relative to the vertical, and it is given by:
pro vis ions of Secti on 5.24.2, except that the required shear
IIIL strength shall not be less than the shear correspond ing to
I +-- moment s at each end equal to I.IR,M" (LRFD) or ( 1.111 .5)
4 2A
tan = c R)Mp (ASD). as appropriate. together with the shear
I +,,, "(1~ + 36i~~L J resulting from the expected yi eld strength in tension of the
webs yielding at an angle a.
(Eq .530·2)
530.4.3 Width-Thickness Limitations
iI == distance between HU E centcrlincs , mill. HB E and VBE members shall meet the requ irements of
A" =cross~scc ti ona l area of a HB E, mm2. Section 521.2.2.
AI' = cross-sectional area of a VI3E, 111m2 .
1(. = moment of inenia of 11 YBE take n perpendicular 530.4.4 Lateral Bracing
to the direction of the web plate line, mm4 .
HU E 511nll be lalernll y braced at all intersections with VI3E
L = disl:m cC'- bet ween YBE ccnl crlin c:-; , mill.
and 11t a spacing not to exceed 0.086 RJ:JF.,.. 1301h fl anges of
HB E shall be braced ei ther directly or indirect ly. The
530.2.2 Panel Aspeel Ratio
required strengt h of lateral bracing shall be at least 2 percellt
The rat io of panel length to height, VIT, shall be limited to of lhe HBE fl ange nominal strength, P,. bf tf. The requi red
0.8 < Vii 50 2. 5. stiffness of all lateral bracing shal t' be detcnnined in
accordan ce with Equation A-I .6-8 of Appendix A-I .6 of the
Specification. In these equations, Mr shall be co mputed 11S
RJZP,. (LRFD) or Mr shall be computed as R)ZF,. 11.5
rh
National Structural Code of Ihe Plli1ippines 6 Edition Volume 1
(AS D), as appropriat e, and Cd ::: I.O.5l0. 4. 5. VB E Splic.:cs .
VBE ..:pl icc..: ..:hall com pl y wit h 11K'. n:quirenH:ms oj" Sectio n
521.4.
d. Weld access holes: size, geometry and fi nish 3. Listi ng of systems for wh ich connection is prequalified:
SMF. IMF. Of lOBI"
c. Welding q uali ty control and qu ality ,\ssurancc beyond
that described III Secti on 18, including th e 4. L..ist ing of li mits for all prcqualificati on variab les listed
nondestructive tes ting (NOT) method, inspec.tion in Section 13- 1.4.
frequency, acceptance criteria Imd docu mentation 5. Listi ng of deman d cril ical welds
requirements
6. Definiti on of t he region of the co nnection th at
6. Bolts: co mprises the protec ted zone
a. Bolt dia meter 7. De tailed descri ption of the design procedure for the
connection. as req uired in Section B- 1.5.
b. Bolt grade: ASTM A325. A490. or other
8. Lis t of references of test reports, research reports and
c. Installmioll requirements: prctcilsioncd, snug-tight, or other publications th at provided the basis for
other preq ualiflca ti on
d. !-lole type: standard, overs ize. $ho r{ ~slot, long-slot, or 9. SUlllmary or quali ty co ntrol and quality assurance
other proced ures
c. Hole fabricati on method: drill ing, punching, su b-
punching an d rea ming, or other
f. Other parameters pertin ent to the specific connection
un der co nsideration
B-2.3. Contractor Documents !. QA agcncy's written practices for the monitoring and
control of the agency's operations. The wrilten practice
The following documents shall be submitted for review by
sha ll include:
the engineer-of-record or designee, prior to fabricat ion or
erection, as appl icable: a. The ;tgency's procedures for the selection and
admini st ration of inspection personnel, describing the
1. Shop drawin gs
trainin g, experience (\nd examination requirements for
2. Erection drawings qualification and certificati on of inspection personnel ,
and
3. Welding Procedu re Specifications (WPS), which shall
specify all applicable essential variables of A WS D I b. The age ncy's inspection procedu res, including general
and the foll owing, as applicable inspection. material controls, and visual weldin g
inspection
a. po wer source (constant current or constant voltage)
2. Qualifi cations of management and QA personnel
b. for demand cri tical welds, electrode manufacturer and
desi gnated for the project
trade name
3. Qualitic<lIioll record s for Inspectors and NDT
4. Copies of the man ufacturer's typical certificate of
technicians designated for lhe project
confonnance for all electrodes, fluxes and shield ing
gasses to be used. Certificates of conformance shall 4. NDT procedures and equipment calibration records for
satisfy the applicab I~ A WS AS requirements. NOT to be performed and equipment to be used for the
project
5. For demand critical welds, applicable manufacturer's
certifications that the filler metal meets the 5. Daily or weekly inspection repoI1s
supplemental notch toughness requirements, as
6. Nonconformance reports
applicable. Should the filler metal manufacturer not
su pply suc h supp lemen tal certifica tions . the contractor
B·2.5 Inspection Points and Frequencies
shall have the necessary testing performed and provide
the applicabl e test reports. Inspection points and frequcncies of quality con trol (QC)
and quali ty ass urance (QA) tasks and doc umentation for th e
6. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog d'lta fo r seismic load resistin g sys tem (SLRS) shall be as provided in
SMAW, rCAW and GMAW co mposite (cored) filler the followin g tables.
metals to be used. The data sheets shall descril?c the
product, limitations of usc, recommended or typica l The following entries are used in the tables:
welqing parameters, and storage and exposure
requirements, including baking, if applicab le. Observe (0) . The inspector shalT observc these functions
The following documents shall be available for revi ew by on a random, daily basis. Weldin g operation s need not be
the engineer-of-record or designee prior to fabrication or delayed pending observations.
erection, as applicable, unl ess specified to be submitted:
Perform (1') - These inspections shal l be performed prior to c. Base Metal NDT for Lamellar Tearing and Laminations
tIll: !ina! acccpt ,lncc or the item. Where a task is noted to be
After joilH cOlllplction, base mC1i'1i thicker than J1-\ 111m
pcrf{)J"Jllcd by both QC and QA, il shall be pCfJJliltcd to
loaded in tension in the through Ihickncss direction in lee
(:oordinale the inspection fU llc tion bel ween QC and QA so
and COffler joints. where the conn ected !Hateri,,! is great er
tlllli the inspectio ll fUllct ions need he performcd hy only one
than 19 mill ;lild con tains CJP groove welds. shill I be
p'lrty. Where Q/\ is to rely upon inspection rUllctions
lIltrasonically tcsted for discontinuities behind and adjacent
performed by QC, the approval of the engineer-of-record
to the fusion line of such welds. Any base met;:}1
Clnd the authority having jurisdiction is required.
dbwvIltinuities fOlllld within tJ4 or the steel surfac.:e shall be
Doculllent (I)) ~ Thc inspector sh.}11 prepare reports
accq>tt!d or rejected on the basis of criteria or AWS D 1.1
Table 6.2, where t is thc thi ckness of the P;:111 sul~icC1Cd to
indicming that the work has been performed in acc'lmJance the Ihrough~thickJlcSS strain .
with the contract docullleJlts. The repol1 need Jlot provide
dctclilcd measuremcnts for joint fit-up, WPS scltings, d. Beam Cope and Access Hole "DT
complctcd welds, 01" . other individual items li sted in the
At welded splices an d connection!>, thermally cui surfaces
Tables ill SCCliolls B-2.5.I, B-2.5.3, or B-2.5.4. For shop of beam copes and access holes shall be tested lIsing
fabrication. Ihe report shall indicate the piece mark of the m;lgnctic particle testing or penctrant tcst ing. when the
piece inspected. For field work. the report shall indicate the nangc thickness ex.ceeds 38 mm for rolled shapes, or when
reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected. Work the web thickn ess exceeds 38 mm for built-up shapes.
not in compliance with the contraCt documents and whether
til e noncornpliance has been satisfactorily repaired sha ll be c. Reduced Beam Section Repair NDT
/loted in the inspection rerml.
Magnctic particl e test ing shall be performed all :IIlY weld
and adjacent area of the reduced bC<lln section (RI3S) plastic
B-2_5.1 Visual Welding Inspection hinge region lhat has been repaired by weldin g, or on t}lC
Visual inspection of welding shall be (he primary method base metal of th e RBS plastic hinge region if a sharp notch
used to confirm that the procedures, materials, and has been removed by grinding.
workmanship incorporated in construction arc those that
have been speci fied and approved for the project. As a f. Weld Tab Removal Siles
minimum, tasks shal l be as follows: Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on the end of
welds from whi ch the weld tab s have been removed, except
B-2,S,2 Nondestructive Testing (NOT) of Welds for continuity plale weld tabs.
Nondcstnlctive testing of welds sha ll be performed by
qualit y assurance personnel. g. Reduction of Percentage of Ultrasonic Testing
.. '.I.'.r(ly.~.I .. ~p'~~.~J.
and backing removal sill'S and access holes. - Selected welding
V"'is-u-a]-;--'j"n-sl'-ec-,-:u"o--n---;;T"'a'7
r-,7 sk - - -o-C----- ------QA'----:i _-"~4~;;~;~I\~;gg;;S {y;;c;iT(,;;;-
Before Welding
f--77-'~:--:'::;=~-c:---
Task Doc, _ Task DOc, ratc,, ___7C'-:-_______ _ o o
Material idelltifica!iol1 0 - 0 - - Preheat applied
(Type/Grade) __________ ~ _ _ __ - Interpass temperature
Fit-up of Groove Welds maintained (rnin.lmax.)
(including joint g~om~L - Proper position (F, V,H,
~ Joint rreparation
...~. DiIII cl-;<;i~)-;~~<;-(~ll j W1 mcn-t:-- _.mlt____ ___ ._. ___.._____
- Intermix of filler metals
root opening, roo! race, P/O** o ._~\voi~_~~._~~~~I_~~~.~IPp~~~~~.~_. __ ---;::------ ~~___ -;:::---- .____ ..
bevel)
- Cleanliness (condition of .__~~~_~.~~C~L~\.~~.£~.~_~. .~::.~~~~E:~~_. ~. ......~Q 0
COl1trol and handling of
_.~!~~l sur!~~~~.L ______......._____ _ welding conslJ!nables
- Tacking (tack weld
.. :..... Pac k <t.gi !l g ____.____...____ .. _______ _
o o
quality. and location),.. "'.~.': ... _ _ _ _ _ I__ ~
- Backmg type and fJl (II P/OH 0 - Exposure control .____.__._.______ _
"j~~y·;7:~)!1-;1;~~(;1~Z;~dili~;~---
applicable) _~ --.-;c:-- _____ ___ ~
Configuration and finish of 0 0 - Wind speed within limits o o
- Precipitation and
access holcs_~ _ _ _ ------I----/-------i
Fit·up of Fillet Welds te m per~~l..!..~·~ __.__ .m_. _______ ~._" ___ _
- Dimensions 9alignmcnt, Welding techniques
gaps at root) - Intcrpas;- <~Ild final () o
- Cleanliness 9condition of P/O** o cleaning
--~+---J----j.----
slee.! surfaces) ·. ·=-Each pass within profile
- Tacking (tack weld Imitations
quality and location) - Each pass meets quality
o o
**Foll()wing pcrforln~i"iluoftl;Tsill~I;;"ctTo~l-·-(ask for len requirements .. _______ .. __
----.--+---l~_____I
welds to be made by a givcn welder, with the welder NO-~~eld i J1g·o~~;:·-c;~~(j<c(i--
demonstrating adequate understanding of requirements and tacks
o o
possession of skills and tools to verify these items, the
Perform designati~n of this task shall be reduce to Observe,
and the welder shall perfonn this task, the task shall be
returned to Perform until such time as the Inspector has
reestablished adequate assurance that the welder will
perfonn the inspection t~sks listed.
tll
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~)- 1HCi CHAPTHi :) . Steel and Metals
- - --_.- -- 0 0 -
\!F;:l!ly inspect welds t o - tight condition prior to thw
~!ilnc~ criteria ._-_
... __..-
pretem;ioninp- operation ._--- .. 1
----_. __.
- Crack porhibitiol1 Fastener components not
- returncs by the wrench 0 - 0 -
Weld/base-metal fusion
- Crater cross*section P D P D prevented from rotating
Bolts arc pretensioned
------- - - - - ----- ~- - .---. i
- Weld profiles
progress systematically
.~.-
~ Weld size 0 - 0 -
---~
from most rigid point
- Undercut _._----
- toward free edges
- Porosity --
Placement-or reinforcement --I
p D P D Inspeclion Task After QC QA
fillets
--Backing bar:<;-~C~10ved alld
----_. Solting Task Doc. Task bos]
weld tabs removed and Document accepted and p j) P D I
. finished (if required)
p j) p D rejected connections
--- _ __
... ... ...- I
Rcoair activities P P D 3. Documentation
-~--~--~~~~----'----~~----.---~~--, All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop
Inspection Task Prior to QC QA
fabrication, the NOT report shall identify the tested weld by
Bolting Task Doc. Task Doc.
piece mark and location 111 the piece. For field work, til:,'
- Proper bolts selected for
0 - 0 - NOT feparl shall identify the tested weld by location in the
the joint detail
structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.
Proper bolting procedure
0 - 0 -
selected for joint detail
B-2.S.3 Inspection of Bolling
Connecting clements arc
fabricated properly, Observation of bolting operations shall be the prima;,y
including the appropriate method used to confirm that the procedures, m<iteriais, and
faying surface condition 0 o workmanship incorporated in construction are those th;ii
and hole preparation, if have becn specificd and approved for thc project. As ,;
specified, meets applicable minimum, the tasks shall be as follows:
requirements
r-===~-----+--I---~-·------ ---- B-2.S.4 Other Inspections
Pre-installation verification Where applicable, the following inspection shall be
testing conducted for p D () D perfonl1cd:
fastener assemblies and
method used Other Inspection Task QCQA
I-"'="'-"=-~----- . - ...._ .. ----- ---·-1-------1
Proper storage provided for /--;;-;-_-,--_ _~---+-T'c!a~s"-k+",D:<:>o,:cc'__1_'as~k .I?;
bolts, nuts, washers, and 0 0 Reduce beam section
.. _~)~er ras~~!2.~~",~!.l~I?Q~CI1[~~ ~~ ___.____ .. __ (RI3S) requirements, if
_"JljJlicabJc .. .•-- - ..
",.,".~ , ~
p \) P j)
- contour and finish
- dimensional tolerances
Protccted zone-no holcs--'--'-- .-.-... ~.---- .~----.. ------~·+'"·---··------i
and unapproved D
P j) l'
attachments made by
contractor
.~...---.... ----- .----
~.---.--~-.---. -~--.-- ---- ------_.- ---- ,,-- ---- ---- l _
B-3,2 Symbols
The fOl/owing symbols arc lIsed in thi s appendix.
Bucking- Restrained
Braced Frames, nOIl -
Design Coefficients and Factors for basic Seismic Load Resi sting Systems From (AISC)
be removed from the tes t specimen welds unless the sha ll be conducted by controlli ng the interstory drift angle,
correspondi ng wel d back-ing and weld tabs arc 0, imposed on the test specimen, as specified below:
remo ved from the prototype welds,
I. 6 cycles at e= 0.00375 rad
6. Methods of inspection and nondestructive testi ng and
2. 6 cycles at 0 = 0.005 md
standards of accept ance used fo r test spec imen welds
sha ll be the same as those to be used for the prototype 3. 6 cydes at 0 =0.0075 rad
we lds.
4. 4 cycles at 0 = 0.01 rad
B-4.S.7 Bolts 5. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.Ol 5 rad
T he boiled po rt ions of the test speci men shall rep licate the 6. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.02 rae!
bolted porlions of the prototype conncction as closely as
possible. Add itionally, bolted portions of the lest spec imen 7. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.03 rad
shal l satisfy the fo ll owing req ui rement s: 8. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.04 rad
1. T he boll grade (for exa mple, ASTM A325, A325M,
AST M A490, A490M. AS TM F1852) used in the test Continue loading at increments of 0 = 0.01 radin n, with two
specimen shall be the same as that to be used for the cycles o f loading at each stcp.
prototype, except that ASTM A325 bolts may be
substituted for ASTM F 1852 ho lts, and vice vcrsa. B-4.6.3 Loading Sequence for Link-to-Column
C Ollnections
2. T he type and orien tation o f boll holes (standard ,
overs ize, shOll slot, long s lot, or other) used in the test Qun li fy ing cyclic tests of link -to-co lumll mo ment
specimen shall be the same as th ose to be lI sed for the connecti o ns in eccentrically braced frames shall be
correspondi ng bolt holes in the prototype. conducted by controll ing the total li nk rotation <.I ngle, l' total ,
imposed on th e test specimcil, as follows:
3. W hcn inelastic rotation is to be developed either by
yielding or by sli p within a bolted portion of the I. 6 cyc les at fw!al = 0.00375 rad
conncction, the met hod used to make the bolt hole s 2. 6 cycles at f tola l = 0.005 rad
(d rill ing, sub-punching and reaming, or other) in the
test spec ime n shall be the sallle as that to be lIsed in fh e 3. 6 cycles at Y,o",' = 0.0075 rad
correspondi ng bolt holes i n the prototype. 4. 6 cycles a t 110131= 0.01 rad
4. Bolts in the tcst spec imen sh<\l1 have the same 5. 4 cycles at Yloull = 0.0 15 rl.ld
installation (pretensiolled or other) and faying surface
preparati on (no specified slip res istance, C lass A or 13 6. 4 cycles at flOlal = 0.02 rad
slip resi stance, or other) as that to be Ll sed for the 7. 2 cycles at flot,ll = 0.03 m d
corresponding bolt s in the prototype.
8. J cycle at Ylotal = 0.04 rad
11-4.6 Loading History 9. J cycle at YIOI.:II = 0.05 fad
Quali fying cycl ic tests of bea l11 ~ t o - col lJ mn 1110 men t Steel
connecfions in special and int ermediate moment frames Tens ion testi ng siUll! be conducted on samples of sleel ta ken
from the materia l adj at.:cnl to each test specime n. Tensio n ~
tes ( res ults from cCI1i llcd mill tes t reports shall he reponed 2. A draw ing of Ihe connccti on dClail s howin g lilcmher
hut arc not permitted to he used ill place of speci mcn testing. sizes, grades of steel, th e si"l.-cs o f all connec tion
for the purposes o f this Section. Tension-test results shall be cle ments, wel di ng details including fi ller mewl, the size
based upon test ing that is conducted in acco rdillH':c with and locati on of holl hol es, the size and grade of boils,
Section B·4.8.2. and all other pertinent de tails of the connection.
B-S.2 Symbols
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first
used.
,db Deformation quantity used to cOl1trol loading of
the test specimen (total brace end rotation for the
subassemblage test spccimcn; total brace axial
deformation for the brace test specimen) (Section
£-5.6).
1. The mechanism for accommodating inelastic rotation in 2. The calculated margins of safety for the brace test
the subassemblagc test specimen brace shall be the specimen and the prototype shall account for
same as that of the prototype. The rotational differences in material propeI1ies, including yield ;m' i
deformation demands on the subassembJage test ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and toughness.
specimen brace shaH be equal to or greater than those
of the prototype. B~S.S.2 Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen
2. The axial yield strength of the steel core, Pl'sn of the The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be
brace in the subassemblage test specimen sh'all not be manufactured in accordance with the same quality contn:·)
less than that of the prototype where both strengths are and assurance processes and procedures.
based on the core area, Asp multiplied by the yield
strength as determined from a coupon test. B~S.S.3 Similarity of Brace Test Specimen and
Prototype
3. The cross~sectional shape and orient<ltion of the steel
core projection of the sllbasscmblage test specimen The brace test specimen shall meet thc follo\\<11.:'
brace shall be the same as that of the brace in the requircmcnts:
prototype. J. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel
4. The same documented design methodology shall be core shall be the sanie as thaI orthe prototype.
used for design of the subassemblage as used for the 2. The axial yield strength of the steel core, 1\,(,> o(
prototype, to allow comparison of the rotational braee test specimen shal! not vary by !llor~ {h~"
deformation demands on the subassemblage brace to percent from that of the prototype where both strenglils
the prototype. In stability calculations, beams, columns, arc based on the core area, A.ln multiplied by tbe yield
and gussets connecting the core shall be considered strength as determined from a coupon test.
parts of this system.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~) · 19G CHAP1TFl5· Stet;i ancJ Met als
B·s.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing Add itional drawings, data, and discussio n or the test
Tension iCsting shall be C(lIH.lucted ill accordance wilh speci men or test results arc pcrmillcd (0 be inclu(k~d in the
ASTM A6, ASTM A37(), and ASTM EH, with th e lollnwing rcpol1.
exceptions:
B·S. I ()Acccpt~lncc Criteria
I. The yield st ress Ihm is reponed from the test shall he
At Icast olle subassem blagc test til al sati sfies th e
based upon the yield stre ngth definition in ASTM
requi re ments 0(" Section 8·5.4 shall be performed. At least
A370, lIsing th e olTset method of 0.002 strain.
one brace lest that satisfies the requirements of Section B·
2. The Joadiq; !·atc for the (cl)sion lest shall repliciUc, as 4.5 shall be performcd. Within the requ ired protocol ran ge
closcly as is practical, th e IO}lding ratc L1sed for the test all tcsts shall satisfy the following requirem ents:'
specimen.
I. The plot showing the applied load " vs. displ llccmcllt
3, The coupon shall be machined so thai its longitudinal history shall exh ibi t stable. repe<ltable beha vior with
axis is parallel to the longitlldinal axis of the stcel core. positive illcrementa! stiffness.
2. There shall be no fracture. brace in ~tabil i ty or brace end
H-S.9 Test Reporting Requirements
connection failure .
For each tcst specimen, a written test rcp0l1 mce.ting th e
requ irements of thi s Section shall be prepared. The rcpol1 3. For brace tests, each cycle to a deform ation greatcr than
shall thorough Iy docu melll all key fea lUres and resul ts of the !.1by the maximum tension and compression fortes shall
test. The repO[1 shall include the following information: not be less than the n omi n ~1 stre ngth of the core.
J. A drawing or clear descriptioll of' the lest speci mell , 4. F~'o r brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than
including key di mensions, bou nd ary cond itions al /.Jby the ratio of the maxim um com press ion force to the
loadin g and reactioll points, and location of lateral maximum tension force shall not exceed 1.3.
bracing, if any.
Other acceptance criteria may be adopted for the brace test
2. A drawing of the connection delHi ls showing member speci men or subasse mbl age test specimen subject to
sizes, grades of steel. th e sizes of all con necti on qualified peer reyiew and appro val by the authority hav ing
clements, weldin g details including tiller metal, the size juris~~ction.
and location of bolt or pin holes. the size and grade of ......
co nnectors, and all other peninent details of the ..'
connections.
3. A listin g of all other essential varinbles as listed in
Section B-5.4 or 3-5,5, as appropriate.
4. A listing or plot showing the applied load or
displacement hi slory.
5. A plot of the appli ed load versus the deform ation, 6.b.
The method used to delennine the deformations shall
be clearly s hown . The locations on the lest specimen
where the loads and deformations were measured shall
be clearly identifi ed,
2. Locations where backing bars are to be removed 3, Mag neti c p,utide tes ting (MT) and dye penetrant
testing (PT) for QA Illay be perforilled only by
3. Locm iolls where we ld tabs arc to be removed technicians certifi ed as Level 11 by their e mployer, or
4. NOT to be pcrfotrned by the fabri cator. if any certified as AS NT Level III throu gh examination by th e
ASNT and certified by th eir employer.
u
National S tructural Code of the Philippines 6 , Edition Volume 1
!j· 19B CHAPH:11 S . Steel iln<J Mal,lls
B-6.4 Nondestructive Testing Procedures III. The steel used for the qualification testing shall !)l'. of the
same type and grade as will be llscd in production.
U-6.4.1 Ultrasonic Testing
Ultrasonic test ing s hall he performed accordi ng 10 the The max im ulll heal input to be used in production sha ll be
procedures prescrihed in A WS D 1.1 Sect ion 6, Pan F used in the qunJilicatioll tesling. The qualificd Illaximum
following a written procedure containing thc clements intcrpliss temperature s hall he th e lowe:.;t intcrpass
prescribed in paragraph K3 of Annex K. Section 6, Part F temperature used for any pass during qualijicatioll testing.
procedures shall be qualified using wcld mock-ups having Both weld melal and HAZ shall be tested. The weld meta!
1.5 mlll-diamctcr side drilled holes similar to Annex K, ':l1all meet all the mechanical properties required by Section
Figure K-3. .' 520.3.1, or th ose for demand cri ti cal welds or Scction
5203.2. as appli cable. The hem "ffeeled ?olle CVN
B-6.4.2 Maglletic Pm·tiele toughness shall mect a minimum requircment of 27 J at 2 I
°C with specimcns taken at both J and 5 mm from the.
Testing Magnetic particle testing shall be performed
fusion line.
{lceording to procedLlrcs prescribed in A WS D 1.1 , following
a wrillen procedure utili zing the Yoke Method thtH
B·6.5.5 Weld Tabs
conforms 10 ASTM E709.
Where practicable, weld tabs shall extend beyond the edge
B~6.5 Additiollal Welding Provisions
of the joint a minimulll of olle inch or the thi ckness of the
par!, ~hichever is greater. ExtensiDns need not exceed SO
1l1111.
B-6.S.1 Inlermixed Filler Mettlls
When rCA W-S filler metlll s arc used in cOlllbin,lIion wil h
Where used, weld labs shall be rcmoved to wi th in 3 illJll of
filler metals of other processes, including rCAW ·G, a test the base metal surface, except at continuity plates where
spccimen shall bc prepared and mechanical testin g shall be rcmoval to with in 6 !llmof th e plate edge is acceptable, and
conducted to verify that the notch toughn ess of the thc end of the weld finished. Removal shall be by air carbon
combined materials in thc intermixed region of the wcld arc cutting (CAe-A), grinding, chipping, or thermal culti ng.
meets thc notch tough ness requ irc ments of Secti on 520.3.1 The process sha ll be con trolled to lIlinimiz.e errant gouging.
and, if req uired, the notch toughness rcquirements for The edges where weld tabs have been removed shall be
demand critical welds of Section 520.3.2. finished to a surface roughness of 13 ~ln1 or betlcr. Grinding
to a flush condition is not required. The contour of the weld
B-6.5.2 Filler Met,,1 Diffusible Hydrogen end shall provide iI smoo th tran sition, free of notches and
Wclding electrodes and cicctrode· nux combinati ons shall sharp comers. At T-joints, a mini mum rad ius in the corner
meet the requirement s for H J6 (16 mL maximum diffusible necd not be provided. The weld e nd sha ll be free of gouges
hydrogen per 100 grams deposited weld metal ) as tested in and notches. Weld defects not greater than 2 nun deep shall
accordance with AWS A4. 3 Standard Methods for bc faired to a slope not greater than I :5. Other weld defects
Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of shall be excavated and repaired by welding in nccord ancc
Martensitic, Bainil!c, and Fcrrit;c Steel Weld Metal with an applicable WPS.
Produced by Arc Welding. (ExCel'l ion: GMA W solid
electrodes.) Thc manufacturer's typical certificate of 11-6.5.6 Bottom Flange Welding Sequence
conformance shall be considered adequatc proof that the When using weld access holes to facilitate eJP groove
supplied electrodc or electrode-flux co mbination meets this we lds of beam bottom flanges to column flanges or
requirement. No testing of filler metal samples or of continuity plates, the groove wcld shall be sequenced as
production welds shall be required. follows: .
1J-6.S.3 Gas-Shielded Welding Processes 1. As far as is practicable, starts and stops shall not be
GMA Wand FCA v.,'-G shall not be performed in winds placed directly under the beam w('.\).
exceedi ng 5 kill/hI'. Windscreens OJ' ot her shelters may be 2. Each la yer shall be completed across the full width e,l'
used to shield the we ld ing operation from excess ive winci. (he llange before begi nni ng the next laycr.
:~. For each la yer, the weld s{(trts and stops shall be nil :h!'
opposite side of the beam web, as compared to the
B-6.S.4 Maximum Intcrpass Temperatures
previous layer.
Maximum inlerpass temperatures shall not exceed 290 oc.
measured at a distance not exceeding 75 rnm from the St31t
of the weld pass. The maximuill illlcrpass temperature Illay
be increased by qualification lc.<;ting thal includes we ld
metal and base metal CVN testin g using AWS D 1. J Annex
th
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
assembly has rcm.: hcd the inlcrpass temper.Hure prescribed
(l·7.2 Test Conditions in Table 13 -7.2- 1. The inlcrpa ss temperature shall be
Test s shall be conduclCd <It the ran ge of heal inputs for maimaincd for the rema inder of the weld. Should il be
whi ch th e weld liller met al will be qualified under the !letcss.lr)' 10 in terrupt weld in g, the asse mbl y sh,11J be
weldin g pfOt:cdurc specification (WPS). It is recommend ed allo wcd (0 cool in air. The assc mbl y sha ll then he heated 10
that test s be co ndu cted at the low heal input level and high th e prescribed interp;!ss temperature befo re welding is
heat input level indicated in Table 0 ·7.2· /' resumed.
The lesl asse mbly shall be l<ick we ldeu and heated to the
specified preheat tempcrnturc, measured by temperature
indicating cra yons or sUifacc (emperature thermometers one
inch from the ce nter of the groove al the location shown in
the figures ci ted above. Weldin g shaH co ntinue until the
COMPOS ITE INTERM EDIATE MOMENT FRAM E FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMN. Roun,! or rectangu lar
(C~IMF). Co mposite moment framc meeting the structural steel section fill ed with concrete.
requirements of Scction 54 I .
FULLY COMPOSITE IIEAM. Composite beam that has
COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAME (C- a sufficient number of shear conllectors to develop the
OBF). Composite braced frame meeting the requirements of nominal plastic flexural strength of the composite secti on,
Section 544 . .
INTERM EDIATE SEISMIC SYSTEMS. Sei smi c
COMPOSITE ORDINAHY MOMENT FRAME (C- sys tems designed assumin g moderate inelastic action occurs
OMF). Co mposite moment fra me meeting the requirements in some mem bers under the des ign earthquake.
of Section 545.
LOAD-CARRYING REINFORCEMENT.
COMPOSITE PAHTIALLY HESTHAIN ED Reinforcemen t in composi te mcmbers designed and detailed
MOMENT FnAME (C·PRMF). Composite lllomen t to resist th e required !oil(b.
frame meeting {he requ ire ments of Seclion 539.
ORDINARY REINFOR CED CONCRETE SHEAR
COMPOSITE SHEAH WALL. Reinforced conc rete wall W ALL WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS (C-
that has uncilcased or rcinforced ~co ncrete,cncased ORC'V). Co mposite shear walls meeting the requirem ents
structural steel sections as boundary members. of Section 546.
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
ORDINARY SEISMIC SYSTEMS. Seismic systems SECTION 532
de_signed assllming limited inelastic action occurs in some
members under the design earthquake. SCOPE
PARTIALLY COMPOSITE BEAM. Unencascd These Provisions shall govern the design, fabrication, and
composite beam with a nominal flexural strength controlled erection of composit9 structural steel and reinforced
by the strength of the shear stud COllllectors. concrete members and connections in the seismic load
resisting systems (Sl.. .RS) in buildings and other structures,
PARTIALLY RESTRAINED C0MPOSITE where other structures are defined as those designed,
CONNECTION. Plll1ially restrained (PR) C01l!Icctions as fabricated, and erected jn a manner similar to buildings,
defined ill the Specification that connect partially or fully with buJjding~like vertical and lateral load-resisting
composite beams to stee! columns with flexural resistance systems. These provisions shall apply when the seismic
provided by a force couple achieved with steel response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in the
reinforcement in the slab and a steel scal angle or similar NSCP code) is taken greater than 3.
connection at the bottom flange.
When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, i··:
REINFORCIm·CONCRETE-ENCASED SHAPES. taken as 3 or less, the structure is not required to satis!
Structural steel sections encased in reinforced concrete. these provisions unless required by the NSCP codc.
RESTRAINING BARS. Steel reinforcement in composite The requirements of Pall 2B modify and supplement tk'
members that is not designed 10 carry required loads, but is requirements of Part 2A and form these Provisions. Thev
provided to facilitate the erection of other steel shall be applied in conjuJ1c tion with the AISC Specificalio;l
reinforcement and to provide anchorage for stirrups or tics. for Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360, hereinaf"i"
Generally, such reinforcement is not spliced to be referred to as the Specification. The applicable requiremCiii:i
continuous. of the Building Code Requirements for Structural Concl"u'
and Commentary, ACI 318, as modified in these Provisio'o'-;
SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR shall be used for the design of reinforced concre!.·
WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL componcnts in composite SLRS.
ELEMENTS (C-SRCW). Composite shear walls meeting
the requirements of Section 547. For seismic load resisting systems incorporating reinforce':
concrete components designed according to ACI 318, (ii':
SPECIAL SEISMIC SYSTEMS. Seismic systems requirements for load and resistance factor design
designed assuming significant inelastic action occurs In specified in Section 502.3 of the Specification shall be used.
some members under the design earthquake.
When the design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffnl'!
UNENCASED COMPOSITE BEAM. Composite beam propeJlies of the component members of composite systCi:"
wherein the steel section is not completely enclosed in shall reflect their condition at the onset of signific,IL',
reinforced concrete and relies on mechanical connectors for yielding of the structure.
composite action with a reinforced slab or slab on metal
deck. Wherever these Provisions refer to the NSCP code and the""
is no local building code, the loads, load cornbina!i{;:;.
system limitations and general design requireI~ents shall i,:.;
those in SEllASCE 7.
The documcnl s refercnced in Ihese provisions shilll include The required strength and olher I>J"{)visions for seismi c
Ihose lislcd in P'1!1 2A Sceli oll 5 J 5 with the follo wing de sign catego ries (SDCs) and seismic usc groups and the
mlditions: limitations on height and irregularity shall be as specificd in
the NSCP code.
American Socicl y or Civil Enginccn; .Standard for thc
Structural Design of Composite Slabs, ASCE 3-91 The design story drift and story drift limits shall be
determined as requircd jn the NSCP code.
American Welding Sociely Structural Welding Code- ;·~.~::fri~~i;~t~rf~p!~~l$~1l~~r~~\~~1tr~~f.jt~;!i{~~~~;~{~~~';;1:W;;~/:
Reinforcing Steel, AWS D 1.4 -98
': : :.f'~~ :,:;::';ii~ ?~.: ~~~::~{:;' /f:~f~\~,~~W{~:!:.~~~,}~~~@~t~tNfH(::i{:; ~:~X:~~:~~{f0:~{;)~>'
537.4 .2.
2. The con trihuti on of ,the reinforced·concrete-encased
shape to the strength of the colulllll as provided in AC I
537.1 Scope 3 18.
The design of composite members in the SLRS described in 3. The seismic requirement s for reinforced concrete
Sec tions 539 throu gh 548 shall meet the require ments of columns as speci fied in the descript ion of the
Ihis Section and th e Jll<llcriaJ requirements of Section 536. composi te seism ic systems in Secti ons 539 through
548.
537.2 Composite Floor and Roof Slabs
The desi gn of composite flo or and roof slabs shall meet the 537.4.1 Ordinary Seismic Syslem Requirements
requirements of ASCE 3. Composite sla b diaphragms shall The followin g requirements for encased com posi te columns
meet th e requirement s in thi s Section . are applicab le to all composite systems, including ordin ary
seism ic systems:
537.2.1 Load Transfer
I. The available shear strength of the co lumn shall be
Details shall be des igned so as 10 transfer loads between Lhe determined in accordance with Specification Section
di aphragm and boundary members, collector clements, and 509.2.1 .1d. The nOr'ninal shear strength of the ti e.
clements of the hori zomai framing system. reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with
ACI 3 18 Secti ons 11.5 .6.2 through 11.5.6.9. In ACI
537.2.2 Nominal Shear Strength 318 Sections 11.5.6.5 and 11.5 .6.9, the dimension bw
The nominal shear strength of composite diaphragms and shall equal the width of the conc rete cross -section
concrete-filled steel deck diaphragms shall be taken as the minus the width of the slIl1ctura l shape measured
nom inal shear stre ngt h of the reinforced conc rete above the perpendicular to the directi on of shear.
top of th e steel deck ribs in accord ance with ACI 3 18 2. Composite colum n!; designed to share the appli ed load s
cxcl u'ding Chapter 22. Alternatively, the composite
between the stl11c tural steel section and the reinforced
diaphragm nominal shear strength shall be determi ned by
co ncrete encascmem shall have shear connectors th at
in-plane shear [~st s of concre te-filled di aphragm s. meet the requirements of Specification Section 509.2.1.
3. TIle maxi mum spaci ng of transverse tics shall meet the
537.3 Composite Beams requirements of Specificat ion Sect ion 509.2.1.
Com posite beams shall meet the require ment s o f Section
509 . Composite beams Ihat are part of compos ite-special Transverse ti es shall be located vertically within one-haif of
moment frames (C-S MF) shall also mect the requirement s the lie spac ing abo ve the top of the footin g or lowest beam
of Sec tion 540.3. or slab in an y story and shall be spaced as provided herein
within one-half of the tic spacin g below the lowest beam or
537.4 Encased Composite Columns slab framin g into the column .
Thi s sectio n is appli cable to columns th at Transverse bars shall have a diameter th at is not less than
1. consi st of reinforccd-concrcte encased shapes with a one-fiftieth of the greatest side dimension of the composite
struclural steel area lhal comprises at least J percent of member, except that lics shall not bc smaller than Diam
the total composite column cross section; and 10Illm bars and need not be larger than Diam 16 mm bars.
Alternatively, welded wire fabtic of equiva lent area is
2. meet the additional li mit ati ons of Speci ficati o n Section permitted as trans verse re inforcemen t except when
509.2. J. Such co lumns shat! meet the requi rements of prohibited for intermediate and special seismic systems .
Specification Section 509 , except as modifi ed in thi s
Sec ti on. Additi ona l require me nts, as speci fied for 4. Load-ccHTying rein fo rcement shall meet th e detai ling
intermediate an d specia l seismi c sys tems ill Sections and spli ce requiremcilts of ACI 318 Sections 7.8.1 and
537.4.2 and 537.4 .3shall apply as required in th e 12.17. Load-carryin g reinforcement shilll be provided
descriptions of the com pos ite seismi c sys te ms in at e very corn e r of (I rectangular cross-secti on. The
Sections 539 through 548. maximum spacing o f other load carryin g or resu:ai ning
longitudinal reinforcement shall be one- half of the least
Colum ns that co nsi st of reinforced-concrete-en cased shapes side dimensio ns of the compos ite member.
shall meet the requirements for re inforced concre te COIUIllIIS 5. Splices an d end bearing details for e ncased com posite
0(' ACI 31 8 except as modified for co lumns in ordill ary seismic systems shall meet th e
I. The st ructural steel secti on shear con nectors in Section requirements of the Speciiicatio n and ACI 3 }8 Section
alone is greater th an the load effect from a load C. The minimuill wall th ic kness of concrclc-/i lled
combinat ion of I.OD + O.St. rectangu lar HSS shall be
6. Em:,lsed composite colullllls used in a C-SMF shall Im in =: .fi;)./2E (E'I. 5)7 .- 2)
meet the following requirements:
a. Transverse reinforcement shall meet the requ irements for th e flat width b of each face, where b is as defined in
in Seetinn 537.4.3 (3)(c) at the top and bottom of the
column over the region specified in Section 537.4.2. :!:i:'~i~:X~:i:~': .,IT;rabb:llli~C'502.4.1.
b. The strong-column/wctl k-bcull1 design requirements ill
Section 540.5shal (bc stltisfied. Colulllll bases shall be
detailed to sustain inelastic fle xur<-l l hin ging.
c. The rcquired shear strengt h of the column shall meet
the requirements of ACI 318 Section 2 1.4.5.1.
7. When the column terminates on tl footi ng or mat
foundation, the transverse reinforcement tiS specified in
this section shall extend into the footin g or mat at least
300 Illm. When (he column terminates on (t wall, the
transversc rei uforccmenl shall extend into the wa ll for
a t least the length required to develop full yielding in
the rei nforced-concrete-encased shape and longitudinal
reinforcement.
8. Welded wire f'lbri c is not permitted as transverse
reinforcement for special seismic system s.
539.2 Columns
Structural steel columns : .: hall mect the requirements of
Section 5 J 9 and 521 and the specification.
th
National Siruclul'e:l l Code of U'18 Philippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
~; 2 10 CHAP TEH 5 - Steel and Metals
= di stance from the lOp of the steel beam to the lOp 3. Composite columns exempted by the minimum flexural
of concrete, mm. strength requirement in Part 2A Section 522.6(a) shall
= depth of the steel beam, mm. have transverse reinforcement that meets the
= specified minimum yield stress of the steel requirements in Section 537.4.3(3).
beam, MPa
E = elastic modulus of the steel beam, MP"
2. Beam flanges shall meet the requirem ents of Part 2A
Section 540.4, except when reinforced - concre te ~
encased compression elements have a reinforced
concrete cover of at least 50 mm and confinement is
provided by hoop reinforcement in region s where
plastic hinges are expected to occur under seismic
defonnations . Hoop reinforcement shall meet th e
requirements of ACJ 3 18 Section 21.33.
Neither structural steel nor composite tnlsses are
permitted as Oex ural members to resist seismic loads in
C~SMF unless it is demonstrated by; testin g and
analysis that the particular system provides adequate
ductility and energy dissipation capacity.
th
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~S-212 CH AP'/[: F{ :> Steel and Mu tals
544.1 Scope
543.1 Scope This Section is appli cable 10 concentrically braced frame
This Section is applicable to braced framcs that consist of systems that consist of composite or reinforced concrete
concentrically co nnc cted members. Minor eccentricities :.I rc columns. structural steel or composite beams. and structural
permilled jf they Hre accounted for in the design. Colunins steel or composite braces. Composite onJinary braced
shall be struct ural steel , composite stru ctural steel , or frames (C~OBF) shall be designed assuming that limited
reinforced concrete. Beams and braces shall be either inelastic action under lhe desig n cal1hquake will OCc ur in
structural steel or composite stl1l clllral steel. Composite th e beams, column:;, braces, and/or connecti ons.
special concentrically braced frames ( C ~CBF) shall be
designed assuming that inelastic acti on under the design 544.2 Columns
earthquake will occur primarily throu gh tension yielding Encased composite columns shall meet the requirements for
and/or buckling of braces. ordinary seismic systems of Sections 537.4. Filled
composite columns shall meet the rcquircmcnts of Section
543.2 Columns 537.5 for ordinary seismic systems. Reinforced concrete
Sti'UC!uml steel columns shall lIlee t the requ iremellts of Pm1 columns shall Illeet the requiremen ts of ACI 3 18 excl udin g
2A Sections 537 and 539. Composit e columns shall meet Chapt er 21.
the requirem ent s for special sei smic systems of Section
537.4 or 537.5 . Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the 544.3 Beams
requirements for structural truss clements of ACI 3 I 8 Structural steel and co mposite beams shall meet the
Chapter 21. requirements of the Speci fi cation.
SECTION 545
545.4 Ilraecs
qpMtfO~IrE ll;P;~N1;~~A!~,"Y . Structural steel braces 'shall meet the requirements for EBF
BRACED FRAMES (C·EBF) of Part 2/\ Section 528 .
545.2 Columns
Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements
for structural tru ss clements of ACI 3 18 Chapter 2 J.
Composite columns shall meet the require-ments for special
seismic systems of Secti ons 517.4 or 537.5. Additionally,
where a link is adjacent to a reinforced co ncrete column or
encased composite column, tran sverse col umn
reinforcement meeting the requirements of ACI 318 Section
2 1.4 .4 (or Sect ion 537.4c(6)a for composite co lumn s) shall
be provided above and below the link connection. All
columns shall meet the requirements of Part 2A Sect ion
528.10.
545.3 Links
Links shall be uncllcased stlllctural steel and shaH meet the
requirement for eccentrically braced frame (ESF) link s in
Part 2A Section 528 . It is pel"mi Hed ( 0 encase the portion or
the beam outside of the link in reinforced concrete. Beallls
cont aining the link arc permitted to act compositely with the
floor Sl;lb lIsing sI\c<H" COllneClors along ,111 or any port ion of
(he beam if the composite action is considered when
determining the nominal strength of th e link.
111
N(llional Structural Code of lhe Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
[5- ?1 t1 CHAprF F~ 5 . Steel and Metals
547.1 Scope
Special reinforced concrete she'::1 walls composite with
structural steel elements (C·SRC W) syste ms shall meet Ihe
requirements of Section 15 for C-ORCW and the shear-wall
requirement of ACI 318 including 0haptcr 21 , except as
modifi ed in this Section.
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volu me 1
~) ·· 216 CHAP T£: H 5 - Steel and Melal:.
n = 1.67 (ASD)
(Eq.548-1 )
..:'~~!~.3~_r~)~~~::~~1~Z~~~!~'~~.~I!~:~~~~~~)\\1~~!~t·:W~~t\~~~1¥~~:
<p = 0.90 (LRFD)
V"., ::;: nomi nal shear strength of the stee l plate, N
A sp = horizontal area of stiffened steel plate, mrn 2.
f~\. = speci fied minimum yield stress of the phnc,
MPa.
e Distance measured in line of fOJ'ce from center of a A verage yield stress of section
standard hole to nearest edge of an adjacent hole OJ' Tensile yield stress of corners
to end of connected part toward which the force is Weighted average tensile yield stress of nat
directed pOl1ions
e Distance measured in line of force from center of <l Yield stress of stiffener steel
standard hole to nearest end of connected pal1 Tensile yield stress of virgin steel specified by
e nl ;" Minimum allowable distance measured in line of Section 551.2 or established in accordance with
force from centerline of a weld to nearest edge of Section 556.3.3
all adjacent weld or to end of co nnected part
toward which the force is directed f Stress ill compression element co mpweci 011 has is
of effective design width
C~x,Csy Ecce ntricities of load components measured from Average comput ed stress in full unreduced fl ange
the shear center and in the x and y directions. width
respecti vely Stre ss at service load in cover plate or sheet
'.,. Yield strain = FIE Normal stre ss du e to bending alon e at the
maximum nonnal on the cross section
F Fabrication fact or due to combined bending and torsio n
F.SJI Design stress range Normal stress due to torsion alon e at the
Pm Threshold fatigue stress range maximum normal stress on the cross
Fl· Critical buckling stress section due to combined bending and
Fer Plate elastic buckling stress torsioll.
Fd Elastic di stortional buckling stress Co mputed compressive stress in clement
Fc Elastic distortional buckling stress being considered. Calculations are based
Fe Elastic buckling stress 011 effective section at load for which
serviceability is determined.
I;~>I Mean va lue of fabrication factor C6m puted st resses fl and f2in un sti ffened
F~, Nominal buckling stress clement, as defined in Figures 552-5 10
Fn Nominal strength of bolls 552.8. Calculations arc based on
Fill Nominal tensile strength of bolts effec tive section at load for whi ch
l'~II. Nominal shear strength of bolls serviceability is determined.
F'nl Nominal tensile st rength for bolts subject to Required shear stress on a bolt
combination of shear and tension Stresses on unstiffened element defi ned
Fsy Yield stress as specified in Section 551.2. 1, by Figures 552-6 to 552-8
Stresses at the opposite ends oj" web section parallel to web using ullrcduc.:cd
sect ion
G Shear modulus of sleel. y-ax is moment of incrlia of llange
78,000 Mpa or 795,000 kg/e m'
Index of stirre ner
g Vertical dislance betwcclllWO rows of" Index of each purlin line
cOllnections nearest to top an d bouom
flanges .I Saint-Venant torsion constant
g Transvcr.'i( ! (enler-Io-cenler spaci ng il Saint- Venum torsion constant of
between faste ner gage lines compression flang plus edge stiffener
g Gauge. spacing of fastene r perpendicular about an x-y axis located at Ihe centroid
to force of the nangc
I" Adequa te moment of inertial of stiffe ner, K.r Effecti ve length factor for buckling about
so that each compo nent elemcnt wil! y- axi s
behave as :1 st iffe ned clement k Plate budding cocfficicnt
I'JJ Effective momcnt of inertia K if Plate buckling coefficicnt for di slortiOTwl bll<:kJi ng
I, Gross moment of inenia
I, Actual moment of inertia of full stiffencr Kille" Plate buckling cocfficicnt for local sub-element
about its OWJl centroidal axis parallel to buckling
element to be stiffened K," Shear buckling coefficient
Minimum moment of inerti a of shear K¢ Rotational sti ffness
stiffen er(s) with respect to an axis in plane k¢jl" Elasti c rotati onal stiffness provided by the flange
of web to the flange/web juncture
MOlllenl of inertia of .stiffener about k" /I: Geometric rotat ional stiffness demanded by the
ccnterl ine of flat pon ion of element
Moment of in cliia of full unreduced Oange from the Dangc Iwcb juncture
section abou t principal axis k{o,,"," Elastic rotational stiffncss provided by thc web to
x-axis moment of inertia of the fl ange the flan ge/web juncture
Product of inertia of full unreduced k." Geometric rotational stiffness demanded by the
(1 """~
section about major and minor cen troida! web from the flan ge/web juncture
axes
Product of inerti a of flange about maj or L Full span for simple beams, distance h CI \'.'C{'Jl
and minor centroidal axes inflecti on point for continous bea ms, I\"j , ' :
Moment of inertia of co mpression pOl1ion member length for cantilever beam s
of secti on about centroiclal ax is of ent irc Span length
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5·224 CH AP T H i ~)· St eel and Me tals
/' Poisson's ration for slecl:::0.10 BRACED FRAM E. Essentially venical truss system that
P Reduction fHelor provides resistance lO lateral loads and provides stability for
(rr2E) / (K,L, / r.)' the structural system.
(rr2E) / (I., / ,j
(rr2E) / (K,.L,.
. . 1
/ r,J' BUCKLING. Sudden change in the geometry of a structure
(rr2E) / (L / r,.) or any of its clements unde r critical loadi ng condition.
0', Torsional buckling Slress
BUCKLING STRENGTH. Nominal Slrenglit for
Reistancc factor instability limits slates.
Resistance fac tor bending
Resistance factor for conce ntri call y loaded COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBER.
co mpression strengt h Shape manufaclUrcd by press~braking blanks sheared from
Resistance fac lOr fo r diap hragm s sheets, cui lengths of coils or plates, or by ro ll forming colel-
Resistance faclor for tensile stre ngth or- hot rolled coils or sheets: both formin g operations bei ng
Rcsistance factor for fracture 011 net section performed at ambient room temperature, thai is, without
Re sistance factor for shear strength manifest addi tion of heat such as woul d be required for hot
Resistallce factor for web crippling st rength forming.
Gross An::t. Cross area, At, without dcdlH.:lions for hol es, GlUT. Horizolltal structund member tilm SU ppOJ1s Willi
openings and culouts. p,mels and is primaril y subjected 10 bending under
hOlizontal loads, sllch <is wind load.
NET AHEA. Nel area, An, equal 10 gross arca less the arCH
of holcs,'opcnings, and ClIlOuts. IN-PLANE INSTABILITY. Buckling involving in the
plime of the frame-or the-member.
CURTAIN WALL STUD. A member in the steel framed
cxterior wall system that transfers transverse (oul-or-plane) INSTABILITY. Ultimat e loading of a structural
loads and is limited to a superimposed axinl load, cxcilJsivc componen1, frame, or strllcture in which a slight disturbance
of sheathing materials, of /lot more thllll 1460 N/m, or . in the 10(l(ls or geometry produces large displacements.
superimposed axial load of /lot more that 890 N per stud.
JOINT. Area where two or more ends. surfaces, or edges
DIAPHRAGM. Roof, floor, or other membranc or braCing arc altnched. Categorized by Iype or fastener or weld uscd
system llulI transfers in -plane forces to the lateral force and the method of force Inlllsfe r.
resisting system.
LATERAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode
DIRECT STRENGTH METHOD. An alternative design of a flexural member involving deflection out of the plane
method deHl llcd in Section C-I that provides predictions of of bending occurring simuhaneolJsly with twist about the
member strengths without the usc of effective widths. shc'll' center of thc cross -section.
DISTORTIONAL BUCKLING. A mode of buckling LOAD. Force or other action that results from the weight of
involving change ,in cros s~sec tional shape, excluding local building materials, occupants and their possessions,
buckling. ellvironmental effects. differential movemcnt, or restrained
dimensi onal changes.
DOUBLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION. A section
symmetric about two orthogonal axes through its centroid. LOAD EFFECT Forces, stresses, and defonnations
produced in a structural component by applied loads.
EFFECTIVE DESIGN WIDTH (EFFECTIVE
WIDTH). Flat width of an clement reduced for design Load Factor. Factor that aCCOU!llS for deviation of the
purposes, also known simply as the effective width. nomina! load from the actual load, (or uncertainties in the
analysis that transforms the load into a load effect and for
FACTORED LOAD. Product of a load factor and the the. probability that more than one extreme load will occur
nominal Imld. simultaneously.
FATIGUK Crack initialion and growth resulting from LOCAL BENDING. Ultimate state of large deformation
rereated application of live loads. of a flange under a concentrated transverse force.
FLAT WIDTH. Width of an clement exclusive of corners LOCAL YIEL[)ING. Yielding that occurs in a local area
measured along its plane. oi' all element.
FLAT-WIIlTII-TO THICKNESS RATIO (FLAT MASTER COIL. One co ntinuous. weld-free coil as
WIDTH RATIO) . Flat width of on element measured produced by a hal mill , cold mill, metallic coating line or
along its plane, divided by its thickness. paint line and identifiabl e by a unique coil number. In some
cases, thi s coil is cut into smaller coils or slit into narrower
FLEXURAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode in which a coils; however. all of these smaller and lor narrower
compression members defl ects laterally without a twist or finished coils arc said to have come from the same mast er
change in cross-sectional shape. coil if they arc traceable to the original master coil number.
MOMENT FRAME. Framing system that pro vides RESISTANCE FAC TOR, q>. Factor that "cco unts for
resi stance 10 lateral loads and provides stability 10 th e unavoidable deviatiolls of the nominal strength from the
struct ural sys tem primarily by shear and Ilexure of the tlc!U,l l strength and for the manne r .111<1 COJl Sl·.qIlCllc CS o r
fra ming Illcillhers alul thei r cOllllecl ions. fai lure.
PURLIN. Horizontal structural member that supports roof SS (STRUCTURAL STEEL). ASTM designation f<o:.
deck and is primarily subjected to bending under vCltica l celtain steels intended for stlUcturai appli cati ons.
loads such as live. wi nd , or dead loads.
Stress. Stress as used in this Specifi cation meilllS force pc :'
P·A EFFECT. Effect of loads 'Icli ng on the deflected shape unit area.
of a me mber be tween joints or nodes.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS. Dete rmination of 10';<;
P- A EFFECT. Efrect of loads actin g on the displ aced effects on memb ers and co nnections based on princip les oj"
location of joints or nodes in a structurc. In tiered building structural mechanics.
structures, thi s is the effect of loads acting on the laterall y
displaced location of floo rs and roofs. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. Sec the definition of (\ : .
For med Structural Steel Strllclunli Me mbers
RATIONAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS. Ana lysi s
based on theory th at is appropriate for the situation, an y STRUCTURAL COMPONENT. Member, COl" :· .v,.
relevant lest data, jf available, and sound engineeIing connecting clemen t, or assemblage.
judgment.
TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MATERIAL ). Maxim ul11 YIELDING (PLASTIC MOMENT). Yielding Ihroll ghoul
tensile stress thaI a rn;ncriaJ is capable of sustaining ;t S the cross section of a member us th e bending mOlll ent
defined by ASTM. reaches the plastic momellt.
TENSION AND SHEAR RUPTURE. in a boll or olher YIELDING (YIELI) MOMENT). Yield ing allhe cxlreme
type of a mec hani cal fastener, limit slate of rupture du e 10 fiber 011 the cross secti on of <l member when the bendin g
simultan eo us tension and she ar force. moment reaches the yi eld moment.
THICKNESS. The thi ckn ess, t. of <lil y clement or sectio/l ASD and LRFD Terms
is the base steel thickness. exclusive of coatings.
ASD (ALLOWAIlLE STRENGTH DESIGN). Melhod of
TORSIONAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode wh ich a propol1i o ning structu rn l component s sll ch as th at the
compression member twi sts about its shear center axis. allowabl e strength equal s or exceeds the required strength
of th e component und er thc action or thc ASD load
UNSTIFFENED COMPRESSION ELEMENTS. FI:ll combi nati ons.
compress ion ele me nt sti ffe ned ill o nl y O IiC edge parallel to
thc directi on of stress . ASD LOAI) COMBINATION. Load combin ,"ion in Ihe
appli cable bui lding code intended for al lowable strcngth
UNSYMMETRIC SECTION. Secli"n nol symmclric design (allowable strcss design).
either about an axis or a poil1t. Allowabl e Strength . Nominal Strength divided by th e
safe ty r'letOJ'. R.,Ifl .
VARIAULE LOAD, Load nol classi fi ed as permanent
load. A VAILABLE STRENGTH. Desi gn Sirengih or allowa ble
strength as appropriat e.
VIRGIN STEEL. Steel as received frolll the steel produce r
or warehouse before being cold worked as a result of DESIGN LOAD. Appli ed load del ermined in accord ance
fabricating operations. with ei ther LRFD load combinations or ASD load
combinatio ns wh ichever is appl icable.
VIRGIN STEEL PROPERTIES. Mec hani cal propcni es
of virgin steel such as yi eld stress, tensile strength, and DESIGN STRENGTH. Resistance raclOr llluiliplied by
elongati on. the Iluminai strength, ¢H".
WEB. In a member subjected to flexure, th e portion of the LRFIl (LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR
section that is joined to.two flanges, or that is joined to onl y DESIGN). Method of proponioning stru ctural component s
one flange provided it crosses the neutral axi s. sllch that the design strength equals ur exceeds the required
strength of the component under the action of the LRFD
WEll CRIPPLING. Loca l failure of we b plate in Ih e load co mbin ations.
immedimc vicinit y of a concentrated load or reaction.
LRFD LOAD COMBINATION. Load co mbinal ion ill Ih e
YIELD IVIOMENT. In a me mbcr subjec ted to bending, the appli cab le building cod e intended for stre ngth design (Load
moment at which the c xtr(,~ JllC outer fiber first attains th e and Resistance Factor Design).
yield stress.
NOMINAL LOAD. The ma gllillides or Ihe loads specifie d
YIELD POINT. First stress in a materi al at which an by the applicahle bu ilding ( ode.
increase in strain occ urs without an j-ncrcasc in stress as
defined by ASTM. NOMINAL STRENGTH. Strenglh of a slruetllre or
component (without th e resistance facto!' or safety factor
YIELD STRENGTIL Sires> "I whi ch a maleri"ls exhibits applied) to resist the load effects, il S determin ed in
a specified Iimiling de viation from the propo rtionalit y of accordance with this Specificati on.
s tress to slrain as defined by ASTM.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Vol ume 1
S··2~~8 CHAPTE ii 5 ~ Siee! and Metals
551.1.1 SeQl'C
This specification applies to the design of stru ct ural
members cold-formed to shape from carbon or low-alloy
steel sheet, strip, plate, OJ' bar not more than 25 mm in
thickness and used for load -carrying purposes in
1. Buildings; and
2. Struclurcs othcr than buildings provided allowances are
made for dynami c effects.
551.!.2 Applicability
Thi s Specification in clud es Symbols and Definitions,
Section 551 through Section 557, Section C-I, to Section C-
3 that shall apply as follows:
co mponents is such thal calculati o n of strength andlor ASTM A572/A572M, Standa rd Specification for High-
stiffness cannot be made in accordance with those Strength Low~Allo y Coiumbiulll- Vanadium Strucllll'<ll Steel
provisions, struc tural performance shaH be established from
either of the following: ASTM A588!A588M , Standard Specification for High-
Strength Low-All oy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
J. Available strength or stiffness by te:m;, undertaken and
Minimulll Yield Point to 100m111 th ic k
eva luated in accord iulce ~'ith Section 556,
2. Ava ilable strength or stiffness by rHtional engineering ASTM A606, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and
analysis based on appropriate theory, related testing if Strip, High-Strength, Low- Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
data is avail able, and en gineering judgmen t. Roll ed, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
Specifically, the available strength is determined from
the calculated nominal strength by appl yin g the ASTM A 653M/A653 M (SS 230 MPH , 25 MPa, 275 MPa,
following safet y factors or reSiS1<lIlCC factors: 340 MPa Class I , Class 3 and Class 4. and 380 MPa;
HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 275 MPa. 340 MPa, 380 MPa Class
For Members
I and 2, 410 MPa , & 480 MPa and 550 MPa , Standard
Q = 2.00 (ASD) ¢ = 080 (LR FD) Specification for Slccl Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanizcd) or
Zinc - [ron Alloy-Coa ted (Galvan nealed) by the l'lo t-Dip
For Connec tions
Process
Q = 2.50 (ASD) ¢ = 0.65 (LRFD)
ASTM A792!A792M. (230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa, and
551.1.3 Definitions 340 MPa Class I and Class 4), Standard Specification for
In thi s Specification, "shall" is used 10 ex press a In<llldatory Steel Sheet, 55% Alum inum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-
requirement, i.e., a provisions that the user is obli ged to Dip Process.
satisfy in order to comply with the Specification; and "shall
be permitted" is used it express an option or that which is ASTM A847!A847M, Standard Spccification for Cold-
permissible withinlhe limits of the Specification. Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy
StJ'l\ctllJ'aJ Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
551.1.4 Ullil. of Symbols alld Tenns Res istance
The unit systems considered in .-hose sections is SI units.
ASTM A875/A875M (SS 230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa.
and 340 MPa Class I and 3; HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 340
551.2 Material
MPa, 410 MPa, 480 MPa, and 550 MPa) , Standard
Specifi cation for Steel Shed, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-
551.2.1 Applicable Steels
Coated by the Ho t -Dip Process
This Specification requ ires the llse of steels intended for
structural applications as defined in general by the ASTM A1003/AI003M (ST 340 MPa H, 275 MPa H, 255
specifications of the American Society for Testing Mat erials MPa H, 230 MPa H), Standard Specification for Steel
listed in this section. The term SS shall designate sheet Sheet, Carbon, Met allic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-
material and the terms HSLAS and HSLAS·F s hall Formed Framing Members
designate hi gh- strengt h low-a ll oy steels.
ASTM AI008/AI008M (SS 170 MPa, 205 Mra, 230 MPa
ASTM A36! A36M , Standard Specificatio n for Carbon Types I and 2, and 275 MPa Types I and 2; HSLAS
Structural Steel Classes I and 2, 3 10 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa, 410 MPa,
450 MPa, and 480 MPa; HSLAS-F 340 MPa. 4 10 MPa, 480
ASTM A242/A242M, Sta ndard Specificati on for Hi gh- MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard S pecification for Steel,
Strength Low- Alloy Structu ral Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
ASTM A283!A283M. Standard Specification for Low and Formab ility, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenab le
Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
ASTM AJO ll /AIOllM (SS 205 MPa, 230 MPa, 250 MPa
ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formcd T ypes I and 2, 275 MPa, 3 10 MPa, 340 MPa, and 380 MPa
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in ; HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa,
Round s and Shapes 410 MPa, 450 MPa, and 480 MPa ;HSLAS-F 340MPa, 410
MPa, 480 MPa, and 550MPa), Standard Specification for
ASTM A529/A529M, Standard Specificatio n t"r High - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled , Carbon, Structural,
Strength Carbon- Manganese Steel of Slructural Quality High-S trength Low-AllOY and High-S treng th Low- Alloy
!
5--230 CHAPTEr:=: 5 - St081 and Metals
L" = Length at wh ich local buckling stress equals 551.4.1b Load Combinations for ASD
jle:rural buckling stress Load combination for AS D shall be as stipulated by Section
= Radius gyration offull unreduced cross section C-3.3. l. la of Section C-3.
= Minimum critical buckling slress for seClioll
ca/cu/aled by £q. 552.2 551.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design
R, = Reductionjllctor
KL = Effective lenglh 551.5.1 Design Basis
Design under thi s sec tio n of th e Specifi cation shall be based
551.2.4 Dclivered Minimum Thickncss
Load and Resistance Fac(o r Design (LRFD) principles.
a ll
T he uncoated min imum steel thi ckness of the cold-formed All provisions of thi s Specification shall appl y except for
steel product as delivered to the job site shall not at any those in Sections 551.4 anel in Chapters 553 and 556
location be less than 95 percent of the th ickness ,t, used in designated for ASD and LRFD.
its design; however, lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at
bends, such as corners, due to cold Mforming effects. 551.5.1.1 LRFD Requirelnents
A design satisfi es the requ irements of thi s Specification
551.3 Loads when the design strength of each st ructural component
Loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by the equ als or exceeds th e required strength determined on the
appli cable provisions in Section C-3.3 of Section e-3. basis of the nomi nal loads, multiplied by the applicable load
factors, for all applicable load combinati ons.
Nati onal Structural Code of tile Phili pp ines 6th Edition Vo lume 1
p,;;SY
AISI S906-04, Standard Procedures for Panel and ASTM A529/A529M-05, Standard Specification for
Anchor Structural Tests High Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural
Quality
Note: * A/5;/ {est procedures previously designated as ASTM A563-04, Standard Specification for Carbon
A/Sf 7:)!I-XX are reo-designated to A/SI S9n-x).,:, where and Alloy Steel Nuts
"/1" is flU' (eSf procedure sequence number and "xx" is
tlw year the standard was dcwdoped or updated. ASTM A563M-04, Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts IMetric)
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME),
1828 L Strret, NW, Washington, Dc 20036: ASTM A572/A572M .. 06, Standard Specificatiun fur
High -Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
ASME B46.1-2000, Surface Texture, Surface Structural Steel
Roughness, \Vavincss, and Lay
ASTM A588 I A588M-05, Standard Specification for
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), High- Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi
100 Barr Harbour Drive, West Conshohocken, 1345 Mra) Minimun Yield Point to 4-in. IIOOmm)
Pennsylvania 19428-2959: Thick
ASTM A361 A36rn-05, Standard Specification for ASTM A606-04, standard Specification for Steel, Sheet
Carbon Structural Steel and Strip, High-Strength, Low alloy, lIot- Rolled and
Colel- Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
ASTM AI94/A 194M-06, Standard Specification for
Resistance
Carbon and Alluy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High .
Pressure and High~Tempcraturc Scrvice, or Both ASTM A6531 A653M-06, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Zinc··Coatcd (Galvanized) or Zinc>Iron
ASTM A2421 A242 M-04el, Standard Specification for
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the l'lot-Dip Process
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
ASTM A847 I A847M-05, Standard Specification j()r
ASTM A307-04, Standard Specification for Carbon
Cold Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength,
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
Low alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
ASTM A325-06, Standard Specification for Structural Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
Bolts, Steel, I-leat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
ASTM AS75 I A875M-05, Standard Specification for
Tcnsile Strength
Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy- Coated by the
ASTM A325M-05, Standard Specification for Hot-Dip Process
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa
ASTM A I 0031 A I 003M-05, Standard Specification for
Minimum Tcnsile Strength [Metric]
Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and NOll Metallic-
ASTM A354-04, Standard Specification For Quenched Coated for Colel Formed Framing Membcrs
and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
ASTM A100S1 A IOOSM-05b, Standard Specification
Extcrnaslly Threaded Fasteners
for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Roiled, Carbon, Structural,
ASTM A370-05, Standard Specifications for Standard I-ligh- Strength Low Alloy, High- Strength Low Alloy
Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
of Steel Products Bake Hardenable
ASTM A449-04b, Standard Specification for Hex Cap ASTM AIOIIlAIOIIM-05a, Standard Specification for
Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, I-leat Treated, Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
120/1 05/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General High-Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low alloy
tll
National Structural CodG of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5·292 CIiA P lE H ~) · Steel ami Meta l!;
SECTION C-l
where DESIGN OF '"'v'......,.-J.' v ..... ~.''"'v.
A1
db
::: Net tensi Ie area
::: Nomi nal diameter (body or shrank di ameter)
STRUCTURALC ' ~~~~~
THE DIRECT Si
" ::: Pitch (mill per thread for SI unit s)
C~l Design of Cold·Formed Steel Struc;,turClJ Members
557.5 Special Fabrication RC<luircmcnts Using (he Direct Strength Method
13<1cking bars in welded connections that an: ,,:Ir<i1lcl to th e
stress fi eld shall be permillcd 10 remain in pl<tce. and if C-I.I. GcncrClJ Provisions
used, shall be continllous.
C-l.l.l Applicability
Backing bars that arc pcrpcndicul;!r to the stress fi eld, if
The prov isions of this Secti on shall be permitted 10 bc used
used, shall be removed and the joint bad gouged and
( 0 del ermine the nominal Hxial (P,,) .md fl ex ural (Mil)
welded. sire ligths of cold·formcd stecl 1l1cmbcrs. Sections C. I.2.1
,1Ild C. 1.2.2 prcscnt a mcthod appli cable to all cold·fonned
Flame cu i edges subj ect 10 cycl ic siress ran ges sh ... 11 have a steel colu mns and bc.uns. Those members meeting the
surface roughness not to exceed 25 11111 in accord ance with
gcomct ric and IllClterial limitati ons of Secti on C. I. I.I.I for
ASME 1346. ) columns and Section C. J. 1. 1.2 for beams have been
prequatificd for usc, and the calibrntcd safety factor, D, and
Re ~entrant co rners at cuts, copes, and weld Hccess ho les
resistance facwr, ¢, given in C.1.2. 1 and C. 1.2.2 shall be
shall form a radius of not less than 10 mm by pre-drilling or pcrmi[{ed to apply. Th e usc of the provisions of Section
sub-p ul\ chin g and reaming a hole, or by t!l enni!! cutting to C.!.2.! and C. J .2.2 for other colullIlls and beams shall be
forlll th e rad ius of the cut. If the radius porti on is form ed is permitted, but the standard Q and ¢ factors for ration.a}
formed by thermal cutting, the cut surface 511(111 be gro und engineering analysis (Section AJ.2 (b) of. the. main
to a bri ght metal contour to provide a radiu sed transition, Specification) apply. The main Ame.rican SpeclficatlOll for
free of notches, with a surface roughn ess not to exceed /lot the Design of Cold· Formed Steel Structural Members.
to exceed 25 liI1l in accordance with ASME 846. I or
anoth er cquivalent approved standards.
Currentl y, the Direc t Strength Method prov id e~ no cxpl~ ci t
provisions for membe rs in tension, shcar, com bmed bendm g
For transverse bUll joint s in regions of hi gh tensile st ress, and she'lI", web crippling, co mbined bending and web
we ld tabs shall be used to provide for cascadin g the we ld crippli ng, or combined ax ia l load and bendin g ( beam~
tcrmination outside the fini shed j oint End da ms shall not colum ns). Fun her, nO provisions arc given for structura l
be used. Weld tabs shall be removed and (he end of the assc mblic!) or conn ecti ons <lnd joi nt s. As detailed in mai n
weld fini shed flush with the cdge of the member. Spccification, Scct ion 55 J. 1.2, Ihe provisions of thc main
!;.):ceptioll Specification, when appl icable, shall be used for all cases
listed above.
Weld tabs shall no! be requiredfor sheer material iJthe
weldiflg procedures used result ill smoOlh, flush edges. It shall be permitted to sub stit ute the nominal strength,
resistance factors, and safety factors from this Appendix for
the corresponding values in Secti ons 553.3.!, 553.4.l.l,.
553.4.1.2, 553.4.1.3, 553.4. 1.4, 554.6. 1.1. and 554.6.1.2 of
th e main Specilicalion.
2. in cn!<l scd safety faclOrs, n, and reduced resi stance C. I.2.1 Column Design
facto rs, ¢. shall be employed for strength when rat io n;1i The nominal axial sirength jresisia/lce ]. fJ'l> shall be the
engincering analysis is conducted. minimum of P"''' Fill, and Pm/ as gi vcn in Sec.tions C.l.2.1.1
to C. 1.2.1.3. For columns mceting the geometric and
C. J .1.1 ,iI Prc-<Iualificd Columns material criteria or Section C.1.l.! <I, Qc and ¢c shall be as
Unperformed columns that fall within [hc geometric and follows:
material limitations given in Table C-l ~:hall be permitlcd 10
Q, = 1.80 (ASD) $, = 0.85 (I,RFD)
be design cd using the safe ty factor, il, and resistancc faclor.
¢, defined in Section C. 1.2. I.
For all other columns, Q and ¢ of [he main Specification,
Section 55! .1.2(b), shall appl y. The :lVailablc strength shall
c.1.1.1 b Prc-qllalilicd Beallls
be dctermined in accordance with applic"ablc mcthod in
Un perforated bca ms Ihal rail wi lhin the geomctric and Section 551.4 . or 551 .5 of the main Speci fi cation.
marcritll limitations gi ven in Table C-2 shall he pennillcd to
be designcd using (he s;lrety ractor. il, ~II}(I resistance faclor, C.I.l.I .. Flexunll, Torsinllal, or FlexurnI-Torsional
¢, de fined in Secti on C.1.2.2. Buckling
The Ilomina! axial strength, PIll"~ for flex ural, torsiona!, or
C.1.1.2 Elastic Buckling
Oexural -torsiona! buckling shall be cidculatcd in accord.mcl'
Analysi s shall be uscd for the determination of th e clastic with the following:
buckling loads and/or moments used in this Appendix. For
columns, this includes the local, distortional, and overall (aJ For",~1.5
buckling loads (P,.,.(, Pnd , and P('f(" of Section C.!.2.!). For
beams, this includes the local, distortional, and overall I~" =(0.658),; y>, (Eq. C.1-2)
buckling moments (Ma (. Mm/, and Mat of Section C. ! .2.2).
In some cases, for a given column or beam, al! three modes (b) For I"~ ~ 1.5
do not exist. In such cases, the non-existent mode shall be
igno red in the calculations of Sections C.1.2.1 and C.1.2.2.
The commentary {Q this Appendix provides guidance 011
p
III'
=(0.877)1'
...t; .I"
(Eq. C.1-3)
(E'I. C.1-7)
th
National Structural Code of the Pililippines 6 Edition Volume 1
s·?ut) CH AP TUl ~i . Sl eel ;}llcj M (~ I,I I S
;~::-
'" ~ J-----
I~'rt
(Eq. C 1-8) M
1/,'
'0 L~ M
<) Y
[I. .~.A::. -:._ ')
36 M or ~
(Eq. C. I-I.1)
= A valu e as defined in Secti on C. J .2. ).1 :1. For M,.... > 2_78 M ,.
= Critical clastic local column buckling lo,ld CEq. C. 1-14)
A1,,,. = A1,.
determin ed by analys is in accordance with
Secli oll C. 1.1.2 where
M,.". ;;;: Criti cal clasti c lateral-torsional buckling momCn t
CI.2.! c ()jstortional Buckling determined by anal ys is in accordance wilh
Thc nominal axi Hi strength, Pili" for distortional buck ling Secti on C. ! .1.2
shall be calculated in accordance with the followin g:
(Eq. CI-15)
where
(10'1 _CI-9)
-Sf = Gross section modulus referenced (O the extreme
2. For J." > 0.561 fiber ill first yield
[ [ )"-') (_':!
where
Py = A valu e as given in Eq . C. 1-5
Mill =: 1- 0. 15 M crt.
Mflt' M ,W
crt. )"-' M ne
(Eq. C. 1-12)
(10'1 . C. J·20)
Table C- I
LIInb Icf ~ CoI\IIMW.
Upped C..s.ctio .... For aU C_<ma;
Simpl" lipo : boll <02
bolt < 159
I<- .. ....,
r ~
P."
4 <: D/t < 33
0.7 <: hoIb" <: 5.0
0.05 < O/b" < 0.41
1)- 90" ..
1 ~/Fy > 340 Ify < 86 bI (593 MY. or (,o()!lO i<8/<m'l1
I'ot C-.:tiont with C:OIllf"ex lips:
D:z/t < 34
Complex Lips:
'* D:z/D< 2
~)
~t<: 34
D;j~< 1
N~
.) Ih is permill>ed 10 .....ry (D" lip i!I penni1kd in ""Sic inw..nt
I. 0, .1 outwml, etc.)
ollh I.s IX'mllttoo to vary iDlllp Is oormdtted to ahcle lID, down.. etcOt
Lipped C.secoon with Web Far .OC'U! or two intamcduk- ltifienars.:
Stiff.,.,.".(.) hoIl < 4Il9
Io-~-i b,,/t <: lW
6 < 0/1 <33
fC
1.3 < hoIb" -< 2.7
0.05 ~ Olt.., < Q.l
T O<O/I<:¥
1.5 < hoIbo « 1.7
J
0.00 <: 01 b" '" 0.73
". W'
6ff, > 590 If,. <: 50 ~ (J.45 MY. or .352t11os/cm')1
Rack Uprlgftt
rC!~~
See C-5octian with Compb Lips
i
Hili
bzl<-
n..JI < 51)
... ~.- - ~ ..
r b, i'-
fO
b,,/ t ""i!!IJ- t{!;
T ~ < 0/1 < (,
1.0 <: I\,jb. <: 1.2
1 ~
Z-Sectiono
E/Fy "578 (Fy "51 ksi (352 MPa or 3590 kgleml)]
~
b, t D:3/t < 34
L 0
D:l/Dl < 1
0, G, &,
I. 0,
.1
A
O<d s/t<26 (d. =Depth of stiffener)
0.14 < ho/bo < 0.87
fh, t
0.88 < bo/hj < 5.4
0< n ~ 4 (n = Number of compression Ilange stiffeners)
"';1:\1+-
E/Fy > 492 [Fy < 60 ksi (414 MFa or 4220 kg/cm')]
Trapezoids (Decks) with Stiffened ho/I < 203
Flange in Compression boll < 231
r-b'i 0.42 < (ho/.tne)/bo < 1.91
1.10 < bo/b, < 3.38
~
t
I+-
.J
b,-+i T
~ 0< I\: ~ 2 (I\: ':' Number of compression flange stiffeners)
o < nw S 2 (nw - Number of web stiffeners and/or folds)
0< "t S 2 (nt· Number of tension flange stiffeners)
52' < 9 < 84' (9 = Angle between web and horizontal plane)
E/Fy > 310 [Fy < 95 ksi (655 MFa or 6680 kg/em'»)
Note:
r I I < 10, where r is the centerline bend radius.
See Section 1.1.1.1 for definitions of other variables given in Table 1.1.1-2
C.3.2.1 Ductility
In seismic design ca tegory I), E or F (as defined by
I\SCEJSEI 7), when materi al du ctility is dl:te rmin cd on the
This Section provides .design provisions or supplements to
basis of the local and uniform elo ngation cri teria of Section
Secti on 551 through 557.
C.3.3.I, cllrtain wall studs shall be limited to the dead load
of the curtain wall assem bly divided by it s surface area, but
C.3.1 Scope
no greater tllilll O.75kN/m 2 .
Designs .~:!;:. Jl be made in accordance with the provi sions for
Load and Resistance FaClOr Design, or with the provisions C.3.3 Loads
for Allowable Strength Design.
C .3.3.1 Nominal Loads
C.3.2 Olher Sleels
The nominal loads shall be as stipul atcd by the appli cable
The listi ng in Section C.3.1 shall not ex.cl ude the use of building code under wh ich the Slnlcturc is designed or as
steel up to ,\11<1 including 25 mill in thickness, ordered or di ctated by the co nditi ons in volved . In (he absence of a
produced to othe r than the listed specifications. provided the building code, the nominal loads Shlill be those stipulated in
following rcq uireme lli s arc me l: the ASCEISEI 7.
I. The steel shall conform 10 (he chelllical and meciwnic(ll
requi remcnt s of one of the listed specifications or othcr C.3.3.l.1a Load Combinations for ASD
publ ished specification. The structure and its components shall be designed so that
the allowable strengths equal or exceed the effects of the
2. The che mica! and mechanical properti es shall be
nominal loads and load combinations as stipulated by the
determincd by the producer, the su pplier. or the
applicable building code under which the structure is
purchaser, in accordance with the foll owing
designed or, in the absence of an applicable building code,
specifications. For coated sheets, ASTM A9241
as slipulated in Ihe ASCE/SEI 7.
A924M; for hal-rolled or cold-rolled sheel lind slrip.
ASTM AS681 A568M: for plate and bar. ASTM A61
C.3.3.1.1b Load Factors and Load Combinations for
A6M; for hollow structural sections, sllch tes ts shall be
nwcJc in accord ance with tlie requireme nt s of" A500 (for
LRFD
c<!rilon sleel) or A847 (for I·ISLA steel). The structure and its co mponent s shall be de signed so that
des ign strengths eq ual or excced the effects or the factored
J. The coating propcrl ies of coated sheet shall be loads and lond co mbinatioll s stipu lated by the applicable
de tc lill iue Li b y Ille I'rUf.Juccr, lilt.' suppl ier. or the building code under which the structure is designed or, in
pu rchaser, ill accordance wilh ASTM A924/ A924M. the absence of an a ppli c ab le building code. as stipulat ed in
.L The steel shall meet the req uireme nts of Secli n!) C.3.3. Ihe ASCE/SEI 7 .
4. Amcrican Welding Sodcty (AWS ), 550 N.W . I...cJcunc discrete point bracing and thl! provis ions of Secti on
Road, Miami , Florida 33 J 35:A WS D 1.3-98, Sl l"ucltJral 553.3. 1.2. 1. o r shall be c.:;:llculatcd in "Iccordance with thi s
Vole/din g Code-Sheet Stee l A WS C I.I /CI. I M-2000, sec tion. The safel y fa..-wr ,HI d th e resistance ra<: lOr prov id ed
RCcolllllwnucd Practices for Res istance Weld ing in this section shall be applied to the nomina! strength. M".
calculated by r~l. 554 .6.1.2-1 10 determine the availab le
C.3.S Tension Members strengths ill accorda nce with the appli cli ble method ill
For axially loaded tension members, the nominal tensile Scclion 551 .4 or 55 1.5.
strength, 1;" shall be the smallest value obtained in (Eq . CJ·:!)
accordance with the limit States oj" (a). (b) and (c). Unless
Q,,=1.67 (ASD) q,,,=0.90 (LRFD) . ; ..
otherwise specified. Ihe corresponding safety faclOr am.! the
rcsislancc faclor provided in thi s section shall be lIsed to where
determine the available strengths in accordance with (he
applicable method in Section 551.4 or 551.5. R = Reduction factor determin ed in accordance with
AISI S908
I. For yielding in gross sectio n
(Eq . C3·1) See Section 553.3.1. I for definitions of S,. and F.r-
0,= 167 (ASD) ¢= 0.90 (LRFD) C.3_6_2 Compression of Z-Section Members Having One
where Flange Fastened 10 a Standing Scum Roof
These prov isions shall apply to Z-scctiOllS <:oncentrica!ly
:::: Nominal strength of member when loaded il;
loaded along their longitudinal axi s, with -only one flange
tensi on
<lllached 10 standing seam roof panels. Allcnwli vely, de sign
:;;: Gross arc a of cross section
values for a particular system shall be pcrmined 1O be based
:::: Design yield su·css as de lermined in accord ance
on discret e point bracing locations, or on tests in accordan ce
with Section 55 1.7. 1
with Section 556.
2. r 'Of rupture in net secti on away from connection
The nominal axial strength of simple span or continuous Z-
(Eq. C3·2)
sec tions sh all be calcul :lted in acco rdance with (a) and (b ).
0,= 2.00 (ASD) 1,= 0.75 (LRFD) Unless otherwise specified, the safety fa<:lor and the
resistance factor provided in thi s section shall be used to
where
de tcnninc the available strengthS in accordance with the
A" = Net area of cross section applicable method in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
F" = Tensile strength as specified in eilher Section
J. For weak axis available strength
SS 1.2 . 1 or SS 1.2.3.2
(Eq. C.3·4)
3. For rupture in net section at connection
Q= 1.80 (ASD) ¢= 0.85(LRFD)
The available tensile strength shall also be limited by
Sections 555.2.7, 555.3, and 555.5 for tellsion members where
using welded connections, bolted connections. and screw
<l . For dlt ::; 90
connections.
ko/ = 0.36
C.3.6 Light-Frame Steel Construction
b. For 90 « lit ~ 130
In ;]ddilion 10 th e cold-formed steel framing standards lisled
in Section 554.4. Ihe followin g standard shall be followed, d
as applicable: k = 0.72 - -- (Eq. C.3·5)
0/ 2501
1. Light-framed shear wall s, diagona l strap bracing (lilat
c. For til t > D O
is p;'1rt of a structural w,l ll) and diaph ragms to resist
wind. seismi c and other in-plane lat eral loads sha! 1 be k,,j= 0.20
designed in <l ccordance with AISI S2 13.
R :::: Reduction factor determined from uplift tests
performed usi ng AISI S908
C.3.6.l Flexural Meml>ers Having One Flange Fastened A = Full unreduced cross-sectional area of Z-scctioll.
to a Standing Scam Roof System d = Z-section depth
The available flexural strength of a C- or Z-section, loaded = Z-scction thickness.
in a plane parallel to the web with the top flange supporting
a standing seam rooC system shall be determined llsing See Section 553.3.1.1 for definition of F,..
th
National Stru ctural Code of tile PI1ilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~5·30~ C Hfl. I:>TE:li 5 SlO el and Metals
Eq. 554.6. J -4-1 shall be limited to roof sysle mg mccling the C.3.7 Welded Connections
fo llowing con d itions: Welded l.:on ncclions in whic h Ihe lh i {.· knc ~s of Ilw Ihinncst
it. Purlin th ickness, I.:n mill :::; ,::: ).22 mill connected p<u1 is grea ter than :') mill shall be in ,-icco rdan cc
wilh ANSJlII ISC·360.
b. 150 mm ::; d ::; 300 111111
c. Flimges arc edge stiffened compression clemcnts Except as muddicd herein, arc clds Oil steel where at Icas!
one of the the con nected parts is 5 mm or less ill th ic kn ess
d. 70 "" dlt Oo 170 shall be made in accordance wi th AWS D1 3. Welders and
c. 2.8 S d / b < 5, where b= Z section flange width. weldi ng procedures shall e qualified as specified in AWS
D 1.3. These provisions arc intended to co ver the welding
flange flnr width posi(ions as li sted in Table C.3.1 .
f. I6 5 < 50
t
Res istance welds shall be made in conformance wit h the
g. OOl h flanges arc prevented from moving hltcrall y at the procedures given in AWS C I .I or AWS CIJ .
supports
Tabl e C.3·1
h. Yield stress, 1'~\. :5 483 MPa Welding P() ~;i ti on Covered
2. The available s trength about the strong axis shall be ' - '- - .
Weldin ·Position
determined in acco rdance with Section 553.4.1 and
553.4.1.1.
~quare
Groove
Arc AA l'ilje'
WOld,
Fla{e Flare' v'''··
Con~~· .
. But( .. ~ .. ~~.~: . 'Up ' . Bevel
·drOOve
Groove
Weld Weld
C.3.6.3 Strength of Standing Scam Roof Panel Systems Weld orT
Sheel F F F F F
In addition to the provisions pro vided in Section 554.6.2. 1.
10 H 1-1 11 11 II
for load combinations that include wind uplift, the nominal
sheet V · V V V
wind load shall be peflnitl ed 10 be multiplied by 0.67
0 1-1 . - OH 0 11 OH
·provided the tested system and wind load evalu ation .
Shcctto · F F F F
satisfies the foll owin g co nditions: Support · · 11 11
I. The roof system is tes ted in accordance with AISI ing V V
·
Member . .
S906. · · 011 0 11
- . -
- hOfi lOnI.ll. V -_ \erll\;al. 011 _ O'Ct head)
( I _ 031. Ii _
2. Th e wind load is calcu laled using ASCfJSEI 7 for
components and cladding, Method I (Simplified C.3 .8 Bolted Connections
Proced ure) or Method 2 (Analytical Procedure).
In add ition to the design criteria gi ven in Section C3 .8 of
3. Th e arca of the roof bei ng evalu.alcci is in Zone 2 (edge thi s Specification, the following design requirements shall
zone) or ZOll e 3 (corn er zone), as defined in ASCE/SEI also be followed for bolted connecti ons used for coJd-
7. i.e. Ihe 0.67 faclor does nOl appl y 10 Ih e field of Ihe form ed steel structu ral members in which the thi ck ness of
roof (Zone I). the thinnest connected part is less than 4.76 mm. Bolted
connections in whi ch the thickness of the thinnest con nected
4. The base metal thickness of the standing seam roof
parr is equal to or greater than 4.76 nlln shall be in
panel is greater than or eq ual to 0.60 mIll and less than
acco rdance wilh ANS I IA ISC·360.
or equal to 0.80 mill.
5. For trapezo idal profile standin g seam roof panels, the The holes for bolts shal! not exceed the sizes specified in
dis tance between sidelaps is no greater than 600 ITIm. Table C.3-2, except that larger hol es arc pcrmitted to be.
used in colullln base details or st ructu ral systems connected
6. For vertical rib pro file sta nding scam f(Jof panels, the
to concrete walls.
di stance betw een sideJ aps is no greate r tha n 450 Illlll .
7. Th e observ ed failure mode of the test ed svstem is o rH~ Standard holcs shall be lIsed ill bolted connections, except
of Ihe foll owing: . that oversized and slotted holes shal1 be permitted to be
used as approved by the designer. The length of sloued
(i) The standing scam roof clip mechanically fai!.s
hol es shall be nor mal to the direction of the shear lond.
by sepa rat ing from {ile panel side lap·
Washers or backup plates 511<111 be installed over oversized
(ii)Thc st and ing sca m roof clip mechanically fails or slotted holes in an outer ply unless suitabl e performan ce
by the sliding lab separating from Ihe stationary basco is demonstrat ed by tests in accordance with Secti on 556. In
the situati on where the holes occurs within the lap of lapped
an d nested lee members, the above requirements regardin g
the direction of the slot and the usc of was hers shall be
th
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 EcJition Volurnc~l
S':Wif CHAI'TE:n ~i . Steel all{j Metals
For single bolt . or <I single row of bolts peqJcnd ic ul ar to the (2) For channc l mcmbcrs having two or more bolts in the
force line or r{)n. · l~
F = (2.5,-d/,·)<'
f 1"1/ -< /'
• /I (Eq. C3- 10) U = 1.0 -- 0.3(, xli. dl.9 (E(I. C.3- 16) blli IJ ~ 0.5.
See Sec tion C.3.8. 1 for the defini tion of I. For ASD
(c) For other than n at sheet F'fI1 ::;: 1.3 F'll - QF",/v:S; 1'~11
w here
(Ell. C.3- i 0)
AI' = A"U, effec tive net area wi th U defin ed as
fol lows : ¢F"..
/: :::: I .U fo r members when lhe load is lransm iHf..'d
di rectl y to all of the cross-secti ona l cleme nts.
Otherwise, the reduction coefficient U is
determined as foll ows:
( I ) For A ngl e member:-; having two or more bolt s in the
li ne o f force
u = 1.0 - 1.20 xlL < 119 (Eq. C.3- 15) hut U ~ 004
In addition, the required shear stress,!.., shall not cx(;eed the ...,~.
allowable shear stress, f~", I 12 (ASD) or (he design shear
stress, $ F",. (LRFIl), of the fasteoer.
Table C.3 ·3
Nominal Tensile and Shear . for Bolts
Safely
Factqr Fa~tor streSs Pnl Slre,i Pi.
Boll'
n q) Mpa ' Mp"
621 372
621 496
696 407
2.00 ,\2-1
6.4 mm S d < ! 2.7 mm, when threads 558
.lre not excluded frol1l shea r :Illes
A449 Bolts
6.4 111m Sd < 12.7 111m, when threads 558 ,1%
In Table C.3-3, the shear st rength shall apply LO bolls in C.3.S.3.1a Connection Shear Limited by End [)i!;lmlcc
holes a$ limited by Table C.3-2. Washers or back-up plates
The nominal shear strength per screw, 1"11 shall not exceed
shall be installed over long-s Jollcd holes and the c<lpaci ty of
that calcu l<lIcd in accordance with Eq. C.3-20 where the
connections ll sing long-slotted holes shall be determin ed by
di stance to an end of the con nected pm1 is parallel to the
load tests in accordance with Section 556.
line of the applied force. The safety factor and the resistance
factor provided in this section shall be used to determine the
available strengths in accordan ce with the applicable
method in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
th
National Structural Code of Ole Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
~) 30G CHJ\PT [H ~j . Steel and tv-tetal:;
(Eq.C.3·21)
Chapter 6
WOOD
SIXTH EDITION
111
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
CHM)T F n G VI/ OO(j () · 1
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6 . WOOf) .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
SECTION 60 1 - GENERA L ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
601.1 Scope .. ...... 4
60 1.2 Design Method ........ ..... ..... ..... ... .. . ..... 4
...7
I Part 1 - nequircmcnts AppJie3ulc (0 All Design Methods ....................... " ....................................................... "" ........ 7
SECTION 605 - DECA Y AND TERMITE PROTECTION .................................................................. ,.............................. 7
605. 1 Preparation of Building Site .... .. .. . 7
605.2 Wood Suppon Embedded in Grou nd .. .7
605.3 Under-Floor Clearance .. .. .... 7
605.4 Plales, Sills and Sleepers ... .... 8
605.5 Columns and PosIS..... .......... . .8
605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrete Wall s ..8
605.7 Under-Floor Ventilation .. . .... 8
605. 8 Wood <1nd Earlh Separation ............................................... . ... 8
605.9 Wood Supporting Roofs and Floo rs .. ....... 8
605.10 Moisture Comcnl of Trcatcd Wood .. .. .... ' 8
605 .11 Retaining Walls ...... . ....... . 8
605.12 Weather Exposure ... ....... .... .... ...8.
605.13 WalerSplash .. .. ........... .... .......... .... .. .. .. ... 9
SECTION 606 -WOOD SUPPORTING MASONRY OR CONCRETE .............. ,................ ,...................... ,.. ,.................. , 9
606.1 Dead Load ... ..... ............. 9
606.2 Hori zontal Force .. .... 9
SECTION 607 - WALL FRAMING ................................................................................................... ,......... ,......................... : 9
SECTION 608 - FLOOR FRAMING ............................... ,................ ,.................................................. ,....................... ,........ 10
SECTION 609 - EXTERIOn WALL COVERINGS .......................................................... ,........................................ :........ 12
609.1 Gen eral. .. 12
609.2 Sidiug ......... .......... ... .. ..... 12
609.3 Pl ywood .. . ......... 12
609.4 Shingles or Shakes .. .. ... 12
609 .5 Parlicleboard ..... . .. 12
609.6 Hardboard .. .... . ................ .. . .. ........... 12
609.7 Nailing..... . ..... .. ........................ ...... ........... .. . . ... I3
SECTI () N 610 - INTER! () R P A NELIN G .. ,.... ,.... ,............... ,..... ,.... :.......................... ,....................................................... ,.. 13
th
National S tructural Code o f U1e Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
6·2 CHAPlLfi 6 . Wood
620.4 Addit ional R(:qlliremcllI s for Conven ti ona l CU llslnKlioll ill Se ismic Zone 2 .... 2t)
620.5 Additional Requirements for COllve ntional Consllw:tioll in Seismic ZO IW 4 " . ,,"" 29
620.6 G irders .JO
620.7 Floor Jois ts .. .30
620.8 Subnoorin g .. .... 31
620.9 Part icle boa rd Undcrlaymcnt. ..31
620.10 Wall Fram ing" """"""""" """" "" """""." "".3 1
SECTION 622 - USE OF MACHINE GRADED LUMBER (MGL)" ... ""." ................................................ " .................... 35
622. 1 General "." .... "" .. " ................. . "." .. " ........ "" .. " ..... " .. ,," 35
622.2 Design Properties for Machine Graded Lumber ..... ...,," 35
6223 Des ign Us in g Machine Graded Lumber ........................ .. . . . ." .. 35
622.4 Prese rvat ive Treatment ............................................ . ... 35
622.5 Mois ture Co nt em . "" 35
622.6 Markings """""""",,,, ",,""",,",, " """" .,, "" """. """"" " " ." " 3S
BR,\ C J::Jl WALL LINE is a scrics of braced Wil li pa ll cls NORMAL LOADING . a dcs igll load that stresse':
ill a si ngic story that meets the requiremellts of Secti on mcmber or fastening to the full all owable stress tabula{c, '
620. 11 ),,\. thi s chapter. This loadin g may be appli ed for appro xim;"
J() years, eit her continuously o r cum ulativc/ y, and 90
CO NVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME pe rcc nt of th is load may be applied fo r the remainder of tl),;
CO NSTR UCTION is a type o r COll s tlllCt ioJl in whi ch the lire of' th e mcmber or fasteni ng.
pr imm)' stJ'UclUral clement s nrc formed by a system of
re petiti ve wo()(I· rr;l ming members. I)ARTJCLEBOARD is a malltlfactured pa nel pn"in,
co nsistin g o f pal1icies of wood or combinations of ':,'0.,, ;
I)lAl'l-IRAGM is il hori z.ontal or nearl y horizontal sys tem particles and wood fi bers bonded togeth er wi th sYl,dlctit:
actin g to tra nsmit late ral forces to the ve rti cal resisti ng resins or other suitable bondin g sys tem by a h llld ing
C k~ Jll e nI S. Wh en the term "diaphragm is used, it incl udes process, in accordance with app roved nati onally r(',cognized
hori l,OIHal bracing systcms. standard.
Decay resistant: Narra, Kamagong, Dao, TangiJe. Approved end-jointed lumber Illay be used interchangeably
Termite resistant: Narra, Kamagong. with solid~sawn members or the same species and grade.
Such usc sha!l include, but not be limited to, light-framing
WOOD STRlJCTlJRAL PANEL is a strtlcttlral panel joists, planks and decking.
product composed primarily of wood and mecting the UBC
Standard 23··2 and 23-3 or equivalent requircments of Wood structural panels shall be of grades specitled in
Philippine National Standards (PNS). Wood structural accordance with Philippine National Standards (PNS).
panels include all-veneer plywood, composite pancls
containing a combination of veneer and wood-based 603.3 Timber Connectors and Fasteners
material, and mat-formed panel such as oriented stranded Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors and
board and waferboard. fasteners 110t mentioned or fully covered ill Section 6 I y,
lllay bc determined in a manncr approved by the building
official.
COII IlL'ctions depending on joist h:mgc rs or fra ming JIIH.:hors. 603.4.7 Shrinkage
fi es, mid other mechanical fastenings nol otherwise covered Conside r'l li on shall be given ill tht, d e"ig n 10 Ihl..' pm:~ j hl t"_
lJla y be used where 'Ipprovcd by th e Building Offici'l!. elTect uf cros s-g rain dimcnsilHlill l: han!,~l:s l'OIl.'.;(] Cl':>, j
ve rtically which ma y occur in IUIll lwl' r"bric<lted in a give l]
603.4 Fabrication, Installation and Manufacture condition.
Fabri<.:ation, installation, and manufllcture of wood clements
shall be in accordance with the following guideli nes: 603.4.8 Rejection
The building official may delly pClll1i ss io[] for the lIse oj' a
60 . ~ . ,·i ,J General wood member where permissible grade charac( eri<':';'.:s ()r
Prepa rmion, fabrication and installation of wood members defects arc present in sllch ,.\' comb ination that they allcC(
rind th eir fastenings shall conform to accepted engineering detrimentally the serviceability of th e member.
practices and 10 the requirements of this code. All members
shall be framed , anchored, tied and bmced to deve lop Ihe
strength and rigidity necessary for the purposes for which
th ey arc used.
604.1 G I.'m'ral
Th e foll owi ng desig n requirements apply. SE(;TION',@S ," ,', . ;,/ .
DECAY. AN6;TERMIT-E·
6()4.1.f All wood slnH.: turcs shall be designed and PROTECfldN'"r,.<. . •·;·i •.·.(
.' . ."','",'>. __ .-.';. ". ,,' I ,·
604.1.6 Mcta l· pblc·nHlnected wood tru sses shilll conform 605.3 Undcr~Floor Clearance
to thc provisions of Sec tio1l 62!. When wood joists or the bottom of wood st ru ctu ral 1100rs
without joists arc located closer than 450 mill or wood
g irders are located closer th an 300 mm to exposed grou nd
in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas located within the
periphery of the building foundati on. the floor assembly
including posts, girders, joi sts and subfloOf, shall be
approved wood of natural resistance to decay as listed in
Section 605.4 or treated wood.
ll
National Structural Code of tile Pililippines 6 \ Edition Volum e 1
6·[) CHAPll:f~ G . \Nood
605.4 PIHtCS, Sills and Sleepers (llld located ncarer than 150 min (0 eHrth shal l be treated
All fOllnd;l1ioll plates or sills and sleepers OJl a concrete or wood or wood of lI,tlllral n;!)istmlCc Iu dc(;,ty. Where loca ted
masonry slab, wh ich is ill direct co nt ac t with earth, and sills on concrete slabs placed on coll'lh. wood slwll be tre ated
thai rcs t 0 11 concrete or masonry foundations, shall be wood or wood or natural resistance to dec<ly. Where not
treated wood, all marked or branded by an approved subject to Willer splash or (0 exterior moisturc alld located
agency. Foundation wood marked or branded by an on concrete hav ing 11 minimum thicknL"s!) of' 75111111 with an
approved agcncy may bc uscd for sills in localities subject imperviolls membr an(~ installed between co ncrete and earth,
to moderate hazard, where termite damage is nol frequent Ihe wood may be untreated and of any species .
and when specifically approved by the building oiiwial. In
localit ics where ha zard of termite i s slight, any spccies or Whew planter boxes arc in!)ta!ied adjace nt 10 wood frame
wood pcnnillcd by thi s chapter ma y be used for sills when wa ll s a 50 I11Ill :IiI' sp;:lce shall ilt least be provided bet ween
specificall y appro ved by the building offi cial. (he planter and the wa ll. Flashing shall hc installed when
the air space is less th an 150 mill in width . Wherc Oas hing
605.S COIUIIIIIS "lid Posts is used, provisi ons shall be made to permit circulation of
the air in the air space. The wood frame shall be provided
Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry floors or
with an exterior wall covering conforming 10 the provisions
decks exposed 10 the weather or 10 water spla<;h or in
of Section 609 .
basements and which supp<H1 permanen t structures shall be
supported by concretc piers or metal pedestals projectin g
605.9 \\food Supportillg Roofs Hnd Floors
above floors unless ;:Ipproved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood is used. The pedes tal shall project at , Wood stnlctura l members su ppo rting concrete or masonry
Icas( 200 mill above exposed earth or at least 2S mill above slabs which arc permeable 10 moisture and nrc exposed to
finish floor level of sLl ch floors. the weather shall be approved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood unless separated from such noms or
Individual co ncrete or masonry pi ers shall project at least roofs by an impervious moisture balTic!'.
200 mm above exposed ground unl ess the supported
columns or posts arc treated wood or of approved wood 605.10 Moisture Content of Treated \\food
wi th natural res istance to decay. When wood whic h has bee n prcssurc-trcalCd with <l water-
born prese rvat ive is used in enclosed locations where
605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrele Walls drying in service ca nnot readil y occ ur, slich wood must
Ends of wood girder entering masonry or co ncrete walls have 11 moisture con lc.nt of 19 percellt or less before being
shall be provided with a 13 mm air space on tops, sides and cove red with insula ti on, intcrior wall finish 11001' coverin}"
ends unless approved woud or natural resistance (0 decay or or other materials.
treated wood is used.
605.11 l{c(aining Walls
605.7 Under-Floor Venlilalion A ll wood llsed as permanent part s of retain ing or c rib walL
Under-floor areas shall be ventilatcd by an approved shall be treated wood.
mechanical mea ns or by openings in exterior foundation
walls. Such ope nings shall havc a nct area of not less than 605.12 Weathcr' Exposurc
0.067 111 2 for each 10 rn 2 of under-floor arca. Openings shall Those pm1ions of glued- lam inated timbers that form l:j' ~
be located as close to corners as practical and shall provide st ructural supports of Cl building or other stru cture and
cross ventilation. The required area of such openings shall which are exposed to weather and not propcrly protected by
be approxim ately equally distributed along the length of at a roof or cave ove rhangs of similar covering, shall be
least two opposite sides. They shall be cove red with press ure -treate d wi th an approved preservati ve or \;(~
con·osioll-resistant wire mcsh with mesh openings of 6 I11Ill ma nuf:tctu red fro m wood of natunli resisl;mcc to decay.
dimension. Where moist ure due [0 climatc and grou nd watcr
conditions is not considered excessive, the building official All wood structural panels, whcn designed !O be exposed ill
may allow opclable louvers and ma y allow the required net outdoor application, shall be or exterior type, exce pt ns
area of vent openin g 10 be reduced to 10 percent of the provided in Section 605.2
above, provided th e under-floor ground surface area is
covered with an approved vapor barrier. In geogra phi cal areas where ex perience has demonstrated a
speci fi c need , approved wood of natural resi stance to decay
605.8 Wood and Earth Separation or trea ted wood shall be used for those stru cturfl!.
Protection of wood against deteriorati on as set fort h in the co m.ponents of buildi'ngs or similar perm anent buiJdih ; ~
previous sections for speci fied applications is required. In appurtenances whcn such members are exposed 10 til
addition, wood used in construction of permanent stIUctures weather and are without adequate protection provided by ?
SECTION 608
FLOOR FRAMING
The framin g of exterior and interior wa lls shall be ill Wood.joist ed floors sh;lll be framed and co nstructed and
accordan ce with provisions specifi ed ill Section 620 unl ess anchored to supporti ng wood stud or masonry walls.
a specific design is furnished.
Fire block and draft stops shall "Ie in accordance with thc
Wood studs walls and bearing partitions shall not support follow ing provision:
more than two noors and a roof unless .1Il anal ys is
I. In combustible const ru cti on, fi re bloc ks and draft
satisfactory to Ihe bui lding official shows th.1I shrink age of
regu lators shall be install ed to cu t off all concealed
wood framing will not have adverse effect upon the
draft ope ni ngs (both venical and hori zontal) and sh all
st ructure nor any plumbing, electrical, mechani cal systems
form an effective barrier between floors. between a top
nor other equ ipment installed therein due 10 Ihe excessive
story and a roof or attic space, and shall subdivide attic
shrinkage or differential movements caused by shrinkage.
spaces, concealed roof spaces and floor-ceiling
The analysis shall also show that the roof drainag~ system
assemblies. Th e integrit y of all fire and draft SlOps shall
and the forcgoing systems or equipmcnt will not be
be maintained.
adversely affec ted or, as an alternate, suc h systems shall be
designed to accommodate the differential shrinkage or 2. Firc. bloc ks slwll he provided in the following
mo vements. locati ons:
2. t In concealed spaces or stud walls alHl pa!1ilions,
including furred spaces , at the ceiting and floor levels,
or
and at 250 mm intervals along the Icngth the wall.
E'(ceptioll:
Fire bloi'ks may be omitted at floor and ceiling levels when
approved smoke-actual(~d fire dampers are installed at
these levels.
2.2 At all interconnections betweet) cOllcealed ve rtical and
horizontal spaces such as those that occur at soffits,
drop ceilings, and covered ceilings.
2.3 In concealed spaces between stair stringers, at tbe top
and botlom or the r Ull , and betwee n studs along and in
line with the nm of the stai rs if the walls under the
stai rs are unfinished .
In open ings around vents, pipes, du cts, chim neys,
fire places. and similar openings which afford a passage for
the fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible
materials.
3. Fire blocks shall consist of SO mm nominal lumber or
one thi ckness of 18 mill plywood wi th joints backed by
18 mm plywood or one thi c kness of 19 111m Type 2-I\-;·
particleboard. I·. . jrc stops may also be of gypsu m board .
mineral fiber, glass fiber or other approved material:;
securely fastened in place. Walls having parallel (I,
staggered studs for sound-trallsmission co ntrol shall
have stops of mineral fiber or glass fiber or ot/:·
approved non-rigid materials.
Exception:
4.1 Floor-Cei ling Assemb lies.
Where approved automatic sprinklers are j'Htalled. 'he
4.1.1 Single-fami ly dwellings. As recommend ed in NSCP 1
area between fhe draft STOpS may he 800 m and fhl'
Volume 3 Oil I'lousing or when there is usablc space greatest horizontal dimensiolJ may I)(~ 30 m.
above and belqw the concealed space of :l llo0J"M
ce iling assem bly in a singlcMfamily dwelling. draft 4.2.4 Draft stopping materials shall bc 110\ Icss than 12 mill
stops shall bc il,stalled so that the ' area of the gypsum board. 9 mill plywood . 9 111m Type M-2
concealed space does not exceed 90 1112. Draft stops particleboard or other approved mat erials adequately
shal l divide the concealed space into approximate ly supported. Openings in Ihe partitions shall be
equal areas. protected by sc lr~cJos ing doo rs with au tomatic
latches constructed as rcquired for lhe partitions.
4 1.2 Two or more dwelling units and hotcls. Draft stops .. ;:
..~ '.' . , .. ' .: .... .., . ,.
;
4.2 Attics.
4.2. 1 Si ll gle~ f;unil y dwellings. Refer to NSCP Volume 3 on
Housing.
4.2.2 Two or more dwelling unit and hotels. Drafts stops
shall be installed in the attics, mansards, overhangs,
false fro nt s set Ollt from walls and similar concealed
spaces of buildings containing more than one
dwelling unit and hotels. Such drafts stop shall be
above and in line with walls separating tenants from
each oth er and from other uses.
Exceptions:
Draft STOPS may be omitted along one of rhe corridor walls.
provided draft stops at tenant separation walls extend to rh e
remainillg corridor droll stop.
Where (lpproved sfJrillklerj' are illstalled, drajtstoppill8 may
be as specified ill the exception below.
4.2. 3 Ot her UScs. Draft stops shall be install ed in ;:\Hi es.
mansards. ovcr~ hangs , false fronts set Ollt from walls
.and similar concealed spaces of building)) havin g
uses other than dwellings or hotels so that th e area
between draft stops does not exceed 270 m2 and
th
National Structural Code of tll('; Pllilipplnes 6 Edition Volume 1
6 ·12 CHAPTU16· Wood
I) IlUll shipl ap shall be Il<li led 9 m ill from the edges Oil bot h
sides of the shiplap. The 19 mm shiplap shall be Iwil l!d 9
mm from th e edge and pcnctrmc through hoth the ove rlap
<llld urHJerJap . Top and bottom edges of the panel shal l be ;... ' ....
nailed 9 mill from the edge. Shiplap and lap siding shall not
be force fil. Square-edged panels shall maintain a 2 mm gap
All softwood wood structural panel s shall conform to the
i!! joints. All jOints and edges of siding shall be over
provisions of the previous Chapter and shall be installed in
framing members, and shall be made resistant 10 weath er
accorda;'{"cc with Table 6.3 Panels shall comply with UI3C
penetratioll with battens, horizontal overlaps or shiplaps to
Standard 23-3.
the sHlisfac ti on o f the building official. A 3 mrn gap shall be
provided around all opcni!i·gs.
609.7 Nailing
All faste ners used for thc attachmcnt of sidin g shall he of it
corrosion-resistant type.
·:.:.:· !.<i"i~·.: 'j',.\. ! '. .:..:.:< .~::
., . ':; .~.... : ;.; ..\' .' .;;'Ji::.<-;,;- :- . : ,.\, . ..... :.:.
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
6·14 CHAPTEr! 6 . Wood
SECTIoN 6.12
MECHANICALLY~LAMINATED. ;
611.1 Structural 1'1001' Sheathing FLOORSANr> DECKS .... ..... ., ·;;'Y."',""
th
National Structural Code of the Pl1ilippines 6 Edltion Volume 1
6-16 CHAP"! Ef l 6 - W ooc1
side of HII opening. Des ign for force tran sfe r sha ll be based mm.·olll), or concrele walls 10 {!x("(!ed 0.005 lime.,· each
011 a rtuiollal an al ysi s. story hei,;"t.
In buildings of wood-frame construction where rOlati on is 2.4 Wo od structural panel sliemhing in horizontal
diaphragms shall havc all unsupported edgcs blocked.
provided for, the depth of the diaphragm Ilorma! to the open
Wood sfruNliral panel sheathing for bOlh ,\'lOries of
side shall 1I0 ( exceed 7.50 III or 2/3 the d ia phragm widt h.
vertical diaphragms shall have all unsuppor!(~d edges
whichever is the smaller depth . Strai ght sheathi ng sh:Il J not
blocked alld for Ih e lower walls have a minimum
be pCJ'lll i((cd 10 resis t shears in diaph rag ms acting in
thickness of J2 mm.
rotat ion.
Exceptions: 2.5 There ,~'''all be no ollt·ol-plane horiz.ol/tal offsets
between the first alld secon d stories of wood srructural
1. Olle-story, wood-framed structures willi the depth pane! sh ear wails,
norma/to th e open side not greater than 7.50 m. may
have a depth equa/to the width. 614 .3 Wood Diaphragms
2. Wh ere calculations show that diaphragm deflections Wood Diaphragms shall conform wit h the fOllO wing
caf! be tolerated, the depth normal to th e open end may guid clincs:
be increased to a depth-Io-width ratio II0t greater Ihan
J.5: J for diagorral sheathirrg or 2: J for special 614.3. 1 Conventional Lumber Diaphragm
diagonal sheathed or plywood or particleboard Construction
diaph ragms. Such lumber diaphragms shall be made up of 25 mm
nominal shcnthing boards laid at an angle of approx imatdy
I n nwsonry or con crete buildings, lumber and wood 45 degrees to supports. Sheat hin g boards shall be di rt~cil y
stm ctural pa nel diaphragms shall not be considered as nailed (0 each intennediate bearin g member with nO( less
transmitting lateral forces by rotation. th an two 65mltl nails for 25 111m by 150 111m nominal
boards and three 65111J1l nails for boards 200 mm or wider;
Diaphragm sheath in g nail s o r other approved sheathing and in add ition, three 65 mm nai ls and four 6S mill nai ls
connectors sha ll be driven nu~h but shall not fracture the shall be used for 150 mm and 200 mm boards, respeclively,
surface of the sheathing . at the diaphragm boundaries. End joints in adjacent boards
shall be separated by at least one joist or stud space, and
614.2 Wood Members Resisting Horizontal Forces there shall be at leas t two boards between joints on the
Contributed by Masonry and Concrete same support, Boundary members at edges of diaphragms
Wood mem bers sh all not be used to resist horizontal forces shall be designed to resist direct te ns ile or comp res!; i"e
contributed by ma sonry or concrete construct ion in chord st resses and adequately tied together at corners,
b ujld ings over one story in hei ght .
614.3.2 Special Lumber Diaphragm Co nstru ction
Exceptiolls: Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall conform :0
conventional construction and in addition, shaH have ;; il
1. Wood floor and roof members may be used if! elements designed in conformance with the provisions of
hariZOll/at trusses alld diaphragms to resist horizontal
this code.
f orces imposed by wind, earthquake or earth pressure,
provided such forces are not resisted by rotation of the
Each chord or ponion thereof maybe considered as a beam
truss or diaphragm.
loaded with a uniform load per meter equal to 50 percent of
2. Ver/jeal wood sfructural panel-sheathed shear walls the unit shear due to diaphragm act ion, The load shall be
may be used to provide resistance to wind or assumed as acting norma! to the chord, in the plane of the
ear/hquake forces in two-slOt}' buildings of masonry or diaphragm and eithe r towards or away from the diaphr<lgm.
concrete construction, provided the follo lVing
requiremcfIls arp. met: Th e span of chord, or porti on thereor, shall be th e dis tance
between structural members of the diaphragm such as the
2.1 Story-to-story wall heights shall not exceed 3.6
joists, studs and blocking, which se rve to transfer the
meters.
ll ss lIIned load to Ihe sheathing,
2.2 Horizorllal diaphragm shafl not be considered to
transmit lateral forces by rotation or camilever action. Special diagonally sheathed diaph rag ms shall includr.
cOllventional diaph ragm s shea thed with two layers c(
2.3 Deflection of horizontal and vertical diaphragms
diagonal sheathin g at 90 degrees to each other and on the
shall not permit per-slory deflection of supported
sa me face of the supportin g members.
(.14 ..1.3 \Vood Slrudul':tl ))and Dblphnl J.!. 1U unless blocki ng o r olhe r meilns of ~ h car t n Ul ~fc r is
Horizo nlill and ve rtical diaphr:lgm s shea thed wi th wood provided.
slructural pimcis Illay be used 10 resist hori/.onwi rorces for
horizontal di,lphraglll and for vertic al diaphragms, or may 614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphnlgms iII Seismic
be calculated by principles of Jllechan i(~s without limi!atioll 7-0'1<' 4
by usin g values of nail strength lHld wood structural pane! Section 614.).1 10614.5 .5 shall be used for wooden shear
shear values as spec iii cd elsewhere in this code . Wood Willis and diaphragms dcsign for Seismic 7..\)Jlc 4 areas.
structural panels for horizontal diaphragms shall be as sct
forth in Tablcs 6.10 and 6.11 for corresponding joist
spacing "and londs. Wood structural panels in shear wnll s 614.5.1 Scope
shall be :II least 8 mill thick for studs spaced 400 lllill on Design and cOllstruction of wood shear walls and
ccnter and 9 mm thick where studs arc spaced 600 mill 011 diaphragms in Seismic Zone 4, as allowed by provisions o f
center. Seclion 6 14.1 and NSCP Volume 3 on Housin g, shall
confo rm 10 the req ui rements oflhis sect ion.
Maximum spa ns for wood struclUral panel subtloOl'
ulldcr!aymcnt shall be as set forth in T<tble 6. 12. Wood 614.5.2 Framing
stmclUraJ panels used for horizoillill and vert ical Col lector members shall be provided to transmit tension
di aphnlgms siwli conform 10 UB C S,.md.lr<J 23-2 and UHC an d compress ion forcc~. Perimcter members <"11 opcnings
Stand ard 23 -3 or equivalent Philippine National Slandards s hall be provided and shall be dClailcd to di stribule the
(PNS ). Shearing stresses. Diaphragm sheathing shu ll not be used to
splice these members.
A ll boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced
where necessa ry 10 transmit direct stresses. Framing Diaphrag m chords and tics shall be placed in, Or tangent to,
members shall be at least 50 mm nominal in the dimension s the plane of the diaphragm framing unless it can be
to whi ch the plywood is attached. In general, pancl edges demonstrated that the moments, shear and deflections and
shall bear on the framing mcmbers and butt along th eir deformations resulting from other arrangements can be
centerlines. Nails shall be placed not less than ]0 mrn ill tolerated.
from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than ]50 min
011 center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly 614.5.3 Wood Structural Panel
driven into the framing members. No unblocked panels less
Wood structura l panels shall be manufact ured us ing
th an 300 mill wide shall be used .
ex terior glu e.
Diaphragms with pa nel edges supportcd in acco rdance with -t
Wood slnlclUrai panel diaphragms and shear walls shall be
Tables 6. I 0, 6. 11 and 6. J 2 shall not be considered as
co nstlllcted with wood stnictural pa nel sheets not less th.m
blocked diagrams unl ess blocking or ot her means of shear
1.20 III by 2.40 111 , except at boundaries and changes in
tran ~ fer is provided.
fr:imi ng where minimum sheet dimension shall be 600 mm
unless all edges of the undersized sheets are sUPPol1ed by
614.4 Particleboard Diaphragms
framing members or blocking.
Vertical diaphragms sheathed with pal1icleboard may be
used to resist horizontal forces. Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the
edges of all sheets in shear walls.
All boundary mcmbers shall be proportioned and spliced
where necessa ry to transmit direct stresses. Framing Wood structural panel sheathing may be llsed for splicing
members shall be at least 50 mm nominal in the dimension members, other than those noted in Section 6 14 .5.2, where
to which th e pa[1icleboard is attached. 111 general, panel the additiona l nailing required to deve lop the transfer of
edges shall bea r on the framing members an d butt along forces wil l not cause cross-grain bendin g or cross-grai n
Ihei r ce nt erlines . Na ils shall be placed nol less than 9 mm in tension in the nailed member.
from Ihe panel edge, ~11iI1I he spaced nol more Ihan 150 I11 Ill
011 ccn ter along panel edge beari ngs, and sha ll be firmly 614.5.4 Ilea,'), VVood Panels
driven into the framing members. Unblocked p;lIlcls less
Diagonally sheathed panels uti lizing 50 I1l1l} nom inal boards
(h an 300 mm wide shall not be all owed or used.
may be used 10 r~li st the sa me pern~i ss i blc shear as ~5 Jlllll
nominal lumber, ·exeept thm 16d n ~lI 1s shall be used lIls1ead
Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance with
of8d.
Table 6.13 shall not be considered as blocked diaphragms
614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms For a design to be acce ptable, the actual stress. i .c. It r!lH.'.,:
Wood stud walls sheathed wit h fibe rboard shcathing may be Jess lhan or eq ual to the adjustcd design va lue F,' :
be used to resist hori zont al fo rces nOI exceeding Ihose SCI
forth in this section. The fibcrboard sheat hing. 1.2 m by 2.4
Ill. shall be applied verticall y [Q wood stud s n OI less than 50
mm nominal in thi ckncss spaced 400 mm on cent er. Naili ng 615.1.1 Repetitive Memoer System
shall be provided at the perimeter of the sheathing board A repetitive member system is defined as one that /Ja.':
and at the intermediate studs. Blocking not less than 50 nUll three (3) or more parallel members of Dimension lun -.l ;
nominal in thickness shall be provided at horizontal joints structural composite lumber; (2) Members spaced not lllUi ,;
when wall height exceeds length of sheathing panel, and than 600mm; (3) Members connected together by a
sheathing shall be fastened to the blocking with nails sized distributing clement such as roof, floor, or wall sheathi:·
spaced 75 mIn on centers each side of joint. Nails shall be
spaced not less than 9 mm from edges and ends of For a repetitive member system, Ihe reference Fi} rlW\' '"
shea thing, Marginal studs of shear wall s or shear-resisting multiplied by a repetilive member factor, C, = 1.15. 1-(;
clements shall be adequately anchored at the top and olher framing systems, C, = 1.0.
bottom and designed to resist all forces, The maximum
height -width ratio shall be 1.5: I . Va lues for species and grades not tahuhlled shall !';,'
approved by the building official.
6J5.3 Adjustlllcnl ofSlresscs 2. When the ,1C(.;UIllUl tttcd durati oll of the full maximu m
The allowable uui! stresses specified in this chapter shall be load during the life of the member docs not exceed the
su bject (0 applicahle adjustmen ts. period indicated below, the val ues may he inc reased in
the tabl e as follows :
615.3. 1 Gcneral. --~--r~ ---- ---- -'- '- -------- ---~---
Increase Period Co
The adjustments shall be as sc t forth in the footnotes to the .- - - --- - .~--- __:_ -__:_____c---- - - -. - - --
approprialc Slrcss wbk~s and 1(; the requiremen ts or th is For seve n days dunllion. li S for roof
25% 1.25
section: load s
::: load dunll;ofl faclor ---I
;;;. wei servi ce fact or
:13.3% f.'or e,lr! hquake 1.33
.--~- .-=---~=------'--.----'
:= size faclor For wind (for connect ions and
::: form factor :n.J% 1.33
fasteners)
:;: £Ial lI SC faclOr
:;: support factor 60% For wind (me mbers only) 1.60
:;: incising «Iclor
:;: temperature fact or 100% For impact 2.0
:;: repetitive member factor
:= column stability factor
= beam sla bili t y factor The fo regoing examples arc no! cumulative. For combined
:;: slenderness factor dural io n of loadings the resultant struc!urnl membe rs shall
=. coeffi cient of variation
not be smaller than the required for the longer duration of
:::: volume factor loading.
These adjustment factors do not ap pl y to al! reference The duration of load factors in this ilem shall 11 0 1 appl y 10
design values. compression·perpendicular-to- grain design values based on
6 J5.3 .2 Preservative Treatment. 1I deformation limi t, or 10 modulus of el(lslicit y.
The values for wood press ure impregnat ed with an
approved process and preservative need no adjustment for 3. V'llues for normal loading conditions may be used
trea tment but arc subjected to ot her adj ustments. without regard to im p(lct if the stress induced by impact
does not exceed the val ues for normal loading.
615.3.3 Firc-Retardant Treatment
The values for lumber and plywood pressu re imprcgnated 615.3.5 Size Factor Adjustment
with approved fire~ retard a nt chemi cals, including fastener When the depth of a rec tan gular sa wn lumber bending
value s, shall be recommended by ihe Ireater and su bmitted member 125 I11Ill or thicker exceeds 300 mm, the bending
to the building official for approval. Submittal to the vHlues , 1"1" shall be multiplied by the siz.e factor, C,.., as
building official shall include all substanti ating data, Such determined by the Equatio n (615- 1):
y,llues shall be developed fl'Om approved test methods and
procedurcs th at consider potential strength -reduction
characteristics, including effects of elevated temperatures
_(300)"9
Cr - - (6 15- 1)
d
ilnd moisture.
where:
Other adjustments are applicable, except thm the impact
lo ud-duration factor shall not apply. C" :::: size factor
d :::: depth of beam, mill
615.3.4 Duration of Load
For be<llllS of circul ar cross sec ti on thaI have a diameter
Values for wood and mecha ni cal fas tenings (when the
greater than 340 mill, or 300 I11Ill or Inrger sq uare beams
',yood delennines the load capacity) are subj ec ted
loaded in th e pJ <lIl C of the diagonal, the size faclor C'.· may
adjustments based on (he following vi:l riati olls in the be determined on the basis of an equivalellt conventionally
duration of load:
loaded square beam of th e same c ro ss ~ s ect io Jlal area.
!. Where a member is fully stressed to the max imum
allowable stress, either continuously or cumulatively, Size factor adjustments are cumulative with form factof
for more than 10 years under the conditions of adjust ments specified in Section 615.3.7, except for lumber
maximum design load, the values shall not exceed 90 I beam and box beams, but arc not cu mul ative with
perce nt of those in the tabl es. slendemess factor adjustmen ts specified in Section 615.3.6.
The size factor adjustment shall 1I0t 'apply to visually
graded lumber 50 mm (0 100 nun thi ck or to machinc- When the slenderness factor C, is greaLer than I () but docs
strcss-rtllcd lumber. not exceed CI;. the all owable unit stress ill bending 1-"" sha ll
he determined from the following equati on:
615.3.6 Slenderness Factor .Ind Flexural Stress.
When the depth of a bending member exceed s it s breadth ,
latera! support may be required and the slenderness factor
F 'b = F/J [I - .3I. (~:t)·'
o
C'
,
l
(615-3)
Cs shall be calculated by the followin g Equation:
where:
C, (i7[
. =v/7 (615-2)
(615 ..
where: E = mod ulus of elasti ci ty
Cs :::; slcndc mcss factor Fb = allowable unit stress ror extreme nbe!" in bend ing
If = effective length of bea m, mill from the followin g F'/J = allowable unit stress for cKtremc fibcr in bending.
tabl e adjusted ror sle nd erncss.
d :::; depth of beam, 111m When the slenderness factor C is greater than Ct but less
b :::; breadth of beam, mm than 50, the allowable unit stress in bending F';, shall be
determined by the following Equation:
The effective lengths, I.. in the tabl e arc based on an Ijd
rati o of 17. For oth er f../d ratios, these effective lengths may ' _ 0.4 38E
Fb- (6 15-5)
be multiplied by a factor equal to 0.85+2.55/(1,/d) except
that thi s factor shall not apply to a single-s pan beam with
,
C,-
equal end rnomems Or :::; 1.841u) or [0 a single span or
In no case shaH C.. exceed 50.
cantilever beam with any load (ii' = 1.921u).
The design valu es for ex treme fiber in bending, F h , and
When the slenderness facLor Cs doe s not exceed 10, the full
modulus elasticity, E, used in the formulas for F'b shall 1:0(:
allowable unit stress in bending Fb may be used .
modified to account for moisture service condition, duratiol l.
Effecti ve Length of Beams of loading, temperature and type of treatmen t in accordance
wi th the Section 615.3 except that the modification for size
Type of Beam Span and Nature Value of Effecti ve faclOl' shown in Secti on 6 15.3.5 shall not be used. Design
of Load Length, [, va lues for extreme fiber in bending adjusted for slendemess
factor, F'b. are not subject to further modifications for
Single-span beam, loael moisture service co ndition, duration of loading,
concentrated at the center 1.611"
temperature, type or treatment or size.
Single-span beam, uniforlnly
1.92/1/
distributed load The design value for ex treme fiber in bending. F'b, shall not
Single-span beam. equ al end exceed the full design value for ex treme fiber in bending.
1.84[.
moments FI" modified as allowed in thi s section. including the size
Cantilever beam. load factor adjustment.
1.69[.
concentrated at unsupported end
Cantilever beam, uniformly When the compression edge of a beam is suppOited
1.06["
distributed load throughout its length to prevent its lateral di splacement, and
Cantilever beam, uniformly the ends at points of bearing have lateral support to prevent
distributed load with rotation, th e unsupported lengt h 11/ may be taken as zero.
1.69["
concentrated load at c'lIltilcver
end When latera l SU ppOI1 is prov ided to prevent rotation at the
Single-span or cantilever beam, points of end beal;ng but no other lateral support is
1.92["
. anY_<l~!2er load ...__ .. - - -- - -.--..- ..-'"--.. --- -_.'.
- .-.--.~
provided throu ghout th e length of the beam, the.
{II =unsupported length of beam, mIll un supported III is th e distance between such points of end
bearing, or the length of th e cantilever.
c,'
Visllally graded !'i(lwn lumbor. ..(US
Machine Sll'css*rated sawn lumber. ... 0.11
d,. (with co nnectors) = the deplh of the member less the The multiplying factors for indicated length of bearing on
dislance from the unloaded edge of the member to the such small areas as plates and washers may be:
nearest edge of the nearest con nector.
Lcngth
d(' (with holts or lag screws) =- the depth of the member less 150
of
the distance from the unloaded edge of the member to the 13 25 38 50 75 100 or
Bearing
more
center of the nearest bolt or Jag screw. (mill) ..
Factor 1.75 1.38 __
1.25 _. 1.19
. ·"i.13._- . 1.10 1.00 .
Al lowable unit stresses in shear for joint involving bolts or
con nectors loaded perpendicular ( 0 gra in may be 50 percent In us ing the preceding equation and table for round washers
. greater th,m (he horizontal shear values as set f011h in Table or bearing areas, usc a length equal 10 the diameter.
6.1 and, provided thaI the joint occurs at least five times the
depth of th e member frol~l its end. Wh en the joint is less In joists sUPP0I1ed on a ribbon or ledger board and spiked
than five times the depth of the member from its end, the to the studding, the allowable stress in compression
included shear st ress is calculated by: perpendicular to grain may be increased 50 percent.
(6J 7·1)
, ~
.Ii".
,, ,,
,, ,
Ii
,,
, ,
,
t ~
,
,,
,p
~
...,,
i
,
same cross ~sectional area and having the so\!l1c degree of
,,,
Buckling
,
,,,
\ .
Mo(h~!
,,, ,, ,
,,,
\
,, ,,
\
, ,
,, ,, ,,, ,,
,, , ,,,
\ \
\
, ,,, ,
•• Ji. II,
•! •
t t t
Do .....
bQCIdin«
...... -,
f.dot,
condltto,..
K, 0.65 O.SO I. 20 1.00 2. 10 2.'
approJj.
('Ilattd
-
..,. Rotation fi x.
.,.Y'
Rotzrti.ou frcc , traNiatiotl fIXed
End
Condition Rotation fixcd, translation free
Code
Rotation fr ee, lIanslation free
I f
User Note: t, = K; I
617.4 Tapered Columns
When designi ng a tapered colum n with a rectangular cross
section, tapered at one or both ends, the representative
dimension, dul' fo r each face of the column slwll he deri ved
as foll ows:
d n ·p = dm in + {cimax - dmil,Ha-.Q. 15 ( [·dmifl I dm"J1 (61 7-2)
where:
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
6·26 CHAPTU! G . Wood
F'e and K shall be determined in accordance with the The buckling stiffness factor CT shall apply as follows:
provision in Section 617.3, except (I) when checking the
design in the plane of bending the slenderness ratio, Vd, in Short column ( /, 1 d of II or less ):
the plane of bending shall be lIsed to calculate F'e and J
620.4.2 Veneer
Anchored masonry and sto lle wa ll veneer shall not exceed
J 25 Illlll ill thickness.
3. Floor joists at ends of braced IVall panels are doubled. height, .!l1 illlerior braced waJl p;'lIlcls shall be supported on
continuous fOllndations.
4. A continuous rim joists is cOflnected to ends of all
cantilevered joists. 1'liC rim joist may be spliced using Exception:
(J metal fie no/less than 1.47 mm (/6 galvaniz.ed gage)
Two-story buildings may have interior braced wall lines
and 38111111 wide/astened with six 16 d nails.
supported on continuous jOUlu/mions al il/tervals he....·
5. Gravity loads carried at the end of cantilevered joists exceeding 15.0 m. provided:
Gre limited to uniform wall and roof load alld the
1. Cripple l,<'!al! h(!ighr does nOl exceed 1.20 m.
reactions/rm!z headers having a span of 2.40 m or less.
2. First - floor braced wall panel~i are supported ,.,'.
620.5.3.2 When a section of floor or roof is no! lmcrally doubled floor joist, COllliIZU O U~' blocking or FO{ir
Sllppol1cd by braced wall Jines on all edges. beams.
Exception: 3. Dislallce between bracing lines does not exceed li l 'i, " _'
the buildillg width parallel (0 lhe braced wall line.
PoriioTIS of rooff or floors which do 110/ support braced
waJ/ panels above may extend up to J .80 111 beyond a
620.6 Girders
braced wall/ine.
Unless ol herwise permitted by pro visions in NSCP V Ol:J!:1 , ~
620.5.3.3 When the end of a required braced wall pallel 3 on I-l ousing, girders for single-story construclinJ'r ',r
exte nds more than 300 mm over lin opening in the wall girde rs supporting loads frolll 11 single nOol' shall not be- k:-::s
below. This provision is applicable to braced wall pancls Ihan lOOmm by 150 IlUll for spans 1.80 III or less, provided
offsc t in plane and to braced wall panels offse t ou t of plane that girders are spaced not more than 2.40 Jll on center.
as permitted by Section 620.5.3.1. Other girders shall be designed to suppo rt the I()ad~,;
specified in this code. Gi rder end joints shall occur over
F..xceprion: supports. When a girder is spliced Ove r a support,
Braced wall panels may extend over an opening 1101 more adequate tic shall be provided. The end of beams or gillh:; s
than 2.40 nl. in width when the header is a 100 mm by 300 suppo!1ed Oil masonry or concre te shall not have less lll:ii!
mm or larger member. 75 111m of bearing.
620.5.3.4 When an openi ng ill a floor or roof exceeds the 620.7 Floor Joist s
lesser of 3.60 m or 50 percent of the least fl oor or roof
dimension. 620.7.1 General
The limits of defects by grade ill joists and plalli;s fur
620.5.3.5 Construct ion where pOrl ions of a nODI' level are seasoned wood arc set forth in Table 6,15.
verticall y offset such that the framing members Oil either
side of the offset cannol be lapped or lied lOgcthcr in an 620.7.2 Bearing
approved manner as req uired by Section 620.7 .3.
Except where supported on a 25 mill by 100 mm ! ;; ,1-:-'1:
strip and nailed to th e adjoining stud, the ends of eaell
Exception:
shall not have less than 38 Illlll of bearing on wood or
Framing supported directly by foundations.
metal, or less than 75 mm on masonry.
620.5.3.6 When braced wall lines do not occur in two
620.7.3 Framing Details
perpendicular directions.
Jois ts shall be supported laterally {It th e ends and at (";;" 11
620.5.3.7 Other config urations which, in the opinion of th e support by solid blocking ex cept wh ere th e ends or .! <)
building official, create irregularities or di scontinuities arc nailed to a header, band or rim joi st or to an iHI.i o~lLJ ',i:
wh ich arc 1101 addressed by this Section. stud or by other <Ippro ved means. Solid blocking shall not
be less 50 mill in thi ckness and the full depth o f joist.
620.5.4 Lumber Roof Decks
Notches on the ends of joists shall 1101 exceed one-fou rth
Lumber roof decks shall have solid shemhing. the joist depth . Holes bored in joist,; shall not be wit hi n ~n
mill of the top or bottom of the joist and the diamch': l .,' ")
620.5.5 Interior Braced Wall Support such hole shall not exceed one-third the depth of {[;\. jl; )sL
In one-story buildings, interior braced wall lines shalt be Notches in the top or bottom of joists shall not eX<T\ ' . ~ :·i , .
suppol1ed on continuous foundation s at intervals not sixt h the depth and shall not be located in the middle dl!; d
exceedi ng 15.0 111. In buildings more than one-story in of the span.
Joist framing from opposite sides o/" a beam. gintcr or 620.8,3 Plnnk Flooring
pani tioll ,.,hall he lapped al Jc.ast 75 mm or the opposing Plank floo ring shall be designed in ;Icconlancc with the
joists shall he tied together In an 'lpprovcd manner. genera! pro vis ions of thi s codc .
Jo is ts frelllling il1lo the side or a wood girdcr shall be In lieu of such dcsign, 50 Jll1l1 tongue -and -groove planking
supp(mcd by framing ,lIlellors or nil ledger strips IH)[ less Illay be llsed in accordance with Tabl e 6.22. Joints in such
tlWll 50 mill by 50 mill. planking may bc 'randomly spaced, provided th e system is
applied to not less than three continuous spuns, planks arc
620.7.4 Framing Around Openings center-matched and cnd~1l1atched or spli ncd, eac h. rlank
Trimmer amI header joists shall be doubled, or of lumber of bears on at least one support and joints are ~;c para.tl~d by at
equivalent cross sec tion, when the span of the header least 600 mm in adjacent pieces. 25 mill nominal strip
exceeds J .20 Ill. The ends of header joists more than 1.80 square-edged flooring; 13 mm tongue·and -groove flooring
m lon g shall be su pported by framing anchors or joist or 9 mill wood structural panel shall be applied at right
hallgers unl ess bea ring on a beam, panition or wall. Tail angles 10 Ihe span of Ihe planks. The 9 mm plywood shall
joists over 3.60 III long shall be supported at header by be applied with the face grain at right angles lO the span of
framing anchors or 011 ledger strips not less th'lIl 50 I11I1l by the planks.
50mm.
620.8.4 Particleboard
620.7.5 Supporting Bearing P~lrtjtions Where used (IS structural subOooring or as combined
Bearing partitions perpendicular to joists shall not be offset subfloor underlaymcnt, particleboard shall be as set f0I1h in
from support ing girders, walls or partitions more than the Table 6.13.
joist deplh .
620.9 P~lrticlehoard Underlaymcnt
Joists under and parallel to bearing partitions shall be In accordance with approved recognized· standards,
doubled . particleboard floor undcrlayment shall co nform to Type
PBU . Underlayment shall not be less than 6 mm in
620.7.6 Blocking thi ckness and shall be identified by the grade mark of an
Floor joists shall be blocked when required by the approved inspection agency. Underlayment shall be
provisions of Section 620.7.3. installed in accordance with this code and as recommended
by the manufacturer.
620.8 SubOoOling
620.10 Wall Framing
620.8.1 Lumber Subnoor
Sheathing used as a st ructural sub-floor simi I conform to the 620.10.1 Size, Height and Spacing
limitations set (ol1h in Table 6.9. 'Jlle size. height and spacing of studs shall be in accordance
wit h Table 6.23 except that utility grade studs shall not be
Joints in subtlooring shall occur over SUpp0I1S unless cnd- spaced more than 400 mm on center, or sup port more than a
matched lumber is used in which case each piece shall bear roof and ceiling, or exceed 2.40 111 in height for exterior
on at least two jOists. walls and load-bearing walls or 3.00 m for interior non
load·bearing walls.
Subflooring may be omitted when joist spacing does not
exceed 400 111111 and 25 mm nominal tongue-and-groove 620.10.2 Framing Details
wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular to the joi sts.
St ud s shall be placed with th eir wid e dimension
620.8.2 Wood Structural I'"nels perpendicular to the wall. Not less Ihan three st uds shall be
\:Vhere used as structural sub nooring, wood st ru<.:w ral insta lled at each corner of an exterior w,l l1 .
panels s hall be ns sci forlh ill Tables G. 1O and G. II . \Vooel L::xceptiolls:
stru ctural panel co mbination subfloor 1I1lde ri ayment shall
ha ve maximum spans as set fort h ill Table 6.12. At comers, a third stud may be omifled lhrough (he use of
wood spacers or backup cleats of 9 mm wood structural
When wood structu ral pane) noOl"s are glued to joists with pallc/, 9 111111 Type M "Exterior Glue" particle-board, 25
an adhesive in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's mm lumber or other approved devices rliat will serve as an
directions, fasteners may be spaced a maximum of 300 mm adequate backing for the attachment of facing materials.
on center at all supports. Where fire resistance ratings or shear values are involved,
wood spacers, backup cleats or other devices shall flot be than 9 ml11 for (lOn I11Ill stud spacirlt in <I<.:cordancc with
used unless specifically approved for Stich use. Tables 6.5 lind 6.25.
4. Fiberboard sheathing 1.20 III by 2.40 III panels 110t less
Dearing and exterior w<l1I studs shall be capped wilh double
than 13 Illlllihick applied vCrl icall y on studs spaced not
lOp plates install ed to provide overlapping at corners and at
over 406 mill on center whcn installed il) accordance
intersections with other paI1itions. End joints in double top
with Seclion614 .6 and Tablc6.27.
plates shall be offset at least 2.40 fll .
5. Gypsum board (sheathing 13 mrn thi ck by 1.20 III
Exceptions:
wide, wallboard or veneer base) 011 studs spaced not
A single top plote lIIay be used, provided Ihe plate is over 600 /llill 011 center and nailed at 175 mill on center
adequately tied al joints, comers and intersecting walls by with nail s as required by Table 6.28.
at least the equivalent of 75 111111 by J50 mm by 0.9 111111
6. Particleboard wall sheathing panels where installed in
galvanized sleel that is nailed to each wall or segmenl of
accordance with Table 6.29.
wall by six 8d nails or equivalent, provided the rafters,
joists or tmsses are centered over the studs with a tolerance 7. Portland cement plaster on studs spaced 400 mm on
of flO more than 25 mm. center installcd in accordance with Table 6.28.
8. f[~lrdboard panel sidi ng when installed in accor<ian(.:c
When bearin g studs arc spaced at 600 111m intervals and EOr
with Section 609.6 and Table 6.8.
plates arc less than 50 nun by 150 mm or 70 mill by 100
111m members and when the floor joists. floor tl1lSSCS or roof
tru sses which they support are spaced at more than 406 Illlll
intervals, such joists or tmsses sha ll bear with in 125 mm of
For cripple wall bracing. sec Section 620.10.5. For Methods
the studs beneath or a third plate shall be installed.
2, 3, 4, 6 and 8, each braced panel rnust be at least 1.20
111 in
Icngth, covering three stud spaces where studs are spaced
Interior nonbearing partitions may be capped with a single
400 111m apart and covering two stud spaces where studs arc
top plate in stalled to provide overlapping at corners and at
sp~\ccd 600 mill apart.
interscctions with other walls and pal1itions. The plate shall
be continuously tied at joints by solid blocking al least 400
For Mcthod 5, each braced wall pancl must be at least
mill in length and equal in size to the plate or by 3 min by
2.40 III in Icnglh when applied 1O onc facc of a braced wall
38 111m metal ti es with spliced sections fastened with two
panel and 1.20 m whcn applied to both faces.
16d nails on each side of the joint.
All vcr1ical joints of pane.! sheathing shall OCCllr over studs.
Studs shall have full bearing on a plate or sill not less than
Horizontal joints shall occu r over blocking equal ill size to
50 mill in thickness having a width not less than that of rhe
the studding except where waived by the installation
wall studs.
requirements for the speci fic sheathing materials.
620.10.3 Bracing
Braced wall pancl sole plates shall be nailed to the floo r
Braced wall lines shall consists of braced wall panels which framing and top plates shall be connected to the framing
meet the requirements for location, type and amount of above in accordance with Table 6.3. SiIls shaIl be bolted to
bracing specified in Table 6.24 and arc in line or offset the foundation or slab. Where joists are perpendicular to
from each other by not more than 1.20 111. Braced wall braced wall lines above, blocking shall be provided under
panels shall start at not more than 2.40 m from each end of and in line with the braced wall panels.
a braced wall linc. All braced wall panels shall be clearly 620.10.4 Alternate flraced Wall Panels
indicated on Ihe plans. Constnu.:tion of braced wall panels Any braced wall pnllci req uired by Sectioll 620. 10.3 lIla y be
shaIl bl! by one of the (oIlowing method s: re placed by an nlternatc brnced wall panel cOllstruc ted jl~
I. Nominal 25 111m by 100 mill con tinllous diagonal accordance with thc following:
braces let into 101" and bott om plates and intervenin g 1. In one-story buildings, each panel shall have a length
studs, placed at an angle not more than 60 degrees or of not less thnn 800 111m and a height of not more than
less thall 45 degrees from the horizontal, and attached 3.0!ll. Each pan el shall be sheathed 011 o ne face with 9
to the framing ill conformance with Table 6.3. mm plywood sheathing nailed with 65mm common or
2. Wood boards of 16 mm net minimum thickness applied galvanized box nails in accordance with Table 6.3 and
diagon ally on studs spaced not over 600 mm on center. blocked at all plywood edges. Two anchor bolts
installed shall be provided in each panel. Anchor bolts
3. Wood structural panel sheathing with a thickness nOI shaIl be placed at panel quarter points. Each panel end
less than 8 111m for 400 mm stud spac ing and not less stud shall have a tic-down device fastened to the
foundtlti oll. capahle of providing un approved uplifl joisls unocrnc:H h stich parti tions slwll he doubled and
capaci ty of not less Ihan 820 kg. The lie-dow n device spaced 10 perm it the passllge of such pi pes and shall be
stltllJ be installed ill llccordancc with the manu fac turer' s briuged. Where plumbing, hea ting or olher pipe.Ii arc placed
recommendati ons. The panels shall be" suppol1cd in Or paI11 y in a partition, necessit ating the cuttin g of the
direcll y on a foundation or on floor framin g SLJPIJO l1Cd soles or plales, a metal tic not less tl wn J.4 7 mm (16
directly On a foundation which is continuous acroS5 [he galvanized gage) and 38 mill wid e shall be fastened to each
entire length of the braced wall line. This foundati on plate across and to each side of' th e opening with not less
shall be reinforced with not less than one 12 IllIl1 bar than six 16 d nails.
lOp ilnd bOlIOfll.
2. In the first story of two-story buildings, each braced 620.10.8 Bridging
wall panel shall be in accordance with Secti on Unless covered by interior or ex teri or wa ll coverings or
620. 10.4, item I, except that the plywood sheathin g sheathing meeting the minimum requirements of' this code,
shall be provided on both faces, Ihree anchor bolts shall all stud partitions or walls with stu ds ha ving a hci g ht - to ~
be placed alone-fifth points, and tic-down device uplift least thi ckness rati o ex~ceedill g 50 shall ha ve bridging not
capacit y shall not be Jess than 1360 kg. less than 50 mm in thickness and of Ihe same width as the
studs fitted SJlugl y and nailed thereto to provide adequate
620.10.5 Cripple Walls lateral support .
FOllndalion cripple wall s shall be framed of studs fl ot less ill
size than the studding above with a minimum length of 350
620.10.9 Cutting and Notching
mm, or shall be framed if solid blocking. When exceeding In exteri or walls and bearing partitions, any wood stud ma y
1.20 m in height, such walls shall be framed of studs having be cut or notched to a depth not exceedin g 25 percent of its
rhe size required for a!1 additional story. width. Cutting or notching of stud s to a depth not greater
than 40 percent of the width of th e stu d is pcnnitted in
Cripple walls having a stud height exceeding 350 mm shall nonbearing partitions supp0l1ing no loads other than the
be braced in accordance with Table 6.26. Solid blocking or weight of the partition.
wood structural panel sheathing may be used to brace
cripple walls havin g a stud height of 350 mm or less. In 620.10.10 Bored Holes
Seismi c Zone 4, Method 7 is not permitted for bracing any Bored holes may be peonitted in any wood stud provided
cripple wall stud s. th e holcs arc not greater than 40 percent of the stud width .
Bored holes not greater th an 60 percent of th e wid th of lhe
Spac ing of boundary nailing [or requ ired wall bracing shall stud y is permilted in Ilonbea ring partitions or in any wall
n OI exceed 150 111m on cenler along the foundation plate where each bored stud is doubled, provided not more than
and the top plate of the cripple wall. Nail size. nail spacing two such successive dou bled st ud s arc so bored.
for fi eld nailing and morc restricti ve boundary nailing
requirements shall be as requi red elsewhere in the code for III no case shall the edge of the bored hole be nearer than 16
the speci fi c brac ing material used. 11m} to the edge of the stud . Bored holes shall lIot be
located at the same section of stud as a cut or notch.
620.10.6 Headers
Headers and lintels shall conform to the requirements set 620.10,11 Roof and Ceiling Framing
forth in thi s paragraph and together with their supporting
systems shall be designed to support the loads specified in 620.10.11,1 General
this code. All openings 1200 mm wide or less in bearin g The framing details required in thi s secti on apply to roofs
wa1l5 shall be provided with headers consisting of either having a minimum slope of 3 units vertical in 12 units
two pieces of 50 mIll framing lumber placed on edge and hori zo ntal (25% slope) or greater. Wh en the roof slope is
securely fa stened together or 100 mm lumber of equival ent less than 3 units vertical in 12 units hori zon tal (25% slope),
cross secti on. All openings more than 1.20 m. wide shall be members supporti ng rancrs and ceiling joisls such as ridge
provided with headers or lintels. Each end of lintel or boa rd, hips and vall eys shall be des igned ~IS beam s.
hc.ader shall have a length of bearing of not less than 38 nun
for the full width of the lint el. 620.10.11.2 Framing
Raft ers shall be framed directl y opposite each other at Ihe
620.10,7 Pipes in Walls rid ge. There shall be a ridge board at least 25 mill nominal
Stud partitions containin g plumbing, heating, or other pipes thi ckness at all ridges and not less in depth than the cut end
shall be so framed and the joists underneath so spaced as to of the rafter. At all valleys and hips there shall be a single
give proper clearance for the piping. Where a partition valley or hip rafter not less than 50 mIll nomin al thickness
conlaining such piping runs parallel to the floor joists, the and not less than the Ctlt of the raft er.
con tinuou s tic between exterior wa lls when such j oists are
paralic I to the rafters. Where not parallel, rafter. shall be ti ed
621.1 Design and Faurication
to 25 mm by 100 Illlll (nominal) minimum-size crossties.
Rafter ties shall be spaced l10t more than 1.20 III un ·center. The desi gn and fabri cation of metal plate connected wood
tmsscs shall be in accordance with ANS IrfPI 1· 199:;,
620.10.11.6 Purlins National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood
Truss Construction of the Truss Plate Institute.
The maximum span of 5011)111 by 150 111m purJins shall be
1.80 m but in no case shall the purlins be smaller than 50
621.2 Performance
mm by 100 mm members. The unbraced length of strut s
shall not exceed 2.40 m and the minimum slope of the struts FuJI-scale load tests in accordance with ANSlfTPJ 2 may be
shall be 45 degrees from the horizontal. required at the option of the building official to provide a
means of demonstrating that minimum adequai e
620.10.11.7 Blocking performance is obtainable from specific metal plate
connector plates. various lumber types and grades. it
Roof rafters and ceiling joists shall be suppor1ed laterally
particular truss desi gn and a particular fabricatiot!
to prevent rotation and lateral displacement When required
procedure. ANSlffPI 2 provides procedures for testing an d
by Section 616. Roof trusses shall be supported laterall y at
evaluating wood tl1JsseS designed ill accordance wit h
points of beari ng by solid blocking or by other equivalent
ANSlffPI I.
means to prevent rotarion and lateral displacement.
621.3 In-Plant Inspection
620.10.11.8 Roof Sheathing
Each truss manu facturer shall ret ain an approved agcnr ,'
Roof sheathing shall be in accordance with Tables 6, I 0 and ha ving no financial interest ill the plant being inspcc(c.:
6.11 for wood structural panels, and Table 6.9 for lumber. make nonscheduled inspections shall cover all phases of the
truss operat ion, in cl ud ing lumber sto rage, handling, cu ttin g,
Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over support unless fixtures, presses or rollers, fabrication bundling and
approved end-matched is used, in which case each piece ba ndi ng, handling, <md delivery.
shall bear on at least tw o supports.
621.4 Marking
Wood structural panels used for roof sheathing shall be
bonded by intermediate or exterior gille. Wood structural Each truss shall be legi bly branded, marked or otherwi <;(~
panel roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be have permanently affix ed thereto the following inform31iol!
bo nded with exterior glue. located within 600 mm of the centcr of the span on the face
of the bottom chord:
622.1 General
In cases where the identification of a particular wood
species is 110t known. thereforc-,working stresscs CtUlilOl be
found in Table 6.1, machine grad~d lumber can be lIsed for
general and structural applications.
. 622.6 Markings
Prior to usc, each machine graded lumber should be
inspec ted for a mark that co ntains the mill in which the
lumber was graded, organi7..atioll that eellifies the quality of
the grading procedure, timber size, stress grade and
moi sture content.
Table 6.1 - Working Stresses for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of I)hilippine Woods "
.. ~,".--- .. ~- - . -- - '-
-..__.._._-"-'" r
80% Stress Grade
Bending lind Compression Compr('."sion Sh('ur
Specie'S Modulus of
Tcn."ion Elast icit)' in l)arltll('llo P'pcndicul;u- I'arallello
(Com ilion and not .'H1ieal Nmncs) j'aritllello
Bending GrHin to Grain Grain
~~.- ....------ . - ---.- Grain ..... _--
(5)
._----
(6)
-.
( 1) (2) (3) (4)
x IO"
MPa MPa MP" MPa MP"
I. High Strength Group
Agoho (C(Jsuarin<l equiset ifoli a Forsl) 263 8.22 14.5 5.91 2. 95
Liusin (Parinari corymbos,,(lllullle) Miq .) 25 .0 9.36 15.6 4.3 1 2.64
MaJabayabas (Trislania SPIJ.) 28.7 830 15.8 8.70 3.02
Manggachapui {Hopea sP!> .) 25.8 9.63 16.0 6.03 2.78
Mojave (Vitcx parviOora Juss.) 24.0 6. 54 15.4 6.34 2.8 8
Narig (Vatica spp.) 21.8 8.33 13. 7 4.97 2.6 1
Sasa lit (Tcijmanniode ndron lIhcrniiinum (Merr) 31.3 9.72 21.60 10.2 3.38
llkh .)
Y akal (S hore!! spp.) 24.5 9.78 15.8 6.27 2.49
:' .>
IV Moderately Low S(rengtl~ Group
A Inmciga rAg'lIhis dtlHlIllar<l (Lamb.) Ri III . J 11.8 5.47 6.27 1.44 1.4 7
Bayok (Plcrospcrmum spp.) 12.6 4.75 733 1.30 1.20
Lingo-lingo (V itcx IUfczaninowii Merr.) 13.2 4. 13 6.85 2.00 1.66
Mangasinoro (Shorea .spp.) 12.8 5.36 7.46 1.97 1.44
Rain1ree [Samanca Sillll<lll (Jacg.) Mcrr.] 11.9 2,75 7.23 3.32 2 ,07
Yemanc (Gmc1in <l arborca R. Br.) 12.6 4.09 7,87 3.40 1.96
(1)
x I O~
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
I. Hig h Strength Group
Agoho (Casuarina equisclifoli a r orsl) 20.7 6.47 11.4 4,65 2,3 2
Liusin (Parinari corymbosa (Bl ume) Miq.J 19.7 7.37 12.3 3.39 2,08
Malabayabas (Tri slilnia spp.) 22.6 6,53 12.5 6.85 2,38
Manggaehapui (Hopea spp.) 20.3 7.58 12.6 4.75 2, 19
Molave (Vitex parvinora Juss.) 18.9 5. 15 12. 1 5,00 2,27
Narig (Vatica srp .) 17.2 6.5 6 10 8 3,92 2,06
Sasal it [Tcijmanniodcnciron ailernianlllll (Men") 24.7 7,65 17,0 8.07 2,67
Bkh. ]
Yakal (Sho re. spp,) 19.3 7.70 12,0 4,94 1.96
1
X 10.
MPa
- _. MPa MPa MPa
7 .88
.-
1.97
--MPa
1.6 1
13. 1 5. 15
J
Bayok (Ptcrospermu m spp.) 9.94 3.74
Lingo-Jingo (Y itcx turczaninowji MelT.) 10.4 3.25 5.39 1.58 1.31
Mangasinoro (Shorca spp.) 10.0 4 .22 5 .8 7 1.55 1.14
Raimrec [Sarnanca samail (Jacq.) MelT.} 9.37 2. 16 5. 70 2.61 1.63
Ycmanc .(Gmclinft arborea R. 13]J__._..... __ _ _ 9.90 3.22 6.20 2.68 1. 55
- .-
- '-
Grain
(15) (16)
--
(I ) (12) (13) (14)
x 10'
MP" MP" MP" MPa MP"
II. Moderatcly"High Strcngth GrouJl
Antipolo (Arthoclirpus spp.) 11.6 3.34 6.77 2.44 , 1.29
Binggas (Tcrminl1lia spp.) I 1.8 4.11 7.13 2.04 1.40
Bokbok (Xanthophyllulll CXCclSUIll (B lume) Mi q.] I 1.3 3.97 7.06 2.13 1.36
Dao (DracontolllcJoll spp.) 10. 1 3.39 5.90 1.42 1.20
Gafi.ISan IGarcinia vcnulosa (Blanco) Choisy] 13.0 4.27 8.42 2.20 1.47
Ouijo (Shorea spp.) 13 .6 5.30 8.22 2.66 1.50
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 13. 1 4.50 7.31 2.74 1.54
Kamatog IErythrophloculll densifIonlfll Elm) 11.9 4. 72 6.98 2.47 1.47
Men.]
Katmon (Dillcnia srp) 11.7 4.26 7.44 3.03 1.43
Kato (Amoora spp,) I 1.5 5.02 6.62 2.17 1.23
L.oll1arau (Swilltonia foxworthyi Elm,) 12.4 4.95 7.38 2.86 1.36
Mahogany. Big-leafed (Swinlonia macropJ,ylJa 10.3 2.9 1 6.54 2.39 1.69
King)
Makaasirn (Sysygiulll nitidurn Bellth) 12.8 4.20 7.10 2.31 1.50
Malakauayan IDcclIsoc,uvus philippinensis (Fo xw .) 11.8 4.16 6.98 1.45 1.34
de Laub.]
Nana (Ptcrocarpll:-l indicU:-l Wind) 11.2 3.71 7.12 1.92 1.20
Puhutan (Mangilera spp.) 10.4 4.08 6.25 ' 1.56 1.28
Tllblr 6.2 - Grouping of Spcc.:it's for Determining AlI()w~d)I<.· LfHld . . for Timher Joints
~-.--.-- --'--'--iV--- ' - --
~-.--- -.-.-- ..
I --- ~.
II _-_.. -- ---_....
._._- - _._----_._----_..III --- ---_.-
Spcdcs Relativc Spcdcs Rchltivc Sp('('ies Itclnti\'c Species RdHti VC
__ ..~cnsi!'y __ Dcnsitl_ --_. _-_._- _. ~~t.L
1 _____..._. ______.. Dcnsity ._
::=:::.. (iL.~~=-. _ . _
(2)- - - (3)
. ~.----.-.-
(4)
--~ . - ..- -~.~- --. __.-.JQ.L....... .. _ .J:!l...._....... .... J~)
Mlllabayabas 0.90 Makaasim 0.74 Malugai 0.61 Lingo·lingo 0.48
Liu sin 0 .79 Binggas 0 .70 Salakin 0 .56 Allllac iga 0.42
Dao 0.48
a See Table 6.35 for Working Stresses for Other Visually Stre ss-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods.
I, I I.
12.
Blocking between joists or nlftcrs to top rlate, {oenail
Rimjoisl to top plate, toenail
3-65mm
65111111 at 150 111m o.c.
! 11
14.
Top phll cs. laps and intersections, f<lcC nail
Con tinu ous header, two pieces
2-9001m
90mm at 400 mill O.C. along each cdgc
15. Cei ling joists to plate, toena il 3-65m!ll
I
16. COll ti nuous header 10 slUd. tocnai l 4-6511)11)
17. CC iiingjoists, lap s over partitions, face nai l 3-901ll1ll
18. Ct~i ling jOis)s !O parallcl raftcrs. face nail 3-90mm
19. RaJkr 10 plale, toenail 3-65n1l11
II 20 25 mm brace to each stud and plate , face nair 2~65mm
22 mm - 25 mm 65mm .!
28 Illlll - 32 mill 75 mlll J or 65111111 5
Combination subfloor-underJayment (10 framing):
20 mm and less SOmm S
22 25 mill
Illlll - 6501m .~
30111111 - 32 mill 75m!Jl 4 or 65mm .1
th
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition VO!Ull1C 1
6 -42 CHAP TEH 6 - Wood
Nailing I
-- - --.--. --
Ts~bcrboard sheathing 7:
12 111m IOmnl x 40111Jll s
50mm-l
IOmm x 30111111 y
20mm lOlllm x 40rnm II
65 mm J
IOJr.m x 30mm \I
29_ Inlerior panelin g
6 nUll 40mm JO
JOmm 50nlln~ _ ____ ___ ~ _______ ~
- - - - -----------
Nares Fol' Table 6.3
I Com mon o r box nails may be u.~ed i!XCCP' where otherwise sWlcd.
} Nails sluIced af 150 m/1l 01/ ("(/liN 01 edge:;, 300 111m at illlemJcc/ialc SIIPI'lHl.\' e:lTCpl 150 IIlIIlllI (Ill sfll'porl s where .f/milS afe 1200 111111 01"
more.
For ,wilillg a/wood Slrucfu r(J.1 panel and pa r(icle/JoCJrd diaphragms (ll1d sllf'(//' wol/s. (('fl.'" /0 Secfiolls 6 /4.3.3 (I/ld 6 14.4. Nails f or 11'011
sheathing ma), be ('ommon, box or casing.
J ComlllOIl or deformed shank.
Camlllol/.
Dejonm:d shank.
Corro.riofl-rcsiS/(1Il1 Siding or {'(Ising flails cQIl/arming /0 Ihe rel/llirelllt'nlS o/S(,£"Iioli 603.3,
1 Faslener.l" s/1{Iced75 111111 on ("Cllft'r at e,ncrior edgt.'i anA 150 mlf! on cemer Of h!/('rmediOf(' l'IIf'POrfS.
~ Corrosion-resiswn/ roofing nails wilh 10 111m head (lnd 40 mm lell8th for J2 mill .rheathing and 45 mm fen grll filr 20 1111/1 s!II:(}/hiIl8
con/onnin8 to 'h e f('q uiremCIIIJ o[Sectioll 603. 3.
~ CorrosiOfl'resisfatl' staples wilh 1I0mil/a i 10 mill croW/I 30 mill length for 12 /11111 sheathillg alld 40 11/111 iI'1I8111 f or 20 11/11/ s/telllltillg
cOll/omlitlg to th e requirements o[Sectioll 603.3.
10 Pan('/ supports at 400 mill (500 mm if sire/18th axi.\' in the lont: direc tion of th e pa lle!. ullloJ othawi,\"(.' marked). C/lsing or/ill ish lIail.~
spaced 150 IIIITI on palle! edges, 300 11111/ at i'l/ermediale supports.
II P(lfleJ SIIP/wrtS 01600 trim, Casillg Qr finish ,wi/of spa('Cd 150 111m all paneJ edges. 300 mill aI illlenlt('diatl' SIl/'I.'!)rt.f.
1 1
1 1
ROOF RlDGE
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
"""
6~44 CHAPTER 6 ~ Wood
3 400 2
10 111m
12 111m 4 600
I 1Jllckness of gram'cd ponds /.1" measured (/( bO/f()111 of grool'('S.
? May he 600 111111 If plywood siding applied with face grain fN.'rpelldirular 10 SlUffs or ()I'('T olle of fhe following' (/) 25 min board
sheathing, (2) 10 mm wood sfl"ucfllml pm!!'! sheathing or (3) 10 mill wood Slm({lIral pallet shcO/hing willi .l'Irl'n[.:111 axis (which i.r rhe
long direction oflhe pm!l!1 unless otlwnl'ise marked) ofs/U'alhing pc/pendiCIIla!" {(J slut/s,
Minimal
Nominal
Table 6.8 - Hardboard Siding
. Framing
(SOIlIJI1 x 100mm)
--j N.iI--Size
'.' -
1.-.. --- -- -
NAil. SPACING'"-- '' - -'''
- GCller:]uraCin g Pallels ,--
SIDING Thickness Maximum Spacing (!lUll)
(mm)
_._-----_. -_._- - - ----- -
.,,
_..
I. IAlP Sidina
.. ~-.-
Direct to SllJd~
Over Sheath in '
I
I
__ ~9_"-f
10
____ .~_.400
4(X)
111111 o.c.
Illm O.C .
I
I
65
75
I
I
400 mill o.c.
400 mill O.C .
1-
I
Not 8Ep liclI blc___
Not applicable
~~~re ~e Panel Siding -_.- ._- - - - - - - .----
150 mill O.C.
100 ':1lI1 O.C. edges;
edges; 300 mm
200 mm o.c.
Direct to Stud~ 10 600 nun o.c . 50 o.c. at
intermediate
intermed iate
supports
supports
150 nun o.c.
) 00 mm o.c. edges;
edges; 300 mm
200 111m O.C.
Over Sheathing 10 600 mlTIo.c. 65 o.c. at
intermediate
intcrrnediatc
SUpp OI1~
suppo rts
..1:...._§hiplap Edge I'anel Sid~!R. __ - - ---=--- r-- --- - --- -- ---
150 mill o.c.
100 !llm o.c. edges;
edges; 300 mill
200 mill O.C.
Dirccl lo SlUds 10 400 mill O.C. 50 o.c. al
inlermediale
intcflncd iate
supports
I--- ._-_.. .._...._-- -- supports
150 mm o.c.
100 mm o.c. edges;
edges; 300ml11
200 mmo.c.
Over Sheathin g 10 400 l1un C.C. 65 o.c. at
intermediate
intermediate
SUPPOI1S
suppons
, " wah SectlOlI 6/ 9.
Nmls shall be corro.flon reslstan/ III accorda1/ce
1 Minimum acceplabfe nail dim ensions (mm) .
Table 6.9 - Allowable Spans for Lumber Floor and Roof Sheathing 1.2
Minimum Net Thickness (mOl) of Lumber Placed
Span
~_-==:====t~~- 7~ ----~1.
- - ---- - -- -- -, -- - ""7~..- -- - ,- -.. - ___ ROOl_S - - -
___ ~ __=J_·_.__~~_~~I=-JL_~= ----- .--- ..... -- -
L.:.:J'-;--c--:,,6=00---:-..,,--'-c-
1 ---,,---,:,,
16,--.-::--:--:-:-,1.--- 16 16 20
f Instal/a/ion deltll/.f JIm" c:ollfonll (0 SecllOIl 620.8./ (Jnd 620.1 1.7 for floor atlll roof s/watl/mg, 'l'.f/Jee/wel)'.
1 Floor 01" roof silem/Jillg cOI\fo nllillg wilh Ih is fable shall be deemed 10 meet lit e design crilnia oj Sefliofl 620.10.11 .
J MaximUIII 19 pcrcel/ll/loiSfl/,." callfenl.
Tahle 6.JO ~ Allowable Spans and Loads for Wood Strllctul'HI Panel Sheathing and Single~Flo()r Gradt·s Continuous
Over Two or More Spans with Strength Axis P(~rpcndiclllal' to Supports /,?
~I; I,', ~ Grades Roor ' Floor '
Table 6.1 1 ~ Allowable Loads for Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Continuous
Over Two or More Spans and Strength Axis Parallel to Supports
r .___~__ ~~~~~-,(~P~I,IL'"
:.:'.::o:::oTd-,sc:·t::ru",c"t",u,-,r:::a,-l,,1":::""n",c",ls"a'T,,,·c,,fic:"v,-e,,-,,p,c:,II'l:',,,,fi,,l;;vc,_'-'.la,,'YL(c'ir,-"u:.:
1l1.~ss otherwise noted) 1. 1 . r---~.-.--
Panel Gnuk Tlli cklless (111111) MaxilllUlll 51)"11 ..______ ._~~~i! at fv!.~'!!...~.P_~!.U J~_~.pn.l. .-__,. . -._...._. _.
(mill) l.Ave Iowl
._-- ---s;;:;;-ct;;;;;(I- -"-- " "- ")2" -"'-'--" "--'-'-600--"-'- ~-- '''0:96-'''-''-''''-' ·- --· ..·....····"1"'.4"4'-- -'- -
12 -. 600 - 1.68 . 2. 16 .1 ..
--'-12 . 60IJ ...~ ... --- -!'T2"T- ...... -
;=....... ___.:=,:", _=+_. .
-----------~-- ----2~40'--~·-
Table 6.12 - Allowable Span for Wood Structural Panel Combin<ltion Subfloor-Underfloor-Underlayment
(Single Floor) U
Panels Continuous over Two or More Spans and Strength Axis Perpendicular to Support.;;
r-~--- '
Appfica /llt~ 10 IInderlaymem grade WId C-C (plugSrd) plywood. alld single floor grade wood struCluml p(meIJ·.
~--------==~~===-=-=;="-===-==~~~~~---
Hortizontal Diaphragms
Table 6 14 - Maximum Diaphragm Dimension Ratios
Vertical Di3phragms
I-'-''''-'-'=''''-'''-'''''''-'-'''''-''''---i--'.:::=:==.::.::!=--------
-----
Material Maximum Maximulll
S[)an~Width Ratios Height-Width Ratios
I.Diagonal sheathing, conventional 3; J I: J .. ~-
2. Diagonal sheathing, special 1-____..24,,:I'------+--------~=~=E~-=~~-.::·~=
3. Wood structural panels and particleboard, nailed all edges 1______4=.:1'--____ + ____ .. ___
~._. .~~~-._----_.---._
4. Wood structural panels and pal1icleboard, blocking omitted at 4: 1
_ _interIn~i<!~c;joints. .~_~_. _________ ... _. __.__ ,.. _ ........... __ ._. __.__ ~ .. _~ _____ .... _ _._ .... _. __.... _
I III Seismic Zolle 2, the maximum ratio may b(.' 2: 1.
2 111 Seismic Zolle 2, the maximum ralio may be 3%: J
3 Nor permitted.
._____ _
A N~lturHJ Dcfcds
Table 6 IS - Limits of Defect. bl' Grade in Joists and Planks for Seasoned
Stress Grade Sln'~s Grade Stress Grade
Kit~d of Defect.~ _____________ 80 %_~ ____ ___ __ !i!!~ _______ _.__ ~_~_~_2.!'~&___ ___ _
i Wo~_
d ________
I The SIze of knots orl the narrow face wuhm rhe mIddle tlilrd of length may be Ulcreascd proportlOl1mcly lOwards rhe ends
of th e piece of twice the size permitted Of! fhe narrow fa ce bUI not to exceed that allowable alol!g the allier fin e of the
wide face. The size of kllol,'i 011 the edge of wide face within rhe middle fhird (llengrh may be incrca.'ied pl'Opol"tiollOfe/y
toward\' fhe eel/fa of rhe wide face and towards the ends of flU! piece to the size permitted alollg fh e all fer fille of the wide
face. 111C sum of the .\'ii:,e:o of 01/ knots ;11 ally 150 mill of lellg," of fhe piece shall 110 1 exceed twice fhe m axi mulII
p ermissible size of kllots. Two knots of maximum shall tlO! be allowed itl the same J50111111 of leng th Ofl Otl)' faa . CiIlSla
knots and knots ill group shallllot be permilled.
Table 6.15 ~ Limits of Defects by Grade in Joists and Planks for Seasoned Wood
(;-ra-d;- --- St~:;~s G;"lIdc- - - ---st;'t~SS (;';:~ \(I ; ---
---~-- --~S-
tr-
"s-'
s
Kind of Dcf<.'c (s
~~~____~____~~~~_t_______~
80~O~~~_____~ _______~6~3~% 500/.
n. Handling, Manufacture or Processing I)efc('fs
I, Wall e (maximum tlllowablc size in Illlll)
Nominal fact dimension ill nUll
SO 3 12 12
75 3 12 12
IO(l 6 15 15
125 6 15 15
150 10 20 20
200 12 22 25
250 15 25 30
300 18 28 38
350 20 38 45
400 25 45 50
450 and ovcr 30 50 55
2. Torn grain (allowable depth if! 111m) 2 2 3
.). Skips. ,liiowablc size not to exceed:
surface arc,\
(Widt h mill x length ) width x 100 widt h x 100 width x IlX)
Depth mm I 2 3
Quantity J skip per 5 m or I skip per 5 m or I skip per 5 m or
~_. _.~ ._. _
. .~!~~~.·~~~:...L~.I. ~g~_I. ~_._. _ _ _ .__._....§.!!2r.!£U.~~~g_~.!. )._.._ .____ .. .._. .__ ......s1!E~r_t~<::E..!.~.!.~R[.I1
Withdrawal Load from Side Grain per 25 mill of Pcnetration of LatcI'HI Load in Sidc
Screw Size Threaded Portion l (N) Grain, (N)
-~----- ,~---.-- ---.--~-.-.-- .. .. _-"._- ._.. _ .... _------_ ...
-~
Species Group . ----_.- ___ S )e~es Gn~.!!p
~I
Gage
Diameter
(mill) II III IV IV
I II
24 9.5 2695 1985 1370 950 31 (X) 266; 2190 1825
20 8.0 2315 1710 1180 820 2295 1970 1620 1350
18 7.5 2130 1570 1085 750 1935 1665 1370 1140
16 7.0 1940 1430 985 685 1610 1380 1135 945
14 6.0 1750 1290 890 620 1315 1130 925 770
12 5.5 1565 1155 795 550 1045 900 740 615
10 5.0 1375 1015 700 485 810 695 570 475
9 4.5 1280 945 650 450 700 605 495 415
8 4.0 1185 875 605 420 605 520 425 355
7 3.8 1095 805 555 385 510 440 360 300
6 3.5 1000 735 .--.-~
510 355 425 365 300 250
Length of Diameter
.... I ... 1 . · · · + W _ ___ I ... IV . --
Bolt in of Boll Parallel Perpcndi- Parallel Perpendi- Parallel Pcrpcndi- Parallel PcrpcndiM
Main d to Grain cular to to Grain cular to to Grain cula!' to to Grain rular to
Member
L
(mm)
p
_._.~%~_" ____'p_____(_;~-.a~~--_ "~_';?'~ __G_~_liI~__'___,:::-,_+_~~~~~_
(mm)
--;;c--i-·······-·--··~- .......- ..- - - ...- - , . . . - - . - - - - . --~-..j-~ccCC"-·-+--;;cc-+~.cc____.I
1__-,(~I)~-j __ .j.21.__ (3) ( 4 ) _ ....J2)___ (6) (7) - -...J!l)c- (9) (10)
. ._'2.._.. _ 7.08 3.76 4.86 1.98 4.20 2.07 3.26 1.82 ._
:---)6_.__ 8.75 . 4.19 _ _... 6.01 ___ 2.21 5.20 2.30 4.01 2.()2
40 20 11.0 4.85 7.55 2.56 6.53._ 2.67 S.Q2 2.35
22 12.1 5.04 8.30 2.66 . _L~~_ 2.77 5.52 2.43
_ . _ _ _ _ ~..._~._. 13.7 5.47 9.43 2.89 8.16 3.01 6.27 2.64
12 8.38 4.70 5.75 2.48 4.98 2.59 3.99 2.27
16 10.8 5.23 7.42 2.76 6.43 2.88 5.00.~ 2.53
50 20 13.7 607 9.38 3.20 8.12 3.34 6.27 2.93
.__.21. ... _...__.. 15.1 . . - . . 6.30· 10.3 3.32 __ =~-8.95~ ____ . 3.46._~~~i.._
25 -; i}---·· 6.83-·- ---11-.8---- --- 3.61· 10.2 3.76 7.84 3.30 I
12 .............. :929-==_0.,,-1 -_~=.:~I3£_.=:=::J~i3-~·552 3.36 _468 ---2~i
_~_._~ __. 6.80 .... 8.95 3.59 7.74 3.74 6.29 __ 3.29 I
65 20 17.4 7.89 11.9 ._~ __ ._.10.3 4.34 8.10 -~.84..
_. _.___ =25"-.. 22
12
19.3
9.35
8.19
-·ZU-·--s:88-·--1S.·2--··· 4.69
6.84
13.2
6.42
4.32
3.61
11.4
13.2 .-
5.56
4.50
4.89
3.76
8.97
10.2
4.79
3.96
4.29'
3.30
16 13.8 7.85 948 4.14 8.2 I 4.32 6.85 3.79
75 20 ------- -_..•9.10
- -19.4 __ 13.3 .._.•.
. -----_._ 4.81 11.5 5.01 9.22 4.40
_.~ __ ._fl:2..... ~_ 9.45 15.0.__ 4.99___... 13.0 5.20 10.2 4.56
75 255 10.2 17.5 5.41 152 5.64 IIY 4.95
12 9.4~ 7.14 645 3.77 5.59 3.93 4.84 .. ~~
16 14.1 8.37 9.66 4.42 8.36 4.61 7.09 4.05
80 ~_ 20_.__ ~2.9:l···9.7 1-::: ::=- I 4c9:===
22 22.9 ___ ~.~~_ 15.7 _. 5.32
=:-.5
I 3=:=- :=:- I 2L_ _ .2~ =_977
13.6 5.54 10.9
4.69
4.87
25 26.9 10.9 184 5.77 16.0 6.01 12.5 5.28
12 9.39 7.42 6~44--- -·· 3.92 5.58 4.08 4.84 3.59
16 .--i4J.... - ··9":20 9.79 4.86 848 5.06 7.28 4.45
90
_ .._.1.2...___ 21.3 10.9 14.6 5.77 12.7 6.04 10.5 5.28
22 24.9 11.3 17.1 5.98 14.8 6.24 12.0 548__
25 294 12.3 20.2 6.49 17.5 6.77 13.9 5.94
100 _ll.... ____9.40_._ :-··7.40-· --6A~'i.--.-~. 5.58 4.07 4.84 3.58
16 14.2 9.84 9.78 5.19 -8.4"7-- 541 .. : ··-f34.___ .-±l_6_.
2 o j i - : i l : = ·.. J2,I__ . __15.1....... __.._. !l.:il.. __ .__ 13J..._. ....._ ...!l.(",~ ___ ILl 5.87
__ B_ ___ 25.9 ...__ ~._L~,L_ ...._._.1Zc.8_. ...._.2,65 _._. 1504 7.35 12.8 6.45
1_ _ _ ~+-.. -..3~.. -- 31.8 1:\.7 .............21.8 ...... _.~J-'_. 18.9 7.52 15.3 __6cCJ~
12 9.3 8 ()J2.._ . __.6,-4.'1:._._ __--'''62....._. 5.57 3.81 4.83 3 34 __
. . ._.....I.CJ..._._ 14.2 10.1._ 9.77 533 846 _._5S6 __ ~.~. 4.89
125 20 22.3J..'1.:~ _. . ....... 153 ...._._.. 7.53 13.2 7,~ _ _1_1,~_.. 6.1'9_
22 .._ 2690......1S.} ____ .....1.8.:.5......___. 8.10 160 844 13.8 7.42_
25 3404 17.1 23.6 9.02 204 940 17.3 .f:
L -_ _ _- - ' - _ . 28 41.8 __ 18_.5_ _ _ _ 28_.7._. 9.78 24.8 10.2 20.5
16
26.9 16.6
~~= =:i~:~== :=.::~~. ;
14.2·- ..··.. ·8~59---·-9:75-·--- 4.54
18.5
== :=:
8.75
:;~
16.0 9. 12
~~r' -'''-:~~ ''-::::~* ::'- ~~0--
8.44 4.73 7.30
13.9
4.15
8.01
th
Nationa! Structural Code of the Pililippines 6 Edition Volurn e 1
6·!)01 CHA PTCH (j Wood
=. .
Connector Unit nnd C()lllll'Cl 0r
I'lale Thickness Edge
dilllu. wilh ____ ~L.
diam. (111m) ConIlN'-
uf Lumber Distam'c Bolt (kN)
Sl'·l'(: il'3..g!:OI!l!._~
--- _._- ---~ ===---fu~~s
(k
GrOlll
(mill) (mill) (mill) Un luaded
tors /JC Loaded-
•1{) 45
oj I I ·HII 11 .70 10.10 8.1 40 6.76 1 5Y72
minimum min imulll
70 m 8. 184 7.072
9.1:130
more
40 45 5. 293 4.537
2 10.90 9.rJ74 7.g28 6.316
minimuill minimum
()5 20 45 45
70 or 6 ..'6 1 5,47 1
7.65 1
more
45 or (,.405 5.5 16
7.605
more ,
70m 7. 740 6.672
50 1:"1.26 J 1.03 9 .5 19 9.296
more
4S 5.87 1
K. 140 (,.761
._----- ---- .. - . mininlUIU ._--_.
GS & 70 or 7.072
14.01 I 1.70 10. 10 9.8:10 8. 1
th ic ker morc
40 70
19.15 16.46 1'1.1 9 lIAS{) 9 .. 8.229
minimum minimllm
95 or II .52 9.964
I 13 .&30
mor(!
70 12.280 10 .23 8.807
minimuill
4S & 95 or 10.68
14.810 12 .37
th icker
? l.I7 17 .66 15.2 J Illore o
4.1 70 (,. 805 5. 871
J4.I O 11 .74 10.14 8.184
ml ni Jl1um minimum
95 or 8. 229 7 . 117
9 .8 75
rn on~
70 7( 6.583
50 \ 5.75 13. 12 )1.;-10 9. 118
minimu lll
95 OJ 9. 163
II J130
more
70 10 .720 8.9'10 7.695
minillllllll
95 \)r 12.940 10. 7fiO 9.296
2 65 I ~A 6 15. :\9 I:U5 70
more
20 70 7() K.362
100 11.650 9.697
minillluln
I 50 14 .()60 II. 740 10.10
75 20.JO 16.72 1,1.'16 95 or
more o
70 12.280 10. 2~O 8 .807
minimum
90& ~ 1. 17 17Nl 15.2 j '1 5 III 1·:U;}O 12..
[hid-.n Ill,lr,'
-10 19.:'7 ! 1(l .·Hl 14. 19 70 IIA XO
I
9 ..)(
mill iIllll III I
1l1inill1U11l
\)) , )1 I:uno ,
,,
I I..
I ,
Hl(IIl·
,
i to.
70 12.0 I (l
_AW_' _ _
________.__ ..1 _______ --- _.__.._--- -_._-------'------,--_.- L __ ..
I
- --- ~-
_~~~_.L ____~__
6·56 CHAP1£:H 6 · Wood
._1!g.I~~_ ..
I
-- - - --
(min.)
- - -' _.__.- --- ----- - -- -.
11,66 15.2 1 95 14 .810 12.J70 10.68
45&
th icker
2 1.17
more '" ()
_._ ----_..
Luad cd PUnlll('\ tn l"(I:I<I('d J'crl'cmlicuil!.l' to G ruin (90")
Nu mbcr Grain (0·)
·, '(Joilled
or FII('c
Nt't Thick- Minimum -------- •. ._- AllowRhlc Load per
Bult of I'i('('(" All ownhlf.) Load p C I'
lUng m'ss of Edge Conllector Ullit and Bolt
diaUl. with C(JIIIIC("l or Unit lind Edge Distance ( mm )
diufl\. Lumhel' Distllnrc
(n ull )
(mill ) Cu nncr-
(mill) (mill)
11011 (kN) _.. - Ik N)
t OI'S of ..--.fu ceics G roup Unloaded
Loaded-
S ceics Groll ) • .-
Sa Ill(' Edge III
Edge I II
.-... _....__.- .- ---
1 II III
--- -- _._--..-- _.. _ Holt
----- .. _---_.
(minimum) . ---
•.
32
25 minimum 'i.J:j~ 4.804 4.181 millimum
).20) ).20) 2.758
45 4.804 4. 181
4.804
minimum
8 .(X)6 7.206 6.227 45 60 or more 5.47\ 5.47 J 4.759
65 16 2 40 minimum
45 4.581
50 .852 7.962 6.89·1 5.293 5.293
minimum
i
._ .._.- -- - --- - ~-- -, -- -. - --_... _----- - . -- ~-. -- , - --- -
_
-_.... 6.19
Table - -
..•.....- (conlinued)
--- ._---
Loaded I';lrnllel Itl Loa(ktll'l'rIH'IHlkular to (;ruill (I}O")
Number Grain (0")
'l 't)4)llll'd
of Fal'e Net MinimulII .
Boll of I)iccc Thick· Allowa.ble Load pcr
Hing f<::dgc F
cliam. wilh uess of Connector Unit ~nd
Distallce
"'~j
( mill ) CUllIle('· Lumber Uolt (kN) ..
(mOl)
=-~.§)(!cics Gro~J~._._ "lj~11
(mill)
torS or (mm)
Sallie F
---- ._ ---
I II III (min
Boll ~-.--- .
R.09:,) 7.U?K
., 50 . 11.39 10.27 &.&% RO Of 1ll1)rC 9 .029
55 h.71 X 7.R28 6.605
mil1irnull1
)) .03 I J .74 10.1 9 80 or more 10.320 9 .296 K051
65
55 9.365 8.1151 7,29:;
minimum
14.06 12.63 10.9<1 80 or mor(' 11.120 10.010 8.674
75 &
lhickcr
70 8.362 7.s! 7 6.494
m ininwllI
25 12.54 11.30 9.786 95 or more JO .050 9.029 7.8n
I
minimllm
7() 10.850 9.786 8.451
minimu m
14.68 12.72 95 or !!lOfe !3.030 ! 1.743 1(),19
40& 16.32
thic ker 70
100 20 70
70 8.162 7.517 6.494
minimum
12.54 11.30 9.7&6 90 or Ill(lfe 10.050 9 .029 7.828
2 40
minimum
Taole 6.20 - Allownbl c Load.Ii in Seasoned Wood (No rmsl Duration) for One Split.Ring Unit and Bolt in Single Shear ..-.
._ _ . - - -- .. - - -- - - -- ····- - T- - - - - -- -
L(ludcd l'itrallel to Grain LUlld ed P('qx'ndicular to Grain (90°)
(0') -
No. uf Allowahle Load pcr Allowable Load Per
Flicc uf CmHlcCI(jr Unit und Holt Edge dt'itlmec (1II1n) Connector Unit And lIolt
Net (kN)
Split Piece M in. (kN)
nul!
with
Thick·
Edge S H,'eies Groun
- S ·des Group
Rill": DiIUII. nc ....~ of
Diam. COlillce· Dis lalll·(.' Unlolld('d
(1II1ll) Lumber Loaded·
(mm) tors of (111111) Edge III
(mm) I II III Edge I II
SUIIIC (Min.)
Bolt
---- --_._------_._- ---- - -- ----- - - - -
25 9.252 7.962 45 minimum (56) 5,471 4 .7 15
11.0.1
minimulll
70 or more 7.784 6.494 5.560
40 & I:U5 11.12 9519 45 minimum 7.873 6.583 5.649
thicker
70 or more 9385 7.784 6.672
64 12 45 45
40 45 minimum (58) 5.471 4.715
2 11.03 9.252 7.962
minimum
70 or more 7.784 6.494 5.560
50 & 45 minimum 7.872 6.583 5.649
13.25 11.12 9.519
thicker
70 or morc 9.385 -'.784 6.672
25 14.19 70 70 minimum 9.875 8.229 7. 11 7
17.03 12.23
minilllum
9 5 or more 11.830 9.875 8.496
40 & 14.810 12.320 10.6)0
25.53 21.26 18.37 70 minimum
thicker
95 or more 17.790 14.810 12.110
40 70 minimum 10.360 8.629 7.413
100 20 2 70 17.92 14.90 12.90
minimum
95 o r more 12.450 10.360 8.985
50 20.599 17. 17 14,8 1 70 minimuill 11 .970 9.963 8.585
9S or more 14.320 11.970 10.320
66 25.04 20.90 18.06
70 minimum 14.540 12.100 10.450
95 or more 17.440 14 .540 12.540
75& 1837 7()lllinimum 14.810 12.320 10.6)0
25.53 21.26
th icker
95 or more 17.790 14.8 10 12.770
---._._-_.•. .. -----..-.-- ._. __•.- ..---_.. - .--~--. -_._-- -_. __ ... ..-_.
Table 6.21 - Common Wire Nails and Spikes~Allowable Loads in Seasoned Wood-Normal Duration
- ..
Withdrawal Loud from Side Grain per 'Latc,;;! LOlid in Side G raj~\.( N) '"''
-- -- .~ ~- .
S 3/8 2 15 9.5 1035 705 435 275 2020 1735 1425 1190
3/8 180 8.0 860 590 360 230 1535 1320 1085 90.\
P 150 150 7.0 780 535 325 205 1325 1140 935 780
140 140 7.0 780 536 325 205 1325 11 40 935 780
I 125 125 6.75 725 495 305 195 1185 102() 84() 700
110 115 6.0 675 460 280 180 1060 910 750 625
K 100 100 5.75 620 425 260 165 940 805 665 555
90 90 5.25 570 390 240 150 830 7 10 585 490
E 80 80 5.0 530 360 220 140 740 635 525 435
S 75 75 5.0 530 360 220 140 740 635 525 435
, ,-;-;. ----_._-,.. - _...
"
SOURCE. PllihpplOe TImber DesIgn StandlUds (1. E. Rocafort and 1. O. SIOpongco)
November, 1991 (FPRDI Terminal Rep0r1)
Table 6.22 • Allowable S >ans for 50 mm Ton Jlle and Groove Decking
- --- ~~~~- ---- - [ - -- J./ ~%;;,~~~" - IlEFLECTION J./ MIT (N"~"" I j- ~N~::,:~·-·~=I
_ ._ _ _ __ .__.,_ ,--_ Roofs
-------... --~--.--
1171,)()
O.95H I I O?
. 1/360 . - 1763.84
12(X) ---'~3-7---- =~~~~==Y---
,II-
.'l;;~·-·=='==
ov
--~~J~;;'''--.----- =~_. . . ..
J 763.84
2(;45-.-;;7;-··· . ··
1.916 1/240 I.H60 ~·--·-234i60-·--·- . ··-
- - -..-- - - - -...-..- /3c:6<l".... _ _ _
- - - -- .- , ____- j ' - _.__ .-;1"' + _____._____J__·-_-_-_··_·"'35;Si"''r'''(;8::--_····_-===-1
..-.
0.958 1/240 1.37H \667 .38
1/360 2101.01.5
1350
1/240 2501.07
1.437 1!360 1.860 - - 2790.45 " - ' - -
------I.'-)1-6--- ' --~==-.----ill.:'4~O'=--:...--
--- /-----2-.4-,-,-·---1---~31"3C;4".7~6---
_ . __ . _ _. __.._ .. _. __ ._ __ __ _ _.. _ _ ___. 1136<l - 1 - - -- - . - - __ +__---;4"'9"'95".2"'5_ _ _-1
0.958 1/240 1.722 _ _ __...,'''''8'-;7".4-::8_ ___
______--I____ --;';1/3~6"'0---+ __ ._ _ _
1/240
3445.0{)
----,----. · - --)4J"(l.5-.
I ----·
1500 J .437
_. ___ -""=-36~;Oc.-..- - _ __ ._227~_ .. _._. __ -._-··---·s·i 12.38
...-~~-~;:.--..- - -- . 1/240 - 2.894 '4.547.40
1/360 6890.00
0.958 11240 2.067 3045.38
_ _ __ ._ _____._______ --7I/"'lo:6<lc.--_ . ____. ____._____________ + _____,,4-::54,,7
".4', ,0c-___
1650 1.437
- .•.-.--.•-,-----~ I .916
_ ... _~._. _ ____.______ ._._.'"._ ..-._--- - - -- . - - - 1 - -..
~::=:'.===:~~"'
_ _ _ ____
1/240
1/360
·"1724.Q_.__ ~==
11360
3.445
--..- . - .- ----.-.- - -.-
2.756
._ _ .. ____.__ -;9,,';;6:-3.,,7';-1_ _
4561.18
6876.22
,,·-- c;O<)()j·(;----"-·--·
19S(}
------ - -----1- ---;:c;,;;"'~;;-
1.437 1/360
. --- - ----:-.-.. ---.-..--- --·- - - {~:;~~i-·---·
3.858 " -'-'-'-~923z~760;;----1
-----.._--...-.------ ----., ___ _~.~~2 ._. ___._H_ "~---'-- --.----~:: _.J!.L22J ()-..~----
1.9 16 Ji360 ;1.823 119J9.70
-'1"i2"4"'o- - - - - I - - - .- - - - - - - -j ----"",2'6;'"'
9."'90, ;-----
0.958 3376
1-_______ ~"-----~1/=36<l~-._.-_----·-·----4----'9~3~70~·42---
2100 1.437 11240 4.478 9439.30
11360 _'"'I3;o:78"'0"'.00c.---__ _
11240 12539.80
1.916
11360 5.581 18775.25
1 - - -- - - -- -/- - - - -0-9-58-- -- - - - --.-",12"'4"'0- -- +----3.-85-8 - - - + - - - - - - 07"'75"',"".2;:;5'---1
. . 11360 11609.65
2250 1.437 11240 5.168 -.J..!.§..~7'50- - -..
1---- -- - - - I - ---:Ie;I3C;6;cO------ _. __._ _________. 17431.
1.9 16 11240 6.408 _ _---'0(;55';'°,,2.,;
500 '-____ _
'
- . - -.--------.- -----------·-I---·--;';:~:;:~"'o----- -.--.--.--.----+----~;;,,;"'~8"-;4(=2;i-_-_
--
0.958 11360 4.410 14055.60 ---
2400 -.---.._ . _- - 11240 14055 .60
1.4 37 ---.-.--.~-~'7._---- 5.856
• ___ ._". __ L...... __ ._. _ ___ _ _ .. _._ ......••• _... "'60 ____________ _ _ _ _._ ___ 21083.40
th
Nalional Siruciura l Code of Ihe Philippines 6 Edilion Volum e 1
6· 62 CHAPTER 6 - Wood
Table 6.22 - Allowable Spans for 50 mOl Tongue and GrooYe Decking (Cont'd)
Floors
I Span-\' (lrc ba.\'ed Oil simple ht'am tic/ion with 0.50 kN/I// dead load mul provi.riO/lS for a 1300 N conanu(l{/'d /o(1d fill (I .i(X) mm widlll fljp,'> O!
dl'cking. Rando/ll laY-Ill' p('I"mil(('d i'lll(.'cortiu!lcc willi t}w ()TOl'isio/ls ojScctioll 620.8.J or 620. 10.11.9. i.rw))/' r l/ticlall'ss OSJUIIl('(1 IJ/1{) mll1, /W/
Supporting Supporting
Laterally Supporting Latcrally
One Floor, Two Floors,
Unsupported Roof and Unsupported Spadng
Stud Size Roof and Roof and
Stud Height I Ceiling Only Stud Height I
Ceiling Ceiline- - - - - _ .._....- --------_.._--, ---.~
-- 4()()-~~~
SO x 75 I ~ ~ ~ ~
3000 ----
50 x 100 250 600 400 ~
4200
--.~.-.---
600
t------.~
75 x 100 250 600 600 400 4200 600 ~----
4800 600
SO x ISO 250 600 600 400 6(XIO 600
{ U.fted heights are d,sf(/nces between points of la{('tal supporf placed perpendicular 10 Ih(' plane of Ih(' waf!. II/CTNlSeS in IlfIsufJPorll!d helghl (if{'
---
First~story of three-story
~
X X
-- X X .~--~
--- - - .. ~
~
4 One-story, top of two~story X X X X X X' X Each end and not more than
or three~story 7500 mm on center
First-story of two~story or X X X X' X X' X Each end and not more than
second of three-story 7500 mm on center but not less
than 25% of building Ieogth'
First-story of three-story X X X X' X X' X Each end and not more than
7.5 In on center but not less
~
than 40% of buildin~.~~,~~....
I 1111.'; (able specifies mill/mum reqUirements Jor braced pands whu:hJonu /rIterlor or exterior braced walllmes.
See Section 620.10.3 forJull descriptiol/.
) See Sec/ion 620.10.4 for altemate braced panel n~quirement,
Buildillg length is the dimensioll parallel 10 the braced wall length.
5 Gypsum wallboard applied to suppons at 400 mm on cell IeI'.
6 Nol permiffedJor bracing cripple walls in Seismic Zone 4. See Section 620.JO.5.
7 The reqllired lengths shall be doubledJor gypsum board applied to only olle filce oj a braced wall panel.
Table 6.27 - Allowable Shears for Wind or Seismic Loading on Vertical Diaphragms of Fiberboard Sheathing Board
~-
Contraction for Type V Construction Only)
Shear Value in 75mm Nail Spacing
Size and Application Nail Size Around Perimeter and 150mm at
_._-_._-_. Intermediate Points
12 x 1200 x 2400 mm Galvanized roofing nail 40 mm long, 10 182.5"
111m head
-
20 x 1200 x 2400 111m Galvanized roofing nail 45 111m long, 10 256
111m head
I Fiherboard sheathing diaphragms shall 1101 be used 10 brace ('onereI(' or III(1S01ll), walls.
The shear vallle may be 780 Nfor 12 by 1200 by 2400 mm.liberboard /lail-base sheathing.
Table 6.28 - Allowable Shear for Wind or Seismic Forces in Pounds per Foot for Vertical Diaphragms of Lath
and Plaster or Gypsum Board Frame Wall Assemblies I - --
Type of Material . Thickness of
Material (mm)
Wall
Constrllction
Nail Spacing 1
Maximum (mill)
Shear
Value
-------
Minimum Nail Size 3 (mill)
-_.._----_._---------
Expanded metal, or woven I, 40 mm long, 10 mm head
2628
I. wire lath and porliand
cement plaster
22 mm Unblocked
I, 150
Staple, 22 mm legs
I
10 mm lath and
2. Gypsum lath Unblocked 125 1460 Staple, 30 mm long, 6 mm head,
! 2 111m plaster
plasterboard blued nail
--
12mmx600
45 mm long, 10 mm head, diamond-point,
3. Gypsum sheathing board ml11 x 2,400 111m Unblocked 100 1095
galvanized
12 mill x 1200
mm Blocked 100 2555
12 mm x 1200
mill Unblocked 175 1460
175
1460
2 mm dia., 40 mm long, 6 mm head) or
Gypsum wallboard or venecr
4. wallboard (2 mm diu. 40 mill long,
base 11mm Unblocked 6 mmhead)
100
1825
175
1825
Blocked r---
100
2190
175
1679
Unblocked
100 (2.5 mm dia., 45 mm long, 6 mm head) or
2117 wallboard (2.5 mm dia. 50 mm long,
6 rum head)
175
2117
Blocked
16mm
100
2555
J 111ese verfical diaphragms shallllof be used to resist/oads imposed by masolZl}' or concrete construction. Values shown are for shorl-term loading
due to wind or due to .I'dsmic loading. Values shown l/Iust be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. The values shown ill Items 2, 3 and 4 shall be
reduced 50 pen'(!l1Ifor loading due to earthquake ill Seismic Zones 3 and 4.
Z Applies to nailing {/{ all .wuls, top and bottom plates, and blocking.
Affel'l1ate I/ai!s lIIay be u.w!d {frlwir dimensiol)s are 1I0t less than the !'pec[(ied dimension.
J. Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) iuc ludcs: 8_ Dangkalan (Callophy llum spp.) includes:
Dao ID. dao (Blanco) MCIT. & Rolfe] Kuli ng-bahui (0. alt issisulll Men .)
L:unio {D. cdu!c (Blanco) Skee ls.) Miau (D. euph lc biu m Merr.)
15. Guijo (Shore:l spp.) includes: 2 1. Nato (pa laquium spp.) i nd\ld~s:
Table 6.31 Basic Working Stresses and Modulus of Elasticity for Dry Machine Graded Lumber
Machine Basic Working Stress (MPa) Modulus of
Stress Grade Elasticty
Bending Tensile Compression Shear Strength, Fv (GPa)
Strength, Fb Strength, Ft Strength, Fc
M5 5 3 4 1.48 5.68
MIO 10 6 8 1.64 8.57
MI5 15 9 12 1.79 11.45
M20 20 12 16 1.95 14.34
M25 25 15 20 2.10 17.23
th
National Structu ral Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
(; ·G8 CHI\PH' fl r; . Wood
'!:a hi c_.~:g.!!asi.('. \V.~E.~i Jlgl.:'}ad,s.. I:~1' Nails i'I_I"'.~te..':!l!..!.:'lad!J11!jM ~!LL __.__._ ___
Shear Modulus
- - - - --
-.. - ~.-
0.39
..
5.1 7.6
0.52
- ----
10.1
--
0.65
12.6
0.78
15.1
0.91 j
_.
Tahle 6.35 - (In addition to Table 6.1) \Vorking Stresses for VisualJ)' Stress-Graded
Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods.
Addilional Spcci(~, -. -..." ·.-.. --.------K(j,;,,-.~-;ri{I-:-.~-s·(;TiAmt-·-~---·----.---- ·-·-~·---·-·-·--··-·--···-SO%S1l<ESS(jR·AT)!·-·-· .----~'"
(Common and BOlaniral --iic';;~li-;;g·- M~~thlhl.;" --C;;-;;!;rc'~;;i~ - C()mJ;;-~~~jo~;" "St~ar -1k;Jir~g Modulus C)mprcssion CO;I~i);:;;-;::~iw- -- Shcill
Nilllll',) and of ));Ir,lIk) 10 [wqlt'ndicuhlr parallcl alld or parallcllo IK~ll)C!\(licular paralkl
Tension
paralll'l
l'laslieily
in
10 grain
'"
grain
Tt:n,ion
pilralkl
Ci;ISlicily
in
grain 10 gralll ",
gr;lin
to graBI bcnding to grain bending
1··········1 ·1····················1
._-MPa _ .. -~>;j"'-" ---..~-- MP;I - -~'- Mr;;--"- --I\W;-'-- ~;-- -- Hl'a MPa
.-..- .....-- --,;xX'-··· ....- ... -.....-- - - - - - - - - - - .-.. -----+---
- - - - - - . - - --.-...- ..- - ----..- - -- ·__· _ - - 1 - - - - + - - - 1 - -
- - - - - - . _.._. --..- ---.
28.U 7.98
chincnsis Sonl), ssp
pliilippinclisis
(RaJlk)Lcenh.J
A!a-a!a (Diospyros
mindanacnsis Men.)
l3ilkauan (Rhizopho-;:;I 3.(H 190
aniculata Blume)
KatilnUi (Diospyros nitida - - 26,li'"'- '---sJl- ---~--. -~3~.S~,--j-~2~.676~+~16~.735~~---'57.1~9c-+---'S~.O~2c--l---~cc:----j-",-j
2,21 1.66
~--..~~ ~~
KubJ (Al1ocarpus IlItlOUS 3 J .21
_._.••...-
7.92
-.~~- ..- - -
1 1.()4 5.47 -2~85'- ·---I-~i.S I 4.95 3.42 1.78
Trecc. snn, nitidus)
Narig (Ya!ica mangachapoi .. 24.47 8.15 2.62 J.53
Blanco ssn. manpachanoi)
Narig, 'Illick leafed (Ymica 27.04 8.34 10.29 6.42 2.89 16.90 5.21 6.43 4.01 L81
pcchyphylla Mcrr)
Tiga [Tristeniopsis
micrantha (Merr) Wik &
1-'\\~'~"'~"~h~JL,-,...~_____ ~~ ..•_ =_._I--~~_
Tindalo [Afzclia '-)0.17 -8~88 ---'Ti~i9--'-"' --·~7ccS"6--I-~3~.471-i-"I8".8"6-1--S~.<C5SC-----~7'-.'-12;--I---;4~73 2.13
rhomboidea (Blanco) V.,;'~I.LJ-+~~~_I_~_._
Yakal (Shorca asty!osa- 25.05 9.92 .--~-- -"'-(;:72 ...~ '----2:33- '~'l5---:66-'~ '-~'-(;:ii)"-- -"---'(~i'4'"-- --'-'-4.20 - - --~
Aklc [Albizia ade (Blanco) 21.08 7.20 7.36 4.78 2.78 4.60 2.99 1.74
Morr.} . _... _ . __.. __________ _
Amugis 19.48 6.71
[KoordersiodcndfOll
~innalum (Blanco) Mm.)
21. 17
fJ .JO
7.56 r---~
6 .1:16 -1.82
45 1
2.19
2. 1J
1J.75
11.23
3.94
. ....
4.7:\
_- -- 4.29
4.04
3.0 1
2.K2
1.37
1. 33
II1cgalanthli Men.)
Kawn g· lakih an 8,22 6.69 3A2 1.90 '- '1 2.22 - 5.14,-c-- --'-.'-i- .- 2.1 4 1.19
(D y~()); )'I \J III ~'r}'l(JhOlryum
1-::~-c
1 i"
q'L)______ I_. ~=~_I __~,~_ ---0.9)
Lithl)(;.lfTIlIS sp. -~ ~52-- '-g{~T'- '---'-rYJ- -' 3.98 - -'-TA9~-' ---JI:57- ----~5.0i·-- 3.9.1 2.4<)
-T..iJJCkii ::Udcki":l- hcrnardt:;;-- ... '"-"24~)O--" ~·7M-· ---"-7,Jr' ...--, ---~~Ts-- ~- -Ts .18 4.65 ,1":24 2.61 1.60
(Mcrr.) Rids d.J
Malakaunon IDil!c nia 23.60 ).40 - 7.37 SAO 2 A6 14,75
-_.-
4.63
- --_
4.6 1
..-
3.38 1.54
luw lliensis (Vidal) Martelli
cx Our. CI Jacks. l .
Malapan au (Diptcrocarpu~ 17 .26 6.86 6. 12 2.09 1.10 10 .79 4 .29 3.83 1.3 1 1.07
kcrri i Kin ' J
Manggis IKoompassia 24 .96 8.94 9 .0? 3.79 2.2 7 IS~(~ 5.59 5.(IR 2.37 1.4 2
cxccl sa (nccc.) Taub.)
M,mi\.:u ik (Palaquiurtl 18.6 1 6.30 6 .94 2,18 2.21 11.6 3 3.94 4.34 1.J6 1.4 2
IcnuipetiolalUtll Mcrr.J
20.60 6. I R 7.0 1 3.79 2.24 11 _88 3.86 4.1R 2.37 1.40
6 .05 6.)8
~:;::~:::}I\Sal1;li Gmup --'4!N- · -5~~)··- --" -_..,,---:--_.--- --J.~- -2:14~ --9."14-' --~~ .---.-.-:...._..._ ... ---··--I .-:i}---·I.34""
_(N c (ll1:n~~.!.~:!!..;:.rU______ _..___ ----------' _ _ _ . __.___.__.._____._.___... _ ..~ " ._._ .. _.. __ _ ..... _._- -
CHAPTEfl6 . Wood (;.1 1
T;Ulgik'I Sh ()J'~a - -- 15.&3 6 .2) -·-5J1)"----- - - I"1V '-- ~~ -'"¥i).X(j--- '-"-rK~ --_. -" - :i A·1-- _.. .. ...... -1:"i2" "'--"
,
-'-(J,)-(;'-~
!loly~peml:l (1I1:ul("o)
MelT.1
Il . Lc.~scr-Klll1wl1 Spct'il'~
.-- - ... _._- - - -- .------- ----- -
- A,;;;;lg (DiosPY7c;s--- - - -l5.iiR - 5:1(; ...- ._-_.-.-._- - --f3S---' --_ ..
[ ,R6 - '--''7i:(Tf--
--•.'--"- - - ----.~"- - - ...- ''".. -. ..• ,,-.. -j A(j--" -'"
- --T !(;-"¥
JI}Trhocarp 3 Mjq.)
AIIlll 1l3 1 (O"'phciI 16.86 6.34 6.42 2.14
3.2.1
-- _ .. _--- .._,-,-- -- 10 .54 - - -'4.(j-, - _ 1.75 ---:'.96 --- .--- ; . ~
1..14 --I.Qij--
....£.~.!!!i!~£0I1a Vi~_____.__
- - '5',-'2- - .- - 1.69 ... .. -,
I
ICamptostcmol1
philippincllse (Vid.) Becc.)
Jtangan j WeinmMnia 13.92 4.85 4.74 1.67 1.62 g.7() 3.0.3 2.96 1.05 ·-'-.0-'-
luzonicnsis Vid.)
-..-0;--
Java sala jSloanca javrlllica 17.8 5' 5.36 6 .30 2.24 2.00 II .J6 3.35-- :1.9:) 1.4(} 1. 25
(Miq.) Koord & VaL]
--- - -- --357"" ---YJi:""--- .--- "" "1.71"---
I Kangko IAplulllamiK.is
.-.-~-
lJ.i9 ···--TO.05 .- ~iS
' 6.08 5 .7 1 2.8.3
polyslachya Wall.) R.N.
Parker)
.-:uo- ._- .__..•••,..".--- ---Ui--
Malakmalak [Palaquium 13 .37 5.7 1 2.05 1.8{)- 8.36 2.94 3.57
phiJippcnsc (PefT.) C13.
Rosh.)
Nato jPaJaquiunl 16 .72 5.45 557 2.14 1.86 10 .45 3.40 JA8 1.34 1.16
luzon iense (P. Viii.) V.i.~. __ ._---. --TT6
._•.- - .....--.
~
Pagsahingin·bulog 16 .SR 6.66 5.63 1.64 1.86 10.36 4 .16 3.52 [.02
(Canarium a~pclUm Bentb)
Panang (paJaquium sp.) 14.44 5 .48 2.59 2m 9 .03 3.42 1.62 1.25
3.' 8
spiciOorum (DUIli. E)
MClr. )
Syzgium sp. 12 .05 4 .21 1.89 1.78 7.S3 2.63 1.18 1.12
Manggasinorong-!akihan 14.44
(Shore,] vircsccns Pari's)
MayJpis !Shorca paloslipis 14.60 5.81
(Blanco) Men.)
-;;1'~,g~"~:ri~o~g,;''':C,;(O('~':!~'a"o~,~y;;",~o"--I·-"··I5.~ --4:76' (j,05 2.32 2.06 9.86 2.97 3.78 1.45 J.29
sUIlL,t'ranUI11 (Jack) Blume
ssp. sum,1IranuJ\l Robs.),
Tuai (Bischofia j,lVanica 14.75 4. J 4-- 1--"'.67,,---1--4""."10"- 1-';;.8"'O"'-""2;C2;-+-';2'.5c;;,--I-~2;;.9",--1--2".c56,---1-"C".,"3;-1
Blume)
Shorea sp. . 13.92 - ---:fsr'- -------4':-2'(;---- -"- ---n};'l 1,15 lUO ------:fO] 2,66 0,65 . 0.72
oB-.i,~·=s;;sc='~.Kv,~>o~w~"::cS~p'='''.ie='~.--1----- .-....--~ 1-·----+--·- ------ _...__._.. ~.-.--- ~-----+-.--I
Anongo (Turpinia 1l.70 '-"-'~f78-~ 1.'14 O.<.X}
3.68 1.30 7.31 2.30 2.36 0.8l
ovalifolia Elm.)
Balakat-guhHI [Sapiurn l.38 1.55 0.86 0.97
iUl.Onicunl (Vid.) Mcrr.J
11~32~ -'3~8j ,:CO-.
I3aJal;(i [J-lornalanlhus 1.65 1.31 7.07 2.39 1.03 0.82
populncus (GeiseL) Pax
~~~"~.~N~P"~"~"C~"~'~J~~~~+-.,,",_+_co~·_
Eakle (Ficus ba!clc MCfT.) J 3,84 ~·----1~-~,,-·+-c17'"2c- -8~65'" 3,25-- --~.~.- ---cl.c44c----j--I'.O'"g;-
16.59 ',.;--+---,;,.7.02".-+~'''O.'37c-i~~2''.9cc4c--j-~~~~I-~I~95-·-I·~
-- Q ] 5
0.94
0.87 0.83
1.20 0.86
Himbabao {Brou$$onctia 12.83 404 4.45 2.24 2.00 8.02 2.53 2.78 ! .40 1.25
Jumnica (Blanco) Bur. var.
luwnicaj
Katong-malsin 14.49 3.56 4.26 LSI J.32 9.06 2.23 2.66 0.95 083
(Chisochclon pcntandrus
(Blanco) Mcrr.]
Hcc"7,, '"I"A'+""'' ' c-
T it o''ni'-''----I-,,,,·,.''',,- -3~ --4-Ki--·-I;--'1.'63~--I "CC5".,C"-1~'8'.8"2'1--.;2'.3"8-1- -~2."88oc--i---,,·c.O'2'--~ -O-.'-7~
philippincilsis (Braid.)
Gordonia sp.)
.. 7-p~,,~,,~,"':-,;~,~,,~S~p~ccC';~,,~'---t----I~.-..-
·-;;C~ -----.--...- . -----1--
I-;B~'~g~"=,~(~E~'K=':>")·:"~,,~,,;;,---1-'II'.7~'-I-~4~("}j':-- --'-4 .!SO --- ----"T.2"3"-
dcglupt3 Blume)
Durian (Durio zibcthinus-- I 3.881--'''".''90;;--I--c5,.;c'5'-+--;':>8~()---
MelT.)
Para-rubber (lkvca J LJ3 . 3.9 I ··--3-J-3--- ~··~2'.~'9~-I-":.6"7c-j~:(').9"6c-+~2-;4C'5-1--c;2-;.O"'8-·--I J.37 1.05
brasiliensis (HBK) Mucll·
~;~;~l {Sandoricum - - ~'-'-.8-4-- ~2-.9-1·-·--· --3.62---- ·-·-~'-.44·~ ~T -7.40--- ~-1.-8f-- --'--2-.2-6- ~~O-.9-0 -~ -0-.8-2-- I'
LCk",ocCC"",jj"=p",,(B,,",,-',,"',,.~f.)"',"n"OIT,,.,-J_ ' -_ _.______.L_ _ _ _-'-_ _ _ _--'_ _ _.L____ _. ___ ._ _ _ ._. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'-~
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Vo}urne 1
6·74 CHAI'TEH 6 . Wood
'~V
".'I~.o~"~'''
S~".~
"~,.,,,tI~,7G''m~"~,,'--'----'----'--·-·-·-- , - - - --..,---- r - --- - - - - -.-~.--- -----.-.---.. ~-
~A-.7C~o~,,~
"'~,,~,~
cic:.~J.'~r~'c:'~i"'~'--11- --+---.+-----If------+--
~- ------..-- -----..-. ----.--.- ----.----...
Kalll!lI:\'~ ('1'0011<1 t'alanl:1S --1--;9~.(~">C:
· -if-~3'.'"·"")- t---Yi):1- - ---(j~ (iR-~'-- --6.{~1-- --2"::11-" - -'''--T.ifi.")--' '--'--D~S:i'-- . -. -()5S- --
Men . & Rolfe)
~ Iun lpang {S(crc u~'- '-'7j2 ~~ '-'--:l'3if-- --···- TIi!I----u:9i·--- ------,l.Kf '----}j:j ..... "-'---'f"i:!-'~-- .-.--....(l.(;~\ - -.- - . (),~7·---
hR~'-"-",c:g'[..Ec:,y~,J,,,7;,-,,-
, - -- +-----"s::u- J .83 2.22 - (f7T----- - -(Ug- _. 3.2r-·- ··--Tl:s····· -·"-'jjY'--" '-' "'---"-(J:;J:<;--- . --i)Ag~
subumurans (Hassk) MClT.]
Tra~mg (Shore:l uvma f)ycr-- ~-I1:5(;
ex Brandis)
TalulO IPlcrocymbium
f--7';~"~'~'''~d=",,''~'(~B~'~ar="~o~)":M~'::"~·['-j----j----+------I- ___ 0_,_ .. _~~ _________ ._....___ .___ ..______.....•.. , .___ .. __ .. _. ______,___..._
n. Lesser-Known Species
I-:A~n-'~b~;o-lI~g~r~r-"-n-"-on--,-·,-,,7,,..,;-,+-5~.75,7,--l---;2~.3;;6C:-+-'2-:;.47.6--II--·",.0"'-- - I j n - -,-,-,-- '---T'{-, - ---1.-5-
' -
H~"~"c'~~"'-"n7g7"--;('CM""'j;-,---.- --"-13-i-- --,-.,-(;- ----')ii- --I.~-·---- ---"1":-72-- -"6.45 "-- 2~ '----D2---· -----0-.9-' - --- --TOs·-
azedarltch L)
-~ -~-
WaiL)
6 .07 2. 15
~!'_,
Oinuang (Oclomclcs 9 .09 3.66 3.11 0.74 0.88 5.68 2.29 1.94 0.47 n .5S t
sumal(ana MiQ.) I
D'.a IAlsl()llia scholaris •. 64 J.9 1 05.'; O.f1O 2.90 1.20 -:- -- 034~ ~ i
(1..) i
It Dr. var. scholarisis) 10.14 ).42 H I! U4 0 .86 6.33 2.1'1 ~AO --~~- -i}'54'-j
KaitanlL {Zanthoxylum 11.37 4.36 <l.U, 0 .96 1.29 7.10 -~ ----rC>l7- -----o:c;,-- -"()JjJi
limonclla (OCI11151.) Alston )
Tallgisanr,-bay.\wak (Ficus··+--c;c;c,+-",.--j-------
varicgma Illume Vilr.
4.32 J .56 -- -"--0:&1'- --{}:7!i-- ---------
2.70 ---" (j!ir - ----:--- ._--O::W---- 0-:49-1I
varicsa~ .. _ ._ __._ ._____ +---+---+------ ___..__.. .._ .______. _. ________ .._____________ ,,[i
C. p J:mtation Species
Alnussp. 9.66 2.53 2.81 1.78·--I-~I--,,,'.04"·-j--7'175';;---j--. - . T:;~- 1.11 1.13"'1
hB~';:IS~""(=·,~
Oc "o:c':n;:c'
:- - - ---1-o,'.,"'''-+---c;2.'no;---j---,-,.'6,.,-'----1----;".1"'0- --1---+-;c5'.4'8 _. - -----""."1- +- -'2'.2"'--1---;'''1.8"'1. -..--- ----1
~~"'' :>:"'' '",m,,,;d,,',,',,(\,:C,,'
' ,,'':)':-"U':'(c:>.J'c:--j_~,.,.---+_;-,-".+___ _ --+_. ___-j_ __+---,=-!__"",-j---- - - -......_._______._
Bayabas (Psidiulll guajava 12.55 2.68 7.84 1.68
L.)
Ilans· ilnng ICananga
- ---1---+--1------------1-- ---/--
odorata (Lmll.) Hook f. &
-Illoms.}
Gubas (Endm:pemlUnl 9 .66 2.96 3.74 2.36 1.02 6.().1 1.1:15 2..14 1.48 0 .64
pe ll ll UHIl Mr:rT I
KaalO<Ul bangkal J 1.08 2.77 :UO 1.40 1.J3 6 .93 1.7.1 2.(X) 0 .88 0 .83
(Anlhocepha)us chincnsis
(Llimk .) Rich. ex . Walr)
I-+.K","po"i,"[SC"'-''':;b'',''"'','"'''',,'',d''',,L..--1I ---;.'.2,,,--I-'''1.'-''35~-I--TW- --·-o.-:~ 01>3 - 2.67-- ------0:&4-- - -W- - - -0.46- --- ----0.39-
1-T(1
~"~)rG,,3'~"~"~'[~C7c---+---;,"-+---c;,"-I----77
Lumbang IAlcuri(cs 6.39 2.47
__-+--~",,-~-,,"oo-
1.63 0.71 0.88
"-
'-4.00 '~5--'- ---- i.oz- - --.~-----. {).55 _J
Chapter 7
MASONRY
SIXTH EDITION
H1
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
CHAP1T.I~ 7 . MW;Oilfy "l 1
Table of Contents
CHAI'TER 7 - MASONRY ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
SECTION 7() 1 - GENERA L ......................................................................... .. d .... ....................... " " " " ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ..................... 4
70 1.1 Scope. . .................................... .. .. .. . ... 4
701. 2 Design Me thod s ...................................... .................. ....... .. . .. 4
701.3 Defi niti ons ........................................................... .. .. ...... 4
701.4 No tatio ns ..... ............................................... ...... . .)
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
7·2 CHIII' TU1 7· Masun,y
EFFECTIVE AREA OF REINFORCEMENT is the DIMENSIONS, NOMINAL of masonry unirs arc equal to
cross-sectional area of rcinforccmcIH muhiplicd by th e its specified dimcn:-;iolls plus the thickness of the joint with
cosine of the angle between the reinforcement and the whi ch the unit is laid.
direction for which effective area is to be determined.
DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED are the dimensions speci fi ed
AREA, GROSS is the lotal cross-sectional area of a for the manufacture or collstmction of masonry, masonry
specified section. units, joints or any other compo nent of a structure.
GROUT LIFT is an increment of grout height within the WALL, BONDED is a masonry wall in which two or more
total grout pour. wythes arc bonded to act as a structural uni!.
GROU'J' POUR is the IOtal height of masonry wall to be WALL, CAVITY is a wall containing continuous air space
grouted prior 10 the erection of additional masonry. A grout with a minimum width of 50 mm and a maximum width of
pour will consist of one or more grout lifts. 100 mm between wythes which arc tied with metal tics.
GROUTED HOLLOW-UNIT MASONRY is that form WALL TIE is a mechanical metal fastener which connects
of grouted masonry construction in which certain wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials.
designated cells of hollow units are continuously filled with
grout. WEB is an imerior solid portion of a hollow-masonry unit
as placed in masonry.
GROUTED MULTl-WYTHE MASONRY is that form
of grouted masonry construction in which the space WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit
between the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with in thickness. A collar joint is not considered a wythe.
grout.
JOINT, BED is the joint with or without mortar that is 701.4 Notations
horizontal at the time the masonry units m'e placed. ::::cross-sectional area of anchor bolt, mm 2
::: effective area of masonry, mm 2
::::gross area of wall, 111m2
JOINT, HEAD is the joint with or without mortar having a
vertical transverse plane. ::::total area of special horizontal reinforcement
through wall frame joint, mn/
;::: net area of masonry section bounded by wall
MASONRY UNIT is brick, tile, stone, glass block or thickness and length of section in direction of
concrete block conforming to the requirements specified in shear force considered, rnm 2
Section 702. ;::: area of tension (pullout) cone of embedded
AI'
anchor bolt projected onto surface of masonry,
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose 111m2
net crossHsectional areas (solid area) in any plane parallel to A, :;;: effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in
the surface containing cores, cells or deep frogs is Jess than column or flexural member, mm?
75 percent of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the :::: effective area of reinforcement,
same plane. ::: total cross-sectional area of rectangular tic
2
reinforcement for confined core, mm
SOLID-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose net A,. :::: area of reinforcement required for shear
crossHsectional area in any plane parallel to the surface reinforcement perpendicular to longitudinal
containing the cores or cells is at least 75 percent of the reinforcement, 111m2
gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane. A', :::: effective cross-sectionaJ area of compression
2
reinforcement in flexural member, mm
:::: depth of equivalent rectangular stress block, mm
MORTARLESS MASONRY SYSTEM is a method of
:::: nominal shear strength of anchor bolt, kN
masonry wall construction that eliminates the use of mortar.
~ allowable tensile force on anchor bolt, kN
:;;: nominal tensile strength of mlcilar bolt, kN
PRISM is an assemblage of masonry units and mortar (if :::: allowable shear force on anchor boll,kN
present) with or without grout used as a test specimen for :::: effective width of rectangular member or width
determining properties of the masonry. of flange for T and I sections, mm
:::: factored shear force supported by anchor bolt,
REINFORCED MASONRY IS that form of masonry kN
constl1lction in which reinforcement acting in conjunction :::: computed tensile force on anchor bolt, kN
with the masonry is used to resist forces. :::: factored tensile force supported by anchor
bolt, kN
SHELL is the outer POI1ioil of a hollow masonry unit as b,. :::: computed shear force on anchor bolt,
placed in masonry. kN
b' :;;: width of web in T or I section, rnm
in soil or ,"Ciated internal moments and forces ::: nominal axial load strength in masonry without
P"
:::: height of wall between points of support, mm nexure, kN
:::: beam depth, mm ~ factored axial load, kN
:::; factored load from tributary floor or roof loads,
kN
:::; factored weight of wall tributary (0 section generally accepted good practice, subject to thc approval of"
under cOllSidcralioll, kN the building official.
::;: weight or wall tribulary 10 section under
consideration, kN Reclaimed or previously used masonry units shall mcct the
r :::; radius of gyration (based on specified unit applicable requiremcnts as for new masonry units of the
dimensions or Tables 7 I I - 1,7 I I -2 and 711-:1), same material for their intended usc.
mill
;::; ratio of area of reinforcing bars cut oil to tol<1l
area of reinforcing bars at the section. 702.2 Standards of Quality
s ::::: s-C2tion !~loduILlS, mm 3 The standards listed below labeled a "UBC Standard" arc
s :.:: spacing of stirrups or of bent bars in direction also listed in Chapter 35, Part II of UBC, and arc part of
parallel to that of main reinforcemcnt, 111m this code. The other standards listed below arc recognized
T ::;: effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage and standards. See Sections 3503 and 3504 of UBC.
diffcrelHial settlement
::;: effective thickness of wythe, wall or column, 1. Aggregates
mill
1.1 ASTM C 144, Aggregates for Masonry Mortar
(j = required strength (0 resist factored loads, or
related intcrnalmoments and forccs_ 1.2 ASTM C404. Aggregates for Grout
Ii ::;: bond stress pCI' ullit of surface arca of
reinforcing bar, MPa 2. CcnH.~Jlt
v :::: IOtal design shear force, kN
2.! ASTM C9! -93, Cement, Masonry. (Plastic
:;:: 10lal horizontal joint shear, kN
cement conforming to the requirements of UBC
::;: nominal shear strength of masonry, kN
Standard 25-1 may be llsed in lieu of masonry
v" :::: nominal shear strength, kN
cement when it also conforms to ASTM C 91-
V, :;:: nominal shear strength of shear reinforcement,
93).
kN
V" ::;: required shear strength in masonry, kN 2.2 ASTM C I SO, Portland Cement
W ;:;:: wind load, or related internal momcnts in forces
2.3 ASTM C270. MOl1ar Cement
::;: factored distributed lateral load
:::: horizontal deneetion at mid height under
factored load, mill
3. Lime
Ll" = deflection due to factored loads, mill 3.1 ASTM C5-79, Quicklime for Structural
p :::: ratio of area of flexural tensile reinforcement, A" Purposes
to area bd
3.2 ASTM C207-91, Hydrated Lime for Masonry
~ reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
Purposes. When Types Nand NA hydrated
conditions lime arc lIsed in masonry mortar, they shall
p" ::;: ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on plane comply with the provisions of UBC Standard
perpendicular to plane of AIII \. ASTM C270-95. Section 21.1506.7, excluding
:::: sum of perimeters of all longilUdinaJ the plasticity requirement.
reinforcement, mm
JI'm :;: square root of spccified strength of masonry at 4. Masonry Units of Clay ot' Shale
the age of 28 days, MPa 4.1 ASTM C34. Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall
[j :;:: strcngth-reduction facLor Tile
4.2 ASTM C56, Structural Clay Nonload-bcaring
SECTION 702 Tile
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
7·n CHI\P1TH I . Ma~;o11fy
4.6 ASTM C90-H), Hollow Brick S.2 ASTM C270, Field Tcsts Spc<:imclls for Mortar
4.7 ASTM C67, Sampling lind Te~tiJlg Brick ;md 8.3 ASTM cno, Standard Test Method for
Stnl(;luraJ Clay Tile Flexural B()Ild Strcngth or Mortar CC mC\lt
8, Mortal'
8. I ASTM C270-95, Mortar for Unit Masonry and
Reinforced Masonry other than Gypsum
703.4 Grout
703.4.1 Gelleral
Grout shall cOllsist of a mixture of ccmcntiti ous materials
and aggregate to which water has been added stich thaI the
mixture will flow without segregation of the constituents.
The specified compressive st rengt h of grout, 1'R' shall not
be less (han 15 MP.
111
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
110 CHAI'TU1! " MasolllY
704.3.1 Mortal'
The monaI', whellllsed shall bc suiTicicn!ly plastic and unit-;
shall be placed with surticiellt pressure to extrude mOl"!,!!'
704.1 General from the joint and produce a tight join!. Deep ftlfTO\VJl1!~,
Masonry shall be constructed according to the provision of which produces voids shall not be used.
this section.
When mortar is used, the illitiallle:~ joint thickness shall ;l():.
be less than 6 m!l1 or llwrc than 25 mm; subsequent L,"
704.2 Materials: Handling, Storage and Preparation joints shall not be less than 6 mm or more than 16 mill in
All materials shall comply with applicable requirements of thickness.
Section 702. Storage, handling and preparation at the site
shall conform also the following: 704.3.2 Surfaces
1. Masonry materials shall be stored so that at the time of Surfaces to be ill contact with monar or grout shall be clean
and free of deleterious materials,
usc the materials arc clean and structurally suitable for
the intended usc.
704.3.3 Solid Masonry Units
2. All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust
Solid masonry units sha!l have full head and bed joints.
and other coatings that would inhibit reinforcing bond.
3. At the tillle of laying, burned clay Ulli!s and sand lime 704.3.4 Hollow-Masonry Units
units shall have an initial rate of absorption not Except for mortarless system all head and bed joints shall
exceeding 1.6 liter per square meIer during a period of be filled solidly with mortar for a distance in from the f'ael'
one minute. In the absorption test, the surface of the of the unit not less than thc thickness of the shell.
unit shall be held 3 mm below the surface of the water.
4. Concrete masonry units shal1 not be wetted unless Head and bedded joints of open-ends units with bcvdc,!
otherwise approved. ends that are to be fully grouted need not be mortared. The
beveled ends shall form a grout key which permits gr()\i~
5, Materials shall be stored in a manner such that within J 6 mm of the face of the unit. The units shall be
deterioration or intrusion of foreign materials is tightly butted to prevent leakagc of grout.
prevented and that the material will be capable of
meeting applicable requirements at the time of mixing 704.4 Reinforcement Placing
or placement.
Reinforcement details shall conform to the requircmcnts of
6. The method of measuring materials for mOf1ar and this chapter. Metal reinforcement shall be located ifl
grout shall be such that proportions of the materials can accordance with the plans and specification(:.
be controlled. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior
to grouting by wire positioncrs or other suitable deviccs a!
7. Mortar or grout mixed at the job site shall be mixed for
intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters.
a period of time not less than three minutes or Illore
than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount
Tolerances for the placement of reinforcement in wa!!s and
of water required to provide the desired workability,
flexural elements shall be plus or minus 12 mm for d eqwtl
Hand mixing of stl1<l1l amounts of mOJ1ar is permitted.
to 200 mill or less, ± 25 mm for d equal to 600 mm OJ
Mortar may be re-tempered. Mortar or grout which has
but greater than 200 mm, anc! 20 m!l1 for d greater thill:
hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement
mm. Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcl'.li'.
shall not be used. In no case shall mortar be used two
and one-half hours, nor grout used one and one half shaH be ± 500 mm
hours, after the initial mixing water has been addcd to
the dry ingredients at the jobsite.
Exceptions:
Dry mixes for mortar and grout which are blended in the
factory and mixed at the job site shall be mixed in
mechanical mixers until lvorkable, but not to exceed 10
minutes,
Prior [0 grou ting, th e gro ut space shall be clean so th at all Segregation of the grout ·materials and damage to the
spaces 10 be filled with grout do not conta in mOrln!" masonry shall be avoided durin g the grou tin g process.
projecti ons greater than J2 mill, mOl1ar droppings or oth er
fo reign material. Grou t shall be placed so that all spaces Grout shall be consolidated by mechani cnl vihrnti on during
d es ig nated to be grouted sha ll be fi lled with grout and the placement before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill the
grou t shall be con lined (0 those s pecific spaces. gro ut space. Grout pours grciHer than 300 mm in height
shall be reconsolidated by mechan ical vibrati on to
Grout materials and water content shall be controlled to minimi ze voids due to wa ter loss. Groul pours )00 mill or
pro vide adequate fluidity for placement wit hout scgreglltion less in height shall be mechanically vibrated or puddled.
of th e corlslihlcnts, and shall be mixed thorough ly.
111 olle-storey buildings having wood-frame exterior walls,
The grouting of any section of walt shall be completed in foundations not over 600 I11Ill high mc:tsurcd frolTl the top
one day with no interruptions greater than one hour. or the footing may be constructed of hollow-masonry units
laid in running bond without mortared head joints. Ally
Between grout pours, a horizontal construction joint shall sti.lndard shape unit may be used, provided the maso nry
be form cd by stopping all wythes at the sarne elevation and units permit horizontal flow of grout 10 adjacen t units.
with the grout stopping a minimum of 40 mm below a Grou t shall be solidly poured to the full height in a ile lift
mortar joint, cxcept the top of the wall. Where bond beams and sh<lll be puddled or mechanically vibrated.
occur, the grout pour sha ll be stopped a minimum of 10 nlln
below the 101' of th e masonry. In nonstnlctural clements which do Ilot exceed 2.4 m in
height above the hi ghest point of latera l support , including
S ize and height limi tat ions of the grout space or cell shall fireplaces and rc:-;idential chi mneys, I11Ol1ar of pouring
-no t be less Ihan shown in Table 704-1. Hi gher g ro ut pou rs consis tency may be substit uted for gro ut when Ihe masonry
Of small er cavity wid ths or cell size than shown in T.able b constructed and groute.d in pours of 300 mill or less ill
704 ~ I may be used when approved, if it is demonst rated height.
th at grou t spaces wi ll be properly filled.
In multi-wythe grouted masonry, vertical barri ers of
Cleanouts shaH be provided fo r all grout pours over 1.50 III masonry shall be built across the grout space the entire
in height. height of the grout pour and spaced not more than 9 III
horizontally. The grouting of any section of wa ll between
Where required, cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom baniers shall be completed in one day with no interruption
course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more longer than one hour.
than 800 mm on cent er for solidly grouted masonry. When
cJeanouts arc required, th ey shall be sealed after inspection 704.5.3 Aluminum Equipment
and before grouting. Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utili zi ng aluminum
eq uipment unless it can be demonstrated with the materials
Where. cleanouts arc not provided, special provisions .must and equip ment to be used that there will be no dcleterio us
be made 10 keep the bottom .and sides of the grout spaces, effect on the strength of the g rou t
as well as the minimum total clear area as required by Table
704~ I. clea n and clear prior to grolllillg.
704,5.4 Joint Rcinforcemcllt
Wire joint reinforcemen t used in the design as prin ci pal
Uni ts may be laid to the full height of the grout pour and
rein force ment in hoJJ ow~ulli t construction shall he
grout shall be placed in a continu ous pour in grout lifts not
co ntinu ous between supports unless splices are made by
exceeding 1.8 Ill . When approved, grout lifts may be greater
than 1.8 III if it ca n be demonstrated the grout spaces can be lapping:
properly filled. 1. Fifty-four wire diameters in a grou ted cell, or
705.3.1 General
Compliance with the requirements for the specified
compressive strength of masonry 1'", shall be in accordance
with one of the sections in this subsection.
J. When one lwlf the all owable masonry stresses arc used Exception:
in design, testing during construct ion is not requiJed. Prior to the start of constrllctioll, prism testing may be used
A leiter of certification from the manufacturer and/or ill lieu of testiflg the lin;' strength. During cOflsfmclioll,
suppl ier of the material s used to verify the /,,,, in prism testing may also be used ill lieu of testing Ihe utlil
accordance with Section 705.3.2, Item J, sha ll be strength and the grout as required by Section 705.3.4,
provided at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the Item 4.
materials to the j ob si te to ensure the materials used in
co nstruction arc represen tative of the materials used to 2. When one half the ;:lllQwable masonry stresses are llsed
construct the prisms prior to constnlction. ;~ in design, testing is no! requ ircd for the units. A lett cr
of cert ification from the Ill,Ul ufacwfcr of the un its shall
70S.3.3 Masonry I'rislll Test Record hc provided at the time of, or prior to, de li very of the
units t9 Ihe job site (0 ass ure the units compl y wit h thc
Compressive strength verification by masonry pri sm test
com pressive stren gth required in Table 705-1; and
records shall meet !he follow ing:
3. Mortar shall comply with the mortar type .required in
I. A masonry prism tcst record approved by th e building
Table 705-1; and.
official of at least 30 masonry prisms which were built
and tested in accordance with ASTM E447. Prisms 4. When full streSSeS arc lIsed in design for concrete
shall have been constructed under the observation of an grout shall be tested for eHeh 460 III of wall
1ll<I.SOIlI Y\
engineer or special inspector or an approved agcncy area, but not less than onc tcst per project, to show
and shall ha ve been tested by an approved agency. co mpli ance wi th the co mpress ive strength required in
Table 705-1 , Footnote 4.
2. Masonry pri sms shall be represen tative of the
corresponding cons truc ti on. 5. When one half the all owable stresses arc used in design
fol' concrete masonry, lCs ti ng is not required for the
3. The average compressi ve strength of th e test record
groll t. A Jetter of certification from the supplier of the
sha ll equal or exceed 1.33 I'm.
grOlJt shall be pro vided at the time of, or prior 10,
4. When full allowable stresses are used in design , a set or deli very of the grout to the job site to assure the grollt
Ihree masonry prisms shall be built durin g constructi on complies wi th the compressive strength requ ired in
in accordance with ASTM E 447 for each 460 1112 of Tabl e 705- 1, Foolnote 4; or
wall area, but not less than one set of three prisms for
6. When full allowable stresses are used in design for clay
the project.
maso nry, grout proportions shall be verified by the
5. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used cngineer~of~record or special inspector or an approved
in design, field testing during construction is not agency to conform wilh Table 703-2.
required. A Jetter of cel1ification from th e supplier of
7. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used
th e materi als to th e job sitc shall be provided at the
ill de$ign fo r cla y masonry, a letter of cCI1iri cation fro m
liJ~e of, or prior to, deli very of the materials 10 assure
(he suppl icr of Ihe grout shall he provided ilt the timc
the' materi als lIsed in const ru cti on arc representati ve of
of. or prior to, dcli ve.ry of the groul to the job site to
lhe materials used to develop the prism te st reco rd in
assure the grout conforms to the proporti ons of Table
accoillancc wilh SCl:tion 705. 3.3, Item I.
703-2.
There shall be ,it least one rnl 0 111m wall ti c for each OAO
of wa ll area. For cavity wall s in whi ch Ihe width of ir
cavit y is greater than 75 Illlll , but not more than 11 5 m lll . .-
least onc 10 mill diameter wall ti c for each 0.25 1112 oj ,. ;, ;;
area shall be provided .
I. Onc ti e shall be provi ded for each O. J 6111 2 of wa ll area. 706.1.8 Protcction of 'I'ics ~Uld Joint Rcinforcement
Ho ri zon ta l and ven ical slHlcing sha ll not exceed 400 A mini mulll of 16 I1Ull mortar cover shall be provided
I11 1ll. Max imum misali gnment of bed joi nts fro m o lle between tics or joint rein fo rce me nt a nd any exposed face.
wyt he to th e other shall be 30 ml11 . The thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units
and join t reinforcement sha ll nOI be less than 6mm, except
2. Maximum clearance between the conn ecting parts o/"
th at 6 mill or smaller diameter reinforcement or bo lts may
the lie shall be 1.5 mm. When used, pintle ties shall
be placed in bed joints wh ic h are at least twice the thickness
have at least two 5 n Ull di amctcr pintle legs.
of the reinforce ment or bolts.
Wa ll ti cs of di fferent size and spac ing that provide
706.1.·9 I)ipes and Co ndui1s Embedded ill Masonry
eq uiv:'ll elll stre ng th between wythes may be used.
Pipes o r conduit shall not be e mbedded in any masonry in a
706.1.5.3 Wall Tics for Grouted Multi-wythe manner that will red uce the capacity of thc masonry to less
Construction l ilan that necessary for rcqlli red stren gth or req uired ti re
protection.
Wythes·{)f multi -wyth e wall s shall be bonded together with
at leas t 4.8 mm di ameter steel wall tie for each 0.20 m2 of Placement of pi pes or condui t ~ in unfilled corcs of ho llow·
area. Wall li es of different size an d spacing th at provide uni t nwsonry 5h,1I1 nOI be considered as embedment.
eq ui va lent strength between wythes ma y be used.
Exceptions:
706.1.5.4 Joint Reinforcement
I. Rigid electric conduits may be embedded in structural
Prefabricated j o ill t reinforcemeIll for masonry wall sh all
lI!(Jsonry when their locations have been de tailed on
have at least one cross wire o f at least No.9 gage steel for
each 0.20 m2 of wall area. The vertical s pi.~cing uf the joilll rh e approved plan
rei nforce ment sh all not exceed 400 mill . T he longi tudinal 2. Any pipe or conduit may pass ve rtically or horizontally
wires shall be thoroughly embedded in the bed joint mortar. through any masonry by means of a sleeve at least
The joi nt rei nforce me nt shall e ng:'lge al l wytlles. large enough to pass allY hub or coupling on (he
pipelille. Such sleeves shall not be placed closer Ihall
W here (h e space betwee n tied wythes is solidly fill ed wit h three diameters, cenrer to center, flor shalf they unduly
grou t or mortar, lhe all owable stresses and ot her provisions impair the strength of constructiolT.
for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Wh ere the space is
!lot filled, tied walls sha ll conform to the allowable stress, 706.1.10 Load Test
lateral support, thickness (ex cluding cavity), height and tie When a load test is required, the member or portion of the
requi rements for cavi ty walls. structure under consideration shall be subjected 10 a
superim posed load equal to twice the design li ve load plus
706. 1.6 Ve r ti cal Support one hal f of 'he dead load: O.5D + 0.2L
S tructu ra l members providing vert ica l support of masOIi ry
shall provide a bearing surface on whic h the initial bed joi nt Th is load shall be len in position fo r a period of 24 hours
shall not be less th an 6 ml11 or more th an 25 111m in before remova l. If, du ring the tes t or upon removal of lhc
thickness and shall be of noncombustible material, except load, th e member or portion of th e structure shows evidence
where masonry is a Ilolls tructural decorat ive fea ture or of fai lure, such changes or modifications as are necessary to
wearing surface. make the sl"ruc ture adequate for the rated capacity shall be
made; or where approved, a lower rating shall be
established.
A fl cxul'<ll member !iha " he cOllside red to h.lvc passed the reinforcemenl or by hori zontal rei nforcement spaced
Icst if Ihe maximulIl deflection D ,H the end of the 24~ hour not over 1.2 III and fully embedded in grout or mortar.
period does not exceed the value of Formu la (706-1) or
S. The follo wing m;'llcriais shall 1101 bc lIsed ;'IS parI of the
(706-2) <lnd the beams and slabs show a rccowry oj" at least
vertical or latcml IO;'ld ~ rcsi s ting system: Typc 0
7) percent of the observed dellcClio/l within 24 hOllrs aftcr
mortar, masonry ccrnent. plasti c ccment, nOll-load
I'CIllO"'!! of the load.
bearing masonry units and glass block.
I
f) ~ - - - (706- 1)
200 706.1.12.3 Special Provisions for Seismic Zone 4
." All masonry structures buill in Seism ic Zo ne 4 shall be
:. ' . 12 designed and construcltd in accordance with requirements
D=-- (706-2)
4,000, for Seismic Zone 2 and with the following additional
requirements and limitations:
706,1.11 Reuse or Masonry Units
I. Column Reinforcement Tics
Masonry units may be reused when clean , whole and
confonning 10 the olher requ irements of thi s sectioll . All In columns Ihat are stressed by tensile Or compressive axial
structural propcI1ics of masonry of reclaimed units shall be overturning forces from sei sm ic loading. the spacing of
determined by approved test. colullllI lies shall not exceed 200 mill for the full height of
such columns.
706.1.12 Special Provision'5 in Area of Seismic Risk
In all other columns, ti cs shall be spaced a maximum of
706.1.12.1 General 0.20 m in the tops and bottoms of the columns for a
distance of the greatest among ( I) one sixth of the clear
Masonry struct ures constructed in the seismic zones shown column height, (2) 450 111m, or (3) the maximum column
in Figure 208- J shall be designed in accordallce with the cross-sectional dimension.
design requirements of this chapter and the special
provisions for each seismic zone given in this sec ti on.
Tic spacing for the remaining col umn height shall not
exceed the lesser of 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diamcters, lhe
706.1.12.2 Special Provisions rol' Seismic ZQlle 2 least column cross-sectional dilllension, or 450 mill.
Masonry stru ctures in Seismic Zone 2 shall co mpl y wilh the
following special provisions: Column lies sha ll terminate with a minimum 135-degrec
J. Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Sections hook with extensions not less than six bar diameters or J 00
706.3.6,706.3.7 and 707.2.13. mill. Sueh extensions shall cngtlgc the longitudinal colum.n
reinfo rcement and project into the interior of the column.
2. Vertical wall reinforcement of ,II Jellst J 30 mm2 in Books shall comply wilh Seclio n 707.2.2.5, It em 3.
cross-sectional area shall be provided continuously
froIn sUppOIl to su pport at each corner, at each side of Exceptions:
each opening, at the ends of walls and at maximum Where ties are placed ill horizontal bed joints, hooks shall
spacing of 1.20 m apart horizontally throu ghOllt walls. consist of a 90-degree bend having an inside radius of not
3. Horizontal wall reinforcement not less than J30 mm 2 in less than four tie diameters plus an extension of 32 tie
cross-sectional area shall be provided (1) at the bottom diameters.
and lOp of wall openings and shall extend not less th an
600 mm Or less than 40 bar diameters past the opening, 2. Shear Walls
(2) continuously at structurally connected roof and
fl oor levels and at the top of walls, (3) at the bottom of 2.1 Reinforcement
wa lls or ill the top of foundations when dowel ed in The portion of the reinforcemcnt rcq uired to resist shcar
wa lls. and (4) at maximum spaci ng of 3.0 III unless sha ll be uniforml y di stribut ed and shall be joill!
1Illiful"lnly di ~lributcd joilH rein fo rcement is pro vided. IcinfOi cclIlcnl , dcCormed bars or a combin ation thereo f.
Reinforce mcn{ at the top and bOil om of openin gs when The spacing of reinforcem ent in each direction shall !lot
conlinuous in wa lls may be used in determini ng the exceed one half the length of the elemenl. nor one half tho:-
maximulll spacing speci fied ill Itelll I of th is height of the elemenl , nor 1.2 nl .
paragraph.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and cOllsid(:j"i'· ~ .
4. Where stack bond is used, the minimulll horizontal
the determination of the shear strength of the J1lcmh ~"
reinforcement ratio shall be O.0007bc This ratio shall
be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with i\STM "
be satis fied by uniformly distributed joint
& A 641.
reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be continuous around Verification of the value of I'm shall be based on
wall corners and through intersections. Gnly reinforcement compliance with Scction 705.3. Unless otherwise spccified,
which is continuolls in the wall or clement shall be f'm shnl! be based on 28 -day te-sts. If other than a 28 ~ day test
co nsidered in computing the minimum area of age is used, the value of j'HI shall bc as indicated ill dc'sign
reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforrning to drawings or specifications. Design drawings shall show the
Section 707.2.2.6 shall be considered as continuous
rei nforecmen!.
r
value of m for which c<lch part of the slnlcturc is designed.
t1
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 ' Edition Volume 1
'(· Iil CHAP-rEF! "I Masonry
01" the wal! parallel 10 the shear forces may be assumed 'to
706.2.3.3 Cavily Walls carry horil.ollta] shear.
Where bOlh wylhcs of <l cavity wldl arc <lxi'llly IO;ldcu, c<lch
wythe shall be considcreD 10 ;1(;1 independently and the 706.2.7 DistribuHon of Concentrated Vertical Loads in
effective thickn ess of" each wythe is as defined in Section Walls
706.2.:1. I. Where only one wythe is axially loaded, the The length of wall laid up in running bond which may be
effective thickness of the cavity wall is taken as the square considered cap"ble of working al the maximum allowable
roOI of the Stllll of the squares of" the specified thicknesses ('I)mpressive stress to resist vertical concentrated loads shall
of the wythcs. L~; . exceed the cel1ter~IO~cclltcr distance between Stich
loads. nor the width of bearing area plus rour limes (he wall
Where cavity wall is composed of a single wythe and a
11 thickness. Concelltrated vertical loads shall not be assumed
multi~wythc, and both sides arc axially loaded, each side of 10 be distributed across continuous vertical monar or
th e cavilY waH shilll be considered 10 aCI independently and con tro! joints unless clements designed to di stribute the
the effective thickness of each side is as defined in Sect ions conce ntrated vcnica] loads arc employed.
706.2.3. 1 and 706.2.3,2. Where only one side is axi ally
loaded, the effective Ihickness of the cavity wall is the 706.2.8 Loads OIl NOlluearing Walls
square root of" the su m of the sq uares of tile speci fied Masonry walls lIsed as interior partitions or as exterior
thicknesses of the sides. surfaces or a building which do not carry vcrtical loads
imposed by other clements of the building shall bc designed
706.2.3.4 Columns to carry their own weight plus any superimposed fini sh and
The effect ivc thi ckness for rectangular columns in the IHteml rorces. Bonding or anchorage of nonbcaring walls
di rcction considered is the specified thickness. The shall be adequate 10 support (he walls and to transfer lateral
effective thickness for nOIl~rcctanglllar columns is the forces to the Suppo!1ing elements.
thi ckncss of the square column with the same moment of
incrtia about its axis as that about the axis considered in the 706.2.9 Vertical Denectioll
actual column. Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their
vertical deflection will not exceed 11600 of the clear span
706.2.4 Effective Height under total loads. Lintels shall bear on supporting masonry
The effective height of columns and walls shall be taken as on each end such that al!owable stresses in the supporting
the clear height of members laterally supported at [he top masonry arc not exceeded. A minimum bearing length or
and bottom in (\ direction normal to the mcmber axis 100 mill shall be provided for lintels bearing on masonry.
considered. For members nOI supported at the top normal
to the axis considered, the crfective height is twice the 706.2.10 Structural Continuity
height of the member above the support. E:Jfective height Intersecting structural clements intended to act as <l unit
less than clear height may be llsed if justified. shall be anchored together to resist the design forces.
Modulus of clas ti<: ity of clay or s hal ~ unit masonry. di st ribut ed 10 the wyllles accordi ng hJ Ihei r rcspt.:cti vc
Ikxu ral ri gidit ies
J ~.", = 750/,,,,, 205 OPt! maximum (706 -3 )
706.3 Alternative Strength Design (ASD) and S trength
Modulus of l!lasticity of concrele unit masonry.
Des ign Requirements for Reinfor('ed Ma sonry
1:·," = 750/,,,,, 20.5 (JPa maximum (706-4)
706.3.1 General
706.2.12.2 Modulus of Elasticit), of Steel In addition 10 the requirem en ts of' Sect ions 706.1 and 706.2,
E,=200 GPa (70G·S) .. , tbe design of reinforced masonry i; lructu res by th e working
stress design method or the stren gth des ign method shall
706.2.13 Shear Modulus of Masonr), co mply with the require ments of thi s sec tion.
1h
National Structural Code of the Pllilippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
7·20 CHAPTEFl 7· Masonry
AI least one third of the total rcin/{)fccmcnt provided for project beyond the end of the bend at least 12 stirrup
negative mOllle/ll at the support shal! be extended beyond diameters.
the extremc position of the poill! of in(Jcdio1l a distance
sufficicllt to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar, 706.3.6 Lateral Tics
not less than 1116 of the clear span, or the depth d of the AI! longitudinal bars for columns shall be e.nclosed by
mcmber, whichever is greater.
lateral tics. Lateral suppO!1 shall be provided to the
longitudinal bars by the corner of a complete tic having an
Tensile reinforcement for negativc moment in any span of a included angle oj' not more than 135 dcgree~' or by a
e);j!inuous restraincd or cantilever beam, or in any member standard hook at the end of a tic. Tile corner bars :;liall have
of a rigid frame, shal! be adequately anchored by such SUPPO!1 provided by a complete tie enclosing the.
reinforcement bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal bars shall have
through the supporting member. such lateral support provided by tics and no bar shall be
farther than 150 mm from such laterally supported bar.
At least one third of the required positive moment
reinforcement in simple beams or at the freely suppOJ1cd Lateral tics and longitudinal bars shall be placed not le.';s
end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face than 38 mm and not more than 125 mm from the surface or
of the beam into the SUppOi1 at least J 50 mm. At least one the column. Lateral tics may be placed against the
fourth of the required positive moment reinforcement at the longitudinal bars or placed in the ,horizontal bed joints
cOlltinuous end of continuous beams shall extend along the where the requirements of Section 706.1.8 are met.
same face of the beam into thc support at least ISO mill. Spacing of tics shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar
diameters, 48 tic diameters or the least dimension of the
Compression reinforcement in flexural members shaH be column but not more than 450 111m.
anchored by ties or stirrups not Jess than () mm in diameter,
spaced not farther apa!1 than 16 bar diameters or 48 lie Tics shall be at least 6 mm in diameter for 20 mm or
diameters, whichever is less. Such ties or stinups shall be smaller longitudinal bars and at least J 0 mm for
used throughout the distance where compression longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm. Ties smaller than J 0
reinforcement is required. mm may be used for longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm,
provided the total cross-sectional area of such smaller ties
706.3.5 Anchorage of Shear Rcinfoffcment. crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger
Single, separate bars used as shear reinforcement shall be tics at their required spacing.
anchored at each end by one of the following methods:
706.3.7 Column Anchor Bolt Ties
I. Hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement
through 180 degrees. Additional tics shall be provided around anchor bolts which
are set ill the top of columns. Such ties shall engage at least
2. Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam four bolts or, alternately, at least four vertical column bars
on the compression side a distance sufficient to or a combination of bolts and bars totaling at least four.
develop the stress in the bar for plain or deformed bars. Such tics shall be located within the top 125 mill of the
2 .
3. By a standard hook, as defined in Section 707.2.2.5, column and shall provide a total of 260 nun or more l!l
considered as developing 50 MPa, plus embedment cross-sectional area. The uppermost tie shall be within 50
sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to 111m of the top of the column.
which the bar is subjected. The effective embedded
length shall not be assumed to exceed the distance 706.3.8 Effective Width B of Compression Area
between the mid-depth of the beam and the tangent of In computing flexural stresscs in walls where reinforcement
the hook. occurs, the effective width assumed for running bond
masonry shall not exceed six times the nominal wall
The ends of bars forming a single LJ Of multiple LJ stirrup thickness or the center-la-center distance between
shall be anchored by one of the methods set forth in Items 1 reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective
through 3 above or sha!l be bent through all angle of at least width shall not exceed three times the nomina! wall
90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not thickness or the center-to-center distance between
less in diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project reinforcemcnt or the length of one unit, unless solid grouted
beyond the bend at least J 2 stirrup diameters. open-end units arc used.
Whcn one half all owab le maso nry st resses are used for The area A" sh all b~ the lesser of Fonmil a (707·3) or
design in Seismic Zo nes 4, the value of/,,,, sha ll be limited Fo rm ula (707-4) and where th e projected areas o r adjacent
(0 10 M Pa for concrete maso nry a nd 18 M Pa fo r clay anchor boilS c verlap, At' or each anchor bo lt shall be
maso nry fo r Secti on 705.3.2, item 3, a nd Sect io n 705.3.3, reduced by o ne half o f Ihe overl a pping area.
Item 5, un less thc val ue of /,,,, is verifi ed ·during
construction by the 1csling requireme nt s of Secti o)) 705.3.2, A" (707-3)
It em 2. A letter of certificatio n is not required. (707-4)
A"
707. 1.3 Minimum Dimensions for Masonry Structures 707.1.5.3 Shear
L oca ted in Se is mi c Zones 2 and 4
Allowable loa ds in shear shall be the va lue selected fro m
Elements of masonry stl1lc tures located in Se is mi c Z.olles 2 Tab le 707 ~3 or shall be determined from thc lesser of
a nd 4 shall be in accordance with this section. Formula (707-5) or Formul a (707-6).
th
Nationa! Structura l Code of the Ph il ippi nes 6 Edition Volurne 1
7·24 e IMP'1 EFI 7 Masonry
707.2.4 Nonrcctangular Flexural El ements Where shear reinforcement desi gned to lake emirc shear
Flcxunll cleme nl s of nonrccla ngular cross see lion sh all IJ...~ fo rce is provi dcu. the ullowahlc shea r siress. r,.
in Ile XUf .d
designed ill <lcconJance with the HS!i Ulllplions given 111 me mhe rs is:
Secli ons 707. 1.4 and 707.2.3.
I'~. :::: O. 25~ , 1.0 MPa maximuJll (707 -I H)
707.2.5 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress and Force
For members other than reinforced masonry columns, th e 707.2.9 Allowable Sh(!~lr Stress in Shear Walls
allowable axia l compressive stress I;~, shall be determined Where inplan e fl exural reinfo:~celllenl is provided an d
as follo ws: masonry is used to resist all ~jiLar, th e a ll o wHb le slw ,~r
slress Fv in shear wall is:
I:;' =0.25!'... II_(~)2 J (707 - 11 )
140r
F, =1/36 (4- -M ),;-- M
f' (80 -45 - ·) ma x. imulll
for h 'I r" 99 , Vd /11 Vel
(707-19)
For re inforced masonry co lumn s, the .a llowab le axial Where shear rein forceme nt desi gned ( 0 t;'lke .111 Ihe shear IS
co mpress ive fo rce P" shall be detcnllin cd as follows: provided, the allowa ble shear stress F,., in ShCM wall s is:
, Vel
J'---
F , =1/24(4- -M ) f' (120-45 -M )
m. Vel
maximum
70r (707-2 1)
P" = /0 25!, ... A,. +0.65A, F" ]( T J (707- 14 )
M / Vd " I, F,. = O. 12~ ,520 kPa maximulll
for h'lr> 99
(707-22 )
707.2.6 Allowable Flexural Compressive Stress
707.2.10 Allowable Bearing Siress
The allowabl e f1 exura l compressive stress F,! is:
When a member bcar5 on the ful! area of 11 masonry
F" = 0.33!,,,, ' 13.8 MPa maximum (707-15)' cle ment, the allowabl e heari ng stress Fllr is:
Exception:
For a distaltce of 1116 tlie clear span beyond rhe point of
inflection, th e maximum stress shall be 140 kPa.
707.2.14.1 General
Stresses due to compressive forces in walls and columns
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 707.2,5.
th
National Stl'Llctural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
1·26 CI,APTfli? Masonry
.1..~ :. ,. . +ii,
-- <I CI(): .'J
707.2.17 Shear in Flexuntl Membtrs and Shear Walls ,,~,
The shear stress in flexural members and shear walls shall
be computed by; 7()7.3.5 Allowahle Tellsile Stress
\I Resultant tensile stress due [0 cOlllbined bending and aXI
(707-37) load shall not exceed the allowable nexural tensile :;(1'cs.-; ,
bjd
F/.
For members or T or I section, tJ' shall be substituted for b.
The allow;~blc tensile stress for walls in flexure \'.~ ! ho\l:
Where j.. as computed by Formula (707-37) exceeds the
tensile reinforcement using portland cement and hydrated
allowable shear stress in masonry, F,., web reinforcement
lime, or using mOI1ar cement Type M or S Jllol1ar, sbl! n<'!
shall be provided and designed to carry the total shear
exceed the values in Table 707-5.
force. Both vertical and horizontal shear stresses shall be
considered.
Values in Table 707-5 for tension nOfmalto head joints ;n-!'
for running bond; no tension is allowed across head
The area required for shear reinforcement placed
ill stack bOlld masonry. These values shall not be 0:-.','0
perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be
horizontal flexural members.
computed by:
707.3.6 Allowable Shear Stn'ss in Flcxural Members
A,.
The allowable shear stress Fv in flexural members is:
(707-38)
l~. = tl083JY:~, 345 kPa maximuill Cl(:-·'
Where web rcinforccment is required, it shall be so spaced
that every 45~degree line extending from a point at d/2 of Exception:
the beam to the longitudinal tension bars shall be crossed by
at least one line of web reinforcement. For a distance of 11/6 111 the clear .\pan beyond fhe p( if)! ;',"
it(fleCfiofl, fhe maximum slress shall be /38 kPa.
707.3 Dcsign of Unrcinfol'ccd Masonry
707.3.7 Allowable Shear Stress ill Shear Walls
707.3.1 Gelleral The allowable shear stress Fv in shear walls is as follo\\ .;:
The requirements of this section govern masonry in which
reinforcement is not used to resist design forces and arc in I. F;, ::::: (J.(J25~, 550 kPa maximum
addition to thc requirements of Sections 706 and 707.1
,
2. Concrete units with Type M or S mortar, F,. ::::23~) U\,
707.3.2 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress. maximum.
The allowable axial compressive stress f~ is: 3. Concrete units with Type N monar, F,. :;: J 60 kPa
maximum.
P, ~0.25Fm [1-(_h'_)'J forh'/r$99 (707-39) 4. The allowable shcar stress in unreinforced m:: ' ·_)f1~·· ·
140,.
may be increased by 0.2/lIId .
(707-40)
707.3.8 Allowable Beariug Stress
When a member bears on the full area of a
707.3.3 Allowable Flexural Compressive Stress element, the allowable bearing stress Fhl' shall be:
The allowable Ocxural compressive stress Pi, is: FII(:;: 0.26/'1II
Ph ~ 0.33Fm . 14 MPa maximum (707-41)
When a member bears 011 one-third or less of a n"
clcmcnt, the allowable bearing stress h" shall be:
707.3.4 Combined Compressive Strcsses, Unity
FOl'mula FiJI::: 0.38/,,,,
Elements subjected to combined axial and flexural stresses
shall be designed in accordance with accepted principles of Formula (707-46) applies only when Ihe leasl <I; .('.
mcchanics or in accordancc with the Formula (707-42): between the edges of the loaded and unloaded (ti ' ,:, ,; a
minimulll of one fourth orlhe paralic I side dimension of the
loaded area. The allowable bearing stress on a re~lsonabJy
707.3.12 Shear in Flexural Members and Shear Walls 708.1.3 Required Strength
Shear calculations for flexural members and shear walls The required strength shall be determined in accordance
shall be based on Forllluia (707-48). with the factored load combinations of Section 203.3.
J,. = V / A,. (707-48)
708.1.4 Design Strength
707.3.12 Corbels Design strength is the nominal strength, multiplied by the
The slope of corbelling (angle measured from the horizontal strength-reduction factor, $, as specified in this sectioll.
to the face of the corbelled surface) or unreinforccd Masonry members shall be proportioned such that the
masonry shall not be less than 60 degrees. design strength exceeds the required strength.
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the 708.1.4.1 Beams, Piers and Columns
plane of the wall shall be such that allowable stresses are
not exceeded. 708.1.4.!.l Flexure
Flexure with or without axial load, the value of 4) shaH be
707.3.13 Stack Bond determined from Formula (708-1):
Masonry units laid in stack bond shall have longitudinal
reinforcement of at least o.0002f times the vertical cross- (708-1 )
sectional area of the wall placed horizontally in the bed
joints or in bond beams spaced veI1icaily not more than and
1.20111 apart.
708,1.4,1.2 Shear
Shear: ¢ = 0.60
111, ::::: O.85d {e"," / /e"", -I- ((,.I !~~)]} (708-3) (708-6)
708.1.4.3.1 Shear
The area AI' shall be the lesser of Formula (708-7) or
Slrear: <P ~ 0.60.
(708-8) and where the projected areas of adjacent anchor
bolts overlap, the value of All of each anchor bolt shall be
The value of 4J may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its reduced by one half of the overlapping area.
nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to
development of its nominal flexural strength for the A" = hJ
1( 008-7)
factored-load combination.
AI' = 1C 1,,/ (708-8)
Pf(
¢ ~ 0.85- 2 (---) (708-4) Wherc the anchor bolt edge distance, 1"<,, in the direction of
An/'m load is less than 12 bolt diameters, the value of BII! in
formula (808-9) shall be reduced by linear interpolation to
708.1.4.4.2 Shear zero at an he distance of 38 1111ll. Where adjacent anchor
Shear: '" ~ 0.80. bollS arc spaced closer than 8th, the nominal shear strength
of the adjacent anchors determined by Formula (708-9)
708.1.4.5 Anchor shall be reduced by linear interpolation to 0.75 times the
nominal shear strength at a centeHo-center spacing of four
Anchor bolts: '" ~ 0.80.
bolt diameters.
708.1.4.6 Reinforcement
Anchor bolts subjected to combincd shear and tcnsion .';l1all
bc designcd in accordance with Formula (708-1 I).
708.1.4.6.1 Development
Development: '" ~ 0.80. (70SII)
708.1.4.6.2 Splices
Splices: <P ~ 0.80. 708.1.5.2 Anchor Bolt Placement
Anchor bolts shall be placed so as to meet (he rdr,c
distance, embedment depth and spacing rcquircmc.ll; Jf
Sections 706.2.14.2, 706.2.14.3 and 706.2.14.4.
Maximum usabl c strain, enllO , at Ole extreme masonry 708.2.2.4 Standard Hooks
cOlllpressioll nber shall :
A standard hook shall be one of the following:
J. be 0.003 for the design of beams. piers. columns and
I, A 180·degrce turn plu..- an extension of <II least four bar
walls.
diameters. but not less thiiJl 60 mm ;u the free end of
2. not exceed 0.003 for mom ent-resisting wall frames , the bar.
unl ess lateral reinforcement as defined in Sec tion
708.2.6 .2.6 is lHili zed.
2. A I 35 ·degree turn pi US an extensioll or at least six bar
diam eters at the free end of the bar.
Strain in reinforcement and masonry shall be assumed (0 be 3. A 90-degree turn plus an exten sion of at least 12 bar
directl y proportional to the distan ce from the neutral axis. diameters at the free end of the bar.
Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength f;· for 708.2.2.5 Minimum Bend Diameter for Reinforcing Bars
grade of reinforcement used shall be taken as E~f times steel Diameter of bend measured on the inside of a bar other th<lll
st rain. For strains greater than that corresponding to J;., for stirrups and ties in sizes 10 111m through 16111111 shall not
stress in reinforcement shall be considered indepcndent of be less than the values in Table 707-4
st rain and equal to1;..
Inside diameter of bends for sti rrups and lics shall not be
T ens ile strength of masonry walls shall be neglect ed ill less than 4(", for 16 mill bars and smaller. For bars larger
fl ex ural calculation of strength, except when computing than 16 mm di ameter of bend shall be in accordan ce with
requirements for deflection. Tabl e 707-4
111
National Structural Cod e of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
730 CHAI'TEI11 Masonry
(708· 17) Where seismic loads are derermill ed bfJSed 011 Rw 1101
greater than three and where all joirus satisfy the
provisions of Section 708.2.6,2.9, the piers may be used to
and V, = A,P,J;. (708· I8) provide seismic load resistance.
1. Thc ' nominal shear strength shall not exceed the value J. Beams
given in Table 708· I.
1.1 Thc nominal width of a beam shall not he le~s than 150
2. The va lue of V"' shall be assumed to be zero within any mm .
region subjected to net tension factored loads.
1.2 The clear di stance between local ions of laleral bracing
3. The va lue of V", shall be ass umed 10 be J 70 kPa where of the compression side of the beam shall not exceed
M is greH1c r th.Ul 0.7 Mil" The required momen!. Mil> 32 timcs thc leasl width of the compression area.
"
for seismic design for compa rison with the 0.7 M"
V,\)u c of this section shall bc based on an R ... of 3. 1.3 The nominal depth of a bea m shall not be less than 200
m ill.
708.2.3.7 Reinforcement
2. Piers
I. Wh ere transverse reinforcement is required, thc
maximum spacing shall not exceed one half the depth 2. 1 The nominal width of a pier shalinOl be less than 153
of th e member nor J 200 mm. mill and shall !lot exceed 400 mill .
2. Flex ural reinforcement shall be uniformly di stribut ed 2.2 The distance between lateral supports of a pier shall
througho ut th e depth of the clement. not exceed 30 times the nominal width of the piers
except as provided for in Section 708.2.3.9, Itcm 2.3.
3. Flexural clements subjected to load reversals shall be
symmetricall y reinforced. 2.3 When the distance between lateral supports of a pier
exceeds 30 times the nominal width of 1he pier, the
4. The no mi na l moment strengt h at any sec tion along a provisions of Section 708.2.4 shall be used fo r design.
member shall not be less than one fourth of the
maxi mum momcnt strength. 2.4 The nominal lenglh of a picr shall not be less than three
tillles the no minal width of lhe pier. The nomi nal
S. The flex ural rei nforcement rat io, p, shall not exceed length of a picr shall not be greater tha n six times thc
0.5 Ph. nominal width of the pier. The clear height of a pier
6. Lap splices shall comply with rhe provisions of Secti on shall not exceed fi ve tin1es the nomina l length or the
708.2.2.7. pier.
Walls shall ha ve <t minimum (hi ckncss of 150 111m. P6 effec ts shall be included in deflect ion calculation. The
midheight deflection shall be computed with the following
Required moment and axial force shall be det ermi ned at the formula :
mid -height of the wall and shall be used for design. The
fa clOrcd moment, M,,, .11 the mid·hcight of the wall sha ll be
determined by Forliluia (708 20). v
(708 -28)
- u
It' ,,2 I'
M
"--8- + p11/'2+
' P6.
/I II
(708-20)
where:
(708·29)
Li/l ;:: deflection at mid -height of wall due to factored loads
The cracking momcnt strength of the wall shall be
(708'-2 1)
determin ed from the formul a:
The des ign st rength for out-of-plane wall loading shall be M" = Sj', (708 -30)
determined by Formul a (708-22)_
Th e modulus of mplUre,J,. shall be as follows:
(708-22)
where: J. For fully grouted hollow-unit masonry,
Mo = A"j,. (d - aI2) (708-2 3) II' =O.33..J1: ' 1.6 MPa maxim um (708 -3 1)
J. Minimulll reinforcement shall be provided in r:or all cross sections within the region defined by the base
accordance with Section 706.1.12.4, Item 2.3, for all of the shear wall and a plane at a distance L". above the base
seismic areas using this method of analysis. of the shear wall, the nominal shear strength shaH be
2. When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the determined from Formula (708-39).
nominal flexural strength of the shear wall shall bc at (708-39;
least 1.8 times the cracking moment strcngth of a fully
grouted wall or 3.0 timcs the cracking momcnt strength The required shear strength for this region shaH be
of a partially grouted wall from Formula (708-30). calculated at a distance L,,/2 above the base of the shear
wall, but not to exceed one half story height.
3. The amount of vertical reinforcement shall not be less
than one half the horizontal reinforcement. For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear
4. Spacing of horizontal reinforcement within the region wall shall be determined from Formula (708-36).
defined in Section 708.2.5.5, Item 3, shall not exceed
three tillles the nominal wall thickness nor 600 mm. 708.2.5.6 Boundary Members
Boundary members shall be as follows:
708.2.5.3 Design Strength
J. Boundary mcmbers shall bc provided at the boundaries
Design strength provided by thc shear wall cross section in of shear walls when the compressive strains in the wall
terms of axial force, shear and moment shall be computed exceed 0.0015. The strain shal! be determined llsing
as the nominal strength Illultiplied by the applicable factored forces and R". equal to i.5.
strength-reduction factor, ¢, specified in Section 708.1.4.3.
2. The minimum length of the boundary member shall be
708.2.5.4 Axial Strength three times the thickness of the wall, but shall include
all areas where the compressive strain per Section
The nominal axial strength of the shear wal! supporting
2108.2.6.2.7 is greater than 0.001 S.
axial loads only shall be calculated by Formula (708-34).
3. Lateral reinforcement shall be provided for the
P" = 0.851'" (A,,·- A,J + J; A, (708-34)
boundaryelcments. The latcral reinforcement shall be
a minimum of 10 111m diameter at a maximum of 200
Axial design strength provided by the shear wall cross
111m spacing within the grouted core or equivalent
section shall satisfy Formula (708-35).
confinement which can develop an ultimate
P,,::; 0.80 <P Po (708-35) compressive masonry strain of at least 0.006.
where:
(708-37)
and
(708-38)
708.2.6.1.2.1 !loa illS The valu e of ['lit shall not he less th an 10 MPa or greate r
Clear span for the beam shall not be less than two times its than 2H MPa.
dcpth.
708.2.6.2.4 Reinforcement
The nominal depth of lhe beam sha!! not be less than two The nomin,,1 moment strength at any section along a
units or 400 n1ln, wh ichever is greater. Th e no minal beam member shaH not be less tlwll one -fourlh of the highcr
depth to nominal bCHIll width f<ltio sh:11I not exceed 6. mOllle nl strength provided ill the two ends of the member.
The nominal width of the beam shall he the great er of 2(X) Lu]> splices shall be as defined in Section 708.2.2.7. The
mm or 1126 of the clear spall between pier fa ces . center of the lap splice shall be the center of th e member
clear length.
708.2.6.1.2.2 Piers
The nominal depth of pi ers shall not exceed 2.4 m. Nominal Welded splices and mechanical connection conforming to
depth shall not be less than two full units or HOO mm, Sec ti on 412.! 4.3. Item J throu gh 4 of UBC, may be used
wh ichever is gre.lIer. for splicing the reinforcelllenl al .my section provided not
more than alternate longitudinal b:trs arc spliced at section,
T he nominal wid th of' pi ers shall Ilot he less than the and the di stance between splices or alternate bars is at least
nominal width of th e beam, nO!' less than 2(X) mill OJ' 1114 or 600 111111 along the longitudinal axis.
the clear height bel wee n beam faces, whichever is greater.
Reinforcement shall not have a specified yield strength
The clear height-to-dcpth ratio of pier shall not exceed 5. greater Ihan 415 MPa. The actual yield strength based on
mill tes ts shall not exceed the specified yield strength times
708.2.6.1.2.3 AlIlllysis 1.3.
Member desi gn forces sha ll he the based 011 an analysis
108.2.6.2.5 Flexural Mem bers (Hearn)
which considers the rel ative stiffness of pier and beam
lllC!mbcr, includin g th e stiffening influence of joint s. Requirements of this secti on apply !O beams proportioned
primarily to resist flexure a ~ follows.
The calculation or beam mOlllen! cap;l city for the
determination of pier design shall include any contribution The axial compressive force on beams due to factored loads
of floor slab reinforcement. shall not exceed O. J 0 A,J'III.
The out-of-plane drift ratio of all piers shal ! sati sfy the drift
ratio limits specified in Section 2-47. 1. Longitudinal Reinrorcement
At any section of a beam, each masonry unit through the
708.2.6.2 Design Procedure beam depth shall contain longitudinal reinforcement.
The first transverse bar shall not be morc than 100 mm Alternati vely, equivalent confinement which can develop
from the face of the pier. an ultimate compressive strain of at least 0.006 may be
substituted for rectangular lie reinforcemcnt.
708.2.6.2.6 Memuers Suujected to Axial Force and
Flexure 708.2.6.2.7 I'ier Design Forces
The requirements set fonh in this subsection apply to piers Pier nominal momCIll strength shall not be less than 1.6
proportioned 10 resist flexure in conjuJlction with axi al times the pier moment corresponding to the development of
loads. th e beam plastic hin ges, cxcept at the foundati on level.
1. Longitudinal Reinforcement Pier axial load based on the development of beam plastic
A minimum of four longitudinal bars shall be provided at hinges in accordance with the paragraph above and
all sections o f every pier. including factored dead an d li ve loads shall no t exceed 0.15
Anf'm·
Flexural rei nforcement shall be distributed across the
member depth. Variation in reinforcement area between The drift rati o of piers shall satisfy the limits specified in
reinforced cells shall not exceed 50 percent. Chapler 2.
Minimum rei nforcement ratio calcu lated over the gross The. effects of cracking on member stiffness shall be
cross seclion shall be 0.002 co nsidered .
Maximum reinforcement ratio calcul ated over the gross The base plastic hinge of the picr must form immediately
cross seclion shall be 0.15 I'm ( /'" adjacent (0 the leve l of Ialeral support provided at the base
or fou ndation.
Maximum bar diameter shall be one eight nominal width of
the pier. 708.2.6.2.8 Shear Design.
Within an end region ex tending one pi er dept h from the end It sha ll be assum cd in the calcu lation of mcmber shear force
of the beam, and at allY region at wh ic h fl exural yielding tllat moments of opposite sign act at the joint faces and that
may OCCllr durin g seismic or wind loading, the maximum the member is loaded with the tributary gravi ty load along
spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed olle its span.
fourth the nominal depth of the pier.
2. Vertical Memuer Shear Strength
The max imulIl spacing of tran sverse reinforcemcni shall not The nominal shea r s(renglh shall be determined from
exceed one half th e nominal depth of the pier. Formula (708-4 1).
708.2.6.2.9 Joints
1. General Requircl11cllts
Where reinforcing bars extend through a join t, th e joint
dimensions shall be proportioned such thaI
th
National Stru ctura l Code of the Pililippi nes 6 Edition Volum e 1
/ ·:38 CHi\PTEH 7 Masonry
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
7·-10 C HAPH:l-11 IV1.:1S01lf}1
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volu me 1
hooks not less thall 50 mm long. Additiollal ties shall hc I. Wood fl oor joists ht'<tr ing on masonry wa lls shall be
prov ided a l 1.111 open ings, Spilccd !lot more (han 900 mill an<: hored 10 the w~ 1 1I hy ;Ippro vcd mcwl strap :ulCho n;
apart aro und th e perimeter and. within 300 mm of the a\ intervals not excc.eding !. 8 m . Joists paralle l ;1; i h,:·
opening. wall shall be anchored with melal straps sp;[(:(:,l l] '_,\
lHore than l .l{ m 011 center c:< tendin g over and under
The facing and b;!(' king of masonry Wil li s may be bonded mId secured to at leas t three joi sts. l3Iocking Shil ll lJt.
with prcfabri('ated joi nt reinforce ment. There sh<l!1 be at provided between joists at each strap anchor.
least one cross wire serving as <I tic for each 0.25 111 2 of wall
2. Steel floor joists shall be anchorcd to masonry wall ,;
arc'l. The verti c,,[ spacing of Ihe joint rei nforcement shal!
with 10 mill diamclCr bars, or their equ iv,lIcllt, "'p,l(X ';
not exceed 406 mill . Cross wires of pre fabric:lled joint
not more than I.H m on celller. Where joist.'> :; '-,:
reinforcement shall be at Ica~i No.9 gage wire. The
parallel to the wall , ancho rs shall be located at joi sts
longitudinal wire shall be embedded in mortar.
cross bridging.
710.6.4 LOllgitudilllllllolld J. Roof struclUrcs shall be tIllchored 10 1ll,Isollry w;-i' -;
In each wythe of masonry, head joints in successive co urses with 12 I11Ill bolts at 1.8 III on center or their equivalent.
t
shall be ofL.;;et at least one fourth of the unit length or the Bolts shall extend and be embedded at !cast 400 !')'!
wall s shall be reinforced longi tudinall y as required in into th e masonry. or be hooked or welded to Ij( l( i
710.7 Allchorllgc
than 130 mm l of bond he<llll re inforcement placed i i :;~
less than 150 mill from the top of the wall.
711.4 Reinforcement
Glass block panels shall have joint rei nforcement spaced
nOl more than 400 111m on ccnter and located in the 11)011ar
bed joint extending the entire length of the panel. A
lapping of longitudinal wires for a minimum of 1SO mm is
required for joint reinforcemen t splices. Joint
re inforcement shall also be placed in the bed joint
immediately below and above openings in the panel. Joint
reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 385 and A 641.
Joint reinforcement in exterior panels shaH be hOI-dip
gal vani zed in accorda nce with ASTM A 385 and A 641 .
minimum of every 450 nun of vertical height. Two such 712.7 Lintel and Throat
ties shaH be pro vided at CilCh bend in the vertical bars. Maso nry ove r a fireplace opening sh all be su pported by il
lintel of noncombustibl e material. The minim um requ ired
712.4 Scismic Anchorage bearing length on each cnd of the fireplace opcn ing shall be
Masonry and concrete chimneys in Seismic Design 100 mill. The fireplace throat or damper sh:.tll be hx:a tcd a
Category. D shall be anchored at each 11001', ceiling or roof minimum of 200 mill above th e top of the IircpJacc
lille marc than 1.8 III above grade, except where const ructed ope ning.
compl etel y within the exterior walls. Anchorage shall
confonn to the fo llowing requiremen ts. 712.7.1 Damper
Masonry fireplaces shall be equi pped with CI fcrro\l"~": "l1letal
712.4.1 Anchorage damper located at least 200 mill above the top of the
4.8 mm by 25 mm straps sha ll be embedded a minimum of fireplace open ing. Dampers sha ll be installed in the
300 mm into th e chimney. Straps shall be hooked around fireplace or at the top of the Ouc ventin g the fireplace, and
the outer bars and extend ISO mm beyond th e bend . Each shall be operable from the room containing the fireplace.
strap shall be fastened to a minimum of four Ooor joists Damper controls shall be permitted to be located in the
with two 12 mm bolts. firepl ace.
th
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
/·,18 CHAPTEH 7 . Masonry
713.8 Additional Load I. Clay flu c lining complying wit h the requircm cnts of
ASTM 0 15 , or equivalent.
Chim neys shall not support loads other than their ow n
weight unless th ey are designed an d constru ct ed to support 2. Lis ted chimney lining sys tems com plyi ng wi th UI .
the additional load. M<\sonry chimneys arc permitted to be 1777.
constructed as part of the masonry walls or concrete Wil lis
3. Faclory*built chimneys or chimney uni ts li sted fe:'
of the building.
installat ion withi n masonry chimneys.
4. Ot her approvcd materi als that will resist corrosion ,
erosion. softening or cracking from Oue gases an d
condensate at tem peratures up to 1,800' 1' (982' C).
1h
National Structu ral Code of tile Phili ppines 6 Edition Volume 1
7·50 CHAPTEr:1 7 . Masonry
" ~
Fille sizing (or chimneys servi ng fireplaces shall be ill "'"
accord;mce wi th Section 713,16.1 or 7 13, J 6,2, "
" " '"
" " ,- ---+-- 1-- '"
'00
2 to I shall have a minimum net cross-sectional area o f a 713.18 Masonry Chimney Cleanout Openings
least 1/10 of the fireplace opening. Rectangular chimney Cleanout openings shall be provided within 150 mm of the
flues with an aspect ratio of 2 to 1 or morc shall have tl base of each flue within every masonry chimn ey, The upper
minimum net cross-sectional are;] of at leas t dgof the edge of the cleanoul shall be located al least 150 mOl below
fireplace opening. the lowest chim ney inlet opening. The height of the opening
sh<lll be al leasl 150 mm . The c1eanoul sha ll be provided
713.16.2 Determination of Minimum Area with a noncombustible cover.
The minimum net cross-se.c tiona l area of the flue shall be
determined in accordance with Figure 7 I 3. J 6. A fi ue size
E.xceptioll:
providing at least the equivalent net cross ~sec !ional area Chimney flues serving masonry fireplaces, where cleaning
shall be used. Cross-sectional areas of clay nue linin gs are is possible through the fireplace opening.
as provided in Tables 713.16(1) and 713.16(2) or as
provided by the manufacturer or as measured in the field. 713.19 Chimney Clearances
The height of the chimney shall be measured from the Any portion of a masonry chimney located in the interior of
firebox floor to th e top of the chimney flue. the building or within the exterior wall of the building shall
have a minimum airspace clearance to combustibles of 50
713.17 Inlet mm. Chimneys located entirely outside the exterior walls of
Inlets to masonry chimneys shall enter from the side. Inlets the building, including chimneys that pass through the soffit
shall have a thimble of fireclay, rigid refracwry material or or cornice, shall have a minimum airspace clearance of 25
mctallhat wi ll prevent th e co nnector from pulling Oul of the 111 1ll . The airspace shall nOI be filled, except to provide
inlet or from extendi ng beyond the wall of the lin cr. fireblocking in accordance with Section 7 J 3.20.
Exceptions:
1. Masonry chimneys equipped with a chimney tining
system listed and labeled for use ill chimneys in contact
with combustibles in accordance with UL 1777, and
installed in accordance with the numufacturer's
instructions, are permitted to have combustible
material in contact with their exterior sur/nees.
lh
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
..",.
Fine ] ,500 35 15 x. 50
Fine 2.400 35 3S x. 50
Fil1e ),6CX) 35 45 x 75
Fine 7,200 50 1) x 75
Coarse JOQ.- 35 35 x 75
Coar.~e ] ,SCX) 50 (); x 75
Co;lrse 2.400 50 is
x 75
Coarse 3,600 60 75 x 75
Coarse 7,200 75 7S x 100
Sec also SCCllOfI 2 ] O:l .6.
} 11\c ac tual gro ul space or grout cell dimen sions must be larger than the su m of the foll ow ing items (I) The required minimum dimensions of total c lear
areas ill Table 704 ·1 ; (2) The width o f an )' 1ll0J1tU projections within the space: .. nd (3) 11,e horizont;11 projections o f the d iameters of the horizontal
reinforcing bars wi!ilin II cross section of the grow space or cell.
~ Tile minimum dimensions of thc \Ol a! clear 'JI"ea s shaH be m:lde up of one of morc open ,lre;IS wilh at least onc arca being 19 mm or grcaLcr in wio!h.
Values nl3y be interpo laled . When ho llow clay m,lsonr >' units .lre gro uted ,the grout shall con form to lhe prop<lJ1 ion in Table 703·2.
2 A ssumed assemblage, The specificd compressive stre ng th of mason ry f'", is based on gross area strength when usi ng sol id un its or solid grouted mason ry
and nct area slrcngUI when using ungrou ted ho llo w units.
3 M ortar for unit masonry. proportio n specificatio n, as speci fied in Table 703- 1. These values apply to pOJ1land CeOlen! - li me mortars wi tho u! added
air - entraining materials .
• Vatues may be interpolated. In groulCd concrete m,lsonry, the compressive strength o r grout shall be equal to or g rcak'r than the compressive strength o f the
CO!1CfCle m asonry u nits .
Tabl e 707 - I - All owable Tension, 13/1 for Embed ded Am:hor
Bo/(s for Clay and Co ncrete Masonry, kNI.2·1
I
2 Vlllucs arc for bolls of 1II le;!!)1 A 307 qualify. Bolls shall be those specified in Section 706.2. 14 .1
) Values showll arc for work with or without special inspection .
6 10 12 16 20
1..56 3..5 1 6.27 9_83 14.1
I Values arc for bolts of allcast A 307 quality. Bolls sha ll be tllose specified ill Sectio n 706.2.14. 1
J Values shown aTe for work willI or with9ul special inspection .
DIAMETER (inches)
-_~---l
- !\_i'lCHOR nOLl'
J 'm
(MPa)
.. _._- --- - - - ----_._-------------- --_._- --_.----------------- ---_.-
10 12 16 20 - - ----- ---22 --- -_._-25 ---- 28
10..3 2.14 -3_78 5.92 7.92 8.45 9_12 -- T7-
12.4 2_14 5_92 8_28 9..35 __ 9.57
-- 10_ 1
---- 3.78 - - ----_._."-
13.8 3_78 5_92 - -9)9 __
2. 14 8.45 9.1 7 --- lOA
17_2 2.14 3.78 5_92 845 9_70 - 10..4 11 .0
20_7 2_ 14 3.78 5_92 845 10.1 10.9 11 _5
276 2. 14 3_7 8 5.92 ._-- 8.45 10.9 11.7 12;1
34 .4 2.1 4 3_78 5.92 845 11 .5 12.3 l3~i
41.3 2. 14 3_78 5_92 8.45 11 .6 12_9 J:U I
, V ,\ I uc~ ,Ill. f01 i)()lts of-C--,1\. -ic,\sl
.- _- - - ':-:-'_
A 307 quahty . BoilS sh,lil be those spec Ified 111 SCdIOJ1 7()6.2. 14.1.
--------~-
.....1
2 Values shown arc for work w ith or wit hou t specia l inspection .
..i
I Table 70 7-5- All o wabl e Flexural Tensi oll (kPa)
! MORTAR TYPE
r-_~C~e~i~n~en~t~-~I~in~le~a~nTd~M~o~rt~a~r~C~e~"~l1~CI~lt~_-i.___ 77-~·~M~a~s~·o~nr~Ccnl~C~II~(~~---~
M or S N M or S J N
UNIT TYPE
I---;:;-,---"'T:':''-;-'--~'--:--+------r_------___.-- ------·-T--- ----I
Normal to bed Joints
Solid 276 207 165 103
/-Iollow 172 131 103 62
No rmal to head joints
Solid 551 267 330 207
. . . . . ._-_Hollow
... . _-_._ - ---- - -_._ =222 - 262 2()7
_._-_._-- _ ._-- - -- --- - --------
.___--.!24_ ___
,-- ---_..-
M IVd V" MAXIMUM _._ - -
50.25 6.0 A,1i I'm 50 380 A, (3 22 A, Ii---r::: 50 1691 A,
2: LOO - -
4.0 A,liT,: 50 250 A, (214 A, Ii J'm 50 111 3 A,
,
M IS the Ilkl Xlmu m bendmg moment (h at occurs sImu!t,Ulcoust}, \\,Ilh the shear 10:ld \ al the section unde r considerat ion. Interpolation
may be by straight line for MNd values between 0.25 and J .eX).
! Vn is in N, and 1'", is in kPa.
fI
~~V;i
may be by straight line (or MlVd values between 0. 25 and 1.00.
I f~ _j
M is the maximum bending moment lhal occurs simu!t,llleously with the sh ear loatl \f at the sectioll under consideration . Interpolation
Table 7 l0-1 · Shea r Wall Spacing Requirements for Empirical Desi gn of Masonry
MAXIMUM RATIO
Shea r \Vall Spacing to
FLOOR OR ROOF CONSTRUCTION Shear Wall Length _.-
Casl- in -p lace CO tl C r c ( c 5: 1
Precast Co ncrete 4: 1
Mew I deck with concrete iiI! 3: I
Metal deck with no Ii II 2: 1
Wood Di aphragm 2:1
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
'7·56 CHAPTEn!· Masonry
0.96
0.79
0.52
0.69
0.83
0.69
OA8
---l
4.82 MPa OAI 0.38
Hollow wa!ls (cavity or masonry bondedt solid units:
17.2 plus, MP" LlO 0.96
1--;-:---:-:-,-1",0.",-3 M=..P,::..a_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .._.. __ 0.79 0.69
,
, -:,H"o",ll"o-,W,-,;,"J:;-:li",ts:..·______ _____ _. __..__._-------_._- - - - - - . - .. 0 52
--.------ . -~
0,48
Stone ashlar masonry:
Granite 4.96 4,41
Limestone or marble 3.10 2.76
Sandstone or cast stone 2A8 2.20
Ru bble stone masonry
."_..__ Coarse,_.~~ or rando-"m'--_______ ~_. _____ ~ _____. 0.837 0_69,
---------_.-
Unburned clay masonry 0.21
Linear InterpolatIOn llMy be IIsed for dcter=;nj~~~g~II~;~~·~bk~i.~css~;f;~ mason;~ts havi;g~~;';~p~cssi-~~'"~'~-;:;-gtt;"s which-',!rc-Tr";u;'~'Tllediate Octween those
given in the table.
2 Where floor and floor loads arc can-ied upon wythe, the gross cross-section;11 area is that of the wYlhe under load. If both wythes arc loaded, the gross
cross-sectional area is that of the wall minus the area of the cavity between the wythes.
--.--~"".-
All other 18
. ,----- - - --,--" ------'-"---.__.. _
-.-----~ - .--- ,, - -----------
_~9_~lhearing walls - -- - -j--- - - - - _.._---_.__._-
Exterior 18
Interior 36
Table 7 10-6 - Allowable Shear on Bolts for Masonry of Unburned Clay Units
DIAMETER OF BOLTS
(mm) I
EMBEDMENTS
(mm) C_ SHEAR
(kN)
--
12 - _. -
16 300 0,89
- - -- -
20 380 1.33
22 ._- 457 1.78 _.-
25 -----
_ _____ 2.2.2..______ - -- 2.22
28 . 600 2.67
- --
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
Table 7! 1-1- Radius of Gyrat ion' for Concrete Masonry lJni t ~/
) The md ius of gyral iol) );lmB be based Oil ihe s pec ified d i.lllwsiolls o f Ihe masonry units or shilll be in ;u,:I:onl,lIICe w ith the va lue); shown wh ich arc based o n
lI!c m in imuill di , "clls i on ~ of hollow n)llcrcte masonry unit face sht' l1s an d IYd)~ in aCI,.'()Hialicc wilh UBC SI(Uldard 2 1·4 for llYO cell UllilS.
Table 7 ! 1- 2~ Ra dius or Gyralio n I for Clay Maso nry Uni t Lcngt h, 400 MM ~
r =..,,) !lA ,.
~' I hc mdill s of gYI';lI ion shal l lx: based 011 Ihe specified d imensi ons I)f Ihl! masonry uni ts or shall be in acc ord~lIIce wi th the v alu c~ s ho wn which IIrC'. based (II I
the minimum di ll1tllsions o( ho llow dny con crete maSQnry face shdls and webs in acct)rd<l nce wit h UB C Standard 2 1· ] for lW() cel ! U ll i l~.
r =-V' !IA,
Z111c radius of gyr:tlion sh;tll be ba sed on the speci fied dimensions or lhe Inasonr y unils or slmll be in :Jccord;ulce Wilh the valuC's shown which arc based on
the minimum dimension s or hollow clay concrete masonry rilec shells and webs in ileeordanec with UBC Swndard 2 1-1 ror two ecl1 units.
APPENDIX A
CONVERSION FACTORS
----,--'"----.-
~-APPENDIX A: EQUIVALENCE BETWEEN SI-METRIC, MKS-METRIC, AND U.S.
CUSTOMARY UNITS OF NON-HOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
- -. . . . . . . -.. --.. . -.--.. . . . ·--··. --·-· · . .
~-- ~ . --
SI-mctric stress
···~ ·· -·~l -- . . -..-.-----..---·· -. . . . ·. -·-------- --.--.--.-..------.--.-------.
mks -!l1ctric stress U.S. Customary units stress i
_...______.__.__._ ....".""."....... _____________. . _. _.In M!~:.I__.____
.__. . ___. _". ._.~.~~.Y.£!"~~~_.__ 'j _._. _ _ _ • ..l?~:n~ls per square inch (ps.i-L ..
I MP" 10 kgl/CID 142 .2 psi
- --_....__..- ----.-~-:---------- -j- - - - - - -- -----;---,- .-
j', = 21 MP" .. /" . = 210 kgllclll- /" = 3,()(XI psi
-- ....... -
/" . - 28 MP" f'.. = 280 kgllclll- /". - 4,000 psi
/" . - 35 MP" f'.. = 350 kgUcm' /" = 5.000 psi
/" . - 40 MP" j", = 420 kgUClll - /" - 6,000 psi
I,. = 280 MP" /;. = 2,800 kgUClll ' f, = 40,000 psi
-,•._---
f,:" 420 MP" f, = 4,200 kgUClll - f, = 60,000 psi
--_•.. __._----- ---_._------ -_..
J;m ;: : 1.725 MP" /,'" =17,600 kgflclll
,. - ---_. /,'" = 250,000 psi
._- ----- --_.. ._---- -. - --
/,'" 1.860 MP" i,,,, = 19,000 kgf!c m-
;::: /,'" - 270,000 psi
--
f1' , in MPa 3. 18//,- in kgflcm~ 12/r, in psi
_. fl'--~11 kgfk~~~2------
- - - _ ·- - - _ _ 0 ' _ _ -
---
- - - - -
-
OJI3 Jf': ill MPa \ ,
3.77jf:" in psi
._.... __.._------ .,--- --_._..• -- --
0.083 Jf': ill MPa 0. 27 ji':- in kgfl(:Jl1~ \ r1', in psi
- ----- - -_._._...__..._----_ ...- . . ...,,-_.-
0.170 Jf': in MP:! -o~5i/T. In kgf/CIl1~ 2fT': in psi
Eg.405-2 /,,, - 1',. + 2.33s, - 1.5 /" ., = /" . + 2.33s, - 35 /", - /" + 2.33s, - 500
Eq.410-4 S = 38{ 280)_ 2.5e,. :;; 30{ 280) S = 3{ 2800) _ 2.Se, :;; 3{ 2800) S= l{ 4~OO)_25<; :;;30t4~00)
/, I, I, /,
E'I.411-4 v, =017(1 +
}JT h" " v. I:~ b"" =05J[I+i:O~ l;iT -\~. ='2(1+--~---llfT;'-~--
2000 A ."
-------- -- - - ------ - ' ---" .•.._ -_. -- - ,.
" ----
Eq . 4 11-5 V.'
=( U.II>-<./T:
•
+17p y"!')b"
• M" • '" =(0.5~r
1'. +176P•.f.1
V") 6•.<1 -;~+9AJT. +250Op" ::/F~
"
~ 0.291. .fF: b"d S 0.931. .fF: Ivi ~ 3.501..fF: b"d
--
E'I.411-7 ~ =0 29()1 +~t).!jTb.d V. =09{ \ F3-35A,". }"Tb."
." V, =35( \/t+----"'
50M,"--- }v~b."
v. =0.17 ( I+ . : ,N" lAIT)" "~O =0 53(I +Jf;}JT),,"~O v, = 2(1+ 5~~, )AJI':'b"" ~O
O2
Eg.411-8 v.
V, = (,Iff
- -
20
+ 4.8 --
" - b .d
M ,,'
v,, ) 2A V
V• =(1 . 20ff." 49 M~
''')hd
~
V =( 12Aff. + 700 V" " },"
. 20 M,, '
E<I. 41 1-9
O, 17i.j1: b"dS. V,. "S.O.42J.rr..b"d O.S3..!j1; hOod ~ v, ~ 1.33;./J: /),,1' 2i./i b"d S V(5 5;,[f> . I'
- --- --
Eq.411-IO
V =Aj/, b d +V ;- Y:M ..,~ V
,',
=3.2J. E~b
20
d +V +~Mc~!"..
M", ...
V = 12A fi: b d +V + V, Me!!
,', 20 "" r J M "w. M' I' J
CO 20 '" I' d M"\J'
2: O.14!.fj')J"f1 2: 045J.j1,b"d 2: I7J.Jl,b"d
- _.
Eq. 4 1 I- II M", =(osA.f{, + /'. - IJ!... M",=(J6 A.f{, + I" - IJ.!.. M", =(6A.f{, + I." - IJ.!..
. )" -,
\' y,
\I",. =(0.29J.[i'; +-03/,."".d" + V" v" ~(0.9'1t/T: +O.3/"h.d, + V; v" =l3.s;,fT +O.3f,.!).d" +·V,
Eq. 41 1-12
0.33) j1, 1.10!.j1, 400). If
-.- -- -- - --_..
Sec!. 41 1.6.5 .3 0.33j1,b"d 1.10 j1,b"d 4.00 iT, b"d
\
_ . _ - ---- -_._- ----- - _ ._----_.- -_._--_.. --
Sec!. 411.6.6. I
(6)
¢ OI7 J f', IMI ¢O.53fi': b"d ¢ 200 .J!', b,,(1
Eq. 411-J3 A,."•• =0.062,J'T:
b s
j" A,.•,. f, --T'
=0.20 ff""s A. .,,, . =0.75 fj',
fb
J S
~ O.3Sb!.!.--1 2: 3.s0",~
"
~ SOb".!. "
f,t 1,1 Ii
Eq.411-17 v, = A,.f,. sine! '" 0.25 j1, h"d V, =A,l, siIl6 ~ 0.8Jj,b"d v,= A,.j,. sina. ~ 3 j1, b"d
------- -"
Sec!. 4 11.6.7.9 0.66,if, b"d 2.2j1,b"d 8 Jr,l)"(1
Sec!. 4 117. 1 7 ~f< T,,< T,, <
(I)
1AlC(::"l •.. _...-
pO.27 J. Jr.
-_...__._._._-_.
- ( --;"-
A'
I 'i'
1 9,1 II- " ( ...A'-". 1
-,._- .-....-,.- -...--.-.. P 'P
r"
-.~ .~.----.-.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
A3
Eq. 41 1·25
APPENDIX A:: EQUIVALENCE BETWEEN -SI-METRIC, MKS-METRIC, AND U.S. CUSTOMARY UNIT
OF NON HOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
I~~~~~~~'~~~~~~~~~~;~-~'---"---~~-----'------
0. 17¢»,ff 0.53¢), ff 2¢ J. ff
Section
r-iY-" 13. 7..2 ~--·---I------~==--~------~~----~
Section
41 1.13 . 7.3
0..33¢)' ff 1.l0¢'\ ff 4¢J. ff
[~J7) ", > 0.043/ ,<1, (°J.~H') ". ~ OOO44/A. (~~H d, >O OOO3[,. d,
Section
41 2,,4. 2
Section
d~
/
A.fT
= [0.24\1', &. ) d
~- ),I1;-; . ~ / = (~m5\1',iL) d (O. 02¥,i, )
Jd~ = Itff d~
412 . 6 . 2 b
'--_ _--'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___--'-_ _---'---'---'---'_---1_ _ _ ..:......'---'-_ _ .--'
h It II
at" = 0.17/0(1: ~ 2.0 a, =0.53for ,:"~ 2.0 a" = 2,Ojor ': 2 2.0
----- - 1-- ----"=-- ---+- - - ----''=- .-.-- --
Section
o66A n .f f 212ANff 8A,,·ff
421.8.4.4 O.83A,,,.ff 2.65A, .. f f IOA,.ff
I-"",Sc- c-:-C- -
lio n
-i- - - -----r,;--- ------ - - - --':G"=.- ..-.----Ir--------'~f7----.-
0-83A''' vf, 2.65A,,,vf, IOA, .. ,f,
421.8.45
Secti on 2.8 28 400
I ,_ _-=~---j---.:.I'-,_ -=0--_ _--1 _ __ ---'1-'--,---;=--- ----1
421.8.6_5 (I) ___ _ '--'
~oo O_083A".A,17
f, ~
O_27An. Ayf, ANA,}, ~
421.8_6_5 (2)
I Eq_421-9
i Eq- 421-10 V. =A,,(O.I7J.fr: + M,) V. =A,,(0.53J.fr: + M,) V. = AJ2J.fr: + M,)
I
I
Section
421.9.9_2 °66A"ff 212A"ff 8ANff
I I Section
42Ll 1.6
029 JT'>.d 0_93 Jr>.,d 35 ff: b"d
! Eq.422·2
Eq_ 422·7
1 Eq.422·9
1h
National Siructural Code of Ihe Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
II-?
APPENDIX II
CONVERSION FACTORS
--- -_._. --------- - - ---
to _:=.:~_~==_____==~=:=::~. _____
,-- -. ----.~-- .
~-- . -
To convcI1 ~~.ti:ip'ly-b·';·-·::·_
)<>1H
._1_;_"___ .. _. _____ __ _________ _____ ___ __ iii::: --_.. _. _. -_."_._- ~~-.-..--~----.--.--
AREA .. _j
I mi le' (U.s, SIJlllle)
- kill 2.589998
I acre (U.s. survey) h. 0.4<>1 6gn
Ill' 4046.873 I
2
I yd2 !Il 0.8)6 1274
I (12 01' 0.092 903 '"
I in2 mill 645.16
.-~--··-I
1 acre ft
I yd'
- m
VOLUME MODULUS OF SEeTI!>"!._
m'
1233.489
0.764 5549
i
. -
AI'I'ENJ)JX II
CONVERSION FACTORS--{Conlinued)
, 1ibJ(i'l-'. - - -- ----- - - -- - - -- - --
4.8S2 428
I Oll}'tJ' 33.905 75
I o7Jfl l 305. 1517
-,;-;:""_ __ __ _ DENSITY (MASS PER UNIT VOLUME) ._ _ _-1
- ) Ibm J ·----------==='-'-=r.k:=g/7n'-"r==~-""===-------r-;176."0"
1 8",7
6 -- --
J Ib/yd' kg/Ill) 0,593 2764
I lon/yd J v rn ) \.1 86553
FORCE
I tonf (to n ·f{)rcc ) kN 8.896 44
I kip ( 1,000 Jhf) kN 4.448 22
_.~ lbf (pOU!~_:(~~~ _ _ ___.__ _ .. ___ _~ = ='7N;,..,==-==-= ,-=_-== 4.448 22 _ ._ _ _ _ .____._
M"O",M,,,"-"'E"N-"TIr'or.:':::",,
-;1·"lIc;,f.7ft-- -- - - ------- - -- - - _-"- ~O~R-"C"'E'-,T-'-O
"-..,
R"'Q"'U"'i,,'-_
, ·-_--_-_-_·-_-----.---.---
"-.- -'-1".3"5'5'81"8- - -- - ---1
Ilbf·in N'm 0.1129848
I tunf·ft kN·m 2 .7 11 6-1
I kip,f( kN.1l) 1.355 82
GILBERT B. MAGBUTAY, ... , .o.5EP GISMA Englnef)rlng SCrvlces ASSOCIATION OF CIVIL ENGINEERING ALUMNI OF NATIONAL UNIVERSIrY---
(ACEANU)
Address: 93 Kalikasan SlIoe!. Phona: (02) 682-7114; 517·1159 Phone: 749·6154; 743·7992
Karaogalan Villaoe Phase 2A Mobile: 0920·9226441; 0923·3917297 Addross: 551 M.F. Jhocson 81" Email: aceanuphil@yahoo.com;
Dela Paz, Pas~ Cily 1611
:~~:~~p:~::~~~:;::~~~
Email: oibma2003@yahoo.com Sampaloc, Manila
ALLAN DERBY A, ALFILER, ... .ASfP A.D.A ALFILER EnglnoorlnQ Consultant" "CHRrsroPRER·PT.T~YO, f. o\5~p
MIRIAM LUSICA-TAMAYO, _ _ TandeM Englnooring Consultancy
Addloss: l100nl 31'. 3JF Aliloo 8reln Phone: 416·3059; 419·0136
1191 Quirino HiQhway Mobile: 0920·9235232: 0922·8235232 Addross: 4/f. 15781riQa SlrM\' PhOM: 890·2022: 896·6930
No~alictlOs, Qualon City Email: adaallileroc@yahoo,corn Makati City Email: lafldcm.onQ@gmail.com
_._--_. .
~RYT:-WONG .....0.5€p H.T. WONG,
VIRGILIO B. COLUMNA,. '" ...., V.B. Columna Construction Corporation ANTHONY VLADIMIR Pimentel & A.$soc lIes Eng neer n8 Consu tants
C. PIMENTEL. F• .o.5EP
Phone: 721·7391: 722·6278
Address: 1133 Azucena St. Violela Address: GfF 430 Mafigaya III Bldg, Mobile: 0926·2600094
Village, Sla. CruZ. Sixlo Bulacan E. Rodriguez Avonue,Cubao
OuewnC'
Email: p::~::\_~~:::~~~~~oc.nol'Ph:
--
RUEL B. RAMIREZ and ASSOCIATES
CANETE STRUCTURAL INVESTIGATION, INC.
AIIx!r1 C, Cailctc, ... seE. f. ASE!' RUEL RAMIREZ, t.lSC~,"'_.0.5(r MEUSA A. RAMIREZ, .... .0.5EP
P'''''r..o: f ''o>W11 ~"""""\lr"1'''''
Address: Quozon Ave .. PhOM: (036) 26B 6076, (036)2589020 Address: 84 2nd Floor Phone: 666· 1087 Facsimile; 638·8351
Kalioo Aklan Mobile: 092131979134 General Espino St.. Zone IV, Mobile: 0939·5214051: 0939·4755915
Email: eplumaca@yahoo.com.ph Signal Village, T3{1uig City Email: eCJaragola@yahoo.com
JOSE T. TAYAMORA .
SMART MASONRY PHILIPPINES, INC.
Address: P3b B 12 L 13 Eastwood
Greenview. 6rgy. San Isidro,
[. Rodflgue~. R,!ai ALAN C. ABAN, f . .l.5EP DANILO RElUCIO
•
1108 Antel Global Corporate Ctr"
Julia Vargas Ave " Ortigas Clr. .
Pasig City
Tel. No,: 638-3414 to 24
Fax No,: 916-3740
Email: acs_manufacturing@yahoo .com
Website : www.acs-manufacturing.com
PROKRETE
Concrete Admixtures
MISSION:
We will continuously support and enhance the well being of our hard-
working workforce to meet the challenges offered by expanding market
and stronger competition.
•••,..•'.
II ~ l! Q, 1l- lYJ< 6, ~, 6ltft c:;
1258 Sandoval Ave" San Miguel, Pasig City, 1600
.
Tel. No.: 643-7802 Tel. Fax: 640-0698
DEECONCRETE INCORPOKATED
C. Raymundo Ave., Caniogan, Pasig City, 1600
Tel. No.: 641-7919 Tel. Fax: 642·8020
••..".,..
." If!1 4' q, 'Jr'i - .!If!;J<::1li. Z,Jtf, Ii; •
Purok Uno, Baranggay Makiling, Calamba, Laguna PR£CI$'4N
.ltH·,." '-JfC.
~ ~~
11.£ A
energy
DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION
Our able staff of geoscientists, drillers and engineers Is In demand for both
consultancy and actual wor1< In geothennal exploration and development.
Globally recognized for our knowledge and expertise, EDC is now at the frontline
wet steamfield technology and geothermal energy production.
EEl CORPORATION
Long years of contracting and collaborating with global contractors, particularly in the
Middle East and Asia Pacific countries, have enabled the Company to achieve wond-
caliber project management and construction expertise and competencies .
EEl possesses the broad capability to undertake construction contracts from design-and-
build, lump-sum basis to labor and construction supervision services across different
classes of projects.
It is the major provider of construction services to the power, oil, gas and petrochemical,
Infrastructure property and Industrial sectors.
~A Geopie,"
P(JAo.<>p'''' PIuJf('1'tl_ m.o
First Balfour
Excellence In Engineering & Cons1ructiOn 1969·
It has served as a contractor for a growIng number of public and prtvate buildings, various
water and transport infrastructuta works, as wa~ as power geooration and transmission
projects.
The company has the ability to design and construct various worns in coordination with its
pool of designers fi'om diverse disciplines.
2326 Pasong Tamo Ext. .
1231 Maka!i City, Philippines
Phone: +02 784 7100
Fax: +02 764 7101
E-Mail: customerservice ph@hiltLcom
Website : www.hilti.com .ph
Taguig Plant
Barangay. Ibayo Tipas
Taguig City
Tel +632409-7933
Parafiaque Plant
Km. 16 Severina Industrial Estate
Bicutan, Paranaque City
Tel: +632821-3306
I
Holcim
Concrete
Strength.Performance.Passion
www.holcim.com
Headquarter Regional Headquarter
OFFICINE MACCAFERRI S.p.A MACCAFERRI MALAYSIA SON BHO
Tel. No . +39051 643600 Tel. No. : +60 3 7957 8330
Fax No.: +39051 0512365 Fax No.: +60379579080
Email: commit@maccaferri .com Email: hq@maccaferri-asia.com
Website: maccaferri.com Website: maccaferri.com.my
Philippines
PHILIPPINE GABIONS, INC.
Tel. No.: +6328130211
Fax No.: +6328130211-1
Email: sales@philgabions.com
Website : philgabions.com
Philippine Gabions
EnvironmentalSolutions™
The Officine Maccaferri Group is a global player in the research, design and manufacture
of advance solutions in geosynthetics and soil erosion control. Started in 1879, the
experience gained makes Maccaferri a reliable problem-solving partner for soil
stabilization, slope reinforcement, erosion control , infrastructure development, and
construction works. Constant research and exclusive know-how enables Maccaferri to
guarantee maximum innovation and efficiency, and these concepts are transformed into
versatile solutions to meet customers' specific requirements.
. I
.Phil m eta I A
Philmetal
~~,~.!~~~~.~~.
The aest In Steel Decking Technology
STEELDEK SERIES: Steeldek I, Steeldek II , Steeldek IIA, Steeldek III (Designed to endure
anything. Used in SLEX SKYWAY & MRT.)
STEELFRAME SECTIONS; Studs & Tracks, l.C & BC Channel, Ceiling System
Unit 810, Pioneer Highlands Condominium
Pio~er cor. Madisons Sts, Mandaluyong City
1552 Metro Manila
Tel. No.: (632) 637-3367
Fax No.: (632) 636-5295
Email: email@pozzolanic.ph
Pozzolanic
Recovering Resources For Our Future
FLY ASH
Specify FLY ASH in your Concrete
.fHigher Strength
.f Sulfate Resistant Concrete
.flow Heat of Hydration in mass concrete
.fEw-friendly Green Concrete
REPUBLIC CHEMICAL
INDUSTRIES, INC.
CONSTRUCTION PROFESSIONALS SPECIFY PIONEER PRO
RONALDO S. ISON
Civil/Structural Engineer
•
Office Adress:
Unit 2204-0, 22/F West Tower Philippine Stock Exchange Centre
Exchange Road , Ortigas Center Pasig City 1605, Philippines
Tel. Nos. : +(632)631 3075/6378286
Fax No. : +(632)6378236
Email: systraphil@systraphil.com
Website : www.systraphil.com
SYSTRA PHILIPPINES, Inc. or SPI was created in 1995 as a Joint Venture undertaking
of JAVLON International Philippines, Inc. (JIPI) and SYSTRA SA in France.
SYSTRA S A is a limited liability company whose main shareholders are the Paris
Transport Authority (RATP) and the French National Railways (SNCF). RATP operates
the Paris Metro and is considered one of the biggest urban mass transport operators in
the world while SNCF operates the country-wide railways network ill France.
SYSTRA has over 50 years of experience in 140 countries and boasts of a solid
reputation of uncompromised professionalism and technical faculty. According to the
year 2001 survey carried out by the Engineering News Record, SYSTRA ranks first
among international design firms in the mass transit and rail category. SYSTRA operates
on major international markets whose activities cover all the skills and expertise in the
field of urban and rail transport - from high speed trains to buses, to intermodal
transport, conventional rail, suburban or inter-city rail services, metro, tramways,
automatic guided systems, road guided systems and people movers.
Offlce and Plant
2E San Andres Street, Canumay, Valenzuela City
Philippines
SatttUite OffIce
1108 C.M. Recto Ave Manila. Philippines
Tel. Nos, : (632) 292-7049; (632) 292-7050
(632) 292·7052
Fax No : (632) 292-6780
Email : unitanconstruction@gmail.com
Website : www.unltanconstruction.com
UNITAN CONSTRUCTION
a
DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION